JP6722844B2 - Game table - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a spinning drum game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

Conventionally, a game table that performs various displays has been proposed (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-200302 A

However, the conventional game console has room for improvement in display.
An object of the present invention is to provide a game table having a display feature.

The game table according to the present invention is provided with a first operation means provided at a position operable by the player, a display means, a sound output means, and a second operation provided at a position operable by the player. And a means for displaying, wherein the display means can display a plurality of types of display, and one display of the plurality of types of display is a first display and the plurality of types of display. One of the displays is a second display, the first display is an animation display related to the first operation means , and the second display is the first operation. It is one of the displays simulating the appearance of the means, the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started, and the sound output means is set. It is a means capable of outputting an effect sound according to the volume being performed, and is configured to be able to execute a plurality of types of effects, and one effect of the plurality of effects is the first effect, The first effect is one of the notice effects, the first effect is an effect including a first effect sound, in the state where the first display is displayed, The operation of the first operation means is not accepted, and the operation of the first operation means is accepted while the second display is displayed, and the first display is displayed. When the first operation means is operated in the state where the second display is displayed, the first operation is not executed, and the first operation means is operated in the state where the second display is displayed. And, the first effect can be executed according to the operation, and when the second operation means is operated in the state where the first display is displayed, the volume can be changed according to the operation. Yes, when the second operation means is operated in the state in which the second display is displayed, the volume can be changed according to the operation, and in the state in which the second display is displayed, When the second operation means is operated, the first effect can be executed according to the operation, the auto button mode can be set, and the first display is displayed. When the first operation means is operated, the auto button mode is turned off when it is on, and when the first operation means is operated while the second display is displayed, When the button mode is on, it is turned off, and when the second operation means is operated while the first display is displayed, the automatic button mode is turned on. If the second operation means is operated while the second display is being displayed, it will not turn off even if the auto button mode is on, and the game is characterized in that It is a stand.

According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a gaming table having a display characteristic.

It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). It is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the back side. It is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is an example of the display pattern of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display pattern of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display pattern of special figure 2, (c) is a decorative pattern An example is shown, (d) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display design of a general figure. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetching process. It is a figure which shows an example of the pre-reading result storage part for special figures 1 and special figures 2. It is a figure explaining the content of the hit/miss determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub-control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub-control part command reception interruption. It is a flow chart of processing, (c) is a flow chart of the 1st sub control part timer interruption processing, and (d) is a flow chart of the 1st sub control part image control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process and (c) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part timer interruption process. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of image control of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows the outline of various tables used for the production of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the production centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 17 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment of the present invention as seen from the front side (player side). It is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by 3rd Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part of a pachinko machine 100 by a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the display pattern in the pachinko machine 100 by 3rd Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows an example of the stop display pattern of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display pattern of special figure 2. And (c) is an example of a decorative design, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of a stop display design of a general design. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of the main control part main processing of the pachinko machine 100 by a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption processing of the pachinko machine 100 by a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the flow of special figure pre-reading processing in a pachinko machine 100 by a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which illustrates the state in which the pre-reading result was memorize|stored in the pre-reading result storage part of the pachinko machine 100 by 3rd Embodiment of this invention. (A) illustrates a state in which the pre-reading result is stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit, and (b) illustrates a state in which the pre-reading result storage unit is stored in the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit. And (c) illustrates the state of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 in the power support. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by 3rd Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) shows the 1st. The flow of sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing is shown, and (c) shows the flow of first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. It is a figure showing a production example in Example 1 of a pachinko machine 100 according to a third embodiment of the present invention in time series. It is a figure showing a production example in Example 2 of a pachinko machine 100 according to a third embodiment of the present invention in chronological order. It is a figure which shows the example of production in Example 3 of the pachinko machine 100 by 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure showing a production example in Example 4 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment of the present invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of production in Example 5 of the pachinko machine 100 by 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure showing a production example in Example 6 of a pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment of the present invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of production in Example 7 of the pachinko machine 100 by 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of production in Example 8 of the pachinko machine 100 by 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the example of production in the modification of the pachinko machine 100 by a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the example of production in the modification of the pachinko machine 100 by a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure (3) which shows the example of production in the modification of the pachinko machine 100 by a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a schematic front view of a slot machine as a gaming table according to a modified example of the third embodiment of the present invention as seen from the front. It is a figure which shows the game table by the modification of 3rd Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 2000, (b) is equipped with the memory|storage part which memorize|stores the electronic data which implement|achieves this invention. 1 shows a telephone 3000, (c) shows a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) has a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. A home video game console 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. FIG. 17 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention as seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 11 is an external view of a pachinko machine 100 according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by 4th Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part of a pachinko machine 100 by a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of a display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) is an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 2 And (c) is an example of a decorative design, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of a stop display design of a general design. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of the main control part main processing of the pachinko machine 100 by a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption processing of the pachinko machine 100 by a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special figure prefetching process of the pachinko machine 100 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which illustrates the state where the pre-reading result was memorize|stored in the pre-reading result storage part of the pachinko machine 100 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. (A) illustrates a state in which the pre-reading result is stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit, and (b) illustrates a state in which the pre-reading result storage unit is stored in the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit. And (c) illustrates the state of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 in the power support. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special drawing 1 related lottery process of the pachinko machine 100 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the success/failure determination table used with the pachinko machine 100 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the special figure determination table used with the pachinko machine 100 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure 1 fluctuation display time determination table which determines the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation stop display in the special figure 1 fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table which determines the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation stop display in the special figure 2 fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by 4th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) shows the 1st. The flow of the sub-control unit command reception interrupt process is shown, (c) shows the flow of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and FIG. 7D shows the flow of the first sub-control unit image control process. ing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by 4th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) shows the 2nd. The flow of the sub-control unit command reception interrupt process is shown, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is Example 1 by 4th Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the selection production|generation control process which is one of the production|generation control process (step S409) of the main process in the 1st sub control part 400. It is a figure which shows the time operation|movement of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 1 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production performed by the 1st production|generation means and the 2nd production|generation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 1 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production performed by the 1st production|generation means and the 2nd production|generation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 1 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation|movement of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 2 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production performed by the 1st production|generation means and the 2nd production|generation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 2 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production performed by the 1st production|generation means and the 2nd production|generation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 2 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation|movement of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 3 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production performed by the 1st production|generation means of a pachinko machine 100 and the 2nd production|generation means in Example 3 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production performed by the 1st production|generation means of a pachinko machine 100 and the 2nd production|generation means in Example 3 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation|movement of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 4 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production performed by the 1st production|generation means of a pachinko machine 100 and the 2nd production|generation means in Example 4 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production performed by the 1st production|generation means of a pachinko machine 100 and the 2nd production|generation means in Example 4 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation|movement of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 5 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production performed by the 1st production|generation means and the 2nd production|generation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 5 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production performed by the 1st production|generation means and the 2nd production|generation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 5 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production performed by the 1st production|generation means and the 2nd production|generation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 5 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production performed by the 1st production|generation means and the 2nd production|generation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 5 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 6 by 4th Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a figure which shows the operating means 700 of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 6 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation|movement of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 6 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production performed by the 1st-3rd production|generation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 6 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production performed by the 1st-3rd production|generation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 6 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production performed by the 1st-3rd production|generation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 6 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation|movement of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 7 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production performed by the 1st-3rd production means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 7 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production performed by the 1st-3rd production means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 7 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production performed by the 1st-3rd production means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 7 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production performed by the 1st-3rd production means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 7 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation|movement of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 8 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production performed by the 1st-4th production means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 8 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production performed by the 1st-4th production means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 8 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production performed by the 1st-4th production means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 8 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation|movement of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 9 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production performed by the 1st and 2nd production|generation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 9 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation|movement of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 10 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production performed by the production means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 10 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation|movement of the pachinko machine 100 in the modified example 1 of Example 4 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production performed by the 1st and 2nd production|generation means of the pachinko machine 100 in the modified example 1 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production performed by the 1st and 2nd production|generation means of the pachinko machine 100 in the modified example 1 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production performed by the 1st and 2nd production|generation means of the pachinko machine 100 in the modified example 1 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation|movement of the pachinko machine 100 in the modified example 2 of Example 4 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production performed by the 1st and 2nd production|generation means of the pachinko machine 100 in the modification 2 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the other example of the selection production performed by the 1st and 2nd production|generation means of the pachinko machine 100 in the modification 2 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the production performed by the production means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 11 by a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the production performed by the production means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 11 by a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure (the 3) which shows the production performed by the production means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 11 by a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure (the 4) which shows the production performed by the production means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 11 by a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure (the 5) which shows the production performed by the production means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 11 by a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the production performed by the production means of the pachinko machine 100 in the modification 1 of Example 11 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production performed by the production means of the pachinko machine 100 in the modification 2 of Example 11 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production performed by the production means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 12 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart showing the start timing and the end timing of the big hit game of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 12 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the production performed by the production means of the pachinko machine 100 in the modification of Example 12 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production performed by the production means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 13 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production performed by the production means of the pachinko machine 100 in the modification of Example 13 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production performed by the production means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 14 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production performed by the production means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 15 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production performed by the production means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 16 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production performed by the production means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 17 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production performed by the production means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 18 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production performed by the production means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 19 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic front view of a slot machine as a gaming table according to a modified example of the fourth embodiment of the present invention seen from the front. It is a figure which shows the game table by the modification of 4th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 2000, (b) is a portable device provided with the memory|storage part which memorize|stores the electronic data which implement|achieves this invention. 1 shows a telephone 3000, (c) shows a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) has a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. A home video game console 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention.

Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game table according to an embodiment of the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning drum game machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail.
[First Embodiment]

First, a gaming table according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 29.

It should be noted that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 1 to 45 are basically used only in the description of the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the present invention, and the same reference numerals are used in other drawings. Also, in the description of the first and second embodiments, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 1 to 45 are given priority. Further, the numbers of the respective examples of the first and second embodiments will be used only for the description of the first and second embodiments in principle, but the numbers of the first and second embodiments will be used. Each example and each example of other embodiments can be applied in combination with each other. Further, if there are drawings showing similar timings in a plurality of drawings, duplicated explanation may be omitted.
<Overall structure>

The overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 1. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game table that allows a player to obtain a profit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage tray door 108, and a launch. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side) thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store.

The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and is a vertically rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge 112. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A store clerk of the store (gaming store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened is provided.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, through a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and to be opened/closed, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inside Is a door member having an opening 116. The clerk of the game shop can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. Note that the lamp is an example of the light emitting means, and in the present embodiment, a device in which the light source is an LED is also called a lamp.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is opened by pressing an opening lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. In addition, you may provide the door sensor with a ball storage dish which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage dish opened. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a top plate 126 capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “ball”) and provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launcher 110. , A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation, and a player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game ball that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the player's operation. Ball firing handle 134 to be launched into the game area 124, an effect button 136 for changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the player's operation, and an effect button 136 built in the effect button 136. A chance button lamp 138 for illuminating, a ball lending operation button 140 for issuing a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store, and an instruction to return the player's balance to the card unit. A return operation button 142 and a ball lending display section (not shown) for displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit are provided. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is filled with a game ball. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided.

The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided. This launching device 110 sends a game ball to the game area 124 of the game board at every elapse of a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the ball firing handle 134 is continuously operated to be fired by the player. It is fired toward and corresponds to an example of a firing means. It should be noted that a right hit button capable of maximizing the firing intensity by pressing the ball firing handle 134 in the operated state may be provided.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. Note that, in FIG. 1, a specific configuration of the game area 124 is omitted, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.
FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side.

At the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, there is a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls and an opening that opens upward, and a ball tank 150 located below the ball tank 150 and at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side in rear view.

The payout device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and inside thereof, a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) are provided. The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and when mounted at a predetermined position, it is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have temporarily stayed are delivered one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that gives a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high signal or the low signal, when the game ball is not passing, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined amount. Based on the satisfaction of the condition, a game value (gaming ball) of an amount corresponding to the grant condition is granted (paid) to the player.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for accommodating a main board 156 which constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 4) for performing control processing of the whole game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-board 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control section 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing relating to the effect, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of gaming balls ( (See FIG. 4) and a payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 having an error canceling switch 168 that cancels an error by an operation of a game shop staff, a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing related to launching a game ball (FIG. 4). (Refer to FIG. 4) and a power supply control unit 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electric amusement machines, and a power switch that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game shop clerk. 178 and a power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 including a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on, and signals of the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. A CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving is provided.
FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the approximate center, and around it, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary The symbol reserve lamp 216, the first special symbol reserve lamp 218, the second special symbol reserve lamp 220, and the high-precision middle lamp 222 are arranged. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as a "universal symbol", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, which will be described in detail later.

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device (image display device) for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. This decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a and a middle symbol display region 208b. And the right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208j can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

The public figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative design displayed on the decorative design display device 208 is a design representing the design displayed on the first special design display device 212 or the second special design display device 214 in a form that enhances the effect. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of a predetermined first variable game (a detailed figure variable game which will be described later in detail) that is being held, and in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of variable figure games. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

The 1st special figure reservation lamp 218 and the 2nd special figure reservation lamp 220 are the lamps for showing the number of the predetermined 2nd fluctuation game which has been reserved (details fluctuation game which details are mentioned later), this execution In the form, it is possible to suspend the special figure variation game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight if the first special figure and the second special figure are combined). The term "hold" here means to hold the start of various determination processes (lottery process, etc.) based on start information described later.

The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notifying means) for making a notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability medium lamp 222 is configured to notify the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the big hit game, and thereafter not to notify the current symbol control state. There is. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is cut off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but as the symbol control state here, it may be any of the normal state, the time saving state (electric power support state), and the probability variation state, and the state with the special symbol probability variation and It may be one of the states in which there is no special figure probability change.

In this specification, the term "controlled state" is used to describe the state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100), but the term "controlled state" includes the concept of a so-called gaming state.

In addition, a general winning opening 226, a universal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged around the effect device 206. ing.

In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the entry into the general winning openings 226 (in the general winning openings 226). When the prize is won), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. 1 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player may be referred to as a "prize ball" and a ball to be lent to the player may be referred to as a "ball rental" as a consideration for a prize, and the "prize ball" and the "ball rental" are collectively referred to. And call it "ball (gaming ball)".

The universal figure starting port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not the ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200. One is installed in each. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls is used as a prize ball. Along with discharging to 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of itself does not change.

In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is provided below the universal figure starting port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. A pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided in the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232. It corresponds to a variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (den Chu). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning the prize in the second special figure starting port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232 with the pair of blade members 2321 closed, and the closed state of the pair of blade members 2321 is an opening/closing mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure variation game is won and the universal figure display device 210 hits and stops the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times to the second special figure starting port 232. The ball can be entered (the prize winning state is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is the state where the winning is easy. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball). It is a variable starting area in which the easiness of entering a game ball is variable and changes from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. With the pair of blade members 2321 open, of the game balls that have entered the game region 124, the second special region that is the variable starting region is more than the game ball that enters the first special figure starting port 230, which is the fixed starting region. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or less than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is arranged below the center of the game board 200. The variable winning port 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 that can open and close the variable winning opening with a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be called a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which the game ball can enter the variable winning opening more easily than the closed state to the other state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state, and the closed state in the variable winning port 234 of this embodiment is such that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state in the variable winning port 234 of the present embodiment is rotated toward the player side until the door member 2341 becomes substantially vertical to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning a prize port 234 maintains a closed state until the big hit game described later is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. Note that the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is slightly closed to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a state in which it is completely closed. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 3, as long as the winning of the gaming ball is achieved by passing or entering the gaming ball. When the special figure variation game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball that has entered the variable winning port 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning port or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

The balls contained in the upper plate 126 are supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148 pass the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper portion of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or a starting opening. Outgoing outlet 240 by winning in (first special figure starting port 230, second special figure starting port 232), without winning any winning port or starting port, or simply passing through universal figure starting port 228. To reach.
<Direction device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

On the front side of the effect device 206, the warp device 242 and the stage 244 are arranged in the area where the game ball can roll, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the area where the game ball cannot roll. .. Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter may be referred to as a door) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative pattern display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball ridden by a game nail 238 or the like, and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

In the present embodiment, the production movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and includes an upper arm motor (not shown) for rotating the upper arm portion 224a to a shoulder position and an elbow. A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm 224b is provided at the position. The production movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The shielding device 246 shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, their respective inner ends overlap. In a state in which the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the respective doors are slightly overlapped with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can each be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 to be visible through the holes in the lattice, or the shoji portions of the holes in the lattice are closed with a semitransparent lens body, The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji part of the lattice holes may be completely blocked (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 may not be visible at all. Good.

The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 1, the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect movable member 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 3 correspond to the effect means, and among them, the decorative pattern display device 208. Corresponds to an example of the decorative pattern display means.

Further, on the game board 200, a specification sticker 290 showing the specifications of the game table is attached at a position visible to the player.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly classified into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a main sub-control unit that responds to a command transmitted by the main control unit 300. In addition, a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. There is.

First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a time. A timer circuit 312 for measuring the number of times, the number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (counter circuit) used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit has two built-in counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each of the starting port, the winning port, and the variable winning port, and opening of the front frame door. A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame open sensor, and a lower pan full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to a random value generation circuit 318 and a basic circuit 302. 322, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the general symbol display device 210 Display control of a drive circuit 326 for performing display control and various status display units 328 (for example, the universal figure holding lamp 216, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, the high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.) A drive circuit 330 for performing the above, and a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member such as the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234. , Are connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere has won the special opening 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the Toku-zu 1 starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the counter value stored in the Toku-zu 1 starting port 230. Stored in the register for use. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the value of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 at that timing is also latched. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336, an external terminal board 349, an external hall computer (not shown), and the like. The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 included in.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. Is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. It is possible to communicate with the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 sends commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although it is configured to be able to transmit signals, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by bidirectional communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to send a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300, but is configured to be unable to send a signal such as a command from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Good.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and the number of times. It is equipped with. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and an amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, chance button lamp 138). A drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. Volume adjustment switch (not shown) for adjusting the volume to be output, operation unit sensors (not shown) that detect pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors are output to the basic circuit 402. A VDP (video) which reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 406 based on a signal from the sensor circuit 428 and the CPU 404 and generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436 to display the image on the decorative pattern display device 208. -Display processor) 434 is connected.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 has a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

In addition, the basic circuit 502, the drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, the effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and the detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. To the basic circuit 502, a sensor circuit 518 for outputting the game board lamp 532 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game underframe lamp drive for controlling the game underframe lamp 542. A circuit 540 and a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540 are connected.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the firing control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and based on the control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental. It is detected whether or not the payout of is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 paid out a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls indicating that the prize balls have been paid out, and paid out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls. Ball rental information indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 349. A frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout controller 600. The frame sensor 605 detects when the front frame door 106 is open and outputs an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The firing control unit 630 is a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 for instructing to permit or stop firing, and a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134 outputs the operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player. Control of a firing motor 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of a ball feeding device 634 that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110, based on a control signal that indicates a firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the alternating current power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 fires the main control unit 300 and the second sub control unit 500. Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.
<Type of design>

Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative pattern display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be performed will be described. The figure (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure.

The special game 1 variation game is started on condition that the first starting hole sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special drawing starting hole 230, and the ball has entered the second special drawing starting port 232. The special figure 2 variation game is started on condition that the second starting opening sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs "variation display of special figure 1" in which all seven segments are lit up and one central segment is lit up repeatedly. Also, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats "lighting up of 7 segments" and "variation display of special figure 2" which repeats lighting of one segment in the center. To do. These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of variable display of the symbols referred to in the present invention.

Then, when the variation time (before the variation time in the present invention) determined before the variation of the special figure 1 starts, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, When the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation start of 2 (this also corresponds to the fluctuation time in the present invention) elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of the "variable display of special figure 1" until the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 is stopped or displayed or the "variable display of special figure 2" is started and the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 is changed. Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display according to the present invention, hereinafter, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after starting the "variable display of the special figure 1 or 2". The series of display up to is called a symbol fluctuation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In the figure (a), 12 kinds of special drawings from "Special drawing A" to "Special drawing L" are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol fluctuation stop display, and the white parts in the drawing are turned off. The locations of the segments to be turned on are shown, and the black-painted portions show the locations of the segments to be lit.

"Special drawing A" is a 16 round (16R) special jackpot design (hereinafter also referred to as 16R special jackpot A or 16R probability variation A), "special drawing B" is a 16R special jackpot design (hereinafter, 16R special jackpot B or 16R) It is also a probability variation B), and the "special figure C" is a 16R jackpot design (hereinafter, also referred to as 16R jackpot or 16R normal). In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, whether or not to be a big hit in the special figure variation game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not to be a special jackpot is determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (or a probability variation state), and a state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state (or a non-probability variation state).

Further, both after the 16R special jackpot game and after the 16R jackpot game, the state shifts to a time saving state (electric support state). Although the details of time saving will be described later, the state of transitioning to a time saving state is called the high probability state (or electric support state) of the universal figure, and the state of not transiting to the time saving state is a low probability state of the universal figure (or non-electrical state). Support state). 16R special jackpot design "special map A" and "special map B" is a special map high probability general figure high probability state, 16R jackpot pattern "special map C" is a special figure low probability general pattern high It is a stochastic state. These "special drawing A" to "special drawing C" are symbols in which the profit amount given to the player is a relatively large profit amount.

"Special drawing D" is a 4R special jackpot design (hereinafter also referred to as 4R special jackpot A or 4R certainty variation A), "Special drawing E" is 4R special jackpot design (hereinafter also referred to as 4R special jackpot B or 4R certain variation B) ), and “Special drawing D” and “Special drawing E” are 4R, as compared with “Special drawing A” to “Special drawing C” which are 16R. "Special drawing F" is a 2R special jackpot design (hereinafter also referred to as 2R special jackpot A or 2R certainty variation A), "Special drawing G" is 2R special jackpot design (hereinafter also referred to as 2R special jackpot B or 2R certainty variation B) ), "Special drawing H" is a 2R jackpot design (hereinafter also referred to as 2R big hit or 2R normal), which is "Special drawing F" compared to 16R "Special drawing A" to "Special drawing C". ~ "Special drawing H" is different in that it is 2R. “Special map I” is a small hit symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as a small hit), and is a special symbol low probability general symbol low probability state. In addition, "special drawing J" is a falling design 1, "special drawing K" is a falling design 2, and "special drawing L" is a falling design 3, both of which are profit amounts to be given to the player. Is a design that has a relatively small amount of profit.

FIG. 96(b) shows an example of a decorative pattern. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The first special opening start sensor 230 or the second special drawing starting opening 232 has won a ball, that is, the first special opening starting sensor 230 has detected that the ball has entered, or On the condition that the second starting port sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special figure starting port 232, the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1”→“decoration 2”→“decoration 3”→... “decoration 9”→“decoration 10”→“decoration 1”→... in each symbol display region of the region 208c "Variable display of decorative pattern" is performed.

And, when notifying 16R probability variation A, 16R probability variation B, 16R normal, 4R probability variation A, 4R probability variation B, 2R probability variation A, 2R probability variation B, or 2R normal, the same decorative pattern in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c A combination of three symbols (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2") is stopped and displayed. Moreover, when notifying 16R probability variation A, 16R probability variation B, 4R probability variation A, 4R probability variation B, 2R probability variation A, or 2R probability variation B, three same odd decorative symbols are lined up in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A symbol combination (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is stopped and displayed. In addition, when notifying a small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed, and when notifying, the symbol combination shown in FIG. 8B in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The symbol combinations other than are stopped and displayed.

FIG. 96(c) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. In the stop display mode of the public figure of the present embodiment, there are a "general figure A" which is a winning symbol 1 (hereinafter also referred to as a "universal symbol 1") and a winning symbol 2 (hereinafter also referred to as a "universal symbol 2"). There are three types, "Public Drawing B" and "Public Drawing C", which is an outlier pattern. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor detects that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats the full lighting of the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment. Performs "variable display of general maps". Then, when notifying that the universal figure variation game is won, "Public figure A" or "Public figure B" is stopped and displayed, and when notifying that the universal figure fluctuation game is out, "Public figure C" is stopped and displayed. To do. Also in this figure (c), the white part in the figure shows the location of the segment where the light is turned off, and the black part shows the location of the segment where the light is turned on.
<Main control unit main processing>

Next, main processing main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4, a special figure random number value, a special figure round determination random number value, a special figure electric support determination random number value, and a special figure determination random number are stored. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter for generating these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, random number value of special figure winning, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, an area in the RAM 308 that stores the number of reserved special figures is sometimes referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage unit for special figures which is divided into a maximum number (four in this example) of areas in which the start of the hit determination (lottery) can be suspended. There is also a random number storage area for general drawings. As will be described later, the special figure starting information storage unit stores a plurality of types of starting information into one set, and the starting information is stored one by one in the winning order (holding order) for each area.

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, to which this activation signal is input, resets and starts by a reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main processing shown in FIG.

In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Allows the operation of and sets the initial value. In the present embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, it is determined whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines that the voltage value of the power supply that the power supply control unit 660 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in the present embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), the step is performed. It proceeds to S107. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for determining a period for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I/O 310 (for example, a test output port, Processing for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether the state before the power is cut off (before the power failure) is restored, and if the state before the power failure is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state) ), the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a clerk of a game shop operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 (indicating that the operation has been performed). If the RAM clear signal is ON (when RAM clear is required), the basic circuit 302 is initialized to step S113. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not required), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is determined. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register having an initial value of 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) or not (whether or not the result of the checksum is normal) is determined. Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to restore the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is the specific value. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset to the stack pointer (main setting). When the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and the register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command that indicates that the power-off state has been restored, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub control unit 400.

In step S115, after setting interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generating random number counters for respectively generating the initial values of the universal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number counter are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the universal figure winning random number value is 0 to 20, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, the value 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generating random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.
<Main controller timer interrupt processing>

Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The partial timer interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (mainly) so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (not to detect abnormal processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the period of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 including various sphere detection sensors are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence/absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 performs various operations. The data is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. Is read from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is performed. ), the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

Further, in step S205, the presence/absence information of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each of the above-mentioned two-preceding detection signal storage area, previous detection signal storage area, and present detection signal storage area is compared, It is determined whether or not the information on the presence/absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, each time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after the detection signal is absent, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, there is a current detection signal). (The information indicating that), the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the universal figure starting port 228. It is determined that there has been a passage. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 234 and 226 and the starting openings 230, 232 and 228 have been won. For example, when the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first starting opening sensor that detects the ball entering the first special drawing starting opening 230 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, the first special drawing It is determined that there is a winning in the starting opening 230, that is, a game medium that passes through a predetermined area is detected, and the following processing associated with winning in the first special figure starting opening 230 is performed. If the presence/absence information does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the first special figure starting port 230. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a single winning, it is not determined that there is a winning until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and the universal figure winning random number value and The random number counter for generating each special figure random number value is updated. For example, if the range of possible numbers for the universal figure winning random number is 0 to 100, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, the result obtained by obtaining a value from a random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value that varies in a numerical range of 0 to 100 and adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter that corresponds to the random number counter The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to judge that the random number counter for generating the universal random number I'll do it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for general-purpose winning random number value generation has completed one round, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has completed one cycle. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for

In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the symbol is displayed on the universal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for measuring the time to change/stop displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210. Various including a special figure display symbol update timer for timing the time of changing/stopping display, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a timer for measuring a predetermined ending effect period, etc. Update the timer.

In step S215, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this prize hole counter updating process, when there is a prize in the prize holes 234 and 226 and the starting holes 230 and 232, the value of the prize ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each prize hole or each starting hole is set. The value is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

In addition, in step S217, prize winning acceptance processing is performed. In the prize winning process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of starting information acquired here are stored as a set of starting information in an empty area of the starting information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 in accordance with the winning order (holding order).

In step S219, which is executed subsequent to step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set) and bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 are the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 are encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is indicated.

In step S221, general-university-state update processing is performed. The universal figure state updating process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the universal figure state update process in the middle of the universal figure variation display (the value of the universal figure display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the ordinary symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

Further, in the public figure state update processing at the timing when the public figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the public figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the mode is turned on and off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the lost symbol. ON/OFF control of 7-segment LED is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general-picture state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting/extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the general-purpose stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either one of the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) and the lost symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 5C). Display. After that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbols that are confirmed and displayed are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the universal figure variation game.

Further, if the result of the universal figure variation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on as described later. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While the normal operation is set in the setting area, the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And outputs information indicating the open period to the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

In addition, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening/closing the drive of 2321 and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area inactive state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the universal figure variation game is a loss, the universal figure loss flag is turned on as described later. When the universal figure loss flag is on, even in the universal figure state updating process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the universal figure state updating process when the ordinary figure is not in operation, nothing is performed and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

In step S223, a universal figure related lottery process is performed. In this universal figure-related lottery process, opening/closing control of the universal figure variation game and the second special figure starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the universal figure is not operating), and the pending universal figure variation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the universal figure variation game is won or unwinned by a random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the above random number storage area. The winning judgment is made, and in the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of no win, the hit flag is set to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is acquired as the universal figure timer random number value, and the universal figure display device 210 displays the universal figure display device 210 based on the obtained universal figure timer random number value. One time during which the figure is variably displayed is selected, and this variably displayed time is stored in the ordinary figure variation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the ordinary figure variation display time. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games is stored in the universal figure pending count storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

Subsequently, the special figure prefetching process (step S224) is executed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later. Next, the special figure state update processing for each of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure state update processing for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update processing) is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeats lighting and extinguishing drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 5R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a general figure probability variation flag. .. These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update processing that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has passed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is on, the special figure When the probability variation flag is ON and the universal figure probability variation flag is also ON, any one of special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured to have the special figure e when the figure probability variation flag is off, the general figure probability variation flag is on, and the special figure f when the loss flag is on. The 7 segment LED is controlled to be turned on and off, and the setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214, 15R special big hit pattern (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), 2R normal big hit pattern (special figure e), lost symbol ( Any one of the special symbols f) is confirmed and displayed.

Further, thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the special display 2 that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special FIG. 2 variable game. Further, if the hour/hour count stored in the hour/hour count storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the hour/hour count, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, the time saving flag is turned off. Further, even during the big hit game (during the special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

In addition, the predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the pattern for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that there is is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later, and then the process ends.

If the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is ON, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In addition to setting the special figure 2 operating in the area, in order to stand by for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds) First, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Also, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect production period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until the winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the variable winning port 234 is detected) The solenoid for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning port 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), the door member Is output in the open state and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in the closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning port 234, and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the closing period in. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts and closes the door member a predetermined number of times (15 rounds, 5 rounds or 2 rounds in the present exemplary embodiment) and is started at a timing when the door member is finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, (3 seconds), that is, a storage area of a production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to stand by for a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished. The information indicating the production standby period is set in. Also, if the universal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time saving frequency (for example, 100 times) is set in the time saving frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and is also provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the time saving flag. If the universal figure probability variation flag is set to OFF, neither the time saving frequency is set in the time saving frequency storage unit nor the time saving flag is turned ON.

The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit is shortened. When the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the high probability state of universal figure (universal figure probable variation). In the high probability state of the universal figure, the probability of being hit in the universal variation game is higher than in the low probability state of the universal figure. In addition, the general figure high probability state is shorter than the general figure low probability state in the variation time of the universal figure fluctuation game (general figure variation short). Furthermore, in the universal figure high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer than in the universal figure low probability state (electric chute extension). In addition, in the universal figure high probability state, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open than in the universal figure low probability state. The state in which any one of these figures is confirmed, the figure is shortened, and the electric chou spread is called electric sapo (starting entrance winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general figure low probability state is maintained. This is a high probability probability state during the big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 during the big hit game, many game balls in the special figure 2 starting hole 232 until the game balls enter There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be won during a big hit increases and the gambling ability increases, which is to solve this problem.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special area 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out, the out flag is turned on. When the deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Toku-zu 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state updating process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

Then, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, description thereof will be omitted. Omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure related lottery processing for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special map-related lottery process (special map 2 related lottery process) for the special map 2 is performed first (step S229), and then the special map-related lottery process for the special map 1 (special map 1-related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Special figure 2 related lottery processing, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not done, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is inactive and special figure 2 which is suspended Assuming that the number of variable games is 1 or more, the game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random number storage area. Special figure 1 related lottery processing, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not done, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is in the non-operating state, and special figure 1 which is suspended Assuming that the number of variable games is 1 or more, it is executed by using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area.

Regarding these special figure related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variation game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are met at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. If the number of pending special game 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable games related to the pending special game 1 variable games are not performed. The decorative symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the determination result of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and notifies the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232. The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, the special figure variation game having a high advantage (special figure 2 variation game in this example) is given priority over the special figure variation game having a low advantage (special figure 1 variation game in this example). Therefore, it may be easy to give a difference in the degree of advantage of the game state.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special piece) from the earliest (oldest stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. FIG. 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value) is acquired, and based on the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 starting information and the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, etc., the ROM 306 It is determined whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a non-win by using the hit/miss judgment table stored in (a hit/miss judgment). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information and the determined hit/miss judgment result, and the like. After the variable display, the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit/miss determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 hold number at the time of the hit determination, the acquired random number for determining the special figure variation time, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) of Toku-zu 2 is determined using various tables.

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 deletes the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and Figure 2 The special figure 2 reservation number in the reservation number storage area is decremented by one. At this time, the special figure 2 starting information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is performed based on the special figure 2 starting information stored in this temporary area. You may do it.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is similarly performed. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above explanation, the special figure 2 variable game with a high degree of advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game with a low degree of advantage, and the hold of special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of special figure 1. The special figure 2 priority variation is taken as an example, but the special figure 1 variation game with a low advantage is started with priority over the special advantage 2 variation game with a high advantage, and the special figure 1 is held pending It may be the special figure 1 priority variation that is preferentially digested over the hold. Also, without prioritizing either the special figure 2 variation game with a high advantage or the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, the special figure variation game related to the suspension of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started. It may be a change in the winning opening winning order that starts in order. In the starting mouth winning order variation, the maximum number of reservations is 8 regardless of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, so in each of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, it is compared with the priority fluctuation in which the maximum number of reservations is 4. It may be possible to raise the upper limit of the number of reservations.

Further, in the above description, the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special map are not performed depending on the state of one special map, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above special map state update By performing the processing and the special figure-related lottery process independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, a plurality of special figures may be simultaneously changed. In addition, when a plurality of special maps are simultaneously changed in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of the respective special maps, or the lottery results of the respective special maps are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to separately display each lottery result, or one display may be configured to display a lottery result of a plurality of special symbols. In addition, when fluctuations relating to a plurality of special maps are simultaneously performed, the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 subsequent to step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The scheduled output information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when on, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (in the present exemplary embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, finish effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Bits 0 to 10 are command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a pattern variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flag values, and the timer selected in the special figure related lottery process. In the case of a symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command, including information indicating numbers, etc., it includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, etc. In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit round number, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the special diagram 2 starting port 232, and winning at the variable winning ports 234 and 235. Including presence or absence. In the case of the prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in the prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and the stop symbols stored in the prefetch result storage unit are included in the command data. Including.

Further, in the above-described rotation start setting transmission processing, the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, out-of-match flags, special figure probability variation flags, special figure 1 related lottery processing and special figures stored in the RAM 308 are included in the command data. 2 Set information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-described winning award effect setting transmission process, the command data stores the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the award effect period, and the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating a value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission processing, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating a value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening release setting transmission processing, the command data, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variation games or special figure 2 variation games Set the information indicating such as. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the command data, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games Set the information indicating such as.

Further, in this step S233, general command special figure pending increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 for command data, advance notice information (advance notice information, false) (Advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the contents of effect control based on the information of the command data.

In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting processing, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read to monitor the presence/absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence/absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence of a lower plate full tank error. .. When the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control opening and closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning a prize port 234, and the general figure display device 210 and the special figure 1 display device 212 are controlled through the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display sections 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I/O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I/O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, setting of interrupt permission is performed, and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as restore data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of an input/output port is performed. After that, the state becomes HALT.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special map prefetch process (step S224) of the main controller timer interrupt process. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information increased in each of the special diagrams 1 and 2, and pre-determines the stop symbol before the winning/disapproval determining process, and the pre-determination result (special The prefetch result) is stored in the prefetch result storage unit (see FIGS. 9A to 9C) in the RAM 308.

Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage section for storing the pre-reading result of the special figure 1 and the number of special figure 1 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage section are specified. A special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing one prefetch number is provided. In this example, the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results. In the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 1 pre-reading result of the highest rank (first) is deleted and the remaining special figure 1 pre-reading result is deleted every time the number of special figure 1 pre-reading is decreased by one. Are processed so that the rank of the data of 1 is advanced by one. In addition, each time the number of special figure 1 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 1 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 1 prefetch results having the lowest rank (last).

Further, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section for storing the special figure 2 pre-reading result and the number of special figure 2 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section are stored. A special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the number is provided. The special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section can store up to four pre-reading results in this example. In the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 2 pre-reading result having the highest rank is erased every time the number of special figure 2 pre-reading decreases by 1, and the remaining order of the special figure 2 pre-reading result data is deleted. Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 2 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 2 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 2 preread results having the lowest rank.

In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increased (step S301). Whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing is stored, for example, in the special figure 2 reserved number stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area and in the special figure 2 prefetched number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of prefetches. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing when the special figure 2 reserved number is larger than the special figure 2 preread number, and the special figure 2 reserved number is the special figure 2 preread number. If they are the same, it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value) is specified before the win/fail judgment processing in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). Figure 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, by using the pre-reading special figure 2 start information and the hit determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of hit determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is changed to the special figure 2 related lottery. Preliminary determination is made prior to the hit/miss determination processing in the processing (step S229). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used when determining whether or not it is true or false.

In step S305 subsequent to step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained by the preliminary determination is stored in the first empty area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Then, it transfers to step S307.

In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of special figure 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined, for example, as in the case of the special figure 2, the special figure 1 reserved number stored in the special figure 1 reserved number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage. The comparison is performed with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is not increased, the special figure prefetching process is ended and the main control unit is executed. Return to timer interrupt processing.

In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not the non-electricity support is being performed. If it is determined that the non-electric power support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric power support is not being performed (the power support is being performed (universal figure high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not the non-electric power support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading advance notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (set of special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value) is specified before the winning/judgment processing in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Figure 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, by using the pre-reading special figure 1 start information, and the hit determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of hit determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is set to the special figure 1 related lottery. Preliminary determination is made prior to the hit/miss determination processing in the processing (step S231). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used when determining whether or not it is true or false.

In step S313 subsequent to step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetch result obtained by the preliminary determination is stored in the first free area of the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the process returns to the main controller timer interrupt process.

In step S315, the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 in the RAM 308 is replaced with the "undetermined" information indicating that the starting information is not pre-read without pre-reading the increased special figure 1 starting information. Store in the first empty area of the set. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the process returns to the main controller timer interrupt process.

In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) described above, only the pre-reading result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, or the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 may be stored. All pre-reading results in the set may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

In addition, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 8, pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of special figure 2 and pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of special figure 1 except during power support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased start information of the special maps 1 and 2. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300 may determine by lottery whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold, for example. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not in non-electric support), when the start information increases, the prefetch is always executed and the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch is performed. The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether to execute the lottery and the effect using the pre-reading result.

FIG. 9 exemplifies a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 9A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9A, the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in this embodiment) as the number of reserveable special figure 1 variable games. .. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 9A, the storage area "holding 1" stores "special drawing I" (off) as stop symbol information, and the storage area "holding 2" stores "special drawing I" as stop symbol information. "(Disappearance) is stored, "Special figure A" (15R probability variation big hit) is stored as storage symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special figure I" is stored as storage symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4". "(Disappearance) is stored.

FIG. 9B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 preread result information is stored in the special figure 2 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9B, the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in this embodiment) as the holdable number of special figure 2 variable games. .. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 9(b), the storage area "holding 1" stores "special drawing f" (off) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas "holding 2" to "holding 4" have stop symbols. No information is stored. In addition, in FIG. 9B, a state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

FIG. 9C shows an example of the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 1 during electronic support. As shown in FIG. 9C, in the storage area “holding 1”, “undetermined” information is stored instead of the stop symbol information. Neither stop symbol information nor "undetermined" information is stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4".

In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, the judgment result, the fluctuation timer number (variation time), the timer group described later, and the like are pre-determined and the pre-read result is stored in the pre-read result storage unit. It can be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as information.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10, for a win/fail judgment table used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. While explaining. Here, FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a high probability table for win/loss determination, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a low probability table for win/loss determination. In the case of the special figure high probability state in the case of performing the special decision of the special figure 1, the high probability table for decision judgment shown in FIG. The low probability table for success/failure determination shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referred win/loss determination table and the acquired random number value, the win/loss determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the Toku-zu 1 variable game, a big hit, a small hit, or an outfall is selected as the hit/miss determination result.

Similarly, in the case of performing the success/failure determination of the special figure 2, in the case of the special figure high probability state, the special figure low probability state is referred to by referring to the high probability table for success/failure determination shown in FIG. In this case, the low probability table for win/fail judgment shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referred win/loss determination table and the acquired random number value, the win/loss determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variation game, the big hit or the outlier is selected as the hit/miss judgment result.

FIG. 10C is a diagram showing an example of a small hit determination table. When the result of the jackpot judgment is out of order, the table for small hit determination shown in FIG. 10C is referred to, and based on the numerical range shown by the referred table for small hit determination and the acquired random number value. , Select the result of the special drawing small hit lottery. In the present embodiment, when the winning/disapproving determination result (lottery result) of the special drawing per special drawing is the special drawing 1, the small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the winning/disapproving judgment result, and the loss is with a probability of 63536/65536. However, if the winning/disapproval determination result (lottery result) of the special drawing per special drawing is the special drawing 2, the small hit is not selected.

Next, the stop is performed based on the result of winning/decision determination determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The special figure determination table used for determining symbols will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 11(a) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 11(b) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of the special figure 1, referring to the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 (a), based on the hit result of the special figure 1 and the numerical range of the random number, the special figure Select the stop pattern of 1. In the present embodiment, when the hit/miss result of Toku-zu 1 is a big hit, any one is selected from special maps A to G, and when the hit/no hit determination result of Toku-zu 1 is a small hit, Toku-zu H is selected, and when the hit/no-go result of Toku-zu 1 is missing, toku-zu I is selected.

Further, when determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2, referring to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 (b), based on the hit result of the special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value, The special design 2 stop design is selected by lottery. In the present embodiment, when the hit/fail result of Toku-zu 2 is a big hit, any one of the Toku-zu a to Toku-e is selected. f is selected. After the symbols to be stopped and displayed are determined, the symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device is set.

Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 12A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 of FIG. 12A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, the input/output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this processing is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the processing proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed. The effect control process will be described later.

In step S411 following step S409, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, when the press of the effect button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to effect data corresponding to the press of the effect button 136.

In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control processing, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to VDP434, this instruction is output to VDP434 (details will be described later).

In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the sound source IC 416, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S417 subsequent to step S415, the lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to various lamps 418, the instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the shielding device 246, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500, the control command is set to be output. Then, it returns to step S403.

FIG. 12B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects the strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 12C is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is set to a predetermined value when triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle. In step S601 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub-control unit main processing and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S603 following step S601, the control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub control unit main process, and the other effect random number updating process is performed. And so on.

FIG. 12D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S413 of the first sub-control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 436. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc., and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S703: Yes), the process proceeds to step S705, If not (step S703: No), it waits until the transfer end interrupt signal is input.

In step S705, parameter setting is performed based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, the CPU 404 forms the display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, so that the information of the image data forming the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates) etc. are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

In step S707 subsequent to step S705, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 404.

In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the image drawing end is input. If the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S709: Yes), The process proceeds to step S711, and if not (step S709: No), waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S711, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 13A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S801 of FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S801. In this initialization processing, the input/output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 508 is initialized.

In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805. .. In step S805, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S807 following step S805, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

In step S809 following step S807, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S807, the effect data corresponding to this command (effect data by the effect movable body 224 or effect data by the lamp) is read from the ROM 506, and the effect data is updated. If necessary, the effect data is updated.

In step S811 following step S809, lamp control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

In step S813, which follows step S811, the movable body control process is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Then, it returns to step S803.

FIG. 13B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

FIG. 13C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle. In step S1001 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 of the second sub-control unit main processing and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S1003, which is subsequent to step S1001, update processing of the effect random number value and the like are performed.

Hereinafter, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 45.
<Image display device>

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. First, with reference to FIG. The configuration will be described.

The image display device 208' of the present embodiment includes the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 3 (or includes a device corresponding to the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 3), and includes a plurality (for example, three). Image display devices (first image display device 2081, second image display device 2082, and third image display device 2083).

In this example, the image display device 208 is composed of a first image display device 2081 which is the main, and a second image display device 2082 and a third image display device 2083 which are the sub.

As an example, the first image display device 2081 is an image display device configured by a liquid crystal display device or the like, and its display area has two other image display devices (a second image display device 2082 and a third image display device 2083). It is an image display device which is larger than that of FIG. In this specification, the first image display device 2081 may be referred to as a main display device or a main liquid crystal. Further, in this example, the first image display device 2081 has the same (or equivalent) configuration as the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG.

The second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 are both image display devices configured by a liquid crystal display device or the like, and in this example, the sizes of both display areas are equal. Further, in this example, the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device are arranged on both the left and right sides of the first image display device 2081 with the first image display device 2081 interposed therebetween. The image display device arranged on the left side of the first image display device 2081 as viewed from the player is the second image display device 2082, and the image display device arranged on the right side is the third image display device 2083. In this specification, the second image display device 2082 may be referred to as a left sub display device or a left sub liquid crystal, and the third image display device 2083 may be referred to as a right sub display device or a right sub liquid crystal.

The second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 are arranged in the left-right direction in this example so that the front of the first image display device 2081 is close to or away from each other along the display surface of the first image display device 2081. It is configured to be movable (sliding movement) to.

As an example, the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 have a length in the width direction shorter than about half the length of the first image display device 2081 and a height slightly shorter. Further, in the second image display device 2082, at the initial position shown in FIG. 9A, at least the right edge portion overlaps with the front surface side of the left edge portion of the first image display device 2081. At the initial position of 2083, at least the left edge part of the 2083 overlaps the front side of the right edge part of the first image display device 2081.

Then, when the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 move from the initial position so as to be close to each other, the first image display device 2081 (display in) becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize (visual recognition). If the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 move in the direction of the initial position so as to be separated from each other, the first image display device 2081 (displayed by) is the player. Will be easier to see.

Note that the first image display device 2081 may be configured to move, and the second image display device 2082 and/or the third image display device 2083 may not move. Further, the size of the display area of the first image display device 2081 may be smaller than the display area of the second image display device 2082 and/or the third image display device 2083, or the display areas of these three are the same size. May be Further, the number of image display devices 208′ may be two, or may be four or more.

Further, the number of image display devices 208′ may be one. In that case, all of the displays shown in the following examples (production examples) are displayed on one image display device 208′.
<Image display device/first image display device>

The first image display device 2081 has, in its display area, a first symbol display area 208X (symbol display areas 208a to 208c) and an effect display area 208d for performing variable display of decorative symbols (first variable display). The effect display area 208d includes an icon display area 800 and an explanation display area TT1.

In the present specification, the decorative design displayed in the first design display region 208X (design display regions 208a to 208c) is referred to as "first decorative design".

In FIG. 14A, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a combination of decorative symbols (first decorative symbol) of "decoration 3-decoration 1-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed.

Further, the icon display area 800 is composed of, for example, five horizontally arranged areas, and can display one variable icon and four holding icons, which is the maximum holding number of the variation game of Toku-zu 1 (or Toku-zu 2). is there. In this example, the variable icon display area is provided at the right end of the icon display area 800 (near the center of the display area, below the middle symbol display area 208b), and the special icon is sequentially drawn from a position close to the variable icon display area. A display area of a hold icon corresponding to the first to fourth hold orders of the variable game is provided.

In FIG. 14A, a variable icon h0 is displayed at the right end of the icon display area 800, and a suggestion display (a pedestal in this example) indicating that four hold icons can be displayed is displayed on the left side of the variable icon h0. Corresponding to the fact that three variable displays in FIG. 1 are suspended, suspension icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed on the three pedestals, respectively. In this case, the hold icon h11 is a hold icon corresponding to the earliest (oldest stored) hold icon, and corresponds to the hold icon h12 and the third hold corresponding to the second hold in order toward the left. The hold icon h13 is displayed.

The change icon h0 is a hold icon corresponding to the change, and is, for example, an icon that changes from these hold icons when the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 shown in FIG. 14A are exhausted. Further, the display mode of the icon displayed as the hold icon and the display mode (pattern, size, etc.) of the icon displayed as the variable icon may be the same display mode or different display modes. ..

On the right side of the icon display area 800, an explanation display area (tutorial display section) TT1 is provided. In the explanation display area TT1, various kinds of information regarding games and effects are displayed (tutorial display), and the contents thereof are updated at an appropriate timing. In the explanation display area TT1 shown in FIG. 14A, "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed, and the explanation about the lord's character is made.
<Image display device/second image display device>

In the second image display device 2082, a meter (button image) imitating the image of the chance button 137 is displayed at the bottom of the display area. For example, when the chance button 137 is operated (pressed), the portion of the button image filled with, for example, a color (other than white) increases, and when all of the button image is filled, the player is A production (eg, a one-shot notification production) that is highly expected by the user is executed.

Alternatively, if a certain effect increases the number of filled areas and all the areas are filled, it becomes possible to execute the button effect once, and if the button is operated in that state, is it a big hit with the fluctuation? The player is configured to perform an effect that is highly expected by the player, such as notifying whether or not.

Further, below the meter, a stage name display area is provided for displaying a stage name and a reach name currently being performed. In the stage name display area of FIG. 14A, “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is informed that the current stage is Castle Town. Further, above the display area of the second image display device 2082, a second symbol display area 208Y (see (i) in the figure) for performing variable display of decorative symbols (second variable display) is provided. ing.

As enlargedly shown in FIGS. 15(o) to 15(q), the second symbol display area 208Y has three symbol display areas 208k to 208g (left symbol display area 208k, middle symbol display) for displaying decorative symbols. It has an area 208l and a right symbol display area 208g). In the present specification, the decorative pattern displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y may be referred to as "second decorative pattern". In addition, when it is not necessary to distinguish it from the first decorative design, such as is clear from the meaning of the sentence, both the first decorative design and the second decorative design may be described as “decorative design”.

In this example, the case where the second symbol display area 208Y is provided in the second image display device 2082 will be described as an example, but the second symbol display area 208Y may be provided in the first image display device 2081. It may be provided in the third image display device 2083.

The variable display (second variable display) of the decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) executed in the second symbol display region 208Y is the variable display (first variable symbol) executed in the first symbol display region 208X. Variable display)). That is, the second variable display is visible (not displayed) to the player as shown in FIG. 14A and visible (displayed to the player as shown in FIG. 14J). ) May be displayed.

The second symbol display area 208Y (each of the left symbol display area 208k, the middle symbol display area 208l, and the right symbol display area 208g) is a first symbol display area 208X (the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, the right). The display area is smaller than each of the symbol display areas 208c), and the display size of the second decorative symbol is smaller than that of the first decorative symbol. The second variable display is executed in association with the first variable display executed by the first image display device 2081 and has a smaller display size than the first variable display. The second decorative pattern may be referred to as a "mini decorative pattern".

In the production example of the present embodiment shown in FIGS. 14 to 29, the second decorative design has the same (same kind) design as the first decorative design as shown in FIGS. 15(o) to 15(q). A design (decorated design) is displayed. Further, as will be described later in detail, at a certain timing, the second decorative symbol may display the same symbol combination as the first decorative symbol, or may display a different symbol combination. Further, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be visible to the player at the same time, or only one of them may be visible to the player (easy visual confirmation).
<Image display device/third image display device>

The third image display device 2083 shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. Further, in the upper part of the display area of the third image display device 2083, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. The lord's character may or may not always be displayed.
<Other means of performance>

As an effect device other than the image display device 208', for example, a speaker 120, a fourth symbol display device 284, operating means 136, 137, accessory parts 224A, 224B, 224C are provided.

The fourth symbol display device 284 is a device for notifying whether or not the symbols are changing (or the symbols are stopped), and for example, a symbol on the left side is indicated by a quadrangle in the symbol changing notification device of the special figure 1. The circular figure on the right side is the symbol fluctuation notification device of FIG. In the following figures, the case of being displayed in white indicates the state in which the design of Special Figure 1 (square) or Special Figure 2 (round) is changing, and the case of being displayed in gray is The special stop 1 (quadrangle) or special stop 2 (round) shows the state of the stop, and when it is displayed in black, the stop stop of special stop 1 (square) or special stop 2 (round) Shows the state of. In addition, although the fourth symbol display device 284 is shown as having a configuration separate from the image display device 208′ in this example, these may be images displayed on the image display device 208′. Good.

The operation means 136 and 137 are operation buttons (for example, chance button 136 and chance button 137), respectively.

In addition, each of the role products 224A, 224B, and 224C is one type of the effect movable body 224, and for example, the family crest role product 224A disposed below the first image display device 2081 and above the first image display device 2081. Yatsushiro 224B and Shogun 224C, which are located at. The family crest accessory 224A is configured to be able to move in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. In addition, the family crest monument 224A has a light emitting means such as a full-color LED built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the effect contents. Further, the Yatsushiro 224B and the general 224C are also configured to be able to move in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. Further, both the Yatsushiro 224B and the shogun 224C have a light emitting means such as a full-color LED built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the contents of the effect.

Although the speaker 120 and the fourth symbol display device 284 are described above the image display device 208′ for convenience of description, they do not specify the positional relationship with the image display device 208′. The same applies to the positional relationship between the chance buttons 136 and 137 and the image display device 208'. The family crests 224A, the Yatsushiro 224B, and the shogun 224C merely show an example of the operation, and the positional relationship with the image display device 208' is not limited to those described here.

In addition, the speaker 120 is a diagram for showing a sound output in each of the following embodiments, and although a sound output example (for example, a character “Don” or the like) may be described together with the illustration of the speaker 120, the sound output The presence/absence of the example does not indicate the presence/absence of the voice output, and the voice may be output even if the voice output example is not described. ..

Here, each of the hold icon and the variable icon can be changed to white display, blue display, green display, red display, gold display, iridescent display, or the like. Also, chance buttons 136, 137, family crest actor 224A, Yatsushiro actor 224B, and general actor 244C can be changed to white lighting, blue lighting, green lighting, red lighting, gold lighting, rainbow lighting, etc. by built-in LEDs. Is configured.

For example, in FIG. 14A, the variable icon h0 is displayed in white, the hold icon h11 is displayed in blue, and the hold icons h12 and h13 are each displayed in white. In addition, the hold icon and the variable icon are displayed in white as a default display, and the hold icon h11 is displayed in blue to give advance notice. In addition, the display mode (display color, shape, etc.) of the variable icon and each hold icon is classified according to the jackpot expectation degree, and the classification (rank of the expectation degree) is notified (thus, the game. It is also a production (which informs the production that the person should wait) (this will be described later). In addition, the jackpot expectation degree is an expectation degree that the win/fail judgment of the variation game (result of final symbol variation display) is a jackpot.

Further, the LEDs incorporated in the chance button 136 and the chance button 137 are respectively lit in white, the LEDs incorporated in the family crest actor 224A are illuminated in blue, and the LEDs incorporated in the Yatsushiro actor 224B and the general actor 244C are illuminated in white. There is. As an example, the family crest 224A emits light in the same color (blue in this example) in conjunction with the look-ahead notice of the hold icon h11, and the Yatsushiro 224B and the general 244C have a built-in LED that lights in rainbow (rainbow). The light is emitted) to notify the hit.

In addition, in FIGS. 14 to 45, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 shown in FIG. Although the description of the structure of the universal figure holding lamp 216 and the like is omitted, these structures are also provided as in FIG.
<Direction using the second decorative pattern>

With reference to FIG. 14 to FIG. 29, as one of the embodiments of the present invention, a part of the configuration is appropriately extracted for an effect example using the second decorative pattern executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Description will also be given with reference to an enlarged view.
<Production example A>

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of an effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

First, the timing shown in FIG. 14A shows a state in which the variation of the first decorative symbol is stopped (variable stop state), and in the first image display device 2081, the "decoration 3" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of decorative patterns (first decorative pattern) of "decoration 1-decoration 4" (defect pattern combination) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, a white variation icon h0 is displayed at the right end of the icon display area 800, and four suggestion displays (in this example, the pedestal) are displayed on the left side of the variation icon h0. h12 and h13 are displayed to inform that the suspension of special figure 1 is 3. Further, while the hold icons h12 and h13 are displayed in white (default), the hold icon h11 is displayed in blue, and the prefetching notice is executed. In the explanation display area TT1, a tutorial display "Panda is master of lord" is executed.

A meter (button image) is displayed on the second image display device 2082, but at this timing, all the meters are filled with white, and the fact that the meter is 0 is notified. In the stage name display area, "Castle Town" is displayed, which informs that the current stage is the castle town.

The third image display device 2083 shows that the lord's character is on the stage. At the upper part of the display area of the third image display device 2083, the hold of the special figure 1 is “3”, The second reservation number display of special maps 1 and 2 showing that the special map 2 is "0" is displayed.

In the fourth symbol display device 284, both the special figure 1 (square) and the special figure 2 (circular) are displayed in gray, which indicates that they are in a disengaged stop state. The chance buttons 136 and 137 have their built-in LEDs lit in white. The family coat emblem 224 has the built-in LED emitting blue light in conjunction with the pre-reading notice of the hold icon h11, and stands by (stops) at the initial position (below the first image display device 2081 in this example). The Yashiro Yakuhin 224B and the Shogun Yakuhin 244C stand by (stop) at the initial position (in this example, above the first image display device 2081) because the built-in LED emits white light. Audio output from the speaker 120 is not performed at this timing.

In the following description, mainly the effects that have changed from the previous effects over time will be mainly described.

As for the timing shown in FIG. 14(b), one hold (holding corresponding to the hold icon h11 in FIG. 14(a)) has been exhausted, and symbol fluctuation in the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) has started. In the fourth symbol display device 284, the special figure 1 (quadrangle) is displayed in white, and the special figure 2 (circular shape) is displayed in gray to indicate that the variable game of special figure 1 is being executed. ..

At this timing, in the first symbol display region 208X (symbol display regions 208a to 208c) of the first image display device 2081, the variable display of the first decorative symbol (first variable display) is performed. In the present embodiment, the variable display of the decorative pattern (the first variable display and the second variable display) is represented by a downward white arrow (the same applies to other examples below). Further, the white arrow shown in FIG. 3B is a long and narrow arrow, and in this case, it indicates that the decorative pattern is changing at high speed in a mode having transparency. On the other hand, when the outline arrow is displayed as a short (thick) arrow (for example, FIG. 7E), it indicates that the decorative design is changing at a low speed. In the case of slow fluctuation, the speed may be such that the decorative pattern can be recognized.

Further, as the hold is exhausted, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed in the icon display area 800 by moving animations, respectively, and the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the right end of the icon display area 800. Then, it is displayed as a blue variable icon h0, and a look-ahead notice is given. Further, the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h12 becomes the hold icon h11 adjacent to the left of the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h13 becomes the hold icon h12, which is the left side of the change icon h0. The white hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed on the two pedestals, respectively, to notify that the hold of special figure 1 is 2.

In the upper part of the display area of the third image display device 2083, the special reservation 1 is "2" and the special drawing 2 is "0". The number is displayed.

In the explanation display section TT1, the characters "Panda is the master of the lord" are still displayed. In this way, the explanation display on the explanation display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variable displays.

At the timing shown in FIG. 14C, in the left symbol display area 208a of the first image display device 2081, the decorative symbol (here, “decoration 6”) swings and fluctuates (temporarily stops). The timing shown is a state in which the decorative symbol (here, “decoration 6”) is shaken and fluctuated (temporarily stopped) in the right symbol display area 208c of the first image display device 2081, and it is pretended to be a reach (temple). .. The timing shown in (e) of the figure is a state in which the decorative pattern (“decoration 6”) that has undergone swing fluctuation (temporary stop) in the right symbol display area 208c has started to change again. The fluctuation of the "decoration 6" in the right symbol display area 208c at this timing is a low speed fluctuation as indicated by a white short (thick) arrow. In addition, the state where the low speed fluctuation starts after the fluctuation of the decorative design (temporary stop) may be referred to as "the decorative design slips" or "the decorative design shifts".

In the present embodiment, when the decorative design (first decorative design) is misaligned, continuous production (for example, pseudo continuous production) may be started. In this example, a case where the decorative pattern (first decorative pattern) is displaced as one of the start conditions of the pseudo-relational effect will be described, but another start condition may be used as the start condition of the pseudo-reproduction, and the decoration The design (first decorative design) may always be displaced, may or may not be displaced, or may not be displaced, and the same applies to the pseudo continuous production described below. Is.

The timing shown in FIG. 6F is a state in which the decorative symbol (here, “decoration 7”) is swinging (temporarily stopped) in the right symbol display area 208c. In this way, when a certain decorative pattern (here, "decoration 6") is displaced, another (next) decorative pattern (here, "decoration 7") is swinging (temporarily stopped) The stopped decorative pattern (“decoration 7”) may be referred to as “misalignment”.

In the present embodiment, the occurrence of the misalignment of the decorative design (first decorative design) is one of the notifications that the pseudo continuous effect may be started. It should be noted that the notification that the pseudo continuous effect may be started may be another notification, or may not be the occurrence of the misalignment.

The timing shown in (g) of the figure is a state in which the first animation has started in the middle symbol display area 208b that was undergoing high-speed fluctuation. In this example, the first animation is an animation with a special symbol (first symbol). Here, the special symbol is a symbol of a different type from the decorative symbol representing a number, and is, for example, one of the symbols relating to the execution of the continuous effect (first effect). The special design is also one of the decorative designs (the first decorative design and the second decorative design of this embodiment). Specifically, the special symbol is a symbol for which continuous production (for example, pseudo continuous production, continuous notice production, etc.) is started when the symbol is stopped and displayed.

As an example, the first animation of the present embodiment is an animation (special symbol stop-inspiring animation) that fuels whether or not the special symbol is stopped and displayed in at least one of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In the present embodiment, as an example, the first animation will be described by taking as an example a case where the first symbol is an animation (middle symbol stirring animation) that fuels whether or not the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Here, the stop display of the special symbol may be a shake fluctuation stop display (temporary stop display), which is the same in the following embodiments.

When the middle symbol agitation animation ends, the special symbol may be stopped and displayed, and when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, continuous production may be executed.

Here, the special symbol is the symbol of the character (lord) as shown in FIG. 7G, and when the special symbol (the symbol of the character (lord)) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, for example, The pseudo continuous effect is executed as the continuous effect. In this way, the special symbol relating to the start of execution of the pseudo-relational effect may be referred to as a pseudo-relational pattern.

The continuous effect (pseudo continuous effect) is started when a certain symbol (three symbols) is stopped and displayed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The configuration may be adopted, and in that case, the fanned animation (first animation) may be an animation fanned whether or not the last symbol of the three symbols is stopped and displayed. Further, the stop display in this case refers to a stop display other than the fixed display, such as including swing fluctuation in at least one of the three symbols.

That is, the timing shown in (g) of the figure, the first animation (middle symbol energization) that fuels whether or not the pseudo-matter symbol related to the start of the pseudo-middle effect (being the start condition) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. (Animation) is being performed.

At the timing shown in FIG. 6(h), the pseudo symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and at the timing shown in FIG. 11(i), the horizontal width of the pseudo symbol is gradually enlarged and displayed. ing. That is, the pseudo-relational pattern in FIG. 7(h) has the same display size as the decorative patterns (“decoration 6” and “decoration 7”) in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, but the same figure. The width of the pseudo continuous pattern of (i) is enlarged. As a result, the right end portion of the "decoration 6" in the left symbol display area 208a and the left end portion of the "decoration 7" in the right symbol display area 208a start to overlap with the left end portion and the right end portion of the pseudo continuous symbol, respectively.

Further, at the timing shown in (i) of the figure, in the upper part of the second image display device 2082, the second symbol display area 208Y for displaying the second decorative symbol starts its display. At this timing, only the second symbol display area 208Y (the frame portion indicated by a white square frame in the figure) starts its display, and the second decorative symbol is hidden.

The timing shown in (j) of the figure shows a state in which the width of the pseudo continuous symbol is further enlarged and displayed. At this timing, the "decoration 6" in the left symbol display area 208a and the "decoration 7" in the right symbol display area 208a are completely overlapped by the pseudo continuous symbol, and are not visually recognizable to the player (left symbol display Both of the decorative symbols in the area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are difficult for the player to visually recognize as compared with the pseudo continuous symbol).

Further, at this timing (at least a part of the state in which the first animation display (middle symbol fanning animation) is displayed), the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (shakes) in the second symbol display area 208Y. Fluctuation, temporary stop display). The second decorative symbol at this timing is stopped and displayed in the symbol combination shown in FIG. 15(o), for example. That is, the decorative pattern (here, "decoration 6") swings (temporarily stops) is displayed in the left symbol display area 208k, and the decorative pattern (here, "decoration 7") swings (temporarily stops) in the right symbol display area 208g. ) Is displayed, and a pseudo continuous symbol (here, the same character (symbol) of the figure (h)) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208l.

It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 7I, without displaying the “frame only” of the second symbol display area 208Y as the display planned area of the second decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. The second decorative symbol may start to be displayed in the symbol display region 208Y (the second symbol display region 208Y can be recognized by the player by the start of the display of the second decorative symbol).

At this timing, the first decorative design is invisible to the player due to the enlarged display of the pseudo continuous design (for example, it is more difficult to see than the pseudo continuous design or the displayed second decorative design), and the first animation After the end of the first decorative symbol (the state of variation stop of the first decorative symbol) is undetermined, the second decorative symbol (the middle symbol display region 208l of the second symbol display region 208Y) stops the pseudo continuous symbol The presence or absence of the display can be recognized by the player. In other words, for advanced players, by paying attention to the second decorative symbol, at this timing, the state of variation stop of the first decorative symbol, that is, the state of the stop display of the special symbol (pseudo continuous symbol) and the continuous effect thereof Whether or not the execution of (pseudo continuous production) has started can be recognized. In this way, the state of fluctuation stop of the first decorative symbol is undetermined, but the presence or absence of the stop display of the special symbol (presence/absence of continuous effect) can be recognized by the player by the second decorative symbol (first condition). In the present specification, the state in which the state is notified instead of the first decorative symbol which is not visible (difficult to see) to the player in the symbol display area 208X is referred to as "previous barre".

The timing shown in FIG. 9(k) shows a state in which the width of the pseudo continuous symbol is further enlarged and displayed. At this timing, the "decoration 6" in the left symbol display area 208a and the "decoration 7" in the right symbol display area 208a are completely overlapped by the pseudo continuous symbol, and are not visually recognizable to the player (left symbol display Both of the decorative symbols in the area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are difficult for the player to visually recognize as compared with the pseudo continuous symbol). Further, the left and right end portions of the enlarged pseudo continuous symbol are displayed in part of the display areas of the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083, respectively. That is, one pseudo continuous symbol is displayed across (spans) a plurality of image display devices 208′ (first image display device 2081, second image display device 2082 and third image display device 2093).

More specifically, in the second image display device 2082, the enlarged left end portion of the pseudo continuous symbol overlaps with the second decorative symbol, the meter and the stage name display area, for example, the left end portion of the pseudo continuous symbol is at least the first. The two decorative symbols are overlapped (in this example, the left end portion of the pseudo continuous symbol is overlapped with the second decorative symbol, the meter and the stage name display area). It should be noted that the second decorative symbol continues to display the symbol combination of FIG. 15(o).

In the third image display device 2083, the enlarged right end portion of the pseudo-relational pattern is overlapped with a part of the display on the third image display device 2083 (in this example, the lord's character on the stage, And, it overlaps with the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2).

Further, at this timing, a part of the movable body (in this example, the family crest part 244A) starts to rise and overlaps with a part of the first image display device 2081 (overlaps with the first image display device 2081). .. As a result, a part of the display displayed on the first image display device 2081 overlaps with the family crest monument 224A and is invisible to the player (or the second decorative pattern or movable body (family crest monument 224A, etc.). ) Is more difficult to see). Specifically, (a part of) the pseudo-relational pattern, a part of the display of the icon display area 800 (in this example, (all of) the variable icon h0, a hold icon h11 and a part of its pedestal), and an explanation display. A part of the tutorial display in the area TT1 is invisible to the player (or more difficult to view than the second decorative pattern or the movable body (such as the family crest part 224A)).

At the timing shown in FIG. 1(l), the enlarged display of the pseudo-relational pattern ends (enlargement is stopped at the same size as the pseudo-relational pattern shown in FIG. 6(k)), and the position of the raised family crest actor 244A is increased. The figure shows a state in which the speaker 120 rotates and the sound effect “don” is output from the speaker 120.

At this timing, the symbol combination of the first decorative symbols is invisible (difficult to visually recognize) to the player due to the enlarged display of the pseudo-repeated symbols, but the first decorative symbol is determined to be in a fluctuation stopped state. In other words, at this timing, the player can recognize the stop display state of the special symbol (pseudo continuous symbol) and the start of execution of continuous effect (pseudo continuous effect). The second decorative pattern is the same as in FIG. 15(k) (state of FIG. 15(o)).

Therefore, even if the player does not notice the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbols (the tip bar) in the second symbol display area 208Y at the timing of FIG. 11(j), the movable body ((l) of FIG. It is possible to recognize that the stop display of the pseudo-relational pattern and the start of execution of the pseudo-relational effect due to the stop display are confirmed by the operation (rotation operation in this case) of the family crest part 244A) and/or the sound effect from the speaker 120.

The family coat emblem 244A starts rotating after, for example, the stop display of the pseudo-relational pattern and the start of execution of the pseudo-relational effect due to the stop display are determined. The family coat emblem 224A may be lifted after starting rotation at an initial position (position below the first image display device 2081 shown in (j) of the figure). In that case, for example, a pseudo continuous symbol After the stop display and the start of execution of the pseudo continuous effect due to the stop display are confirmed, the robot moves to the stop position after the ascent (the position (1) in the figure).

Note that the family crest monument 244A performs movements such as ascent and descent and rotation even during other effects. In addition, the family crest monument 244A may be configured not to perform movements such as ascending and descending and rotating during other effects, and may move and rotate such as ascending and descending during other effects. Some of the operations may be performed, or only some of the operations may not be performed.

The timing shown in the figure (m) shows a state in which the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbols in the first symbol display area 208X becomes visible to the player after the first animation display is completed. Although illustration is omitted, an animation of a reduced display of the enlarged pseudo-relational pattern is executed between the figure (l) and the figure (m), and as shown in the figure (m), the initial size ( The display size is reduced to "decoration 6" in the left symbol display area 208a and "decoration 7" in the right symbol display area 208c). As a result, the "decoration 6" that swings (temporarily stops) in the left symbol display area 208a of the first symbol display area 208X, the swinging fluctuation (temporary stop) in the middle symbol display area 208b (pseudo continuous symbol) , And the "decoration 7" that is shake-changed (temporarily stopped) in the right symbol display area 208c becomes visible to the player, and the confirmation of execution of the pseudo continuous effect is notified. The second decorative pattern is the same as in FIG. 15(k) (state of FIG. 15(o)). That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 6(m), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are in the same display mode ((provisional) stop display of the same symbol combination), and at the same time, visible to the player. There is.

In addition, the animation of the reduced display of the pseudo continuous symbol executed between the same figure (l) to the same figure (m), the animation display of the enlarged display of the pseudo continuous symbol (for example, the same figure (h) ~ the same). The execution time may be the same as that in Fig. (k), may be short, or may be long. Moreover, the animation of the reduced display of the pseudo-relational pattern may not be executed.

Generally, the player stops the special symbol (pseudo continuous symbol) in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first image display device 2081 (first symbol display area 208X) as shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to recognize that the start of execution of the continuous production (pseudo continuous production) has been confirmed. Alternatively, a player who is accustomed to the game cannot visually recognize the state of the first decorative symbol (whether there is a symbol combination or a (provisional) stop display) by the first animation display, as shown in FIG. Even if it is difficult to visually recognize, it may be possible to recognize that the start of execution of the continuous effect (pseudo continuous effect) has been confirmed by the operation (rotation operation in this case) of the movable body (family crest part 224A). ..

In the present embodiment, the state of the first symbol display area 208X is invisible (difficult to view) at a timing earlier than those ((m) and (l) in the figure) and by the first animation display. However, as shown in FIG. 7(j), the player recognizes that the start of execution of the continuous effect (pseudo continuous effect) has been confirmed by the second decorative symbol that is not overlapped in the first animation display. It may be possible to

In this example, the timing at which the special symbol (pseudo continuous symbol) shown in (g) of the figure starts displaying is the start timing of the first animation, but the start timing of the first animation is not limited to this timing. Absent. For example, the start timing of the first animation may be the timing when the special symbol (pseudo continuous symbol) shown in (g) of the figure becomes visible to the player, or as shown in (h) of the figure. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the pseudo continuous symbol may be temporarily stopped, or the display mode of the special symbol may be changed at a timing later than the same figure (h) (in this example, the pseudo symbol as shown in the same figure (i)). It may be the timing when the enlarged display of the continuous symbols is started).

Further, the end timing of the first animation is, for example, until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the same figure (m), before the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the same figure (m), (1) to (l) of FIG. When the reduced animation of the special symbol is executed during the same figure (m), until the reduced animation ends, the reduced animation starts, or the enlarged animation ends in the same figure (l). , And so on.

That is, the display period of the first animation is a period defined as a combination of any of the start timing and the end timing of the above-mentioned first animation. When the reduced animation of the special symbol is executed, the display period of the first animation is before the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the same figure (g) to (m) in the same figure (h) to the same figure. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the figure (m), or before the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the same figure (i) to (m). Further, when the reduced animation of the special symbol is not executed before the figure (m) (when the enlarged display ends), the display period of the first animation is from the figure (g) to the figure (l). The same applies to FIG. 1(h) to FIG. 1(l), or to FIG. 1(i) to FIG. 1(l), and the same applies to each of the following embodiments.

The timing shown in (n) of the figure shows a state in which a second animation different from the first animation has started to be displayed in the display area of the first image display device 2081.

The second animation displayed at this timing (after the pseudo-relational pattern is stopped) is an animation displayed during the period until the pseudo-reproduction is started, and here, it continues for a plurality of times (for example, twice). It is an animation showing that the execution of the pseudo-relationship has been confirmed.

In this example, in the second animation, the character (lord) is displayed from the left side of the center as shown in FIG. 9(n), and the character (lord) moves to the center as shown in FIG. However, it is an animation in which the display size is enlarged and the characters "Still still!!" are displayed. Further, in this example, the second animation is displayed only on the first image display device 2081, but the second animation may be displayed across a plurality of image display devices 208′.

The timing shown in (p) of the figure shows a state in which the pseudo continuous effect that continues a plurality of times has started execution, and there is no end of the hold and no change in the display of the icon display area.

At this timing, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (first symbol display area 208X) of the first image display device 2081, the first decorative symbol combination of "decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. .. In addition, it overlaps with a part of the first decorative pattern (a part of "decoration 6" in this example), and displays regarding the number of times of pseudo-reproduction (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo-repetition number display", in this example, 2). “×2” indicating the number of times is displayed.

Further, in the symbol display areas 208k to 208g (second symbol display area 208Y) of the second image display device 2082, the second decoration in the state of FIG. 15(o) similar to that of FIG. 15(j) to FIG. The design (decorative design including the stop display of the pseudo continuous design) continues to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the display of the first image display device 2081 is changed, accurate information (in this example, the pseudo image) is obtained by the second decorative symbol displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. The player can recognize that the continuous effect is being executed). In other words, the second decorative design displayed in the second image display device 2082 (second design display area 208Y) is a decorative design such as displaying the decorative design (combination of decorative designs) to notify the player of some information. It can be said that the pattern is displayed so as to exhibit the original function of. In other words, the second decorative symbol is the first decorative symbol even if the state of the first decorative symbol (the presence or absence of the symbol combination and the (provisional) stop display) is invisible or difficult for the player to see. Guarantee information notification by.

In this way, when the continuous effect (for example, pseudo continuous effect) is executed, after the first animation (middle symbol agitation animation) is displayed, the special symbol (for example, pseudo continuous symbol) is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Is stopped. After that, when the variable display of the decorative symbols is restarted, symbols other than the special symbols are displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b (for example, decorative symbols having the same numbers as the right symbol display area 208c (here, "decoration 7")). indicate. That is, at this timing, the symbol combination of the second decorative symbol (“decoration 6-special symbol-decoration 7”) is different from the symbol combination of the first decorative symbol (“decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7”) It is a combination.

In this example, in the state where the variable display of the first decorative symbol is restarted, the numerical decorative symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, but in the state where the variable display of the first decorative symbol is restarted. The same symbol as the second decorative symbol (that is, a special symbol) may be displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b.

The timing shown in the figure (q), in the first symbol display area 208X of the first image display device 2081 and the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082, respectively, decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and It shows a state in which the variable display (high-speed fluctuation) of the second decorative pattern) has resumed. Further, with the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the animation in which the pseudo continuous number display (in this example, “×2”) is reduced and displayed is executed.

The timing shown in the figure (r), in the first symbol display area 208X, while the variable display of the first decorative symbol (high-speed fluctuation) continues, while the second symbol display area 208Y (second decorative symbol) is It is hidden.

In addition, in the above example, after the timing shown in the same figure (i), after displaying the variable display of the second decorative symbol as shown in the same figure (q) in the second symbol display area 208Y, the same figure (j The temporary stop of the second decorative symbol shown in () (stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol) may be performed.

Further, in the second image display device 2082, the stop display of the second decorative symbol including the stop display of the special symbol (the second decorative symbol shown in FIG. 15(j) (FIG. 15(o))) is the first image display device. As long as it is visible to the player before the stop display of the first decorative symbol including the special symbol in 2081 ((m) in the same figure), the special symbol is stopped at the timing shown in (i) in the figure, for example. The stop display of the second decorative symbol including the display (FIG. 15(o)) may be displayed, or at the timing shown in the same figure (k) or the same figure (l), the stop display of the special symbol is displayed. 2 You may display the stop display of a decorative design (FIG.15(o)).

In the same figure (j), the right symbol (“decoration 6”) and the left symbol (“decoration 7”) are overlapped with the enlarged middle symbol (pseudo continuous symbol) (first timing), The display timing of the second decorative symbol (second timing) may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing. May be

Further, in FIG. 6(p), the display timing (first timing) of the pseudo consecutive number display is the same timing as the display start timing (restart timing, second timing) of the first decorative symbol. The first timing may come before the second timing, or the first timing may come after the second timing.

Further, in the same figure (q), the start timing (first timing) of the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the start timing (second timing) of the variable display of the second decorative symbol are the same timing. The first timing may precede the second timing, or the first timing may follow the second timing.

Further, the pseudo consecutive number display may be started from the same figure (q), in which case the display timing of the pseudo consecutive number display (first timing) and the start timing of the variable display of the second decorative symbol (first 2 timing) may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.

Further, in FIG. 7(r), the timing (first timing) when the pseudo continuous number display is reduced from the size shown in FIG. 9(q) and the timing of erasing the second decorative symbol (second timing) It may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.
<Matters common to each example>
Items common to the respective examples shown in FIGS. 14 to 29, including this example, will be described.

First, the state of the decorative design (the design combination of the decorative designs) that is the condition (in some cases) when the pseudo-relational production is started causes a deviation in the left design or the right design (there is a special design in the middle design). If you stop), the left symbol and the right symbol become tempai (when stopped by the same symbol), if the special symbol stops in the middle symbol, or the special symbol stops in the middle symbol regardless of the left symbol and the right symbol Whether or not (only), and so on.

Also, in the configuration where the pseudo continuous production may be started when a shift pattern occurs in the left pattern or the right pattern, if the shift pattern does not occur, it becomes a tempai, and then the decorative pattern of the number that is tempered If the decorative pattern of the number with 1 added passes, it develops to reach. On the other hand, when the pseudo-relational production is not started, if the misalignment does not occur, it becomes a tempai, and after that, the decorative pattern of the number obtained by adding 1 to the decorative pattern of the number that is tempted is stopped and displayed, and it is out.

In addition, in the configuration in which the pseudo-relational production may be started when the left symbol and the right symbol are tempted, there is a state of whether the pseudo-reciprocal symbol is stopped and displayed first, and then the tempo If a decorative pattern with a number obtained by adding 1 to the decorative pattern passes, it develops to reach. On the other hand, when the pseudo-relational production is not started, the decorative design of the number which is the numbered decorative design of 1 is stopped and displayed, and it is out.

Further, for example, the left symbol is "decoration 6", the middle symbol is "special symbol", and the right symbol is "decoration 7" is stopped (the symbol combination of "decoration 6-special symbol-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed) and simulated. When the continuous production is started, the left symbol "decoration 6", the middle symbol "special symbol", and the right symbol "decoration 7" are also stopped and displayed in the next pseudo continuous demonstration, and the reach thereafter is, for example, the left symbol. The "decoration 6" and the right pattern are "decoration 6" and are configured to be a tempai (referred to as "decoration 6 tempai"). In this case, the "decorative 6 tempai" is configured to have a higher jackpot probability than the reach other than the "decorative 6 tempai".

Therefore, in the second decorative symbol, for example, as shown in FIG. 15(j) and FIG. 15(o), among the symbol combinations of "decoration 6-special symbol-decoration 7", the "decoration 6" of the left symbol is the player. In some cases, the player may be able to recognize whether or not it becomes a “decorative 6 tempai” when it develops into a super reach, and it may be possible to increase the player's expectation.

Some tempai patterns have different jackpot expectations. For example, the left pattern is "decoration 7" and the right pattern is "decoration 7". Become. In such a case, the second decorative design makes it possible to visually confirm that the design combination of, for example, "decoration 7-special design-decoration 8" is stopped and displayed, so that the player's subsequent development is "hot" In some cases, it can be recognized that

In addition, the first animation (animated animation of special symbols) includes enlarged display, but it may also include rotation display, and it is attached to the design instead of the enlarged display of the design itself. For example, the effect display may include a display that gradually expands. Further, the enlarged display of the first animation may cause the display other than the second decorative pattern to overlap.

Further, the second decorative design will be described by taking as an example a configuration that may be displayed or hidden, except for a configuration (FIG. 23) in which a third decorative design, which will be described later, is displayed. May be always displayed.

Also, in one of the fanning animations due to the special design (first animation, special design stop flairing animation, middle design flairing animation), the second decorative design may cause a second flare, or the second flare may occur. There is no one corresponding to the special design in the decorative design, and there may be a case in which the first runout occurs due to the stop display of the second decorative design other than the special design.

In addition, the stop display (redisplay) of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) that occurs after the pseudo-relational effect does not include a special symbol so that the pseudo-representative symbol is not mistakenly recognized as stopped again. Is desirable.

In addition, when the number of pseudo-repetitions is plural, the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes (or can be changed (of the changeable states) each time the number of advancements (increases) increases. 1))), and in that configuration, the hold icon and the variable icon may be hidden at a certain timing.

Further, the case where the number of pseudo-repetitions is plural is described as an example, but the number of pseudo-repetitions may be one. The greater the number of pseudo-repetitions (the more consecutive the pseudo-reproductions are), the higher the jackpot expectation. Further, in each effect example described in the present specification, there may be a case where a big hit expectation degree is higher than the pseudo continuous effect, or there is a case where a big hit expectation degree is lower than the pseudo continuous effect. May be.
<Example B>

Next, another example of performance will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

This effect example is an example of the case where the special symbol is not stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display (that is, the case where the continuous effect is not started), and FIGS. 15(a) to 15(i) are diagrams. Since the timing is the same as that shown in 14(a) to 14(i), description thereof will be omitted. In addition, other than that, the description of the same configuration as the effect example A shown in FIG. 14 may be omitted.

The timing shown in FIG. 15(j) indicates a state in which the horizontal width of the pseudo continuous symbol is further enlarged and displayed. At this timing, the "decoration 6" in the left symbol display area 208a and the "decoration 7" in the right symbol display area 208a are completely overlapped by the pseudo continuous symbol, and are not visually recognizable to the player (left symbol display Both of the decorative symbols in the area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are difficult for the player to visually recognize as compared with the pseudo continuous symbol).

In the second image display device 2082, the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y in which only the frame portion (white square frame) has started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. To be done. The second decorative design in this case is displayed in the state shown in FIG. That is, the decorative pattern (here, "decoration 6") swings (temporarily stops) is displayed in the left symbol display area 208k, and the decorative pattern (here, "decoration 7") swings (temporarily stops) in the right symbol display area 208g. )Is displayed. On the other hand, in the middle symbol display area 208l, the variable display (high-speed fluctuation) of the decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) is being performed.

The timing shown in the same figure (k), the animation of the reduced display of the enlarged pseudo continuous symbol is executed in the first symbol display area 208X, and the size in the initial state (the left symbol display area is shown as shown in FIG. The display is reduced to "decoration 6" of 208a and "decoration 7" of the right symbol display area 208c), and the animation (scroll display of the medium symbol) that descends from above in the middle symbol display area 208b is executed. It shows the state.

At this timing, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. The second decorative pattern in this case is displayed in the state shown in FIG. That is, the swinging fluctuation (temporary stop) of the decorative design (here, "decoration 6") is displayed in the left design display region 208k, and the decorative design (second design, here, "decoration 8") is displayed in the middle design display region 208l. ) Is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol (here, “decoration 7”) is shaken and fluctuated (temporarily stopped) and displayed in the right symbol display area 208g. That is, at this timing, the first symbol variation region 208X and the second symbol variation region 208Y are both visible to the player, but the state of the first decorative symbol (presence or absence of symbol combination and (provisional) stop display) And, the state of the second decorative symbol (presence or absence of symbol combination and (temporary) stop display) is different. Hereinafter, when simply described as "state of decorative design", it means a state (display mode) such as a design combination of decorative designs and presence/absence of (provisional) stop display.

The timing shown in FIG. 1(l) is a state in which the first decorative symbol in the first symbol variation area 208X is displayed, and then the numerical decorative symbol (here, “decoration 8”) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Showing. That is, after the first animation display, the special symbol (here, the pseudo continuous symbol) is not stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and it is determined that the continuous effect (pseudo continuous effect) due to the stop of the special symbol is not executed. It is in the state of having done. Here, the first animation display means an animation based on the pseudo-continuous symbols (the symbols of the character (lord)) in FIGS. 8(g) to 8(k).

Further, at this timing, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the stop display (swing fluctuation display) of the second decorative symbol shown in FIG. That is, at this timing, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are visible to the player in the same state (a combination of decorative symbols is a temporary stop state of "decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 7").

As described above, in this example, the case where the execution of the continuous effect (for example, the pseudo continuous effect) does not start after the first animation display is shown, and in that case, the middle symbol display of the first symbol display area 208X In the area 208b, a special symbol (for example, a pseudo continuous symbol) is not stopped and displayed, and a symbol of a type different from the special symbol (for example, a decorative symbol of a number) is stopped (swing variation display, temporary stop display). Further, in this case, the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b (here, "decoration 8") is the numerical decorative pattern (FIG. 14(p)) displayed when the continuous effect is executed. It is a decorative design (third design) of a number different from the decorative design (“decoration 7”) stopped and displayed in the design display area 208b.

The timing shown in the figure (m) shows the state in which the second decorative symbol is deleted in the second image display device 2082, and the timing shown in the figure (n) is the first symbol in the first symbol display area 208X. The decorative design is stopped and displayed (here, the second decorative design (combination of decorative designs of “decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed.

Generally, as shown in FIG. 1L, the player is special in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first image display device 2081 (first symbol display area 208X) after the display of the first animation is finished. Since the symbol (pseudo continuous symbol) is not stopped and displayed, it is possible to recognize that it is determined that the continuous effect (pseudo continuous effect) is not executed. Alternatively, a player accustomed to the game can move the movable body even if the state of the first symbol display area 208X is invisible (difficult to see) by the first animation display, as shown in FIG. It may be possible to recognize that the start of execution of the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) has been confirmed by the operation of the (family crest monument 224A) (the rotation operation in this case).

In the present embodiment, at a timing earlier than that, even in a state where the stop display of the first decorative symbol is not fixed (the first animation display is being executed), as shown in FIG. It is determined that the continuous effect (pseudo continuous effect) is not executed by the second decorative pattern (FIG. 15(q)) in which the decorative pattern (numeral decorative pattern) other than the pseudo continuous pattern is stopped and displayed in the display area 208l. It may be possible for the player to recognize that.

Alternatively, at a timing earlier than the timing shown in (l) of the figure, and even when the first animation display is being executed, as shown in (j) of the figure, (the middle symbol display area 208l is high speed It is possible to make the player recognize that it is determined that the continuous effect (pseudo-rear effect) is not executed by the second decorative design (FIG. 15(p)) that is changing (the pseudo-rear pattern is not stopped and displayed). Sometimes you can.

In the same figure (k), the pseudo symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b moves back (shifts) to return to the upper side, and may be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Becomes a stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol shown in FIG. 14(m), and similar to FIG. 14(n) to FIG. 14(r), the pseudo continuous effect is started. In this case, if the player previously viewed the second decorative symbol in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, the first symbol is displayed in a state in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol of the second decorative symbol. If the middle pattern of the decorative pattern (pseudo continuous pattern in the middle pattern display region 208b) is displaced downward, the player may be able to recognize that it is displaced and return to the upper side (become a first deviation).

It should be noted that the method of displaying the stop display by returning to the upper side after being shifted downward may be configured to have a higher jackpot expectation than in the case where the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal stop mode.

In this way, during execution of the first animation ((j) and (k) in the same figure), the first decorative symbol after the end (the state of variation stop of the first decorative symbol) is undetermined, Due to the second decorative symbol (the pseudo continuous symbol is not stopped and displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y), it is pointed out that the continuous effect (pseudo continuous effect) is not performed. That is, for example, an advanced person, by paying attention to the second decorative symbol, is in a state of the stop display of the special symbol (pseudo continuous symbol) and the continuous effect (pseudo continuous effect) before the variation stop of the first decorative symbol. It becomes possible to recognize whether or not the execution of () has started.

Note that, for example, at the display timing of the second decorative symbol shown in FIG. 11(j), the second decorative symbol (FIG. 15(q)) in which the middle symbol is stopped and displayed may be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14, when the pseudo-relational effect is executed, the first variation due to the display of the second decorative symbol does not occur, and as shown in FIG. 15, the first variation occurs only when the pseudo-relational effect is not performed. You may do it.

Further, the leading edge may be generated in both cases where the pseudo continuous effect is executed as shown in FIG. 14 and where the pseudo continuous effect is not executed as shown in FIG.

Further, in FIG. 15(k), the timing (first timing) at which the animation of the scroll display of the pseudo continuous symbols starts and the timing (second timing) at which the second decorative symbol is displayed are the same. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be later than the second timing.
<Example C>

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Production example C-1)

The same figure (b)-the figure (f), the 2nd design indicatory territory 208Y in order to execute the fluctuation indication of the 2nd decorative design (the 2nd fluctuation indication) is provided in the 1st image display 2081. It is an example of production when there is.

That is, FIGS. 14(b) to 14(f) correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 14(h) to 14(l), respectively. In FIGS. The second decorative symbol displayed on the two-image display device 2082 is displayed on the second symbol display area 208Y provided on the first image display device 2081.

Specifically, at the timing shown in FIG. 16(b), the pseudo continuous symbol temporarily stops in the middle symbol display area 208b, and at the timing shown in FIG. 16(c), the horizontal width of the pseudo continuous symbol is gradually enlarged. Start, the right edge of the "decoration 6" of the left symbol display area 208a and the left edge of the "decoration 7" of the right symbol display area 208a start to overlap the left edge and the right edge of the pseudo continuous symbol, respectively. For example, on the upper left side of the one image display device 2081, only the second symbol display area 208Y for displaying the second decorative symbol (the frame portion indicated by a white square frame in the figure) starts its display (second 2 The decorative design is not displayed).

In the timing shown in FIG. 7D, the width of the pseudo symbol is further enlarged, and the "decoration 6" in the left symbol display area 208a and the "decoration 7" in the right symbol display area 208a are both pseudo-concatenated. It is completely overlapped by the symbols, and is not visually recognizable to the player (both the decorative symbols in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208a are hard to see by the player as compared with the pseudo continuous symbol).

Further, at this timing (at least a part of the state in which the first animation display (middle symbol fanning animation) is displayed), in the second symbol display area 208Y, the state shown in FIG. The second decorative pattern is displayed. That is, the decorative pattern (here, "decoration 6") swings (temporarily stops) is displayed in the left symbol display area 208k, and the decorative pattern (here, "decoration 7") swings (temporarily stops) in the right symbol display area 208g. ) It is a second decorative symbol in a state in which the pseudo symbol symbol (here, the symbol of the same character (Hen) as the figure (h)) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208l. In other words, before the end of the first animation, the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol in the middle symbol display area 208l is in a state of the tip, and at this timing (or later timing), the pseudo continuous effect is executed. The confirmation may be recognizable to the player.

Further, at this timing, at least a part of the second decorative symbol or the second symbol display area 208Y overlaps a part of the first animation.

As for the timing shown in FIG. 7E, the width of the pseudo-relational pattern of the first decorative pattern is further enlarged, and one pseudo-relational pattern has a plurality of image display devices 208′ (first image display device 2081, second image display). It is displayed across the device 2082 and the third image display device 2093). The second decorative design (FIG. 15(o)) including the stop display of the pseudo continuous design is still being displayed and overlaps with the pseudo continuous design of the first decorative design. Further, the family crest monument 244A starts rising and overlaps with a part of the first image display device 2081 (overlaps with the first image display device 2081).

At the timing shown in FIG. 5F, the enlarged display of the pseudo continuous symbol of the first decorative symbol is finished, the raised family crest part 244A is rotated at the raised position, and the speaker 120 produces a sound effect “don”. It shows the output status. The second decorative symbol (FIG. 15(o)) including the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol is still being displayed.

Thus, in this embodiment (production example), the pseudo continuous pattern of the expanding first decorative pattern first overlaps with the second decorative pattern (overlapped by the second decorative pattern), and then the second image display device. Display starts at 2082.

Even if the player does not notice the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbols in the second symbol display area 208Y shown in FIG. 4D, the operation of the movable body (family crest actor 244A) shown in FIG. It is possible to recognize that the stop display of the pseudo-relational pattern and the start of execution of the pseudo-relational effect due to the stop display have been confirmed by (the rotation operation here) and/or the sound effect from the speaker 120. The other configuration is the same as that of FIG.
(Production example C-2)

FIG. 16(h) to FIG. 16(l) are diagrams showing another example of effect, and an example of effect in which a part of the first decorative symbol is hidden during execution of the first animation.

FIGS. 16(h) to 16(l) correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 14(h) to 14(l), respectively.

At the timing shown in FIG. 16(h), the pseudo symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208X, and at the timing shown in FIG. 16(i), the width of the pseudo symbol is gradually expanded. Start display. At this timing, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol) in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are not displayed. Further, for example, in the upper portion of the second image display device 2082, only the second symbol display area 208Y for displaying the second decorative symbol (the frame portion shown by a white square frame in the figure) starts its display. (The second decorative pattern is hidden).

At the timing shown in FIG. 11(j), the width of the pseudo continuous symbol is further enlarged and displayed, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. This second decorative pattern is in the state of FIG. 15(o). That is, the decorative pattern (here, "decoration 6") swings (temporarily stops) is displayed in the left symbol display area 208k, and the decorative pattern (here, "decoration 7") swings (temporarily stops) in the right symbol display area 208g. ) Is displayed, and the pseudo continuous symbol (here, the symbol of the character (lord)) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208l. As a result, before the end of the first animation, the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbols in the middle symbol display area 208l is in a state of being in a premature state, and at this timing (or later timing), the pseudo continuous production is executed. In some cases, the confirmation can be recognized by the player.

As for the timing shown in FIG. 6(k), the width of the pseudo-relational pattern of the first decorative pattern is further expanded, and one pseudo-relational pattern has a plurality of image display devices 208′ (first image display device 2081, second image display). It is displayed across the device 2082 and the third image display device 2093). The second decorative symbol (FIG. 15(o)) including the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol is still being displayed. At least a part of the second decorative symbol or the second symbol display area 208Y overlaps with a part of the first animation displayed on the second image display device 2082.

At the timing shown in FIG. 1(l), the enlarged display of the pseudo continuous symbol of the first decorative symbol ends, the raised family crest part 244A rotates at the raised position, and the speaker 120 produces a sound effect "don". It shows the output status. The second decorative symbol including the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol is continuing to be displayed. The other configuration is the same as that of FIG.

As described above, in the present embodiment (production example), the pseudo continuous pattern of the first decorative symbol to be expanded first starts to be displayed on the second image display device 2082, and then the second decorative symbol (FIG. 15(o)). ) (Overlapped by the second decorative pattern).

In this example of effect, the decorative symbols in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a which are hidden in FIG. 14(i) are at least the second animation (pseudo) shown in FIG. 14(n). Timing (for example, the timing shown in FIG. 14(m)) before the timing (for example, the animation executed in the period until the start of the continuous production) and before being hidden (in this example, in the left symbol display area 208a, The decoration pattern "decoration 6" is redisplayed in the right pattern display area 208a.

In this way, when the first decorative symbol is hidden during execution of the first animation, the display of the second decorative symbol allows the player to recognize the state of the decorative symbol. The timing of starting the display of the second decorative symbol is the same as in the case of the effect example of FIG.
(Production example C-3)

FIG. 16(n) to FIG. 16(o) are diagrams showing another example of the effect, which is an example of the effect in the case of the ten pie (reach) in FIG. 14(d).

FIG. 16(n) corresponds to the timing shown in FIG. 14(d). In FIG. 14(d), an effect that makes it look like a tempai (it does not actually become a tempai) is made, but the timing shown in FIG. 16(n). Shows that it is a tempai.

The timing shown in FIG. 16(o) indicates a state in which the tempai (reach) effect is being executed, and in this example, the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol, for example, in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208a). , "Decoration 6") are respectively enlarged and displayed, and the decoration symbol (for example, "decoration 6") in the middle symbol display area 208b is more player than the decoration symbols in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a. An animation that is displayed with poor visibility is running.

Further, by overlapping the left symbol and the right symbol which are displayed in an enlarged manner, the high speed fluctuation of the middle symbol itself is more difficult for the player to visually recognize than the left symbol and the right symbol.

Here, the "animation displayed in a state of poor visibility to the player" is an animation in which the visibility is poor compared to the left symbol and the right symbol due to high-speed fluctuation of the middle symbol, or the left symbol or It is an animation that is displayed in a state where the transparency is high compared to the right pattern (the decorative pattern is displayed in a thin state).

In this case (in the case of tempai), the second decorative pattern is not displayed on any of the image display devices 208'. That is, in the present embodiment, the visibility of the scroll display of the middle symbol is hindered by the animation display of the right symbol and/or the left symbol (the state of notifying the information by the first decorative symbol) However, the display of the second decorative design (the notification of the relevant information) is not performed.

In FIG. 7D, the display of the second decorative design is started, but the pseudo continuous design is overlapped with the second decorative design by the display start timing of the second decorative design and the expansion of the pseudo continuous design. The timing may be at the same time, or the pseudo continuous symbol may be overlapped with the second decorative symbol by the expansion of the pseudo continuous symbol after the second decorative symbol starts to be displayed. After the continuous symbol is enlarged, the display may be started so that the second decorative symbol overlaps the pseudo continuous symbol. The same applies to FIG.
<Production example D>

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

At the timing shown in FIG. 14A, for example, the variable display of the first decorative symbol as shown in FIGS. 14B to 14C is executed, and the timing shown in FIG. 17B is followed by the left symbol. For example, the decorative pattern of "decoration 6" is displayed in the display area 208a, and the decorative pattern of "decoration 7" is oscillated (temporarily stopped) in the right symbol display area 208a, and the decorative pattern is rapidly changing in the middle symbol display area 208b. Is shown.

The timing shown in FIG. 14C corresponds to the timing shown in FIG. 14G, and is the state in which the first animation has started in the middle symbol display area 208b that was changing at high speed. In this example, the first animation is an animation based on a special symbol (first symbol), but a special symbol (here, a symbol of a character (princess)) different from the pseudo-reproduction is stopped and displayed. It is an animation that fuels how you like (an animation that fuels the middle pattern). For example, when a special symbol (here, a character (princess) symbol) different from the pseudo continuous effect is stopped and displayed, a different continuous effect of the same type as the pseudo continuous effect (for example, a mini character MC described later). Continuous production, continuous announcement production, etc.) will be started.

At the timing shown in FIG. 7C, in the middle symbol display area 208b, the animation of scroll display of the middle symbol in which the special symbol of the character (princess) descends from above is executed.

At the timing shown in FIG. 6(d), the special symbol of the character (princess) is (temporarily) stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and thereafter, for example, the vertical position is kept unchanged and the rotating animation (second Animation).

The timing shown in (e) of the figure, in the middle symbol display area 208b, the special symbol of the character (princess) is stopped and displayed in (d) of the same figure, the execution of the continuous effect is determined, and subsequently, The state where the animation (for example, before starting continuous production) (second animation) related to continuous production is being executed is shown. Here, the second animation is an animation including an image in which the image of the character (princess) is displayed and the character “chance !!” is displayed.

That is, in this effect example, the display period of the first animation is, for example, until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the same figure (d) (before the symbol of the character (princess) is rotated in the same figure (d)). ) Period.

The timing shown in FIG. 7F is the stop display of the first decorative symbol in the first symbol display area 208X (here, the stop display of the symbol combination of “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7” (fluctuation fluctuation, temporary Stop)) is being executed.

At this timing, a small character (mini character MC) is displayed above the explanation display area TT1. In this example, the mini character MC is a mini character (princess), and this display is a continuous effect (effect display forming at least a part of the continuous effect).

In this example, the special symbol is different from the pseudo-repeated symbol, but after the special symbol is stopped and displayed (second animation), the decorative symbol is displayed (stopped display). In the case of being re-displayed, in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a, the decorative symbol (“decoration 6”) in the left symbol display area 208a when the pseudo-relational symbol is stopped and displayed in FIG. ) And the same decorative pattern as the decorative pattern (“decoration 7”) in the right symbol display area 208a are displayed.

In such a case, the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b is the same as the decorative symbol ("decoration 7") in the right symbol display area 208a (or the same as the decorative symbol ("decoration 6") in the left symbol display area 208a). The decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed. That is, at this timing, the special symbol (character (princess)) is stopped and displayed, and the first decorative symbol is restarted after the animation (second animation) is displayed, as shown in FIG. For example, a stop display (swing fluctuation, temporary stop) of a decorative pattern of a pattern combination of "decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7" is displayed.

In the fourth symbol display device 284, both the special figure 1 (square) and the special figure 2 (circular) are displayed in gray, and the timing shown in FIG. Showing. Further, in the first symbol display area 208X of the first image display device 2081, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (stopped with the symbol combination of "decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7", which is a non-existent symbol combination).

As for the timing shown in FIG. 6H, one hold (holding corresponding to the hold icon h11 in FIG. 6G) has been exhausted, and symbol fluctuation in the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) has started. In the fourth symbol display device 284, the special figure 1 (quadrangle) is displayed in white, and the special figure 2 (circular shape) is displayed in gray to indicate that the variable game of special figure 1 is being executed. ..

At this timing, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first image display device 2081, the variable display (first variable display) of the fast decorative first decorative symbol is performed.

In addition, as the hold is exhausted, the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed in the icon display area 800 by a moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the right end of the icon display area 800. It is displayed as a white variation icon h0. Further, the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h12 becomes the hold icon h11 on the left side of the variable icon h0, and the white hold icon h11 is displayed on the pedestal on the left of the variable icon h0. Has been notified that the number of holdings is 1.

In the upper part of the display area of the third image display device 2083, the special hold 1 is “1”, and the special hold 2 is “0”. The number is displayed.

The mini character (princess) of the information in the explanation display section TT1 continues to display (display continues (carried over) until the next change). Mini character (princess), for example, during the subsequent game, the number (display number) is increased by a special symbol (here, the stop display of the character (princess)) (see (d) in the figure), The greater the number of displays, the higher the expectation of a big hit, and the higher the expectation of the player. That is, the effect of increasing (appearing) the display number of the mini character (princess) can be said to be the same kind of effect as the pseudo continuous effect in terms of continuous effect.

On the other hand, the pseudo continuous effect is a continuous effect within one variation, whereas the effect in which the mini character (princess) of the present embodiment appears is a continuous effect that spans a plurality of variations (a continuous effect called horizontal run). In terms of points, it can be said that they are different types of continuous production.

Further, the effect of increasing (appearing) the display number of the mini character (princess) can be referred to as an effect display similar to the meter display in that the increase in the display number increases the expectation of the player. Therefore, instead of the effect of increasing (appearing) the display number of the mini character (princess), a meter display (display in which the meter increases (or decreases)) may be used.
In addition, the number of displayed mini characters (princess) may correspond to the number of continuous effects.

In addition, in this example, the second decorative design is not displayed on the image display device 208 ′ (the tip does not fall).

Further, in this example, the case where the special symbol of the character (princess) is rotated in the second animation display has been described, but it may be enlarged similarly to the pseudo continuous symbol.
<Example E>

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Production example E-1)

Since the timings shown in FIGS. 17A to 17C are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 17A to 17C, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the timing shown in FIG. 18D, the special symbol of the character (princess) is (temporarily) stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display region 208b of the first symbol display region 208X, and thereafter, for example, the vertical position remains unchanged. , Running a spinning animation.

At this timing, the second decorative symbol is displayed (stopped) in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082. The second decorative pattern in this case is in the state shown in the right diagram of FIG. Specifically, in the left symbol display area 208j of the second symbol display area 208Y, a decorative decoration of numbers (for example, "decoration 6") is shaken (temporarily stopped), and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208k. The symbol (for example, "decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the numerical decorative symbol (for example, "decoration 7") is displayed in a swinging motion (temporary stop) in the right symbol display area 208l.

The timing shown in FIGS. 17(e) to 17(h) is the same as the timing shown in FIGS. 17(e) to 17(h) except that the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. Is.

That is, in the same figure (e), the second animation (the animation including the image in which the image of the character (princess) is displayed and the character "chance!!" is displayed) is executed, and the same figure (f) is shown. In the timing shown in, the stop display of the first decorative symbol (here, the stop display of the symbol combination of "decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7" (swing fluctuation, temporary stop)) is executed in the first symbol display area 208X. At the same time, the mini character (princess) is displayed above the description display area TT1. The second decorative pattern is maintained in the state shown in the right diagram of FIG.

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 7G, both the special figure 1 (square) and the special figure 2 (circular) are displayed in gray in the fourth symbol display device 284, and the state is in the stop state. It is shown that. Further, in the first symbol display area 208X of the first image display device 2081, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (stopped with the symbol combination of "decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7", which is a non-existent symbol combination). The second decorative design is maintained in the state shown in the right diagram of FIG.

In this way, in the same figure (d), the same figure (e), the 2nd decorative design of the combination of the same decorative design as the 1st decorative design which is displayed in the same (f) and (g) the stop indication And, there is a tipping point.

In this way, in the present embodiment, even if it is a special symbol other than the pseudo-relational symbol, the second decorative symbol causes a divergence, but the symbol displayed as the second decorative symbol does not include the special symbol ( (No special pattern is included), the special design is not included, and all of the numbers are decorative patterns, which causes the tip deviation.

At the timing shown in FIG. 6H, one hold (holding corresponding to the hold icon h11 in FIG. 9G) is consumed, and in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first image display device 2081, high-speed fluctuation The variable display of the first decorative pattern (first variable display) is performed, and also in the symbol display areas 208j to 208l of the second image display device 2082, the variable display (second variation) of the high-speed variable second decorative symbol is displayed. Display). The rest of the configuration is the same as that of FIG. 17, so description will be omitted.

In addition, in this example, the display timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol which starts the display in the same figure (d) and the stop timing (second timing) of the special symbol may be the same. , The first timing may precede the second timing, or the first timing may follow the second timing.

Further, the display timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol which starts the display in FIG. 7D and the timing (second timing) of starting the rotation of the special symbol may be the same, The first timing may precede the second timing, or the first timing may follow the second timing.

In addition, the start timing (first timing) of the variable display of the second decorative symbol and the start timing (second timing) of the variable display of the first decorative symbol that are started in FIG. The first timing may precede the second timing, or the first timing may follow the second timing.
(Production example E-2)

FIG. 18(m) to FIG. 18(o) are diagrams showing other effect examples, and are effect examples when other special symbols are displayed.

The timings shown in (m) and (n) of the figure are the same as the timings shown in (a) and (b) of the figure. The timing shown in the same figure (o) is similar to the timing shown in the same figure (c), but in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208X, it is different from the special symbol of the character (princess) (separate). No.) shows a state in which an animation (first animation) in which special symbols are scroll-displayed is being executed. The special symbol of this example is, for example, a special symbol related to high speed pseudo-relation (for example, a special symbol displayed as "continuation"), and when the special symbol related to high speed pseudo-rear is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. , High-speed pseudo-reproduction is executed.

The timing shown in the figure (p), in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area, shows a state in which special symbols related to high speed pseudo-relation are stopped and displayed (fluctuation fluctuation, temporary stop), The timing shown in (q) is that the special symbol related to the high-speed pseudo-relation is stopped and displayed, so that the variable display of the first decorative symbol (first variable display) is started in the first symbol display area 208X, and the high-speed pseudo-repetition is started. It shows a state in which the effect is being executed. Further, in this case, for example, the number of executions of high-speed pseudo-repetition (in this example, “second shot”) is displayed above the icon display area 800. In the high-speed pseudo-reproduction, scroll display of a special symbol (for example, a special symbol displayed as "continuation") → stop display (temporary stop display) → first variation display (revariation display) is high speed, for example, 100 It is repeated once (until the display of the number of times of execution of high-speed pseudo-repetition becomes "100th shot").

In this production example, special symbols relating to high-speed pseudo rendition may include a mixture of pseudo-relational patterns (characters (characters)) as shown in FIG. 14 and symbols in other effect modes. ..

In addition, in this effect example, the second decorative design is not displayed and the tip does not come off, but the second decorative design may be displayed. In this case, the display start timing of the second decorative symbol may be any of the timings of (n) to (p) of FIG. Further, in the figure (q), the second decorative pattern may be displayed, and in that case, the same stop display as the stop display of the first decorative pattern in the same figure (p) may be displayed. The same display as the display in the first symbol display area 208X of FIG. (q) (high-speed pseudo-relation effect) may be performed.

It should be noted that the high-speed pseudo continuous effect may be developed after the normal pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 14, or only one of them may be executed.
<Production example F>

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another example of the effect centering on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment (for example, high-speed pseudo-relation effect).

The timing shown in the same figure (b) ~ the same figure (c), in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082, the variable display of the second decorative symbol (the second variable display, the same figure (f)). 18) is the same as the timing shown in FIGS. 18(n) to 18(o) except that the display is performed, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

The timing shown in the figure (d), in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208X, a special symbol relating to high speed pseudo-relation (for example, a special symbol displayed as "continuation") is stopped (swing fluctuation). , Temporarily stopped). Then, even at this timing, in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082, the variable display of the second decorative symbol (second variable display) continues to be displayed (not stopped).

As for the timing shown in FIG. 7E, the special symbols related to the high-speed pseudo-relation are stopped and displayed, so that the variable display of the first decorative symbol (first variable display) is started in the first symbol display area 208X, and the high speed is achieved. The state where the production of the pseudo-relation is being executed is shown. Then, even at this timing, the variable display of the second decorative symbol (second variable display) continues to be displayed (not stopped) in the second symbol display area 208Y. The other configurations are the same as the configurations of FIGS. 18(n) to 18(q).

In this example, during the period of FIGS. 19B to 19E, the variable display (second variable display) of the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082. continuing. And in the period of FIG.19(b)-the same figure (d), the 1st decorative design and the 2nd decorative design are in a different state. In this way, when the high-speed pseudo-reproduction effect is executed (even if a break (temporary stop of special symbols, etc.) is provided during the high-speed pseudo-reproduction effect, the second variable display is continued. You may

In this example, since there is no stop display (temporary stop display) of the second decorative pattern, no tipping occurs. However, if the viewpoint is changed, there is no stop display (temporary stop display) of the second decorative pattern (the variable display of the second decorative pattern (second variable display) continues to be displayed), so that a normal pseudo-sequence is displayed. It may be said that the player may be able to recognize the production or the high-speed pseudo continuous production (for example, an advanced player can recognize it).
<Example G>

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and is an example of the effect when the button effect is executed.
(Production example G-1)

The timing shown in FIG. 14B is the same as that in FIG. 14J except that the second decorative pattern is displayed in the state of FIG. 15P. That is, the decorative symbol (here "decoration 6") in the left symbol display region 208j of the second symbol display region 208Y and the decorative symbol (here "decoration 7") in the right symbol display region 208l are stopped and displayed (sway fluctuation). , Temporary stop), and in the middle symbol display area 208k, the middle symbols are displayed in a variable manner (high-speed fluctuation).

At the timing shown in FIG. 7C, the pseudo-relational symbols that have been enlarged and displayed in the first symbol display area 208X stop the enlarged display. The display size of the pseudo continuous symbol at this timing is, for example, a display size similar to that of FIG. 16B, and more specifically, the display of the pseudo continuous symbol that is scroll-displayed (such as FIG. 14G). It is larger than the size and does not exceed the display area of the first image display device 2081 (to the extent that the pseudo continuous symbol is not displayed on the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083).

Then, at this timing, the effect (button effect) relating to the operation means is executed. That is, the animation related to the button effect is displayed on the front surface of the enlarged pseudo continuous pattern (overlapping a part of the pseudo continuous pattern). The animation related to the button effect includes, for example, a display prompting the user to operate the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) and a display indicating the valid acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136. The display prompting the user to operate the operation means is, for example, an image (button image BG) imitating the chance button 136, the characters “press!” and an arrow display, and a display showing the valid acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 ( In the elapsed time notification image TG), for example, the entire reception valid period is displayed as a colored (non-white) filled image, and the filled image becomes smaller as the reception valid period elapses (the meter subtracts (decreases)). (Displayed) This is the display that executes the animation. In accordance with this, the chance button 136 lights up the built-in LED in red to notify that the operation is possible.

In this example, the button image BG and the elapsed time notification image TG overlap each other on the front of the enlarged pseudo-relational pattern, but the button image BG is displayed on the front of the enlarged pseudo-relational pattern. Although an example in which the image BG and the elapsed time notification image TG overlap each other is shown, at least a part of the elapsed time notification image TG in which the meter is subtracted and displayed on the front surface of at least a part of the pseudo-repeated pattern that is enlarged and displayed. It may be configured to partially overlap.

Further, at this timing, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the state of FIG. 15(p) continues for the second decorative symbol, as in FIG.

The timing shown in (d) of the figure shows a state in which the chance button 136 is operated within the valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. In the present embodiment, the animation of the enlarged display of the pseudo continuous symbols is stopped until the chance button 136 is operated in the button effect, and the chance button 136 is operated within the valid acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136. In this case, the animation of the enlarged display of the pseudo-relational pattern is restarted.

Further, at this timing, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the state of FIG. 15(p) continues for the second decorative symbol, as in FIG.

That is, in the same figure (b)-the same figure (d), the state of the 1st decorative design and the 2nd decorative design is different.

The timing shown in (e) of the figure shows a state in which the enlarged display of the pseudo continuous symbol of the first decorative symbol is restarted by the operation of the chance button 136, and the width is further enlarged. At this timing, the left and right end portions of the pseudo continuous symbol are displayed in part of the display areas of the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083, respectively. That is, one pseudo continuous symbol is displayed across (spans) a plurality of image display devices 208′ (first image display device 2081, second image display device 2082 and third image display device 2093).

Further, in the middle symbol display area 208k of the second symbol display area 208Y by the operation of the chance button 136, the pseudo continuous symbol (character (lord)) is stopped and displayed ("decoration 6- It is (temporarily) stopped and displayed with the symbol combination of "pseudo-relational pattern-decoration 7", whereby it has been noticed that the start of the pseudo-relational effect has been finalized (not visible in the first symbol display area 208X (difficult to see). ) Is changed to the first decorative symbol, and the stop display of the pseudo-relational symbol is notified). Then, in the second image display device 2082, the enlarged left end portion of the pseudo continuous symbol overlaps with the second decorative symbol, the meter and the stage name display area, for example, the left end portion of the pseudo continuous symbol is at least the second decorative symbol. Are overlapped with each other (in this example, the left end portion of the pseudo continuous symbol is overlapped with the second decorative symbol, the meter and the stage name display area).

In the third image display device 2083, the enlarged right end portion of the pseudo-relational pattern is overlapped with a part of the display on the third image display device 2083 (in this example, the lord's character on the stage, And, it overlaps with the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2).

In addition, at this timing, the family crest monument 244A starts rising and overlaps with a part of the first image display device 2081.

At the timing shown in FIG. 6(f), the enlarged display of the pseudo-relational pattern of the first decorative pattern ends (the enlargement is stopped at the same size as the pseudo-relational pattern shown in FIG. 6(e)), and the raised family crest character 244A is rotated at the elevated position, and the speaker 120 is outputting a sound effect “don”. In the state where the button image is not displayed ((e) and (f) in the figure), the first image display device 2081 and the second image display device 2082 (and the third image display device 2083) The pseudo continuous design of the first decorative design is displayed. As for the second decorative pattern, the state of FIG.

Other configurations are the same as the configurations described with reference to FIGS. 14K to 14N, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In this example, the button effect is executed during the execution of the first animation (the stop-inspiring animation of the special design, the middle-design inspiring animation). That is, the first animation includes an animation related to button performance (animation of button performance). In this case, the button effect animation is displayed only on the first image display device 2081. The animation of the button effect may be displayed only on the second image display device 2082 (or the third image display device 2083), or may be displayed on each of the plurality of image display devices 208′. One button effect animation may be displayed across the image display device 208′.

When the button effect is executed, until the button effect starts (for example, until the animation of the button effect shown in FIG. 7C starts to be displayed), the enlarged display of the pseudo continuous symbol on the first symbol display device 2081. When (enlargement animation) is executed and the button effect starts, the enlarged display of the pseudo-relational pattern is temporarily stopped. Then, when the chance button 136 is operated within the valid period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136, the enlarged display of the pseudo continuous symbol is restarted.

Further, from the start of the button effect until the chance button 136 is operated, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in the middle symbol display area 208k of the second image display device 2082 (the second decorative symbol is shown in FIG. 15(p)). State), by operating the chance button 136, the decorative design (in this case, the pseudo continuous design) is stopped and displayed in the middle design display area 208k of the second image display device 2082 (the second decorative design is shown in FIG. 20(e)). (State shown in the figure below), and the enlarged display of the pseudo continuous symbols is restarted on the first image display device 2081.

That is, when the chance button 136 is operated at the time t1 from the start of the button effect, the second button is operated earlier than when the chance button 136 is operated after the time t2 (t2>t1) from the start of the button effect. The decorative design can be stopped and displayed, and the presence or absence of the execution of the continuous production (here, the pseudo continuous production) can be recognized at an early stage (the tip of the second decorative design is generated).

In this example, after the chance button 136 is operated, the timing (first timing) at which the second decorative pattern is stopped and displayed on the second image display device 2082 and the pseudo continuous symbol on the first image display device 2081. The timing (second timing) at which the enlarged display is restarted may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing. It may be early.

Even if the chance button 136 is operated in the same figure (d), the variable display may be continued without the stop display of the second decorative symbol (middle symbol) in the same figure (e).
(Production example G-2)

FIGS. 11H to 11L show the case where the button effect is executed during the execution of the first animation and the operation is not performed within the valid acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136. The timings shown in FIGS. 3(h) to 3(l) correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 4(b) to 4(f), respectively, and thus redundant description will be omitted. To do.

Even when the button effect is started in (i) of the same figure, as shown in (j) and (k) of the same figure, no operation is performed within the valid acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136. In this case, the stop display of the second decorative symbol (middle symbol) is not performed, and the variable display continues (state of FIG. 15(p)).

The timing shown in (l) of the figure shows a state in which the acceptance valid period of the operation of the chance button 136 has ended. In this case, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed due to the time out, and in this example, the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208k (the state shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 20(e)).

In addition, since the chance button 136 is not operated and the enlarged display animation of the pseudo continuous symbol on the first image display device 2081 cannot be restarted, at the timing shown in FIG. Canceling), the maximum size pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed.
(Production example G-3)

In the figures (n) to (r), the button effect is executed during the execution of the first animation, and the operation is performed within the acceptance valid period of the operation of the chance button 136. This is an example of the case where the pseudo continuous symbol of the first decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed, and the timings shown in the same figures (n) to (r) are respectively shown in the same figures (b) to (f). Since it corresponds to the timing shown, redundant description will be omitted.

The timing shown in (p) of the figure shows a state in which the chance button 136 is operated. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 7(q), the enlarged display of the pseudo continuous symbol of the first decorative symbol ends, and the display size before the enlargement (in the initial state, in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first image display device 2081). The pseudo continuous pattern of (display size) shows a state where scroll display is started. Further, in the second image display device 2082, the stop display of the second decorative symbol (swing fluctuation, temporary stop) is executed. The second decorative pattern in this case is in the state shown in the figure (q) below, and is a (provisional) stop display of the symbol combination of the numerical decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 7"). .. As a result, the fact that the pseudo-relational pattern of the first decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed (the execution of the pseudo-relational production does not start) has come to an end.

At the timing shown in (r) of the same figure, in the first symbol display area 208X, the first decorative symbol (for example, "decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 7") of the same symbol combination as the second decoration symbol is stopped and displayed (swing). It has been changed or temporarily stopped) to notify that the pseudo-relation production will not start executing.

In the present embodiment, between the figures (p) to (q), the pseudo continuous symbols in the first symbol display area 208X are shown in the figure (q) from the display size shown in the figure (p). An animation in which the display size is reduced may be executed, or after the chance button 136 is operated in the figure (p), the enlarged display is resumed once and enlarged to a predetermined size (for example, the maximum size). After that, an animation in which the display size is reduced to the display size shown in FIG.

If the pseudo-relational effect is not executed, if the chance button 136 is operated at the timing shown in (p) of the figure, the second decorative pattern of the numeral (for example, "decoration 6-decoration 8--" is displayed on the second image display device 2082. The decoration pattern of the pattern combination “decoration 7” is displayed in a stopped state (temporary stop display), and after the animation of the reduced display of the pseudo continuous symbol is executed on the first image display device 2081, the pseudo continuous effect does not start to be executed. Scrolling display of the suggested pseudo-relational pattern is performed ((p) in the same figure).

In addition, in the scroll display of the middle symbol (special symbol) of the first decorative symbol, the scroll display is started without stopping the special symbol at a predetermined position, so that the execution of the continuous effect (pseudo continuous effect) is not started. There is also a configuration in which the special symbol is returned and the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the continuous effect (pseudo continuous effect) is executed), and the present embodiment can be applied to that configuration as well. In that case, for example, at the timing shown in the same figure (q), in the second symbol display area 208Y, the second decorative symbol including the stop symbol of the pseudo continuous symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the middle symbol so that the tip is out. Or, at the timing shown in the same figure (r), the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern (decoration of the same pattern combination including the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol in the middle pattern as shown in the lower diagram of the same figure (e)) (Pattern) may be stopped and displayed.
<Example H>

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, which is an example of the effect performed after the jackpot temporary stop display.

The timing shown in FIG. 3B is a state in which the reach is formed, and in the left symbol display area 208c of the first symbol display area 208X, the decorative symbol (here, “decoration 6”) swings (temporarily stops). ) Is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol (here, “decoration 6”) swings (temporarily stops) and the middle symbol is rapidly changing in the middle symbol display region 208b.

At the timing shown in FIG. 3C, the middle symbol changes to a low speed fluctuation in the middle symbol display area 208b. In this low-speed fluctuation, for example, when the middle pattern has passed the "decoration 7", all other than the deviation is determined. If the middle symbol stops before "decoration 5" or if the middle symbol stops at "decoration 7", the deviation is determined.

The timing shown in (d) of the figure is a state in which an effect (notice effect) indicating that there is a possibility of developing into a super reach (for example, swordsman reach) has been started. That is, in the first image display device 2081, a reduced display animation in which the left symbol and the right symbol are gradually reduced while temporarily stopped is executed. Further, at a certain timing during the execution of the reduced display animation, the variable display of the second decorative symbol starts to be displayed on the second image display device 2082. Further, in the icon display area 800, a pedestal appears below the variable icon h01.

The timing shown in FIG. 7E is a state in which the reduced display animation of the left symbol and the right symbol is further advanced in the first image display device 2081, and the first symbol is displayed while the left symbol and the right symbol are reduced. An animation is performed in which the display area of the device 2081 moves to the upper left and the upper right to be separated from each other. The variable display of the second decorative pattern continues.

The timing shown in (f) of the figure is a state in which a display (notice production) for giving notice that the super reach (for example, swordsman reach) production will start is being executed, and the cut of the swordsmen is performed on the first image display device 2081. An in-image (here, an image in which a character (swordsman) and the characters "Swordsman see!" are displayed) is displayed.

Further, in the icon display area 800, the pedestal of the variable icon h0, the other reserved icons h11, h12, and the pedestal of the reserved icons are deleted, and only the variable icon h0 is displayed. The variable display of the second decorative pattern continues.

The timing shown in FIG. 7G shows a state in which the scenes are switched, the confrontation scene between the character (lord) and the character (swordsman) is displayed on the first image display device 2081, and the execution of the super reach production is started. There is.

Further, in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082, as shown in the right figure of FIG. 9(g), in the left symbol display area 208j and the right symbol display area 208l, decorative symbols (both in this example, respectively). “Decoration 6”) is temporarily displayed. Thus, in the present embodiment, in the reach effect, the display is started in the state of the variable display of the second decorative symbol ((d) in the figure), and after the notice effect of the super reach effect ((f) in the figure) is executed. When the super reach effect is started, a temporary stop of the left symbol and the right symbol of the second decorative symbol is displayed (FIG. (g)).

The timing shown in (h) of the figure shows the state where the special effect (special display EX) is being executed in the second symbol display area 208Y. The special effect is, for example, one of the notice effects that notifies that the promotion effect will be executed. The special effect is an effect that is not executed in the first symbol area 208X, and is, for example, a display that reduces the visibility of the second symbol display area 208Y. In this example, on the front surface of the second decorative symbol shown in the right figure of (g), that is, the display of the character "CHANGE" (special display EX so as to overlap them over the symbol display regions 208j to 208l). )It is carried out. The special effect may or may not be executed, and the ratio of execution (appearance) also varies. That is, the probability that the special effect is executed varies depending on the super reach effect being executed. Another effect having a higher jackpot expectation degree than a certain effect is configured to have a higher execution probability of the special effect when other conditions are the same. The probability that this special effect is executed (appearance) is 0%, 5%, 10%, 30%, 50%, 70%, 100%, or the like.

At the timing shown in (i) of the figure, the scene immediately after the show is displayed on the first image display device 2081. At this timing, the special display EX of the second symbol display area 208Y is erased, and the second decorative symbol in the state shown in the right diagram of FIG.

At the timing shown in FIG. 7(j), the scene where the character (Den) wins is displayed on the first image display device 2081, and the decorative symbol (here, “decoration 6”) shakes in the middle symbol display area 208b. It shows a changed (temporary stop) state. Also in the second symbol display area 208Y, as shown in the right figure (j) in the figure, the decorative symbol (here, "decoration 6") swings and fluctuates (temporarily stops) in the middle symbol display region 208k. The second decorative symbol swings (temporarily stops) in the symbol combination (in this example, "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6").

The timing shown in (k) of the figure shows the state where the button effect has started execution. This button effect is, for example, a jackpot pattern promotion effect, and a large button image BG that makes the first decorative symbol invisible or difficult for the player to see is displayed overlapping the first decorative symbol, and the chance button. A display for prompting the operation of 136 (in this example, the image of the characters “press!” and an arrow) and an elapsed time notification image TG indicating the valid acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 are displayed.

By the display of the button image BG, the first decorative symbol in the first symbol display area 208X is difficult to see, but the second decorative symbol is the same jackpot symbol combination as the first decorative symbol (in this example, the same symbol). (J) A swing variation (temporary stop) is caused by the "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" symbol combination shown in the right figure, and the player can visually recognize it.

When the chance button 136 is operated at this timing (within the acceptance valid period of the operation indicated by the elapsed time notification image TG), as shown in FIG. 1L, the first symbol display area 208X and the second symbol display In any of the regions 208Y, the jackpot pattern combination after promotion (here, the decoration pattern of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" swings (temporarily stops) and becomes visible to the player. If the chance button 136 is not operated and the time expires within the valid reception period of 1., the promotion may be performed and the display shown in FIG.

In this effect example, it is difficult to visually recognize the first decorative symbol in the first symbol display area 208X when the button effect shown in FIG. 9(k) is executed, and the second decorative symbol is visually recognized by the player in the second symbol display area 208Y. Although it is possible, the tip of the second decorative pattern does not occur (the tip of the combination of the decorative patterns after promotion shown in FIG. 1L) does not occur.

In this way, even in the case of developing into the super reach effect, the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y at least at any timing before the development.

The most interesting point for the player is the result of success or failure of the super reach production. Therefore, even if it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the first symbol display area 208X in the super reach effect, it is necessary to inform the player of the state of the decorative symbol by the second decorative symbol displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. The sex is low. Therefore, when the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y during the execution of the super reach effect, the special effect related to the second decorative symbol (for example, the visibility of the second decorative symbol is reduced. Such a production). Further, this special effect is executed with a certain probability (0%, 5%, 10%, 30%, 50%, 70%, 100%, etc.) depending on the situation.

In FIG. 7D, the timing at which the display of the second decorative symbol starts (first timing) and the timing at which the reduced display of the first decorative symbol starts (second timing) are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

Further, in the same figure (g), the timing at which the left symbol and the right symbol of the second decorative symbol temporarily stop (first timing) and the timing at which the super reach effect starts (second timing) are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

Further, the timing for starting the special effect (special display EX) of the second decorative symbol is not limited to the timing shown in FIG. 11(h), and may be any period as long as the super reach effect is being executed.

Further, in the same figure (j), the timing at which the middle symbol of the second decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (first timing) and the result of success or failure of the super reach effect (in this example, the character (lord) has won) are notified. The display timing (second timing) may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing. Good.

Further, in FIG. 1(l), the timing at which the first decorative design after promotion (first timing) and the timing at which the second decorative design after promotion is displayed (second timing) are the same. It may be a timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
<Production example I>

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and is another example of the effect performed after the jackpot temporary stop display.

The timing shown in FIG. 21B is the same as the timing shown in FIG.

The timing shown in (c) of the same figure shows the state where the button effect has started execution. This button effect is, for example, a payout addition effect, and a display that prompts the user to operate the button image BG and the chance button 136 on the first image display device 281 (in this example, the characters "additional payout, press!"). An image of an arrow) and an elapsed time notification image TG indicating a valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 are displayed.

Further, at this timing, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the jackpot pattern combination after promotion (for example, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" shown in the right figure of FIG. 7C) is temporarily stopped and displayed. Barre is occurring.

That is, as a result of the winning/disapproval determination, the 16R jackpot is actually won, but in FIG. 7B, for example, the symbol combination of 4R jackpot (for example, "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6") is temporarily stopped and displayed. In this case, as shown in (c) of the figure, the payout addition effect is executed, and in the second symbol display area 208Y, the 16R jackpot symbol combination (for example, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is temporarily displayed. By doing so, the player may be able to recognize that the 16R jackpot has been won (the tip ball according to the second decorative pattern).

At the timing shown in (d) of the figure, the number of coins added is displayed (the coin addition display TT2) by the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in (c) of the same figure. It is in a state where an effect for informing that it has been added is being executed. The payout addition display TT2 is a display of an image of "+600" here, and thereby notifies that 600 balls have been added. The state of the second decorative symbol is the same as the right diagram of FIG.

It should be noted that the player who visually recognizes the payout amount addition display TT2 may be able to predict the number of actually won rounds from the payout amount added number. That is, assuming that the maximum number of balls (prize balls) in the case of 16R big hit is 2400 (=15 balls×10 counts×16R) as an example, as shown in FIG. The number of payouts obtained by the combination (for example, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”) is 600 (=15×10 counts×4R).

In other words, the player who visually recognizes the coin-on-ball number display shown in (d) of this figure actually uses this number (or addition thereof) (even if the actual winning round number based on the second decorative symbol is unknown). Can predict what the R jackpot is. In other words, the display of the number of coins added in this case is a notification about the big hit (a notification about what R big hit is the actual big hit (the number of rounds actually won)).

In the same figures (e) to (i), the button effect (additional coin addition effect) (opportunity button 136 operation by the player) and the additional coin addition amount display TT2 are repeated several times, and the result is shown in FIG. At the timing shown, the pay-out amount display TT2 (in this example, "MAX" is displayed) indicating that the pay-out amount has reached the maximum number is executed.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 9(k), the 16R big hit symbol combination (for example, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first symbol display area 208X. It is notified that the number of balls (number of prize balls) is 2,400. In addition, in the period of the same figure (c)-the figure (k), in the 2nd symbol display area 208Y, the temporary stop display of the symbol combination of 16R jackpot (for example, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") continues. (The tipping of the second decorative pattern continues)

In this example, the maximum number of coins (prize balls) in the case of a 16R big hit (for example, 2400 balls) and the number of coins added on the coins shown in (d), (f) and (h) of FIG. Depending on the display TT2 (total of), the player may be able to recognize that the 16R jackpot is won at the timing shown in FIG. In other words, it can be said that the leading edge deviation is caused by the coin addition amount display TT2 shown in (h) of the figure or (j) of the figure.

In addition, in the same figure (c), the timing (first timing) when the display of the second decorative pattern of the second image display device 2082 is started and the timing (second timing) when the button effect in the first image display device 2081 is started. Timing) may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

In this way, in one effect (for example, the jackpot symbol promotion effect shown in FIGS. 21(k) to 21(l)) performed after the jackpot temporary stop display, before the operation of the chance button 136, the second decorative symbol Although the tip does not occur due to, the other effects of the effects performed after the jackpot temporary stop display (for example, the production of additional payout balls shown in FIG. 22, the production of additional jackpot R number, etc.), the second decorative pattern. The leading edge (FIG. 22(c)) may occur.
<Production example J>

23(a) to (g) are diagrams showing, in stages, another example of the effect centered on the image display device 208' of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern. In addition to, it is an example of an effect in which the third decorative pattern is displayed.
(Production example J-1)

23(a) to 23(f) are the same as the effect examples of FIGS. 16(a) to 16(f), except that the third decorative symbol is displayed in the third symbol display area 208Z. Therefore, mainly different points will be described and the other description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 3B, the third decorative design is a decorative design displayed in the third design display area 208Z separately from the first decorative design and the second decorative design, and as an example, an image display device. In any one of 208' (in this example, the first image display device 2081), it is always displayed at least during the variation game of the decorative symbol (timing during execution of variable display or stop display of the decorative symbol). 2 It is a decorative pattern that is displayed even if the decorative pattern is not displayed). Further, the third decorative design, the display size of each design is at least smaller than the display size of each design of the first decorative design, the overall display size of the third decorative design is at least than the overall display size of the first decorative design It is a small decorative pattern (mini decorative pattern). In addition, in the following description, when it is described that "the third decorative pattern is always displayed", it means that "the third decorative pattern is constantly displayed during the period when the decorative pattern is displayed". ..

The third decorative symbol continues to be displayed during the period of (a) to (g) in the same figure, but during the display, for example, as shown in (d) and (e), the third symbol display area The position of 208Z may be configured to move.

In the timing shown in FIG. 7G, for example, after the timing shown in FIG. 6F, the other movable bodies (Yatsushiro 224B and General 224C) descend from the initial position, and the first image display device 2081. It is in a state where it overlaps with the upper front surface of the. At this timing, a part of the pseudo continuous symbol and a part of the second decorative symbol displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y are covered by the Yatsushiro actor 224B and the general actor 224C, and visually recognized by the player. It is difficult (not visible).

In the example shown in FIG. 23(a) to FIG. 23(g), the third image display area 208Z is provided in the first image display device 2081 and shows the state in which it is always displayed during the variation game of the special figure 1. There is. In this example, since the period shown in FIGS. 23(b) to 23(g) is during the variable game of the special figure 1 (timing during the variable display of the decorative pattern), the player cannot visually recognize the first decorative pattern. Even at the timing ((d) to (g) in the figure), it is the timing ((b), (c), (g) in the figure) when the second decorative design is not displayed (difficult to see). Also, the third decorative pattern is always displayed. Even if the special symbol (pseudo continuous symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, the third decorative symbol does not have a special symbol, and this is stopped and displayed. There is no.

Further, the third symbol display area 208Z is configured to be movable, and, for example, a movable body moves to the front surface of the image display device 208' as shown in FIGS. Even when at least a part of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is difficult to see due to the movable body, the third decorative symbol is always visible to the player by the movement of the third symbol display area 208Z. ..
(Production example J-2)

The figure (n)-the figure (r) is the figure which shows one example of other example of the production which is centered around the image display device 208' of the pachinko machine of this execution form, 1st decorative design and 2nd. It is another example of production in which the third decorative pattern is displayed in addition to the decorative pattern.

The same figure (n)-the figure (o) it is the timing which is similar to the production example of Figure 21 (c)-Figure 21 (d), but the 2nd design is displayed in the upper left of the 1st image display 2081. The region 208Y is provided to display the second decorative symbol, and the third symbol display region 208Z is provided above the description display region TT1 to constantly display the third decorative symbol. That is, a plurality of mini decorative designs may be displayed (simultaneously) on one image display device (first image display device 2081). However, the states of the second decorative design and the third decorative design are different.

As for the timing shown in the same figure (n), the right symbol and the left symbol (for example, "decoration 6", respectively) of the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, and the middle symbol is changing rapidly (Fig. 21(g) right). (State of figure). Also, the third decorative pattern is variably displayed.

The timing shown in (o) of the figure is a state in which the reach effect is started and the reduction movement animation of the first decorative symbol (for example, the right symbol and the left symbol in which "decoration 6" is temporarily stopped) is being executed. Is. The second decorative pattern continues the state of the right figure of FIG. 21(g), and the third decorative pattern is variably displayed.

In the same figure (p) and the same figure (q), the first decorative symbol approaches the second decorative symbol by the reduced movement animation, and the second decorative symbol overlaps with a part of the first decorative symbol to the second decorative symbol. Is a state in which it is difficult for the player to see (not visible). The second decorative pattern continues the state of the right figure of FIG. 21(g), and the third decorative pattern is variably displayed.

In the same figure (r), after the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern substantially overlap, one (the first decorative pattern in this example) is in a non-display state. The second decorative pattern continues the state of the right figure of FIG. 21(g), and the third decorative pattern is variably displayed.

In addition, in the effect example of the same figure (n)-the same figure (r), while displaying the 2nd decorative design, for example, with the 2nd image display 2082, in the same figure (p)-(q), the 1st decoration The left symbol and the right symbol of the symbol move to the left and right respectively, the left symbol of the first decorative symbol is displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is displayed on the third image display device 2083. It may be configured to be performed. In this case, the left pattern of the first decorative pattern may be moved in the direction of the second decorative pattern in the second image display device 2082, and may be erased (non-displayed) when they overlap.

In this example, the second decorative design is a decorative design that is displayed only for a certain period due to the establishment of a certain condition, whereas the third decorative design is a decorative design that is always displayed.

It should be noted that each of the embodiments (production examples) described in the present specification can be appropriately combined and applied. However, in the case of application in combination with this embodiment, the second decorative pattern in each embodiment is always displayed. It will not be done.

Further, the third decorative design may have a different design from the first decorative design and the second decorative design, and even in that case, the third decorative design is always displayed.

Further, as shown in (g), (p) and (q) of the same drawing, when the second decorative pattern is overlapped by the first decorative pattern and the movable body, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize (invisible). However, the third decorative symbol is always displayed (even if the first decorative symbol or the movable body is moved), because the third decorative symbol (movable display is configured).

On the other hand, the third decorative design is mainly configured to be visible to the player whose decorative design is variably displayed, and it is difficult to specify the design as compared with the second decorative design. Further, since the third decorative design does not include a special design, it is not configured to notify the player of a combination (state) of decorative designs as an alternative to the first decorative design like the second decorative design.
<Production example K>

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. The second image display device (left sub liquid crystal) 2082, the third image display It is an example of effects related to the operation of the device (right sub liquid crystal) 2083.
(Production example K-1)

The same figure (a)-the figure (b) shows one example of an effect by the 2nd image display device (left sub liquid crystal) 2082 and the 3rd image display device (right sub liquid crystal) 2083. In this example, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 2081 is provided with a second symbol display area 208Y for displaying the second decorative symbol.

17A shows the timing corresponding to the timing shown in FIG. 17B. The second image display device (left sub liquid crystal) 2082 and the third image display device (right sub liquid crystal) 2083 are background images. Only displayed. At this timing, the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 are in the initial position and are most distant from each other, and the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 overlaps the left end portion of the main liquid crystal 2081 and is arranged on the left side of the main liquid crystal 2081. The right sub liquid crystal 2083 is arranged on the right of the main liquid crystal 2081 so as to overlap the right end portion of the main liquid crystal 2081.

At the timing shown in FIG. 6B, one special symbol (for example, a pseudo continuous symbol) is divided and displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 at the initial position. Also, at this timing, only the frame portion of the second symbol display area 208Y on the main liquid crystal 2081 has started displaying. In this embodiment, the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 are moved to predetermined positions, and the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, and execution of the pseudo continuous effect is confirmed.

The timing shown in FIG. 13C is a state in which the second decorative symbol starts to be displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 and a part of the second decorative symbol is overlapped by the left sub liquid crystal 2082, so that the player cannot visually recognize it. In addition, in this example, the middle design display area 208k of the second decorative design is not overlapped with the left sub liquid crystal 2082 at the timing shown in (c) of FIG. In the state shown in j), the special symbol (pseudo continuous symbol) is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208k. Therefore, the player who visually recognizes this may be able to recognize the temporary stop of the pseudo-relational pattern (execution of the pseudo-relational effect) (the tip deviation due to the second decorative symbol occurs).

The timing shown in FIG. 7D is a state in which the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 start moving (sliding) so that they are close to each other in front of the main liquid crystal 2081. By the movement of the left sub liquid crystal 2082, the second decorative pattern of the main liquid crystal 2081 is completely overlapped, and the whole is invisible to the player.

The timing shown in (e) of the figure is a state in which the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 are in contact with (adjacent to) the front center of the main liquid crystal 2081 and are stopped. When the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 are brought into contact with each other, the pseudo continuous image which is divided and displayed on each of the sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083 is integrated across both sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083. Displayed in. As a result, the pseudo-relational symbols are stopped and displayed, and thereafter the execution of the pseudo-reproduction is started. The first decorative pattern of the main liquid crystal 2081 is overlapped with the two sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083, and most of them are unrecognizable to the player.

On the other hand, once, the second decorative pattern, which has been overlapped by the left sub liquid crystal 2082, is exposed from the left side of the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and is again visible to the player. The second decorative design is in the state shown in FIG. 7(j), and similar to the display of the pseudo continuous design of the first decorative design by the two sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083, the pseudo continuous design is provisional in the middle design display area 208k. It is stopped.

The timing shown in (f) of the figure is a state in which the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 have started moving toward the initial position again in the directions in which they are separated from each other. At this timing, the first decorative pattern of the main liquid crystal 2081 overlapped with the two sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083 becomes visible again to the player. In this example, in the state where the special symbol is continuously displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083, another symbol different from the special symbol (here, "decoration" is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b of the main liquid crystal 2081). 7” is displayed as a temporary stop, and the combination of the first decorative pattern “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (first symbol display area 208X). Has been done. In addition, a pseudo consecutive number display (“×2” indicating two times in this example) is displayed.

At this timing, the second decorative pattern of the main liquid crystal 2081 is again overlapped with the left sub liquid crystal 2082.

The timing shown in FIG. 9G is a state in which the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 are moved to the initial positions, and the special symbols displayed on both the sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083 are hidden. Further, at this timing, the second subordinate liquid crystal 2082 is overlapped, so that a part of the second decorative pattern ((j) in the same figure) of the main liquid crystal 2081 is invisible to the player.

The timing shown in (h) of the figure shows a state in which the second symbol display area 208Y and the second decorative symbol of the main liquid crystal 2081 are hidden, and the timing shown in (i) of the main liquid crystal 2081 is The variable display of the 1st decorative design (1st variable display) has shown the state restarted.

Note that the display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol and the start timing (second timing) of the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 are the same timing in FIG. It may be present, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

Further, the non-display timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol and the timing of completion of movement (end of movement) of the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 to the initial position in FIG. The second timing) may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

This production example is at least one sub liquid crystal in at least one of the states (state corresponding to the stop display of the special symbol (pseudo continuous symbol)) informing that the continuous effect (pseudo continuous symbol) will be executed. It is configured to move to a position (at least one of the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083).

Then, the second decorative pattern is overlapped by the moving sub liquid crystal during at least a part of the time when the sub liquid crystal moves.
(Production example K-2)

FIGS. 24(m) to 24(r) show another example of effects by the moving left sub liquid crystal 2082 and right sub liquid crystal 2083. In this example, one of the movable sub-liquid crystals (for example, the left sub-liquid crystal 2082) is provided with the second symbol display area 208Y for displaying the second decorative symbol.

The figures (m) to (r) are the same as the figures (b) to (g), respectively, except that the second symbol display region 208Y and the second decorative symbol are displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082. Since the configuration is the same as that shown, only different parts will be described and redundant description will be omitted.

That is, similarly to (b) to (g) in the same figure, in this effect example, a state (special symbol (pseudo continuous symbol) stop display indicating that a continuous effect (pseudo continuous effect) is executed is displayed. In at least one of the corresponding states), at least one of the sub liquid crystals (at least one of the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083) is configured to move to a position.

At this time, since the second decorative pattern ((j) in the same figure) is displayed on the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 after the timing of (n) in the figure, the second decorative pattern is displayed (( The figures (n) to (r) are not overlapped by other configurations, and are always visible to the player.

The second decorative pattern slides in the left and right direction in front of the main liquid crystal 2081 as the left sub liquid crystal 2082 moves.

In this way, the second decorative design that is a substitute for the first decorative design (auxiliary) is always visible to the player during the display, and is displayed in a moving manner so that the decorative design can be changed or displayed. It is possible to make the player easily recognize the state such as a temporary stop display.

Note that, in the effect example shown in FIG. 24, an example in which one special symbol is displayed by the two sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083 has been described, but by a plurality of liquid crystals including at least one sub liquid crystal (image display device 208′), You may make it display one special symbol. For example, the main liquid crystal 2081 and the left sub liquid crystal 2082 may display one special symbol, or the main liquid crystal 2081 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 may display one special symbol, or all the liquid crystal display devices 208. It may be configured to display one special symbol by'.
<Production example L>

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of an effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, showing the operation of the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083. It is another related production example.

The second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 may be arranged above and below the first image display device 208, respectively. As an example, the image display device arranged on the upper side of the first image display device 2081 is the second image display device 2082, and the image display device arranged on the lower side is the third image display device 2083.

As an example, the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 have a length in the up-down (height) direction shorter than approximately half the length of the first image display device 2081, and also have a length in the width direction. Slightly shorter. In the initial position, at least the lower end side of the second image display device 2082 overlaps the front side of the upper end side of the first image display device 2081, and the third image display device 2083 has at least the upper end side thereof. The portion overlaps with the front surface side of the lower end side portion of the first image display device 2081.

Then, in this example, the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 are arranged so that the front of the first image display device 2081 is close to or away from each other along the display surface of the first image display device 2081. It is configured to be movable (sliding movement) in the vertical direction.
(Production example L-1)

First, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 25A to 25C, the second image display device 2082 and the second symbol display area 208Y for displaying the second decorative symbol are provided.

The timing shown in FIG. 4A is a state in which the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first symbol display area 208X is provided in the plurality of image display devices 208′ (in this example, the first image display device 2081, the second image display device 2082, and the third image display device 2083). The variable display of the first decorative pattern is provided over the three image display devices 208'.

Further, the first decorative pattern may be configured not to extend over the three image display devices 208′ in the case of the stop display (confirmed display), or the first decorative pattern displayed on the first image display device 2081. A part of the decorative pattern may be configured to straddle the second image display device 2082 (or the third image display device 2083), and among the first decorative patterns displayed on the first image display device 2081. Only the middle symbol may be configured to straddle the second image display device 2082 (or the third image display device 2083).

In the first image display device 2081 which is visible to the player from between the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083, the timing shown in FIG. Is a state in which the stop fanning animation and the medium pattern fanning animation) are being executed. In addition, the first animation in this case is an animation including the animation of the button effect, and the button image BG and the image suggesting the operation of the button (so as to overlap) on the front of the special pattern (here, “press!”). Character image and arrow image) and the elapsed time notification image TG are displayed.

At this timing, the first animation is executed on the first image display device 2081, so that the player cannot visually recognize the first decorative symbol. On the other hand, in the second image display device 2082, at this timing, the second decorative symbol in the state shown in FIG. 15(o) starts to be displayed, and the decorative symbol (in this example, “decoration 6”) is displayed in the left symbol display area 208j. ), a special symbol (pseudo continuous symbol) in the middle symbol display region 208k, a temporary symbol display of a decorative symbol ("decoration 7" in this example) in the right symbol display region 208l, and the start of continuous effect (pseudo continuous effect) Has been announced. Note that, in FIG. 25, all the second decorative symbols are in the state shown in FIG. 15(o).

In addition, in this example, the first animation is executed only on the first image display device 2081, but a part thereof may be executed on the second image display device 2082 and/or the third image display device 2083.

At the timing shown in FIG. 7C, in response to the operation of the chance button 136, an effect that gives a notice that a continuous effect (here, a pseudo continuous effect) will be performed (in this example, " The notice effect in which the character "Continue" is displayed is executed. Behind the notice effect, the temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol is displayed, and the left symbol (“decoration 6”) and the right symbol (“decoration 7”) are visible to the player, The pattern is overlapped with the notice production and is invisible to the player.

This notice effect is displayed across the three image display devices 208'. That is, a part of the notice effect (a part of the scroll in this example) is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, but the second decorative pattern is displayed so as to overlap the notice effect, and The decorative pattern is visible to the player. In other words, the first decorative symbol of the first image display device 2081 (particularly the middle symbol) is invisible to the player, but the second decorative symbol causes the decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped (the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed). It is possible for the player to recognize what has been done.

In the present embodiment, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed across the plurality of image display devices 208′, but the special symbol and the button image do not extend across the plurality of image display devices 208′, for example, One image is displayed on the image display device 2081. Here, in the present embodiment, “displayed across a plurality of image display devices 208′” includes “displayed across all image display devices 208′”. That is, as shown in FIG. 9A, the first image display device 2081, the second image display device 2082, and the third image display device are in a state where the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 are separated from each other. This means that the variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed across all of 2083.

Although illustration is omitted, a scroll display of a symbol (for example, a medium symbol) having the first decorative symbol may be displayed across a plurality of image display devices 208′. Note that the configuration for performing the button effect shown in FIG. 20 may be replaced with this embodiment.
(Production example L-2)

(D) to (e) in the figure are examples in which the notice effect is executed by the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083.

At the timing shown in FIG. 5D, the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 slide in a direction in which they approach each other, and abut (adjacent to each other) the first decorative pattern visually recognized by the player. It is in a disabled state. Even at this timing, the second decorative design makes it possible for the player to recognize the temporary stop state of the decorative design (that the pseudo continuous design is stopped and displayed).

The timing shown in (e) of the figure is a state in which the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 are separated and returned to the initial position. At this timing, the same display as that shown in FIG.
(Production example L-3)
FIG. 25(g) to FIG. 25(h) show other effect examples.

The timing shown in (g) of the figure corresponds to the timing shown in (c) of the figure, and continuous production (here, pseudo continuous production) is performed in response to the operation of the chance button 136. The effect (in this example, the notice effect in which the word "continue" is displayed on the scroll) is being executed. The notice effect is executed only by the first image display device 2081, and the temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol is performed behind it, and the left symbol (“decoration 6”) and the right symbol (“decoration 7”) are It is visible to the player, but the middle pattern is overlapped with the notice effect and is not visible to the player.

At this timing, the second decorative design is displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the second decorative design allows the player to recognize the temporary stop state of the decorative design (the pseudo continuous design is stopped and displayed). It is possible.

The timing shown in (h) of the figure is a state in which the second image display device 2082 slides downward and overlaps a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 (above the scroll). .. In this case, part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the entire notice effect is visible to the player.

The second decorative pattern also moves relatively downward with the movement of the second image display device 2082, but does not overlap with the notice effect displayed on the two image display device 2082 and is visually recognized by the player. It is possible.
(Production example L-4)

FIG. 25(i) to FIG. 25(j) show other effect examples. In this example, the second decorative pattern is displayed above the first decorative pattern of the first image display device 2081.

The timing shown in (i) of the figure is a state in which the first decorative symbol is displayed on the first image display device 2081 and the notice effect is being executed overlapping with a part of the first decorative symbol. Behind the notice effect, the temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol is displayed, and the left symbol (“decoration 6”) and the right symbol (“decoration 7”) are visible to the player, The pattern is overlapped with the notice production and is invisible to the player.

On the other hand, it moves to the first image display device 2081 and the second decorative symbol is displayed above the first decorative symbol so that it can be visually recognized by the player.

At the timing shown in FIG. 9J, the second image display device 2082 slides downward and overlaps a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 (above the scroll). .. In this case, a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the notice effect is entirely visible to the player.

On the other hand, the second decorative pattern displayed on the first image display device 2081 is overlapped with the second image display device 2082 by the movement of the second image display device 2082, and part of it is not visible to the player.

(Production example L-5) FIGS. 25(k) to 25(l) show other production examples. The timing shown in (k) of the same figure is the same as the timing shown in (i) of the same figure, and the second decorative symbol moves to the first image display device 2081 and is displayed above the first decorative symbol. ..

The timing shown in (l) of the figure is a state in which the second image display device 2082 slides downward and overlaps a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 (above the scroll). .. In this case, a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the notice effect is entirely visible to the player.

At this timing, the second decorative pattern displayed on the first image display device 2081 moves to the second image display device 2082 and is visible to the player.

The timing at which the second decorative pattern moves may be before overlapping with the second image display device 2082, at the same time as overlapping, or with the second image display device 2082. May be after.

As described above, in the present embodiment ((a) to (c) in the figure, (d) to (e) in the figure, (g) to (h) in the figure, a plurality of special symbols are provided. Image display devices (here, the first image display device 2081 and the second image display device 2082) are displayed respectively, and the other image (here, the image of the notice effect) is displayed only on the front surface of one of the special symbols. The notice effect is displayed across the plurality of image display devices 208' by moving the second image display device 2082 (or the third image display device 2083).

In addition, in the present embodiment ((k) to (l) of the same figure), the image display device (here, the second image display device 2082) moves and another image display device (here, the first image display device). When it overlaps with the second decorative pattern displayed in 2081), the second decorative pattern moves to the second image display device 2082 and maintains a state recognizable to the player. In this case, another display (for example, the first decorative pattern) does not move to the second image display device 2082, but another display (for example, an image of the notice effect) that is overlapped by the movement of the second image display device 2082. Is moved to the second image display device 2082 and is displayed on the second image display device 2082.

Further, as shown in (i) to (j) of the same figure, the second decorative design may not move even when the second image display device 2082 is overlapped by the moving second image display device 2082.
<Example M>

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Production example M-1)
The same figure (b)-the figure (e) is the example of production during the big hit.

The timing shown in the figure (b) is a state before the big hit game is started, and a big hit symbol combination (for example, ““ The decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is temporarily stopped and the chance button 136 also has the built-in LED lit in rainbow. In the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device (left sub liquid crystal) 2082, the second decorative symbol having the same content as the first decorative symbol is displayed as shown in the lower diagram of FIG.

The timing shown in FIG. 7C is a state during a big hit game (for example, during a round game), and an effect during a big hit is executed on the main liquid crystal 2081 (including the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083). There is. During the big hit game, in principle, the second decorative pattern is hidden.

The timing shown in FIG. 7D is a state where the big hit game is still in progress, but when an error (for example, lower plate full tank error) occurs, the error is reported. The notification of the error is, for example, an error display E1 on the main liquid crystal 2081 (in this example, the display of the character "please remove the ball"). Further, in this case, for example, on the left sub liquid crystal 2082, a second decorative pattern (a decorative pattern in which a jackpot pattern combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped) is displayed.

The timing shown in (e) of the figure is a state in which the error display E1 on the main liquid crystal 2081 is not displayed due to the elimination of the error. At this timing, the second decorative pattern is also hidden again.

In this case, in FIG. 7D, the timing at which the second decorative symbol is displayed (first timing) and the timing at which the error display E1 is displayed (second timing) may be the same timing. , The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, and the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

Further, in the same figure (e), the timing when the second decorative symbol is hidden (first timing) and the timing when the error display E1 is hidden (second timing) may be the same timing. However, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
(Production example M-2)

Next, (g) to (l) of the same figure are examples of effects in the case of performing an effect using the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol.

In the first symbol display area 208X of the main liquid crystal 2081, the same decorative symbol (for example, "decoration 1") is temporarily stopped for the right symbol and the left symbol, and the timing shown in FIG. Now, the reach production has started. In this case, for example, in the second symbol display area 208Y of the left sub-liquid crystal 2082, the second decorative symbol of the same symbol combination as the first decorative symbol (the state of (f) in the figure) is displayed.

The timing shown in the same figure (h) ~ (l) is a state in which the countdown display of the middle symbols is being executed in the middle symbol display region 208b of the first symbol display region 208X. On the other hand, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the second decorative symbol continues to be displayed in the state of FIG. 7F (countdown display is not performed). Thus, in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208X (not limited to the countdown display), when performing an effect using the middle symbol, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the middle symbol changes. The display may be continued.
(Production example M-3)

Next, (m) to (o) of the same figure are examples of effects in the case of performing a triple line reach effect.

The timing shown in the figure (m) is a state in which the triple line reach effect based on the first decorative symbol is being executed, and in this case, the second decorative symbol is not displayed.

The timing shown in (n) of the figure is a state in which the fanning effect of the line (“decoration 7” in this example) having the first decorative pattern is being executed. In this case, as shown in the lower diagram of the same figure (n), the second decorative design is displayed in the same design combination as the decorative design of the line (“decoration 7” in this example).

The timing shown in (o) of the same figure is a state in which the slanting effect of another line of the first decorative pattern (“decoration 8” in this example) is being executed. In this case, the second decorative pattern is hidden. Is displayed.

In this example, the second decorative design may be displayed during the stir-in effect of a certain line in the ripple line reach, and the second decorative design may be hidden in the case of the double line reach.

In addition, in the same figure (n), even if the timing (first timing) at which the second decorative symbol is displayed and the timing (second timing) at which the fanning effect of the first decorative symbol is started are the same, The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

Further, in the same figure (o), the timing at which the second decorative design is hidden (first timing) and the start of the fanning effect of the first decorative design (second timing) are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
(Production example M-4)

27(b) to 27(e) are examples of effects in the case of displaying the second decorative design, for example, between FIGS. 14(g) to 14(h).

The timing shown in FIG. 14B is similar to the timing shown in FIG. 14G, and is a state in which scroll display of the middle symbol (special symbol) is being performed on the main liquid crystal 2081.

In the timing shown in FIG. 7C, the first decorative design is temporarily stopped (the stop display of the special design is confirmed) on the main liquid crystal 2081, and the second decorative design is the same as the first decorative design (Fig. 15(o) state). At this timing, on the main liquid crystal 2081, an effect of integrally changing the display mode of a plurality of displays (display group G) in the display area (hereinafter, referred to as “display group integrated effect”) is performed. As an example of the display group integrated effect, an effect of integrally enlarging, reducing, inclining, and rotating the display group G (effect of one or a combination of these) and shaking the display group integrally. It is an effect to be displayed (Shake Vision effect) or an animation effect including these scenes. In this example, as shown in (c) of the figure, the display group integrated effect in which the display group G is integrally tilted is executed.

Specifically, a plurality of displays (a plurality of display groups G including a background display) in the display area of the main liquid crystal 2081 are integrally tilted with respect to the outer frame (physical frame) of the main liquid crystal 2081 ( It is an animation including a scene. In such an integrated display group effect, a plurality of display groups G including the background display are integrally slightly reduced and inclined, so that a space is generated in the actual display area, and the space is filled with black or the like. Is displayed.

Then, in this example, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 even while the display group integrated effect is being executed. In this example, the second decorative pattern is not inclined and is displayed in a predetermined area. The display content (design combination) of the second decorative design is the same as the display content (design combination) of the first decorative design displayed in the display group integrated production, and in this example, "decoration 6-special design ( Pseudo continuous pattern)-decoration 7" is a pattern combination of decorative patterns.

The second decorative pattern is displayed so as to overlap the space (black filled display) caused by the inclination of the display group G and at least a part of the inclined display group G. The second decorative pattern may be displayed so as to overlap only in the space (black filled display) created by the tilt of the display group G, or only in the tilted display group G. It may be displayed. In addition, the second decorative pattern may be displayed inclining at the same angle as the display group G.

Due to the display group integrated production, the first decorative symbol may be difficult for the player to visually recognize, but the second decorative symbol may allow the player to recognize the combination of the decorative symbols (the state) (second). It is possible to remove the tip with a decorative pattern).

The timing shown in FIG. 9D is a state in which the display group integrated effect has been completed. At this timing, the display group G that was displayed in a tilted state returns to the normal display state, and the second decorative symbol continues to be displayed at the same position. In this example, a part of the first decorative pattern that has returned to the normal display (“decoration 6” in the left pattern) is overlapped with the second decorative pattern. The states of the first decorative design and the second decorative design are the same.

The timing shown in FIG. 14E is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 14H, and is a state in which the second decorative design is not displayed.

In FIG. 7C, the timing at which the display of the second decorative symbol is started (first timing) and the timing at which the display group integrated effect is started (second timing) may be the same timing. , The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, and the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
(Production example M-5)

The same figure (g)-the figure (i), for example in special figure 1 fluctuation game and special figure 2 fluctuation game, is the production example when the design of the decorative design changes.

For example, the maximum number of reservations is 8 and the specifications are different between the special figure 1 variable game and the special figure 2 variable game. For example, the special 1 variable game has a 50% probability change, and the special 2 variable game has a 100% probability change, or a 16R big hit. If the ratio is different), the decorative design for performing variable display of special figure 1 and the decorative design for performing variable display of special figure 2 may differ in at least part of the design of the decorative design. The present embodiment is a display example of the second decorative pattern in such a case.

Specifically, in this example, the variation game of the special figure 2 has a higher advantage than the variation game of the special figure 1, for example, the special figure 2 is a symbol combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". In the case of and the case of the pattern combination of "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3", 16R is a big hit. It will be a big hit.

Further, the design of the 16R jackpot is different from that of the other design at least in part. For example, the right symbol (“decoration 7”) in FIG. 7G is provided with a mark M indicating that it is a 16R jackpot symbol. That is, in the variable game of special figure 1, the mark M is given only to the "decoration 7" of the decorative pattern, and in the variable game of special figure 2, the mark M is given to the "decoration 3" and "decoration 7" of the decorative pattern. To be done.

The timing shown in the figure (g) is, as a result of the variation game of Toku-zu 1, a combination of symbols which is out of the first symbol display area 208X of the main liquid crystal 2081 (for example, a symbol combination of "decoration 3-decoration 8-decoration 7"). It is a state in which the first decorative pattern of is temporarily stopped and displayed.

Since it is a variable game of the special figure 1, the mark M is given only to the right symbol ("decoration 7") of the first decorative symbol, and the mark M is not imparted to the left symbol ("decoration 3").

At this timing, the special figure 1 has a hold of 2, and the special figure 2 has a hold of 2 (the total number of holds is 4), and the variable icon h0 is displayed at the right end of the icon display area 800, and the variable icon h0 is displayed. To the left of h0, hold icons h11 and h12 corresponding to the hold of Toku-zu 1 and hold icons h21 and h22 corresponding to the hold of Toku-zu 2 are alternately displayed.

Further, on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, the second reserved number display (“22” in this example) of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, on the left sub liquid crystal 2082, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 9G, the second decorative symbol in the same state as the first decorative symbol is (provisionally) stopped and displayed.

The timing shown in the figure (h), the variation game of the special figure 1 is stopped, and the first decorative design and the second decorative design are out of sync with the symbol combination (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 8-decoration 7") Are displayed in a stopped state.

The timing shown in (i) of the same figure is a state in which one hold of special figure 2 has been digested and the variable game of special figure 2 has started. In the first symbol display area 208X of the main liquid crystal 2081, the variable display (first variable display) of the decorative symbol of the special figure 2 is started, and the variable icon h0 corresponding to the variation is displayed at the left end in the icon display area 800. , And hold icons h11, h22, and h12 are displayed on the left of them. Further, on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, the second reserved number display (“21” in this example) of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, on the left sub liquid crystal 2082, as shown in the right figure of FIG. 7I, the second decorative symbol of the symbol combination (for example, the symbol combination of “decoration 3-decoration 8-decoration 7”) is continuously stopped and displayed. However, since the variable display of the special figure 2 is being executed, the mark M is given to the "decoration 3" of the left symbol and the "decoration 7" of the right symbol of the second decorative symbol. That is, as compared with the state of FIG. 3G, the mark M is added to the "decoration 3" of the left design of the second decorative design).

When the variation game of special figure 1 is changed to the variation game of special figure 2, a mark M is also given to "decoration 3" which is a 16R big hit symbol and the player is notified, but in the first symbol display area 208X, high speed It has started to change, and it is very difficult to recognize the decorative pattern with the mark M.

Even in such a case, when the second decorative design that is stopped and displayed includes the corresponding decorative design (“decoration 3” in this example), the mark M is given to the decorative design. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player of the 16R jackpot pattern.

In the first decorative design and the second decorative design, the design switching mode (mark M giving and erasing) and the design switching timing (mark M giving and erasing) may be different. Good or the same.
(Production example M-6)

(M) of the figure is another example of the effect of the second decorative symbol, for example, an example of the display during execution of the super reach effect.

In many cases, for example, during the execution of the super reach effect, the player is generally not interested in the symbol combination of the decorative symbols (which symbol is the tempe). In such a case, since it is less necessary to notify the accurate information in the second decorative design, the effect using the second decorative design may be performed.

In this example, it overlaps with the second decorative pattern (the same state as the right diagram in FIG. 21(g)) so that the player cannot easily see the second decorative pattern, for example, a special display EX (here as a notice effect) Then, the effect of displaying "display of the characters "CHANGE") is executed.

Further, in addition to the second decorative design, another decorative design (third decorative design whose display size is smaller than the first decorative design) may be displayed, which makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize (the notice effect is Instead of the second decorative design (which is being executed), the state of the decorative design may be displayed in the third decorative design. In this example, in the third symbol display area 208Z provided in the first image display device 2081, the third decorative symbol (the same as the second decorative symbol overlapping the special display EX) shown in the left diagram of FIG. Status) is displayed.
<Example N>

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another example of the effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, in the case where the ball-out display E2 and the second decorative symbol are displayed. It is a production example.

Note that FIG. 28 illustrates an example of an effect in the case where the ball-out display E2 is performed in the configuration described so far, and the description of the configuration described above will be omitted.

Here, the ball-out display E2 is a display that is displayed on the image display device 208' when a lower plate full tank error occurs and notifies the player of the error occurrence, and is one of the error displays. The lower plate full tank error is an error that occurs when the lower plate 128 is full, and when the lower plate full tank state is resolved by operating the ball discharge lever 132, the lower plate full tank error is resolved and the ball removal display E2 is displayed. Is also hidden.
(Production example N-1)

The timings shown in FIGS. 14B and 14C correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 14I and 14J, respectively.

As shown in the figure (b), at the timing when the horizontal width of the special symbol (pseudo continuous symbol) gradually starts to be enlarged and displayed, for example, a part of the first decorative symbol of the main liquid crystal 2081 (in this example, the left symbol The ball-out display E2 is displayed so as to overlap (part of).

On the other hand, at this timing, the pseudo continuous symbol does not overlap with the ball-elimination display E2. Further, the icon display area 800 and the explanation display area TT1 do not overlap the ball-out display E2.

Although the second symbol display area 208Y is displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082, the display start timing (first timing) and the display start timing of the ball-out display E2 (second timing) are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

As shown in (c) of the figure, when the enlarged display of the pseudo continuous symbol proceeds, a part of the pseudo continuous symbol is overlapped by the ball-out display E2. Then, at this timing, the second subordinate liquid crystal 2082 displays the second decorative design (the state shown in FIG. 15O).

The timing (first timing) at which the display of the second decorative symbol in the state shown in FIG. 15O is started (first timing) and the timing (second timing) at which a part of the pseudo continuous symbol is overlapped by the ball-out display E2 The same timing may be used, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, and the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
(Production example N-2)

The timings shown in FIGS. 17E and 17F correspond to the timings of FIGS. 17D and 17F, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 6E, in the middle symbol display area 208b, the special symbol (character (princess)) is (temporarily) stopped and displayed, and then, at the timing when the rotating animation is executed, for example, The ball-out display E2 is displayed above the display area TT1. In this case, the ball-out display E2 does not overlap any display.

At the timing shown in (f) of the same figure, the mini character (princess), which is a display related to the continuous effect, starts the display and overlaps the ball-out display E2.
(Production example N-3)

The timings shown in FIGS. 20(h) and 20(i) correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 20(d) and 20(e), respectively.

As shown in (h) of the same figure, within the acceptance valid period of the operation of the chance button 136, at the timing when the chance button 136 is operated (or immediately before the operation), the ball-out display E2 is performed below the special symbol. At this timing, the ball-out display E2 does not overlap any display.

The display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative pattern (here, the state shown in FIG. 15P) and the display start timing (second timing) of the ball-out display E2 are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

Further, at the timing shown in (i) of the figure, the special symbol restarts the enlarged display by operating the chance button 136, and the ball-out display E2 overlaps this enlarged display. The second decorative pattern at this timing is in the state shown in FIG. In this case, the display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative design (FIG. 15(o)) and the timing at which part of the pseudo continuous design is overlapped by the ball-out display E2 (second timing). May be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, and the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
(Production example N-4)

The timings shown in FIGS. 24(k) to 24(m) correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 24(c) to 24(e), respectively.

As shown in (k) of the figure, at the timing when the second decorative symbol (state of FIG. 15(o)) starts to be displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081, and a part of the second decorative symbol is overlapped by the left sub liquid crystal 2082, The ball-out display E2 is performed below the first decorative symbol (for example, the left symbol). At this timing, the ball-out display E2 does not overlap any display.

Even if the display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative pattern (the state shown in FIG. 15(o)) and the display start timing of the ball-out display E2 (second timing) are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

Further, at the timing shown in (l) of the figure, the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 are slid so that they are close to each other, and the left sub liquid crystal 2082 overlaps the ball-out display E2. In this case, at least a part of the ball-out display E2 is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

Further, the timing shown in (m) of the figure is a state in which the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 are in contact with (adjacent to) and stopped, and in this case as well, the left sub liquid crystal 2082 causes the hollow display E2. Are overlapped, and at least a part of them becomes difficult for the player to see. It should be noted that, at the timing shown in (m) of the figure and the timing shown in (l) of the figure, at least different portions of the ball-out display E2 are overlapped by the left sub liquid crystal 2082. That is, at the timing shown in (l) of the same figure, at least the left end portion of the ball-elimination display E2 is overlapped by the left sub liquid crystal 2082 (the right end portion is not overlapped), and at the timing shown in (m) of the same figure, At least the right end portion of the blank display E2 is overlapped by the left sub liquid crystal 2082 (the left end portion is not overlapped). The second decorative pattern (FIG. 15(o)) is exposed from the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and is visible to the player.

Further, at the timing between (l) and (m) in the figure, there may be a timing at which both ends of the ball-out display E2 are not overlapped by the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and can be visually recognized by the player. ..
(Production example N-5)

The timings shown in (o) and (p) of the figure correspond to the timings of (i) and (j) of FIG. 25, respectively.

As shown in (o) of the figure, in the first image display device 2081, the second image display device 2082 is displayed at the timing when the first decorative symbol is displayed and the notice effect is overlapped with a part of the first decorative symbol. A ball-out display E2 is displayed below. At this timing, the second decorative symbol (the state shown in FIG. 15(o)) is also displayed below the second image display device 2082 (a ball-elimination display E2 at a substantially symmetrical position with a notice effect (display) sandwiched therebetween. ..

Even if the display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative pattern (the state shown in FIG. 15(o)) and the display start timing of the ball-out display E2 (second timing) are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 7(p), the second image display device 2082 slides downward and overlaps with a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 (above the scroll). Is. In this case, a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the notice effect is entirely visible to the player. The second image display device 2082 that has moved causes a part of the ball-out display E2 to overlap, but the overlapped part is also displayed on the second image display device 2082. As a whole, it becomes visible to the player.

On the other hand, the second decorative pattern (state shown in FIG. 15O) displayed on the first image display device 2081 is overlapped by the movement of the second image display device 2082, and a part of it is played by the player. Is not visible.

Although the display example of the ball-out display E2 has been described in the present production example (production example N), the ball-out display E2 is hidden when the ball-out operation is performed and the lower plate full tank error is resolved. (Erased).

Further, when the ball-out display E2 is performed, a notification sound may be output from the speaker 120 at the same time.

Further, instead of the ball-out display E2, another error display (for example, a door opening error) may be displayed.

In addition, in the effect examples N-1 to N-5, the ball-out display E2 is displayed at different positions, but as an example in which the ball-out display E2 is displayed, the effect examples N-1 to N- The display positions of No. 5 are listed, and the ball-out display E2 is actually displayed at one predetermined place. For example, in the pachinko machine 100 configured to display the ball-elimination display E2 at the positions shown in (e) and (f) of the figure, when the effects shown in (b) and (c) of the figure are executed, The ball-out display E2 is displayed above the description display area TT1 in FIGS.

In this way, by displaying the ball-elimination display E2 in accordance with the second decorative symbol, special symbol, continuous effect (display related to continuous effect, partial display of continuous effect) of the present embodiment, the player By paying attention to the ball-out display E2, it may be possible to make it easier to recognize the second decorative symbol, the special symbol, the continuous effect, etc. of the present embodiment.

Alternatively, the player can display the ball-excluded display E2 in accordance with the second decorative symbol, the special symbol, the continuous effect (the display related to the continuous effect, a part of the continuous effect), etc. of the present embodiment. 2 By paying attention to a decorative design, a special design, a continuous effect, etc., it may be possible to easily recognize the ball-out display E2.

In addition, by displaying the ball-out display E2, it is possible to erase the ball-out display E2 at an early stage to motivate the user to enjoy the effect display performed on the image display device 208′, and eliminate the lower plate full tank error (ball-out). ) May be able to prompt the operation.

Further, by displaying the ball-out display E2, it is possible to focus attention on the effect display that is important when paying attention to the ball-out display E2, and it may be possible to give an opportunity to perform the ball removal after the end of the effect display. is there.
<Example of image control>

FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of image control relating to the display of the second decorative symbol according to the present embodiment.

19A is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the VRAM 436, and FIG. 19B is a schematic diagram showing the image display device 208' (left sub liquid crystal 2082, main liquid crystal 2081, and right sub liquid crystal 2083). ..

Further, FIGS. 7C and 7D are schematic diagrams for explaining general image control, and FIGS. 8E to 8H are used for a part of the display of the present embodiment. It is a schematic diagram explaining the image control performed.

As shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, the VRAM 436 has frame buffers A and B corresponding to the left sub liquid crystal 2082 (B), the main liquid crystal 2081 (A), and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 (C), respectively. C and a work area W (for example, an area for expanding and storing the compressed image data in the ROM 408). Actually, two sets of frame buffers A, B, and C are provided (for swapping) in order to alternately switch and display.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 28(g) and (h), when a second decorative pattern having the same symbol combination as the first decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 is displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082, for example, it is general. Image control as shown in FIGS. 29(c) and 29(d).

First, as shown in FIG. 29C, the VDP 434 reads out image data of a decorative pattern (for example, variable display of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 28G) stored in the ROM 406 and uses the work area W of the VRAM 436. Then, the image data is decompressed and temporarily stored to generate a display image. Then, the display image is expanded in the first set of frame buffers A1 and B1 designated in the drawing area. At this time, for example, the frame buffer A1 is expanded in the same size, and the frame buffer B1 is expanded in a reduced size according to the size of the second decorative symbol.

Then, by swapping the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffers A1 and B1 and the second set of frame buffers A2 and B2, the images stored in the frame buffers A1 and B1 not designated in the drawing areas are stored in the main liquid crystal 2081 and It is displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082.

On the other hand, for example, in effects such as FIGS. 14(h) to (j), a first decorative pattern (a decorative pattern including an animation display of the middle pattern (first animation display)) and a second decorative pattern (middle) The decorative pattern including the temporary stop display of the pattern) is displayed differently.

In this case, the VDP 434 reads out the image data of the decorative design (for example, the first decorative design shown in FIG. 14H) stored in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. The image data is decompressed and temporarily stored while being used to generate a display image.

Then, as shown in (f) of the same figure, another set of the generated display image is reduced (or the same size) and generated.

After that, as shown in FIG. 6G, a part of the display image on one side (becomes the first decorative pattern) is processed (in this case, the image of the middle pattern is enlarged), and the other ( The display image serving as the second decorative pattern is processed as necessary (for example, the image is reduced).

Then, as shown in FIG. 6H, the display image of the processed first decorative pattern and the display image of the second processed decorative pattern (processed) are designated as the drawing area in the first set of frame buffers A1. , B1 respectively (with the same size), and swapping the drawing area designations of the frame buffers A1 and B1 and the second set of frame buffers A2 and B2, the frame buffers A1 not designated in the drawing area, The image stored in B1 is displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 and the left sub liquid crystal 2082. Thereafter, similar processing is continuously performed in accordance with the progress of the effect (animation).

As described above, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the embodiment of the present invention includes display means (for example, the image display device 208′, the first image display device 2081, the second image display device 2082, A game table provided with a third image display device 2083), wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a first decoration. It is a variable display (hereinafter, referred to as "first variable display") of a symbol (for example, a decorative symbol displayed in the first symbol display area 208X (the symbol display areas 208a to 208c)), of the plurality of types of display. One of the displays is a variable display of a second decorative symbol (for example, a decorative symbol displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y (the symbol display areas 208k to 208g)) (hereinafter, referred to as "second variable display"). .), and the second decorative pattern (for example, the second decorative pattern at the time of final display, at least one second decorative pattern at the time of final display, in FIG. 14 (m) and FIG. 15 (o), etc. The first decorative design (for example, the first decorative design at the time of final display, at least one first decorative design at the time of final display, rather than the decorative design displayed in the middle pattern display area 208k) shown in FIG. The decoration size displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b shown in m) or the like has a larger display size, and in the first variable display, the first animation display (for example, at least one of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c). There is a case where an animation (for example, a stop-inclination animation of a special symbol, a middle symbol-inclination animation) that fuels whether or not a special symbol is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) may be displayed, and the first animation display is In at least a part of the displayed states, the second variable display is displayed.

Note that "the first animation display may be displayed in the first variable display" means that "the first animation display is started in the first variable display. Yes. Further, the first variable display and the first animation display may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

Further, "the second variable display is displayed in at least a part of the states in which the first animation display is displayed" means "the first animation display is displayed. In at least a part of the states, the display for starting the second variable display may be made.” Further, the second variable display and the first animation display may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

According to such a configuration, for example, because the first animation display is started, the content of the first variable display (type of decorative design) and the state (presence/absence of confirmation display) are unconfirmed. , Even if the content or state of the first variable display may be difficult for the player to visually recognize as compared with the first animation or the second variable display, the second variation display may change the first variation. In some cases, the player may be able to recognize (guess) the content and state of the display, or the subsequent effect (for example, the effect related to the jackpot expectation level) (the second variable display may allow the player to lose the tip). May be). As a result, it may be possible to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the display of the second decorative symbol may allow the player to be accurately informed of the state of symbol variation.

Further, for advanced players who are accustomed to the game, the result of the effect can be recognized at an early stage by the display of the second decorative symbol (previous barre), and the motivation for the game may be increased in some cases.

Further, the first animation display is one display of the animation display that fuels whether the first symbol is stopped and displayed, and after the end of the first animation display, the first symbol is displayed. There is a case where it is stopped and displayed, and the first symbol is the first effect (for example, continuous effect, pseudo continuous effect, continuous notice effect, effect shown in FIGS. 14(p) to 14(r), FIG. 17). Designs related to the start of execution of (f) to productions shown in FIG. 17(h) (hereinafter, "first production design (for example, special design, pseudo design, middle design of FIG. 14(h), FIG. 17 ( (d) middle symbol, FIG. 18(p) middle symbol, etc.)”).

The first symbol may be one of the symbols displayed in the first variable display.

Further, "the first symbol may be stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display" means that "the first symbol is stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display." It may be displayed."

Further, the first animation display and the first symbol stop display may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

According to such a configuration, for example, by the start of the first animation display, after the end of the first animation display, the first effect symbol relating to the start of execution of the first effect is stopped and displayed. Whether or not it is undetermined, or when it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it compared to the first animation or the second variable display, the second variable display causes the first effect symbol to be displayed. In some cases, it is possible to let the player recognize (guess) the first effect (for example, an effect related to the jackpot expectation) whether or not it is stopped and displayed. It may be possible). As a result, it may be possible to increase the interest of the player.

Further, for example, while the player's interest is enhanced by performing a continuous effect based on the stop display of the special symbol, it may be possible to accurately convey the state of the symbol variation to the player by the display of the second decorative symbol. ..

Further, for advanced players who are accustomed to the game, the result of the effect can be recognized at an early stage by the display of the second decorative symbol (previous barre), and the motivation for the game may be increased in some cases.

Further, after the end of the first animation display, the first symbol may not be stopped and displayed, and in the case where the first symbol is stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display, the first symbol Before the end of the animation display of the second symbol in the second variable display (for example, a special symbol, a pseudo continuous symbol, the middle symbol of the second symbol display area 208Y shown in FIG. 14(j), FIG. 18D), the middle symbol of the second symbol display area 208Y of FIG. 18D, etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the second symbol is the first symbol of the first effect symbols. It may be a separate pattern.

The second symbol may be one of the symbols displayed in the second variable display.

In addition, "the first symbol may not be stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display" means that "the display that the first symbol is not stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display is It may be done.”

Further, "the second symbol is stopped and displayed in the second variable display before the end of the first animation display" means "the second variable display before the end of the first animation display." There is a case where the second symbol is stopped and displayed in "." Further, the first animation display and the second symbol stop display may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

According to such a configuration, for example, when the first effect design is stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display, the first animation display is started, so that the first animation display After the end, even if it is undetermined whether the first effect design is stopped and displayed, or if it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it compared with the first animation and the second variable display, The player recognizes whether or not the first effect symbol is stopped and displayed by the second symbol that is stopped and displayed in the second variable display, and the first effect (for example, an effect related to the jackpot expectation degree). It may be possible to (guess) (depending on the second design of the second variable display, it may be possible to make a break). As a result, it may be possible to increase the interest of the player.

Further, for example, while the player's interest is enhanced by performing a continuous effect based on the stop display of the special symbol, it may be possible to accurately convey the state of the symbol variation to the player by the display of the second decorative symbol. ..

Further, for advanced players who are accustomed to the game, the result of the effect can be recognized at an early stage by the display of the second decorative symbol (previous barre), and the motivation for the game may be increased in some cases.

Further, in the first variable display, a display in which the first symbol is enlarged (for example, a display as shown in FIGS. 14(i) to 14(l)) may be displayed, and the second display may be displayed. In the variable display, there is no case where the display in which the second symbol is enlarged is displayed, and the first animation display may be a display including a display in which the first symbol is enlarged.

Further, after the end of the first animation display, a third symbol (for example, a decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display region 208b of the first symbol display region 208X, which is different from the special symbol, in FIG. 15(l). There is a case where a symbol such as “decoration 8” of the middle symbol shown) is stopped and displayed, and when the third symbol is stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display, in the second variable display. Fourth symbol (for example, a decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display region 208k of the second symbol display region 208Y, which is different from the special symbol, a symbol such as "decoration 8" of the medium symbol shown in FIG. 15(q)) Is stopped and displayed, the third symbol is one of the symbols different from the first effect symbol, and the fourth symbol is a symbol different from the first effect symbol. It may be one pattern separate from the third pattern.

In addition, "the third symbol may be stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display" means that the display of the third symbol is stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display. , May be done." Further, the first animation display and the stop display of the third symbol may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

Further, "the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the second variable display" means that "the display in which the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the second variable display may be performed". Is.

Further, one of the plurality of types of display is a display for prompting to discharge the game ball (hereinafter, referred to as "ball discharge display (for example, error display E1 shown in FIG. 26D)"). It is also possible that at least a part of the display of the first animation display that is displayed in a state where the ball discharge display is displayed overlaps the ball discharge display.

Further, during the display of the first animation display, at least a part of the display of the second variable display may be overlapped by the first animation display.

Further, during the display of the first animation display, at least a part of the display of the first animation display may be overlapped by the second variable display.

Further, during the display of the first animation display, at least a part of the display of the first variable display may be overlapped by the first animation display.

Further, in the first variable display, a second animation display (for example, animation display before start of continuous effect, animation display shown in FIGS. 14(n) and (o), animation display shown in FIG. 17(e), etc.) ) May be displayed.

Further, a first display unit (for example, a first image display device 2081) and a second display unit (for example, a second image display device 2082) are provided, and the display unit is the first display unit. Yes, the first variable display may be displayed on the first display means, and the second variable display may be displayed on the second display means.
Further, the gaming table may be a pachinko machine.
[Second Embodiment]

Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 2nd Embodiment is an example of the production performed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on 1st Embodiment, and the whole structure etc. of the pachinko machine 100 are the structures of 1st Embodiment demonstrated using FIGS. 1-13. Since it is the same as the above, its explanation is omitted. Regarding other configurations, the same configurations as those of the first embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 29 will be described with the same reference numerals, and overlapping description will be omitted.
<Expectation notification production>

30 to 45, as one of the embodiments of the present invention, an example of the expectation notification effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. 30 to 45 will be described with reference to enlarged views in which a part of the configuration is appropriately extracted.

Here, the anticipation degree notification effect is an effect that notifies the player of the expected jackpot degree of the effect that has occurred or is expected to occur, or an effect that notifies the player that the player should wait (high jackpot expectation). In the following, among the degree-of-expectation notification effects, an example of the degree-of-expectation-rank notification effect and the preliminary degree-of-expectation-rank notification effect will be described. The expectation rank notification effect is an effect that classifies the generated effects according to the jackpot expectation level and notifies the classification (rank of the expectation level) (and thereby notifies the effect that the player should wait). The pre-expectation degree rank informing effect is an effect in which the rank of the expectation level is informed in advance regarding the effect to be generated (thus, the effect in which the player should wait is informed in advance).
<Production example a>

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an example of the expectation notification effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Production example a-1)

An example of an effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 30(a) to 30(l). The figure (a)-the figure (l) are figures which show an example of an effect in steps.

First, the timing shown in FIG. 30A shows a state in which the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) stop changing, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 2081 displays the first symbol. In the area 208X (symbol display areas 208a to 208c), a symbol combination that is out of the decorative pattern (first decorative symbol) of "decoration 3-decoration 1-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed.

In addition, a white (default) variable icon h0 is displayed at the right end of the icon display area 800, and four suggestion displays (in this example, the pedestal) are displayed on the left side of the variation icon h0. The (default) hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed to notify that the hold of special figure 1 is 3. A mini character (lord) is displayed above the icon display area 800. In the explanation display area TT1, a tutorial display "Panda is master of lord" is executed.

In the second image display device (left sub liquid crystal) 2082, the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 30 to 45, the second decorative symbol is always in the same state as the first decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 (the same symbol combination, the same variable display or stop display state). ), and here, the number “3-1-4” (a combination of numbers indicating a symbol combination that is out of order) is stopped and displayed. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 30 to 45, an example in which such a simple (undecorated) combination of numbers is displayed as the second decorative pattern will be described. However, in the left sub liquid crystal 2082, the first decorative pattern is displayed. The display for informing the same content as the state of the decorative design of the design is referred to as "second decorative design", and the area where the second decorative design is displayed will be described as "second design display area 208Y".

Further, a meter (button image) is displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082, but at this timing, all the meters are filled with white, indicating that the meter is 0. In the stage name display area, "Castle Town" is displayed, which informs that the current stage is the castle town.

Third image display device (on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, it is shown that the lord's character is on the stage. At the upper part of the display area of the third image display device 2083, the suspension of special figure 1 is "3. , And the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 indicating that the special figure 2 has been held is “0”.

In the fourth symbol display device 284, both the special figure 1 (square) and the special figure 2 (circular) are displayed in gray, which indicates that they are in a disengaged stop state. The chance buttons 136 and 137 have their built-in LEDs lit in white. The family coat emblem 224 has a built-in LED that emits white light and stands by (stops) at an initial position (below the first image display device 2081 in this example). The Yashiro Yakuhin 224B and the Shogun Yakuhin 244C stand by (stop) at the initial position (in this example, above the first image display device 2081) because the built-in LED emits white light. Audio output from the speaker 120 is not performed at this timing.

In the following description, mainly the effects that have changed from the previous effects over time will be mainly described.

At the timing shown in FIG. 30(b), one hold (holding corresponding to the hold icon h11 in FIG. 30(a)) has been exhausted, and a symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) has started. In the fourth symbol display device 284, the special figure 1 (quadrangle) is displayed in white, and the special figure 2 (circular shape) is displayed in gray to indicate that the variable game of special figure 1 is being executed. ..

At this timing, in the first symbol display region 208X (symbol display regions 208a to 208c) of the first image display device 2081, the variable display of the first decorative symbol (first variable display) is performed. In the present embodiment, the variable display of the decorative pattern (the first variable display and the second variable display) is represented by a downward white arrow (the same applies to other examples below).

Further, as the hold is exhausted, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed in the icon display area 800 by moving animations, respectively, and the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the right end of the icon display area 800. And is displayed as a white variation icon h0. Further, the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h12 becomes the hold icon h11 adjacent to the left of the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h13 becomes the hold icon h12, which is the left side of the change icon h0. The white hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed on the two pedestals, respectively, to notify that the hold of special figure 1 is 2.

In the upper part of the display area of the third image display device 2083, the special reservation 1 is "2" and the special drawing 2 is "0". The number is displayed. Further, in the lower part of the display area, for example, level display is performed.

At this timing, the character effect display by the mini character (navi character) MC is started. The mini character MC in this example is a mini character (lord). In the embodiments shown in FIGS. 30 to 45, in principle, the mini character (lord) performs, for example, a specific (for example, using the entire screen) effect display such as a big hit effect or a super reach effect. It is almost always displayed at a timing other than the timing (for example, at least the timing when the first decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner), and has various roles. In the following description, the mini character (lord) displayed in FIG. 30A is referred to as a "normal display (default display) mini character (lord)". In this example, the normally displayed mini-character (lord) is a mini-character (lord) in a state of standing upright with its back facing, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG.

If the mini character (lord) is not displayed almost all the time, or if the character effect display is performed by the mini character MC (navi character) other than the normally displayed mini character (lord), the character effect display is performed. The mini character MC appears at the timing of execution.

In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 30 to 45, as the character effect display by the mini character (lord), animation display in which the mini character (lord) plays a sub game (mini game) is executed.

The character effect display at the timing of FIG. 11B is an animation display in which the mini character (lord) shoots an arrow at the target and performs a "target hit" sub game. As shown in an enlarged view in the upper part of FIG. 45(b), a mini character (lord) drawing an arrow is displayed on the left side of the main liquid crystal 2081 (above the icon display area 800), and on the right side of the main liquid crystal 2081 (description). The target is displayed on the display unit TT1). In this example, the target is divided into four, and one of them is displayed in red, for example.

Further, in the explanation display section TT1, "When hitting red..." is displayed to notify that some effect is started according to the result of the sub game.

The timing shown in (c) of the figure is an effect in which the target sub game is continuously performed (hereinafter referred to as "sub game effect"). Is being executed, and a state in which the arrow shot by the mini character (lord) is flying toward the target is displayed as shown in the enlarged middle part of FIG. The arrow (display of a part of the sub game effect) released by the mini character (lord) overlaps, for example, a part of the first decorative pattern during flight. The arrow (display of a part of the sub game effect) released by the mini character (donor) may be overlapped with a part of the first decorative symbol during flight, for example.

When the arrow reaches the target as shown in the same figure (d) and the lower part of FIG. 45(b), the result of the sub game effect is enlarged like a wipe (or a balloon) as shown in the same figure (e). It is displayed (display of the effect result is executed). In this example, as the effect result display SR, a state in which the arrow hits the red display portion of the target is enlarged and displayed. The effect result display SR (a part of the sub game effect) is displayed (in front of the decorative pattern) in preference to the changing decorative pattern (first decorative pattern), and the changing decorative pattern (this example). Then, it overlaps with a part of the right pattern) (a part of the display of the sub game effect is not overlapped with the changing decorative pattern (first decorative pattern)).

At the timing shown in (f) of the same figure, the mini character (lord) returns to the normal display (default display) shown in (a) of the figure, the sub game effect is finished, and as a result of the sub game effect, in advance, It shows a state in which the expectation rank notification effect is executed.

In the preliminary expectation degree rank notification production, for example, as shown in (f) of the drawing, the preliminary expectation degree rank display RP is performed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083. The prior expectation degree rank display RP is a rank of the jackpot expectation degree when the effect is executed (after the effect) for effects that may be performed after the timing when this is displayed (for example, during the next variation game). Is a display for informing in advance. That is, the preliminary expectation degree rank notification effect is an effect of performing the preliminary expectation degree rank display RP as the notice effect.

In this example, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 45(c), the characters “A?” and a red rectangle are displayed as the prior expectation degree rank display RP, and the jackpot expectation rank is “A”. It informs that the effect may be executed. It should be noted that, as an example, in some of the sub-game effects, a display (for example, "red" is displayed as a target) may be displayed or may not be related to the prior expectation rank display RP. Good.

Here, to describe the rank of the jackpot expectation degree, at least some of the effects related to the jackpot (judgment determination), each of a plurality of effects depending on the probability (big hit expectation degree) to be a jackpot after the execution of the effect. It is classified into ranks (attributes). In the present embodiment, the big hit expectation degree is classified into, for example, “SSS”, “S”, “A”, “B”... In descending order of the big hit expectation degree. In addition, a plurality of effects may be classified into the same rank. The relationship between the rank of the jackpot expectation and the effect will be described in detail later, but for convenience of the following description, an example will be described. Is displayed), the production for giving a pre-reading notice (customer hold change production) is "S", the swordsman reach production is "S", and the hold icon is changed to a red hold icon ("red icon" is displayed. ) The effect of giving a pre-reading notice (red hold change effect) is "A", the hold icon changes to a blue hold icon ("blue icon" is displayed), and the effect of giving a pre-reading notice (blue hold change effect) is It is classified as “B”...

Further, in the following description, the “preliminary expectation degree rank display RP for notifying that there is a possibility that an effect with a jackpot expectation degree rank of “◯” will be executed” may be referred to as “preliminary expectation degree ○ display”. is there. For example, "preliminary expectation degree rank display RP for notifying that there is a possibility that an effect with a jackpot expectation rank of "S" will be executed" is called "preliminary expectation degree S display", and The "preliminary expectation degree rank display RP" for notifying that the effect having the rank "A" may be executed is referred to as "preliminary expectation degree A display".

That is, at the timing shown in (f) of the same figure, on the right sub liquid crystal 2083b, the "preliminary expectation A display" for notifying that the effect having the rank "A" of the jackpot expectation may be executed is performed. (FIG. 45(c)).

In this example, as a result of the target sub-game effect, one prior expectation degree rank display RP (here, “preliminary expectation degree A display”) is performed, but the sub-game effects are the same or different. A plurality of sub-games may be executed, and in that case, a plurality of preliminary expected degree rank displays RP may be performed according to the result of the sub-game effect.

The timing shown in FIG. 9G is a state in which the decorative symbols of the outlying symbol combination (in this example, the symbol combination of “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 8”) are stopped and displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081. The right sub-liquid crystal 2083 continues to display "preliminary expectation degree A display (preliminary expectation degree rank display RP)".

As for the timing shown in FIG. 3H, one hold is exhausted, and in the fourth symbol display device 284, the special figure 1 (square) is displayed in white and the special figure 2 (circular) is displayed in gray, which is a special feature. 1 shows a state in which the variable game of FIG. 1 is being executed.

At this timing, in the first symbol display area 208X of the main liquid crystal 2081, a variable display of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is performed.

In addition, as the hold is exhausted, the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed in the icon display area 800 by a moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the right end of the icon display area 800. It is displayed as a variable icon h0 and changes to blue to give a pre-reading notice. Further, the hold icon located at the display position of the hold icon h12 becomes a hold icon h11 (white) adjacent to the left side of the variable icon h0, which notifies that the hold of FIG. 1 is 1.

Further, in the movable body (for example, the family crest part 224A), the built-in LED changes to emit blue light in synchronization with the blue variation icon h0.

In the upper part of the display area of the right sub-liquid crystal 2083, the special reservation 1 is "1", and the special drawing 2 is "0", which indicates that the special reservation 1 and the special reservation 2 have the second reservation number display. Is being done. In addition, the display of “prior expectation A display” continues.

Note that, as described above, the “preliminary expectation A display” is a display for notifying that an effect having the jackpot expectation “A” rank may be executed. For example, there is an effect in which the hold icon changes to red (a "red icon" is displayed) to give a pre-reading notice.

However, at this timing, the hold icon (fluctuation icon h0) corresponding to the consumed hold changes to blue to give a pre-reading notice (blue hold change effect). The effect (blue pending change effect) in which the hold icon changes to blue (the “blue icon” is displayed) to give advance notice (blue pending change effect) is, for example, an effect in which the jackpot expectation is “B” rank.

In other words, in this example, in spite of the "preliminary expectation A display" being performed, in reality, a jackpot expectation other than the "A" rank (for example, a jackpot expectation of "B" rank) Is running.

In this way, even if the preliminary expected degree rank display RP is performed, the effect corresponding to the rank is not always executed. Then, as shown in (h) of the figure, when the effect of the jackpot expectation degree different from the prior expectation degree rank display RP is executed (the display of the “blue icon” is executed here), the prior expectation degree rank display The RP (here, “preliminary expectation A display”) continues its display.

As described above, the prior expectation degree rank display RP according to the present embodiment is displayed over a plurality of variable displays (in this respect, it can be said that it is a look-ahead display), but the prior expectation degree rank display RP is displayed only with the variation. It may be displayed, or may be displayed over a plurality of variable displays (pre-read display).

At the timing shown in (i) of the figure, another character effect display is being performed by the mini character MC. This character effect display is an animation for performing an acquisition effect of acquiring the mini item MI. For example, as shown in FIG. 45(e), the mini character (lord) turns around and acquires the mini item MI displayed as "S". It is a performance display. The pre-expected degree rank is promoted to "S" rank by the acquisition of the mini item "S", and the production scheduled to be executed (the production of the rank corresponding to the pre-expected degree rank display RP) has the jackpot expectation rank. There is a possibility to be promoted to the production of "S". That is, the acquisition effect of the mini item MI is also one of the sub game effects.

At the timing shown in FIG. 11(j), the “preliminary expectation A display” that has been displayed until then is hidden on the right sub liquid crystal 2083b, and instead, an effect in which the rank of the jackpot expectation is “S” is executed. “Preliminary expectation S display” is given to notify that there is a possibility that "Preliminary expectation S display" in this example is, as shown in FIG. 45(d), a character display "S?" and a gold rectangular display.

That is, in (f) to (i) of the same figure, "preliminary expectation A display" is performed, and there is a possibility that an effect with a jackpot expectation "A" will be executed (that is, the prior expectation rank is "A"). However, since the mini character (Den) acquired the mini item “S” at the timing of (i) in the figure, an effect with a jackpot expectation of “S” is executed. Since it has been promoted to a state in which there is a possibility that the advance expectation degree rank is promoted to “S”, the advance expectation degree rank display RP changes from “preliminary expectation degree A display” to “preliminary expectation degree A” at the timing of FIG. It is informed that there is a possibility that an effect with a big hit expectation of "S" may be executed.

In this embodiment, the advance expectation rank is promoted by the mini item acquired by the mini character (lord), but a special zone (high accuracy zone) in which the advance expectation rank is easily promoted may be provided. As a result, as compared with the case where a special zone where a change in holding is likely to occur is provided, it is possible to indirectly perform an effect regarding promotion of the jackpot expectation.

The timing shown in FIG. 9(k) is a state in which an effect with the jackpot expectation of “S” rank is being executed as informed by the “preliminary expectation S display”. That is, the variable icon h0 of the icon holding area 800 changes from the blue (circular) icon to the icon of the character (lord) shown in FIG. 45(g) (when the player holding change effect is executed), and the big hit expectation degree. Is high (S rank).

Further, in association with the change of the variation icon h0, the light emitting color of the built-in LED of the movable body (here, the family crest actor 224) is changed from blue to gold.

The timing shown in (l) of the figure is the same as the notification of "Preliminary Expectation Level S Display" in (k) of the same figure. It is in a running state.

In the expectation rank notification production, the expectation rank display RN is performed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, for example, as in FIG. The expectation degree rank display RN is a display for notifying the rank of the jackpot expectation degree after the end of the effect for the effect being executed. That is, the degree-of-expectation rank notification effect is an effect of performing the degree-of-expectation rank display RN as a notice effect.

Further, in the following description, the “expectation degree rank display RN for notifying that the effect having the jackpot expectation degree rank of “◯” has been executed (is being executed)” may be referred to as “expectation degree ○ display”. is there. For example, the “expectation degree rank display RN for notifying that the effect having the big hit expectation degree rank of “S” has been executed (is being executed) is referred to as “expectation degree S display”.

In this example, as the expectation degree rank display RN, as shown in FIG. 45(j), the characters “S”, the gold rectangle and the letters “To hold” are displayed, and the jackpot expectation rank is “S”. It is informed that the effect of "is being executed ("Expectation level S display" is being performed).

The expectation degree rank display RN (“expectation degree S display”) is displayed in the same area as the advance expectation degree rank display RP (“preliminary expectation degree S display” in FIG. That is, instead of “displaying in advance expectation S” (overwriting), “display in expectation S” is displayed.

Further, FIG. 1L shows a state where the level is increased (here, the level is increased from 1.2 to 1.3) based on the function related to the membership service of the player, and the privilege is given. There is. The privilege here is, for example, opening of a song.

The level increases by adding points associated with the game (for example, adding 1 point for each symbol variation, adding 2 points by executing a certain effect, etc.). The effect for which points are added may or may not include the expectation notification effect of this embodiment.

Further, “release of songs” means that, for example, the number of songs that can be viewed during a big hit has increased. At this timing, a music release notification MM (enlarged and shown in FIG. 45(h)) for notifying that the music C has been released is displayed, for example, at the upper part of the “expectation S display” on the right sub liquid crystal 2083. ing.

Note that this membership service may allow provisional start even if the player has not logged in due to unique authentication information, but even if the player cannot start without logging in Good.

As described above, in this example production, a sub-game (for example, a target sub-game production) is performed by a mini character (lord), and a preliminary expectation degree rank notification production is executed according to the result (for example, “preliminary expectation”). Degree A display”), and further advancement of the advance expectation rank by a sub game (for example, mini item acquisition production) by the mini character (lord) “Preliminary expectation S display”), and a production with a higher expectation (for example, , A pre-reading announcement effect by the "donor icon", level up by increasing points, and song opening) are executed.

It should be noted that, in FIGS. 3(k) to (l), the prior expectation degree rank display RP (“preliminary expectation degree S display”) instantaneously changes to the expectation degree rank display RN (“expectation degree S display”). As shown in the figure, the switching display from the prior expectation rank display RP to the expectation rank display RN is an animation display (for example, an animation in which the front and back of the plate-like body are switched and the switching display is performed). May be. In addition, when switching from the prior expectation rank display RP to the expectation rank display RN, there may be a period in which both the prior expectation rank display RP and the expectation rank display RN are displayed.

Further, in FIG. 1L, the display start timing (first timing) of the “expectation S display” and the display start timing (second timing) of the music release notification MM are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing (the same applies in the following embodiments).
(Production example a-2)
FIG. 30(m) to FIG. 30(o) are diagrams showing another example of the production step by step.

The timing shown in (m) of the figure is the same as that of (g) in the figure, and therefore the description thereof is omitted. At the timing shown in FIG. 9(n), one hold is exhausted, and in the first symbol display area 208X of the main liquid crystal 2081, the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is variably displayed. Further, in the icon display area 800, the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by a moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the right end of the icon display area 800 and is displayed as a variable icon h0. , Changes to red and gives advance notice. Further, the hold icon located at the display position of the hold icon h12 becomes a hold icon h11 (white) adjacent to the left side of the variable icon h0, which notifies that the hold of FIG. 1 is 1.

In addition, regarding the other configurations (for example, the state of the fourth symbol display device 284, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 in the right sub liquid crystal 2083, etc.) accompanying the completion of the reservation, the same figure (h ) Is the same as the above), or the number only changes depending on the number of reservations), and the description thereof will be omitted (the same applies to the following description).

Further, in the movable body (for example, the family crest part 224A), the built-in LED changes to red light emission in synchronization with the red variation icon h0.

Further, at this timing, the display of “preliminary expectation A display” (for example, the character display “A?” shown in FIG. 45(c) and the display of a red rectangle) continues from the timing of FIG. ing.

That is, in this example, the “preliminary expectation A display” is performed from the timing of FIG. 11M, and actually corresponds to the “prior expectation A display” at the timing of FIG. An effect (for example, a red-holding change effect whose jackpot expectation is "A" rank) is being executed.

The timing shown in (o) of the figure is the same as the notification of “preliminary expectation A display” in FIG. It is in a running state.

In this example, as the expectation degree rank display RN, as shown in FIG. 45(i), the characters "A", the red rectangle and the characters "red hold" are displayed, and the jackpot expectation rank is "A". It is informed that the effect of “” is being executed (“Display of expectation A” is being performed).

In this example, the case where the red pending change effect is executed as the effect of which the jackpot expectation corresponding to the “preliminary expectation A display” is “A” rank is described as an example, but the jackpot expectation is “A”. Other productions may correspond as the production of the rank.

For example, when the "hime rescue reach production" is classified as an effect of the jackpot expectation "A" rank, "the "hime rescue reach production" was executed after the "preliminary expectation A display" was performed." The state is that "the effect with the jackpot expectation "A" rank was executed according to the notification of "preliminary expectation A display"", and in that case as well, the expectation rank notification effect ("expectation A display") Is done.
(Production example a-3)
FIG. 30(p) to FIG. 30(r) are diagrams showing another example of the effect step by step.

The timing shown in (p) of the figure is the same as that in (j) of the figure, and thus the description thereof is omitted. At the timing shown in FIG. 9(q), in the state where the “preliminary expectation S display” is being performed, a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect) with a jackpot expectation of “S” rank is executed on the main liquid crystal 2081. Is the state that has started.

The timing shown in (r) of the figure is the same as the notification of the “preliminary expectation S display” in FIG. It is in a running state.

That is, in this example, as the expectation degree rank display RN, as shown in FIG. 45(k), the character “S”, the gold rectangle and the characters “Swordsman reach” are displayed, and the jackpot expectation rank is It is informed that the effect of "S" is being executed ("Expectation S display" is being performed).

Further, points are added based on the function related to the membership service of the player, the level is increased (here, the level is increased from 1.2 to 1.3), and the privilege is shown. The privilege here is, for example, opening of a song (song C).

In this example, the case where the swordsman reach production is executed as the production of which the jackpot expectation corresponding to the “preliminary expectation S display” is “S” rank is described as an example, but the jackpot expectation is “S”. Other effects may be supported as the effect of the rank.

For example, when the "feature effect" is classified as an effect of the big hit expectation "S" rank, the state in which "the character effect" is executed after the "preliminary expectation S display" is performed is "As the notification of "preliminary expectation S display", the effect of jackpot expectation "S" rank was executed", and in that case also, the expectation rank notification effect ("expectation S display") is performed. ..

Conventionally, the notice effect that occurs is informed by a direct expression (for example, an expression such as "Yoshimune is on hold"), but according to the present embodiment, the notice effect is classified and the rank is notified. By doing so, it may be possible to make the player guess the advance notice effect that will occur and enhance the interest of the game.
<Common items in each example>
Items common to the respective examples shown in FIGS. 30 to 45 will be described below.

The prior expectation degree rank and the expectation degree rank (the big hit expectation degree of staging) described in each example and the staging corresponding thereto (the stating not corresponding) are combinations for convenience of description, and are limited to the description in the present specification. It is not something that will be done.

For example, a certain effect (effect A) may correspond to only the expected degree rank notification effect, but another effect (effect B) may correspond to the prior expectation rank notification effect and the expected degree rank notification effect. .. In addition, the preliminary expectation degree rank notification effect may be performed every time, or the preliminary expectation degree rank notification effect may be performed with a specific effect. In addition, the expected degree rank notification effect may be performed every time, or the expected degree rank notification effect may be performed as a specific effect.

In addition, the time from the start of execution of the preliminary expectation rank notification effect to the corresponding effect (first time) is the same as the time from the start of execution of the expectation rank notification effect to the corresponding effect (second time). , The first time may be longer than the second time, and the second time may be longer than the first time.
<Example b>

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing another example of the expectation notification effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Production example b-1)
31(b) to 31(f) are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

The timing shown in FIG. 30B is a state in which the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is executed and the “preliminary expectation A display” is displayed, which is similar to the timing shown in FIG. Therefore, the description is omitted.

The timing shown in (c) of the same figure shows the state in which the character effect display (animation for effecting acquisition of the mini item MI) by the mini character (lord) is being executed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 45(f), the mini character (lord) turns around and acquires the mini item MI displayed as "Up". By the acquisition of the mini item “Up”, the effect currently being executed (blue pending change effect in this example) is promoted to an effect with a high jackpot expectation.

At the timing shown in FIG. 7D, the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is, for example, the red hold change effect of the jackpot expectation level “A”, because the mini item “Up” is acquired in FIG. It has been promoted to.

That is, the variable icon h0 changes to red to give a pre-reading notice, and in tandem with this, the built-in LED of the family crest part 224A changes to red light emission.

Further, at this timing, the display of "preliminary expectation A display" (for example, character display "A?" and red rectangle display) continues from the timing of FIG.

That is, in this example, the “preliminary expectation A display” is performed from the timing of FIG. 11B, and actually corresponds to the “preliminary expectation A display” at the timing of FIG. An effect (for example, a red-holding change effect whose jackpot expectation is "A" rank) is being executed.

The timing shown in (e) of the figure is the same as the notification of “preliminary expectation A display” in FIG. 7D, and the expectation rank notification effect is generated based on the fact that the effect of the “A” rank is expected for the jackpot. It is in a running state.

In this example, as the expectation degree rank display RN, as shown in FIG. 45(i), the characters "A", the red rectangle and the characters "red hold" are displayed, and the jackpot expectation rank is "A". It is informed that the effect of “” is being executed (“Display of expectation A” is being performed).

The timing shown in (f) of the figure is a state in which the "expectation degree A display" is hidden after a certain time has elapsed from the start of displaying the "expectation degree A display".

In the example productions shown in FIGS. 30(i) to 30(j), the advance expectation rank display RP is promoted by the production effect of the mini item MI by the mini character (lord), but in the present embodiment. The rank of the jackpot expectation degree of the effect to be executed is promoted by the acquisition effect of the mini item MI by the mini character (lord).

It should be noted that in FIG. 6F, the expectation degree rank display RN (“expectation degree A display”) is not displayed after a certain time has elapsed from the start of the display, but (a plurality of expectation degree rank display RNs are overlapped. The latest expectation rank display RN may continue to be displayed (when displayed).

In addition, the time (first time) from the start of execution of the prior expectation rank notification effect to the non-display (the display is switched to the expectation rank display RN) and from the start of execution of the expectation rank notification effect to the end thereof. The time (until the expectation rank display RN is hidden) (second time) may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, or the second time The time may be longer than the first time.
(Production example b-2)
FIG. 31(h) to FIG. 31(l) are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

The timing shown in FIG. 30(h) is a state in which the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is executed and the “preliminary expectation S display” is displayed, which is similar to the timing shown in FIG. 30(j). Therefore, the description is omitted.

The timing shown in (i) of the figure shows a state in which the character effect display (animation for obtaining effect of the mini item MI) by the mini character (lord) is being executed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 45(f), the mini character (lord) turns around and acquires the mini item MI displayed as "Up". By the acquisition of the mini item “Up”, the effect currently being executed (blue pending change effect in this example) is promoted to an effect with a high jackpot expectation.

At the timing shown in FIG. 7(j), the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is, for example, the big hit expectation degree “S”, but the hold hold change effect due to the acquisition of the mini item “Up” in FIG. It has been promoted to.

That is, the variation icon h0 changes to the hall icon (FIG. 45(g)) to give a pre-reading notice, and in tandem with this, the built-in LED of the family crest actor 224A changes to light emission of gold.

Further, at this timing, the display of "preliminary expectation S display" (for example, character display "S?" and gold rectangular display) continues from the timing of FIG.

That is, in this example, the “preliminary expectation S display” is performed from the timing of FIG. 11H, and actually corresponds to the “prior expectation S display” at the timing of FIG. An effect (for example, a hall holding change effect having a jackpot expectation of "S" rank) is being executed.

The timing shown in (k) of the figure is the same as the notification of “preliminary expectation S display” in FIG. It is in a running state.

In this example, as the expectation degree rank display RN, the character “S”, the gold rectangle and the letters “To hold” are displayed (FIG. 45(j)), and the performance of the jackpot expectation degree is “S”. Is being executed (“expectation degree S display” is being performed).

Further, points are added based on the function related to the membership service of the player, the level is increased (here, the level is increased from 1.2 to 1.3), and the privilege is shown. The privilege here is, for example, opening of a song (song C). Further, the right sub liquid crystal 2083 displays a music release notification MM.

The timing shown in (l) of the same figure shows the state after a certain time has elapsed from the start of the display of the “expectation S display”. At this timing, in the right sub liquid crystal 2083, the music release notification MM is hidden, but the “expectation degree S display” (FIG. 45(j)) is not hidden and the display is continued.

The “expectation degree A display” shown in FIG. 6F is hidden after a lapse of a fixed time (t1) from the display start, but the “expectation degree S display” is at least the display period (t1 ) The display continues for a longer period t2 (t2>t1).

The "expectation S display" is, for example, "expectation" when the next variation game (variable display of decorative symbols) is started and an effect different from the effect corresponding to the "expectation S display" is executed. When the effect corresponding to "degree S display" is finished, it is not displayed.

In addition, the time (first time) from the start of execution of the prior expectation rank notification effect to the non-display (the display is switched to the expectation rank display RN) and from the start of execution of the expectation rank notification effect to the end thereof. The time (until the expectation rank display RN is hidden) (second time) may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, or the second time The time may be longer than the first time.

Also, the time from the display start of the prior expectation degree rank display RP (for example, “preliminary expectation degree A display”) having a low jackpot expectation degree (display switching by the expectation degree rank display RN) (first Time) and the time from the start of display of the prior expectation degree rank display RP (for example, “preliminary expectation degree S display”) having a higher jackpot expectation degree to the display end (switching of the display by the expectation degree rank display RN) (No. 2) may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, and the second time may be longer than the first time. ..
(Production example b-3)
FIG. 31(n) to FIG. 31(r) are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

At the timing shown in FIG. 30(n), similar to the timing shown in FIG. 30(j), the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is executed, but the prior expectation rank notification effect is not executed. ..

The timing shown in (o) of the figure shows a state in which the character effect display (animation for effecting acquisition of the mini item MI) by the mini character (lord) is being executed. In this example, the mini character (lord) turns around and acquires a mini item displayed as "Up" (FIG. 45(f)). By the acquisition of the mini item “Up”, the effect currently being executed (blue pending change effect in this example) is promoted to an effect with a high jackpot expectation.

At the timing shown in FIG. 7(p), the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is, for example, the big hit expectation degree “S” due to the mini item “Up” being acquired in FIG. It has been promoted to. That is, the variation icon h0 changes to the hall icon (FIG. 45(g)) to give a pre-reading notice, and in tandem with this, the built-in LED of the family crest actor 224A changes to light emission of gold.

The timing shown in (q) of the figure is a state where the expectation rank notification effect is being executed based on the fact that the effect of the big hit expectation degree of “S” rank has been executed in the figure (p).

In this example, as the expectation rank display RN, a character "S", a gold rectangle and a character "Hold on hold" are displayed (45(j)), and the big hit expectation rank is "S". Is being executed (“expectation degree S display” is being performed).

Further, points are added based on the function related to the membership service of the player, the level is increased (here, the level is increased from 1.2 to 1.3), and the privilege is shown. The privilege here is, for example, opening of a song (song C). Further, the right sub liquid crystal 2083 displays a music release notification MM.

The timing shown in (r) of the figure is the same as the timing shown in (l) of the figure, and shows a state after a certain time has elapsed from the start of the display of the “expectation degree S display”. At this timing, in the right sub liquid crystal 2083, the music release notification MM is hidden, but the "expectation S display" is not hidden, and the display is continued.

The “expectation degree A display” shown in FIG. 7E is hidden after a lapse of a fixed time (t1) from the start of display, but the “expectation degree S display” in FIG. The display continues for at least a period t2 (t2>t1) longer than the display period (t1) of the “expectation level A display”.

The "expectation S display" is, for example, "expectation" when the next variation game (variable display of decorative symbols) is started and an effect different from the effect corresponding to the "expectation S display" is executed. When the effect corresponding to "degree S display" is finished, it is not displayed.

In addition, the time (first time) from the start of execution of the prior expectation rank notification effect to the non-display (the display is switched to the expectation rank display RN) and from the start of execution of the expectation rank notification effect to the end thereof. The time (until the expectation rank display RN is hidden) (second time) may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, or the second time The time may be longer than the first time.

Also, the time from the display start of the prior expectation degree rank display RP (for example, “preliminary expectation degree A display”) having a low jackpot expectation degree (display switching by the expectation degree rank display RN) (first Time) and the time from the start of display of the prior expectation degree rank display RP (for example, “preliminary expectation degree S display”) having a higher jackpot expectation degree to the display end (switching of the display by the expectation degree rank display RN) (No. 2) may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, and the second time may be longer than the first time. ..

In this example, the advance expectation rank notification effect is not performed, but in that case as well, the expectation rank notification effects (FIGS. (q) and (r)) are expected when the advance expectation rank notification effect is performed. This is the same as the degree rank notification effect (((k) in the figure, (l) in the figure)) (when the expected rank is the same).

It should be noted that the expected degree rank notification effect is generated after and without the prior expectation degree rank notification effect (for example, the same figure (k) to the same figure (l) and the same figure (q) to the same figure). (R)) may be in different states (when the expectation ranks are the same). As an example, the time (first time) from the display start to the display end of the “expectation degree S display” in the case of performing the preliminary expectation degree rank notification effect and the “expectation degree in the case where the preliminary expectation degree rank notification effect is not performed. The time (second time) from the display start to the display end of "S display" is long for the first time and short for the second time (or short for the first time and long for the second time), etc. Is.

In the case where the prior expectation degree rank notification effect is performed (for example, in the same figure (b)-the same figure (d), the same figure (h)-(j)), when the prior expectation degree rank notification effect is not performed (for example, , (N) to (p) in the same figure, it may be possible to prompt the player to guess the advance notice effect that will occur, and it may be possible to enhance the interest of the game. For example, in the case where the preliminary expectation degree rank notification effect is not performed, there is no change in the displayed effect and it is difficult to predict the jackpot expectation degree ((n) in the figure), and the player's interest is reduced. In some cases, the game may end.

However, if the big hit expectation can be predicted early by the advance expectation rank notification effect (if it is possible to predict the possibility of a big hit expectation effect), the motivation to continue the game is not lost and the fun of the game is enhanced. May be possible.
<Production example c>

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing another example of the expectation notification effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Production example c-1)
32B to 32F are diagrams showing another example of the production step by step.

The timing shown in FIG. 30B is a state in which the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is executed and the “preliminary expectation A display” is displayed, which is similar to the timing shown in FIG. Therefore, the description is omitted.

The timing shown in (c) of the same figure shows the state in which the character effect display (animation for effecting acquisition of the mini item MI) by the mini character (lord) is being executed. In this example, the mini character (lord) turns around and acquires a mini item displayed as "Up" (FIG. 45(f)). By the acquisition of the mini item “Up”, the effect currently being executed (blue pending change effect in this example) is promoted to an effect with a high jackpot expectation.

At the timing shown in FIG. 10D, the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is, for example, the big hit expectation degree “S”, due to the mini item “Up” being acquired in FIG. It has been promoted to.

That is, the variation icon h0 changes to the hall icon (FIG. 45(g)) to give a pre-reading notice, and in tandem with this, the built-in LED of the family crest actor 224A changes to light emission of gold.

Further, at this timing, the display of the “preliminary expectation degree A display” (for example, the character display “A?” and the display of a red rectangle) shown in FIG. 45C is continued from the timing of FIG. 45C. ing.

That is, in this example, the “preliminary expectation A display” is performed from the timing of FIG. 11B, and actually corresponds to the “preliminary expectation A display” at the timing of FIG. As effects, effects with different jackpot expectations (ranks) (for example, hall holding change effects with jackpot expectation "S" rank) are executed.

The timing shown in (e) of the figure is based on the fact that the effect of "S" rank for the jackpot expectation is executed as the effect corresponding to the "preliminary expectation A display" in the figure (d). It is in a state where performance is being executed.

In this example, as the expectation degree rank display RN, the character “S”, the gold rectangle and the letters “To hold” are displayed (FIG. 45(j)), and the performance of the jackpot expectation degree is “S”. Is being executed (“expectation degree S display” is being performed).

Further, as in this example, when the prior expectation degree rank display (“preliminary expectation degree A display”) and the rank of the corresponding jackpot expectation degree (for example, the jackpot expectation degree of “S” rank) do not match It can be said that is an effect (contradiction effect) in which the rank of the big hit expectation degree of the notification content and the rank of the big hit expectation degree of the corresponding effect conflict. In addition, such a contradiction effect is one of premium effects (rare effects), and the premium effect is, for example, an effect in which the rank of expectation for jackpot is "SSS" (superior).

Therefore, in this embodiment, a special expectation rank display RNS (special expectation rank display RNS) is performed at the timing of FIG. The special expectation rank display RNS is, as shown in FIG. 45(l), a character display of "SSS", a rainbow color rectangular display, and a character display of "contradiction effect", which are displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083. It

The special expectation rank display RNS (may be referred to as “expectation SSS display”) is displayed in parallel with the “expectation S display”.

Also, at this timing, points are added based on the function related to the membership service of the player and the level is increased (here, the level is increased from 1.2 to 1.3), and the state in which the privilege is given Showing. The privilege here is, for example, opening of a song (song C). Further, the right sub liquid crystal 2083 displays a music release notification MM. In this case, the music release notification MM is displayed so as to overlap at least one of the “expectation SSS display” and the “expectation S display” (in this example, the music release notification MM is “expected”. However, they may be displayed so as not to overlap with each other.

The timing shown in (f) of the figure shows the state after a certain time has elapsed from the start of displaying the "expectation S display" and the "expectation SSS display". At this timing, the music release notification MM is hidden on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, while the “expectation level S display (FIG. 45(j))” and the “expectation level SSS display (FIG. 45(l))” are displayed. None are hidden, and the display continues.

The "expectation level S display" and the "expectation level SSS display" are, for example, "expectation level S display" (or "expectation level SSS display") when the next variable game (variable display of decorative symbols) is started. When an effect different from the effect corresponding to is executed, when the effect corresponding to the “expectation level S display” (or “expectation level SSS display”) is completed, etc., it is not displayed.

Also, the time (first time) from the start of displaying the prior expectation rank display RP to the non-display (the display is switched to the expectation rank display RN) and the start to the end of the display of the expectation rank display RN. The time (until the expectation rank display RN is hidden) (second time) may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, or the second time The time may be longer than the first time.

Further, the time (first time) from the display start of the prior expectation rank display RP to the non-display (the display is switched to the expectation rank display RN) and the display from the start of the special expectation rank display RNS to the end. Until (the special expectation rank display RNS is hidden) (the second time) may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, or The time of 2 may be longer than the first time.

Further, in FIG. 7E, the display start timing (first timing) of the “expectation level SSS display” and the display start timing (second timing) of the “expectation level S display” are the same. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

Further, the display end timing (first timing) of the “expectation level SSS display” and the display end timing (second timing) of the “expectation level S display” may be the same, or the first timing. The timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
(Production example c-2)

Another example of the effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 32(h) to 32(i). The figure (h)-the figure (i) is a figure which shows another example of stage production in steps.

At the timing shown in FIG. 30(h), the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is executed, and the “preliminary expectation S display” is displayed as shown in FIG. 45(d). Since the timing is the same as that shown in j), the description is omitted.

The timing shown in (i) of the figure shows a state in which the character effect display (animation for effecting acquisition of mini items) by the mini character (lord) is being executed. In this example, the mini character (lord) turns around and acquires the mini item displayed as "Up" (FIG. 45(f)). By the acquisition of the mini item “Up”, the effect currently being executed (blue pending change effect in this example) is promoted to an effect with a high jackpot expectation.

At the timing shown in FIG. 11(j), since the mini item “Up” is acquired in FIG. 11(i), the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is, for example, a red hold change effect with the jackpot expectation “A”. It has been promoted to.

That is, the variable icon h0 changes to red to give a pre-reading notice, and in tandem with this, the built-in LED of the family crest part 224A changes to red light emission.

Further, at this timing, the display of "preliminary expectation S display" (for example, character display "S?" and gold rectangular display) continues from the timing of FIG.

That is, in this example, the “preliminary expectation S display” shown in FIG. 45D is performed from the timing shown in FIG. 45I, and the “preliminary expectation S” is actually shown at the timing shown in FIG. As an effect corresponding to the "degree S display", an effect having a different jackpot expectation level (rank) (for example, a red-holding change effect whose jackpot expectation level is "A" rank) is executed.

The timing shown in (k) of the same figure is based on the fact that the effect of the jackpot expectation level "A" rank is executed as the effect corresponding to the "preliminary expectation S display" in the figure (j), and the expectation degree rank is notified. It is in a state where performance is being executed.

In this example, as the expectation degree rank display RN, as shown in FIG. 45(i), the characters "A", the red rectangle and the characters "red hold" are displayed, and the jackpot expectation rank is "A". It is informed that the effect of “” is being executed (“Display of expectation A” is being performed).

That is, in this example as well, an inconsistent production in which the prior expectation degree rank display (“preliminary expectation degree S display”) and the corresponding jackpot expectation degree rank (for example, the jackpot expectation degree “A” rank) of the corresponding production are inconsistent Running.

Therefore, the special expectation rank display RNS (special expectation rank display RNS) is performed at the timing of FIG. Here, the special expectation rank display RNS is a character display of "SSS", a rainbow color rectangular display, and a character display of "contradiction effect", and is displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083 (FIG. 45(l)).

The special expectation rank display RNS (“expectation SSS display”) is displayed in parallel with the “expectation A display”.

Also, at this timing, points are added based on the function related to the membership service of the player and the level is increased (here, the level is increased from 1.2 to 1.3), and the state in which the privilege is given Showing. The privilege here is, for example, opening of a song (song C). Further, the right sub liquid crystal 2083 displays a music release notification MM. In this case, the music release notification MM is displayed so as to overlap with at least one of the “expectation SSS display” and the “expectation A display” (in this example, the music release notification MM is “expected”. However, they may be displayed so as not to overlap with each other.

The timing shown in (l) of the same figure shows the state after a certain time has elapsed from the start of the display of the “expectation level A display” and the “expectation level SSS display”. At this timing, in the right sub liquid crystal 2083, the music release notification MM and the “expectation level A display” are hidden, but the “expectation level SSS display (FIG. 45(l))” is not hidden, The display continues.

The "expectation degree SSS display" is, for example, when the next variation game (variable display of the decorative pattern) is started, and when an effect different from the effect corresponding to the "expectation degree SSS display" is executed, "expectation degree SSS" is displayed. When the effect corresponding to the “degree SSS display” is finished, it is not displayed.

Also, the time (first time) from the start of displaying the prior expectation rank display RP to the non-display (the display is switched to the expectation rank display RN) and the start to the end of the display of the expectation rank display RN. The time (until the expectation rank display RN is hidden) (second time) may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, or the second time The time may be longer than the first time.

Further, the time (first time) from the display start of the prior expectation rank display RP to the non-display (the display is switched to the expectation rank display RN) and the display from the start of the special expectation rank display RNS to the end. Until (the special expectation rank display RNS is hidden) (the second time) may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, or The time of 2 may be longer than the first time.

Further, in FIG. 1L, the display start timing (first timing) of the “expectation degree SSS display” and the display start timing (second timing) of the “expectation degree A display” are the same. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

Further, in FIG. 1(l), the display end timing (first timing) of the music release notification MM and the display end timing (second timing) of the "expectation degree A display" may be the same. However, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 32, for example, a plurality of expectation rank displays RN are displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083. In this way, when a plurality of expected degree rank displays RN are displayed and the contents are the same, one expected degree rank display RN and the number thereof (for example, “×2”, “×3”). Or the like, or may be displayed so as to overlap some or all of the respective expected degree rank displays RN (the same applies to the music release notification MM).

In addition, when a plurality of expectation rank displays RN are displayed in an overlapping manner, they are hidden (or difficult to be visually recognized) (overlapped) by the operation of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136). The degree rank display RN may be displayed (re-displayed) on the foreground. Alternatively, in a configuration in which a plurality of expected degree rank displays RN are displayed, but only the latest expected degree rank display RN can be displayed, the previous expected degree rank display RN is re-displayed by button operation. Good.

In addition, the button may not be displayed again and only the latest expectation rank display RN may be visible to the player.

The configuration (display example and re-display example) in which a plurality of expectation rank displays RN are displayed is the same in the other embodiments.

In the present embodiment shown in FIGS. 30 to 45, the respective examples can be applied in combination with each other, and the same as the main effect example C shown in FIG. 32, but only the configuration of the main effect example C in the present embodiment. The configuration may not include.

In addition, in the present embodiment shown in FIGS. 30 to 45, a configuration that does not include the configuration of another one example of presentation may be used.
<Production example d>

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an example of the expectation notification production centering on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Production example d-1)

Another example of the effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 33B to 33F. The figure (b)-the figure (f) is a figure which shows another example of an effect in steps.

At the timing shown in FIG. 30B, the blue holding change effect by the change icon h0 is executed, and the “preliminary expectation A display” shown in FIG. 45C is displayed, and FIG. Since the timing is the same as that shown in, the description will be omitted.

The timing shown in (c) of the same figure shows the state in which the character effect display (animation for effecting acquisition of the mini item MI) by the mini character (lord) is being executed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 45(f), the mini character (lord) turns around and acquires the mini item displayed as "Up". By the acquisition of the mini item “Up”, the effect currently being executed (blue pending change effect in this example) is promoted to an effect with a high jackpot expectation.

At the timing shown in FIG. 10D, the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is, for example, the big hit expectation degree “S”, due to the mini item “Up” acquired in FIG. It has been promoted to.

That is, the variation icon h0 changes to the hall icon (FIG. 45(g)) to give a pre-reading notice, and in tandem with this, the built-in LED of the family crest actor 224A changes to light emission of gold.

Further, at this timing, the display of the “preliminary expectation degree A display” (for example, the character display “A?” and the display of a red rectangle) shown in FIG. 45C is continued from the timing of FIG. 45C. ing.

That is, in this example, the “preliminary expectation A display” is performed from the timing of FIG. 11B, and actually corresponds to the “preliminary expectation A display” at the timing of FIG. An effect with a jackpot expectation level (rank) different from the effect (for example, a hall holding change effect with a jackpot expectation level of "S" rank) is executed.

The timing shown in (e) of the figure is a state in which the expectation rank notification effect is being executed based on the effect having the jackpot expectation level of “S” being executed.

In this example, as the expectation degree rank display RN, the character "S", the gold rectangle and the letters "don't hold" are displayed as shown in FIG. 45(j), and the jackpot expectation rank is "S". Is informed that the effect is being executed ("expectation level S display" is being performed).

Further, at this timing, since the effect of the jackpot expectation “A” rank corresponding to the advance expectation degree rank display (“preliminary expectation degree A display”) is not executed, the “preliminary expectation degree A display” is displayed (Fig. 45(c)) also continues.

Also, at this timing, points are added based on the function related to the membership service of the player and the level is increased (here, the level is increased from 1.2 to 1.3), and the state in which the privilege is given Showing. The privilege here is, for example, opening of a song (song C). Further, the right sub liquid crystal 2083 displays a music release notification MM (FIG. 45(h)).

That is, on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, "preliminary expectation A display", "expectation S display", and song release notification MM are displayed. The song release notification MM includes "preliminary expectation A display" and "expectation S display. Is displayed so as to overlap with at least one of them (in this example, the music release notification MM overlaps with the “expectation S display”), but is displayed so as not to overlap with any of them. May be done.

The timing shown in (f) of the same figure shows a state after a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of display of the “preliminary expectation A display (FIG. 45(c))” and the “expectation S display (FIG. 45(j))”. ing. At this timing, in the right sub liquid crystal 2083, the song opening notification MM is hidden, but neither the “preliminary expectation A display” nor the “expectation S display” is not hidden, and the display continues. There is.

The "expectation S display" is different from the effect corresponding to the "expectation S display" (or "expectation SSS display"), for example, when the next variation game (variable display of decorative symbols) starts. When the effect is executed, when the effect corresponding to the “expectation level S display” (or the “expectation level SSS display”) ends, it is not displayed.

In addition, the “preliminary expectation A display” is a display that continues because the corresponding effect (effect with the jackpot expectation “A” rank) is not executed at this timing, and the corresponding effect ( It becomes non-display by the execution of the jackpot expectation “A” rank production).

Further, the display end timing (first timing) of the “expectation degree S display” and the display end timing (second timing) of the “preliminary expectation A display” may be the same, or the first May be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
(Production example d-2)
Another example of the effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 33(h) to 33(l).
The figure (h)-the figure (l) is a figure which shows another example of stage effects in steps.

The timing shown in FIG. 30(h) is a state in which the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is executed and the “preliminary expectation S display (FIG. 45(d))” is displayed, and FIG. 30(j). Since the timing is the same as that shown in, the description will be omitted.

The timing shown in (i) of the figure shows a state in which the character effect display (animation for obtaining effect of the mini item MI) by the mini character (lord) is being executed. In this example, the mini character (lord) turns around and acquires the mini item displayed as "Up". By the acquisition of the mini item “Up”, the effect currently being executed (blue pending change effect in this example) is promoted to an effect with a high jackpot expectation.

At the timing shown in FIG. 11(j), since the mini item “Up” is acquired in FIG. 11(i), the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is, for example, a red hold change effect with the jackpot expectation “A”. It has been promoted to.

That is, the variable icon h0 changes to red to give a pre-reading notice, and in tandem with this, the built-in LED of the family crest part 224A changes to red light emission.

Further, at this timing, the display of “preliminary expectation S display” (for example, the character display “S?” shown in FIG. 45(d) and the gold rectangular display) continues from the timing of FIG. ing.

That is, in this example, the “preliminary expectation S display” is performed from the timing of FIG. 11H, and actually corresponds to the “prior expectation S display” at the timing of FIG. An effect with a jackpot expectation level (rank) different from the effect (for example, a red hold change effect with a jackpot expectation level of “A” rank) is executed.

The timing shown in FIG. 9(k) is a state in which the expectation rank notification effect is being executed based on the effect having the jackpot expectation level “A” rank being executed.

In this example, as the expectation degree rank display RN, the character “A”, the red rectangle and the letters “red reserved” shown in FIG. 45(i) are displayed, and the jackpot expectation rank is “A”. It is informed that the effect is being executed ("Expectation level A display" is being performed).

In addition, at this timing, since the effect of the jackpot expectation “S” rank corresponding to the prior expectation degree rank display (“preliminary expectation degree S display”) is not executed, the “preliminary expectation degree S display” is displayed (Fig. 45(d)) also continues.

The timing shown in (l) of the same figure shows the state after a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of display of the “preliminary expectation S display” and the “expectation A display”. At this timing, on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, the “expectation degree A display” is hidden, while the “preliminary expectation degree S display” continues to be displayed.

Note that the “preliminary expectation S display” is a display that continues because the corresponding effect (effect with the big hit expectation “S” rank) is not executed at this timing, and the corresponding effect ( It is hidden by the execution of the jackpot expectation of "S" rank).

Further, in (l) of the figure, the display end timing (first timing) of the "expectation degree A display" and the display end timing (second timing) of the "preliminary expectation degree S display" are the same. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

In addition, in the present embodiment (drafting example d), the configuration in which the plurality of prior expectation rank display RPs or the expectation rank display RNs are displayed without overlapping is described. A configuration in which a part of the degree rank display RN is overlapped and displayed may be used.

In addition, in the present embodiment (drafting example d), the configuration in which the plurality of prior expectation degree rank displays RP or the expectation degree rank displays RN are displayed vertically (in a vertical arrangement) has been described. The configuration may be such that the RP or the expectation rank display RN is displayed on the left and right (side by side).

Further, in the present embodiment (production example d), the case where the ranks of the expectation degree rank display RN and the prior expectation degree rank display RP are different has been described as an example, but the same is true even when both ranks are the same.
<Production example e>

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing another example of the expectation notification effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Production example e-1)
34B to 34H are diagrams showing another example of the effect step by step.

At the timing shown in FIG. 30B, the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is executed and the “preliminary expectation A display (FIG. 45C)” is displayed, and FIG. Since the timing is the same as that shown in, the description will be omitted.

In the same figure (d), at a certain timing, as shown in FIGS. 30(b) to 30(e), a sub-game effect by a mini character (lord) (for example, the target hit “shown in FIG. 45(b)”). Sub-game effect" and the like) are executed, and as a result, in the right sub liquid crystal 2083, "preliminary expectation degree A display (FIG. 45(c))" is added to "preliminary expectation degree S display (FIG. 45(d))". Is displayed. In this case, the “preliminary expectation level A display” displayed earlier is displayed in the lower row, and the “preliminary expectation degree S display” displayed later is displayed in the upper row in a vertical arrangement.

The timing shown in (e) of the figure shows a state in which the character effect display (animation for effecting acquisition of the mini item MI) by the mini character (lord) is being executed. In this example, the mini character (lord) turns around and acquires the mini item displayed as "Up" ((FIG. 45(f)). The acquisition of the mini item "Up" produces the effect currently being executed (in this example, , Blue hold change effect) is promoted to an effect with high jackpot expectation.

At the timing shown in FIG. 6F, the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is, for example, the red hold change effect with the jackpot expectation level “A” because the mini item “Up” is acquired in FIG. It has been promoted to.

That is, the variable icon h0 changes to red to give a pre-reading notice, and in tandem with this, the built-in LED of the family crest part 224A changes to red light emission.

Further, at this timing, the "preliminary expectation S display" and the "preliminary expectation A display" are continuously displayed from the timing of FIG. 45D (FIGS. 45D and 45C).

In other words, in this example, the “preliminary expectation A display” is performed from the timing of FIG. 11B, and actually corresponds to the “preliminary expectation A display” at the timing of FIG. A jackpot expectation (rank) effect (for example, a red-holding change effect whose jackpot expectation is "A" rank) is being executed.

At the timing shown in FIG. 7G, the expectation rank notification production is executed (the “expectation degree A display” is performed) based on the execution of the jackpot expectation “A” rank. It is in a state. The "expectation level A display" in this case is switched (replaced) to the "preliminary expectation level A display" and displayed.

Further, at this timing, since the production with the jackpot expectation “S” rank corresponding to the prior expectation degree rank display (“preliminary expectation degree S display”) is not executed, the “preliminary expectation degree S display” is also displayed. doing.

The timing shown in (h) of the same figure shows the state after a fixed time has elapsed from the start of the display of the “expectation degree A display”. At this timing, on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, the “expectation degree A display” is hidden, while the “preliminary expectation degree S display” continues to be displayed.

At this timing, the “preliminary expectation S display” display is moved to the area where “expectation A display” was displayed because the “expectation A display” displayed in the lower row is hidden. It is displayed by sliding.

Note that the “preliminary expectation S display” is a display that continues because the corresponding effect (effect with the big hit expectation “S” rank) is not executed at this timing, and the corresponding effect ( It is hidden by the execution of the jackpot expectation of "S" rank).

In this way, a plurality of prior expectation degree rank display RPs (here, “preliminary expectation degree S display” and “preliminary expectation degree S display”) are displayed at the same time when the prior expectation degree rank display RPs start displaying at different timings. In such a case, the one prior expectation degree rank display RP displayed earlier is displayed in the lower stage, and the other prior expectation degree rank displays RP are displayed so as to be stacked in the upper stage in the order of addition.

Then, the expectation rank display RN corresponding to any of the plurality of prior expectation rank displays RP (the effect of the jackpot expectation (rank) is executed to become the expectation rank display RN, and the expectation rank display RN (after a certain period of time elapses)). When the expected degree rank display RN displayed in the lower row is hidden, the prior expected degree rank display RP or the expected degree rank display RN displayed in the upper row is changed to the lower row. Is displayed by sliding (sliding) to the display area of, that is, in the case where the prior expectation rank display RP or the expectation rank display RN in the lower row is not displayed, the upper row is displayed as in the so-called "deepening". The prior expectation degree rank display RP or the expectation degree rank display RN is sequentially moved to the display area in the lower stage and displayed again.
(Production example e-2)
FIG. 34(j) to FIG. 34(p) are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

Since the timings shown in (j) to (m) of the same figure are the same as those shown in (b) to (e) of the same figure, description thereof will be omitted.

At the timing shown in FIG. 14(n), since the mini item “Up” is acquired in FIG. 16(m), the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is, for example, the big hit expectation degree “S” hold change effect. It has been promoted to.

That is, the variation icon h0 changes to the hall icon (FIG. 45(g)) to give a pre-reading notice, and in tandem with this, the built-in LED of the family crest actor 224A changes to light emission of gold.

Further, at this timing, the display of "preliminary expectation S display" and "preliminary expectation A display" (FIGS. 45(d) and 45(c)) continue from the timing of FIG.

In other words, in this example, the "preliminary expectation S display" is performed from the timing of (l) in the figure, and actually corresponds to the "preliminary expectation S display" at the timing of (n) in the figure. A big hit expectation (rank) effect (for example, a big hit expectation degree "S"-rank hall holding change effect) is being executed.

At the timing shown in (o) of the figure, the expectation rank notification effect is executed (the "expectation degree S display" is performed) based on the execution of the jackpot expectation degree of "S" rank being executed. It is in a state. In this case, the “expectation level S display” is switched (replaced) to the “preliminary expectation level S display” and displayed.

Also, at this timing, points are added based on the function related to the membership service of the player and the level is increased (here, the level is increased from 1.2 to 1.3), and the state in which the privilege is given Showing. The privilege here is, for example, opening of a song (song C). Further, the right sub liquid crystal 2083 displays a music release notification MM.

In addition, at this timing, since the effect of the jackpot expectation “A” rank corresponding to the prior expectation degree rank display (“preliminary expectation degree A display”) is not executed, the “preliminary expectation degree A display” is also displayed. doing.

That is, in the right sub liquid crystal 2083, from the bottom, "preliminary expectation A display (Fig. 45(c))", "expectation S display (Fig. 45(j))", song release notification MM (Fig. 45(h)). Are displayed vertically in this order, and the music release notification MM overlaps at least the “expectation S display” (even if the release notification MM is displayed so as not to overlap the “expectation S display”). Good).

The timing shown in (p) of the figure shows the state after a certain time has elapsed from the start of the display of the “expectation degree S display”. At this timing, the music release notification MM is hidden on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, while the "expectation level S display" and the "preliminary expectation level A display" continue to be displayed.

Note that the “preliminary expectation A display” is a display that continues because the corresponding effect (effect with jackpot expectation “A” rank) is not executed at this timing, and the corresponding effect ( It becomes non-display by the execution of the jackpot expectation “A” rank production).
(Production example e-3)
FIG. 34(q) to FIG. 34(r) are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

The timing shown in FIG. 31(q) is the same as the timing shown in FIG.

In the same figure (r), at a certain timing, as shown in FIGS. 30(b) to 30(e), a sub-game effect by a mini character (lord) (for example, the target hit “shown in FIG. 45(b)”). (A plurality of sub game effects) are executed, and as a result, the “preliminary expectation A display” and the “preliminary expectation S display” are simultaneously displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083. In this case, for example, "preliminary expectation A display" having a low jackpot expectation rank is displayed in the lower row, and "preliminary expectation S display" having a high jackpot expectation rank is displayed in a vertical arrangement in the upper row. The display order may be reversed.

As described above, in the present embodiment (production example e), the configuration in which the plurality of prior expectation rank display RPs or the expectation rank display RNs are displayed without overlapping is described. A configuration in which a part of the degree rank display RN is overlapped and displayed may be used.

In addition, in the present embodiment (production example e), the configuration in which the plurality of prior expectation degree rank displays RP or the expectation degree rank displays RN are displayed vertically (in a vertical arrangement) has been described. The configuration may be such that the RP or the expectation rank display RN is displayed on the left and right (side by side).

Further, in the present embodiment (effect example e), the case where the ranks of the expectation degree rank display RN and the prior expectation degree rank display RP are different has been described as an example, but the same is true even when both ranks are the same.
<Production example f>

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the anticipation notification effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

The timing shown in FIG. 30B is a state in which the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is executed and the “preliminary expectation A display” is displayed, which is similar to the timing shown in FIG. Therefore, the description is omitted.

The timing shown in FIG. 7C is, for example, the timing of transition from the first time to the second time of the pseudo continuous effect, and the movable body (in this example, Yatsushiro 224B and general officer 224C) production is executed. It is in a state. This effect is, for example, when the built-in LED lit in white at the initial position indicated by the broken line, the Yashiro Actor 224B and the general officer 224C change to blue illuminance and descend from the initial position, and part of the main liquid crystal 2081. It is an effect that overlaps with (for example, a part of the variable display of the first decorative symbol), and as an example, is an accessory effect with a jackpot expectation of “A” rank.

Further, at this timing, the display of “preliminary expectation A display” (for example, the character display “A?” and the display of a red rectangle) continues from the timing of FIG.

That is, in this example, the “preliminary expectation A display” is performed from the timing of FIG. 11B, and actually corresponds to the “preliminary expectation A display” at the timing of FIG. An effect (for example, a character effect having a jackpot expectation of "A" rank) is being executed.

The timing shown in (d) of the figure is the same as the notification of “preliminary expectation A display” in FIG. It is in a running state. The Yatsushiro 224B and the general 224C have returned to their initial positions.

In this example, as the expectation rank display RN, the character "A", the red rectangle and the character "logo drop" are displayed as shown in FIG. 45(m), and the jackpot expectation rank is "A". Is informed that the effect is being executed ("Expectation level A display" is being performed).

The timing shown in (e) of the figure shows a state in which the “prior expectation degree A display (FIG. 45(c))” is displayed again on the left sub liquid crystal 2082.

In the pseudo continuous effect, a plurality of effects are repeatedly executed. For example, in this production example, as a part of the pseudo-relational production, a production in which the Yatsushiro 224B and the general military 224C repeatedly descend and rise as shown in FIGS. To do. That is, the character effect corresponding to the “preliminary expectation A display” displayed in FIG. 11B is an effect that continues until the pseudo-relational effect ends.

Therefore, even if the display is switched from the “preliminary expectation A display” to the “expectation A display” by the descending of the Yatsushiro 224B and the general 224C (FIG. (d), again, FIG. “Preliminary expectation A display” is displayed at the timing shown in ).

In this case, the “preliminary expectation A display” is redisplayed at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the Yatsushiro 224B and the general 224C return to the initial position from the position shown in FIG. 7C). (It is displayed overlaid on "Expectation A display"). Alternatively, the display may be switched from the “preliminary expectation A display” (the display may be switched by an animation display in which the “expectation A display” is turned upside down).

The timing shown in (g) of the figure is, for example, the timing of shifting from the second time to the third time of the pseudo-relational effect, and subsequently, the character effect production by the Yatsushiro character 224B and the general character 224C (the jackpot expectation is "A" rank. Character effect) is being executed.

Further, at this timing, the display of “preliminary expectation A display” (for example, the character display of “A?” and the display of a red rectangle) continues.

The timing shown in (h) of the figure is the "expectation degree A display" based on the performance of the jackpot expectation degree "A" rank being executed as in the notification of "preliminary expectation degree A display" in the figure (g). Is running. The Yatsushiro 224B and the general 224C have returned to their initial positions. In this case, the “expectation degree A display” is the display of the letters “A”, the red rectangle and the letters “logo drop”, as shown in FIG. 45(m).

The timing shown in (i) of the figure is a state in which the character effect, which is a part of the pseudo-relation effect, is finished, and the jackpot expectation corresponding to the “expectation degree A display” is an effect (rank effect) Based on the end of the effect, as shown in FIG. 45(n), a display indicating the end of the effect is superimposed (overlapped) on the “expectation degree A display” (in this example, the character “Done” is displayed). The entered mark) is displayed.

At the timing shown in FIG. 9(j), after a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of the display of “Expectation level A display”, the “Expectation level A display” and the display indicating the end of the effect overlapping therewith are not displayed. It has become (erased).

In addition, in the same figure (j), the timing (first timing) at which the "expectation degree A display" is hidden and the display (a mark containing the character "done") indicating the end of the production are hidden. The same timing (second timing) may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

Further, in this example, the “preliminary expectation degree A display” is switched to the “expectation degree A display” in the same figure (d), but in one effect (for example, one pseudo continuous effect), a plurality of combinations When a motion of an object (moving up and down in this example) is performed, the “preliminary expectation A display” may be continued without switching to the “expectation A display” during the production period.

Further, in this example, the case where the “preliminary expectation A display” and the “expectation A display” are displayed, but the “expectation S display” (“preliminary expectation S display” that is not hidden even after the end of the corresponding production is described. In the case of “degree S display”), the display is continued together with the display (the mark containing the character “done”) indicating the end of the effect in FIG.
<Production example g>

36 to 37 are diagrams showing another example of the degree-of-expectation notification effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, in stages.

The timings shown in FIGS. 36(b) to 36(f) are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 34(d) to 34(h), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

At the timing shown in FIG. 6H, in the state where the “preliminary expectation S display” is being performed, for example, a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect) with a jackpot expectation of “S” rank is executed on the main liquid crystal 2081. Is the state that has started. In the icon display area 800 of the main liquid crystal 2081, only the variable icon h0 is displayed in red, and the family coat emblem 224A is also lit in red in conjunction with the variable icon h0.

The timing shown in (i) of FIG. 45 is as shown in FIG. 45(k) based on the fact that the effect of “S” rank for the jackpot expectation is executed, as the notification of “Preliminary Expectation S Display” in FIG. As shown in the figure, the letters "S", the gold rectangle and the letters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed to notify that the production with the rank "S" for the jackpot expectation is being executed ("Expectation" "S display" is performed).

Further, points are added based on the function related to the membership service of the player, the level is increased (here, the level is increased from 1.2 to 1.3), and the privilege is shown. The privilege here is, for example, opening of the song (song C), and a song release notification MM (FIG. 45(h)) for notifying that the song C has been released is displayed above the "expectation level S display". Has been done.

At the timing shown in FIG. 11(j), the confrontation scene in the super reach effect (swordsman reach effect) is displayed, and in the right sub liquid crystal 2083, the “expectation degree S display” continues to be displayed, but the song is released. The notification MM is hidden.

At the timing shown in (k) of the figure, the animation before the start of the button effect is displayed so as to overlap the front of the confrontation scene in the super reach effect (swordsman reach effect). "Display" continues to be displayed. Instead of displaying the start animation of the button effect, a simple effect image (not related to the button effect) may be displayed.

The timing shown in (l) of the same figure shows the state where the button effect has been executed. That is, an animation related to the button effect is displayed in front of the confrontation scene in the super reach effect (swordsman reach effect). The animation relating to the button effect is, for example, an image (button image BG) imitating the chance button 136 and a display (elapsed time notification image TG) indicating the valid period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136. The button image BG is displayed in the same red color as the display color of the variable icon h0 and the lighting color of the family coat emblem 224A, and accordingly, the chance button 136 is also operable by turning on the built-in LED in red. Is informed.

The display start timing (first timing) of the button image BG and the red lighting timing (second timing) of the chance button 136 may be the same timing, or the first timing may be the second timing. The timing may be earlier than, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

The timing shown in (m) of the figure shows a state in which the chance button 136 is operated within the valid acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136.

The timings shown in (n) to (q) of the same figure are the states in which a series of effects based on the operation of the chance button 136 are being performed. A series of effects based on the operation of the chance button 136 is, for example, as shown in (n) of the same figure, from the initial position (for example, below the main liquid crystal 2081) indicated by the broken line, in which the family coat emblem 224A emits rainbow colors. Ascending to the front of the main liquid crystal 2081, the Yatsushiro character 224B and the general character 224B also light up in rainbow colors and repeatedly move up and down above the main liquid crystal 2081. Further, in the image display device 208′, an illumination display, a special image (animation) display, or the like is performed, and the chance buttons 136 and 137 also produce an effect in which the built-in LED lights in a rainbow color ((n) to (n) of FIG. (P)). Then, the family crest monument 224A returns to the initial position ((q) in the figure), and a series of effects based on the operation of the chance button 136 ends. In addition, in the figures (n) to (q), a series of effects based on the operation of the chance button 136 is also performed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, and the advance expectation rank display RP (expectation rank display RN) is shown. Is hidden.

The timing shown in (r) of the figure shows a state in which the character (lord) wins in the super reach effect (swordsman reach effect). That is, on the main liquid crystal 2081, an image in which the character (lord) wins the character (swordsman) and the character "win" are displayed. Further, the accessory (family crest 224A, Yatsushiro 224B, general officer 224C) continues to be illuminated in rainbow color at the initial position, and the chance buttons 136 and 137 are also illuminated in rainbow.

FIG. 37(a) is a state following FIG. 36(r), and the decorative pattern of the jackpot pattern combination (here, "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6") is displayed in the display area of the main liquid crystal 2081. (Vibration fluctuation display, temporary stop display).

At the timing shown in FIG. 18B, the decorative symbol of the jackpot symbol combination (here, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”) is stopped and displayed in the display area of the main liquid crystal 2081, and the 4-symbol display device 284 is displayed. Indicates that the special figure 1 (quadrangle) is filled with black and the special figure 2 (round) is displayed with gray, which means that the special figure 1 is in the stopped state.

The timing shown in FIG. 6C is a state in which the mission achievement display (notification) MA is displayed. In this example, the mission achievement display MA corresponds to the display of the button effect in FIGS. 36(m) and 36(n), and the display “NO11: I saw the big button” and the character (lord) in FIG. 36(r). The display is "NO52: swordsman reach big hit" corresponding to the display of the victory scene and the stop display of the decorative design of the big hit in FIG. 27(b).

In this embodiment, the mission achievement display MA is displayed in addition to the prior expectation rank display RP and the expectation rank display RN. A plurality of mission achievement indicators MA are prepared. By collecting the mission achievement indicators MA, the player can obtain an advantageous privilege according to the type (content) and the number thereof.

The mission achievement display MA is a display corresponding to the membership service and is different from the prior expectation rank display RP (expectation rank display RN) for notifying the rank of the jackpot expectation of the performance to be executed, and is the display corresponding to the membership-based service. This is a display (notification) that is not directly related to. For this reason, the mission achievement display MA does not interfere with the performance, and is not confused with the notification corresponding to a certain fluctuation, and is notified when the fluctuation is stopped, for example, when the fluctuation is stopped. Is.

After the mission achievement display MA is displayed, the big hit game starts as shown in (d) of the figure, the probability variation promotion effect is executed ((f) of the figure), and the big hit game ends ((h) of the figure). )).

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in (i) of the same figure, after the jackpot game is over, as the mission achievement display MA, the fact that it is a probable change (in this example, "NO21: probable change promotion" is notified. The display is displayed, for example, at one of the big hit end intervals (from the end of the last round of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game) in order to prevent the ball from coming off.

On the other hand, the prior expectation degree rank display RP and the expectation degree rank display RN) of the present embodiment may be notified before the final stage in a branching manner of the corresponding production. For example, if a red hold change effect (for example, jackpot expectation “A”) is executed, even if there is a possibility of being promoted to a hall hold change effect (for example, jackpot expectation “S”), advance expectation There may be a case where “preliminary expected degree A display” is performed as the degree rank display RP (determined by the red hold change effect).
<Production example h>

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing another example of the expectation notification effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Production example h-1)
38B to 38E are diagrams showing another example of the effect step by step.

The timing shown in FIG. 13B is a state in which the decorative symbols of the outlying symbol combination (in this example, the symbol combination of “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 8”) are stopped and displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081. In the icon display area 800, the variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in white, respectively, to notify that the special figure 1 has a hold of 2.

At the timing shown in FIG. 7C, one hold is exhausted, and in the icon display area 800, the variable icon h0 changes to blue to give advance notice. In addition, the hold icon h11 is displayed in white, and notifies that the hold of the special figure 1 is 1.

The timing shown in (d) of the figure is a state in which it is informed that a certain effect (here, the blue-holding change effect shown in (c) of the figure) has been executed by the dialogue of the mini character (lord). .. Specifically, as shown in the enlarged view of the lower part of FIG. 7D, a balloon SS is displayed on the mini character (lord), the characters "Hold on blue change" is displayed, and the blue hold change effect is executed. It has been notified (ex post facto) that it has been done.

The timing shown in (e) of the figure is a state in which the posterior notification of the effect by the mini character (lord) is hidden.

The posterior notification of the effect by the mini character (Den) in this embodiment (notification by the dialogue of the mini character (Den)) does not notify the rank of the jackpot expectation degree of the effect, and is executed after this timing. Since it is not a notification in advance about an effect that may be performed, the notification is different from the prior expectation rank display RP of the present embodiment.
(Production example h-2)
FIG. 38(h) to FIG. 38(l) are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

The timing shown in FIG. 6H is the same as the timing shown in FIG.

At the timing shown in (i) of the figure, one hold is exhausted, and in the icon display area 800, the variable icon h0 changes to red to give advance notice. In addition, the hold icon h11 is displayed in white, and notifies that the hold of the special figure 1 is 1.

The timing shown in (j) of the figure is a state in which it is informed that a certain effect (here, the red-holding change effect shown in (i) of the figure) has been executed by the mini character (lord). Specifically, the balloon SS is displayed on the mini character (lord), and the character "Hold on red changes" is displayed to notify (ex post facto) that the red on-hold change effect has been executed.

At the timing shown in (k) of the same figure, for example, as shown in an enlarged view in the lower figure of the same figure, for example, an image (for example, if the player is a player who overlaps the display area of the expectation rank display RN of the right sub liquid crystal 2083). It shows a state in which a visual effect image AE, etc., which is easily noticed, is displayed. In this case, the player directs the player's line of sight to the display area of the expectation rank display RN by, for example, displaying an arrow from the vicinity of the mini character (lord) to the display area of the expectation rank display RN. The display is also done.

At the timing shown in FIG. 1L, the visual effect image AE is hidden and the expectation degree rank display RN (in this example, “expectation degree A display”) is visible to the player.

In the present embodiment, the posterior notification of the effect by the mini character (lord) (the posterior notification similar to that in FIG. 7D) and the expectation rank display RN by the mini character (lord) are performed. The prior expectation rank display RP of the embodiment is not performed.
(Production example h-3)
FIG. 38(n) to FIG. 38(r) are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

The timing shown in FIG. 30(n) is the same as that in FIG. 30(g), so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. However, in the right sub liquid crystal 2083, the prior expectation degree rank display RP shown in FIG. Is a state in which "preliminary expectation A display" is displayed.

At the timing shown in (o) of the figure, one hold is exhausted, and the variable icon h0 changes to red in the icon display area 800 to give a pre-reading notice. In addition, the hold icon h11 is displayed in white, and notifies that the hold of the special figure 1 is 1.

The timing shown in (p) of the figure is a state in which it is informed that a certain effect (here, the red-holding change effect shown in (o) of the figure) is executed by the normally displayed mini character (lord). is there. Specifically, a balloon SS as shown in an enlarged view in the figure (d) below is displayed on the mini character (lord), the characters "holding changes to red" are displayed, and the red holding change effect is executed. It has been notified (ex post facto) that it has been done.

At the timing shown in (q) of the figure, as in the case of (k) of the figure, an image (for example, an image which overlaps the display area of the prior expectation degree rank display RP (“preliminary expectation degree A display”) of the right sub liquid crystal 2083 (for example, It shows a state in which a visual effect image or the like that is easily noticed by the player is displayed. However, in this case, the visual effect image is displayed behind the “preliminary expectation A display” and the “preliminary expectation A display” is visible to the player, as shown in the enlarged view of the lower part of FIG. Has become.

The visual effect image is not displayed at the timing shown in FIG. In addition, in the same figure (o), the "preliminary expectation A display" is switched (replaced) to the "expectation A display" based on the execution of the jackpot expectation "A" rank performance. The “expectation level A display” is visible to the player.

In the present embodiment, the posterior notification of the effect by the mini character (lord) (the posterior notification similar to that in FIG. 7D), the preliminary expected degree rank display RP, and the expected degree rank display RN are performed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1L and FIG. 1R, the expectation rank display RN is performed with the same effect (display mode) regardless of the presence or absence of the prior expectation rank display RP. However, the effect (display mode) in which the expected degree rank display RN is performed may be different depending on the presence or absence of the prior expected degree rank display RP.
<Direction example i>

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the expectation notification effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Production example h-1)

The timing shown in FIG. 14B is a state in which the mission notification effect is being executed by the mini character (lord) while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed on the main liquid crystal 2081. Specifically, the mini character (lord) displays a balloon SS "Temple with 7 symbols" to inform the mission.

The timing shown in FIG. 7D shows a state in which the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol and the left symbol in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the mission (temple of 7 symbols) has been achieved.

Further, at the timing shown in (e) of the figure, an effect based on the achievement of the mission shown in (d) of the figure is executed. In this example, the production based on the achievement of the mission is the display of characters (in this case, "steel plate!!") that suggests that a big hit will be achieved.

In the present embodiment, as a result of the mission notification effect by the mini character (lord) of FIG. 9B, when the mission is achieved, a display indicating that it will be a big hit is executed. However, since the mission notification effect of FIG. 7B may not be achieved by the mission (for example, 7 symbols are not stopped and displayed), and it does not notify the rank of the jackpot expectation degree, so that the present embodiment has This is an effect different from the prior expectation rank notification production (preliminary expectation rank display RP).

Although illustration is omitted, in the same figure (e), the expectation rank display RN may be displayed in addition to the characters (here, "Iron plate!!") indicating that the jackpot is a big hit.
<Production example j>

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another example of the degree-of-expectation notification effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and shows an example of the appearance mode of the preliminary expectation level display RP. It is a figure.

The timing shown in FIG. 40B is a state in which the first decorative symbol is variably displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081. In the icon display area 800, a white variation icon h0 is displayed on the right end, and white hold icons h11, 12 are displayed on the left. A timer advance notice effect is executed on the main liquid crystal 2081. The timer advance notice effect of this example is overlapped with a part of the variable display of the first decorative pattern, and a blue timer TM as shown in an enlarged view in the lower diagram of FIG. It is a blue timer effect that displays.

At the timing shown in FIG. 9D, the timer TM is 0, and a display indicating that the timer TM is 0 is displayed. At this timing, a mini character MC2 different from the normal display mini character MC (mini character (don)) is displayed on the front of the variable display of the first decorative pattern so as to overlap a part of the decorative pattern. To be done. In this example, the mini character MC2 is a mini character (lord) shown enlarged in the lower diagram of FIG. Then, after the timer TM and the mini-character MC2 are hidden, as shown in (e) of the figure, the prior expectation rank display RP (here, “preliminary expectation A display”) is displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083 part. To be done.

In this way, the prior expectation degree rank display RP (here, “preliminary expectation degree A display”) is the character effect display (for example, the mini character) by the mini character (Den) that appears later at the timing shown in FIG. It may be displayed in association with (appearance display of (Den)) ((e) in the same figure).

At the timing shown in FIG. 6G, one hold is exhausted and the next variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the main liquid crystal 2081. At this timing, since the effect corresponding to the “preliminary expectation degree A display” is not executed, the “preliminary expectation degree A display” is continuously displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083.

At the timing shown in FIG. 13H, another timer advance notice effect is being executed on the main liquid crystal 2081. As shown in the enlarged view of the figure (h) below, this timer advance notice effect overlaps a part of the variable display of the first decorative symbol with a red timer TM displayed, for example, performing a countdown display of 30 seconds. It is a red timer production. Further, this red timer effect is an effect corresponding to the "preliminary expectation A display".

At the timing shown in (i) of the same figure, the timer TM starts counting down as shown in an enlarged view in the right figure of (i), and the red timer effect corresponding to the "preliminary expectation A display" is executed. Thus, the “preliminary expectation A display” is switched (replaced) to the “expectation A display” and displayed.

At the timing shown in FIG. 7(j), the countdown of the timer TM progresses as shown in the enlarged view on the right side of FIG. Is hidden.

The timing shown in (l) of the figure is a state in which the timer TM has become 0 as shown in an enlarged view in the right figure of (l), and a display indicating that the timer TM is 0 is displayed. .. Then, at this timing, on the front of the variable display of the first decorative design, a mini character MC2 (mini character (customer)) different from the normally displayed mini character (customer) so as to overlap a part of the decorative design. Is displayed.

As shown in (m) of the same figure, when the red holding effect is executed by the red timer effect in which the white variation icon h0 is changed to the hall icon, the right sub liquid crystal 2083 is displayed, as shown in (n) of the figure. An expectation degree rank display RN (here, “expectation degree S display”) is displayed on the section.

When the timer advance notice effect is displayed with a short timer, the advance expectation rank display RP is more likely to be displayed than when a long timer is displayed. In addition, when the timer advance notice effect is displayed with a long timer, the preliminary expectation degree rank display RP may be displayed more easily than when a short timer is displayed.

Further, when a timer with a short timer notice effect is displayed, the expectation degree rank display RN is more likely to be displayed than when a timer with a long timer announcement is displayed. The expectation rank display RN may be displayed more easily when displaying a timer with a long timer notice effect than when displaying a short timer.

Further, when a timer with a short timer announcement effect is displayed, the prior expectation rank display RP having a higher jackpot expectation is more likely to be displayed than when a timer with a long timer notice is displayed. It should be noted that when a timer with a long timer announcement effect is displayed, the advance expectation rank display RP having a higher jackpot expectation may be displayed more easily than when a short timer is displayed.

In addition, when a timer with a short timer announcement effect is displayed, the expectation rank display RN having a higher jackpot expectation is more likely to be displayed than when a timer with a long notice is displayed. It should be noted that when a timer with a long timer announcement effect is displayed, the expectation rank display RN with a higher jackpot expectation may be displayed more easily than when a timer with a short notice is displayed.
<Direction example k>

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing another example of the expectation notification production centering on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and a diagram showing another example of the appearance mode of the prior expectation rank display RP. Is.
(Production example k-1)
41(b) to 41(e) are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

The timing shown in FIG. 41(b) is a state where the main liquid crystal 2081 is performing the stop display (swing variation display, temporary stop display) of the first decorative symbol. The symbol combination of the first decorative symbol is, for example, "decoration 4-special symbol-decoration 8". Further, this special symbol is, for example, a pseudo continuous symbol.

This special pattern is an image related to the prior expectation degree rank display RP (in this example, a character display of "A?" and a display of a red rectangle as shown in an enlarged view in the lower diagram of FIG. An image RPG simulating the expectation rank display RP) is included (attached), and by the stop display of this special symbol, the advance expectation rank display RP (in this example, “preliminary expectation A "Display") is displayed ((c) in the figure).

Then, as shown in FIG. 3D, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed). In this case, the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol is a special symbol, but as shown in the enlarged view of the lower diagram of FIG. 7D, "4-5-8" is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y, It is informed that the decorative pattern of the pattern combination of "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 8" is stopped and displayed. Then, the variable display of the next first decorative symbol is executed by the completion of the hold ((e) in the same figure).
(Production example k-2)
FIG. 41(h) to FIG. 41(k) are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

The timing shown in FIG. 41(h) is a state in which the variable display of the first decorative symbol is being performed on the main liquid crystal 2081, and FIG. 41(i) is a state in which the button effect is executed. This button effect is an effect regarding whether or not to execute the prior expectation degree rank notification effect (whether or not to display the prior expectation degree rank display RP). In this example, a button image BG overlapping with the variable display of the first decorative symbol and an elapsed time notification image TG are displayed on the front face of the variable display. Further, as shown in the enlarged view of the lower part of the same figure (i), the button image BG and the elapsed time notification image TG are images (related to the prior expectation degree rank display RP) on the back side (and the front side of the first decorative symbol) ( For example, an image RPG simulating the prior expectation rank display RP is included. In this case, at least one of the button image BG, the elapsed time notification image TG, and the image RPG simulating the prior expectation degree rank display RP is displayed (possibly) the rank of the prior expectation degree rank display RP (for example, a big hit). The display (eg, red display) is associated with the degree of expectation “A”. In this case, the chance button 136 is also made to emit the same color (red).

When the chance button 136 is operated within the acceptance valid period of the operation of the chance button 136 as shown in FIG. 9J, as shown in FIG. The display RP (in this case, “preliminary expectation A display”) is displayed.

In addition, as an appearance mode other than this, as shown in (m) of the same figure, based on the display of the mini item MI (enlarged in the lower diagram of (m) of the same figure) that imitates the prior expectation rank display RP. The expectation rank display RP may be displayed. For example, when the mini character MI uses the mini item MI imitating the preliminary expectation degree rank display RP, the preliminary expectation degree rank display RP is displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, for example.

Further, as shown in (n) of the same figure, the prior expectation degree rank display RP may be displayed based on the display of the hold icon RI imitating the prior expectation degree rank display RP. In this case, the advance expectation rank display RP is displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, for example, in the change in which the holding icon RI (enlarged in the lower diagram of FIG. 9(n)) simulating the advance expectation rank display RP is consumed. The preliminary expectation degree rank display RP may be displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, for example, in the change before the hold icon RI imitating the preliminary expectation degree rank display RP is consumed.
<Direction example l>

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing another example of the expectation notification effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Production example l-1)
42B to 42D are diagrams showing another example of the production step by step.

At the timing shown in FIG. 42(b), in the state where the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081, the preliminary expectation degree rank display RP (in this example, “preliminary expectation degree A display”) is displayed on the right sub-liquid crystal 2083. ) Is displayed.

At the timing shown in FIG. 7C, one hold is exhausted, the change icon h0 changes from white to red, and the red hold change effect is executed.

The timing shown in (d) of the figure is based on the fact that the red hold change effect with the jackpot expectation of “A” rank is executed, as the “preliminary expectation A display” is notified in FIG. Degree A display” is performed. At the same time, "preliminary expectation S display" is performed.

In this case, the effect corresponding to the “preliminary expectation S display” is, for example, an effect related to the hold (for example, a customer hold change effect). That is, it may be possible to notify that the variable icon h0 displayed in red at this timing may be promoted (promoted in two steps) to the hall icon. It should be noted that the number is not limited to two, and may be changed (promoted) in three or more stages, and in this case, three or more advance expectation rank displays RP are simultaneously executed.
(Production example 1-2)
FIG. 42(h) to FIG. 42(k) are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

The timing shown in FIG. 42(h) is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 30(e), and is a state in which the sub game effect has been successful.

At the timing shown in (i) of the figure, based on the success of the sub-game production, for example, in the right sub liquid crystal 2083, the prior expectation degree rank display PR (for example, “preliminary expectation degree A display”) is performed. In addition, in addition, a display (for example, band display) related to the prior expectation degree rank display PR is performed over the main liquid crystal 2081, the left sub liquid crystal 2082, and the right sub liquid crystal 2083. The display related to the prior expectation rank display PR is the same color as the color corresponding to the rank of the prior expectation rank display PR (red band display in this example), and the jackpot expectation (in this example, "A") is displayed as a telop so that the player can easily see it. In this case, the prior expectation rank display PR is a still image, and the display related to the prior expectation rank display PR is a moving image, so that the player can more easily recognize the prior expectation rank.

FIG. 9K is a display example when another prior expectation degree rank display PR (for example, “preliminary expectation S display”) is added. Also in this case, for example, in the right sub liquid crystal 2083, the prior expected degree rank display PR (for example, “preliminary expected degree S display”) is performed, and the main liquid crystal 2081, the left sub liquid crystal 2082, and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 are preliminarily displayed. A display related to the expectation rank display PR (for example, a band display and a telop display) is performed.

Further, in this case, for example, the display related to the prior expectation degree rank display PR (“preliminary expectation degree S display”) added later is the prior expectation degree rank display PR (“preliminary expectation degree A display” previously displayed. )) is displayed in front (to overlap the previous display).

The prior expectation rank display PR includes a display of a still image displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083 and a display related to the prior expectation rank display PR by band display and telop display. The expectation rank display PN indicates the right sub display. Only a still image displayed on the liquid crystal 2083 is displayed.

Alternatively, the expectation rank display PN may include a still image displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083 and a display regarding the expectation rank display PN by the band display and the telop display.
<Direction example m>

43. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of the expectation notification effect centering on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

The timings shown in FIGS. 43(a) to 43(e) are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 30(a) to 30(e), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

At the timing shown in (f) of the same figure, the mini character (lord) returns to the normal display (default display) shown in (a) of the figure, the sub game effect is finished, and as a result of the sub game effect, the timer. It shows a state in which the notice production has been executed.

In this timer notice effect, a red timer TM (enlarged and shown in the right figure of FIG. 6F) is displayed so as to overlap a part of the variable display of the first decorative pattern, and a countdown display of, for example, 30 seconds is displayed. This is a red timer performance. The timer notice production is a notice production that notifies that some production will be executed after a predetermined period (in this case, 30 seconds displayed in the countdown display) has elapsed.

At the timing shown in (h) of the figure, the timer TM has become 0 as shown in an enlarged view in the right figure of (h), and a display indicating that the timer TM is 0 is displayed. .. At this timing, on the front of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, a mini character MC2 (mini character) different from the normal display mini character MC (mini character (lord)) is displayed so as to overlap a part of the decorative symbol. The character (lord) is displayed.

At the timing shown in (i) of the figure, the change icon h0 changes from white to red, and the red hold change effect is executed. In conjunction with this, the family coat of arms character 244A also changes from white lighting to red lighting.

The timing shown in FIG. 45(j) is based on the execution of the red-holding change effect having the jackpot expectation of “A” rank in FIG. 45(i). The display is done.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the "red timer effect" is performed in the timer notice effect, and after the timer ends, the red hold change effect with the jackpot expectation of "A" rank is executed.

That is, for example, a timer notice effect with a different display mode (for example, a timer notice effect having a color difference such as “red timer effect” or “blue timer effect”, shape or pattern difference, etc.) By notifying the rank of the jackpot expectation degree of the effect to be executed later by performing the timer notice effect, and executing the effect belonging to the corresponding jackpot expectation degree after the timer notice effect is finished. Thus, the timer advance notice effect can be made to function in the same manner as the advance expectation rank notification effect of the present embodiment. That is, by applying this embodiment (embodiment M), all of the above-mentioned prior expectation rank notification effects of this embodiment can be implemented by replacing them with timer notice effects.

Further, it may be configured to include both the timer advance notice effect of the present embodiment and the above-mentioned prior expectation rank notification effect other than the present embodiment.
<Various tables for advance anticipation rank notification production>

FIG. 44 is an example of various tables applied to the present embodiment (production example a to production example m).

FIG. 44A is an example of an effect rank table showing a correspondence relationship between each effect and the rank (attribute) of the jackpot expectation degree.

As shown in the figure, the ranks (attributes) of the jackpot expectation degree are “SSS”, “S”, “A”, “B”,... In addition, for some of the effects to be performed on the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the expectation level of a big hit after the execution of the effect is set in advance, and "SSS", " It is classified into ranks of "S", "A", "B",....

For example, the contradictory production has a jackpot expectation rank of "SSS", the sword holding change production has a jackpot expectation rank of "S", the swordsman reach production has a jackpot expectation rank of "S", and the red hold change production has a Big hit expectation rank is "A", Hime rescue reach production is big hit expectation rank "A", red timer production is big hit expectation rank "A", blue pending change production is big hit expectation rank Is "B", and in the blue timer effect, the rank of the jackpot expectation is "B"...

In addition, this table is provided with a table for pre-expected degree rank notification effect and a table for expected degree rank notification effect, and effects corresponding to each are set. Therefore, there is an effect that is not set in the table for the preliminary expectation rank notification effect, but is set in the table for the expectation rank notification effect. For example, if the swordsman reach performance is set in the table for the expectation rank notification performance, but is not set in the table for the advance expectation rank notification performance, the advance expectation rank notification performance is executed for the swordsman reach performance. However, only the expectation rank notification effect is executed.

In addition, except for special cases such as contradictory effects, since the effects that are the targets of the advance expectation rank notification effects are the targets of the expectations rank notification effects, the effects set in the table for the prior expectations rank notification effects are As a general rule, it is set in the table for the expectation rank notification production.

In addition, the rank is a relative classification among a plurality of effects of the same type (for example, a classification in the reach effect, a classification in the pending change effect), and the rank of the jackpot expectation is the same. Even if there is, the big hit expectation degree (numerical value) varies depending on the type of effect (for example, reach effect or hold change effect, etc.). For example, in the example of FIG. 10A, the rank of the jackpot expectation degree is set to A in the princess rescue reach production, but this is relatively classified into A rank among a plurality of reach productions. Not too much. For example, comparing the jackpot reach production with the hime rescue reach production, the swordsman reach production has a higher expectation of big hits. Has been classified.

Further, even if the ranks of the jackpot expectations are the same, there may be a large difference in the jackpot expectations depending on the type of production. (For example, when comparing the effect types, generally, the reach effect has a higher jackpot expectation than the hold change effect, etc.).

Therefore, for example, even when the jackpot expectation (numerical value) is higher in the princess rescue reach production with the jackpot expectation rank “A” than with the hall holding change presentation with the jackpot expectation rank “S”. is there.

That is, when the types of effects are different, the big hit expectation degree is not necessarily set in the order of the ranks of FIG.

Further, the correspondence relationship between the rank of the big hit expectation degree and the effect and the effect to be set in FIG. 11A are merely examples for convenience of description, and are not limited to the relationship shown here.

The ranking is set considering not only the jackpot expectation but also the degree of rarity (in the case of special production such as contradiction production) and the number of points of the membership service.

FIG. 44( b) is a mini item table showing a list of mini items and their functions applicable in this embodiment.

When the mini character (lord) obtains the mini item shown in FIG. 3B, the corresponding production is executed. The types of mini items are not limited to those shown in the figure.

44C to FIG. 44F are examples of a temporary storage area for effect management provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400, and a reserved color information table used when changing the reserved icon. , And its setting example.

As shown in FIG. 7C, for example, in the reserved color information table, information about the fluctuation (item "corresponding" in the table) of Toku-zu 1 and holdings 1 to 4 (Item "Holding 1 in the table) of Toku-zu 1 are stored. "-Hold 4") is stored. Each of the “relevant” and the “reserved 1” to “reserved 4” is further divided into “previous (relevant)”, “this time”, “next time”, “next time”, and “next time after time” items. The color information of the hold icon is stored for each item.

Each time the hold is exhausted, the color information of the hold icon is reset to the previous one (the previous time and the previous hold), and the hold icon changes, as shown in FIG.

Hereinafter, an example of setting color information will be specifically described. FIG. 30D corresponds to the information on the hold icon shown in FIG. 30A, for example.

At the timing shown in FIG. 30A, a white (default, displayed as “default” in the figure) change icon h0 and hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the icon display area 800. In this case, as shown in the item “(previous) applicable” in FIG. 44(d), “default” (white, the same applies below) corresponds to “corresponding” corresponding to the variation icon h0 and “holding” corresponding to the hold icon h11. "Default" is set to "1", "Hold 2" corresponding to the hold icon h12 is set to "Default", and "Hold 3" corresponding to the hold icon h13 is set to "Default".

Further, as the color information of “current”, “default” is set in “hold 1”, “default/previous A” is set in “hold 2”, and “default” is set in “hold 3”. Here, "default/advance A" of "hold 2" indicates that the hold icon is displayed by default, and "preliminary expectation A display" is displayed as the prior expectation rank display RP.

Also, as the color information for the "next", "blue → red" is set for "hold 2", "default" is set for "hold 3", and "default" is set for "hold 3" as the color information for "next time". Has been done. Here, “blue→red” of “holding 2” indicates that the display color of the holding icon is changed to blue and then to red.

Further, FIG. 30E corresponds to the information on the hold icon shown in FIG. 30F, for example.

As the hold is exhausted, the setting information in the hold color information setting table is updated as shown in FIG. At the timings of FIGS. 30B to 30F, the white variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the icon display area 800. In this case, as the color information of “(previous) applicable”, “default” is set to “related”, “default/previous A” is set to “hold 1”, and “default” is set to “hold 2”.

That is, the "holding 1" (holding icon h11 in FIGS. 30B to 30F) is displayed by default, and when the holding 2 in the previous change is the holding 1, the change display in that state (Fig. 30(b) to (f)) is in a state of displaying “preliminary expectation A display” as the preliminary expectation rank display RP.

In addition, “blue→red” is set to “hold 1”, “default” is set to “hold 2” as color information of “this time”, and “default” is set to “hold 2” as color information of “next time”. Has been done.

Further, FIG. 31F corresponds to the information of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 31B to 31F, for example. As the hold is exhausted, the setting information in the hold color information setting table is updated as shown in FIG. At the timings of FIGS. 31B and 31C, the blue variation icon h0 and the white hold icon h11 are displayed in the icon display area 800. In this case, as the color information of “(previous) applicable”, “blue→red” is set in “applicable” and “default” is set in “hold 1”. This is because when the hold 1 in the previous change becomes the relevant one, the hold icon is changed to blue during the change display in that state (FIGS. 31(b) and 31(c)), and then further changed to red ( 31(d) to (f)).
In addition, "default" is set to "hold 1" as "current" color information.
[Third Embodiment]

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 46 to FIG. 68, a game table according to the third embodiment of the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine, a spinning machine machine such as a slot machine or an enclosed game machine) will be described. To do.

It should be noted that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 46 to 148 are basically used only in the description of the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment, and even if overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, In the description of the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 46 to 148 are given priority. The numbers of the examples of the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment are also used in principle only for the description of the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment, but of the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment. Each example and each example of other embodiments can be applied in combination with each other. Further, if there are drawings showing similar timings in a plurality of drawings, duplicated explanation may be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure.

The outer frame 102 is a frame member made of wood or metal having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store. The main body 104, which is called an inner frame, is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 and serves as a vertical rectangular game machine base body. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. Further, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a lock function and to be openable/closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

In addition, the front frame door 106 is a passage that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) in a region below the opening 116 and guide the game balls to the launch device 110. The upper plate 126 provided with, the lower plate 128 that stores the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and the game balls that are stored in the upper plate 126 are discharged to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player. A ball removal button 130, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by the player's operation, and to the launcher 110 by the player's operation. A ball launch handle 134 for launching the game ball guided to the game area 124 of the game board 200, and a chance button 136 for changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 46) by the operation of the player. A chance button lamp 138 that causes a chance button 136 to emit light, a setting operation unit 137 that allows various settings and the like to be performed by the operation of a setter (for example, a player or a game store clerk), and a ball for the card unit (CR unit). A ball lending operation button 140 for issuing a lending instruction, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, and a ball lending display section (not shown) for displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit. And). Further, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided.

The setting operation unit 137 is a push-button switch that can be pressed by a setting person, and includes a confirm (OK) button, an upper button located above the confirm button, a lower button located below the confirm button, and a confirm button. A right button located to the right of the button, a left button located to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button located further to the right of the right button are provided. The setting operation unit 137 also includes an operation unit sensor that detects pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which each button and operation unit sensor are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button that changes the effect mode of each effect device 206 (see FIG. 48) by the player's operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied. May be.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

47 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 46 viewed from the back side. At the upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, which has an opening that opens upward, is located below the ball tank 150, and is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. And a tank rail 154 for guiding a ball falling through the communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

The payout device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and inside thereof, a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) are provided. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have temporarily stayed are delivered one by one below the payout device 152.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high signal or the low signal, when the game ball is not passing, The other signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 49). The gaming ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The balls are paid out to the player.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, a main board case 158 that houses a main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the overall game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. A first sub-board case 162 accommodating a first sub-board 160 that constitutes a first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and a second sub-board that performs control processing related to performance based on processing information generated by the first sub-control section 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that cancels the error by the operation of the game shop staff A payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 including 168, a launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that configures a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of a game ball, and power is supplied to various electric gaming devices. And a RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 for housing 182 and a CR interface 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided.

The main board 156, the first sub-board 160, the second sub-board 164, etc. are provided on the back surface of the game board 200 because they need to be changed for each model, and the payout board 170, the launch board 174, the power supply board 182, etc. It is provided on the outer frame 102 because it is commonly used by a plurality of models.

FIG. 48 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative pattern display device 208 at substantially the center. The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, which will be described in detail later.

The game board 200 of this example is a game board for a so-called right-handed machine. In the right-handed machine, by changing the launch strength of the game ball by operating the ball firing handle 134, the fall path of the game ball is divided into a right path on the right side of the rendering device 206 and a left path on the left side of the rendering device 206. be able to. In this example, it is easy to enter into the universal figure starting port 228, the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232 (open state), the variable winning a prize ports 234, 235 (open state), etc., which will be described later. , The game ball falling on the right path and the game ball falling on the left path are different.

Regarding the universal figure starting port 228, the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the variable winning port 235, the universal figure starting port 228, the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the variable winning port 235 are arranged on the right path. Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter the game ball that falls on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter the game ball that drops on the left path. On the other hand, with regard to each of the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the variable winning port 234, due to the presence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails 238, the presence of the warp device 242, etc., the entering of the game ball falling on the left side path is relative. It is easy and it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball that falls down the right path. In the present embodiment, a right-handing machine is taken as an example, but a machine other than a right-handing machine may be used.

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for displaying various images (moving images or still images) used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c, an effect display region 208d, and a fourth symbol display region 208e, and a left symbol display region. 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c respectively display different decorative symbols, the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect, and the fourth symbol display area 208e displays the fourth symbol. .. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d, 208e can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 48, the display position of the fourth symbol display area 208e is fixed to the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 48, one fourth symbol display area 208e (two in total) corresponding to each of the special figures 1 and 2 is provided, but both the special figures 1 and 2 There may be provided only one fourth symbol display area 208e corresponding to. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to be able to display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

At the bottom of the game area 124, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220 , A normal symbol holding lamp 216 and a high accuracy middle lamp 222 are provided. In addition, hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "universal symbol", a special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol", a first special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 1", and a second special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 2".

The general figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is composed of a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in the present embodiment.

The public figure reservation lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of public figure variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold, and in the present embodiment, up to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the general figure variable games. It is possible to put it on hold. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variation games (details described later) that are on hold, and in this embodiment, the special figure variation games are predetermined. It is possible to hold up to a number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is a high-probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low-probability state in which a big hit is hard to occur to a high probability state. Lights when changing to the probability state, and turns off when changing from the high probability state to the low probability state.

Further, around the performance device 206, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a universal figure starting opening 228, a special drawing 1 starting opening 230, a special drawing 2 starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening. 234 and 235 are provided.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (in the general winning opening 226). When a prize is won), the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are balls to be paid out to the player as compensation for winning (hereinafter, may be referred to as “prize balls”) and balls to be lent to the player (hereinafter, referred to as “rental ball”). May be included) and.

The universal figure starting port 228 is composed of a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the game board 200 is provided. One is arranged on the right path. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

In the present embodiment, only one special opening 1 starting port 230 is arranged in the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. , The special figure variation game by the special figure 1 display device 212 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special figure 1 variation game") is started. In addition, the ball that has entered the starting port 230 of Toku-zu 1 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

Toku-zu 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (den Chu), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided on the right path. The special figure 2 starting opening 232 is provided with a pair of blade members 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right, and it is not possible to enter a ball while the blade member 232a is closed. When 210 hits and displays the stop symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The special figure variation game by the special figure 2 display device 214 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special figure 2 variation game") is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called big winning openings or attackers. In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the center of the game board 200, and the variable winning opening 235 is on the right path. Only one of them is installed. The variable winning a prize ports 234 and 235 are provided with openable and closable door members 234a and 235a, respectively, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the door members 234a and 235a are closed. When the special figure display device stops and displays the big hit symbol in the special figure variation game, for example, one door member of the variable winning a prize ports 234 and 235 has a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing). Open and close a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) for 1.5 seconds. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234 or the variable winning port 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are used as prize balls and the upper plate 126 is used. To discharge. The balls that enter the variable winning openings 234 and 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

In the pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the ball launch handle 134 of the player, and launches the launch rod. The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed through by the 146 and the launching mallet 148 to be launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc. Outward opening 240 by winning at the starting opening (special opening 1 starting opening 230, special opening 2 starting opening 232), without winning any winning opening or starting opening, or only passing through the universal opening starting opening 228. To reach.

Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the rendering device 206, the warp device 242 (242a, 242b) and the front stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and the rendering movable body 224 is arranged in a region where the game ball cannot roll. It is arranged. Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door or a shutter) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative pattern display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The front stage 244 is capable of rolling a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball ridden by a nail or the like of the game board 200, and the passing ball is located at the center of the front stage 244. A special route 244a that makes it easy to enter the ball 230 is provided.

The production movable body 224 of this example includes a horizontally long flat panel on which the model name of the pachinko machine 100 and the like are displayed. The production movable body 224 is movable by a stepping motor (not shown) so that it can move in the vertical direction in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen.

The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The shielding device 246 shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, their respective inner ends overlap. In a state in which the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the respective doors are slightly overlapped with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can each be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 to be visible through the holes in the lattice, or the shoji portions of the holes in the lattice are closed with a semitransparent lens body, The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji part of the lattice holes may be completely blocked (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 may not be visible at all. Good. The shielding device 246 of this example is configured to expose the lower end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 even when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed. As a result, the fourth symbol display area 208e located at the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible regardless of the open/closed state of the shielding device 246.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. According to a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a second sub-control unit 500 controlling various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. Mainly includes a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data storage. A RAM 308 for storing, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormality in program processing are mounted. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (counter circuit) used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit has two built-in counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each of the starting port, the winning port, and the variable winning port, and opening of the front frame door. A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame open sensor, and a lower pan full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to a random value generation circuit 318 and a basic circuit 302. 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214, and display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the general figure display device 210 In order to perform display control of the drive circuit 326 for performing the operation and various status display portions 328 (for example, the universal figure holding lamp 216, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, the high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.). And a predetermined movable member, for example, various blades 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232, a door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the door member 235a of the variable winning port 235, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere has won the special opening 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the Toku-zu 1 starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the counter value stored in the Toku-zu 1 starting port 230. Stored in the register for use. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the value of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 at that timing is also latched. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 connects the information output circuit 336 to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like by means of a pachinko machine. The game information of 100 (for example, a game state) is output.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source that is being supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. When it is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 starts from the start signal output circuit 340. When the signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 sends commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although it is configured to be able to transmit signals, it is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 may be performed by bidirectional communication.

Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and the number of times are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator receiver 414 as a system clock.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling the various lamps 418, and a drive for performing drive control of the production movable body 224. The circuit 422, the effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, the chance button detection sensor 426 that detects the pressing of the chance button 136, and the operation unit that detects the pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137. A sensor (not shown), a predetermined detection sensor, for example, a sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424 or the chance button detection sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402, and a control program and various effect data are stored. ROM 406 for connection. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs.

Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit that receives a control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. .. A drive circuit for controlling the decorative pattern display device 208 and the shielding device 246 is connected to the basic circuit.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the firing control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental. It is detected whether or not the payout is completed, and communication with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606. Further, when the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is configured to be performed by bidirectional communication, the various sensors 320 detect the front frame door opening sensor that detects the opening of the front frame door 106. The detection result of 1 may be transmitted to the payout control unit 600 without being transmitted to the sensor circuit 322, and the payout control unit 600 may output the received detection result to the main control unit 300.

The firing control unit 630 is a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 for instructing to permit or stop firing, and a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134 outputs the operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player. Control of a firing motor 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of a ball feeding device 634 that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110, based on a control signal that indicates a firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to predetermined components (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 causes the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the firing control unit. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 50(a) to (d), the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative pattern display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of diagrams and general drawings will be described. FIG. 50(a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and FIG. 50(b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. The special figure 1 variation game is started on condition that the first starting opening sensor detects that the ball has entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230, and the fact that the ball has entered the special opening 2 starting opening 232. 2 The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the starting mouth sensor detects. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs "variable display of special figure 1" in which all seven segments are lit up and one central segment is lit up repeatedly. Further, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs "variable display of special figure 2" in which all the seven segments are turned on and one central segment is repeatedly turned on. .. These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of variable display of symbols in the present embodiment. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 has elapsed, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 After a lapse of time, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of the "variable display of special figure 1" until the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 is stopped or displayed or the "variable display of special figure 2" is started and the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 is changed. Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display according to the present embodiment, hereinafter, the stop symbol aspect of the special symbol 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after starting the "variable display of the special symbol 1 or 2". A series of display until the above is called a symbol fluctuation stop display. The symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

In FIG. 50(a), six types of special symbols “Special symbol A” to “Special symbol F” are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol variation stop display of special symbol 1. In FIG. 50(a), the white parts in the figure show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts show the locations of the segments that are turned on. "Special drawing A" is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot design, and "special drawing B" is a 15R jackpot design. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not to be a big hit in the special figure variation game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not to be a special jackpot is determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the special figure variation game after the jackpot game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state with a low probability is special figure. This is called a low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special big hit game ends and after the 15R big hit game ends, both shift to the time saving state (electric support state). Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the time saving state is referred to as a high probability state of universal figure (hereinafter, may be referred to as “probable probability variation”), and the state that is not a short period of time is referred to as low probability state of universal figure. 15R special jackpot design "special drawing A" is a special figure high probability general figure after the big hit game is a high probability state, 15R special jackpot design "special drawing B" is a special jackpot after the special game It is a symbol that becomes a low probability general figure high probability state. These "special drawing A" and "special drawing B" are symbols in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively large.

"Special map C" is a 2R big hit symbol called sudden change, and it is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability general figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. That is, the "special drawing C" is 2R as compared with the "special drawing A" which is 15R. “Special drawing D” is a 2R big hit symbol called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation, and is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability general figure low probability state after the big hit game is over.

"Special drawing E" is a small hit pattern, and after the small hit game is over, the gaming state before the small hit game is executed is maintained. In addition, “special figure F” is a deviating symbol, which is a symbol having a relatively small advantage for the player.

In FIG. 50(b), four types of special symbols “special symbol a” to “special symbol d” are shown as the stop symbol modes in the symbol variation stop display of special symbol 2. In FIG. 50(b), the white portions in the figure show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions show the locations of the segments that are turned on. "Special drawing a" is a 15R special jackpot design, and "special drawing b" is a 15R jackpot design. The 15R special jackpot design "Special Figure a" is a special figure high probability general figure high probability state after the big hit game is finished, and the 15R special jackpot "Special Figure b" is a special figure after the big hit game is finished It is a symbol that becomes a low probability general figure high probability state. These "special drawing a" and "special drawing b" are symbols in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively large.

The "special map c" is a 2R big hit symbol called a sudden change, and is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability general figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. “Special drawing d” is a deviating symbol, which is a symbol having a relatively small advantage for the player.

FIG. 50(c) shows an example of a decorative design. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The "decoration 1" to "decoration 9" and "decoration 10" represent the numbers "1" to "9" and "0", respectively. The first start opening sensor detects that a ball has won the special opening 1 starting opening 230 or the special opening 2 starting opening 232, that is, the ball has entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230, or the special opening 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on condition that the second starting orifice sensor detects that the ball has entered the starting orifice 232. In the pattern display area, the display is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... → "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → "Variable display of symbols" is performed.

When notifying the 15R special jackpot of "special drawing A", the 15R big jackpot of "special drawing B", the 15R special jackpot of "special drawing a", and the 15R big jackpot of "special drawing b", the symbol display area 208a Symbols (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2") in which three identical decorative patterns are lined up to 208c are stopped and displayed. In order to explicitly notify the 15R special jackpot of "Special drawing A" and the 15R special jackpot of "Special drawing a", a symbol combination in which three identical odd decorative patterns are lined up (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3- "Decorative 3" and "Decorative 7-Decorative 7-Decorative 7") are stopped and displayed.

Also, when notifying a 2R big hit called “special figure D” latent probability change (hidden probability change) or “special figure E” small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. To do. When notifying a sudden 2R big hit of "special drawing C" and "special drawing c", "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying that the "special drawing F" and the "special drawing d" are out, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 50(c) are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 50(d) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the public figure of the present embodiment, "Public figure A" which is a winning symbol and "Public symbol B" which is a deviating symbol. On the basis of the fact that the gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the universal figure display device 210 repeats the illumination of all seven segments and the illumination of one central segment. Performs "variable display of general maps". Then, "Public figure A" is stopped and displayed when the winning of the general figure fluctuation game is notified, and "Public figure B" is stopped and displayed when notifying that the general figure fluctuation game is out. Also in FIG. 50(d), the white portions in the figure show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions show the locations of the segments that are turned on.

Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, which has received the activation signal, resets and starts by a reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 51 according to a control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the setting of the interrupt mask, the initial setting of the I/O 310, the initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, and the WDT 314 are set. Allows operation and sets initial values. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms (millisecond) as an initial value.

In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 following step S103, it is determined whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply which the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. When it is less than (9 V in this embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), the step is performed. It proceeds to S107. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process of setting in the counter timer 312 a numerical value that determines the period for executing the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, at a predetermined port of the I/O 310 (for example, a test output port, (1) Outputting a clear signal from the sub control unit 400), setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

In step S109 following step S107, it is determined whether or not the power is restored to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off). If the state is not returned to the state before the power is cut off (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is When it is set to the initial state, the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113). Specifically, first, whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the clerk of the game shop operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is ON (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and when the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not required), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is determined. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register having an initial value of 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) or not (whether or not the result of the checksum is normal) is determined. When the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to restore the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is the specific value. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset to the stack pointer (main setting). When the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer or register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 49 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command that indicates that the power-off state has been restored, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub control unit 400.

In step S115, which is subsequent to step S113, a basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update processing, the initial value generation for generating the initial value of the random number counter for special figure determination for generating the random number value for special figure determination used in the lottery for determining the stop symbol in the special figure fluctuation game Update the random number counter for. In addition, the random number counter for generating an initial value for generating the initial value of the universal figure winning random number counter for generating the universal figure winning random number value used for determining whether or not the universal figure variation game is won is updated. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a special figure determination random number counter and its initial value generating random number counter, and a universal figure winning random number counter and its initial value generating random number counter. In step S115, the initial values of two of these initial value generating random number counters are updated. For example, if the range of possible values of the initial value generation random number counter is 0 to 99, the value is acquired from the initial value generation random number counter, 1 is added to the acquired value, and then the original initial value generation random number counter is added. Remember. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original initial value generating random number counter. The other initial value generating random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generating random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT is set so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (not detect an abnormal process). The restart is performed periodically (in this embodiment, once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main controller timer interrupt).

In step S205 following step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower plate full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are transmitted via the input port of the I/O 310. The presence/absence of a detection signal is input and monitored, and stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. Is read from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is performed. ), the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

Further, in step S205, the presence/absence information of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each of the above-mentioned two-preceding detection signal storage area, previous detection signal storage area, and present detection signal storage area is compared, It is determined whether or not the information on the presence/absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after the detection signal is absent, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 49 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In step S205, information regarding the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal). If there is a match with information indicating that there is), the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, 235, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, or the universal figure starting opening 228 It is determined that there is a passage. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won. For example, when the information on the presence/absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor that detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, there is a winning in the general winning opening 226. However, if the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. The process is branched to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with the winning in the mouth 226.

Further, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a single winning, it is not determined that there is a winning until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

Further, in step S205, when the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is configured to be performed by bidirectional communication, the front frame door opening sensor 107 that detects the opening of the front frame door 106. The presence/absence of a door opening detection signal output from the payout control unit 600 that has received the detection result from is monitored and stored in the door detection signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308.

In step S207 and step S209 following step S205, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and the special control determination random number value used in the main control unit 300 is generated next. Updates the special figure determination random number counter and the universal figure winning random number counter that generates the universal figure winning random number value. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the random number value for special figure determination is 0 to 99, a value is obtained and acquired from the random number counter for special figure determination provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random number value for special figure determination. After adding 1 to the value, it is stored in the original special figure determination random value counter. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter for special figure determination. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the special figure determination random value counter makes one round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special figure determination random value counter is acquired. Then, the special figure determination random number counter is set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter for determining a special figure that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is acquired as an initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for special figure determination, and is stored in the random number counter for special figure determination. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for determining a special figure has made a round next while being set. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the special figure determination random value counter has completed one round, an initial value storage for determining that the universal figure winning random number counter has completed one round is stored. The area is provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determination random value counter may be provided with a counter for obtaining a random value for special figure 1 and a counter for obtaining a random value for special figure 2, or the same counter. May be used.

In step S211, which is subsequent to step S209, effect random number updating processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated. Specifically, the value of the random number counter for determining the special figure timer number for generating the random number value for determining the special figure timer number for determining the symbol variation time in the special figure variation game or its initial value is updated. Further, the value of the random number counter for determining the universal figure timer number for generating the random number value for determining the universal figure timer number for determining the symbol variation time in the universal figure variation game or its initial value is updated.

In step S213 subsequent to step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, a universal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for varying/stopping the symbol on the universal symbol display device 210, and a time for varying/stopping the symbol on the special figure 1 display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time to change/stop display of symbols on the special figure 2 display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time, predetermined Various timers including a timer for measuring the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. are updated.

In step S215, which is subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this prize hole counter updating process, when the prize holes 226, 234, 235 and the starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the number of prize balls provided for each winning hole or each starting hole. The value of the area is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

In step S217, which is subsequent to step S215, a prize winning acceptance process is performed. In this prize winning process, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the special figure 1 starting opening 230, the special figure 2 starting opening 232, the universal figure starting opening 228, and the variable winning openings 234 and 235. Here, it is determined using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

If there is a winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the holding number is 4), a random value generation circuit (Hard random number circuit) A big hit determination random number value generated by subjecting a value stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special drawing 1 starting port 230 of 318 to predetermined processing is provided and provided in the RAM 308. The random numbers for special figure determination are acquired from the random number counter for special figure determination and stored in the special figure 1 random number storage area in the order of acquisition. Special figure 1 random number value in the storage area of the big hit determination and special figure determination random number value (hereinafter, "special figure 1 random number set" or "special figure 1 start information") The same number as the special figure 1 reserved number stored in the FIG. 1 reserved number storage area is stored. In the special figure 1 random number storage area, the data of the special figure 1 random value set with the highest holding order (the first and the oldest stored) is generated each time the number of special figure 1 holding decreases by one. The data is erased and processed so that the retention order of the remaining data of the special figure 1 random number set is incremented by one. In addition, each time the number of special figure 1 reserved numbers increases by one, a new set of special figure 1 random number values is added to the next pending order of the data of the special figure 1 random number value with the lowest (last) reservation order. Written.

If there is a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the corresponding special figure 2 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the holding number is 4), a random value generation circuit A big hit determination random value generated by performing a predetermined process on the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 of 318, and a big hit time special value provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determination random number value for jackpot is acquired from the figure determination random value counter and stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. Special figure 2 Random value for jackpot determination and special figure determination for big hit in the random number storage area (hereinafter, abbreviated as "special figure 2 random number set" or "special figure 2 starting information") Are stored as many as the number of special figure 2 reservations stored in the special figure 2 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 2 random number storage area, each time the number of special figure 2 holding decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 random number set with the highest holding order is erased, and the remaining special figure 2 random number values are stored. It is processed so that the reservation order of the data of the group is increased by one. Also, each time the number of special figure 2 reservations is increased by one, a new set of special figure 2 random number values is written in the next reservation order of the data of the special figure 2 random number value group having the lowest reservation order.

If there is a prize in the universal figure starting port 228 and if the corresponding universal figure hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is acquired from the universal figure winning random number counter as a universal figure winning random number value to handle it. Stored in the universal figure random value storage area. When the variable winning port 234 is won, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning port 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning port 234. When the variable winning port 235 is won, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning port 235 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning port 235.

In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, and strobe information is set in bit 7 (when set, data is set) and bit 6 is set. Power-on information (when it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 are the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 are encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is indicated.

In step S221 subsequent to step S219, general-university-state update processing is performed. The universal figure state updating process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the universal figure state updating process in the middle of the universal figure variation display (the value of the universal figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED that constitutes the universal figure display device 210 is repeatedly lit and turned off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the universal figure display device 210 performs variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

In addition, in the public figure state update process at the timing when the public figure variation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the public figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the public figure hit flag is on, the hit symbol The 7-segment LED that constitutes the general-purpose display device 210 is controlled to be turned on and off so that the display mode of FIG. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the device 210 is controlled to be turned on and off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general-picture state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting/extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the normal figure stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the universal figure display device 210 determines one of the winning symbol (the universal symbol A shown in FIG. 50(d)) and the deviating symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 50(d)). Display. Further, after that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbols that are confirmed and displayed are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the universal figure variation game.

Further, if the result of the universal figure variation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on as described later. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While the normal operation is set in the setting region, the blade member is set to the solenoid (part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). A signal for holding the open state 232a is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

In addition, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening/closing driving solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area inactive state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the universal figure variation game is out of alignment, the universal figure per flag is turned off as described later. When the universal figure hit flag is off, even in the universal figure state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period has ended (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal non-operation is set. In the universal figure state updating process when the ordinary figure is not in operation, nothing is performed and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

In step S223, a universal figure related lottery process is performed. In this public figure-related lottery process, opening/closing control of the general figure variation game and the special figure 2 starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the general figure is not operating), and the number of public figure variation games that are held. When is 1 or more, whether the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is won or unwinned by random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the universal figure random number storage area described above. When the winning decision is made, the universal figure hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned on. In the case of no winning, the universal figure flag is set to off. In addition, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for determining the universal figure timer number that generates the random number value for determining the universal figure timer number described above is acquired as the random number value for determining the universal figure timer number, and is acquired. Based on the random number value for determining the universal figure timer number, one of the plurality of variable times is selected to change and display the universal figure on the universal figure display device 210, and this variable display time is set as the universal figure variation display time. , And is stored in the universal figure variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games is stored in the universal figure pending count storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

In step S224 subsequent to step S223, special figure prefetching processing is performed. In the special map prefetching process, when the number of special figure reservations stored in the special figure reservation number storage area increases, the start information related to the increased reservation is prefetched, and the stop symbols etc. of the special figure variation game are special figure related lottery. Preliminary determination is made before the acceptance/rejection determination in the processing. The flow of the special figure prefetching process will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The special figure prefetching process may be executed in the winning acceptance process (step S217).

Next, the special figure state update processing for each of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure state update processing for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update processing) is performed (step S225). This special figure 2 state update processing performs one of the following plural (nine in this example) processing according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing of the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is used. Re-store it in the reserved number storage area. At the same time, the blinking of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 is controlled. For example, if the four LEDs of the Toku-zu 2 holding lamp 220 in FIG. 48 are set to have LED numbers 1-4 in order from the left to the right of the figure, the LEDs corresponding to the Toku-zu 2 holding number are red, for example, from the smallest LED number. Turn on and turn off the others.

Further, for example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED that constitutes the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on. The lighting and extinguishing drive control is performed by repeatedly turning off the light. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the first small hit flag, the second small hit flag, the first off flag, the second off flag, the special figure probability variation flag, and the general figure. Probability variation flags are provided for each. In the special figure 2 state update processing that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is on and the universal figure probability variation flag is also on, the special figure a and 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 50(b) are on, the special figure probability variation flag is off, and the universal figure probability variation flag is on. Is the special figure b, the 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure c, and the off flag is on, the special figure d. In this way, the 7 segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is controlled to be turned on/off, and the setting indicating that the special figure 2 is stopped is displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214, the 15R special big hit pattern (special figure a), 15R big hit pattern (special figure b), sudden probability variation pattern (special figure c), and deviating pattern (special figure d) ) The fixed display of any one of the symbols is performed. After that, the information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the special display 2 that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special FIG. 2 variable game. Further, if the number of electric support stored in the number of electric support (details described later) storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of electric support, and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing (details will be described later), the time saving flag is turned off. Further, even during the big hit game (during the special game state), the time saving flag is turned off. Further, if the number of probability changes stored in the probability change number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of probability changes, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability variation flag Turn off.

In addition, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the above transmission information storage area, and the pattern for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that it is present is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later, and then the process ends.

If the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as described later. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is updated in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. For this purpose, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Also, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect production period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 234a is held in an open state by a solenoid for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234 until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning port 234. At the same time as outputting the signal, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) Information indicating the closing period in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308, while outputting a signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state to the solenoid for opening/closing the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234. To set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. The control when opening the variable winning port 235 during the big hit game is similar to the control method of the variable winning port 234. In addition, a variable winning opening that may be opened for each jackpot pattern may be set.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which is started at the timing when the opening/closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) That is, the production standby period in the storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to stand by while displaying the image informing the player that the big hit by the decorative pattern display device 208 is finished. Is set. Further, if the universal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the number of electric support times (for example, 100 times) is set in the electric support frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the RAM 308 is also set. Turns on the time saving flag provided in. If the universal figure probability variation flag is set to OFF, neither the number of power support times is set in the power support frequency storage unit nor the time saving flag is turned on. The time saving state here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game is shortened. If the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the state of high probability of universal figure (normal figure probability change). In the high probability state of the universal figure, the probability of being hit in the universal variation game is higher than in the low probability state of the universal figure. In addition, the general figure high probability state is shorter than the general figure low probability state in the variation time of the universal figure fluctuation game (general figure variation short). Furthermore, in the universal figure high probability state, the open time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the universal figure low probability state (power extension). In addition, in the universal figure high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the universal figure low probability state. The state in which any one of these figures is confirmed, the figure is shortened, and the electric chou spread is called electric sapo (starting entrance winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general figure low probability state is maintained. This is a high probability probability state during the big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 during the big hit game, many game balls in the special figure 2 starting hole 232 until the game balls enter There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be won during a big hit increases and the gambling ability increases, which is to solve this problem.

Further, if the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability variation number storage unit (for example, 80 times) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 at the same time as the end of the big hit game.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special area 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out, the out flag is turned on, as will be described later. When the deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Toku-zu 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state updating process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

Then, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, description thereof will be omitted. Omit it. However, in this example, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2, so the timing when the special figure 1 variable display time has elapsed (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer becomes 1 to 0). The special figure 1 state update processing started at different timing is different from the special figure 2 state update processing. In the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on and the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure A and 15R big hit flag shown in FIG. When the figure probability variation flag is off, the special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, when the general figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the general figure probability variation flag is off The 7-segment LED configuring the special figure 1 display device 212 has the special figure D, the special figure E when the small hit flag is on, and the special figure F when the off flag is on. Is controlled to be turned on and off, and a setting indicating that the special figure 1 stop display is being performed is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control in the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs the fixed display of any one of the special figures A to F. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure related lottery processing for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special map-related lottery process (special map 2 related lottery process) for the special map 2 is performed first (step S229), and then the special map-related lottery process for the special map 1 (special map 1-related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Special figure 2 related lottery processing, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not done, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is in the non-operating state, and special figure 2 which is on hold Assuming that the number of variable games is 1 or more, it is executed using the earliest special figure 2 starting information in the special figure 2 random number storage area. Special figure 1 related lottery processing, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not done, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is inactive, and special figure 1 which is suspended Assuming that the number of variable games is 1 or more, it is executed using the earliest special figure 1 starting information in the special figure 1 random value storage area.

Regarding these special figure related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variation game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are met at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. If the number of pending special game 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable games related to the pending special game 1 variable games are not performed. The notification of the jackpot determination result of the special figure variation game by the decorative pattern display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the special lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is notified. The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the start opening 230 shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the special figure variation game with high advantage (for example, the special figure 2 variation game) is prioritized over the special figure variation game with low advantage (for example, the special figure 1 variation game). Therefore, it may be easy to give a difference in the degree of advantage of the game state.

In the case of special figure 2 related lottery processing (step S229), a special figure 2 random number value group (starting information) is set from the earliest (oldest stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random number storage area. Obtained and determined whether to make a big hit, a small hit or not by using a determination table (not shown), and a time from the start of the variable display of special figure 2 to the stop display , The symbols (stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed after the variable display of the special figure 2 are determined. After the earliest set of special figure 2 random number values from the special figure 2 random value storage area is taken out, the storage of the special figure 2 random number set in the special figure 2 random number value storage area is cleared and the special figure 2 Decrement the number of reservations. At this time, the set of special figure 2 random number values extracted from the special figure 2 random number value storage area is stored in a temporary area (an example of the second starting information storage means) provided in the RAM 308, The above determination may be performed based on the set of the special figure 2 random number values stored in the temporary area.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is similarly performed.

In the above explanation, the special figure 2 variable game with a high degree of advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game with a low degree of advantage, and the hold of special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of special figure 1. The special figure 2 priority variation is taken as an example, but the special figure 1 variation game with a low advantage is started with priority over the special advantage 2 variation game with a high advantage, and the special figure 1 is held pending It may be the special figure 1 priority variation that is preferentially digested over the hold. Also, without prioritizing either the special figure 2 variation game or the special figure 1 variation game, the special opening variation game related to the suspension of each of the special illustration 1 and the special figure 2 is started in the order in which the starting opening is won. It may be forward change. In the starting mouth winning order fluctuation, the upper limit number of reservations is 8 regardless of special figure 1 and special figure 2, so it is compared with the priority variation that the upper limit number of reservation is 4 in each of special figure 1 and special figure 2. Then, it may be possible to raise the practical upper limit of the number of holdings.

Further, in the above description, the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special map are not performed depending on the state of one special map, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above special map state update By performing the processing and the special figure-related lottery process independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, a plurality of special figures may be simultaneously changed. Further, in the case of simultaneously changing a plurality of special maps in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of regions for displaying the lottery results of each special map, or the lottery results of each special map are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to separately display each lottery result, or may be configured to display a plurality of special lottery results in one area. In addition, when fluctuations relating to a plurality of special maps are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 subsequent to step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The scheduled output information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when on, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (in the present embodiment, a basic command, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation stop command, a prize production start command, an end production start command, a jackpot round number designation command, a power recovery command, a RAM clear command, a prefetch result information command, etc. Bits 0 to 10 are command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data contains the values of the 15R jackpot flag and the 2R jackpot flag stored in the RAM 308 of the main controller 300, the jackpot flag, the outlier flag, and the special figure probability variation. Includes information indicating the value of the flag, the variation time of the special figure variation game selected in the special figure related lottery processing, and in the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R big hit flag or the 2R big hit flag, the small hit flag, Including the values of the outlier flag and special figure probability variation flag. In the case of a winning effect command and an end effect start command, including the value of a special figure probability variation flag, etc. The value of the figure probability variation flag and the number of big hit rounds are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the special diagram 2 starting port 232, and winning at the variable winning ports 234 and 235. Including presence or absence. In the case of the pre-reading result information command, the command data is information indicating the type of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the pre-reading number stored in the pre-reading number storage area, which will be described later, and the stop symbol stored in the pre-reading result storage section. Included in.

In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the values of the 15R big hit flag and the 2R big hit flag, the small hit flag, the off flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, and the special figure 1 related to the command data stored in the RAM 308 are related. Information indicating the variation time of the special figure variation game selected in the lottery processing and the special figure 2 related lottery processing, the number of the special figure 1 variation games or the special figure 2 variation games that are held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-described winning award effect setting transmission process, the command data stores the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the award effect period, and the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating a value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission processing, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating a value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening opening setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. Is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. Is set.

Further, in this step S233, general command special figure pending increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 for command data, advance notice information (advance notice information, false) (Advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set. In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full tank error. When the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control opening and closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning a prize port 234, and the general figure display device 210 and the special figure 1 display device 212 are controlled through the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display sections 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I/O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port (I/O 310).

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as restore data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of an input/output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main controller shown in FIG.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information increased in each of the special diagrams 1 and 2, and pre-determines the stop symbol before the winning/disapproval determining process, and the pre-determination result (special The prefetch result) is stored in the prefetch result storage unit (see FIGS. 54A to 54C) in the RAM 308.

In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the special figure 2 starting information has increased (step S301). Whether or not the special figure 2 starting information has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area and the special figure stored in the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. 2 Compared with the number of prefetches. The main control unit 300 determines that the special figure 2 start information has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and when the special figure 2 hold number is equal to the special figure 2 preread number. Determines that the special figure 2 starting information has not increased. If it is determined that the special figure 2 starting information has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the special figure 2 starting information has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S303, the increased special figure 2 start information is prefetched from the special figure 2 random value storage area before the winning/decision process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). Then, by using the pre-read special figure 2 starting information, for example, the hit determination table and the special figure 2 symbol determination table used at the time of hit determination, the special symbol 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is changed to the special symbol 2 Preliminary determination is made prior to the winning/judging determination processing in the related lottery processing (step S229). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used when determining whether or not it is true or false.

In step S305 subsequent to step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained by the preliminary determination is stored in the first empty area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Then, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the special figure 1 starting information has increased. To determine whether or not the special figure 1 start information has increased, for example, as in the case of the special figure 2, the special figure 1 hold number stored in the special figure 1 hold number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area are stored. The comparison is made with the stored special figure 1 prefetch number. If it is determined that the special figure 1 start information has increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the special figure 1 start information has not increased, the special figure prefetch process is ended and the main controller timer interrupt process Return to.

In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not the non-electricity support is being performed. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the power support is being performed), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not the non-electricity support is being performed, but it may be determined in step S309 whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetching notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading advance notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

In step S311, the increased special figure 1 starting information is prefetched from the special figure 1 random value storage area before the winning/judgment processing in the special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231). Then, by using the pre-read special figure 1 starting information, for example, the hit determination table and the special figure 1 symbol determination table used at the time of hit determination, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is changed to the special figure 1 Preliminary determination is made prior to the winning/judging determination processing in the related lottery processing (step S231). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used when determining whether or not it is true or false.

In step S313 subsequent to step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetch result obtained by the preliminary determination is stored in the first free area of the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the process returns to the main controller timer interrupt process.

In step S315, the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 in the RAM 308 is replaced with the "undetermined" information indicating that the starting information is not pre-read without pre-reading the increased special figure 1 starting information. Store in the first empty area of the set. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the process returns to the main controller timer interrupt process.

In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) described above, only the pre-reading result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, or the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 may be stored. All pre-reading results in the set may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pre-reading is always executed for the increased special figure 2 starting information, and the pre-reading is always executed for the increased special figure 1 starting information except during the electric support. Whether or not the starting information of the special maps 1 and 2 to be read in advance may be determined by a lottery. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300 may determine by lottery whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold, for example. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not it is in non-electric support), when the start information increases, the prefetch is always executed and the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch is performed. The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may determine whether or not to execute the lottery and the effect using the pre-reading result.

FIG. 54 exemplifies a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 54A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 54A, the pre-reading result storage section for special figure 1 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in this embodiment) as the holdable number of the special figure 1 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 54(a), the storage area "hold 1" stores "special drawing F" (off) as stop symbol information, and the storage area "hold 2" stores "special drawing F" as stop symbol information. "(Off)" is stored, "special drawing A" (15R special jackpot) is stored as storage symbol information in the storage area "holding 3", and "special drawing F" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "holding 4". "(Disappearance) is stored.

FIG. 54B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 preread result information is stored in the special figure 2 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 54( b ), the special figure 2 prefetch result storage section has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in this embodiment) as the holdable number of the special figure 2 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 54(b), "special drawing d" (off) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and the stop symbols are stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4". No information is stored. In FIG. 54(b), the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

FIG. 54(c) shows an example of the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit in the electrical support. As shown in FIG. 54C, in the storage area “holding 1”, “undetermined” information is stored in place of the stop symbol information. Neither stop symbol information nor "undetermined" information is stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4".

In the above description, only the stop symbol is pre-determined, and only the stop symbol information is stored in the pre-reading result storage section. It may be stored in a unit and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetch result information.

Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 55. It should be noted that FIG. 9A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of the timer variable update interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400.

First, in step S401 of FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, the input/output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized. This initialization process takes about 30 seconds, for example.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this processing is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the processing proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

In step S411 subsequent to step S409, if it is detected that the chance button has been pressed, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button.

In step S413 following step S411, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the sound source IC 416, the command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S415 following step S413, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to various lamps 418, the instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

In step S417 following step S415, if the effect data read out in step S409 includes an instruction to effect movable body 224, this instruction is output to drive circuit 422.

In step S419 following step S417, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S403. ..

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the first sub control unit 400 when the strobe signal output from the main control unit 300 is detected. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined when the timer interrupt is triggered. To be executed in the cycle. In step S601 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Stored in the timer variable storage area of. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S603 following step S601, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S419 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400, the process of updating other random numbers for performance is performed, and the like.

Next, the following examples will be described with reference to FIGS. First, a configuration that is almost commonly used among the configurations illustrated in the drawings used in the subsequent embodiments will be described with reference to FIG. 56A as an example. In FIG. 56(a), a decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure 1 display device 212, a special figure 2 display device 214, a special figure 1 hold lamp which form a part of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 218, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, and the speaker 120 are schematically shown. The special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are shown below the decorative pattern display device 208, and the special figure 2 display device 214 is the special figure 1 It is shown on the right side of the display device 212. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is shown above the special figure 1 display device 212, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 is shown above the special figure 2 display device 214. Further, the unlit parts of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are shown in white, and the lit parts are shown in black. The speaker 120 is shown on the right side of the Toku-zu 2 display device 214.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 56 to 63, an example of the effect in the case where the game state is the special figure high probability general figure high probability state (hereinafter, referred to as “probable substation support state”) will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, in the case of winning any of the special figure A, the special figure C, the special figure a, or the special figure c, in the special figure variation game of 80 times after the big hit game ends. It is a so-called ST machine that is in the probability substation support state. In the probability substation support state, as shown in FIG. 56(a), in the upper left corner of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, symbol display regions 208a to 208c for variable display and stop display of decorative symbols are allocated. The effect display area 208d is assigned to almost the entire image display area. If necessary, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c may be enlarged and displayed in the central portion of the image display area.

In addition, the state in which all the segments are shown in white on the special figure 2 display device 214 indicates that the variable display of special figure 2 is being executed. The same applies to the special figure 1 display device 212. Further, the variable display of each decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c during execution of the special figure variation game is represented by a downward arrow.

A fourth symbol display area is provided in the upper right corner of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The upper side in the fourth symbol display area is the fourth symbol display area 208e1 for special figure 1, and the lower side is the fourth symbol display area 208e2 for special figure 2. While the special figure 1 variation game is not operating, an image representing "○" painted in light black as the special figure 1 fourth design is displayed in the special design 1 fourth design display area 208e1. While the special figure 2 variation game is not operating, an image representing "□" painted in light black as the special figure 2 fourth pattern is displayed in the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 208e2. While the special figure 1 variation game is operating, an image representing a white "○" as the special figure 1 fourth symbol is displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 208e1. While the special figure 2 variation game is operating, an image representing a white "□" as the special figure 2 fourth symbol is displayed in the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display area 208e2.

A vertically long hold icon display area A is provided at the right end of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the hold icon display area A, four circular images are displayed side by side in the vertical direction. In the probability substation support state, the number of reservations of special map 2 on the priority variation side is displayed in the reservation icon display area A. In the hold icon display area A, the lowermost circular image corresponds to the hold of Toku-zu 2 having the first holding order, and the second circular image from the bottom corresponds to the hold of Toku-zu 2 having the second holding order. However, the third circular image from the bottom corresponds to the suspension of Toku-zu 2 with the 3rd holding order, and the 4th (top) circular image from the bottom corresponds to the holding of Toku-zu 2 with the 4th holding order. doing. When the circular image is displayed in a predetermined color (light black color in this example), the circular image is referred to as a holding icon, and the special figure 2 variable game of the holding order corresponding to the circular image is held. It means that. Further, when the circular image is displayed in white, it means that the special figure 2 variable game of the suspension order corresponding to the circular image is not suspended. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 may display a hold icon in a display mode of red, green, blue, or a pattern of a character to execute a look-ahead notice that gives an advance notice of the decision result of the pending special figure variation game. .. The pre-reading notice is executed based on the pre-reading result of the special figure pre-reading process shown in FIG. Note that, in the probability substation support state, a hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special diagram 1 on the non-priority side may be displayed in the hold icon display area A.

Further, in the probability variation power support state, a character string image indicating the remaining number of special figure variation games executed in the probability variation power support state is displayed above the center of the effect display area 208d. In FIG. 56(a), since the number of remaining special figure fluctuation games executed in the probability variation power support state is 80, the character string image of "remaining 80" is displayed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, the universal figure starting port 228 and the special figure 2 starting port 232 are arranged in the right path, so in the probability substation support state, the game is made by hitting the right side. Is advanced. As shown in FIG. 56(a), a rightward white arrow image is displayed on the upper right of the effect display area 208d, and a character string image of "right stroke" is displayed in the arrow image, and right stroke is performed. It has been notified to the player.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, in the probability substation support state, a background image of the wilderness and an animation of Yoshimune running in the wilderness are displayed in the effect display area 208d. In the probability substation support state, the character image of Yoshimune is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the notice effect and the reach effect are executed.

A horizontally long rectangular music selection area B is displayed at the upper left of the effect display area 208d. A music composed of a horizontally long rectangular frame image in the music selection area B and a character string image displayed in the frame image, which is any one of "Music 1" to "Music n" (n is a natural number of 2 or more). The display is displayed. The song displayed in the center of the song selection area B and indicated by the downward black arrow is the song currently selected. The player can select the music output from the speaker 120 by operating the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 to switch the music display displayed in the center of the music selection area B. When the frame image of the music display is displayed in white and the character string image of any of "Song 1" to "Song n" is displayed in the frame image, the music indicated by the music display is selected. It is possible. Further, when the frame image of the music display is displayed in light black color and the image showing "?" is displayed in the frame image, the music corresponding to the music display cannot be selected. .. Also, the music selection operation by the player may be possible only while the symbol variable display (special figure variation game) is being executed, or may be possible only in the probability variation electric power support state, or the special figure low probability general figure. Only the low probability state may be possible, the special figure high probability general figure low probability state only, the special figure low probability general figure high probability state only possible, the jackpot game It may be possible only during, or always. Further, in the state where the music selection area B is displayed, the player may always be able to perform the music selection operation.

The songs that can be selected in the present embodiment are songs that include songs. From the speaker 120, the accompaniment and song of the currently selected music is output. Further, below the center of the effect display area 208d, there is provided a lyrics display area C for displaying a character string image (hereinafter, simply referred to as "lyrics") representing lyrics corresponding to the song of the music. The lyrics display area C is divided by a horizontally long rectangular frame image, and the lyrics are displayed in the frame image. The lyrics display area C may not be partitioned by the frame image, and the lyrics may be displayed immediately above the background image.

Further, in the present embodiment, the length of the music output from the speaker 120 may be longer than the longest variation time of all the variation times of the variation times of the variation display of the special figure. , It may be longer than the longest fluctuation time at the time of big hit in the probability substation support state, may be longer than the shortest fluctuation time at the big hit in the probability substation support state, It may be longer than the longest fluctuation time at the time of falling off, longer than the shortest fluctuation time at the time of deviating substation support, or the longest fluctuation time at the time of big hit in the non-probability substation support state. It may be longer than this, may be longer than the shortest fluctuation time at the time of a big hit in the non-probable substation support state, or may be longer than the longest fluctuation time at the time of non-probability substation support state. However, it may be longer than the shortest fluctuation time at the time of the deviation in the probability substation support state, or longer than the shortest fluctuation time of the total fluctuation time. Note that the length of the music may be longer than the total variation time, or may be longer than some of these variation times and shorter than other portions.

Example 1 Next, effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 56. First, a production example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56(a) to 56(f) show, in this order, production example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In addition, in the drawings showing the effect examples in time series, the time passage between one drawing and the next drawing does not necessarily match between the drawings.

FIG. 56(a) shows a state in which the first special figure 2 variation game started after the end of the big hit game of the second consecutive resort is being executed. Here, the Renjo is to win the big hit in the probability substation support state. On the other hand, to win the big hit in the special probability low probability general figure low probability state is called first win. The 2nd consortium shifts to the probability substation support state based on winning the first win, and wins the big hit in the probability substation support state. In other words, 2 Renso wins the second big hit, counting from the first hit.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 56A, the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is 4 and the number of reservations in Toku-zu 2 is 4. The currently selected song is "Song 1." In this embodiment, the song 1 is the nursery rhyme "Acorn Korokoro". From the speaker 120, the song "Acorn" is output together with the accompaniment, and the lyrics of "Dongori Korokoro" are displayed in the lyrics display area C. In this embodiment, the lyrics for each bar are displayed in the lyrics display area C. The lyrics for every two measures may be displayed in the lyrics display area C. In the music selection area B, a character string image representing the title of the music (in this example, a character string image of “Acorn Rollor”) may be displayed instead of the character string image of “Music 1”. The same applies to song 2 and the like described later. Note that the lyrics display may be displayed or the lyrics display may be hidden during execution of the special figure 1 variation game.

Further, in the probability substation support state, the player can perform a music selection operation, and the number of selectable music is set according to the number of consecutive holidays. Only one song, song 1, is selectable in the probability transformation electric support state after the first win, and two songs, song 1 and song 2, are selectable in the probability transformation electric support state after 2 consecutive games. .. It should be noted that the number of songs that can be selected in the probability variation electric power support state after winning the first hit may be two, or may be three or more. In addition, the number of selectable songs may be increased by one song, two songs may be added, or three songs or more may be incremented each time the player plays together.

FIG. 56(b) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variation game has ended. The result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is out of order, "special figure d" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, and "decoration 2-decoration 8-decoration 3" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It is stopped. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs the singer "Korokoro" along with the accompaniment.

FIG. 56(c) shows a state in which one special figure 2 hold is digested and the next special figure 2 variation game is started. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 2 has decreased by 1 to 3. Also, the remaining number of special figure fluctuation games executed in the probability substation support state is 79 times. Also, the song "Acorn Gorokoro" advances to the next bar, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C is switched from "Donguri Korokoro" to "Domburico". From the speaker 120, the song "Don Burico" is output together with the accompaniment.

Further, prior to the start of the special figure 2 variation game, the main control unit 300 refers to a win/loss determination table (not shown) stored in the ROM 306 to determine whether or not the result, and the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out of sync. Is determined, and “special drawing d” is selected as the deviating pattern. In the present embodiment, since there is only one type of "special drawing d" for the special symbol 2 of the special symbol, if the winning/decision result of the special figure 2 variation game is the special symbol, "special diagram d" is uniquely specified. Is selected. Next, the main control unit 300 executes the lottery process with reference to the special figure 2 fluctuation time determination table (not shown) stored in the ROM 306, and determines the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation game to be, for example, 1 second. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, performs a lottery process using the effect lottery table (not shown) stored in the ROM 406, and reaches the reach effect and the special feature during execution. It is decided not to execute the notice effect of the figure variation game.

FIG. 56(d) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variation game has ended. The result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is out of order, "special figure d" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, and "decoration 2-decoration 8-decoration 3" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It is stopped. Further, the song "Acorn Gorokoro" advances to the next bar, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from "Don Burico" to "Oike ni addicted". From the speaker 120, the singing "I'm in the pond" is output together with the accompaniment.

FIG. 56(e) shows a state in which one of the special maps 2 has been reserved and the next special maps 2 variation game has started. The number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is decreased by 1 to 2. Further, the number of remaining special figure variation games executed in the probability substation support state is 78. In addition, the song "Acorn Gorokoro" advances to the next bar, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from "is in the pond" to "come hard". From the speaker 120, the song "Come on!" is output along with the accompaniment.

Further, prior to the start of the special figure 2 variation game, the main control unit 300 refers to a win/loss determination table (not shown) stored in the ROM 306 to determine whether or not the result, and the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out of sync. Is determined, and “special drawing d” is selected as the deviating pattern. Next, the main control unit 300 executes the lottery process with reference to the special figure 2 fluctuation time determination table (not shown) stored in the ROM 306, and determines the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation game to be, for example, 1 second. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, performs a lottery process using the effect lottery table (not shown) stored in the ROM 406, and reaches the reach effect and the special feature during execution. It is decided not to execute the notice effect of the figure variation game.

FIG. 56(f) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variation game has ended. The result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is out of order, "special figure d" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, and "decoration 2-decoration 8-decoration 3" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It is stopped. Further, the song "Donguri Korokoro" advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from "Come on" to "Dojo comes out". From the speaker 120, the song "Dojoga" is output together with the accompaniment.

As described above, in the production example 1 of the present embodiment, the music including the song is output from the speaker 120, and the lyrics corresponding to the song are displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

Next, a production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56(g) to (l) show a rendering example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in this order in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 56(g) to 56(j) are the states shown in FIGS. 56(a) to 56(d), description thereof will be omitted.

Fig. 56(k) shows a state in which the third bar (bar of "Oike addicted") of the song "Donguri Korokoro" is finished and the program proceeds to the next bar (bar of "Come on"). Showing. The lyrics "Come on!" is displayed in the lyrics display area C, but at the time point shown in FIG. 56(k), the singing of the fourth measure has not started yet, and only the accompaniment is output from the speaker 120. ing. In this way, when the bar of the music advances to the next, the lyrics display may be switched before the singing of the next bar is started. The switching of the lyrics display when proceeding to the next bar may be performed at the same time as the start of the singing of the next bar, or after the start of the singing.

FIG. 56(l) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variation game has ended. The result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is out of order, "special figure d" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, and "decoration 2-decoration 8-decoration 3" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It is stopped. In addition, the singing of the fourth measure of the musical composition “Donguri Korokoro” has started, and the speaker 120 outputs the singing “Cheerful” together with the accompaniment.

As described above, in production example 2 of the present embodiment, when the music proceeds to the next bar, the lyrics display of the next bar is started before the song of the next bar is started.

Example 2 Next, effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 57. First, a production example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57(a) to 57(e) show, in this order, production example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

FIG. 57(a) shows a state in which the first special figure 2 variable game started after the big hit game of the second consecutive resort has been executed. The number of reservations in special figure 1 is four, and the number of reservations in special figure 2 is four. Also, the currently selected song is "Acorn Korokoro" of "Song 1." From the speaker 120, the song "Acorn" is output together with the accompaniment, and the lyrics of "Dongori Korokoro" are displayed in the lyrics display area C.

FIG. 57(b) shows a state in which the notice effect is started during the execution of the special figure 2 variation game. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs the singer "Korokoro" along with the accompaniment. Further, prior to the start of the notice effect, continuous notice including a countdown display until the notice effect starts may be executed in the effect display area 208d. In the notice production of this example, an animation in which the character Yoshimune finds an enemy and a balloon image including the character string image of "enemy?"

FIG. 57(c) shows a state in which the notice production is continued, and the balloon including the character string image of “??” in place of the character string image of “enemy?” is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The image is displayed. Also, the song "Acorn Gorokoro" advances to the next bar, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C is switched from "Donguri Korokoro" to "Domburico". From the speaker 120, the song "Don Burico" is output together with the accompaniment.

FIG. 57(d) shows a state in which the preview effect ends without development and an animation of Yoshimune running is displayed in the effect display area 208d. Further, the song "Acorn Gorokoro" advances to the next bar, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from "Don Burico" to "Oike ni addicted". From the speaker 120, the singing "I'm in the pond" is output together with the accompaniment.

FIG. 57(e) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variation game has ended. The result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is out of order, "special figure d" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, and "decoration 2-decoration 8-decoration 3" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It is stopped. In addition, the song "Acorn Gorokoro" advances to the next bar, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from "is in the pond" to "come hard". From the speaker 120, the song "Come on!" is output along with the accompaniment.

As described above, in the rendering example 1 of the present embodiment, the lyrics display is continued even while the notice rendering is being executed.

Next, a production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57(f) to 57(j) show, in this order, production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order.

57(f) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 57(a), and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 57(g) shows a state in which the notice effect is started during the execution of the special figure 2 variation game. Prior to the start of the notice effect, continuous notice including a countdown display until the notice effect starts may be executed in the effect display area 208d. The countdown display is the same as the countdown display displayed prior to the start of the notice effect shown in FIG. 57(b). In the notice production of this example, an animation in which the character Yoshimune finds an enemy and a balloon image including the character string image of "enemy?" The character image and balloon image of Yoshimune displayed in the effect display area 208d in the notice effect of this example are the same as the character image and balloon image of Yoshimune displayed in the notice effect shown in FIG. 57(b).

Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute a plurality of types of notice effects, and the lyrics display area C and the lyrics display are erased during execution of the notice effect of this example. The lyrics display may be displayed during execution of a notice effect different from the notice effect of this example. The lyrics display area C and the lyrics display may be erased at the start of the countdown display, during the display of the countdown display, or at the start of the notice effect. It may be after the start of the notice production. Also, if the lyrics display is deleted during the notice production, the probability of developing into a super reach production is higher than the case where it is not deleted, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the special figure variation game being executed is higher. .. Further, even after the lyrics display area C and the lyrics display are erased, the music output from the speaker 120 proceeds as it is, and the speaker 120 outputs the song “Korokoro” together with the accompaniment.

FIG. 57(h) shows a state in which the notice production is continued, and in the production display area 208d, the animation of Yoshimune who has discovered the enemy and the character string image of "Enemy?" A balloon image including a character string image of “” is displayed. Further, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next bar, and the singing “Don Burico” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment. Further, the lyrics display area C and the lyrics display are maintained in the erased state.

FIG. 57(i) shows a state in which the notice effect has evolved into the effect of super reach A. In the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, "decoration 3" is displayed in a manner of swaying up and down (hereinafter, referred to as "fluctuation variation display"), and the variation display of the decorative symbol is reach. Further, in the effect display area 208d, the character image of Yoshimune is displayed on the left side, the character image of the enemy is displayed on the right side, and the animation of the scene where Yoshimune and the enemy confront each other is displayed. Further, a character string image of "SP reach A" is displayed in the lower center of the effect display area 208d to notify that the effect of super reach A has been started.

In addition, on condition that the super reach effect is started, the music selection area B is erased, and the output of the selected music "Acorn Korokoro" from the speaker 120 is interrupted. From the speaker 120, the sound effect of Super Reach A is output instead of the music “Acorn Gorokoro”. The music selection area B may be erased and the output of the song “Acorn Gorokoro” from the speaker 120 may be interrupted at the same time as the start of the super reach production, or the song “Acorn” immediately before the start of the super reach production. It may be at the end of one bar of "Korokoro". Further, during the period when the music selection area B is hidden, the music selection operation is impossible. In this way, when the super reach effect is started, the music selection area B is erased and the music selection operation becomes impossible.

FIG. 57(j) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variation game has ended. The result of the special figure 2 variation game is out of order, "special figure d" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, and "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It is stopped. When the result of the special figure variation game is out of order, after the animation of the scene where Yoshimune is defeated by the enemy in the production of Super Reach A is displayed in the production display area 208d, the production of Super Reach A ends and the symbol display In the areas 208a to 208c, decorative patterns of combinations at the time of shifting are displayed.

In addition, the output of the interrupted song "Donguri Korokoro" is restarted, the lyrics of "Dojo comes out" is displayed in the lyrics display area C, and the singing "Dojo" is displayed from the speaker 120 along with the accompaniment. Is output. In this example, the song "Acorn Gorokoro" is restarted at the same time as the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished. The output restart timing of the song "Donguri Kororo" may be the display stop period of the decorative symbol, or may be the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the next special figure variation game, It may be simultaneous with the end of the production of Super Reach A.

Further, in this example, even when the output of the song "Acorn Gorokoro" is suspended, the song is progressing internally, and the output of the song is restarted from where it internally progressed. In this example, the music progresses internally during the output interruption, and the measures of “getting into the pond” and “Come on” have ended, and the music starts from the beginning of the measure of “Dojo comes out”. Output has been restarted. Note that the music may be restarted from the point where the output was interrupted, from the beginning of the bar when the output was interrupted, or from the bar next to the bar when the output was interrupted. Good.

As described above, in the production example 2 of the present embodiment, the output of the selected song and the display of the lyrics are interrupted during the execution of the super reach production.

Example 3 Next, effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 58. First, a production example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58(a) to 58(e) show, in this order, production example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

58(a) to 58(c) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 57(f) to 57(h), and a description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 58D shows a state in which the effect of super reach A is started. In the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, "decoration 3" is displayed in a fluctuating manner, and the variable display of the decorative symbol indicates reach. Further, in the effect display area 208d, the character image of Yoshimune is displayed on the left side, the character image of the enemy is displayed on the right side, and the animation of the scene where Yoshimune and the enemy confront each other is displayed. Further, a character string image of "SP reach A" is displayed in the lower center of the effect display area 208d to notify that super reach A has started.

In addition, on condition that the super reach effect is started, the music selection area B is erased, and the output of the selected music "Acorn Korokoro" from the speaker 120 is interrupted. From the speaker 120, a music dedicated to Super Reach A is output instead of the music “Acorn Gorokoro”. In the present embodiment, the nursery rhyme "Yuki Ya Konko" is set as a song dedicated to Super Reach A. From the speaker 120, the song "Yukiya" is output together with the accompaniment. In this way, when the super reach effect is started, the music selection area B is erased. The lyrics display may be erased when the super reach effect is started.

In this example, a song with a relatively long one-bar lyrics, such as the song "Dongurikorokoro", displays the lyrics for each bar, and a one-bar lyrics, such as the song "Yukiya Konko", is relatively long. For short songs, the lyrics for every two measures are displayed. As shown in FIG. 58(d), when the lyrics are displayed every two measures, a space is provided between the measures of the lyrics, and "Snow and Konko" is displayed in the lyrics display area C. Further, the lyrics display of the song dedicated to the super reach may be displayed without being hidden by the button image, the cut-in image, and the movable body described later. For example, the lyrics display of the music dedicated to super reach may not be hidden by being displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the button image or the movable body. In addition, the lyrics display of the song dedicated to Super Reach is hidden by a button image, a cut-in image, and a movable body, which will be described later, and the lyrics display of a song that the player can select (for example, "acorn rolling") is a button image, which will be described later. The cut-in image may be displayed without being hidden by the movable body.

FIG. 58(e) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variation game has ended. The result of the special figure 2 variation game is out of order, "special figure d" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, and "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It is stopped. When the result of the special figure variation game is out of order, after the animation of the scene where Yoshimune is defeated by the enemy in the production of Super Reach A is displayed in the production display area 208d, the production of Super Reach A ends and the symbol display In the areas 208a to 208c, decorative patterns of combinations at the time of shifting are displayed.

In addition, the output of the interrupted song “Acorn Gorokoro” has been resumed, the lyrics of “I'm stuck in the pond” are displayed in the lyrics display area C, and the singing “Oike” is accompanied by the accompaniment from the speaker 120. "Is stuck" is output. In this example, the song "Acorn Gorokoro" is restarted at the same time as the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished. The resuming timing of the song "Acorn Gorokoro" may be the stop display period of the decorative symbol, the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the next special figure variation game, or the supermarket. It may be simultaneous with the end of the reach production.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 may perform the effect by causing the frame lamp 122 or the game board lamp 532 to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode that matches the output of the music. For example, these lamps may emit light in a light emission mode that matches the melody of the song "Donguri Koro Koro" to perform the effect. As in this example, when the output of the song "Acorn Rollokoro" is interrupted from the speaker 120 due to the start of the super reach production, the production by the light emission of the lamp according to the melody of the song "Acorn Rollokoro" is also performed. The production is interrupted and these lamps emit light in a light emission mode that matches the melody of the song "Yukiya Konko" for the production of super reach. In addition, the production by the light emission of the lamp according to the song "Acorn Rollokoro" is internally progressed without interruption, and is internally progressed when the output of the song "Acorn Rolloro" is resumed from the speaker 120. May be restarted from. As a result, before and after the music is interrupted, the sound effect and the light emission effect corresponding to the sound can be executed without deviation. In addition, the production by the light emission of the lamp in accordance with the music "Acorn Korokoro" may be internally interrupted, and may be restarted from the position where the music "Acorn Korokoro" was resumed from the speaker 120. As a result, before and after the music is interrupted, it may be possible to shift the effect of the sound and the effect of the light emission corresponding to the sound and change the effect mode so that the player does not get tired of the effect.

Further, in this example, the song "Acorn Korokoro" is restarted from the place where it was interrupted. As shown in FIG. 58(c), since it is finished at the end of the bar of "Donburico", as shown in FIG. It has been restarted. If the song "Donguri Korokoro" is interrupted at the end of the song "Donbu" in the bar "Donburico", it may be restarted from the song "Rico" in the bar "Donburico". In this way, when the music is interrupted in the middle of the bar, it may be restarted in the middle of the interrupted bar. In addition, if the music that can be selected by the player (in this example, the nursery rhyme "Donguri Korokoro" of song 1) is interrupted, even if it is restarted from the beginning of No. 2 of the song (Doyomu "Donguri Korokoro"). Alternatively, the output of another song that can be selected by the player (for example, the song of song 2 (song “Sakura Sakura”)) may be started.

Next, a production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58(f) to (i) show the rendering example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in this order in time series.

58(f) is similar to the state shown in FIG. 58(d), and the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 58(g), the song "Snow and Konko" advances to the next bar, and the speaker 120 outputs the song "Konko" together with the accompaniment.

FIG. 58(h) shows a state in which the cut-in effect is being executed while the super reach effect is being executed. In this example, the cut-in image is displayed by displaying the cut-in image on the entire surface of the effect display area 208d. The cut-in image of this example includes a character image of Yoshimune and a balloon image including a character string image of "Game!" Further, when the cut-in image of this example is displayed, the lyrics display area C and the lyrics display are deleted. As a result, the lyrics display of the musical composition is erased and interrupted during execution of the cut-in effect. In addition, the music “Yukiya Konko” advances to the next measure, and the singer “Kasumi” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment.

FIG. 58(i) shows a state in which an animation of a scene in which Yoshimune and an enemy cut off each other is displayed in the effect display area 208d after the cut-in image is erased and the cut-in effect ends. Further, the lyrics display area C and the lyrics display are displayed, and the lyrics display is resumed. The lyrics display may be restarted at the same time as the cut-in image is deleted, or after the cut-in image is deleted. In addition, the music “Yukiya Konko” advances to the next bar, and the speaker 120 outputs the song “Konko” together with the accompaniment.

In this way, in the example 2 of effect of the present embodiment, the lyrics display is hidden when the effect display such as the cut-in image is displayed.

Example 4 Next, effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59. First, a production example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59(a) to 59(e) show, in this order, production example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 59(a) and 59(b) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 57(a) and 57(b), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 59(c) shows a state in which the operation valid period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid (the operation acceptance period in which the operation is accepted) is started during the execution of the notice effect. Further, prior to the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, it is an image simulating the chance button 136 in the effect display area 208d and having a relatively small display size (hereinafter, referred to as “mini button image”). 800 is displayed. As a result, the player is notified that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. The mini button image 800 may be displayed at the same time as the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, or may be displayed after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started.

Also, the song "Acorn Gorokoro" advances to the next bar, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C is switched from "Donguri Korokoro" to "Domburico". From the speaker 120, the song "Don Burico" is output together with the accompaniment.

Further, the mini button image 800 is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C. Since the mini button image 800 is displayed in front of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C, a part of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C is hidden by the mini button image 800. As shown in FIG. 59(c), almost the lower half of the mini button image 800 is displayed so as to overlap with the upper center part of the lyrics display area C, and the upper part of "mburi" of the lyrics "Donburico" is displayed by the mini button image 800. It is hidden and invisible.

FIG. 59(d) shows a state in which an effect based on the chance button 136 being pressed (single press) is being executed during the operation valid period. In the operation valid period of this example, a single press of pressing the chance button 136 only once is required, and the operation valid period of this example ends when the chance button 136 is pressed once. When the chance button 136 is pressed once, the mini button image 800 is deleted. In addition, in the present example, an effect that indicates whether or not the advance notice effect is developed into the super reach effect is executed based on the chance button 136 being pressed once during the operation valid period. If the chance button 136 is not pressed during the valid operation period, the effect is not executed. In the effect display area 208d, a balloon image including the character string image of "??" is displayed instead of the character string image of "enemy?", which suggests that the notice effect does not develop into the super reach effect. The production is being executed. Further, the song "Acorn Gorokoro" advances to the next bar, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from "Don Burico" to "Oike ni addicted". From the speaker 120, the singing "I'm in the pond" is output together with the accompaniment.

FIG. 59(e) shows a state in which the preview effect ends without developing and the animation in which Yoshimune runs is displayed in the effect display area 208d. In addition, the song "Acorn Gorokoro" advances to the next bar, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from "is in the pond" to "come hard". From the speaker 120, the song "Come on!" is output along with the accompaniment.

As described above, in the effect example 1 of the present embodiment, when the effect display of the mini button image 800 is displayed, the mini button image 800 and a part of the lyrics display are overlapped and displayed.

Next, a production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59(f) to (j). 59(f) to (j) show, in this order, production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

The states shown in FIGS. 59(f) and 59(g) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 57(a) and 57(b), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 59(h) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started during execution of the notice production. In this example, prior to the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, it is an image that imitates the chance button 136 in the effect display area 208d and has a relatively large display size (hereinafter, referred to as a “big button image”). ) 802 is displayed. As a result, the player is notified that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. The big button image 802 may be displayed at the same time as the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, or may be displayed after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started.

Further, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next bar, and the singing “Don Burico” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment.

The big button image 802 is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C. Since the big button image 802 is displayed in front of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C, part of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C is hidden by the big button image 802. As shown in FIG. 59(h), the lower part of the big button image 802 is displayed so as to overlap with the central part of the lyrics display area C, and the entire lyrics “Don Burico” is hidden by the big button image 802 and becomes invisible.

When the deca button image 802 is displayed, compared to when the mini button image 800 is displayed, there is a high possibility that it will develop into a super-reach effect, and there is a high probability that a jackpot will be won in the special figure variation game being executed. Has become. In other words, the jackpot reliability of the big button image 802 is set to be higher than the jackpot reliability of the mini button image 800. In this way, it may be set such that the larger the display size of the plurality of types of images simulating the chance button 136, the higher the jackpot reliability. Further, the decal button image 802 has a larger ratio of hiding the lyrics display than the mini button image 800. As described above, an image in which the jackpot reliability is set to be relatively high may have a larger overlapping area in the lyrics display than an image in which the jackpot reliability is set to be relatively low.

FIG. 59(i) shows a state in which an effect based on the chance button 136 being pressed (single press) is being executed during the operation valid period. In the operation valid period of this example, a single press of pressing the chance button 136 only once is required, and the operation valid period of this example ends when the chance button 136 is pressed once. When the chance button 136 is pressed once, the big button image 802 is deleted. In addition, in the present example, an effect that indicates whether or not the advance notice effect is developed into the super reach effect is executed based on the chance button 136 being pressed once during the operation valid period. If the chance button 136 is not pressed during the valid operation period, the effect is not executed. In the effect display area 208d, a balloon image including a character string image of "discovery" is displayed instead of the character string image of "Is it enemy?", and an effect that suggests that the notice effect will develop into a super reach effect Is running. Further, the song "Acorn Gorokoro" advances to the next bar, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from "Don Burico" to "Oike ni addicted". From the speaker 120, the singing "I'm in the pond" is output together with the accompaniment.

FIG. 59(j) shows a state in which the notice effect has evolved into the effect of super reach A. In the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, "decoration 3" is displayed in a fluctuating manner, and the variable display of the decorative symbol indicates reach. Further, in the effect display area 208d, the character image of Yoshimune is displayed on the left side, the character image of the enemy is displayed on the right side, and the animation of the scene where Yoshimune and the enemy confront each other is displayed. Further, a character string image of "SP reach A" is displayed in the lower center of the effect display area 208d to notify that the effect of super reach A has been started. In addition, on condition that the super reach effect is started, the music selection area B is erased, and the output of the selected music "Acorn Korokoro" from the speaker 120 is interrupted. From the speaker 120, the sound effect of Super Reach A is output instead of the music “Acorn Gorokoro”. In this way, when the super reach effect is started, the music selection area B is erased.

As described above, in the effect example 2 of the present embodiment, when the effect display of the deca button image 802 is displayed, the deca button image 802 and all of the lyrics display are overlapped and displayed.

Further, when the image imitating the chance button 136 is displayed, the effect image may be displayed so as to surround the image. The larger the display size of the image imitating the chance button 136, the larger the display size of the effect image. The effect image may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the lyrics display. For example, the effect image surrounding the deca button image 802 may have a higher rate of hiding the lyrics display than the effect image surrounding the mini button image 800. The reverse is also possible. Further, the visibility of the lyrics display becomes lower as the hidden rate increases. Further, the transmittance of the effect image may be 0% or may be larger than 0% (for example, 50%).

Example 5 Next, effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 5 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60. First, a production example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60(a) to 60(e) show, in this order, production example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

60(a) and 60(b) show a state in which an effect similar to the effect shown in FIGS. 57(a) and 57(b) is being executed. Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 60A, a movable body 804 is arranged on the right side of the decorative pattern display device 208. The movable body 804 has a vertically long rectangular flat plate shape, and is labeled “Yoshimune” on the surface. The movable body 804 is driven by, for example, a stepping motor, guided in a guide groove (not shown), and movable in the left-right direction on the front surface of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 and in a plane parallel to the display screen. Is. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 60A, the movable body 804 is located at the initial position. The drive control of the movable body 804 may be performed by the first sub control unit 400 or the second sub control unit 500. The movable body 804 may be driven by a link mechanism.

FIG. 60C shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started during execution of the notice effect. In this example, prior to the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, it is an image that imitates the chance button 136 in the effect display area 208d and has an intermediate display size (hereinafter, referred to as “button image”). 806 is displayed. As a result, the player is notified that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. The button image 806 may be displayed simultaneously with the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, or may be displayed after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started.

Also, unlike the mini button image 800 shown in FIG. 59(c) and the big button image 802 shown in FIG. 14(h), the button image 806 of this example is not displayed overlapping the lyrics display area C. As described above, depending on the type of the image that imitates the chance button 136, it may be displayed so as to overlap the lyrics display, or may not be displayed so as to overlap the lyrics display.

FIG. 60D shows a state in which an effect based on the chance button 136 being pressed (single press) is being executed during the operation valid period. In the operation valid period of this example, a single press of pressing the chance button 136 only once is required, and the operation valid period of this example ends when the chance button 136 is pressed once. When the chance button 136 is pressed once, the button image 806 is deleted. Further, in this example, the movable body 804 moves to the left from the initial position based on the single press of the chance button 136 during the operation valid period. If the chance button 136 is not pressed during the operation valid period, the movable body 804 does not move from the initial position. The movable body 804 is stopped at approximately the center of the front surface of the decorative pattern display device 208. The position indicated by the dotted line on the right side of the decorative pattern display device 208 in FIG. 60D is the initial position of the movable body 804, and the movable body 804 can move within the range of the position in FIG. 60D from the initial position. is there. Further, in the operation valid period, the player may be required to continuously hit the chance button 136 or press and hold the button. In this case, the action effect of the movable body 804 is executed only when the player repeatedly hits the chance button 136 or long-presses the button. Similarly, during the operation valid period when the mini button image 800 or the big button image 802 is displayed, the player may be required to continuously hit the chance button 136 or long press the button. In this case, the cut-in effect and the notice effect are executed only when the player repeatedly hits the chance button 136 or long-presses the button.

When the button image 806 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the lyrics display, the button image 806 is deleted based on the single press of the chance button 136, and the entire lyrics display becomes invisible. After that, the movable body 806 moves so that part of the lyrics display is hidden by the movable body 806. As described above, when the chance button 136 is operated while a part of the lyrics display is hidden, there may be provided a period in which the entire lyrics display is visible.

Further, in the effect display area 208d, a balloon image including a character string image of "discovery" is displayed in place of the character string image of "enemy?", suggesting that the notice effect is developed into a super reach effect. The production to be performed is being executed. Further, the song "Acorn Gorokoro" advances to the next bar, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from "Don Burico" to "Oike ni addicted". From the speaker 120, the singing "I'm in the pond" is output together with the accompaniment.

Further, since the movable body 804 is moved to almost the center of the front surface of the decorative pattern display device 208, at least a part of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C is hidden. In this example, a part of "ike" and the whole "hama" of the lyrics "getting into the pond" are hidden. The movable body 804 has a width equal to or larger than the width of the lyrics display area C, and the entire lyrics display may be hidden by the movable body 804. As described above, in this example, at least a part of the lyrics display is hidden by the action effect of the movable body 804 executed based on the pressing of the chance button 136. Also, since the movable body 804 has moved to the left, the lyrics display written from the right is hidden by the movable body 804 from the rear side. Further, when the movable body 804 is arranged on the left side of the decorative pattern display device 208 and the movable body 804 moves toward the right side, the lyrics display written from the right side is hidden by the movable body 804 from the front side. .. Further, when the movable body 804 is arranged below the decorative pattern display device 208 and moved upward, the movable body 804 is hidden from the lower side of the lyrics display written horizontally, and the movable body 804 is decorated. When it is arranged above 208 and moved downward, it is hidden by the movable body 804 from the upper side of the lyrics display written horizontally. In this way, the direction in which the lyrics display starts to be hidden varies depending on the arrangement position and the moving direction of the movable body 804 at the initial position.

FIG. 60(e) shows a state in which the notice effect has evolved into the effect of super reach A. In the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, "decoration 3" is displayed in a fluctuating manner, and the variable display of the decorative symbol indicates reach. Further, in the effect display area 208d, the character image of Yoshimune is displayed on the left side, the character image of the enemy is displayed on the right side, and the animation of the scene where Yoshimune and the enemy confront each other is displayed. Further, a character string image of "SP reach A" is displayed in the lower center of the effect display area 208d to notify that the effect of super reach A has been started. In addition, on condition that the super reach effect is started, the music selection area B is erased, and the output of the selected music "Acorn Korokoro" from the speaker 120 is interrupted. From the speaker 120, the sound effect of Super Reach A is output instead of the music “Acorn Gorokoro”. Further, the movable body 804 has moved to the right and returned to the initial position. In this way, when the super reach effect is started, the music selection area B is erased.

As described above, in the production example 1 of the present embodiment, a part of the lyrics display is hidden by the motion production of the movable body 804 that is executed based on the operation of the chance button 136.

Next, a production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60(f) to (i) show, in this order, a second example of effect in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

FIGS. 60(f) and 60(g) show a state where an effect similar to the effects shown in FIGS. 57(a) and 57(b) is being executed.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 60(f), the movable body 808 is arranged below the decorative pattern display device 208. The movable body 808 has a circular shape, and the surface of the movable body 808 has a pattern of a family crest (for example, Mitsuba Aoi). The movable body 808 is driven by, for example, a stepping motor, guided by a guide groove (not shown), and moves in the vertical direction on the front surface of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 and in a plane parallel to the display screen. It is possible. The drive control of the movable body 808 may be performed by the first sub control unit 400 or the second sub control unit 500.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 60(f), the movable body 808 is located at the initial position. In the state where the movable body 808 is located at the initial position, almost 2/3 of the upper part is arranged at a position overlapping the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and approximately 1/3 of the lower part is the decorative pattern display device. It is arranged below the display screen 208 and behind the stage 244 shown in FIG. 48, and is invisible to the player.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 60(f) and 60(g), the movable body 808 overlaps with the central portion of the lyrics display area C and the central portion of the lyrics display area C is hidden, but the lyrics The display is displayed so as not to be hidden by the movable body 808. For example, the lyrics display area C of this example is provided horizontally longer than the example shown in FIGS. 60A to 60E, and the lyrics “acorn” is displayed on the left side of the lyrics display area C and overlaps with the movable body 808. A predetermined space is provided in a part, and the lyrics "Kororo" are displayed on the right side of the lyrics display area C. As a result, the player can visually recognize the entire lyrics display.

FIG. 60(h) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started during the execution of the notice effect. In this example, the button image 806 is displayed. As a result, the player is notified that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. The button image 806 may be displayed simultaneously with the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, or may be displayed after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started.

Also, the song "Acorn Gorokoro" advances to the next bar, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C is switched from "Donguri Korokoro" to "Domburico". The lyrics “Domb” is displayed on the left side of the lyrics display area C, a predetermined space is provided in a portion overlapping with the movable body 808, and the lyrics “Rico” is displayed on the right side of the lyrics display area C. As a result, the player can visually recognize the entire lyrics display. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs the song "Don Burico" together with the accompaniment.

FIG. 60(i) shows a state in which an effect based on the chance button 136 being pressed (single press) is being executed during the operation valid period. In the operation valid period of this example, a single press of pressing the chance button 136 only once is required, and the operation valid period of this example ends when the chance button 136 is pressed once. When the chance button 136 is pressed once, the button image 806 is deleted. Further, in the present example, the horizontally long rectangular (strip-shaped) cut-in image 810 is displayed in the effect display area 208d based on the chance button 136 being pressed during the operation valid period. The cut-in image 810 includes a character string image of "CHANCE!!" in the center. If the chance button 136 is not pressed during the valid operation period, the cut-in image 810 is not displayed.

Further, in the effect display area 208d, a balloon image including a character string image of "discovery" is displayed in place of the character string image of "enemy?", suggesting that the notice effect is developed into a super reach effect. The production to be performed is being executed. Further, the song "Acorn Gorokoro" advances to the next bar, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from "Don Burico" to "Oike ni addicted". The cut-in image 810 is displayed on the front side of the lyrics display area C, and is displayed so as to overlap the upper half of the lyrics display area C. As a result, a part of the lyrics display is hidden by the cut-in image, which makes the lyrics display difficult or impossible to read. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs the singer's addicted to the pond together with the accompaniment.

As described above, in the example 2 of effect of the present embodiment, a part of the lyrics display is hidden by the effect display of the cut-in image 810 displayed based on the operation of the chance button 136.

Example 6 Next, effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 6 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 61. First, a production example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61(a) to 61(f) show, in this order, production example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

FIG. 61(a) shows a state in which the first special figure 2 variable game started after the end of the big hit game of the second consecutive resort is being executed, as in FIG. 56(a). Further, in this example, by pressing the upper button or the lower button of the setting operation unit 137, the lyrics display can be switched on and off. When the lyrics display is on, the lyrics display is displayed in the lyrics display area C, and when the lyrics display is off, the lyrics display end area C is hidden and the lyrics display is not displayed. Also, when the lyrics display is in the ON state and the upper button or the lower button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed, the lyrics display is switched to the OFF state, and when the lyrics display is in the OFF state, the setting operation unit 137 is displayed. When the button or the down button is pressed, the lyrics display is switched on. In the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d, a lyrics display switching notification image 812 including a horizontally long rectangular frame image and a character string image of "Lyrics ON/OFF with up/down button" displayed in the frame image is displayed. The player is informed that the lyrics display can be switched on and off by pressing the upper button or the lower button of the setting operation unit 137.

In this example, since the lyrics display is set to the ON state, the lyrics of “Acorn” is displayed in the lyrics display area C. Also, the speaker 120 outputs the song "acorn" together with the accompaniment.

The on/off switching operation of the lyrics display may be possible only during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Also, while the lyrics display switching notification image 812 is hidden during execution of the super reach effect, the operation of switching the lyrics display on and off is valid, and the lyrics display during the super reach effect is on, The result of the OFF switching operation may be reflected after the end of the super reach effect. For example, when the lyrics display is off, the super reach effect is started, and while the super reach effect is being executed and the lyrics display switching notification image 812 is hidden, the upper button or the lower button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed. When pressed, the lyrics display is switched on. Since the lyrics display is hidden during execution of the super reach effect, the result of the operation of switching the lyrics display on and off is reflected on the display after the end of the super reach effect, and the lyrics display is started.

FIG. 61(b) shows a state in which the notice effect is started during the execution of the special figure 2 variation game. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs the singer "Korokoro" along with the accompaniment. Further, prior to the start of the notice effect, a countdown display until the start of the notice effect may be displayed in the effect display area 208d. In the notice production of this example, an animation in which the character Yoshimune finds an enemy and a balloon image including the character string image of "enemy?"

FIG. 61(c) shows a state in which the advance notice effect is continued, and a balloon including a character string image of "??" in place of the character string image of "enemy?" in the effect display area 208d. The image is displayed. Further, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next bar, and the singing “Don Burico” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment. Further, when the player presses the upper button or the lower button of the setting operation unit 137, the lyrics display is switched to the off state, and the lyrics display area C and the lyrics display are erased.

FIG. 61(d) shows a state in which the preview effect ends without developing and the animation in which Yoshimune runs is displayed in the effect display area 208d. Further, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next bar, and the singer “Oike ni addicted” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment.

FIG. 61(e) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variation game is finished. The result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is out of order, "special figure d" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, and "decoration 2-decoration 8-decoration 3" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It is stopped. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next bar, and the speaker 120 outputs the song “Come on” together with the accompaniment.

FIG. 61(f) shows a state in which one special figure 2 hold has been digested and the next special figure 2 variation game has started. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 2 has decreased by 1 to 3. Also, the remaining number of special figure fluctuation games executed in the probability substation support state is 79 times. Further, when the player presses the upper button or the lower button of the setting operation unit 137, the lyrics display is switched to the ON state, and the lyrics display area C and the lyrics display are displayed. The song "Donguri Korokoro" has advanced to the next bar, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C have been switched from "Come on" to "Dojo comes out". From the speaker 120, the song "Dojoga" is output together with the accompaniment.

As described above, in the rendering example 1 of this embodiment, the lyrics display can be turned on and off by operating the setting operation unit 137.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 61(g) to 61(j), an example 2 of effect in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. 61(g) to 61(j) show, in this order, production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

As shown in FIG. 61(g), lyrics display is set to OFF in this example. Therefore, the lyrics display area C is hidden and the lyrics display is not displayed. The effects shown in FIGS. 61(g) and 61(h) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b) except for the presence or absence of lyrics display.

FIG. 61(i) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started during execution of the notice production. In this example, a button image 806 is displayed below the center of the effect display area 208d. As a result, the player is notified that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. The button image 806 may be displayed simultaneously with the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, or may be displayed after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started.

Further, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next bar, and the singing “Don Burico” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment.

FIG. 61J shows a state in which the lyrics display is switched to the ON state by pressing the upper button or the lower button of the setting operation unit 137 while the button image 806 is displayed. The lyrics display area C is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the lyrics display is displayed. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” progresses to the next bar, the lyrics “I'm in the pond” is displayed in the lyrics display area C, and the singing “Oike in the water” is output from the speaker 120 along with the accompaniment. Has been done.

In this example, a part of the lyrics display area C is displayed so as to overlap the button image 806. Since the button image 806 is displayed in front of the lyrics display area C, part of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C is hidden by the button image 806. In this example, the upper part of the “hammer” of the lyrics “getting into the pond” overlaps with the button image 806 and is hidden.

As described above, depending on the timing of switching the lyrics display to the ON state, a part of the lyrics display may be hidden at the start of displaying the lyrics display. For example, when the timing at which the lyrics display is started and the timing at which the cut-in image 810 is displayed overlap with each other or the timing at which the movable body 804 moves to the position shown in FIG. A part of the lyrics display may be hidden by the cut-in image 810 or the movable body 804.

Example 7 Next, effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 7 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 62. First, a production example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62(a) to 62(e) show, in this order, production example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

The states shown in FIGS. 62(a) and 62(b) are similar to the states shown in FIGS. 59(a) and 59(b), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 62C shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started during execution of the notice production. In this example, prior to the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button image 806 is displayed below the central portion of the effect display area 208d. As a result, the player is notified that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started.

Also, the song "Acorn Gorokoro" advances to the next bar, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C is switched from "Donguri Korokoro" to "Domburico". From the speaker 120, the song "Don Burico" is output together with the accompaniment.

The button image 806 is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C. Since the button image 806 is displayed in front of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C, part of the lyrics display is hidden by the button image 806. As shown in FIG. 62C, the lower part of the button image 806 is displayed so as to overlap with the central part of the lyrics display area C, and the upper half or more of the lyrics “Donburico” is hidden by the deca button image 802. As a result, the lyrics display is hidden to the extent that it is difficult to read.

FIG. 62D shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 continues because the chance button 136 is not pressed. Therefore, the button image 806 is continuously displayed. Further, the song "Acorn Gorokoro" advances to the next bar, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from "Don Burico" to "Oike ni addicted". However, since the button image 806 continues to be displayed without changing the display position, the button image 806 hides the upper part of “Ike ni machi” of the lyrics “I am addicted to pond”. As a result, the lyrics display is hidden to the extent that it is difficult to read. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs the singer's addicted to the pond together with the accompaniment.

FIG. 62E shows a state in which the chance button 136 is not pressed, so that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 continues. Therefore, the button image 806 is continuously displayed. In addition, the song “Saa Taikai” advances to the next bar, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “I am stuck in a pond” to “Saa Taikai”. However, since the button image 806 continues to be displayed without changing the display position, the button image 806 hides the upper part of the lyrics “Come on!”. As a result, the lyrics display is hidden to the extent that it is difficult to read. Further, the speaker 120 outputs the song "Come on!" along with the accompaniment.

In this way, at least a part of the lyrics display continues to be hidden by the button image 806 while the chance button 136 is not pressed even if the button image 806 is started to be displayed. As a result, even when the music progresses to the next bar and the lyrics display is switched to the next bar, at least a part of the lyrics display of the next bar may be hidden by the effect display of the button image 806. is there. When the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed while the button image 806 is displayed to switch from song 1 to song 2, the lyrics display of song 2 is hidden by the button image 806. It may be started.

Next, a production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62(f) to 62(k) show, in this order, production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

The states shown in FIGS. 62(f) and 62(g) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 59(a) and 59(b), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 62(h) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started during execution of the notice effect. In this example, prior to the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button image 806 is displayed below the central portion of the effect display region 208d, and the remaining operation valid period remains below the button image 806 in the effect display region 208d. A gauge image (meter image) 814 indicating time is displayed. The gauge image 814 has a black horizontally long rectangular shape, and represents the remaining time of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 by the length. In this example, the button image 806 and the gauge image 814 are displayed to notify the player that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. The gauge image 814 may be displayed at the same time as the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, or may be displayed after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. Further, the button image 806 and the gauge image 814 may be started to be displayed at the same time, or one of them may be started to be displayed first.

Also, the song "Acorn Gorokoro" advances to the next bar, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C is switched from "Donguri Korokoro" to "Domburico". From the speaker 120, the song "Don Burico" is output together with the accompaniment.

Further, in this example, the gauge image 814 is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C. Since the gauge image 814 is displayed in front of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C, part of the lyrics display is hidden by the gauge image 814. As shown in FIG. 62(h), the lower part of the gauge image 814 is displayed so as to overlap with the upper part of the center of the lyrics display area C, and the upper part of the lyrics “Don Burico” is hidden by the gauge image 814. The lower part of the gauge image 814 may be displayed so as to overlap with the lower part of the lyrics display, and the button image 806 may be displayed so as to overlap with the upper part of the lyrics display.

FIG. 62(i) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is not pressed, so that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 continues. Therefore, the button image 806 and the gauge image 814 are continuously displayed. In addition, the length of the gauge image 814 is shortened, and it is displayed that the remaining time of the operation valid period has decreased. Further, the song "Acorn Gorokoro" advances to the next bar, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from "Don Burico" to "Oike ni addicted". In addition, the upper part of “Ike ni ni ni” of the lyrics “i ni ni ni ni ni” is hidden by the gauge image 814. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs the singer's addicted to the pond together with the accompaniment.

During the operation valid period, the gauge image 814 is displayed so as to become shorter from the left to the right. The lyrics are displayed from left to right. Therefore, when the gauge image 814 is shortened, the visible portion from the front side of the lyrics display is enlarged, and, for example, the song and the visible portion of the lyrics display may be aligned with each other. Further, when the music progresses to the next bar and the lyrics display is switched to the next bar while the gauge image 814 is shortening, the beginning side portion of the lyrics display of the next bar becomes visible.

FIG. 62(j) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is not pressed, so that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 continues. Therefore, the button image 806 and the gauge image 814 are continuously displayed. In addition, the length of the gauge image 814 is shortened, and it is displayed that the remaining time of the operation valid period has decreased. In addition, the song "Acorn Gorokoro" advances to the next bar, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from "is in the pond" to "come hard". In addition, the upper part of “difficult” of the lyrics “sadly” is hidden by the gauge image 814. Further, the speaker 120 outputs the song "Come on!" along with the accompaniment.

FIG. 62K shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 continues because the chance button 136 is not pressed. Therefore, the button image 806 and the gauge image 814 are continuously displayed. In addition, the length of the gauge image 814 is shortened, and it is displayed that the remaining time of the operation valid period has decreased. Further, the song "Donguri Korokoro" advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from "Come on" to "Dojo comes out". In addition, the upper part of “come” of the lyrics “come out” is hidden by the gauge image 814. Further, the speaker 120 outputs the singer "Dojo comes out" together with the accompaniment.

As described above, in the second production example of the present embodiment, the gauge image 814 of the lyrics display is displayed so as to overlap the lyrics display.

Example 8 Next, effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 8 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 63. First, a production example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63(a) to 63(c) show, in this order, production example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

The state shown in FIG. 63(a) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 56(a), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 63B shows a state in which the player has pressed the right button of the setting operation unit 137 to switch from song 1 to song 2. In the center of the music selection display area B, the music display of "Song 2" is displayed. However, the result of the music selection operation is not reflected, and the lyrics "Acorn Gorokoro" of the motion "Acorn Gorokoro" of the song 1 is displayed in the lyrics display area C, and the singing "Kokoro" is accompanied by the accompaniment from the speaker 120. It is being output.

FIG. 63(c) shows a state in which the lyrics of the song 2 is displayed and output, in which the result of the song selection operation is reflected. In the present embodiment, the song “Sakura Sakura” is set as the song 2. From the speaker 120, the song “Sakura” is output together with the accompaniment, and the lyrics of “Sakura Sakura” are displayed in the lyrics display area C. The lyrics of the song "Sakura Sakura" are displayed every two measures.

When switching the music of this example, the lyrics display is first switched to the lyrics display of song 2, and then the song output from the speaker 120 is switched from song 1 to song 2.

Next, a production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63(d) to (f) show, in this order, a second example of effect in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

The states shown in FIGS. 63(d) and 63(e) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 63C shows a state in which the result of the music selection operation is reflected and the song “Sakura” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment. Further, the lyrics display does not reflect the result of the music selection operation, and the lyrics “Don Burico” of the song 1 “Acorn” is displayed in the lyrics display area C.

When switching the music of this example, the music output from the speaker 120 is switched from the music 1 to the music 2, and then the lyrics display is switched to the lyrics display of the music 2.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 63(g) and 63(h), an example 2 of effect in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. 63(g) and 63(h) show, in this order, production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

FIG. 63( g) shows a state in which the music selection operation is reflected and the singer “Sakura” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment. Also, the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C is hidden.

FIG. 63(h) shows a state in which the lyrics display is switched to the lyrics display for song 2. In the lyrics display area C, the lyrics "Sakura Sakura" of the song "Sakura Sakura" are displayed. In addition, the song “Sakura” has advanced to the second bar, and the singer “Sakura” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment.

As described above, when the music is switched, the lyrics display of the song 2 may be started after the lyrics display of the song 1 is once deleted. The start timing of the lyrics display of the song 2 may be after the output of the song 2 from the speaker 120 is started, for example, when the song 2 enters the second measure.

Next, effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to the modified example of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66.

First, an effect according to the first modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In this example, the lower end of the button image 806 is in contact with the upper end of the central portion of the lyrics display area C so that the gauge image 814 is on the front side of the lyrics display of the lyrics display area C and overlaps the lower portion of the lyrics display. It is displayed. As a result, the upper part of the lyrics "Acorn Gorokoro" is displayed between the gauge image 814 and the button image 806. The button image 806 may overlap at least a part of the lyrics display.

Next, an effect according to the modified example 2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In this example, a horizontally elongated hold icon display area D is provided below the effect display area 208d. In the hold icon display area D, a maximum of four hold icons corresponding to the hold of special figure 1 can be displayed, and a maximum of four hold icons corresponding to the hold of special figure 2 can be displayed, for a total of eight hold icons. The hold icon can be displayed. Further, on the left side of the hold icon display area D, a square variable icon display area E is provided. In the variable icon display area E, an icon (hereinafter, referred to as “variable icon”) corresponding to the consumed hold is displayed.

In this example, the hold icon 816 displayed in the third pattern from the left in the display mode of the pattern of Yoshimune's face is displayed overlapping with a part of the lyrics display. The hold icon 816 is displayed on the front side of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C, and a part of the lyrics display is hidden by the holding icon 816. In this way, the hold icon may be displayed so as to overlap the lyrics display.

The hold icon 816 is displayed as a look-ahead notice of the special figure variation game that is held for the third time. The display size of the hold icon for prefetching notice is larger than the display size of the default circular hold icon, so that it overlaps a part of the lyrics display. Therefore, when four or more pre-reading notice holding icons are displayed, the pre-reading notice holding icon may be hidden to the extent that the lyrics display is difficult to read. Further, since the variable icon display area E is arranged at a predetermined interval from the lyrics display area C, the variable icon does not overlap the lyrics display.

Next, an effect according to the modified example 3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64(c) and 64(d). 64C and 64D show, in this order, a production example in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in time series.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 64C, a princess character image (hereinafter referred to as “princess”) 818 is displayed in the lower right part of the effect display area 208d. By using the princess 818, it is possible to execute a hold icon change effect, a look-ahead notice effect, a notice effect of the change, a tutorial effect, a conversation notice display, and the like.

FIG. 64C shows a state in which the hold icon change effect is started. An animation in which the princess 818 shoots an arrow toward the target hold icon to be changed is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon change effect is executed. In this example, the pre-reading notice effect for the special figure 1 variable game with the third pending order is executed. As shown in FIG. 64(d), a notice animation in which an arrow flies toward the third hold icon 820 from the left is displayed. Further, the notice animation and a part of the lyrics display are displayed in an overlapping manner. Since the notice animation is displayed in front of the lyrics display, part of the lyrics display is hidden by the notice animation.

FIG. 64D shows a state where the arrow hits the hold icon 820 and the display mode of the hold icon 820 changes. The display mode of the hold icon 820 has changed from the default circular display mode to the display mode of the Yoshimune face pattern. Further, in this example, since the hold icon display area D and the lyrics display area C are arranged with a predetermined interval, the changed hold icon 820 is displayed so as not to overlap the lyrics display.

Next, an effect according to the modified example 4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In this example, as shown in FIG. 64(e), the lyrics display is displayed in two rows above and below. For example, when the song includes a plurality of parts, the lyrics for each part may be displayed in the upper lyrics display area F and the lower lyrics display area G. Further, the upper lyric display and the lower lyric display displayed for each part may be different. Further, only the lyrics display in the upper row may be hidden by the effect display of the cut-in image or button image or the movable body, and only the lyrics display in the lower row may be hidden by the effect display of the cut-in image or button image or the movable body. The upper and lower lyrics display may be hidden by the effect display such as a cut-in image or button image, or the movable body.

Next, an effect according to the modified example 5 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64(f) and 64(g). FIG. 64F shows a state where the inside of the frame of the lyrics display area C is displayed in light black color. The display mode of the lyrics display area C shown in FIG. 64(f) is the default display mode.

FIG. 64(g) shows a state in which the inside of the frame of the lyrics display area C is displayed in red (indicated by cross hatching in the figure). In this example, the inside of the frame of the lyrics display area C is displayed in red and the notice effect is executed. The colors in the frame of the lyrics display area C are set to red, green, and blue in descending order of the jackpot reliability. In this way, the jackpot reliability may be indicated in the lyrics display mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65(a), an effect according to the modified example 6 of the present embodiment will be described. In this example, an error image 822 is displayed on the lower left of the effect display area 208d. The error image 822 of this example displays a lower plate full tank error and includes a character string image of “please remove the ball”. In the error image 822, the lower tray full sensor detects that the lower tray 128 is full, and the first sub control unit 400 receives a command including information that the lower tray full error has occurred from the main control unit 300. It is displayed based on what you have done. Therefore, the error image 822 is not erased unless the lower plate full tank error is eliminated, more specifically, unless the ball discharge lever 132 is operated.

The error image 822 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the lyrics display area C. The lyrics display may be hidden by a plurality of types of display including effect display such as the button image 806 and error display such as the error image 822. For example, the effect display may have a larger area hidden by the lyrics display than the error display, or vice versa. Further, the effect display may hide the front side of the lyrics display, and the error display may hide the rear side of the lyrics display, or vice versa.

Next, an effect according to the modified example 7 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65(b) to (d) show, in this order, a production example in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in time series.

FIG. 65(b) shows a state in which the button introduction animation has started to be displayed. The button introduction animation is an animation for warning that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 will start. In the button introduction animation of this example, a button image 806a having a transparency of 50% is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d, and a button image 806b having a transparency of 50% is displayed on the right side of the effect display area 208d. An animation in which the button images 806a and 806b move to the center of the effect display area 208d is displayed.

FIG. 65(c) shows a state in which the button introduction animation is being executed. Button images 806a and 806b have moved to near the center of the effect display area 208d. After the button images 806a and 806b are completely overlapped, the button introduction animation is ended.

FIG. 65D shows a state in which the button image 806 is displayed after the button introduction animation is completed. When the button images 806a and 806b change to the button image 806 after the button images 806a and 806b completely overlap each other, the button introduction animation ends.

The button introduction animation of this example is displayed without overlapping the lyrics display. More specifically, the button images 806a and 806b are displayed without overlapping the lyrics display. On the other hand, the button image 806 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the lyrics display.

Next, an effect according to the modified example 8 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65(e) and (f) show, in this order, an example of effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in time series.

In this modification, a predetermined mission is given to the player, and when the mission is achieved, an image for notifying the achievement of the mission is displayed. The mission achievement condition of the mission of this example is that a predetermined effect display is executed, for example. The mission achievement ranks A, B, and C are assigned in descending order of the jackpot reliability of the predetermined effect display.

FIG. 65(e) shows a state in which the rank C mission is completed. A rank C achievement image 824 is displayed at the lower right of the effect display area 208d. The rank C achievement image 824 is composed of a horizontally long rectangular frame image and a “rank C achievement” character string image displayed in the frame image. The rank C achievement image 824 is displayed without overlapping the lyrics display area C.

FIG. 65(f) shows a state in which the rank A mission is completed. A rank A achievement image 826 is displayed below the rank C achievement image 824 at the lower right of the effect display area 208d. The rank A achievement image 826 includes a horizontally long rectangular frame image and a character string image of “rank A achievement” displayed in the frame image.

In this example, the rank C achievement image 824 that displays the first-ranked mission achievement of rank C is displayed without overlapping the lyrics display area C, and displays the second-ranked mission achievement of rank A. The rank A achievement image 826 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the lyrics display area C. In this way, when a plurality of missions have been achieved, the effect display for notifying the mission achievement may be displayed overlapping with the lyrics display.

Next, an effect according to the modified example 9 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65( g) shows the timing of song output from the speaker 120 and the timing of lyrics display on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 65(g) shows the passage of time from left to right, and shows the state of the song output from the speaker 120 in the upper stage and the state of the lyrics display of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the lower stage.

In this example, prior to the output of the singing song, the lyrics display "Donguri Korokoro" is displayed at time t1, and the song "Acorning Korokoro" is output at time t2 after the lyrics display is started. Further, at time t3, the lyrics display "Donguri Korokoro" is erased, and the song "Acorn Korokoro" ends.

In the second measure of the music, similarly to the first measure, the lyrics display "Don Burico" is displayed at time t4 prior to the singing output, and the song "Don Burico" is output at time t5 after the lyrics display is started. It Also, at time t6, the lyrics display "Don Burico" is erased, and the song "Don Burico" ends.

In the present example, after the lyrics display for one bar is started, the singing for the one bar is started. Note that the lyrics display start timing and the song output start timing may be the same, or the lyrics display start timing may be later than the song output start timing. Further, in this example, at the same time as the output of the song of one measure is finished, the lyrics display of the one measure is finished. It should be noted that the lyrics display of the one bar may be terminated after the output of the song of one bar is finished, or vice versa. Further, the lyrics display may be temporarily hidden when advancing to the next bar, or the lyrics display for one bar following the one bar may be started at the same time when the lyrics display for one bar is finished.

FIG. 65(h) to FIG. 65(k) are diagrams for explaining the effect according to the modified example 9A of the present embodiment, and show the example effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to the modified example in chronological order in this order.

FIG. 6H shows a state in which the button introduction animation (button introduction introduction animation, fade-in animation) has started. A button image 806a with a transmissivity of 50% is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d, a button image 806b with a transmissivity of 50% is displayed on the right side of the effect display area 208d, and the button images 806a and 806b are effect displays. An animation of moving to the center of the area 208d is displayed.

After the button images 806a and 806b are moved to near the center of the effect display area 208d in FIG. 7I, the button images 806a and 806b are completely overlapped as shown in FIG. , Button introduction animation ends.

In this modification, FIG. 65(h) to FIG. 65(j) show a state where the button introduction animation is being executed. In this modification, the chance button 136 is operated during the period from the start of execution of the button introduction animation ((h) in the figure) to the end of the button introduction animation ((j) in the figure). Even if there is, the operation is not accepted as a valid operation.

Also, an error image 822 (in this example, the lower plate full tank error is displayed from the start of execution of the button introduction animation, and a display including the character string image of "please remove the ball" (ball removal display)) is displayed. Although displayed, the button introduction animation does not overlap the error image 822 (the button introduction animation does not overlap the error image 822).

FIG. 9K shows a state after the button images 806a and 806b completely overlap each other and then the button images 806a and 806b are changed to the button images 806 and the button introduction animation ends. That is, the operation of the chance button 136 is effectively accepted, and the button image 806 and the gauge image (meter image) 814 are displayed. After this timing, the length of the gauge image 814 is shortened, and the display in which the meter is reduced is started. In this example, neither the button image 806 nor the gauge image 814 overlaps with the error image 822 (the button image 806 and the gauge image 814 do not overlap with the error image 822).

The gauge image 814 may be displayed at the same time as the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, or may be displayed after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. Further, the button image 806 and the gauge image 814 may be started to be displayed at the same time, or one of them may be started to be displayed first.

FIG. 65(l) to FIG. 65(o) are diagrams for explaining the effect according to the modified example 9B of the present embodiment, and show in order the effect examples in the pachinko machine 100 according to the modified example in this order. Modification 9B is an example of "a better button effect" than Modification 9A. “Good button effect” means that the effect display that is displayed when the chance button 136 is operated has a higher jackpot expectation degree or a higher jackpot expectation degree than the button effect of the modification 9A. It is an easy production. Even if the effect display displayed when the chance button 136 is operated is the same as the button effect of the modification 9A, it is an effect with a high jackpot expectation.

65(l) to FIG. 65(o) show a state in which a “good button introduction animation” that can be expected to be a “good button effect” is being executed, as compared with FIG. 65(h) to (j).

First, FIG. 1L shows a state where the button introduction animation is started. In this case, a button image 806a having a transmissivity of 50% is displayed on the upper left of the effect display area 208d, a button image 806b having a transmissivity of 50% is displayed on the upper right of the effect display area 208d, and the button images 806a and 806b. An animation of moving to the center of the effect display area 208d is displayed. Further, in synchronization with these, for example, a button image 806c having a transmittance of 50% is displayed in the lower left of the effect display area 208d, and a button image 806d having a transmittance of 50% is displayed in the lower right of the effect display area 208d. Then, an animation in which the button images 806c and 806d move to the center of the effect display area 208d is displayed. Also, the error image 822 (in this example, the lower plate full tank error is displayed, and the display including the character string image of "please remove the ball" (ball removal display)) is displayed, but at this timing Then, the error image 822 and a part of the button introduction animation do not overlap.

Further, in the figure (m), the button images 806a and 806b move to the vicinity of the center of the effect display area 208d, and the button images 806c and 806d reach the vicinity of the center of the effect display area 208d at the same timing, for example. Moving. At this timing, a part of the button introduction animation (in this example, the button images 806c and 806d are overlapped with the error image 822).

Then, as shown in FIG. 9(n), the button images 806a and 806b completely overlap, and the button images 806c and 806d completely overlap with each other at the same timing (the button images 806a and 806b also completely overlap). After that, the button introduction animation ends.

In the figure (o), after the button images 806a, 806b, 806c, and 806d completely overlap, the button images 806a, 806b, 806c, and 806d change to a large button image (deca button image) 806', and the button introduction animation is displayed. This is the state after the end. That is, the operation of the chance button 136 is effectively accepted, and the large button image 806′ and the gauge image (meter image) 814 are displayed. After this timing, the length of the gauge image 814 is shortened, and the display in which the meter is reduced is started. In this example, neither the large button image 806' nor the gauge image 814 overlaps the error image 822 (the large button image 806' and the gauge image 814 do not overlap with the error image 822).

The gauge image 814 may be displayed at the same time as the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, or may be displayed after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. Also, the large button image 806' and the gauge image 814 may be simultaneously displayed, or either one of them may be displayed first.

In the present modification, the large button image 806′ and the gauge image 814 are displayed without fail after the button introduction animation is finished, and the button effect is executed. However, even if the button effect of GASE is included. Good. In the case of the configuration including the button effect of Gase, the "good button introduction animation" may have a configuration in which the button effect is easier to achieve than the "button introduction animation" of the modification 9A, or instead of this or in addition to this. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that "a good button effect" can be expected when the button effect is established.

Note that neither the button image 806 of the modified example 9A (FIG. 65(k)) nor the decal button image 806′ of the modified example 9B (FIG. 65(o)) overlaps the error display 822, but the modified example 9A is modified. Only in the case of one of the production examples of Example 9B, some display (for example, the button image 806, the big button image 806′, the gauge image 814, etc.) may be configured to overlap the error display 822.

The button images 806, 806a to 806d and the large button image 806' shown in FIG. 65 may all be one of the images simulating the operation means.

FIG. 65(p) to FIG. 65(r) are views for explaining the effect according to the modified example 9C of the present embodiment, and sequentially show the effect examples in the pachinko machine 100 according to the modified example in this order.

FIG. 11(p) shows a state in which the button introduction animation is finished and the button effect is started. That is, the operation of the chance button 136 is effectively accepted, and the button image 806 and the gauge image (meter image) 814 are displayed. After this timing, the length of the gauge image 814 is shortened, and the display in which the meter is reduced is started. In this example, neither the button image 806 nor the gauge image 814 overlaps with the error image 822 (the button image 806 and the gauge image 814 do not overlap with the error image 822).

The figure (q) is a state after the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ((p) in the figure), and the button image 806 and the gauge image (meter image) 814 are not displayed. Then, another effect image (in this example, a cut-in image of the character (lord)) is displayed. Further, the error image 822 is continuously displayed.

The figure (r) shows a state in which the “good effect” is executed more than the figure (q), and for example, a cut-in image of a character (lord) larger than the figure (r) is displayed. ing. The “good effect” is an effect with a high expectation for a big hit, and the effect image (the cut-in image of the small character (lord)) in FIG. 7(q) is displayed rather than after the effect image is displayed. After the effect image (the cut-in image of the large character (lord)) is displayed, the jackpot pattern is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed.

Further, in the “good effect” shown in (r) of the figure, the effect image (the cut-in image of the large character (lord)) is overlapped with the error image 822. Note that, in this example, of the figures (r) and (q), only the case of the figure (r) (the case of “good effect”) is configured to overlap the error image 822. In the case of (r) in the figure (in the case of "good effect"), the area overlapping the error image 822 is larger than in the case of (q) in the figure (effect in which the big hit expectation degree is lower than that in "good effect"). In the case of the figure (r) (in the case of “good effect”), the case where it overlaps with the error image 822 is 100% (always overlaps), but in the case of the figure (q) (“good”). The effect), which has a lower jackpot expectation than the effect,) may overlap with the error image 822 at 0% (no overlap at all).

Next, an effect according to the modified example 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66(a) to 66(c). 66(a) to 66(c) show, in this order, a production example in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in time series.

As shown in FIG. 66(a), the lyrics display area C of this example is displayed above the center of the effect display area 208d. Further, in FIG. 66A, the button introduction animation is started to be displayed. In the button introduction animation of this example, a button image 806a having a transparency of 50% is displayed in the upper left of the effect display area 208d, and a button image 806b having a transparency of 50% is displayed in the upper right of the effect display area 208d. An animation is displayed in which the button images 806a and 806b move to the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

FIG. 66B shows a state where the button introduction animation is being executed. Button images 806a and 806b have moved to near the center of the effect display area 208d. Further, the button images 806a and 806b are displayed so as to overlap a part of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C.

FIG. 66C shows a state in which the button image 806 is displayed after the button introduction animation is completed. When the button images 806a and 806b change to the button image 806 after the button images 806a and 806b completely overlap each other, the button introduction animation ends.

The button introduction animation of this example is not displayed in a part of the lyrics display during the entire display period, but is displayed in a part of the lyrics display during the intermediate display period. The button introduction animation of this example is displayed so that the lyrics display is not hidden at the beginning and the lyrics display is hidden in the middle of the display. Further, the button image 806 displayed after the button introduction animation is finished is displayed so as not to overlap the lyrics display.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 66(d) and 66(e), an effect according to the modified example 11 of the present embodiment will be described. 66D and 66E show, in this order, an example of effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in time series.

FIG. 66D shows a state where the effect of super reach A is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, "decoration 3" is displayed in a fluctuating manner, and the variable display of the decorative symbol indicates reach. Further, in the effect display area 208d, the character image of Yoshimune is displayed on the left side, the character image of the enemy is displayed on the right side, and the animation of the scene where Yoshimune and the enemy confront each other is displayed. Further, the music selection area B is hidden during execution of the super reach effect.

Further, during the performance of the Super Reach A of this example, the music “Snow and Konko” is output from the speaker 120. The speaker 120 outputs the song "Yukiya" along with the accompaniment, and the lyrics "Yukiya Konko" is displayed in the lyrics display area C.

FIG. 66(e) shows a state in which the song "Snow and Konko" has advanced to the second bar during the production of Super Reach A. In the second bar of "Snow and Konko", the lyrics display area C is deleted, and instead, the cut-in image 824 including the lyrics display "Konko" is displayed. The cut image 824 has a mode in which lyrics are displayed in a horizontally long rectangular frame image that is inclined to the upper right. In addition, the song “Konko” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment. The cut-in image 824 including the lyrics display may be displayed including the entire lyrics of the one bar in the entire one bar, or may include a part of the lyrics of the one bar in a part of the one bar. It may be displayed, or may be displayed in a plurality of measures including the entire lyrics of the plurality of measures. Further, the cut-in image 824 may be displayed as a notice effect, and the jackpot reliability may be set by the character color of the lyrics display or the color in the frame image.

66(f) to FIG. 66(k) are diagrams for explaining the effect according to the modification 10A of the present embodiment, and FIGS. 66(l) to 66(m) are according to the modification 10B of the present embodiment. FIG. 66(n) to FIG. 66(o) are diagrams for describing the effect, and are diagrams for describing the effect according to the modified example 10C of the present embodiment. 66(f) to FIG. 66(o) (Modifications 10A to 10C) have at least a chance button 136 and a cross button 900 as a common configuration. Here, the cross button 900 is a button having at least an upper button 900a, a lower button 900b, a left button 900c, and a right button 900d.

The left button 900c and the right button 900d are buttons used mainly (or always) for selecting (switching) the music output from the speaker 120, for example, during ST (during power support).

Further, the upper button 900a and the lower button 900b are, for example, buttons used to change the volume of the sound (song) output from the speaker 120 (different from the button for switching the lyrics display on/off state shown in FIG. 61). ). For example, as shown in FIG. 6F, when either the up button 900a or the down button 900b is operated in the volume meter non-display state, the volume meter 901 is displayed. The sound meter 901 is from 1 to 6. For example, the volume meter 901 increases by one each time the upper button 900a is operated, and the volume meter 901 decreases by one each time the lower button 900b is operated. Even if the lower button 900b is operated when the volume meter 901 is "1", the volume remains "1", and if the upper button 900b is operated when the volume meter 901 is "6", the volume "6" is displayed. There is. Further, when the up/down buttons 900a and 900b are operated in the state where the volume meter is not displayed, the volume meter 901 showing the current volume may be displayed first, or the volume meter 901 is always started from "1". The configuration may be different. The volume meter 901 is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) from the last operation.

In the modified examples 10A to 10C, the light amount can be changed with the left and right buttons 900c and 900d, but since the light amount is assigned to selection (switching) of music at least during ST (during power support), the light amount is changed in that state. Can not. Further, although the composition is such that the music cannot be selected (switched) during the SP reach during ST (electrical support), the light quantity cannot be changed even in that case. On the other hand, during the big hit, the right and left buttons 900c and 900d may be used to change the light quantity. In that case, it is better to change the light quantity during the big hit. Further, during the big hit, the light amount may not be changed with the left and right buttons 900c and 900d.

Further, the up/down buttons 900a, 900b and/or the left/right buttons 900c, 900d may be used for the back button effect. The back button effect is an effect in which some effect is performed when the button is operated in the absence of an operation instruction for that button (other button operation instructions may be given). Here, it may be configured such that a certain effect is more likely to appear when a button that is not instructed to operate is operated than when a button that is instructed to operate is operated, and is not a back button effect. There may be an effect that does not appear (for example, one-shot notification effect).

Next, each modification will be described. First, an effect according to the modified example 10A of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66(f) to 66(k). 66(f) to (k) show, in this order, an example of effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in time series.

FIG. 66(f) shows a state where the button introduction animation has started. A button image 806a with a transmissivity of 50% is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d, a button image 806b with a transmissivity of 50% is displayed on the right side of the effect display area 208d, and the button images 806a and 806b are effect displays. An animation of moving to the center of the area 208d is displayed. In this state, an error image 822 (in this example, the lower plate full tank error is displayed, including the character string image of "please remove the ball") is displayed, but the button introduction animation is They do not overlap.

In the same figure (g), the button images 806a and 806b have moved to near the center of the effect display area 208d. Further, at this timing, the volume meter 901 is displayed by operating the up and down buttons 900a and 900b in FIG. 6F, and informs that the volume can be changed. Although the error image 822 is still displayed, it does not overlap with the button introduction animation or the volume meter 901.

In FIG. 7H, the button images 806a and 806b are completely overlapped. At this timing, part of the button introduction animation (button images 806a and 806b) is overlapped with the volume meter 901. On the other hand, part of the button introduction animation (button images 806 a and 806 b) and the volume meter 901 are not overlapped by the error image 822.

FIG. 11I shows a state after the button images 806a and 806b are completely overlapped with each other and the button images 806a and 806b are changed to the button images 806, and the button introduction animation is ended. That is, the operation of the chance button 136 is effectively accepted, and the button image 806 and the gauge image (meter image) 814 are displayed. Further, the volume meter 901 is hidden to inform that the volume cannot be changed. The timing at which the button image 806 and the gauge image (meter image) 814 are displayed (first timing) and the timing at which the volume meter 901 is hidden (second timing) may be the same timing, The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

After this timing, the length of the gauge image 814 is shortened, and the display in which the meter is reduced is started. In this example, neither the button image 806 nor the gauge image 814 overlaps with the error image 822 (the button image 806 and the gauge image 814 do not overlap with the error image 822).

The gauge image 814 may be displayed at the same time as the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, or may be displayed after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. Further, the button image 806 and the gauge image 814 may be started to be displayed at the same time, or one of them may be started to be displayed first.

In the same figure (j), for example, the lower button 900b is operated within the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and in the same figure (k), the lower button 900b is operated within the operation valid period of the chance button 136. As a result, the button image 806 and the gauge image (meter image) 814 are hidden, and another effect image (for example, notice effect, cut-in image of large character (don) in this example) is displayed as the back button effect. It is in the state of being. Further, the non-displayed volume meter 901 is re-displayed to notify that the volume can be changed. The error image 822 is still displayed, and a part of the cut-in image is overlapped by the error image 822 and the volume meter 901.

In this modified example, when the up/down buttons 900a and 900b are operated during execution of the button introduction animation, the volume meter 901 is displayed as shown in FIGS. If the up/down buttons 900a and 900b are operated during execution of the button effect, the volume meter 901 is re-displayed and the volume can be changed, and, for example, a cut-in image is displayed as the back button effect. It

In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing (within the operation valid period of the chance button 136) shown in FIG. 9J, the cut-in image as the back button effect shown in FIG. For example, another effect (for example, an effect for displaying the cut-in image shown in FIG. 65(q)) is executed. In this case, the cut-in image does not overlap the error image 822 (see FIG. 65(q)).

Next, an effect according to the modified example 10B of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66(l) and 66(m). 66(l) and 66(m) show, in this order, an effect example in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in time series.

FIG. 66(l) shows a state where the button introduction animation has started. A button image 806a with a transmissivity of 50% is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d, a button image 806b with a transmissivity of 50% is displayed on the right side of the effect display area 208d, and the button images 806a and 806b are effect displays. An animation of moving to the center of the area 208d is displayed. In this state, an error image 822 (in this example, the lower plate full tank error is displayed, including the character string image of "please remove the ball") is displayed, but the button introduction animation is They do not overlap.

Further, at this timing, the automatic button notification 903 (in this example, the display of the character “auto button ON”) notifies that the automatic button mode is being set. The auto button mode is a mode in which the effect that is performed after the button operation is performed even if the button operation is not performed. For example, when the gauge image 814 is shortened to some extent (for example, when the gauge image 814 is shortened to about half). , The effect to be performed after the button operation is performed. It is also possible for the player to operate the buttons while setting the auto button mode, in which case the effect to be performed after the button operation is executed, but in that case the auto button mode is released. (This will be described in Modification 10C, but there are some exceptions). The setting method of the auto button mode can be turned on by, for example, long pressing the button, and as another method, it can be set from the menu screen.

In the figure (m), the button images 806a and 806b are in a state of being moved to the vicinity of the center of the effect display area 208d. Further, at this timing, the volume meter 901 is displayed by operating the up/down buttons 900a and 900b in FIG. 1(l) to inform that the volume can be changed. Further, the auto button notification 903 (in this example, the display of the character "auto button OFF") notifies that the auto button is not set. At this timing, the error image 822 is still displayed, but it does not overlap the button introduction animation or the volume meter 901.

In this modification, when the up/down buttons 900a and 900b are operated during the execution of the button introduction animation, the volume meter 901 is displayed and the volume can be changed (the back button effect is not executed). Further, the auto button notification 903 and the error image 822 do not overlap.

Next, an effect according to the modified example 10B of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66(n) and 66(o). 66(n) and 66(o) show, in this order, a production example in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in time series.

FIG. 66(n) shows a state after the button introduction animation is completed. That is, the operation of the chance button 136 is effectively accepted, the button image 806 and the gauge image (meter image) 814 are displayed, the length of the gauge image 814 is shortened, and the display in which the meter is reduced is started. ..

Further, at this timing, the automatic button notification 903 (in this example, the display of the character “auto button ON”) notifies that the automatic button is being set.

In this example, the error image 822 is displayed, but neither the button image 806 nor the gauge image 814 overlaps with the error image 822 (both the button image 806 and the gauge image 814 overlap the error image 822. Not). Further, the auto button notification 903 and the error image 822 do not overlap.

The figure (o) is in a state after the lower button 900b is operated (the figure (n)), for example, within the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the button image 806 and the gauge image (meter image) 814 are displayed. The display is hidden, and another effect image (in this example, a cut-in image of a large character (lord)) is displayed as the back button effect. Further, the non-displayed volume meter 901 is re-displayed to notify that the volume can be changed. The error image 822 is still displayed, and a part of the cut-in image is overlapped by the error image 822 and the volume meter 901.

Further, at this timing, the automatic button notification 903 (in this example, the display of the characters “auto button OFF”) notifies that the automatic button is being set. Further, the auto button notification 903 overlaps a part of the cut-in image, but the auto button left 903 and the error image 822 do not overlap.

In this modification, a plurality of operable chance buttons are provided (including a chance button 136 and another chance button not shown), and chance buttons (for example, no chance button) not designated at the timing shown in FIG. When the chance button shown in the drawing is operated, a performance display (for example, display of a cut-in image of a large character (lord)) is executed as a back button performance (preliminary performance), and the auto button mode is turned off ((o) in the figure. )) operates any of the up and down buttons 900a and 900b at the timing shown in (n) of the figure, the volume meter 901 is displayed and the volume can be changed. ) Is displayed (for example, a cut-in image of a large character (lord) is displayed), but the automatic button mode may not be turned off. The up/down buttons 900a and 900b are buttons used when turning on/off the auto button mode on the menu screen.

In the case of a configuration having other chance buttons and performing the back button effect by operating the other chance button, it is configured so that the back button effect may not be performed by the operation of the up/down buttons 900a and 900b. May be.

Note that the configurations described as the up/down buttons 900a and 900b in Modifications 10A to 10C can be similarly implemented with the left/right buttons 900c and 900d.

Also, in each modification in which the error image 822 shown in FIGS. 65 and 66 is displayed, only the button introduction animation is overlapped by the error image 822 (for example, FIG. 65(m), (n), etc.). May be applied to the music selection area B shown in FIG. 56 or the like, or the music selection area B shown in FIG. 56 or the like may be overlapped by the error image 822.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example is a so-called song pachi machine. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example always outputs the music during the super reach production, displays the lyrics as a telop as shown in FIG. 66(d), or displays the lyrics in the center of the display area as shown in FIG. 66(e). The lyrics are displayed in a relatively large display size. The lyrics display in the cut-in image 824 may be hidden by another effect display (for example, the cut-in image 810, the button image 806 or the like) or the movable body 804 or the like. Note that, even for the same song, the telop display of the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C is hidden by another effect display or a movable body, and the lyrics display in the cut-in image 824 is not hidden by another effect display or a movable body. It may be, or vice versa. Further, the lyrics display in the cut-in image 824 may be hidden by the effect display (for example, the cut-in image 810) displayed when the chance button 136 is pressed. When the lyrics display in the cut-in image 824 is hidden, the music output from the speaker 120 may be continued, or the music output from the speaker 120 may be interrupted. Further, while displaying the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C, the lyrics display in the cut-in image 824 may be displayed. In this case, the start timing of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C and the start timing of the lyrics display in the cut-in image 824 may be the same or different. The ending timing of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C and the ending timing of the lyrics display in the cut-in image 824 may be the same or different. Further, the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C may be displayed in accordance with the output of the song from the speaker 120, and the lyrics display in the cut-in image 824 may be displayed at a time different from the output of the song from the speaker 120. Further, the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C may be displayed at a time different from the output of the song from the speaker 120, and the lyrics display in the cut-in image 824 may be displayed together with the output of the song from the speaker 120.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 66 again.
(1) The gaming table according to the present embodiment is
Sound output means (for example, a speaker 120),
A gaming table provided with display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208),

The sound output means is capable of outputting a music piece (for example, a nursery rhyme "Donguri Korokoro", a nursery rhyme "Yukiya Konko", a song "Sakura Sakura"),
The music includes a song,
The display means can display a plurality of types of displays,

One display of the plurality of types of display is a display of lyrics corresponding to the song (for example, lyrics such as “Acorn Gorokoro”) (hereinafter, referred to as “first display”),

One of the plurality of types of display is an effect display (for example, a mini button image 800, a big button image 802, a button image 806, button images 806a and 806b, a cut-in image 810, a gauge image 814, a hold icon 816, A mission achievement notification image such as a rank A achievement image 826) (hereinafter referred to as "second display"),

When the second display is displayed, the second display is configured to overlap at least a part of the first display (for example, FIGS. 59(c) and 59(h), See FIG. 62(c) to (e), FIG. 62(h) to (k), FIG. 64(a), (b), FIG. 65(a), (d), (f), and FIG. 66(b). ), a gaming table characterized by that.

According to the above configuration, it may be possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by allowing the player to pay attention to the effect display displayed overlapping the lyrics display while entertaining the music output by the audio means.
(2) The game table according to (1),
An operation means (for example, chance button 136) is provided,

The second display is a display of an image (for example, a mini button image 800, a large button image 802, a button image 806, button images 806a, 806b) imitating the operation means, and a gaming table.
(3) The game table described in (1),
An operation means (for example, chance button 136) is provided,

The game console characterized in that the second display is an effect display (for example, a cut-in image 810) displayed after the operation means is operated.
(4) The game table according to (3),

The game table characterized in that the second display is not displayed when the operating means is not operated.
(5) The game table according to any one of (1) to (4),

One of the plurality of types of display is a notice animation (for example, a notice animation of the pending change effect shown in FIG. 64C) (hereinafter, referred to as “third display”),

The gaming table, wherein when the third display is displayed, the third display is configured to overlap at least a part of the first display.
(6) The game table according to any one of (1) to (5),

First symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212) capable of executing the first symbol variable display (for example, variable display of special figure 1),

Second symbol display means (for example, special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing a second symbol variable display (for example, variable display of special figure 2),

A win/fail judgment means capable of executing a win/fail judgment (for example, special figure 2 related lottery processing (step S229) and special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231) of the main controller timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 52),

The first symbol variation display is a display for stopping and displaying a symbol (for example, the symbol shown in FIG. 50(a)) corresponding to the result of the hit/miss determination.

The second symbol variation display is a display for stopping and displaying a symbol (for example, the symbol shown in FIG. 50(b)) corresponding to the result of the hit/miss determination, the gaming table.
(7) The game table according to (6),
The display means can execute variable display of decorative symbols,

The gaming table characterized in that the variable display of the decorative design is a display for stopping and displaying the decorative design corresponding to the result of the hit determination.
(8) The game table according to (6) or (7),
A first control means (for example, the main control unit 300),
A second control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400),
The first control means is a means including the hit determination means,

The game machine characterized in that the second control means is means capable of executing control according to a command from the first control means.
(9) The game table described in (8),
The first control means can control the first symbol display means,
The first control means can control the second symbol display means,

The game machine characterized in that the second control means can control the display means.
(10) The gaming table according to any one of (1) to (9),

The gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100) or a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

Part of the second display is erased by the second display overlapping at least part of the first display.
(11) An operation means (for example, a chance button 136),
Sound output means (for example, a speaker 120),
A gaming table provided with display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208),

The sound output means is capable of outputting a musical piece including a song (for example, a nursery rhyme "Donguri Korokoro", a nursery rhyme "Yukiya Konko", a song "Sakura Sakura"),
The display means can display a plurality of types of displays,

One of the plurality of types of display is a display of lyrics corresponding to the song (for example, lyrics such as "Acorn Gorokoro") (hereinafter, referred to as "first display"),

One of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts the user to operate the operation unit (for example, a mini button image 800, a large button image 802, a button image 806, a gauge image 814) (hereinafter, “second display”). That is),

The second display is a display that may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the first display (hereinafter referred to as “first part”) (for example, FIG. 59(c)). , FIG. 59(h), FIG. 62(c), FIG. 62(h), and FIG. 64(a)),

A game table characterized in that the second display is erased in accordance with the operation of the operation means (see, for example, FIG. 59(d) and FIG. 59(i)).
(12) The gaming machine according to (11) above,

By deleting the second display, the overlap of the second display with the first portion is eliminated, so that the entire first display is displayed (for example, FIG. 59(d)). , FIG. 59(i)), the gaming table.
(13) The gaming machine according to (11) or (12) above,

A game machine characterized in that the second display is a display which is erased in response to the end of the operation valid period of the operating means even when the operating means is not operated.
(14) The gaming table according to any one of (11) to (13) above,

The second display is a display including an image (for example, a mini button image 800, a big button image 802, a button image 806) that imitates the appearance of the operation means, and a game table.
(15) The gaming table according to any one of (11) to (14) above,

The game console characterized in that the second display is a display including a character image (for example, a character image of "PUSH!!") prompting the operation of the operation means.
(16) The gaming table according to any one of (11) to (15) above,

One of the plurality of types of display is an effect display (for example, an effect display that indicates whether or not the notice effect shown in FIG. 59(d) or FIG. 59(i) develops into a super reach effect, It is a cut-in image 810) (hereinafter referred to as “third display”),

The second display is a display displayed during the operation valid period of the operation unit (see, for example, FIG. 59(d), FIG. 59(i), and FIG. 60(i)),

The third display is a display that is started in response to an operation of the operation means (see, for example, FIG. 59(d), FIG. 59(i), and FIG. 60(i)). Game table.
(17) The gaming table according to any one of (11) to (16) above,

First symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212) capable of executing the first symbol variable display (for example, variable display of special figure 1),

Second symbol display means (for example, special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing a second symbol variable display (for example, variable display of special figure 2),

Starting information acquisition means capable of acquiring the starting information (for example, special figure 1 starting information, special figure 2 starting information) (for example, winning acceptance processing (step S217) of main controller timer interruption processing shown in FIG. 52),

A win/loss determination means capable of executing a win/loss determination based on the start information (for example, special figure 2 related lottery processing (step S229) and special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231) of the main controller timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 52). When,
A first area in which a game ball can enter (for example, special figure 1 starting port 230),
A second area in which a game ball can enter (for example, special figure 2 starting port 232),

The starting information acquisition unit is a unit that can acquire first starting information (for example, special figure 1 starting information) when a game ball enters the first area,

The starting information acquisition means is means for acquiring second starting information (for example, special figure 2 starting information) when a game ball enters the second area,

The first symbol variation display is a display for stopping and displaying a symbol (for example, the symbol shown in FIG. 50(a)) corresponding to the result of the win/fail judgment based on the first starting information.

The second symbol variation display is a display for stopping and displaying a symbol (for example, the symbol shown in FIG. 50(b)) corresponding to the result of the hit/miss determination based on the second start information. A gaming table.
(18) The gaming machine according to (17) above,
The display means can execute variable display of decorative symbols,

The gaming table characterized in that the variable display of the decorative design is a display for stopping and displaying the decorative design corresponding to the result of the hit determination.
(19) The gaming machine according to (17) or (18) above,
A first control means (for example, the main control unit 300),
A second control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400),
The first control means is a means including the hit determination means,

The game machine characterized in that the second control means is means capable of executing control according to a command from the first control means.
(20) The gaming machine according to (19) above,

The first control means can control the first symbol display means (for example, see FIG. 49),

The first control means can control the second symbol display means (for example, see FIG. 49),

The game machine characterized in that the second control means can control the display means (see, for example, FIG. 49).
(21) The gaming table according to any one of (11) to (20) above,

The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
(22) The gaming table according to any one of (11) to (16) above,

The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).
(23) An operation means (for example, a chance button 136),
A gaming table provided with display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208),

The display means displays a plurality of types of display (for example, lyrics display, display for prompting operation of chance button 136 of mini button image 800, deca button image 802, and button image 806, chances shown in FIGS. 96(b) to (d)). It is possible to display an image imitating the button 136, a display of a message "Please select a song", and a display of effect selection effects shown in FIGS. 133(a) to 133(g).

One of the plurality of types of displays is a first display (for example, lyrics display),

One of the plurality of types of display is the second display (for example, the button introduction animation shown in FIGS. 65(b) and (c) or FIGS. 66(a) and (b), the operation of the chance button 136. It is a display of an animation that announces that the effective period will start),

One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display (for example, button image 806),

The third display is a display that prompts the user to operate the operation unit, and the second display is a display that is performed before the display of the third display is started (for example, FIG. )-(C)),

The second display is a display that may be displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means is not accepted,

The second display may be displayed so as to overlap with at least a part of the first display (hereinafter, referred to as “first part”) (for example, see FIG. 66(b)), A game table characterized by that.
(24) The gaming table according to (23) above,

The first display is a display of lyrics (for example, display of lyrics of a nursery rhyme "Donguri Korokoro"),

The second display is a display related to the operating means (for example, a button introduction animation, an animation display for announcing that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started), ..
(25) The gaming table according to (23) or (24) above,

When the second display (for example, the button images 806a and 806b having a transmissivity of 50%) overlap and are displayed on the first portion, the first portion is visible. A game table characterized by that.
(26) The gaming table according to any one of (23) to (25) above,

The game machine characterized in that, while the third display is displayed, the operation of the operation means is accepted (see paragraph “0229”).
(27) The gaming table according to any one of (23) to (26) above,

A game table characterized in that there is no case where the third display overlaps the first display (see, for example, FIG. 66(c)).
(28) The gaming table according to any one of (23) to (27) above,

The above-mentioned second display is an animation display (for example, a button introduction animation, an animation display for announcing that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started), and the gaming table.
(29) The gaming table according to any one of (23) to (28) above,

The second display is a display in which a plurality of images (for example, button images 806a and 806b) imitating the operation means are displayed, and the game console is characterized in that.
(30) The gaming table according to any one of (23) to (29) above,

The game console characterized in that the third display is a display including an image (for example, a button image 806) imitating the operation means.
(31) The gaming table according to any one of (23) to (30) above,
A sound output means (for example, a speaker 120) is provided,

The sound output means is capable of outputting a music including a song (for example, a nursery rhyme "Donguri Korokoro", a nursery rhyme "Yukiya Konko", a song "Sakura Sakura", etc.).
(32) The gaming table according to any one of (23) to (31) above,

The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
(33) The gaming table according to any one of (23) to (31) above,

The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).
The above embodiment may be configured as follows.
At the bar break, the lyrics are displayed before the song output.
The lyrics display may or may not be hidden even in the same presentation display.
During the super reach performance, a music different from the music selected by the player is played.

The music for mid-reach performance (for example, a nursery rhyme “Yukiya Konko”) may be played only during the super-reach performance, or may be played during the non-super-reach performance.

Further, the lyrics display may be displayed in an overlapped manner with the cut-in image or the button image and hidden only when the music for the super reach performance is being reproduced.

Further, the lyrics display is hidden by the effect which is started based on the operation of the operation means.

When the lyrics display is switched on or off, the lyrics display that is displayed later may be hidden by the previously displayed button image or cut-in image.

If the operation timing of the operation means is delayed during the operation valid period, the lyrics display of a plurality of measures and the lyrics display of a plurality of songs are hidden by a button image or the like and cannot be read.

Further, although the gauge image (meter image) overlaps the lyrics display, the lyrics display becomes visible as the gauge decreases.
In addition, the music may be a song, such as a song, folk song, or classical song, which includes a song.

Also, in the special figure low probability general figure low probability state, special figure high probability general figure low probability state, special figure low probability general figure high probability state, big hit game state, the music selected by the player is output from the audio output means. May be.

It should be noted that what has been called a lamp so far is an example of a light emitting means, and the lamp can be replaced as long as it emits light such as an LED or a cold cathode tube.

For example, the above embodiment can be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the game machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses balls and circulates the enclosed balls in the pachinko machine for use.This enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed balls as a launch ball, The payout of the balls may be performed by an electronic display.

It is possible to combine the matters described in the above detailed description, particularly the matters described in the embodiments and the modified examples.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention can also be applied to the slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG.

The gaming table according to the present invention corresponds to a plurality of reels 1002 which are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven, a start lever 1004 for instructing the rotation of the reels, and each reel as shown in FIG. 67. A stop button 1006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, a lottery means (internal winning combination lottery) for determining whether or not the internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is achieved by a lottery, and a lottery result of the lottery means. The reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) for performing stop control related to the stop of the rotation of the reel and the symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means correspond to the winning combination internally. And a determination means (prize determination process) for determining whether or not a predetermined symbol combination is a predetermined symbol combination, and if the symbol stop mode is a predetermined prize mode, a game medium for paying out a game medium corresponding to the predetermined prize mode In addition to the payout control means (medal payout processing 1008) for performing the medium payout processing, a production means 1010 for executing an effect based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided, and this production means places a ball in a predetermined game area 1012. A launching device 1014 for launching, a winning opening 1016 configured to be able to enter a ball emitted from the launching device, a detecting means 1018 for detecting a ball entering the winning opening 1016, and a detecting means 1018 detecting the ball. In the case of doing, a payout means 1020 for paying out the sphere, a variable display device 1022 that variably displays a predetermined symbol (identification information), a shutter 1024 movable to a position that shields the variable display device 1022, and a predetermined operation mode And a movable body 1026 which is provided, and when the game ball enters the winning opening and wins a prize, the variable display device 1022 causes the variable display 1022 to change and stop the display, thereby producing a game. It is also suitable for the slot machine 1000″.

The gaming table according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 68(a), "A banknote is inserted into the banknote slot 2002, a lottery is executed based on a bet 2004 and a start 2006 operation, and a lottery result is displayed on a lottery result display device 2008." However, at the time of winning, the bonus coin number is added to the remaining credit number, and when cash out 2009 is selected, the receipt issuing machine 2010 issues a receipt in which a code corresponding to the remaining credit number is issued 2000" May be

Further, as shown in FIG. 2B, a mobile phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and electronic data for realizing the present invention as shown in FIG. May be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the above, and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for implementing the present invention.

More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 shown in FIG. 1B has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring game-related data through a mobile phone line, and acquired game-related data (book). A storage unit that stores electronic data for implementing the invention) and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

The portable game machine 4000 shown in FIG. 7C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data regarding a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and data regarding the acquired game (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The household video game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 6D has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires game-related data from a predetermined storage medium (DVD, etc.), and acquired game-related data ( A storage unit that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. In some cases, electronic data for realizing the present invention may be downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game console 5000 shown in FIG.

The present invention can also be applied to execute a game in a game program that simulates the operation of an actual machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In that case, as a recording medium for recording the game program, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used.

Further, although the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as an example of a game table, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball game machine, a smart ball, or the like.
The present invention according to the above embodiments is summarized as follows.
(Appendix 1)
Sound output means,
A gaming table having display means,
The sound output means can output music.
The music includes a song,
The display means can display a plurality of types of displays,

One of the plurality of types of display is a display of lyrics corresponding to the song (hereinafter, referred to as “first display”),

One of the plurality of types of display is a performance display (hereinafter, referred to as “second display”),

The gaming table, wherein when the second display is displayed, the second display is configured to overlap at least a part of the first display.
(Appendix 2)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 1,
Equipped with operating means,

The game table, wherein the second display is a display of an image imitating the operation means.
(Appendix 3)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 1,
Equipped with operating means,

The game console, wherein the second display is a performance display that is displayed after the operation means is operated.
(Appendix 4)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 3,

The game table characterized in that the second display is not displayed when the operating means is not operated.
(Appendix 5)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,

One of the plurality of types of display is a preview animation display (hereinafter referred to as “third display”),

The gaming table, wherein when the third display is displayed, the third display is configured to overlap at least a part of the first display.
(Appendix 6)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 5,
A first symbol display means capable of executing the first symbol variation display,
A second symbol display means capable of executing the second symbol variable display,
A win/fail judgment means capable of executing win/fail judgment,

The first symbol variation display is a display for stopping and displaying the symbol corresponding to the result of the win/fail judgment,

The game table characterized in that the second symbol variable display is a display for stopping and displaying the symbol corresponding to the result of the hit/miss judgment.
(Appendix 7)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 6,
The display means can execute variable display of decorative symbols,

The gaming table characterized in that the variable display of the decorative design is a display for stopping and displaying the decorative design corresponding to the result of the hit determination.
(Appendix 8)
The gaming machine according to appendix 6 or 7,
A first control means,
A second control means,
The first control means is a means including the hit determination means,

The game machine characterized in that the second control means is means capable of executing control according to a command from the first control means.
(Appendix 9)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 8,
The first control means can control the first symbol display means,
The first control means can control the second symbol display means,

The game machine characterized in that the second control means can control the display means.
(Appendix 10)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 9,

The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.
(Appendix 11)
Operation means,
Sound output means,
A gaming table including display means,
The sound output means can output a song including a song,
The display means can display a plurality of types of displays,

One of the plurality of types of display is a display of lyrics corresponding to the song (hereinafter, referred to as “first display”),

One of the plurality of types of display is a display for prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “second display”),

The second display is a display that may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the first display (hereinafter, referred to as “first part”),

A gaming table, characterized in that the second display is erased in accordance with an operation of the operating means.
(Appendix 12)
The gaming machine described in appendix 11,

By eliminating the overlap of the second display with the first portion by deleting the second display, the entire first display is displayed. ..
(Appendix 13)
The gaming table according to appendix 11 or 12,

A game machine characterized in that the second display is a display which is erased in response to the end of the operation valid period of the operating means even when the operating means is not operated.
(Appendix 14)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 11 to 13,

The gaming table characterized in that the second display is a display including an image simulating the appearance of the operating means.
(Appendix 15)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 11 to 14,

The gaming table characterized in that the second display is a display including a character image prompting the operation of the operation means.
(Appendix 16)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 11 to 15,

One of the plurality of types of display is a performance display (hereinafter, referred to as “third display”),
The second display is a display displayed during the operation valid period of the operation means,

The game machine characterized in that the third display is a display started in response to an operation of the operation means.
(Appendix 17)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 11 to 16,
A first symbol display means capable of executing the first symbol variation display,
A second symbol display means capable of executing the second symbol variable display,
Starting information acquisition means capable of acquiring starting information,
A win/fail judgment means capable of executing a win/fail judgment based on the start information,
A first area where game balls can enter,
A second area in which a game ball can enter,

The starting information acquisition unit is a unit capable of acquiring first starting information when a game ball enters the first area,

The starting information acquisition means is means for acquiring second starting information when a game ball enters the second area,

The first symbol variation display is a display for stopping and displaying the symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination based on the first starting information,

The second symbol variable display is a display for stopping and displaying a symbol corresponding to the result of the hit/miss determination based on the second starting information.
(Appendix 18)
The gaming table described in Appendix 17,
The display means can execute variable display of decorative symbols,

The gaming table characterized in that the variable display of the decorative design is a display for stopping and displaying the decorative design corresponding to the result of the hit determination.
(Appendix 19)
The gaming table according to appendix 17 or 18,
A first control means,
A second control means,
The first control means is a means including the hit determination means,

The game machine characterized in that the second control means is means capable of executing control according to a command from the first control means.
(Appendix 20)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 19,
The first control means can control the first symbol display means,
The first control means can control the second symbol display means,

The game machine characterized in that the second control means can control the display means.
(Appendix 21)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 11 to 20,
A game table characterized in that the game table is a pachinko machine.
(Appendix 22)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 11 to 16,
The gaming table is characterized in that the gaming table is a slot machine.
(Appendix 23)
Operation means,
A gaming table including display means,
The display means can display a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a display urging the operation of the operation means,
The second display is a display performed before the display of the third display is started,

The second display is a display that may be displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means is not accepted,

A gaming table, wherein the second display may be displayed in an overlapping manner on at least a part of the first display (hereinafter, referred to as "first part").
(Appendix 24)
The gaming machine according to appendix 23,
The first display is the display of lyrics,

The game table, wherein the second display is a display related to the operation means.
(Appendix 25)
The gaming table according to appendix 23 or 24,

The gaming table, wherein the first portion is visible when the second display is displayed overlapping the first portion.
(Appendix 26)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 23 to 25,

The gaming table, wherein the operation of the operation means is accepted during the period when the third display is displayed.
(Appendix 27)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 23 to 26,

A game table characterized in that the third display may not be displayed overlapping the first display.
(Appendix 28)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 23 to 27,
The game console, wherein the second display is an animation display.
(Appendix 29)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 23 to 28,

The gaming table characterized in that the second display is a display in which a plurality of images simulating the operation means are displayed.
(Appendix 30)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 23 to 29,

The game table, wherein the third display is a display including an image simulating the operation means.
(Appendix 31)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 23 to 30,
Equipped with sound output means,
The sound output means is capable of outputting a music piece including a singing song.
(Appendix 32)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 23 to 31,
A game table characterized in that the game table is a pachinko machine.
(Appendix 33)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 23 to 31,
The gaming table is characterized in that the gaming table is a slot machine.

As described above, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the embodiment of the present invention includes the first operation means (for example, the chance button 136) provided at a position where the player can operate, Display means (for example, decorative pattern display device 208), sound output means (for example, speaker 120), and second operation means (for example, FIG. 66(f), () provided at a position operable by the player. g) A cross-shaped button (up and down buttons 900a, 900b) shown in FIG. 3 and the like, wherein the display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, and one of the plurality of types of display is displayed. Is a first display (for example, an introduction animation that can be expected to be an effect with a high jackpot expectation, animations shown in FIGS. 65(l) to 65(n)), and One of the displays is a second display (for example, an image display that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136, for example, a button image 806′ in FIG. 65(o)), and the first display is the first is an operation means to the relevant animation display, the second display, Ri one display der of the display appearance imitating the first operating means, the display of the first display The display of the second display may be started after the start of, and the sound output unit is a unit capable of outputting an effect sound according to the set volume, and executes a plurality of kinds of effects. It is configured so that one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect, and the first effect is a notice effect (for example, back button effect, shown in FIG. 65(k)). Of the cut-in image, etc.), the first effect is an effect including a first effect sound, and in the state where the first display is displayed, The operation of the one operation unit is not accepted, and the operation of the first operation unit is accepted and the first display is displayed in the state where the second display is displayed. When the first operation means is operated in the state, the first effect is not executed, and when the first operation means is operated in the state where the second display is displayed. , The first effect may be executed (for example, FIG. 65(p), (r), etc.), and the second operation means is operated while the first display is displayed. The volume may be changed, and the second operation means is operated while the second display is being displayed. Then, the volume may be changed, and when the second operation means is operated while the second display is displayed, the first effect may be executed (for example, 66 (k), etc.), the automatic button mode is set, and when the first operation means is operated in the state where the first display is displayed, the automatic button mode is turned on. In the case of, the second display is displayed, when the first operation means is operated in the state where the second display is displayed, the automatic button mode is turned off when the mode is on, the first display When the second operation means is operated in the state where is displayed, the second button is not turned off even when the automatic button mode is on, and the second display is displayed in the state where the second display is displayed. When the operation means of is operated, it is not turned off even when the automatic button mode is turned on .

It should be noted that another button image displayed after the first display (for example, the button image 806 shown in FIG. 65(p)), another animation display (for example, a jackpot expectation lower than that of the first animation) Introduction animation in the case of a production that tends to occur, the second display displayed after the animations shown in FIGS. 65(h) to 65(j), another button image displayed after another animation display (for example, 65(k), one or more of the button images 806) may be provided, and conversely, one or more of these may not be provided.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to focus on the third display while enhancing the interest of the player.

Further, the third display may be a display for prompting to discharge the game ball (for example, an error display (ball-out display) 822 shown in FIG. 65).

Further, the sound output means (for example, the speaker 120) and the cross button (up/down button 900a) shown in the second operation means (for example, FIGS. 66(f) and 66(g)) provided at a position where the player can operate. , 900b), the sound output means is a means capable of outputting an effect sound corresponding to a set volume, and is configured to be able to execute a plurality of kinds of effects, among the plurality of kinds of effects. One effect is the first effect, and the first effect is one of the notice effects (for example, the back button effect and the effect by the cut-in image shown in FIG. 65(k)). The first effect is an effect including a first effect sound, and in the state where the first display is displayed, the operation of the first operation means is not accepted, and In the state where the second display is displayed, the operation of the first operating means is accepted, and when the first operating means is operated in the state where the first display is displayed, There is no case where the first effect is executed, and when the first operation unit is operated in a state where the second display is displayed, the first effect may be executed ( 65(p), (r), etc.), when the second operation means is operated while the first display is being displayed, the volume may be changed. When the second operation means is operated while the display of is displayed, the volume may be changed, and the second operation means is operated when the second display is displayed. Then, the first effect may be executed (for example, FIG. 66(k)).

The "state in which the first display is displayed" is the "state in which the second display is not displayed and there is no display related to the second operation means".

The “state in which the second display is displayed” is a “state in which the first display is not displayed and there is no display related to the second operation means”.
Further, in this case, the volume is not changed even if the first operating means is operated.
The effect is configured to include at least one of display, sound, and light.

One of the plurality of types of displays is a seventh display, and the seventh display is a display showing the volume (for example, a volume meter 901 shown in FIGS. 66(g) and 66(h)). If the second operation means is operated while the first display is being displayed, the seventh display is displayed (for example, FIG. 66(g), etc.). ), when the second operation means is operated while the second display is being displayed, the seventh display is displayed (for example, FIG. 66(k)),
The sound output means may be means capable of outputting an error sound.

In addition, "the volume may be changed" means that the volume is not necessarily changed by the operation of the second operation means. For example, a switch provided on the back of the gaming machine 100 may or may not allow the player to change the volume. Further, in the first operation of the second operation means, there is a case where only the display showing the volume currently being set (display of the volume meter 901) is made and the volume is not changed. Further, when the volume meter 901 is already at the maximum state and the operation of the second operation means for increasing the volume (for example, the upper button 900a) is performed, the volume is not changed, and the second operation means is operated ( Only, not necessarily) the volume is not changed.

With such a configuration, the volume can be changed (adjusted) by operating the second operation means while the introduction animation is being executed. Therefore, the button effect is started after the introduction animation is completed and the second operation means is operated. In this case, it may be possible to enjoy the first effect at a volume according to the player's preference.

Further, the auto button mode is settable, and when the first operation means is operated in the state where the first display is displayed, the auto button mode is turned off when it is on. , When the first operation means is operated in the state where the second display is displayed, the auto button mode is turned off when the mode is on, and in the state where the first display is displayed. When the second operation means is operated, it is not turned off even when the auto button mode is on, and the second operation means is operated in the state where the second display is displayed. Also, even if the auto button mode is on, it may not be turned off.

The auto button mode is a mode in which the effect that is performed after the button operation is performed even if the button operation is not performed. For example, when the gauge image 814 is shortened to some extent (for example, when the gauge image 814 is shortened to about half). , The effect to be performed after the button operation is performed. It is also possible for the player to operate the buttons while setting the auto button mode, in which case the effect to be performed after the button operation is executed, but in that case the auto button mode is released. (This will be described in Modification 10C, but there are some exceptions). The setting method of the auto button mode can be turned on by, for example, long pressing the button, and as another method, it can be set from the menu screen.

Further, the auto button mode is settable, and when the first operation means is operated in the state where the first display is displayed, the auto button mode is turned off when it is on. , When the first operation means is operated in the state where the second display is displayed, the auto button mode is turned off when the mode is on, and in the state where the first display is displayed. When the second operation means is operated, the auto button mode is turned off when it is on (for example, FIG. 66(l), (m)), and in the state where the second display is displayed. When the second operation means is operated, it may be turned off when the auto button mode is on (for example, FIGS. 66(n) and 66(o)).

It should be noted that a third operation unit (a chance button different from the chance button 136) may be provided so that the first effect may be executed when the third operation unit is operated. In the case of having this configuration, the first effect may not be executed when the second operation means is operated.

Further, one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display (for example, a cut-in image 824), and the fourth display is one of the notice displays, One effect may be an effect including the fourth display.

For example, the first effect may include the cut-in image 824 and the sound output from the speaker 120 (for example, the output of a song).

Further, one of the plurality of types of displays is a fifth display (for example, a cut-in image 810), and the fifth display is different from the fourth display of the notice display. May be displayed.

Further, one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect, the second effect is an effect different from the first effect of the notice effect, and The second effect is an effect including a second effect sound (for example, singing "snow and konko"), and the second effect sound and the first effect sound are different effect sounds. Good.

In addition, one of the plurality of types of displays is a sixth display (for example, the lyrics shown in FIG. 65(a) (“acorn rolling”), the rank C achievement image 824 in FIG. 65(e), etc.). The sixth display may be a display other than the third display among the character displays.

In this case, the sixth display may (may be) overlap the first animation, or may not (may) be overlapped with the first animation.

Further, one of the plurality of types of displays is an eighth display, and the eighth display is an animation display related to the first operation means different from the first animation ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as a "second animation (for example, an introduction animation of a performance having a lower jackpot expectation degree than the first animation, animations shown in FIGS. 65(h) to 65(j))", and the above-mentioned The second animation displayed in the state in which the third display is displayed may be configured not to overlap the third display.

Further, the gaming table may be a slot machine, and the gaming table may be a pachinko machine.
[Fourth Embodiment]

Next, with reference to FIG. 69 to FIG. 148, a game table according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100, an enclosed game machine, a spinning machine such as a slot machine). Will be described in detail. It should be noted that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 69 to 148 are basically used only in the description of the fourth embodiment, and even if overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, they are not described in the description of the present embodiment. The symbols shown in FIGS. 69 to 148 have priority. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 69. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage plate-equipped door 108, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store. The main body 104, which is called an inner frame, is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 and serves as a vertical rectangular game machine base body. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. Further, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a lock function by the lock unit 105 and to be opened and closed, and is configured in a frame shape. This is the door member having the opening 116 inside. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, the front frame door opening sensor 107 is provided for detecting the opening of the front frame door 106.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a top plate 126 capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “ball”) and provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launcher 110. , A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation, and a player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game ball that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the player's operation. A ball firing handle 134 that is launched into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 that changes the rendering mode of various rendering devices 206 by the player's operation, a chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light, and a setter ( For example, an operating unit 700 (described later) for performing settings related to a game (for example, setting of time, setting of effect contents) by operation of an operator of a pachinko machine 100 manufacturing factory, a game shop clerk, a player, and the like are installed in the game shop. Ball lending operation button 140 for giving a ball lending instruction to the card unit (CR unit), a return operation button 142 for giving an instruction to return the player's balance to the card unit, the player's balance and the card unit A ball lending display unit 144 that displays the state of. Further, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

70 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 69 viewed from the back side. At the upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, which has an opening that opens upward, is located below the ball tank 150, and is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. And a tank rail 154 for guiding a ball falling through the communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

The payout device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and inside thereof, a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) are provided. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have temporarily stayed are delivered one by one below the payout device 152.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high signal or the low signal, when the game ball is not passing, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The balls are paid out to the player.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, a main board case 158 that houses a main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the overall game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. A first sub-board case 162 accommodating a first sub-board 160 that constitutes a first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and a second sub-board that performs control processing related to performance based on processing information generated by the first sub-control section 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that cancels the error by the operation of the game shop staff A payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 including 168, a launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that configures a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of a game ball, and power is supplied to various electric gaming devices. And a RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 for housing 182 and a CR interface 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided.

FIG. 71 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as seen from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In the production device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged substantially in the center, and around it, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and a normal symbol. The holding lamp 216, the first special symbol holding lamp 218, the second special symbol holding lamp 220, and the high-precision middle lamp 222 are arranged. The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, which will be described in detail later. In addition, hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "universal symbol", a special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol", a first special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 1", and a second special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 2".

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b and The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 has a display range in which one small, for example, circular symbol can be displayed, and a fourth symbol display area (not shown in FIG. 71) provided in, for example, the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d. (Shown). Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to be able to display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

The public figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of pending universal figure variation games (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the universal figure variation games are retained up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variation games (details described later) that are on hold, and in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of special figure variation games. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is a high-probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low-probability state in which a big hit is hard to occur to a high probability state. Lights when changing to the probability state, and turns off when changing from the high probability state to the low probability state.

Further, around the performance device 206, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a universal figure starting opening 228, a special drawing 1 starting opening 230, a special drawing 2 starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening. 234 is provided.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (general winning opening 226 is won). In this case, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls include a ball to be paid out to the player (hereinafter, may be referred to as “prize ball”) as a consideration for winning, and a ball to be lent to the player (hereinafter, referred to as “rental ball”). There is) and is included.

The universal figure starting port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not the ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200. One is installed in each. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

In this embodiment, only one special-purpose starting port 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the starting port 230, a payout device 152 described later is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. In addition, the ball that has entered the starting port 230 of Toku-zu 1 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

Toku-zu 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu), and in the present embodiment, only one is arranged directly below toku-zu 1 starting port 230. The special figure 2 starting opening 232 is provided with a blade member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right, and it is impossible for the ball to enter while the blade member 232a is closed, and the universal figure display device 210 is won. When the hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The special figure variation game by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The variable winning opening 234 is called a special winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one is provided below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning port 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the door member 234a is closed, and the special symbol display device wins the special symbol display device to stop displaying the big hit symbol. In this case, the door member 234a is opened and closed at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball that has entered the variable winning port 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning port or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

In the pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the operating handle of the player, and launches the launch rod 146 and The launch mallet 148 allows the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to pass through and launches the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper portion of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or a starting opening. Reach the outlet 240 by winning at (the special drawing 1 starting opening 230, the special drawing 2 starting opening 232), or without winning any winning opening or starting opening, or by simply passing through the universal drawing starting opening 228. To do.

Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, the warp device 242 and the stage 244 are arranged in the area where the game ball can roll, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the area where the game ball cannot roll. Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door or a shutter) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. On the stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp exit 242b or a ball ridden by a nail of the game board 200 or the like can be rolled, and the passed ball is moved to the special drawing 1 starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to make it easier to enter the ball.

In the present embodiment, the production movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and includes an upper arm motor (not shown) for rotating the upper arm portion 224a to a shoulder position and an elbow. A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm 224b is provided at the position. The production movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The shielding device 246 shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, their respective inner ends overlap. In a state in which the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the respective doors are slightly overlapped with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can each be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 to be visible through the holes in the lattice, or the shoji portions of the holes in the lattice are closed with a semitransparent lens body, The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji part of the lattice holes may be completely blocked (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 may not be visible at all. Good.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. According to a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a second sub-control unit 500 controlling various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. Mainly includes a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data storage. A RAM 308 for storing, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormality in program processing are mounted. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

Further, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number value generation circuit 318 (in this circuit, a random number value generation circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Two counters are built in) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball that passes through each of the starting opening, the winning opening, and the variable winning opening, a front frame door opening sensor, and an inner frame. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including an open sensor and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined circuit. Drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the symbol display device, for example, the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214, and for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the general figure display device 210 A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the drive circuit 326 and various status display parts 328 (for example, the universal figure holding lamp 216, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, the high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.). And a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member such as the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234.

When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere has won the special opening 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the Toku-zu 1 starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the counter value stored in the Toku-zu 1 starting port 230. Stored in the register for use. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the value of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 at that timing is also latched. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 connects the information output circuit 336 to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like by means of a pachinko machine. The game information of 100 (for example, a game state) is output.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source that is being supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. When it is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 starts from the start signal output circuit 340. When the signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub control unit 400. However, a signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the main control unit 300. Further, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is a bidirectional communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured so as to be able to send a signal such as a command to the payout control unit 600. Is also configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.

Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock.

The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, a chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, and detection of the shielding device sensor 430 and chance button. A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the unit 724 to the basic circuit 402, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data, and image data and the like stored in the ROM 406 based on signals from the CPU 404. It is connected to a VDP 434 (video display processor) that generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436 and displays the image on the decorative pattern display device 208. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs.

Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time and the number of times. It is equipped with. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500 and an image display. A ROM 506 that stores data and the like is provided.

Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, a drive circuit 517 for controlling the drive of the chance button drive unit 708, and the current position of the effect movable body 224. A movable body sensor 424 for detecting, a sensor circuit 518 for outputting a detection signal from the movable body sensor 424 to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table. A game underframe lamp driving circuit 540 for controlling the frame lamp 542, and serial communication control for performing lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp driving circuit 530 and the game underframe lamp driving circuit 540. The circuit 520 is connected.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the firing control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental. It is detected whether or not the payout is completed, and communication with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606. Further, the payout control unit 600 receives the detection result of the front frame door opening sensor 107 that detects the opening of the front frame door 106, and outputs the received result to the main control unit 300.

The firing control unit 630 is a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 for instructing to permit or stop firing, and a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134 outputs the operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player. Control of a firing motor 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of a ball feeding device 634 that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110, based on a control signal that indicates a firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to predetermined components (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 causes the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the firing control unit. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the special drawings and special drawings that are stopped and displayed by the special drawing 1 display device 212, the special drawing 2 display device 214, and the public drawing display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. FIG. 73(a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. FIG. 73(b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. The special figure 1 variation game is started on condition that the first starting opening sensor detects that the ball has entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230, and the fact that the ball has entered the special opening 2 starting opening 232. 2 The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the starting mouth sensor detects. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs "variable display of special figure 1" in which all seven segments are lit up and one central segment is lit up repeatedly. Further, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs "variable display of special figure 2" in which all the seven segments are turned on and one central segment is repeatedly turned on. .. These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of variable display of symbols in the present embodiment. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 has elapsed, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 After a lapse of time, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of the "variable display of special figure 1" until the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 is stopped or displayed or the "variable display of special figure 2" is started and the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 is changed. Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display according to the present embodiment, hereinafter, the stop symbol aspect of the special diagram 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after starting the "variable display of the special diagram 1 or 2". A series of display until the above is called a symbol fluctuation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

In FIG. 73(a), six types of special drawings from “Special drawing A” to “Special drawing F” are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol fluctuation stop display of special drawing 1. In FIG. 73(a), the white parts in the figure show the positions of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts are the positions of the segments that are turned on. "Special drawing A" is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot design, and "special drawing B" is a 15R jackpot design. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, determination of whether or not to be a big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not to be a special jackpot is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability variation jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the special figure variation game after the jackpot game. Hereinafter, a state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is called a special figure high probability state, and a state in which the probability is low is called a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special big hit game ends and after the 15R big hit game ends, both shift to the electric power support state (to be referred to as a time saving state together with the variation time reduction state of the special figure variation game). Although the time saving state will be described in detail later, the state of transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a universal figure high probability state, and the state of not transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a universal figure low probability state. 15R special jackpot design "special map A", the gaming state after the jackpot game is a special figure high probability general figure high probability state (probability change state), 15R jackpot pattern "special map B" is a big hit The game state after the game is the special figure low probability general figure high probability state (electric support state or time saving state). The timing of the special figure high probability general figure high probability state and the special figure low probability general figure high probability state is at the start of the first special figure variation game after the jackpot game ends. These "special drawing A" and "special drawing B" are symbols in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively large.

"Special drawing C" is a 2R jackpot design and is called sudden change. Sudden probability changes, after the big hit game is over, it becomes the special figure high probability general figure high probability state like the 15R special big hit symbol. "Special drawing D" is a 2R big hit symbol and is called latent probability variation. After the jackpot game, the probability of latent latency changes to a special probability high probability general figure low probability state (latency probability varying state).

"Special figure E" is a small hit symbol, and after the small hit game is finished, the special figure low probability general figure low probability state (normal state or sometimes called normal game state) is entered. In the small hit game, the attacker is released the same number of times as "special drawing C" and "special drawing D" (two times in this embodiment). In addition, “special figure F” is a deviating symbol, there is no opening of the attacker, and the symbol is relatively less advantageous to the player.

In FIG. 73(b), four types of special drawings from “special drawing a” to “special drawing d” are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol fluctuation stop display of special drawing 2. In FIG. 73(b), the white portions in the figure show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions show the locations of the segments that are turned on. “Special drawing a” is a 16 round (16R) special jackpot design, and “special drawing b” is an 8R special jackpot design. For both "special map a" and "special map b", the game state after the big hit game is the special map high probability general figure high probability state. These "special drawing a" and "special drawing b" are symbols in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively large.

"Special map c" is a 8R big hit symbol, and after the big hit game is finished, it becomes a special map low probability general figure high probability state. The “special figure d” is a deviating symbol, there is no opening of the attacker, and the advantage to the player is relatively small.

FIG. 73(c) shows an example of a decorative design. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The first starting opening sensor detects that a ball has entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230 or the special opening 2 starting opening 232, that is, the ball has entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230, or the special opening 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on condition that the second starting orifice sensor detects that the ball has entered the starting orifice 232. In the pattern display area, "decoration 1"→"decoration 2"→"decoration 3"→... "decoration 9"→"decoration 10"→"decoration 1"→... "Variable display of symbols" is performed.

And, when notifying 15R big hit, 15R special big hit, 16R special big hit, 8R big hit, or 8R special big hit, the design combination of the same decorative design 3 in the design indicatory territory 208a-208c (for example, "decoration 1- "Decoration 1-decoration 1" and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2") are stopped and displayed. When the 15R special jackpot or the 16R special jackpot is explicitly notified, a pattern combination in which the same three decorative patterns are lined up (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

Further, in the case of notifying a latent change or a small hit, a symbol combination in which three decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" or "decoration 1-decoration 3"). -Decoration 5") is stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, when notifying the deviation of the "special drawing K" and the "special drawing h", symbol combinations other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 73(c) are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

In the present embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols and the type of jackpot are uniquely determined. However, the player may not know which decorative symbol combination is which jackpot.

FIG. 73(d) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the public figure of the present embodiment, "Public figure A" which is a winning symbol and "Public symbol B" which is a deviating symbol. On the basis of the fact that the gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the universal figure display device 210 repeats the illumination of all seven segments and the illumination of one central segment. Performs "variable display of general maps". Then, "Public figure A" is stopped and displayed when the winning of the general figure fluctuation game is notified, and "Public figure B" is stopped and displayed when notifying that the general figure fluctuation game is out. Also in FIG. 73(d), the white portions in the figure show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions show the locations of the segments that are turned on.

Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, to which this activation signal is input, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes a main control unit main process shown in FIG. 74 according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the setting of the interrupt mask, the initial setting of the I/O 310, the initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, and the WDT 314 are set. Allows operation and sets initial values. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms (millisecond) as an initial value.

In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 following step S103, it is determined whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply which the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. When it is less than (9 V in this embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), the step is performed. It proceeds to S107. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process of setting in the counter timer 312 a numerical value that determines the period for executing the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, at a predetermined port of the I/O 310 (for example, a test output port, (1) Outputting a clear signal from the sub control unit 400), setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

In step S109 following step S107, it is determined whether or not the power is restored to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off). If the state is not returned to the state before the power is cut off (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is When it is set to the initial state, the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113). Specifically, first, whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the clerk of the game shop operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is ON (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and when the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not required), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is determined. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register having an initial value of 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) or not (whether or not the result of the checksum is normal) is determined. When the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to restore the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is the specific value. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset to the stack pointer (main setting). When the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer or register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command that indicates that the power-off state has been restored, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub control unit 400.

In step S115, which is subsequent to step S113, a basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update processing, the initial value generation for generating the initial value of the random number counter for special figure determination for generating the random number value for special figure determination used in the lottery for determining the stop symbol in the special figure fluctuation game Update the random number counter for. In addition, the random number counter for generating an initial value for generating the initial value of the universal figure winning random number counter for generating the universal figure winning random number value used for determining whether or not the universal figure variation game is won is updated. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a special figure determination random number counter and its initial value generating random number counter, and a universal figure winning random number counter and its initial value generating random number counter. In step S115, the initial values of two of these initial value generating random number counters are updated. For example, if the range of possible values of the initial value generation random number counter is 0 to 99, the value is acquired from the initial value generation random number counter, 1 is added to the acquired value, and then the original initial value generation random number counter is added. Remember. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original initial value generating random number counter. The other initial value generating random number counters and random number counters are also updated in the same manner. The initial value generating random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT is set so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (not detect an abnormal process). The restart is performed periodically (in this embodiment, once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main controller timer interrupt).

In step S205 following step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned inner frame opening sensor, lower plate full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I/O 310, The presence/absence is monitored and stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. Is read from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is performed. ), the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

Further, in step S205, the presence/absence information of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each of the above-mentioned two-preceding detection signal storage area, previous detection signal storage area, and present detection signal storage area is compared, It is determined whether or not the information on the presence/absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after the detection signal is absent, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 72 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In step S205, information regarding the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal). If there is a match with the (information indicating that there is), the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, or the passing through the universal figure starting opening 228. Judge that there was. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won. For example, when the information on the presence/absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor that detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, there is a winning in the general winning opening 226. However, if the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. The process is branched to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with the winning in the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a single winning, it is not determined that there is a winning until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

In step S205, the presence/absence of a door opening detection signal output from the payout control unit 600 that receives the detection result from the front frame door opening sensor 107 that detects the opening of the front frame door 106 is monitored, and the door provided in the RAM 308 is monitored. Stored in the detection signal state storage area.

In step S207 and step S209 following step S205, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and the special control determination random number value used in the main control unit 300 is generated next. Updates the special figure determination random number counter and the universal figure winning random number counter that generates the universal figure winning random number value. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the random number value for special figure determination is 0 to 99, a value is obtained and acquired from the random number counter for special figure determination provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random number value for special figure determination. After adding 1 to the value, it is stored in the original special figure determination random value counter. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter for special figure determination. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the special figure determination random value counter makes one round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special figure determination random value counter is acquired. Then, the special figure determination random number counter is set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter for determining a special figure that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is acquired as an initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for special figure determination, and is stored in the random number counter for special figure determination. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for determining a special figure has made a round next while being set. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the special figure determination random value counter has completed one round, an initial value storage for determining that the universal figure winning random number counter has completed one round is stored. The area is provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determination random value counter may be provided with a counter for obtaining a random value for special figure 1 and a counter for obtaining a random value for special figure 2, or the same counter. May be used.

In step S211, which is subsequent to step S209, effect random number updating processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated. Specifically, the value of the random number counter for determining the special figure timer number for generating the random number value for determining the special figure timer number for determining the symbol variation time in the special figure variation game or its initial value is updated. Further, the value of the random number counter for determining the universal figure timer number for generating the random number value for determining the universal figure timer number for determining the symbol variation time in the universal figure variation game or its initial value is updated.

In step S213 subsequent to step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, a universal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for varying/stopping the symbol on the universal symbol display device 210, and a time for varying/stopping the symbol on the special figure 1 display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time to change/stop display of symbols on the special figure 2 display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time, predetermined Various timers including a timer for measuring the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. are updated.

In step S215, which is subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning a prize counter updating process, when the winning a prize 226, 234 and the starting mouth 230, 232, 228 have a prize, the value of the prize ball number storage area provided for each winning a prize or each starting mouth in the RAM 308 is displayed. The value is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

In step S217, which is subsequent to step S215, a prize winning acceptance process is performed. In this prize winning process, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 starting opening 230, the special figure 2 starting opening 232, the universal figure starting opening 228 and the variable winning opening 234 have been won. Here, it is determined using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

If there is a winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the holding number is 4), a random value generation circuit (Hard random number circuit) The random number for hit determination generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230 is provided and provided in the RAM 308. The random numbers for special figure determination are acquired from the random number counter for special figure determination and stored in the special figure 1 random number storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 1 random number value storage area random number value for judgment and special figure determination random value value (hereinafter, abbreviated as "special figure 1 random value group" or "special figure 1 starting information") The same number as the special figure 1 reserved number stored in the FIG. 1 reserved number storage area is stored. In the special figure 1 random number storage area, the data of the special figure 1 random value set with the highest holding order (the first and the oldest stored) is generated each time the number of special figure 1 holding decreases by one. The data is erased and processed so that the retention order of the remaining data of the special figure 1 random number set is incremented by one. In addition, each time the number of special figure 1 reserved numbers increases by one, a new set of special figure 1 random number values is added to the next pending order of the data of the special figure 1 random number value with the lowest (last) reservation order. Written.

If there is a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the corresponding special figure 2 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the holding number is 4), a random value generation circuit (Hard random number circuit) A random number value for hit determination generated by performing a predetermined process on a value stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 of the hard key is acquired and provided in the RAM 308. The random number for special figure determination is acquired from the random number counter for special figure determination and stored in the special figure 1 random number storage area in the order of acquisition. A set of a random number value for determining a hit and a random number value for determining a special figure in the special figure 2 random number storage area (hereinafter, abbreviated as “special figure 2 set of random number values” or “special figure 2 starting information”) is The same number as the special figure 2 reservation number stored in the FIG. 2 reservation number storage area is stored. In the special figure 2 random number storage area, each time the number of special figure 2 holding decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 random number set with the highest holding order is erased, and the remaining special figure 2 random number values are stored. It is processed so that the reservation order of the data of the group is increased by one. Also, each time the number of special figure 2 reservations is increased by one, a new set of special figure 2 random number values is written in the next reservation order of the data of the special figure 2 random number value group having the lowest reservation order.

If there is a prize in the universal figure starting port 228 and if the corresponding universal figure hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is acquired from the universal figure winning random number counter as a universal figure winning random number value to handle it. Stored in the universal figure random value storage area. When the variable winning port 234 is won, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning port 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning port 234.

In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, and strobe information is set in bit 7 (when set, data is set) and bit 6 is set. Power-on information (when it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 are the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 are encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is indicated.

In step S221 subsequent to step S219, general-university-state update processing is performed. The universal figure state updating process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the universal figure state updating process in the middle of the universal figure variation display (the value of the universal figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED that constitutes the universal figure display device 210 is repeatedly lit and turned off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the universal figure display device 210 performs variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

In addition, in the public figure state update process at the timing when the public figure variation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the public figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the public figure hit flag is on, the hit symbol The 7-segment LED that constitutes the general-purpose display device 210 is controlled to be turned on and off so that the display mode of FIG. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the device 210 is controlled to be turned on and off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general-picture state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting/extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the normal figure stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the universal figure display device 210 determines one of the winning symbol (the universal symbol A shown in FIG. 73(d)) and the deviating symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 73(d)). Display. Further, after that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbols that are confirmed and displayed are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the universal figure variation game.

Further, if the result of the universal figure variation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on as described later. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While the normal operation is set in the setting region, the blade member is set to the solenoid (part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). A signal for holding the open state 232a is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

In addition, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening/closing driving solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area inactive state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is out, the universal figure out flag is turned on as described later. In the case of this universal figure flag being turned on, even in the universal figure state updating process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period has ended (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the universal figure state updating process when the ordinary figure is not in operation, nothing is performed and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

In step S223, a universal figure related lottery process is performed. In this public figure-related lottery process, opening/closing control of the general figure variation game and the special figure 2 starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the general figure is not operating), and the number of public figure variation games that are held. When is 1 or more, whether the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is won or unwinned by random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the universal figure random number storage area described above. When the winning decision is made, the universal figure hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned on. In the case of no winning, the universal figure flag is set to off. In addition, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for determining the universal figure timer number that generates the random number value for determining the universal figure timer number described above is acquired as the random number value for determining the universal figure timer number, and is acquired. Based on the random number value for determining the universal figure timer number, one of the plurality of variable times is selected to change and display the universal figure on the universal figure display device 210, and this variable display time is set as the universal figure variation display time. , And is stored in the universal figure variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games is stored in the universal figure pending count storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

In step S224 subsequent to step S223, special figure prefetching processing is performed. In the special map prefetching process, when the number of special figure reservations stored in the special figure reservation number storage area increases, the start information related to the increased reservation is prefetched, and the stop symbols etc. of the special figure variation game are special figure related lottery. Preliminary determination is made before the acceptance/rejection determination in the processing. The flow of the special figure prefetching process will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a special figure pre-reading result storage section that stores a special figure pre-reading result (also referred to as a preliminary determination result) as a result of executing the special figure pre-reading process. In the present example, the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four pre-reading results of special figure 1. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a special figure 1 preread number storage area for storing the number of preread results of special figure 1 stored in the special figure 1 preread result storage unit as the special figure 1 preread number. Each time the number of special figure 1 prefetches is incremented by 1, the main control unit 300 writes new special figure 1 prefetch result information to the next order of the lowest (last) special figure 1 prefetch result information.

When deleting the earliest special figure 1 start information of the special figure 1 start information storage area, the main control unit 300 simultaneously deletes the information of the earliest special figure 1 preread result of the special figure 1 preread result storage section. At the same time, the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area is decremented by 1. Further, when the information of the earliest special figure 1 pre-reading result is erased, the processing is performed so that the rank of the information of the remaining special figure 1 pre-reading result is advanced by one.

In this example, the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four pre-reading results of special figure 2. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a special figure 2 preread number storage area for storing the number of preread results of special figure 2 stored in the special figure 2 preread result storage unit as the special figure 2 preread number. The main control unit 300 writes new special figure 2 pre-reading result information to the next rank of the information of the special figure 2 pre-reading result having the lowest rank (last) every time the number of special figure 2 pre-reading increases by one.

When erasing the earliest special figure 2 start-up information in the special figure 2 start-up information storage area, the main control unit 300 simultaneously erases the information of the earliest special figure 2 pre-readout result in the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section. At the same time, the special figure 2 prefetch number stored in the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area is decremented by 1. Further, when the information of the earliest special figure 2 pre-reading result is erased, processing is performed so that the rank of the information of the remaining special figure 2 pre-reading result is advanced by one.

In the present embodiment, the prefetching process is performed only for the increase of the holding, but the special figure prefetching process may be performed for all the holdings every time. Also, in the command setting transmission process (step S233) described later, the prefetch result information may be transmitted in increments only, or the prefetch result information for all suspensions may be transmitted.

Next, the special figure state update processing for each of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure state update processing for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update processing) is performed (step S225). This special figure 2 state update processing performs one of the following plural (nine in this example) processing according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing of the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is used. Re-store it in the reserved number storage area. At the same time, the blinking of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 is controlled. For example, assuming that the four LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 in FIG. 71 are LED numbers 1-4 in order from left to right in the figure, the LEDs corresponding to the special figure 2 holding number are red, for example, from the smallest LED number. Turn on and turn off the others.

Further, for example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED that constitutes the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on. The lighting and extinguishing drive control is performed by repeatedly turning off the light. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, there are a 15R big hit flag, a 16R big hit flag, an 8R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a general figure probability variation flag. It is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update processing that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is off, and the 16R big hit flag is 73(b) when the ON, 8R big hit flag is OFF, the 2R big hit flag is OFF, the small hit flag is OFF, the off flag is OFF, the special figure probability variation flag is ON, and the general figure probability variation flag is ON Special Figure a, 15R big hit flag off, 16R big hit flag off, 8R big hit flag on, 2R big hit flag off, small hit flag off, off flag, off, special figure probability variation flag on, When the general figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure b, the 15R jackpot flag is off, the 16R jackpot flag is off, the 8R jackpot flag is on, the 2R jackpot flag is off, the jackpot flag is off, and the outfall flag is off, Special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and general figure probability fluctuation flag is on, special figure c, 15R big hit flag is off, 16R big hit flag is off, 8R big hit flag is off, 2R big hit flag is off, small hit The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured such that the special figure 2 display device 214 is in the respective modes of the special figure d when the flag is off, the off flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is off, and the general figure probability variation flag is off. The segment LED is controlled to be turned on/off, and the setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214, the 16R special big hit symbol (special figure a), the 8R special big hit symbol (special figure b), the 8R big jackpot pattern (special figure c), and the defeat symbol (special figure) Any one of the symbols in d) is confirmed and displayed. After that, the information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the special display 2 that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special FIG. 2 variable game. Further, if the number of electric support stored in the number of electric support (details described later) storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of electric support, and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing (details will be described later), the time saving flag is turned off. Further, even during the big hit game (during the special game state), the time saving flag is turned off. In addition, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the above transmission information storage area, and the pattern for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that it is present is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later, and then the process ends.

If the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as described later. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is updated in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. For this purpose, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Also, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect production period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) in the variable winning port 234 is detected) The solenoid for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), the door A signal for holding the member 234a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening/closing the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and a timer for door closing time management provided in the RAM 308 is provided. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state updating process which is started at the timing when the opening/closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (16 rounds or 8 rounds in this embodiment), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) That is, the production standby period in the storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to stand by while displaying the image informing the player of the end of the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208. Is set. Further, if the universal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the number of electric support times (for example, 100 times) is set in the electric support frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the RAM 308 is also set. Turns on the time saving flag provided in. If the universal figure probability variation flag is set to OFF, neither the number of power support times is set in the power support frequency storage unit nor the time saving flag is turned on. The time saving state here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit is shortened. If the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the state of high probability of universal figure (normal figure probability change). In the high probability state of the universal figure, the probability of being hit in the universal variation game is higher than in the low probability state of the universal figure. In addition, the general figure high probability state is shorter than the general figure low probability state in the variation time of the universal figure fluctuation game (general figure variation short). Furthermore, in the universal figure high probability state, the open time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the universal figure low probability state (power extension). In addition, in the universal figure high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the universal figure low probability state. The control state based on the normal figure probability variation, the universal figure variation, and the extension of the electric Chu are collectively called the electric support (starting entrance winning support by the electric tulip) state. In addition, it includes a control state that shortens the variation time of the special figure variation game, and is called a time saving state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general figure low probability state is maintained. This is a high probability probability state during the big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 during the big hit game, many game balls in the special figure 2 starting hole 232 until the game balls enter There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be won during a big hit increases and the gambling ability increases, which is to solve this problem.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special area 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out, the out flag is turned on, as will be described later. When the deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Toku-zu 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state updating process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

Then, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, description thereof will be omitted. Omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure related lottery processing for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special map-related lottery process (special map 2 related lottery process) for the special map 2 is performed first (step S229), and then the special map-related lottery process for the special map 1 (special map 1-related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Regarding these special figure related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variation game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are met at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. If the number of special game 2 variable games to be held is greater than 0, the lottery process and the variable game relating to the special figure 1 variable game to be held are not performed. The notification of the jackpot determination result of the special figure variation game by the decorative pattern display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the special lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is notified. The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the start opening 230 shown in FIG. In the case of special figure 2 related lottery processing (step S229), a special figure 2 random number value group (starting information) is set from the earliest (oldest stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random number storage area. Obtained and determined whether to make a big hit, a small hit or not by using a determination table (not shown), and a time from the start of the variable display of special figure 2 to the stop display , The symbols (stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed after the variable display of the special figure 2 are determined. After the earliest set of special figure 2 random number values from the special figure 2 random value storage area is taken out, the storage of the special figure 2 random number set in the special figure 2 random number value storage area is cleared and the special figure 2 Decrement the number of reservations. At this time, the set of special figure 2 random number values extracted from the special figure 2 random number value storage area is stored in a temporary area (an example of the second starting information storage means) provided in the RAM 308, The above determination may be performed based on the set of the special figure 2 random number values stored in the temporary area.

In step S233 subsequent to step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (in the present embodiment, a basic command, a symbol variation start command, a prefetch result information command, a symbol variation stop command, a prize production start command, an end production start command, a jackpot round number designation command, a power recovery command, a RAM clear command, etc. Bits 0 to 10 are command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data contains the 15R jackpot flag, 16R jackpot flag, 8R jackpot flag, 2R jackpot flag, and jackpot flag, which are stored in the RAM 308 of the main controller 300. Flags, special figure probability variation flag, and general figure probability variation flag value of each flag, including information indicating the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, in the case of the symbol variation stop command, 15R jackpot flag , 16R big hit flag, 8R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, small hit flag, outlier flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag value, etc., and in the case of 15R big hit (or 15R special big hit) start command, 15R big hit flag Value, the number of big hit rounds, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the value of the time saving flag, etc. In the case of the 16R special big hit start command, the value of the 16R big jackpot flag, the number of big hit rounds, and the special figure probability variation flag In the case of the big hit end command, including the value, the value of the time saving flag, etc., the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the value of the time saving flag, the value of the number of electric support, etc. are included. Includes flag value, number of big hit rounds, value of special figure probability fluctuation flag, value of time saving flag, etc.In case of big hit end command, value of special figure probability fluctuation flag, value of time saving flag, value of power support etc. Including, in the case of the winning effect start command and the end effect start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, big hit round number, etc. Is included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the special diagram 2 starting port 232, whether or not there is a winning at the variable winning port 234, etc. including.

Further, the prefetch result information command includes the prefetch result information stored in the prefetch result storage unit together with the types of special figures 1 and 2 in the command data. The prefetch result information in the prefetch result information command may be only the increment, or may include the prefetch result information for all pending. In this embodiment, the prefetch result information command includes prefetch result information for all pending operations.

In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the values of the 15R jackpot flag, the 16R jackpot flag, the 8R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, and the special figure 1 stored in the RAM 308 in the command data are also included. Information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the values of the 15R big hit flag, the 16R big hit flag, the 8R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, and the special figure probability variation flag stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. To do. In the above-described winning award effect setting transmission process, the command data stores the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the award effect period, and the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating a value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission processing, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating a value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening opening setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. Is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. Is set. Further, in this step S233, general command special figure pending increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 for command data, advance notice information (advance notice information, false) (Advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set. In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full tank error. When the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control opening and closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning a prize port 234, and the general figure display device 210 and the special figure 1 display device 212 are controlled through the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display sections 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I/O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I/O 310).

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as restore data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of an input/output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main controller shown in FIG.

Next, the special figure prefetching process (step S224 in FIG. 75) will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the flow of the special figure prefetching process. First, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the special figure 2 starting information is increasing (step S251). Whether or not the special figure 2 starting information has increased is determined by the special figure 2 holding number stored in the special figure 2 holding number storage area and the special figure 2 prereading stored in the special figure 2 prereading number storage area. Compare with numbers. The main control unit 300 compares the special figure 2 reserved number with the special figure 2 preread number, and if the special figure 2 reserved number is larger than the special figure 2 preread number, the special figure 2 start information is increasing. If the number of special figure 2 reservations is equal to the number of special figure 2 prefetches, it is determined that the special figure 2 start information has not increased.

When determining that the special figure 2 starting information has increased, the main control unit 300 acquires a set of special figure 2 random number values related to the increased special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 starting information storage area. , The hit random number value and the special figure determination random value in the obtained special figure 2 start information are pre-read. Then, prior to the hit determination in the special figure 2 related lottery processing (step S229), whether or not the hit determination is a big hit, using the pre-read random number for hit determination and a big hit determination table (not shown) Preliminary determination is made as to whether or not it is a hit (step S252). Next, the main control unit 300 uses a pre-read special figure determination random number value and a special figure determination table (not shown) to pre-determine symbols (stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed after the variable display of the special diagram 2 ( Step S252). These pre-judgment processes are executed by referring to the jackpot judgment table and special figure determination table (see FIG. 79 and FIG. 80) used at the time of judgment, but a special judgment table is prepared for the prefetching process. You may.

Next, the main control unit 300, as the special figure 2 pre-reading result of the information of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game that has been preliminarily determined, is placed in the first free area of the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section provided in the RAM 308. It is stored (step S253), and the process proceeds to step S254. When the main control unit 300 determines in step S251 that the special figure 2 starting information has not increased, the process proceeds to step S254 without executing steps S252 and S253.

Next, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the special figure 1 starting information has increased (step S254). To determine whether or not the special figure 1 start information is increasing, for example, as in the case of the special figure 2, the special figure 1 hold number stored in the special figure 1 hold number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area are stored. It is performed by comparing the number of pre-readings of the special figure 1 stored in. If it is determined that the special figure 1 starting information has increased, the process proceeds to step S255, and if it is determined that the special figure 1 starting information has not increased, the special figure prefetching process ends.

In step S255, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not non-electricity support is being performed as the undetermined information setting condition. As the undetermined information setting condition, when the notification time of the prefetch result is included in the electric support period, included in the big hit game, or when the big hit symbol is preliminarily determined for holding according to Toku-zu 1, etc. Can be mentioned.

When the main control unit 300 determines that the undetermined information setting condition is not satisfied, the main control unit 300 acquires a set of special figure 1 random number values related to the increased special figure 1 starting information from the special figure 1 starting information storage area. , The hit random number value and the special figure determination random value in the obtained special figure 1 start information are pre-read. Then, prior to the hit determination in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231), by using the pre-read random number value for hit determination and the big hit determination table (not shown), whether the hit determination is a big hit or not Preliminary determination is made as to whether or not it is a hit (step S256). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the preread random number for special figure determination and the special figure determination table (not shown) to pre-determine the symbols (stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed after the variable display of the special diagram 1 ( Step S256). These pre-judgment processes are executed by referring to the jackpot judgment table and special figure determination table (see FIG. 79 and FIG. 80) used at the time of judgment, but a special judgment table is prepared for the prefetching process. You may.

Next, the main control unit 300 stores the pre-determined stop symbol of the special figure 1 variation game as the special figure 1 prefetch result in the earliest empty area of the special figure 1 prefetch result storage section provided in the RAM 308. (Step S257), the special figure prefetching process ends.

When it is determined in step S255 that the undetermined information setting condition is satisfied, the main control unit 300 does not prefetch the increased Toku-zu 1 start information, but pre-reads the "undetermined" information for Toku-zu 1. The result is stored in the result storage unit and the special figure prefetching process ends.

FIG. 77 exemplifies a state in which the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit. 77A illustrates an example of a state in which the prefetch result is stored in the special figure 1 preread result storage unit, and FIG. 77B illustrates the state in which the special diagram 2 preread result storage unit stores the preread result. The illustrated state is illustrated. Further, FIG. 77(c) exemplifies information stored in the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 in the electric support.

As shown in FIG. 77A, the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas "prefetch result 1" as the number of reserveable special figure 1 variable games ~ It has “prefetch result 4”. The storage areas “prefetch result 1” to “prefetch result 4” are associated with the holding order of the special figure 1 starting information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 77( b ), the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 has, for example, the same number of preserving results as the special figure 2 variable game (four in this embodiment) storage area “prefetch result 1” to It has “prefetch result 4”. The storage areas “prefetch result 1” to “prefetch result 4” are associated with the holding order of the special figure 2 starting information storage area.

In FIG. 77(a), the pre-reading result 1 is stored in the "pre-reading result 1" as the pre-reading result 1 and the stop symbol "special figure F" is stored. Similarly, the stop symbol "special figure F" is stored in "prefetch result 2", the stop symbol "special figure A" is stored in "prefetch result 3", and the stop symbol "special note" is stored in "prefetch result 4". FIG. F” is stored.

In FIG. 77(b), the stop symbol "special drawing d" is stored in the "prefetch result 1", and the stop symbol information is not stored in "prefetch result 2" to "prefetch result 4". Has been done. In FIG. 79, a state in which information such as a stop symbol is not stored is expressed as “none”.

In FIG. 77(c), "pre-read result 1" stores undetermined information instead of a stop symbol. When undetermined information is stored, it is expressed as “undetermined information”. In "prefetch result 2" to "prefetch result 4", "none" in which information such as a stop symbol is not stored is stored.

Next, the special figure 1 related lottery process in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 78. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured to execute the special figure 1 related lottery process based on the flow shown in FIG. 78, for example. The special figure 1 related lottery process is executed by, for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 controlling the ROM 306, the RAM 308, and the like.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure 1-related lottery process. As shown in FIG. 78, in the special figure 1 related lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol or the special electric auditors product is in operation, that is, whether the special figure variation game or the winning game is in progress (step S301). .. For example, when the main control unit 300 determines that the special figure variation game or the winning game is being performed, the special figure 1 related lottery process is ended without executing steps S303 to S321 described later, and the special figure variation game or the winning game is performed. If it is determined not to be in progress, the process proceeds to step S303.

In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether or not there is a reserved ball, that is, whether or not a set of special figure 1 random number values is stored in the special figure 1 reserved number storage area. For example, when the main control unit 300 determines that the special figure 1 random number set is stored in the special figure 1 reserved number storage area, the process proceeds to step S305, and the special figure 1 random number set is stored in the special figure 1 reserved number. If it is determined that it is not stored in the area, the special figure 1 related lottery process is ended without executing steps S305 to S321 described later.

In step S305 following step S303, it is determined whether or not the Toku-zu 1 probability variation flag is in the on state. For example, if the main control unit 300 determines that the Toku-zu 1 probability variation flag is in the on state, the process proceeds to step S307, and if it is determined that the flag is not in the on state, the process proceeds to step S309.

In step S307 subsequent to step S305, the hit/miss judgment is executed by using the hit probability determination high probability table [Tokuzu1] for toku-zu 1 described later with reference to FIG. 79(b). Since the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine of a special figure 2 priority variation machine that changes the special figure 2 with priority over the special figure 1, for example, the main control unit 300 stores the special figure 2 reserved number storage area. The special figure 2 random number set stored first is read, and if the special figure 2 random number set is not stored, the special figure 1 random number value stored first in the special figure 1 reserved number storage area 79b is read out, the win/fail judgment is executed with reference to the high probability table for win/loss determination [special figure 1] shown in FIG. 79(b), and the process proceeds to step S311.

On the other hand, in step S309 subsequent to step S305, the hit/miss judgment is executed using the hit/miss judgment low probability table [Tokuzu1] for toku-zu 1 which will be described later with reference to FIG. 79(a). The process in step S309 is the same as step S307 except that the table referred to in the hit determination is the hit determination low probability table [special figure 1] shown in FIG. .. When the process of step S309 ends, the main control unit 300 moves to step S311.

In step S311 following step S307 or step S309, it is determined whether or not the hit/miss determination result is a big hit. For example, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S319 when it is determined that the win/loss determination result is a big hit, and moves to step S313 when it is determined that the win/no determination result is not a big hit.

In step S319 subsequent to step S311, a big hit symbol is determined. For example, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table for special figure 1 shown in FIG. [Fig. 1], the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the special figure 1 variation game is determined, and the process proceeds to step S321.

On the other hand, in step S313 subsequent to step S311, it is determined whether or not the hit/miss determination result is a small hit. For example, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S317 when it is determined that the win/loss determination result is the small hit, and proceeds to step S315 when it is determined that the win/no determination result is not the small hit.

In step S317 following step S313, a small hit symbol is determined. For example, the main control unit 300 refers to the special figure determination table [special figure 1] shown in FIG. 82A for the special figure determination random number value in the set of special figure 1 random number values used for the success/failure determination. Then, the stop symbol after the special figure 1 variation game is determined, and the process proceeds to step S321. In the present embodiment, since there is only one small winning symbol, there is a 100% probability that the symbol will be determined as “special diagram E”.

On the other hand, in step S315, which is subsequent to step S313, the off symbol is determined. Referring to the special figure determination table [special figure 1] shown in FIG. 80(a), the stop symbol after the special figure 1 variation game is decided, and the process proceeds to step S321. In addition, in this embodiment, since there is one deviating symbol, there is a 100% probability that the symbol is determined to be “special figure F”.

In step S321 following step S315, S317, or S319, the variation time is determined according to the symbol. For example, the main control unit 300 determines the variation time of the symbol variation display in the special figure 1 variation game with reference to the special figure 1 variation time determination table shown in FIG. 81. Since the special figure 2 related lottery process is the same, the description thereof is omitted.

Next, a win/fail judgment table and a special figure determination table used in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. The tables shown in FIGS. 79 and 80 are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. 79(a) to (d) are used in the success/failure determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2 in special figure 1 or special figure 2 related lottery processing (steps S229, S231) of the main controller timer interrupt processing. An example of the hit determination table is shown. FIG. 79(a) shows a table for special figure 1 used during the low probability of special figure, and FIG. 79(b) shows a table for special figure 1 used during the high probability of special figure. FIG. 79(c) shows a table for special figure 2 used during low probability of special figure, and FIG. 79(d) shows a table for special figure 2 used during high probability of special figure.

79(a) and 79(b), the table for determining hit/miss [special figure 1] shows "special figure probability" in the first column from the left, "random number range" in the second column, and "special range" in the third column. It is composed of the item of “result of judgment”. The "low probability" in the "special figure probability" in the first column shown in FIG. 79(a) indicates that the game state at the time of winning/decision determination is the special figure low probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates the numerical value range (0 to 65535) of the random numbers to be compared with the acquired random number value for hit determination. The “random number range” is divided into four numbers, 0 to 10000, 10001 to 10219, 10220 to 10383, and 10384 to 65535. In the third column, the "winning/absence determination result", "low probability", "0" to 10000 and "1038 to 65535" are assigned to "offset", and "1000 to 10219" is assigned to "big hit". , "Small hits" are assigned corresponding to the numerical values 10220 to 10383.

The "high probability" in the "special figure probability" in the first column shown in FIG. 79(b) indicates that the game state at the time of winning/decision determination is the special figure high probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates the numerical value range (0 to 65535) of the random numbers to be compared with the acquired random number value for hit determination. The "random number range" is divided into four numbers, 0 to 10000, 10001 to 12185, 12186 to 12349, and 12350 to 65535. In the third column, the "winning/absence determination result", "high probability" and numerical values 0 to 10000 and "missing" are assigned corresponding to the numerical values 12350 to 65535, and "big hit" is assigned corresponding to the numerical values 10001 to 12185. , "Small hits" are assigned corresponding to the numerical values 12186 to 12349.

The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300, with respect to the obtained random number value for hit determination in order to determine whether the result of the special figure 1 variation game is to be won (hit) or to be unwinned (lost). The success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure determination table [Tokuzu 1]. For example, the basic circuit 302, when the game state at the time of the hit determination is the special figure high probability state, reads the high probability table for win/loss determination [Special Figure 1] shown in FIG. When the game state of is a special figure low probability state, the low probability table for winning/decision determination [special figure 1] shown in FIG. 79(a) is read from the ROM 306 and is referred to.

FIG. 79(c) shows a table for special figure 2 used during low probability of special figure, and FIG. 79(d) shows a table for special figure 2 used during high probability of special figure. 79(c) and FIG. 79(d), the table for determining hit/miss [special figure 2] shows "special figure probability" in the first column from the left, "random number range" in the second column, and "special range" in the third column. It is composed of the item of “result of judgment”. "Low probability" in the "special figure probability" in the first column shown in FIG. 79(c) indicates that the game state at the time of winning/decision determination is the special figure low probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates the numerical value range (0 to 65535) of the random numbers to be compared with the acquired random number value for hit determination. The “random number range” is divided into three numbers 0 to 10000, numbers 10001 to 10219, and numbers 10220 to 65535. In the third column, the "winning/absence determination result", "low probability", numerical values 0 to 10000, and "missing" are assigned corresponding to the numerical values 10220 to 65535, and "big hit" is assigned corresponding to the numerical values 10001 to 10219. ing. In special figure 2, "small hit" is not assigned.

The "high probability" in the "special figure probability" in the first column shown in FIG. 79(d) indicates that the gaming state at the time of winning/decision determination is the special figure high probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates the numerical value range (0 to 65535) of the random numbers to be compared with the acquired random number value for hit determination. The “random number range” is divided into three numbers 0 to 10000, numbers 10001 to 12185, and numbers 12186 to 65535. In the third column, the “winning/absence determination result”, “high probability”, numerical values 0 to 10000, and “miss” are assigned corresponding to the numerical values 12186 to 65535, and “big hit” is assigned to the numerical values 10001 to 12185. ing. In special figure 2, "small hit" is not assigned.

The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300, with respect to the obtained random number for hit determination in order to determine whether the result of the special figure 2 variation game is to be won (win) or to be unwinned (off) The win/fail judgment is performed by referring to the win/fail judgment table [Tokuzu2]. For example, the basic circuit 302, when the game state at the time of the hit determination is the special figure high probability state, reads the high probability table for special hit determination [special figure 2] shown in FIG. When the game state is the special figure low probability state, the low probability table for winning/decision determination [special figure 2] shown in FIG. 79(c) is read from the ROM 306 and is referred to.

In the present embodiment, the small hit probability of special figure 2 is set to 0 as one of the examples in which the small hit probability of special figure 2 is lower than the small hit probability of special figure 1. It is of course possible to set a random number range for a small hit in special figure 2. Further, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 may be the same as or higher than that of the special figure 1.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the small figure is selected for the special figure 1 win/loss determination result by the special figure 1 variable game with the first probability, and the special figure 2 win/fail determination result by the special figure 2 variable game is based on the first probability. A small hit is selected with a low second probability.

The pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variation machine. Further, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 hit/miss determination result based on the special figure 2 variable game is lower than the small hit probability of the special figure 1 hit/miss determination result based on the special figure 1 variable game. Therefore, during electric power support, a small hit is given to a player who is not playing the game intended by the pachinko machine developer, and a penalty is given to encourage the pachinko machine developer to play the game. You may be able to. For example, when the special figure 2 starting port is arranged in the area on the right side of the game board 200, the developer intends that the player makes a right hit in the electric support state. In this case, if the player does not hit the right side and hits the left side differently from the developer's intention, it is advantageous for the player to hit the right side so that the player will be disadvantaged. In some cases it can be done. In addition, since the small hit probability of the special figure 2 win/loss determination result based on the special figure 2 variable game is low, the small hit in the electric support is often the special figure 1 win/loss determination result based on the special figure 1 variable game. Therefore, by changing the effect that can be changed when the predetermined change condition is satisfied, the player is indirectly informed that the player does not enter the special figure 2 starting opening 232 too much, and gambling is suppressed. May be possible.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 win/loss determination result based on the special figure 2 variation game is lower than the small hit probability of the special figure 1 win/loss determination result based on the special figure 1 variation game. Therefore, it is possible to emphasize that the special figure 2 variable game is more advantageous than the special figure 1 variable game and reduce the interest of the game by reducing the small hits that are also disadvantageous in terms of performance in the special figure 2 variable game. There are cases.

FIG. 80 shows a special figure determination table. FIG. 80A shows a special figure determination table [special figure 1] for the special figure 1. FIG. 80B shows a special figure determination table [special figure 2] for the special figure 2. In FIG. 80(a), the special figure determination table [special figure 1] is composed of items from the left column, "results determination result", "random number range", and "stop symbol". The “winning/absence determination result” in the left column is divided into “big hit”, “small hit” and “outside hit”. "Big hit" indicates a case where the result is "big hit" as a result of the hit determination using the win/loss determination table [special figure 1] shown in FIG. 79(a) or 79(b), and "small hit" is As a result of the hit/no hit judgment using the special drawing right/wrong judgment table [special drawing 1], the case where it is judged as "small hit" is shown. As a result of the determination, the case where it is determined to be “out” is shown.

The item “random number range” in the middle row of the table shown in FIG. 80A indicates a numerical value range of random numbers to be compared with the acquired random number value for determining special figure. The “random number range” is divided into four numbers 0 to 24, numbers 25 to 49, numbers 50 to 54, and numbers 55 to 99, corresponding to the item “big hit” in the “right/wrong judgment result” on the left column. It is classified into one of the numerical values 0 to 99 corresponding to the "small hit", and is classified into one of the numerical values 0 to 99 corresponding to the "out."

The item "stop symbol" in the right column of the table shown in FIG. 80(a) represents the stop symbol in the special figure 1 variable game. "Stop symbol" is "big hit" and the range of symbol random numbers is "Special symbol A (15R probability variation)" corresponding to numerical values 0 to 24, "Special symbol B (15R)" is corresponding to numerical values 25 to 49, The stop symbol aspect of "special drawing C (sudden change)" corresponding to the numerical values 50 to 54 and "special drawing D (probability change of latency)" corresponding to the numerical values 55 to 99 are respectively assigned. Further, the "stop symbol" is assigned a stop symbol mode of "special symbol E (small hit)" corresponding to "small hit" and a range of symbol random numbers from 0 to 99. Further, the "stop symbol" is assigned a stop symbol mode of "special symbol F (deletion)" corresponding to the numbers "0" to "off" and the random number range of symbols.

As described above, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 displays any one of the special figures A to F on the special figure 1 display device 212 when the hit/miss determination result based on the ball entering the special figure 1 starting opening 230 is a big hit. Whether or not to stop and display the stop symbol mode is determined with reference to the special figure determination table [special figure 1] for the acquired random number for special figure determination. In addition, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300, when the hit determination result based on the ball entering the special figure 1 starting opening 230 is a small hit, the special symbol 1 display device 212 displays the stop symbol aspect of the special symbol E as a stop. Decide to let. In addition, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 causes the special figure 1 display device 212 to stop and display the stop symbol mode of the special figure F when the result of winning/deciding determination based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting opening 230 is out of alignment. To decide.

In FIG. 80(b), the special figure determination table [special figure 2] is composed of the items of "result of judgment", "random number range", and "stop symbol" from the left column. In order to facilitate understanding, "explanation of symbol" is attached to the right side of "stop symbol". The “winning/absence determination result” in the left column is divided into “big hit”, “small hit” and “outside hit”. The “big hit” indicates a case where the result is “big hit” as a result of the hit determination using the hit determination table [special figure 2] shown in FIG. 79(c) or 79(d). As a result of the hit/miss judgment using the drawing hit/miss judgment table [special figure 2], it is shown that the result is "out."

The item “random number range” in the middle row of the table shown in FIG. 80( b) indicates the numerical range of the random numbers to be compared with the acquired random number for special figure determination. The "random number range" is divided into three numbers 0-69, 70-74, and 75-99 corresponding to the item "big hit" in the "right/wrong judgment result" on the left column, and corresponds to "outside". Then, it is classified into one of the numerical values 0 to 99.

The item "stop symbol" in the right column of the table shown in FIG. 80(b) represents the stop symbol in the special figure 2 variable game. "Stop symbol" is "big hit" and the range of symbol random numbers is "special figure a (16R probability change)" corresponding to numerical values 0 to 69, and "special figure b (8R probability change)" corresponding to numerical values 70 to 74. , The special symbol c (8R) corresponding to the numerical values 75 to 99 is assigned to the stop symbol mode. Further, the "stop symbol" is assigned with the stop symbol aspect of "special symbol d (shift)" corresponding to the numbers "0 to 99" and the range of symbol random numbers is 0 to 99.

In this way, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300, in the special figure 2 display device 214 from special figure a to special figure c, when the hit/miss determination result based on the ball entering the special figure 2 starting opening 232 is a big hit. Whether to stop and display the stop symbol mode is determined with reference to the special figure determination table [special figure 2] for the acquired random number for special figure determination. In addition, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 causes the special figure 2 display device 214 to stop and display the stop symbol aspect of the special figure d when the result of winning/decision determination based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is out. To decide.

FIG. 81 shows an example of the special figure 1 variable display time determination table for determining the variable time of the symbol fluctuation stop display in the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 1 variable display time determination table is mainly used in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) of the main controller timer interrupt process. The data table shown in FIG. 81 is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. As shown in FIG. 81, the special figure 1 variable display time determination table has four items from the left column: “stop symbol”, “variable time”, “random number selection range” and “effect mode on decorative symbol display device”. It is configured.

The special table 1 fluctuation time determination table is divided into sub-tables for each item "stop symbol". In this embodiment, the first to fifth sub-tables are included. The first sub-table is used when the "stop symbol" is special map A or special map B. This sub-table is commonly used regardless of whether the game state at the time of winning/decision determination is electric support or non-electric support. The "random number selection range" of the first sub-table is divided into three numbers 0 to 1000, numbers 1001 to 20000, and numbers 20001 to 65535. If the obtained random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of numerical values 0 to 1000, the effect that the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the normal reach hit with the variation time of 15000 ms is selected. If the random number value for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of 1001 to 20,000, the effect in which the variation time is 45000 ms and the effect pattern on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the super reach A is selected. If the random number value for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical values 20001 to 65535, the effect in which the variation time is 65000 ms and the effect pattern on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the super reach B is selected.

The second sub-table is used when the "stop symbol" is the special symbol C. This sub-table is commonly used regardless of whether the game state at the time of winning/decision determination is electric support or non-electric support. The “random number selection range” of the second sub-table is divided into three numbers 0 to 30000, numbers 30001 to 45000, and numbers 45001 to 65535. If the obtained random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of 0 to 30000, the effect is selected in which the variation mode is 12000 ms and the effect pattern on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the complete stop of chances. If the random number value for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of numerical values 30001 to 45000, an effect in which the variation time is 45000 ms and the effect pattern on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the super reach A loss/chance stop is selected. .. Here, the super-reach A losing/stopping the chance eye is a display for stopping the chance eye after finishing the effect of notifying the decorative pattern display device 208 that the super reach A is out. At least after the display of the chance opportunity, the special figure stop symbol is stopped and displayed. If the random number value for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical values 45001 to 65535, the effect in which the variation time is 65000 ms and the effect pattern on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the super reach B loss/stop chance is selected. .. Here, the super-reach B losing/stopping the chance eye is a display for stopping the chance eye after the effect of notifying the decorative pattern display device 208 that the super reach B is out is completed. At least after the display of the chance opportunity, the special figure stop symbol is stopped and displayed.

The third sub-table is used when the "stop symbol" is special figure D or special figure E. This sub-table is commonly used regardless of whether the game state at the time of winning/decision determination is electric support or non-electric support. The “random number selection range” of the third sub-table is divided into two numbers 0 to 30000 and numbers 30001 to 65535. If the obtained random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of 0 to 30000, the effect is selected in which the variation mode is 12000 ms and the effect pattern on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the complete stop of chances. If the random number value for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of 30001 to 65535, the effect in which the variation time is 15000 ms and the effect pattern on the decorative symbol display device 208 is normal reach loss/chance stop is selected. Here, the normal reach loss/chance eye stop is a display for stopping the chance eye after the effect of notifying the decorative pattern display device 208 that the normal reach is out is completed. At least after the display of the chance opportunity, the special figure stop symbol is stopped and displayed.

The fourth sub-table is a case where the "stop symbol" is the special figure F, and is used when the game state at the time of winning/decision determination is non-electric support and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 3. The “random number selection range” of the fourth sub-table is divided into four numbers 0 to 65000, numbers 65001 to 65400, numbers 65401 to 65500, and numbers 65501 to 65535. If the obtained random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical values 0 to 65000, the effect that the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is shortened with the variation time of 3000 ms is selected. If the random number value for determining the special drawing timer number is within the range of 65001 to 65400, the effect that the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the normal reach loss with the variation time of 10000 ms is selected. If the random number value for determining the special drawing timer number is within the range of 65401 to 65500, the effect in which the variation mode is 40,000 ms and the effect pattern on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the super reach A loss is selected. If the random number value for determining the special drawing timer number is within the range of 65501 to 65535, the effect in which the effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the super reach B loss is selected when the variation time is 60000 ms.

The fifth sub-table is the case where the stop symbol is the special map F, and the game state at the time of winning or losing determination is non-electric support and the number of holdings of the special map 1 is 0 to 2, or the game at the time of winning or winning determination. It is used when the status is electric support and the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 0 to 3. The “random number selection range” of the fifth sub-table is divided into four numbers 0 to 50000, numbers 50001 to 60000, numbers 60001 to 65000, and numbers 65001 to 65535. If the obtained random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of 0 to 50000, an effect is selected in which the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is lost when the variation time is 8000 ms. If the random number value for determining the special figure timer number is in the range of 50001 to 60,000, the effect that the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the normal reach loss with the variation time of 10000 ms is selected. If the random number value for determining the special drawing timer number is within the range of 60001 to 65000, the effect in which the variation mode is 40,000 ms and the effect pattern on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the super reach A loss is selected. If the random number value for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of 65001 to 65535, the effect in which the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the super reach B loss is selected with the variable time of 60000 ms.

FIG. 82 shows an example of the special figure 2 variable display time determination table for determining the variable time of the symbol variation stop display in the special figure 2 variable game. The special figure 2 variable display time determination table is mainly used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) of the main controller timer interrupt process. The data table shown in FIG. 82 is stored in, for example, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. As shown in FIG. 82, the special figure 2 variable display time determination table has four items from the left column, "stop symbol", "variable time", "random number selection range" and "effect mode on decorative symbol display device". It is configured.

In the special figure 2 variable time determination table, sub-tables are separated for each item "stop symbol". In this embodiment, the first to fourth sub-tables are provided. The first sub-table is used when the stop symbols are special drawings a to c. This sub-table is commonly used regardless of whether the game state at the time of winning/decision determination is electric support or non-electric support. The "random number selection range" of the first sub-table is divided into three numbers 0 to 1000, numbers 1001 to 20000, and numbers 20001 to 65535. If the obtained random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of numerical values 0 to 1000, the effect that the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the normal reach hit with the variation time of 15000 ms is selected. If the random number value for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of 1001 to 20,000, the effect in which the variation time is 45000 ms and the effect pattern on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the super reach A is selected. If the random number value for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical values 20001 to 65535, the effect in which the variation time is 65000 ms and the effect pattern on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the super reach B is selected.

The second sub-table is a case where the "stop symbol" is the special figure d, and is used when the game state at the time of winning/decision determination is electric support and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is 1 to 3. The “random number selection range” of the second sub-table is divided into one of numerical values 0 to 65535. If the obtained random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical values 0 to 65535, the effect in which the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the super shortening loss with the variation time of 1500 ms is selected.

The third sub-table is a case where the "stop symbol" is the special figure d, and is used when the game state at the time of winning/decision determination is electric support and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is 0. The “random number selection range” of the third sub-table is divided into one of the numerical values 0 to 65535. If the obtained random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical values 0 to 65535, the effect in which the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is lost when the variation time is 8000 ms is selected.

The fourth sub-table is the case where the "stop symbol" is the special drawing d, and is used when the game state at the time of winning/decision determination is non-electric support and the number of holdings of the special drawing 2 is 0 to 3. The “random number selection range” of the fourth sub-table is divided into four numbers 0 to 50000, numbers 50001 to 60000, numbers 60001 to 65000, and numbers 65001 to 65535. If the obtained random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of 0 to 50000, an effect is selected in which the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is lost when the variation time is 8000 ms. If the random number value for determining the special figure timer number is in the range of 50001 to 60,000, the effect that the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the normal reach loss with the variation time of 10000 ms is selected. If the random number value for determining the special drawing timer number is within the range of 60001 to 65000, the effect in which the variation mode is 40,000 ms and the effect pattern on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the super reach A loss is selected. If the random number value for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of 65001 to 65535, the effect in which the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the super reach B loss is selected with the variable time of 60000 ms.

Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 83. It should be noted that FIG. 9A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of the timer variable update interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

First, in step S401 of FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, the input/output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized. This initialization process takes about 30 seconds, for example.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this processing is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the processing proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed. Details of the effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S411 subsequent to step S409, if it is detected that the chance button has been pressed, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button.

In step S413 following step S411, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to VDP434, this instruction is output to VDP434 (details will be described later).

In step S415 following step S413, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to the tone generator IC 416, this instruction is output to the tone generator IC 416.

In step S417 following step S415, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to various lamps 418, the instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

In step S419 following step S417, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the shielding device 246, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

In step S421 subsequent to step S419, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S403. ..

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the first sub control unit 400 when the strobe signal output from the main control unit 300 is detected. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined when the timer interrupt is triggered. To be executed in the cycle. In step S601 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Stored in the timer variable storage area of. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S603 subsequent to step S601, the control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S421 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400, and the other effect random number updating process is performed.

Next, the image control process of step S413 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control processing. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc., and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705, and if not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for incoming signal. In step S705, parameter setting is performed based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, the CPU 404 forms the display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, so that the information of the image data forming the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates) etc. are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

In step S707 subsequent to step S705, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 404. In step S709 subsequent to step S707, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the image drawing end is input. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711, otherwise. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input. In step S711, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 11A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

First, in step S801 of FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S801. In this initialization processing, the input/output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 508 is initialized.

In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805. .. In step S805, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S807 following step S805, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether or not a command is received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

In step S809 following step S807, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S807, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

In step S811 following step S809, if there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

In step S813 following step S811, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S803.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the second sub control unit 500 when the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400 is detected. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle. In step S1001, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 84A, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S1003 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number updating process and the like are performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 85 to FIG. 88, Example 1 of the effect operation by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the flow of a selection effect control process which is one of the effect control processes (step S409) of the main process in the first sub control unit 400. In the selection effect control processing, the first sub control unit 400 first determines whether it is the start timing of the selection effect (step S1101). Here, the start timing of the selection effect may be, for example, a standby state in which the symbol variation game is not performed (including the demonstration screen demonstration), or may be during the special figure variation game. Further, the gaming state may be any of a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, a time saving state, and the like. Further, it may be a predetermined round during the big hit game (for example, the first round of the 15R big hit) or all rounds during the big hit game (for example, excluding the start effect and the end effect of the big hit game). Good.

If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S1101 that it is the selection effect start timing, the process proceeds to step S1103, and if it is determined that it is not the selection effect start timing, the selection effect control process ends. When the process proceeds to step S1103, the first sub control unit 400 displays the selection effect. As a display example of the selected effect, for example, a description of the effect (for example, performance of a song by the speaker 120) performed by the player at a predetermined position of the decorative pattern display device 208 (explanation of song name, song, etc.) ) Is included. Further, displaying the effect that the player can select is also included in the display of the selected effect. For example, the display of the effect list for prompting the player to select one of the plurality of effects, and the display for prompting the player to select (for example, the display for prompting the player to press the chance button 136) are included in the display of the selected effect. ..

After displaying the selection effect, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a selection operation has been performed by the player (step S1105). Examples of the selection operation include pressing the chance button 136, pressing any one of the direction keys 139, and the like. If it is determined in step S1105 that there is no selection operation, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S1109, and continues the effect currently being executed (for example, effect A in FIG. 86, effect α) to select effect. The control process ends. If it is determined in step S1105 that the selection operation has been performed, the first sub control unit 400 proceeds to step S1107, and determines whether it is the production start timing. When it is determined in step S1107 that it is not the production start timing, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S1109, and continues the production currently being executed (for example, production A in FIG. 86, production α) to select production. The control process ends. If it is determined in step S1107 that it is the production start timing, the first sub-control unit 400 moves to step S1111 and performs a process of executing the selected production (for example, production B in FIG. 86, production β) and makes a selection. The production control process ends.

As the effect start timing in step S1107, for example, the lapse of a prescribed time, the end of the delay time until the reflection of the selection result, and the timing of the start of the special figure variation game can be mentioned. Executing the selected effect in step S1111 includes transmitting a command relating to the selected effect to each control unit (image, sound, etc.).

FIG. 86 shows a temporal operation of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 1 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis of FIG. 86 shows a time series, and time passes from left to right. In the upper part of FIG. 86, t0 to t6 indicate various operations or time points such as start and end of effects. The middle part of FIG. 86 shows execution states of various effects by the effect means. The first effect means of this example includes a decorative pattern display device 208, and the second effect means includes a speaker 120. The lower part shows the operating means. The operation means of this example includes a chance button 136, for example.

First, at the time point t0, the first effect means is executing the effect A (for example, included in the first effect) or starts the effect A at the time point t0, and at the time point t0, the second effect. It is assumed that the rendering means is executing the rendering α (for example, included in the first rendering) or starts the rendering α from time t0. Further, at the time point t0, the operation means is during a selectable period during which the player can select an effect by pressing the chance button 136 or at the start point of the period. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t0, the effect A ends in the first effect means and the effect B (for example, included in the second effect). Will be started. In the second effect means, the effect α is finished and the effect β (for example, included in the second effect) is started. In addition, on the condition that the chance button 136 is pressed by the operating means, the selectable period ends at time t1 and the non-selectable period in which production selection is impossible is started. The non-selectable period is a period in which the detection result of the sensor is not accepted even if the selection operation is performed. The non-selectable period is a predetermined T seconds.

Even if the player depresses the chance button 136 at the time t2 during the non-selectable period, the selection is not accepted, so that the effects of both the first effect means and the second effect means are not changed.

The operation means enters the selectable period again from the time t3 onward when the non-selectable period ends after a lapse of a predetermined T seconds. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time t4 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t3, the effect B is finished and the effect C is started in the first effect means. In the second effect means, effect β is finished and effect γ is started. Further, the operation means ends the selectable period at time t4 and starts the selectable period in which the effect selection is impossible. The non-selectable period is a predetermined T seconds.

Even if the player presses the chance button 136 during the non-selectable period, the selection is not accepted, so that the effects of both the first effect means and the second effect means are not changed.

From the time point t5 when the non-selectable period ends, the operation means again enters the selectable period. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time t6 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t5, the effect C is finished and the effect D is started in the first effect means. In the second effect means, effect γ ends and effect δ starts.

According to the present embodiment, the operation result of the selection means is not accepted (invalid) for T seconds after the selected effect starts, so that the player cannot select the effect. Since the player must be allowed to see the selected effect for a certain period of time, it may be possible to prevent an unintended change of the effect due to an erroneous operation.

87 and 88 show selection effects executed by the first effect means and the second effect means of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment. 87(a) to (d) and FIG. 88(a) show the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first effect means. 87(A) to (D) and FIG. 88(A) schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second effect means. In each figure, (a) and (A), (b) and (B), (c) and (C), and (d) and (D) show the effects of the same period.

FIG. 87(a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t0 shown in FIG. 86. At the time t0, the special figure variation game is being executed, and in the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, the decorations 0 to 9 are sequentially moved from top to bottom in each of the left, middle and right decorative pattern display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. The decorative pattern is variably displayed on the image (indicated by a downward arrow in the drawing). At the lower right of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, a selection effect display area 800 is provided in the shape of a horizontally long rectangle, for example. In the selection effect display area 800, an effect A is displayed in which a character string "M1: may be there..." is displayed. In the selection effect in this example, the song name of the song played from the speaker 120 is displayed in characters. As shown in FIG. 87(A), at time t0, an effect α is executed in which a music piece 810 having a music title “may be there...” is played from the speaker 120.

FIG. 87(b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t1 shown in FIG. 86. As described with reference to FIG. 86, the time point t1 is the time point when the player presses the chance button 136. At the time t1, the special figure variation game is continuously executed, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b and 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the selection effect display area 800 at the lower right of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect A that displays the character string "M1: may be there..." ends at time t1 and "M2: The effect B for displaying the character string "Kiseki no Universe" is started. The character string “M2: Space of Kiseki” in the effect B indicates the title of the music played from the speaker 120. Also, at time t1, the production α in which the song 810 "May be there..." is played on the speaker 120, and the song title is "Kiseki no Universe" as shown in FIG. 87(B). The production β in which the song 810 flows is started. The selectable period of the operating means ends at time t1, and a selectable period of T seconds in which no effect selection is possible even if the chance button 136 is pressed is started.

FIG. 87(c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t2 shown in FIG. 86. At the time t2, the special figure variation game is continuously executed, and the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. As described with reference to FIG. 86, the time point t2 is within the non-selectable period since T seconds have not elapsed from the time point t1. Therefore, even if the player presses the chance button 136 at the time point t2, the processing by the pressing is not performed. It is invalidated and the production is not changed. Therefore, at the time point t2, in the selection effect display area 800, the effect B for displaying the character string "M2: Space of Kiseki" is continued. Further, as shown in FIG. 87(C), at the time point t2, the presentation β in which the song 810 with the song title “Space of Kiseki” is played is continued from the speaker 120.

FIG. 87(d) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t4 shown in FIG. 86. At the time t4, the special figure variation game is continuously executed, and the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. As described with reference to FIG. 86, the time point t4 is within the selectable period started at the time point t3, and therefore, when the player presses the chance button 136, in the selection effect display area 800, at the time point t4, “M2: flicker” is displayed. The effect B for displaying the character string "universe" is ended, and the effect C for displaying the character string "M3: Your Piece" is started. The effect C displays a character string of the song name of the song that is played from the speaker 120, "M3: Kimi no Kakera." Also, at time t4, the effect β of playing the song 810 of “Kiseki no Universe” ends on the speaker 120, and as shown in FIG. 87(C), the effect γ of playing the song 810 of “Kimi no Kakera”. Is started. In the operation means, the selectable period ends at time t4, and the selectable period of T seconds in which no effect selection is possible even if the chance button 136 is pressed is started.

FIG. 88(a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at time t6 shown in FIG. 86. At the time t6, the special figure variation game is continuously executed, and the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b and 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. As described with reference to FIG. 86, the time point t6 is within the selectable period started at the time point t5, so when the player presses the chance button 136, in the selection effect display area 800, at the time point t6, “M3: your The effect C for displaying the character string "Chakera" is ended, and the effect D for displaying the character string "M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!" is started. The effect D displays a character string of the song name of the song played from the speaker 120, "M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!". Also, at time t6, the effect γ in which the song 810 of “Kimi no Kakera” is played on the speaker 120 ends, and as shown in FIG. 88(A), the song 810 with the song name “Mega! Flowing effect δ is started. The selectable period of the operating means ends at time t6, and a non-selectable period of T seconds in which no effect selection is possible even if the chance button 136 is pressed is started.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes, for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a speaker 120 as an effect producing means capable of executing an effect, and an effect changing means capable of changing the effect at least, for example, a first sub-control unit. The effect control process by 400 ((step S409) and the sound control process (step S415)) are provided, and a chance button 136 is provided as an operation means that can be operated by the player, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is the first. Of at least the effect (for example, effect A) and the second effect (for example, effect B) can be executed, and the first sub-control unit 400 starts from the first effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied. As the change control that can be changed at least to the second effect, for example, step S1107 of the selection effect control process shown in FIG. 85 executes the effect selected in step S1111 in the case of Yes, and the predetermined condition is the first condition. At least when the player operates the operation means during execution of the effect (for example, pressing the chance button 136), and the effect changing means is for a predetermined period after the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, It is characterized by not accepting the operation of the operation means by the player for (T seconds).

According to the pachinko machine 100, since the effect selection is not accepted (invalidated) by the operation means for a predetermined period after the selected effect is started, the player cannot select the effect. As a result, the player must be allowed to view the selected effect for a certain period of time, and thus it may be possible to prevent an unintended change of the effect due to an erroneous operation.

Although a character string is displayed in the selection effect display area of this embodiment, an image may be displayed. Further, the selection effect display area may be a combination of an image and a character string, only an image, only a character string, or the like. The same applies to the selection effect display areas shown in the second and subsequent embodiments.

The operation means may be something other than the chance button, and may be any operation means that can be operated by the player, such as a handle or a direction key. The same applies to the operating means shown in the second and subsequent embodiments.

FIG. 89 shows a temporal operation of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 2 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis of FIG. 89 shows a time series, and time passes from left to right. In the upper part of FIG. 89, t0 to t6 indicate various operations or the time points such as the start and end of effects. The middle part of FIG. 89 shows execution states of various effects by the effecting means. The first effect means of this example includes a decorative pattern display device 208, and the second effect means includes a speaker 120. The lower part shows the operating means. The operation means of this example includes a chance button 136, for example.

First, at the time point t0, the first effect means is executing the effect A (for example, included in the first effect) or starts the effect A at the time point t0, and at the time point t0, the second effect. It is assumed that the rendering means is executing the rendering α (for example, included in the second rendering) or starts the rendering α from time t0. Further, at the time point t0, the operation means is during a selectable period during which the player can select an effect by pressing the chance button 136 or at the start point of the period. In this embodiment, effect selection is always possible. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the operating means at a time point t1 when a certain time has elapsed from the time point t0, at the time point t3, which is T seconds after the time point t1, the first effect means ends the effect A and the effect B( For example, it is included in the third effect) is started. In the second effect means, the effect α is finished and the effect β (for example, included in the fourth effect) is started. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the delay time of T seconds elapses from the selection of the effect by pressing the chance button 136, the selected effect is reflected in the first and second effect means, and the first effect is generated. Is switched to the third effect, and similarly, the second effect is switched to the fourth effect.

Further, when the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at time t2 during the delay time of T seconds, at time t4 after T seconds from time t2, the effect B is finished and effect C by the first effect means. Is started. In the second effect means, effect β is finished and effect γ is started. In this example, when there is another effect selection operation during the delay period, the delay periods are made to overlap, but the next delay period is started after the previously started delay period is finished. You may

When the player presses the chance button 136 of the operating means at a time point t5 when a certain time has elapsed from the time point t4, the effect C ends and the effect D is produced by the first effect means at a time point t6 which is T seconds after the time point t5. Be started. In the second effect means, effect γ ends and effect δ starts.

According to the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a feeling of strangeness by reflecting the result of the change after some time has passed, and to keep the player's attention until the changed effect is started. Sometimes you can. If the changed result is immediately reflected in the effect, the effect becomes monotonous, but by performing the effect using the time lag as described above, it is possible to create variations in the effect, and the player It may be possible to keep you tired.

90 and 91 show the selection effects executed by the first effect means and the second effect means of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment. 90(a) to (d) and FIGS. 91(a) to (c) show the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first effect means. 90(A) to (D) and 91(A) to (C) schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second effect means. In each figure, (a) and (A), (b) and (B), (c) and (C), and (d) and (D) show the effects of the same period.

FIG. 90(a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t0 shown in FIG. 89. At the time t0, the special figure variation game is being executed, and in the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, the decorations 0 to 9 are sequentially moved from top to bottom in each of the left, middle and right decorative pattern display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. The decorative pattern is variably displayed on the image (indicated by a downward arrow in the drawing). At the lower right of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, a selection effect display area 800 is provided in the shape of a horizontally long rectangle, for example. In the selection effect display area 800, an effect A is displayed in which a character string "M1: may be there..." is displayed. In the selection effect in this example, the song name of the song played from the speaker 120 is displayed in characters. As shown in FIG. 90(A), at time point t0, an effect α in which a music piece 810 having a music title “may be there...” is played from the speaker 120 is executed.

FIG. 90(b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t1 shown in FIG. 89. As described with reference to FIG. 89, the time point t1 is the time point when the player presses the chance button 136. At the time t1, the special figure variation game is continuously executed, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b and 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, even if the player intends to change the effect and depresses the chance button 136, the effect is not changed until the predetermined delay time T seconds elapses. Therefore, in the selection effect display area 800 at the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect A for displaying the character string "M1: may be there..." at time t1 continues. Further, as shown in FIG. 90(B), at time point t1, the production α in which the song 810 “May be there...” is played on the speaker 120 continues.

FIG. 90C shows the effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t2 shown in FIG. 89. As described with reference to FIG. 89, the time point t2 is the time point when the player presses the chance button 136. At the time t2, the special figure variation game is continuously executed, and the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, even if the player intends to change the effect and presses the chance button 136, the effect is not changed because the predetermined delay time is in effect. Therefore, in the selection effect display area 800 at the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect A for displaying the character string "M1: may be there..." at time t1 continues. Further, as shown in FIG. 90(C), at time point t1, the production α in which the song 810 “May be there...” flows through the speaker 120 continues.

FIG. 90(d) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t3 shown in FIG. 89. Time point t3 is a time point when a predetermined delay time T seconds has elapsed from the time point t1 when the player first pressed the chance button 136. At the time t3, the special figure variation game is continuously executed, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b and 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the time point t3, in the selected effect display area 800, the effect A that displays the character string “M1: may be there...” ends, and the effect B that displays the character string “M2: Universe of Kiseki” is displayed. Be started. The effect B displays the character string of the song name of the song “M2: Space of Kiseki” that flows from the speaker 120. Also, at time t3, the production α in which the song 810 “M1: May be there...” is played on the speaker 120 ends, and as shown in FIG. 90D, the song title is “The universe of miracle” The performance β in which the song 810 of “” is played is started.

FIG. 91(a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t4 shown in FIG. 89. Time point t4 is a time point when a predetermined delay time T seconds has elapsed from the time point t2 when the player pressed the chance button 136 subsequent to the time point t1. At the time t4, the special figure variation game is continuously executed, and the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the time point t4, the effect B that displays the character string "M2: Universe of Kiseki" ends in the selected effect display area 800, and the effect C that displays the character string "M3: Your Piece" starts. The effect C displays the character string of the song name of the song “M3: Kimi no Kakera” that flows from the speaker 120. Also, at time t4, the effect β of the song 810 of “M2: Space of Kiseki” is finished on the speaker 120, and the song 810 of “Kimi no Kakera” is played, as shown in FIG. 91(A). The effect γ is started.

FIG. 91(b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at time t5 shown in FIG. 89. As described with reference to FIG. 89, the time point t5 is the time when the player presses the chance button 136. At the time t5, the special figure variation game is continuously executed, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, even if the player intends to change the effect and depresses the chance button 136, the effect is not changed until the predetermined delay time T seconds elapses. Therefore, in the selection effect display area 800 at the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect C of displaying the character string "M3: Kimi no Kakera" continues at time t5. Further, as shown in FIG. 91(B), at time t5, the effect γ in which the song 810 of “Kimi no Kakera” 810 flows through the speaker 120 continues.

FIG. 91(c) shows the effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t6 shown in FIG. 89. Time point t6 is a time point when a predetermined delay time T seconds has elapsed from the time point t5 when the player pressed the chance button 136. At the time t6, the special figure variation game is continuously executed, and the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b and 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. At time t6, in the selected effect display area 800, the effect C that displays the character string “M3: Kimi no Kakera” ends, and the effect D that displays the character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” starts. .. The effect D displays the character string of the song name of the song “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” that flows from the speaker 120. Also, at time t6, the effect γ in which the song 810 “Kimi no Kakera” 810 is played on the speaker 120 ends, and as shown in FIG. 91C, the song 810 with the song name “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Flowing effect δ is started.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes, for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a speaker 120 as an effect producing means capable of executing an effect, and an effect changing means capable of changing the effect at least, for example, a first sub-control unit. The decorative pattern display device 208 is provided with the effect control process ((step S409) and the sound control process (step S415)) by 400, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has the first effect (for example, effect A) and the third effect (for example, effect). B) can be executed at least, the speaker 120 can execute at least the second effect (for example, effect α) and the fourth effect (for example, effect β), and the first sub control unit 400 can As a first change control capable of at least changing from the first effect to the third effect when one condition is satisfied (for example, operation by the operation means), for example, a selection effect control process shown in FIG. 85. Step S1107 of Yes is to execute the effect selected in Step S1111, and the first sub-control unit 400 sets the second condition when the second condition is satisfied (for example, operation by the operation unit). As the second change control capable of at least changing from the effect to the fourth effect, for example, step S1107 of the selection effect control process shown in FIG. 85 is to execute the effect selected in step S1111 with Yes, and The first change control is a control executed after a first time has elapsed (for example, T seconds) after the first condition is satisfied, and the second change control is the second condition. The control is executed after the second time has elapsed (for example, after T seconds) since the establishment of the above condition.

According to the above pachinko machine 100, the first effect is changed to the third effect after the first time has elapsed, and the second effect is changed to the fourth effect after the second time has elapsed. Since it is possible to perform a variety of effects, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

More specifically, it is possible to give the player a feeling of strangeness by reflecting the result of the change after some time has passed, and to keep the player's attention until the changed effect is started. There are cases. If the changed result is immediately reflected in the effect, the effect becomes monotonous, but by performing the effect using the time lag as described above, it is possible to create variations in the effect, and the player It may be possible to keep you tired.

In the pachinko machine 100, the first condition is met at least when the second condition is met. According to the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, since the timings when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied overlap each other, it may be possible to draw more attention to the effect. In addition, it may be possible to increase the variation of production. In addition, there are cases in which variations can be given to the execution timing of the effects, even though the changing conditions of the effects are satisfied at substantially the same timing.

FIG. 92 shows a temporal operation of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 3 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis of FIG. 92 shows a time series, and time passes from left to right. In the upper part of FIG. 92, t0 to t6 indicate various operations or the time points such as the start and end of effects. The middle part of FIG. 92 shows execution states of various effects by the effecting means. The first effect means of this example includes a decorative pattern display device 208, and the second effect means includes a speaker 120. The lower part shows the operating means. The operation means of this example includes a chance button 136, for example.

First, at the time point t0, the first effect means is executing the effect A (for example, included in the first effect) or starts the effect A at the time point t0, and at the time point t0, the second effect. It is assumed that the rendering means is executing the rendering α (for example, included in the second rendering) or starts the rendering α from time t0. Further, at the time point t0, the operation means is during a selectable period during which the player can select an effect by pressing the chance button 136 or at the start point of the period. In this embodiment, effect selection is always possible. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the operating means at a time point t1 when a certain time has elapsed from the time point t0, the effect A ends and the effect B (for example, included in the third effect) in the first effect means from the time point t1. Will be started). On the other hand, in the second effect means, effect α is finished and effect β (for example, included in the fourth effect) is started at time t3 T seconds after time t1. As described above, in the present embodiment, the selection result is reflected in the first effect means at the same time as the effect selection by pressing the chance button 136 (first time is zero), and the first effect is changed to the third effect. At the time when a delay time of T seconds (the second time is T seconds) has passed since the effect was selected by pressing the chance button 136, the selected effect is reflected in the second effect means, and the second effect is generated. To the 4th production.

Further, when the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at the time point t2 during the delay time of T seconds in the second effect means, at the time point t2, the effect B is ended and the effect C is changed by the first effect means. Be started. On the other hand, the second effect means continues effect β. At time t4, T seconds after the time t2, the effect β is finished and the effect γ is started in the second effect means. In this example, when there is another effect selection operation during the delay period, the delay periods are made to overlap, but the next delay period is started after the previously started delay period is finished. You may

When the player presses the chance button 136 of the operating means at a time point t5 when a certain time has elapsed from the time point t4, at the time point t5, the effect C is finished and the effect D is started in the first effect means. On the other hand, the second effect means continues effect β. At time t6, which is T seconds after the time t5, the effect γ ends and the effect δ starts in the second effect means.

In the present embodiment, the first time is zero and is different from the second time T seconds. According to the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the first time and the second time are different, so that it may be possible to draw more attention to the effect. In addition, it may be possible to increase the variation of production. Furthermore, it may be possible to give variations to the execution timing of the effect.

93 and 94 show selection effects executed by the first effect means and the second effect means of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment. 93(a) to (d) and FIGS. 94(a) to (c) show the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first effect means. 93(A) to (D) and FIGS. 94(A) to (C) schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second rendering means. In each figure, (a) and (A), (b) and (B), (c) and (C), and (d) and (D) show the effects of the same period.

FIG. 93(a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time t0 shown in FIG. At the time t0, the special figure variation game is being executed, and in the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, the decorations 0 to 9 are sequentially moved from top to bottom in each of the left, middle and right decorative pattern display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. The decorative pattern is variably displayed on the image (indicated by a downward arrow in the drawing). At the lower right of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, a selection effect display area 800 is provided in the shape of a horizontally long rectangle, for example. In the selection effect display area 800, an effect A is displayed in which a character string "M1: may be there..." is displayed. In the selection effect in this example, the song name of the song played from the speaker 120 is displayed in characters. As shown in FIG. 93(A), at time t0, an effect α is executed in which a song 810 having a song title “may be there...” is played from the speaker 120.

FIG. 93(b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t1 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 92, the time point t1 is the time point when the player presses the chance button 136. At the time t1, the special figure variation game is continuously executed, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b and 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, when the player intends to change the effect and depresses the chance button 136 at time t1, a character string "M1: may be there..." is displayed in the selected effect display area 800 at time t1. The effect A to be performed is finished and the effect B for displaying the character string "M2: Space of Kiseki" is started. On the other hand, the second effect means continues the effect α.

FIG. 93C shows the effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time t2 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 92, the time point t2 is the time point when the player presses the chance button 136. At the time t2, the special figure variation game is continuously executed, and the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, when the player intends to change the effect and depresses the chance button 136, the effect is immediately changed from the effect B to the effect C in the first effect means. At time point t2, the effect B that displays the character string “M2: Space of Kiseki” ends in the selected effect display area 800, and the effect C that displays the character string “M3: Your Piece” starts. On the other hand, the second effect means does not change the effect because it is within the predetermined delay time. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 93(C), at time point t1, the production α in which the song 810 “May be there...” flows through the speaker 120 continues.

FIG. 93(d) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t3 shown in FIG. Time point t3 is a time point when a predetermined delay time T seconds has elapsed from the time point t1 when the player first pressed the chance button 136. At the time t3, the special figure variation game is continuously executed, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b and 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the time point t3, the effect C is continued in the selected effect display area 800. Further, at time t3, the production α in which the song 810 of “M1: may be there...” is played on the speaker 120, and the song title is “Miscellaneous Universe” as shown in FIG. 93(D). The production β in which the song 810 of “” is played is started.

FIG. 94(a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t4 shown in FIG. Time point t4 is a time point when a predetermined delay time T seconds has elapsed from the time point t2 when the player pressed the chance button 136 subsequent to the time point t1. At the time t4, the special figure variation game is continuously executed, and the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. At time t4, the effect C continues in the selected effect display area 800. Also, at time t4, the effect β of playing the song 810 of “Kiseki no Universe” ends on the speaker 120, and as shown in FIG. 94A, the effect γ of playing the song 810 of song name “Kimi no Kakera”. Is started.

FIG. 94(b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t5 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 92, the time point t5 is the time when the player presses the chance button 136. At the time t5, the special figure variation game is continuously executed, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, when the player intends to change the effect and depresses the chance button 136 at time t5, the effect C that displays the character string "M3: Your Piece" in the selected effect display area 800 ends at time t5. Then, the effect D for displaying the character string "M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!" is started. On the other hand, the second effect means continues the effect γ.

FIG. 94(c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t6 shown in FIG. Time point t6 is a time point when a predetermined delay time T seconds has elapsed from the time point t5 when the player pressed the chance button 136. At the time t6, the special figure variation game is continuously executed, and the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b and 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. At time t6, the effect D continues in the selected effect display area 800. Also, at time t6, the effect γ in which the song 810 “Kimi no Kakera” 810 is played on the speaker 120 ends, and as shown in FIG. 94C, the song 810 with the song name “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Flowing effect δ is started.

Note that the effect may not be changed even if the chance button 136 is pressed while the special figure variation game is stopped. For example, if the chance button 136 is pressed by the time the special figure variation game ends and the next special figure variation game starts, the selection operation may be accepted, or the result of the selection operation may not be accepted. You may do it. The result of the selection operation may not be accepted even while the demo screen is being executed. Further, when the state in which the special figure variation game is stopped is included in the period until the selection result is reflected, the result of the selection operation may not be accepted. In addition, the result of the selection operation may not be accepted until the next special figure variation game is started after the end of the special figure variation game and only when there is a hold.

Further, even if the special figure is changing, the selection operation may not be accepted during a specific period (for example, when one of the plurality of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed).

Further, the delay in this embodiment may include the time from the operation of the operation means to the acceptance. For example, it may include the time from the sensor detection until the control command is sent to the sub control unit 400.

Note that the modified examples relating to the reception of the result of these selection operations can be applied to other embodiments.

FIG. 95 shows a temporal operation of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 4 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis of FIG. 95 represents a time series, and time elapses from left to right. In the upper part of FIG. 95, t0 to t5 indicate various operations or the time points such as the start and end of effects. The middle part of FIG. 95 shows the execution state of various effects by the effect means. The first effect means of this example includes a decorative pattern display device 208, and the second effect means includes a speaker 120. The lower part shows the operating means. The operation means of this example includes a chance button 136, for example.

First, at time t0, the first effect means is performing effect A or has started effect A at time t0, and at time t0, the second effect means causes effect α (for example, included in the first effect). It is assumed that the performance α is started from time t0. Further, at the time point t0, the operation means is during a selectable period during which the player can select an effect by pressing the chance button 136 or at the start point of the period. In this embodiment, the effect selection is always possible during the predetermined period. For example, in the first round of the big hit game, the effect selection by the operation means may be always enabled. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the operating means at a time point t1 when a certain time has elapsed from the time point t0, the effect A is finished and the effect B is started in the first effect means from the time point t1. On the other hand, in the second effect means, the effect is changed on condition that the waiting time of T seconds has elapsed from the time when the player operated the operating means, and the effect is changed until the waiting time elapses. Is not changed. Therefore, the effect α is continued at the time point t1.

Further, when the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at the time t2 during the standby time of T seconds in the second effect means, effect B is ended and effect C is started in the first effect means. On the other hand, since the time T1 from the time point t1 to the time point t2 is shorter than the standby time T, the effect α is continued without changing the effect at the time point t2 by the second effect means.

Further, by pressing the chance button 136 at time t2, the measurement of the waiting time started by the first sub-control unit 400 by pressing the previous opportunity button 136 is reset, and the waiting time is newly set from time t2. It

Further, when the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at the time point t3 during the standby time of T seconds in the second effect means, effect C is ended and effect D is started in the first effect means. On the other hand, the time T2 from the time point t2 to the time point t3 is shorter than the waiting time T, so at the time point t3, the effect α is continued without changing the effect by the second effect means.

Further, by pressing the chance button 136 at the time point t3, the measurement of the waiting time started by the previous pressing of the chance button 136 is reset, and the waiting time is newly set from the time point t3.

At a time point t4 when the waiting time T seconds has elapsed from the time point t3, the effect α is finished and the effect δ (for example, included in the second effect) is started in the second effect means. On the other hand, the effect D is continued in the first effect means.

In the present embodiment, the first effect means reflects the selected effect immediately, and the second effect means does not reflect the wait time after the selection. That is, if the predetermined period of time T seconds has not elapsed after the selection, the selected effect is not started by the second effect means, so that it is possible to prevent the annoyance caused by starting the effect that is changed immediately. Sometimes you can.

Time point t5 indicates the end time point of the selectable period during which the effect can be selected by the operating means. For example, a case where the first round of the big hit game is a selectable period but the second round is a non-selectable period is included. Hereinafter, a case where the time point t5 is the start time point of the second round of the big hit game will be described. When the time T3 from the time point t3 when the player finally presses the chance button 136 to the start time point t5 of the second round is longer than the waiting time T from the time point t3, the effect δ in the second effect means is time point t4. To time t5, and also in the second round from time t5. The first effect means executes a new effect D'from time t5. When the time T3 from the time t3 when the player finally presses the chance button 136 to the start time t5 of the second round is shorter than the waiting time T from the time t3, the effect by the second effect means is not changed.

96 and 97 show selection effects executed by the first effect means and the second effect means of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment. 96(a) to (d) and FIGS. 97(a) to (d) show the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first effect means. 96(A) to (D) and FIGS. 97(A) to (D) schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second rendering means. In each figure, (a) and (A), (b) and (B), (c) and (C), and (d) and (D) show the effects of the same period.

FIG. 96(a) shows an effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 before the time point t0 shown in FIG. Before the time t0, the result of the special figure variation game is a big hit, the big hit game start effect is executed, and the "big hit" display is performed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 96(A), before the time point t0, an effect in which a big hit start BGM (background music) song 810 is played from the speaker 120 is executed.

FIG. 96(b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t0 shown in FIG. 95. At time t0, for example, the effect in the 1R (first round) when the 15R jackpot game is started is shown. The number of rounds is displayed as “1R” in the upper right area of the decorative pattern display device 208. A selection effect is executed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A selection screen for effect selection is displayed, and an effect list is displayed. For example, “M1: May be there...” showing the song code and song title as the production 1, “M2: Space of Kiseki” showing the song code and song title as the production 2, and song code as the production 3 "M3: Kimi no Kakera" showing the song title, "M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!" showing the song code and song title as production 4, and "M5: Onsen" showing the song code and song title as production 5. "Hormones" are sequentially displayed from the upper left to the lower right of the display area. Further, an explanation screen for the player is displayed with a message "Please select a song" along with an image simulating the chance button 136 at the lower left (it may be a notification prompting selection of a performance (for example, song)) and a downward arrow. Is displayed. The selection screen and the explanation screen are displayed as an effect for the first round. The selection screen and the explanation screen are displayed in the state shown in FIG. 96(a) and during the big hit round (from the effect of the first round to the end of the final round (15R, 16R, 8R, 2R in this embodiment)), For example, it may be displayed by the player pressing the chance button 136.

In this state, the effect currently selected on the selection screen is displayed with a thick frame. As shown in FIG. 96(b), the effect 1 is selected on the selection screen at time t0. Further, in this embodiment, when the chance button 136 is pressed once, the selected effect frame is shifted downward by one. In this example, at the time point t0 on the selection screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect frame displaying the character string "M1: may be there..." is displayed thick, and the other effect frames are normal. The effect A to be displayed is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 96(B), at time point t0, an effect α in which a song 810 having a song title “may be there” is played from the speaker 120 is executed. That is, the effect α is executed simultaneously with the effect A. Note that the effect α may be executed after the effect A is executed, or may be executed before the effect A is executed.

FIG. 96(c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t1 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 95, the time point t1 is the time point when the player presses the chance button 136. At time t1, the 1R of the big hit game continues. In this example, when the player intends to change the production and presses the chance button 136 at time t1, the production of displaying the character string "M2: Universe of Kiseki" on the selection screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 at time t1. The effect B in which the frame is displayed thick and the other effect frames are normally displayed is executed. On the other hand, in the speaker 120, the effect is changed on condition that the waiting time of T seconds has elapsed from the time when the player operated the operating means, and therefore the effect is not changed until the waiting time elapses. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 96(C), the effect α is continued at the time point t1.

FIG. 96(d) shows the effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t2 shown in FIG. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the operating means at a time point t2 during the standby time of T seconds in the speaker 120 of the second effect means, at the time point t2, "M3: your The effect C in which the effect frame that displays the character string "Blade" is displayed in bold and the other effect frames are normally displayed is executed. On the other hand, the time T1 (for example, T1=0.5 seconds) from the time point t1 to the time point t2 is shorter than the waiting time T (for example, T=1 second); therefore, as shown in FIG. At time t2, the effect α is continued without changing the effect on the speaker 120.

Further, by pressing the chance button 136 at the time point t2, the measurement of the waiting time started by the previous pressing of the chance button 136 is reset, and the waiting time T (=1 second) is newly set from the time point t2. ..

FIG. 97(a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t3 shown in FIG. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the operating means at time t3 during the standby time of T seconds in the speaker 120, at the time t3 on the selection screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, "M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!" The effect D in which the effect frame displaying the character string is displayed thick and the other effect frames are normally displayed is executed. On the other hand, since the time T2 from the time t2 to the time t3 (for example, T2=0.5 seconds) is shorter than the waiting time T, as shown in FIG. Production α is continued without being performed.

Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed at the time point t3, the measurement of the waiting time started by the previous pressing of the chance button 136 is reset, and the waiting time T (=1 second) is newly set from the time point t3. ..

FIG. 97(b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t4 shown in FIG. At a time point t4 when the waiting time T seconds has elapsed from the time point t3, the speaker 120 finishes the effect α in which the music piece 810 whose music title is “may be there...” ends, and as shown in FIG. 97(B). Then, the production δ in which the song 810 with the song name “Mega! Giga! Summer!” is played is started. On the other hand, the effect D is continued on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 97(c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t5 shown in FIG. Time point t5 indicates the start time point of the second round of the big hit game. On the decorative symbol display device 208, a new effect D′ is executed from time t5. At time point t5, on the selection screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect frame displaying the character string “M4: Mega! Giga! The effect D'in which the display contrast of the other effect frames is reduced is executed with respect to the effect frame. This allows the player to know that the production including the performance of the song title "Mega! Giga! Summer!" has been decided.

When the effect D'is executed for a predetermined period from the time point t5, as shown in FIG. 97(d), the effect of the image associated with the song "Mega! Giga! Summer!" is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. Displayed in the area. In addition, in this example, since the time T3 from the time t3 when the player last pressed the chance button 136 to the start time t5 of the second round is longer than the waiting time T from the time t3, the effect δ starts from the time t4. It is executed until t5, and as shown in FIGS. 97C and 97D, the effect δ is further executed in the second round from time t5. The effect δ may be such that the music continues to flow at time t5 from the time before, or may start anew from the beginning of the music at time t5. Further, the effect D′ may be a notification (or display) indicating that the execution of the effect D has been confirmed.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes, for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a speaker 120 as an effect producing means capable of executing an effect, and an effect changing means capable of changing the effect at least, for example, a first sub-control unit. The effect control process (step S409) and the sound control process (step S415) by 400 are provided, and a chance button 136, for example, is provided as an operation means that can be operated by the player, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is the first. At least an effect (for example, effect α) and a second effect (for example, effect δ) can be executed, and the first sub control unit 400 changes the first effect to the first effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied. As change control capable of changing at least the second effect, for example, step S1107 of the selection effect control process shown in FIG. 85 executes the effect selected in step S1111 in the case of Yes, and the predetermined condition is the first condition. It is characterized in that it is established at least when the player operates the operation means during execution of the effect and a predetermined waiting time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the operation.

According to the pachinko machine 100, the first effect means immediately reflects the selected effect, and the second effect means does not reflect the selected effect until T seconds have elapsed after the selection. In other words, if the predetermined effect does not elapse after the selection, the selected effect is not started by the second effect means, so that it is possible to prevent the annoyance caused by starting the selected effect immediately after the selection. There is.

FIG. 98 shows a temporal operation of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 5 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis of FIG. 98 shows a time series, and time elapses from left to right. In the upper part of FIG. 98, t0 to t7 indicate various operations, or the time points at which the effect starts and ends. The middle part of FIG. 98 shows execution states of various effects by the effect means. The first effect means of this example includes a decorative pattern display device 208, and the second effect means includes a speaker 120. The lower part shows the operating means. The operation means of this example includes a chance button 136, for example.

First, at the time point t0, the first effect means is executing the effect A or starts the effect A from the time point t0, and at the time point t0, the second effect means is executing the effect α or from the time point t0. It is assumed that the effect α is started. Further, at the time point t0, the operation means is during a selectable period during which the player can select an effect by pressing the chance button 136 or at the start point of the period. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t0, the effect A is finished and the effect B is started in the first effect means. In the second effect means, effect α is finished and effect β is started.

Time point t2 indicates a time point when a certain amount of time has passed from the time point t1 and the effect L is further started in addition to the effect B in the first effect means. The effect L includes an effect that prompts the player to operate the operation means (press the chance button 136). The operation means used in the effect L is the same as the operation means used in the effect selection. In the operating means, the selectable period ends at time t2 on condition that the production L is started, and the non-selectable period in which production selection is impossible is started. That is, the operation acceptance valid period of the operation means in the effect L using the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) is the non-selectable period of the selected effect. The non-selectable period here is a regulation period in which the reflection of the acceptance result of the operating means is prioritized over the production L over the selection production. The meaning is different from the non-selectable period in the first embodiment. The non-selectable period is a predetermined T seconds. For example, when the player presses the chance button 136 at time t3 during the non-selectable period, the pressing becomes effective for the effect L and does not result in selection of the effect for the first and second effect means. The effects of both the first effect means and the second effect means are not changed. Note that the selectable period may start from immediately after the operation means is operated during the operation acceptance valid period. For example, the selectable period may be set between time t3 and time t4. Further, when the selection operation is performed during the operation reception valid period, the second effect means may reflect the operation result after a certain period as in the second to fourth embodiments.

When the non-selectable period ends after a lapse of a predetermined T seconds, the operation means again enters the selectable period. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at time t4 during the selectable period, the effect B is finished and the effect C is started in the first effect means. In the second effect means, effect β is finished and effect γ is started.

The effect L ends at time t5. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time t6 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t5, the effect C is finished and the effect D is started in the first effect means. In the second effect means, effect γ ends and effect δ starts.

According to this embodiment, since the operation result of the selection means is not accepted (invalid) for T seconds after the start of the effect L different from the selected effect, the player can select the effect. Can not. In some cases, the player can concentrate on the effect L for a certain period of time, which may improve the interest.

99 to 102 show the selection effects executed by the first effect means and the second effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in the fifth embodiment. 99-102 (a)-(d) has shown the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 contained in the 1st production means. 99-102(A)-(D) has shown typically the speaker 120 contained in a 2nd production|generation means. In each figure, (a) and (A), (b) and (B), (c) and (C), and (d) and (D) show the effects of the same period.

FIG. 99(a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t0 shown in FIG. 98. At the time t0, the special figure variation game is being executed, and in the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, the decorations 0 to 9 are sequentially moved from top to bottom in each of the left, middle and right decorative pattern display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. The decorative pattern is variably displayed on the image (indicated by a downward arrow in the drawing). At the lower right of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, a selection effect display area 800 is provided in the shape of a horizontally long rectangle, for example. In the selection effect display area 800, an effect A is displayed in which a character string "M1: may be there..." is displayed. In the selection effect in this example, the song name of the song played from the speaker 120 is displayed in characters. As shown in FIG. 99(A), at time t0, an effect α is performed in which a music piece 810 having a music title “may be there...” is played from the speaker 120.

FIG. 99(b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t1 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 98, the time point t1 is the time point when the player presses the chance button 136. At the time t1, the special figure variation game is continuously executed, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b and 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the selection effect display area 800 at the lower right of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect A that displays the character string "M1: may be there..." ends at time t1 and "M2: The effect B for displaying the character string "Kiseki no Universe" is started. The character string “M2: Space of Kiseki” in the effect B indicates the title of the music played from the speaker 120. Also, at time t1, the production α in which the song 810 "May be there..." is played on the speaker 120, and as shown in FIG. 99(B), the song name is "Kiseki no Universe". The production β in which the song 810 flows is started.

FIG. 99(c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t2 shown in FIG. 98. As described with reference to FIG. 98, the time point t2 is the time point when a certain time has elapsed from the time point t1 and the effect L is further started in addition to the effect B on the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 99(c), in the effect L, for example, an image is displayed so as to partially hide the left middle right decorative pattern display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. The image has, for example, a character image 903 showing a samurai on the left side, and an explanation image 901 simulating a chance button 136 and an indicator showing the operation acceptance period of the button on the right side thereof. The display indicating the operation acceptance period may be other than the gauge, and may be, for example, a numerical value display or a display based on the number of images such as characters. The chance button 136 is shared by the operation means used for the effect L and the operation means used for the effect selection. As shown in FIG. 99C, the effect β is continued in the speaker 120.

FIG. 99(d) exemplifies a state in which the effect L is being executed. The black bar of the indicator in the explanation image 901 is shortened, which shows that the operation acceptance period is shortened. The special figure variation game continues, and the effect B continues in the selected effect display area 800. As shown in FIG. 99(D), the effect β continues in the speaker 120.

FIG. 100(a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at time t3 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 98, the time point t3 is the time when the player presses the chance button 136. At the time t3, the special figure variation game is continuously executed, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b and 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the time point t3 is during the non-selectable period, the pressing of the chance button 136 is not accepted, and in the selection effect display area 800, the effect B displaying the character string “M2: Space of Kiseki” continues. On the other hand, since the effect L is during the operation acceptance period, the press of the chance button 136 is accepted, and the effect of displaying the character “Chance?” on the explanation image 901 is executed. As shown in FIG. 100(A), in the speaker 120, the effect β in which the song 810 with the song title “Space of Kiseki” flows is continued.

FIG. 100(b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t4 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 98, the time point t4 is the time when the player presses the chance button 136. At the time t4, the special figure variation game is continuously executed, and the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. At time point t4, the operation acceptance period in the effect L has already ended and it is in the selectable period. Therefore, by pressing the chance button 136, the effect B displaying the character string “M2: Space of Kiseki” ends, and “M3 : The effect C that displays the character string "Your Piece" is started. Also, at time t4, the effect β of playing the song 810 of “Kiseki no Universe” on the speaker 120 ends, and as shown in FIG. 100B, the effect γ of playing the song 810 of the song name “Kimi no Kakera”. Is started. On the other hand, in the effect L, an effect of giving advance notice of the result of the special figure variation game is performed. The advance notice is given in a form determined based on a predetermined reliability. In this example, an effect is displayed in which, for example, a character image 905 showing a princess is displayed on the right side of the explanation image 901 and the character image 903, and the characters "Good luck!!" are displayed on the left side of the character image 905. The explanation images 901 and 907 and the character images 903 and 905 are in a state where all the left middle decorative design display areas 208a and 208b and a part of the right decorative design display area 208c are hidden. On the other hand, the selective effect display area is not hidden. Note that part or all of the selected effect display area may be hidden by the effect L (the explanation images 901 and 907 and the character images 903 and 905).

FIG. 100(c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t5 shown in FIG. As described using FIG. 98, the effect L ends at time t5, the character images 903 and 905 and the explanation images 901 and 907 disappear from the display area, and the state where the special figure variation game continues is visually recognized. .. The effect C is continued in the selected effect display area 800. Further, the effect γ is continued as shown in FIG. 100(C).

When the operation means is not operated within T seconds from the start of execution of the effect L (t2), the character images 903 and 905 and the explanation images 901 and 907 disappear from the display area as in the case of FIG. 100C. You may do it. Also, the character image 903 and the explanation image 901 may be displayed as in the case of FIG. 100(a), and the character images 903, 905 and the explanation images 901, 907 may be displayed as in the case of FIG. 100(b). May be.

Further, the explanation image may be an effect (notification, display) that suggests the reliability of the variation, or a look-ahead effect (notification, display) that suggests the reliability of the variation after the variation. Good.

FIG. 100(d) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at time t6 shown in FIG. 98. At the time t6, the special figure variation game is continuously executed, and the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b and 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. The decoration 2 design is stopped and displayed in the left decorative design display area 208a. As described with reference to FIG. 98, when the player presses the chance button 136 at time t6, in the selected effect display area 800, the effect C that displays the character string “M3: Your Piece” at time t6 ends. Then, the effect D for displaying the character string "M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!" is started. The effect D displays a character string of the song name of the song played from the speaker 120, "M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!". Also, at time t6, the production γ in which the song 810 of “Kimi no Kakera” is played on the speaker 120 ends, and as shown in FIG. 100D, the song 810 with the song name “Mega! Flowing effect δ is started.

FIG. 101(a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at time t7 shown in FIG. At the time t7, the special figure variation game is continuously executed, the left decorative design display area 208a displays the design of decoration 2, the middle decorative design display area 208b displays the design of decoration 5, and the right decorative design display area 208c. Shows the pattern of decoration 0, and they are shaking and fluctuating. In the selected effect display area 800, effect D is continued at time t7. In addition, as shown in FIG. 101(A), the effect δ continues in the speaker 120. It should be noted that the selection and selection may not be changed when the shaking changes. Also, the selection effect may be changeable. In this case, both may be changed, and one (for example, the effect in the first effect means) may be changed and the other (the effect in the second effect means) may be changed with a delay. May be.

FIG. 101(b) shows the effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 after the time t7 shown in FIG. After the time t7, the symbol variation stop display of the special figure fluctuation game is displayed, the symbol of decoration 2 is stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 208a, and the symbol of decoration 5 is stopped and displayed in the middle decorative symbol display area 208b, and right. In the decorative symbol display area 208c, the symbol of decoration 0 is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the special symbol variation game has been missed. In the selected effect display area 800, effect D is continued after time t7. Further, as shown in FIG. 101(B), the effect δ continues on the speaker 120. In addition, when the symbol is determined, the selected effect may not be performed, and may be, for example, a silent state.

101(c) shows another example of the effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t7 shown in FIG. At the time t7, the special figure variation game is continuously executed, the symbols of the decoration 2 are stopped and displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the middle decorative symbol display area 208b is still in the reach state. In the selected effect display area 800, effect D is continued at time t7. Further, as shown in FIG. 101(C), the reach effect in which the BGM for reach is flown is started in the speaker 120. The reach BGM is started after the left and right decorative pattern display areas 208a and 208 are stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the selection may not be changed during the reach. Also, the selection effect may be changeable. Even if the change can be made, one of the effects (for example, the effect by the first effect means) is notified and the other (the effect by the second effect means) is not notified (for example, the reach BGM is changed). The changed BGM may not be heard because it is played. Alternatively, both may be changed, one (for example, the effect in the first effect means) can be changed, and the other (the effect in the second effect means) is changed with a delay. Good. The reach BGM may be started before the left and right decorative symbol display areas 208a and 208 are stopped and displayed, and the reach BGM may be started at the same time when the left and right decorative symbol display areas 208a and 208 are stopped and displayed. Good.

101(d) shows the super reach effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 after time t7 shown in FIG. 98, following FIG. 101(c). In the super reach effect, the decorative symbol variable display is displayed in a relatively small display area 911 at the upper right of the display area. Further, the selection effect display area 800 disappears and the selection effect is not performed. In the large area in the center of the decorative pattern display device 208, the super reach effect image 913 is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 101(D), the effect δ ends and the super-reach BGM starts on the speaker 120. After the super-reach effect image 913 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, the super-reach BGM is started. Note that the selection effect may not be performed during the super reach. In this case, the result of the selection operation may be reflected. The same process as during the reach may be performed. In addition, at least during the symbol change, a fourth symbol (not shown) may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, BGM for super reach may be started before the super-reach effect image 913 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device, and at the same time as the super-reach effect image 913 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device. The reach BGM may be started.

102(a) shows the reach effect in the special figure variation game or the outlier effect in the super reach effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 following FIG. 101(c) or FIG. 101(d). In the left and right decorative symbol display areas 208a and 208c, the symbol of decoration 2 is displayed in a swinging manner, and in the middle decorative symbol display area 208b, the symbol of decoration 3 is displayed in a swinging manner. Further, the selection effect display area 800 disappears and the selection effect is not performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 102(A), in the speaker 120, the reach BGM and the super-reach BGM are finished and are in a silent state (indicated as silence 820 in the figure). After the middle decorative symbol display area is displayed in a shaking state, it is in a silent state. After the middle decorative symbol display area is stopped and displayed, it is in a silent state. It should be noted that, before the middle-decoration symbol display area is shake-displayed, it may be in a silent state, and at the same time that the middle-decoration symbol display area is shake-displayed, it may be in a silent state.

102(b) shows the state in which the deviation is confirmed and displayed as a result of the special figure variation game performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 following FIG. 102(a). The design of decoration 2 is stopped and displayed in the left and right decorative design display areas 208a and 208c, and the design of decoration 3 is stopped and displayed in the middle decorative design display area 208b. Further, the selection effect display area 800 disappears and the selection effect is not performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 102(B), the speaker 120 is in a silent state. After the middle decorative symbol display area is displayed in a shaking state, it is in a silent state. After the middle decorative symbol display area is stopped and displayed, it is in a silent state. It should be noted that, before the middle-decoration symbol display area is shake-displayed, it may be in a silent state, and at the same time that the middle-decoration symbol display area is shake-displayed, it may be in a silent state.

102(c) shows the reach effect in the special figure variation game or the swing effect in the super reach effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 following FIG. 101(c) or FIG. 101(d). The pattern of the decoration 2 is swayingly displayed in each of the left middle right decorative pattern display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c. Further, the selection effect display area 800 disappears and the selection effect is not performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 102(c), the reach BGM and the super reach BGM have ended in the speaker 120 and are in a silent state (indicated as silence 820 in the figure).

102(d) shows a state in which a big hit is confirmed and displayed as a result of the special figure variation game performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 following FIG. 102(c). The design of decoration 2 is stopped and displayed in the left middle right decorative design display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c. Further, the selection effect display area 800 disappears and the selection effect is not performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 102(D), the speaker 120 is in a silent state. Note that the selection effect display area 800 may be displayed even in the states shown in FIGS. 102(a) to 102(d).

FIG. 103 shows the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 6 according to the present embodiment. The game board 200 shown in FIG. 71 has only one liquid crystal display device, and while the liquid crystal display device functions as the decorative pattern display device 208, the game board 200 of this embodiment shown in FIG. The feature is that a plurality of liquid crystals are provided. In the game board 200 shown in FIG. 103, the first liquid crystal display device (main liquid crystal display device) functions as the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second liquid crystal display device (sub liquid crystal display device) functions as the effect display device 915. It is supposed to do. The effect display device 915 is arranged above the decorative symbol display device 208. Although the first liquid crystal display device is larger than the second liquid crystal display device in this example, the sizes of the liquid crystal display regions may be the same or may be opposite. For example, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs various effects including decorative symbol display, fourth symbol, selection effect, error display, etc., and the effect display device 915 performs various effects including hold display and selection effect. The decorative symbol display device 208 may perform a hold display, and the effect display device 915 may perform a decorative symbol, a fourth symbol, an error display, or the like. Further, the effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect on the effect display device 915 may be linked. Further, the effect display device 915 may be provided on the effect movable body 224, and the operation of the effect movable body 224 may be linked with the effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the effect on the effect display device 915. Note that the decorative symbol display device 208 may be provided on the production movable body 224.

On the upper right side of the game board 200 shown in FIG. 103, a lamp 940 having a shape simulating the character string “Yatsushiro” is arranged. The lamp 940 is included in the various lamps 418 shown in FIG. 72, and based on the control by the first sub control unit 400, for example, the color can be changed according to the current background mode.

FIG. 104 shows the operating means 700 of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 6 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 104 shows the external appearance of the operating means 700 as seen from above. The operation unit 700 has an operation unit 702. The operation unit 702 includes a chance button 136, a setting operation unit 139, an operation unit decoration member 720, a chance button lamp 138 (see FIG. 69), a ball removal button 130, and a chance button detection unit (press detection sensor) 724 (FIG. 72). See).

The chance button 136 has a chance button cap 704 and a chance button decoration member 706. The chance button cap 704 is made of, for example, a transparent resin material, and has a hollow columnar shape with its upper surface closed. The upper surface of the chance button 704 is formed in a curved shape that bulges upward. Since the chance button cap 704 is made of a transparent resin material, the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the chance button lamp 138 arranged below the chance button cap 704. The chance button decoration member 706 is adapted to rotate.

Inside the chance button 136, a drive unit (see FIG. 72) 708 of the chance button 136 is arranged. The driving unit 708 controls the vibration motor connected to the second sub control unit 500. This allows the player to feel that the chance button cap 704 is vibrating.

As shown in FIG. 104, the chance button 136 is arranged in the operation portion decoration member 720 from the left. A setting operation unit 139 is arranged on the right side of the chance button 136. The setting operation unit 139 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the player, and is an enter (OK) button 139a, an upper button 139b located behind the enter button 139a, and a lower button located in front of the enter button 139a. A button 139c, a right button 139d located to the right of the confirm button 139a, a left button 139e located to the left of the confirm button 139a, and a cancel (clear) button 139f located further to the right of the right button 139d. I have it. Further, the setting operation unit 136 includes an operation unit sensor that detects pressing of each of the buttons 139b to 139f. The setting operation unit 139 of this example has a unit structure in which the buttons 139b to 139f and the operation unit sensor are integrated. The player can operate the buttons 139b to 139f to input the unique identification information of the player, and store his or her own player information in the external server.

As shown in FIG. 104, a ball removal button 130 is attached to the right of the setting operation unit 139 of the operation unit base 722. The upper surface of the ball removing button is exposed from an opening of a predetermined shape provided in the operation portion decoration member 720. As a result, the player can push the ball removal button 130 to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128.

In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the chance button lamp 138 is in the light emitting state, the chance button 136 is in the light emitting state. When the Chan button decoration member 706 is rotated by the operation of the electric motor (not shown), the chance button 136 is rotated. When the chance button cap 704 is vibrated by the operation of the vibration motor of the drive unit 708 of the chance button 136, the chance button 136 is vibrated.

FIG. 105 shows a temporal operation of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 6 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis of FIG. 105 shows a time series, and time passes from left to right. In the upper part of FIG. 105, t0 to t7 indicate various operations or time points such as start and end of effects. The middle part of FIG. 105 shows execution states of various effects by the first effect means and the second effect means in order from the top. The first effect means of this example includes a decorative pattern display device 208, and the second effect means includes a speaker 120. The first operation means is used for effect selection by the first and second effect means. The first operation means of this example includes a chance button 136 of the operation means 700, for example. The lower part of FIG. 105 shows execution states of various effects by the third effect means. The third rendering means of this example includes a rendering display device 915. The second operation means is used for effect selection by the third effect means. The second operation means of this example includes the setting operation section 139 of the operation means 700, for example. By pressing any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139, the effect selection by the second operation means is performed.

First, time t0 is the start time of the special figure variation game. At the time point t0, the first effect means is executing the effect A or starts the effect A from the time point t0, and at the time point t0, the second effect means is executing the effect α or the effect a from the time point t0. Shall be started. In addition, at the time point t0, the first operation means is during a selectable period during which the player can select an effect by pressing the chance button 136 or at the start point of the period. The selectable period of the first operating means continues at least until time t7. It is assumed that the third effect means is executing the effect X at time t0 or has started the effect X from time t0. Further, at the time point t0, the second operation means is during a selectable period during which the player can select an effect by pressing any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 or at the start time point of the period. To do. The selectable period of the second operation means continues at least until time t7.

When the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at a time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t0, the effect A is finished and the effect B is started in the first effect means. In the second effect means, effect α is finished and effect β is started. At time t1, the player has pressed the chance button 136 of the first operation means, but has not pressed any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation section 139 of the second operation means, so the second button No effect selection is made by the operating means. The effect X is continued by the third effect means.

When the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at a time point t2 when a certain time has elapsed from the time point t1, the effect B is finished and the effect C is started in the first effect means. In the second effect means, effect β is finished and effect γ is started.

When the player presses any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at a time t3 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t2, the selection provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400. Although the value of the effect counter increases by 1, the effect X continues in the third effect means. At time t3, the player has pressed any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means, but has not pressed the chance button 136 of the first operation means, so the first operation means No effect selection is made by the operating means. Therefore, the effect C is continued by the first effect means, and the effect γ is continued by the second effect means.

When a player presses any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at a time t4 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t3, the selection provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400. Although the value of the effect counter increases by 1, the effect X continues in the third effect means. At time t4, the player has pressed any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means, but has not pressed the chance button 136 of the first operation means, so the first operation means No effect selection is made by the operating means. Therefore, the effect C is continued by the first effect means, and the effect γ is continued by the second effect means.

Time point t5 is the time point when the special figure variation game for T seconds started at time point t0 ends and the next special figure variation game is started. The number of times the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means is pressed during the game of the special figure variation game started at time t0 is stored in the selection effect counter. The first sub-control unit 400 determines an effect to be executed by the third effect means, based on the number of times the button is pressed. In this example, since the number of presses is two, the second effect Z is selected from the effects X using the effect list arranged in the order of effects X, Y, Z,.... Therefore, the effect Z is executed from the third effect means from the time point t5. At time point t5, the chance button 136 of the first operating means is not pressed, so that the effect selection by the first operating means is not performed. Therefore, the effect C is continued by the first effect means, and the effect γ is continued by the second effect means.

When the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at a time t6 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t5, the effect C is finished and the effect D is started in the first effect means. In the second effect means, effect γ ends and effect δ starts. At time t6, the chance button 136 of the first operating means is pressed, but none of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operating portion 139 of the second operating means is pressed, so the second operating means is used. No effect selection is made. The production Z is continued by the third production means.

Time point t7 is a time point at which the special figure variation game for T seconds started at time point t5 ends and the next special figure variation game is started. From the time point t5 to the time point t7, since the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means is not pressed and the value of the selection effect counter is zero, the effect Z continues in the third effect means from the time point t7.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the selection result is reflected periodically (every T seconds) by the third effect means corresponding to the second operation means. If there is a selection operation within T seconds, it is reflected at the next production start possible timing.

106 to 108 show selection effects executed by the first to third effect means of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment. 106, 107 (a) to (c) and FIGS. 108 (a), (b) show the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first effect means in the lower stage, and the third. The display area of the effect display device 915 included in the effect means is shown in the upper row. 106 and 107 (A) to (C) and FIGS. 108 (A) and (B) schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second effect means. In each figure, (a) and (A), (b) and (B), (c) and (C) respectively show effects at the same time.

FIG. 106(a) shows the effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time t0 shown in FIG. 105. At time t0, the special figure variation game ends and at the center of the display area of the decorative design display device 208 of the first effect means, the decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 0 is stopped in the left middle right decorative pattern display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. It is displayed, and the next special figure variation game is started immediately after this. At the lower right of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, a selection effect display area 800 is provided in the shape of a horizontally long rectangle, for example. In the selection effect display area 800, an effect A is displayed in which a character string "M1: may be there..." is displayed. In the selection effect in this example, the song name of the song played from the speaker 120 is displayed in characters. On the effect display device 915 of the third effect means, the effect X for notifying (displaying) that the background mode being executed is the “Yoshimune mode” is executed. As shown in FIG. 106(A), at time point t0, an effect α in which a music piece 810 having a music title “may be there...” is played from the speaker 120 is executed.

FIG. 106(b) shows the effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t1 shown in FIG. 105. At a time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from time t0, in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decoration 0 to the decoration 9 are sequentially moved from top to bottom in each of the left middle right decorative pattern display areas 208a, 208b and 208c. (Indicated by a downward arrow in the figure), the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at the time point t1, the characters "M1: may be there..." at the time point t1 in the selected effect display area 800 of the first effect means. The effect A for displaying the row is finished, and the effect B for displaying the character string "M2: Space of Kiseki" is started. The character string “M2: Space of Kiseki” in the effect B indicates the title of the music played from the speaker 120. Also, at time point t1, the production α in which the song 810 “May be there” is played on the speaker 120 of the second production means ends, and the song title is changed as shown in FIG. 106(B). The production β in which the song 810 of “Space of Kiseki” flows is started. At time t1, the player has pressed the chance button 136 of the first operation means, but has not pressed any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation section 139 of the second operation means, so the second button No effect selection is made by the operating means. On the effect display device 915 of the third effect means, effect X (Yoshimune mode) is continued.

FIG. 106(c) shows an effect produced by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t2 shown in FIG. 105. At a time point t2 when a certain time has elapsed from the time point t1, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at time t2, the production B displaying the character string "M2: Space of Kiseki" at the time t2 in the selected production display area 800 of the first production means. Ends and production C for displaying the character string "M3: Your Piece" is started. The character string “M3: Kimi no Kakera” in the effect C indicates the song name of the song played from the speaker 120. Also, at time t2, the production β in which the song 810 of “M2: Space of Kiseki” is played on the speaker 120 of the second production means is finished, and as shown in FIG. The performance β in which the song 810 of “” is played is started. At time t2, the player has pressed the chance button 136 of the first operation means, but has not pressed any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation section 139 of the second operation means, so the second operation means No effect selection is made by the operating means. On the effect display device 915 of the third effect means, effect X (Yoshimune mode) is continued.

FIG. 107(a) shows the effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t3 shown in FIG. 105. At a time point t3 when a certain time has elapsed from the time point t2, the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. When the player presses any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at time t3, the value of the selection effect counter provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 is incremented by 1. However, with the third effect means, effect X (Yoshimune mode) continues. At time t3, the player has pressed any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means, but has not pressed the chance button 136 of the first operation means, so the first operation means No effect selection is made by the operating means. Therefore, in the selected effect display area 800, the effect C that displays the character string "M3: Your Piece" at time t3 continues. Further, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the performance of the song 810 having the song name “Kimi no Kakera” continues on the speaker 120.

FIG.107(b) has shown the production|presentation performed with the decorative design display device 208 and the production display device 915 at the time t4 shown in FIG. At a time point t4 when a certain time has elapsed from the time point t3, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. When the player presses any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at time t4, the value of the selection effect counter provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 is incremented by 1. However, with the third effect means, effect X (Yoshimune mode) continues. At time t4, the player has pressed any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means, but has not pressed the chance button 136 of the first operation means, so the first operation means No effect selection is made by the operating means. Therefore, in the selected effect display area 800, the effect C that displays the character string “M3: Your Piece” at time t4 continues. Further, as shown in FIG. 107(B), the effect γ in which the song 810 with the song title “Kimi no Kakera” is played on the speaker 120 continues.

FIG.107(c) has shown the production|presentation performed with the decorative design display device 208 and the production display device 915 at the time t5 shown in FIG. Time point t5 is a time point when the special figure variation game for T seconds started at time point t0 ends and the next special figure variation game starts. At time t5, the special figure variation game ends and the decoration 1-decoration 6-decoration 7 is stopped in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 of the first effect means. It is displayed, and the next special figure variation game is started immediately after this. The number of times the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means is pressed during the game of the special figure variation game started at time t0 is stored in the selection effect counter. The first sub-control unit 400 determines an effect to be executed by the third effect means, based on the number of times the button is pressed. In this example, since the number of presses is two, the second effect Z (princess mode) is selected from the effects X using the effect list arranged in the order of effects X, Y, Z,.... Therefore, from the time point t5, the effect Z that notifies (displays) that the background mode being executed is the “princess mode” is executed from the effect display device 915. In this example, the effect Z (“princess mode”) is displayed at the same time when the fluctuation starts. The effect Z may be started before the fluctuation starts. Further, the effect Z may be started at the same time when the fluctuation starts. Note that the effect Z does not have to be started before the change starts. At time point t5, the chance button 136 of the first operating means is not pressed, so that the effect selection by the first operating means is not performed. Therefore, the effect C is continued on the decorative pattern display device 208, and as shown in FIG. 107(C), the effect γ in which the song 810 having the song name “Kimi no Kakera” flows is continued on the speaker 120.

FIG. 108(a) shows the effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t6 shown in FIG. 105. At time t6 when a certain time has elapsed from time t5, in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image in which decoration 0 to decoration 9 sequentially move from top to bottom in each of the left middle right decorative pattern display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c (Indicated by a downward arrow in the figure), the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed. When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at time t6, in the selected effect display area 800 of the first effect means, effect C that displays the character string "M3: your piece" at time t6. Ends and production D for displaying the character string "M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!" is started. The character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” in the effect D indicates the title of the music played from the speaker 120. At time t6, the production γ in which the song 810 of “Kimi no Kakera” is played on the speaker 120 of the second production means ends, and the song title is “Mega! Giga! Summer” as shown in FIG. The production δ in which the song 810 of “!” flows is started. At the time point t6, the player has pressed the chance button 136 of the first operation means, but has not pressed any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation section 139 of the second operation means, so the second operation means No effect selection is made by the operating means. On the effect display device 915 of the third effect means, effect Z (princess mode) is continued.

FIG.108(b) has shown the production|presentation performed with the decorative design display device 208 and the production display device 915 at the time t7 shown in FIG. Time point t7 is a time point at which the special figure variation game for T seconds started at time point t5 ends and the next special figure variation game is started. The variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. In the selection effect display area 800 of the first effect means, the effect C displaying the character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” continues at the time point t7. From time t5 to time t7, since the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means is not pressed and the value of the selection effect counter is zero, effect Z (princess mode) continues on the effect display device 915 from time t7. To do. Further, as shown in FIG. 108(B), in the speaker 120, the effect δ in which the song 810 with the song title “Mega!Giga!Summer!” flows is continued.

FIG. 109 shows a temporal operation of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 7 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis of FIG. 109 represents a time series, and time passes from left to right. In the upper part of FIG. 109, t0 to t10 indicate various operations, or the time points such as the start and end of effects. The middle part of FIG. 109 shows execution states of various effects by the first effect means and the second effect means in order from the top. The first effect means of this example includes a decorative pattern display device 208, and the second effect means includes a speaker 120. The first operation means is used for effect selection by the first and second effect means. The first operation means of this example includes a chance button 136 of the operation means 700, for example. The lower part of FIG. 109 shows execution states of various effects by the third effect means. The third rendering means of this example includes a rendering display device 915. The second operation means is used for effect selection by the third effect means. The second operation means of this example includes the setting operation section 139 of the operation means 700, for example. By pressing any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139, the effect selection by the second operation means is performed.

First, time t0 is the start time of the special figure variation game. At the time point t0, the first effect means is executing the effect A or starts the effect A from the time point t0, and at the time point t0, the second effect means is executing the effect α or the effect a from the time point t0. Shall be started. In addition, at the time point t0, the first operation means is during a selectable period during which the player can select an effect by pressing the chance button 136 or at the start point of the period. The selectable period of the first operation means continues at least until time t10.

When the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at a time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t0, the effect A is finished and the effect B is started in the first effect means. On the other hand, in the second effect means, the effect is changed on condition that the waiting time of Ta seconds has elapsed from the time when the player operated the operation means, and the effect is changed until the waiting time elapses. Is not changed. Therefore, the effect α is continued at the time point t1. It is assumed that the third effect means is executing the effect X at time t0 or has started the effect X from time t0. Further, at the time point t0, the second operation means is during a selectable period during which the player can select an effect by pressing one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 139 or at the start point of the period. The selectable period of the second operation means continues at least until time t10 and thereafter. At time t1, the player has pressed the chance button 136 of the first operation means, but has not pressed any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation section 139 of the second operation means, so the second button No effect selection is made by the operating means. The effect X is continued by the third effect means.

Further, when the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at the time t2 during the standby time of Ta seconds in the second effect means, effect B is ended and effect C is started in the first effect means. On the other hand, the time T1 from the time point t1 to the time point t2 is shorter than the waiting time Ta, so at the time point t2, the effect α is continued without changing the effect by the second effect means. At a time point t2 when a certain time has elapsed from the time point t1, none of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means is pressed, so that the effect selection by the second operation means is not performed. The effect X is continued by the third effect means.

Further, by pressing the chance button 136 at time t2, the measurement of the waiting time started by the first sub-control unit 400 by pressing the previous opportunity button 136 is reset, and the waiting time is newly set from time t2. It

Further, when the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at the time point t3 during the standby time of T seconds in the second effect means, effect C is ended and effect D is started in the first effect means. On the other hand, the time T2 from the time point t2 to the time point t3 is shorter than the waiting time Ta, so at the time point t3, the effect α is continued without changing the effect by the second effect means. At a time point t3 when a certain time has elapsed from the time point t2, none of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means is pressed, so that the effect selection by the second operation means is not performed. The effect X is continued by the third effect means.

Further, by pressing the chance button 136 at the time point t3, the measurement of the waiting time started by the previous pressing of the chance button 136 is reset, and the waiting time is newly set from the time point t3.

When a player presses any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at a time t4 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t3, the selection provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400. Although the value of the effect counter increases by 1, the effect X continues in the third effect means. At time t4, the player has pressed any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means, but has not pressed the chance button 136 of the first operation means, so the first operation means No effect selection is made by the operating means. Therefore, the effect D is continued by the first effect means, and the effect α is continued by the second effect means.

At the time t5 when the waiting time Ta seconds has elapsed from the time t3, the chance button 136 is not pressed within the period from the time t3 to the time t5, and the time T3 (>Ta) is elapsed from the time t3 until the next chance button 136 is pressed. Since the time point t8 has elapsed, the effect α is finished and the effect δ is started in the second effect means. On the other hand, the effect D is continued in the first effect means.

When a player presses any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at a time t6 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t5, the selection provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400. Although the value of the effect counter increases by 1, the effect X continues in the third effect means. At time t6, the player has pressed any one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation section 139 of the second operation means, but has not pressed the chance button 136 of the first operation means, so the first operation means No effect selection is made by the operating means. Therefore, the effect D is continued by the first effect means, and the effect δ is continued by the second effect means.

Time point t7 is a time point at which the special figure variation game for Tb seconds started at time point t0 ends and the next special figure variation game is started. The number of times the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means is pressed during the game of the special figure variation game started at time t0 is stored in the selection effect counter. The first sub-control unit 400 determines an effect to be executed by the third effect means, based on the number of times the button is pressed. In this example, since the number of presses is two, the second effect Z is selected from the effects X using the effect list arranged in the order of effects X, Y, Z,.... Therefore, the effect Z is executed from the third effect means from the time point t7. At time point t7, the chance button 136 of the first operating means is not pressed, so that the effect selection by the first operating means is not performed. Therefore, the effect D is continued by the first effect means, and the effect δ is continued by the second effect means.

Further, when the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time t8 after the standby time of T seconds in the second effect means, effect D is finished and effect E is started in the first effect means. .. On the other hand, in the second effect means, the effect is changed on condition that the waiting time of Ta seconds has elapsed from the time when the player operated the operation means, so the effect is changed until the waiting time elapses. I don't know. Therefore, the effect δ continues at the time point t8. At a time t8 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t7, none of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means is pressed, so that the effect selection by the second operation means is not performed. The production Z is continued by the third production means.

Time point t9 is a time point when the special figure variation game for Tb seconds started at the time point t7 ends and the next special figure variation game is started. The number of times the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means is pressed during the game of the special figure variation game started at time t7 is stored in the selection effect counter. The first sub-control unit 400 determines an effect to be executed by the third effect means, based on the number of times the button is pressed. In this example, since the number of presses is 0, the 0th effect from the effect Z (that is, effect Z) is selected using the effect list arranged in the order of effects X, Y, Z,.... Therefore, from time t9, the effect Z is executed from the third effect means. At time point t9, the chance button 136 of the first operating means is not pressed, so that the effect selection by the first operating means is not performed. Therefore, the effect E is continued by the first effect means, and the effect δ is continued by the second effect means.

At the time t10 when the waiting time Ta seconds has elapsed from the time t8, the chance button 136 is not pressed within the period from the time t8 to the time t10, and the time T4 (>Ta) is elapsed from the time t8 until the next chance button 136 is pressed. Since the time has passed, the effect δ is finished and the effect ε is started in the second effect means. On the other hand, the effect E is continued in the first effect means.

110 to 113 show selection effects executed by the first to third effect means of the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment. FIGS. 110 to 112 (a) to (c) and FIGS. 113 (a) and (b) show the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first effect means in the lower stage, and the third. The display area of the effect display device 915 included in the effect means is shown in the upper row. FIGS. 110 to 112 (A) to (C) and FIGS. 113 (A) and (B) schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second effect means. In each figure, (a) and (A), (b) and (B), (c) and (C) respectively show effects at the same time.

FIG. 110(a) shows the effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t0 shown in FIG. 109. At time t0, the special figure variation game ends and at the center of the display area of the decorative design display device 208 of the first effect means, the decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 0 is stopped in the left middle right decorative pattern display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. It is displayed, and the next special figure variation game is started immediately after this. At the lower right of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, a selection effect display area 800 is provided in the shape of a horizontally long rectangle, for example. In the selection effect display area 800, an effect A is displayed in which a character string "M1: may be there..." is displayed. In the selection effect in this example, the song name of the song played from the speaker 120 is displayed in characters. On the effect display device 915 of the third effect means, the effect X for notifying (displaying) that the background mode being executed is the “Yoshimune mode” is executed. As shown in FIG. 110(A), at time point t0, an effect α in which a music piece 810 having a music title “may be there...” is played from the speaker 120 is executed.

FIG. 110(b) shows the effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t1 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 109, the time point t1 is the time point when the player presses the chance button 136. At time t1, the special figure variation game is continuing. In the selection effect display area 800 of the first effect means, the effect A that displays the character string "M1: may be there..." is terminated at time t1 and the character "M2: Space of Kiseki" is displayed. The effect B for displaying a row is started. The character string “M2: Space of Kiseki” in the effect B indicates the title of the music played from the speaker 120. On the other hand, in the speaker 120, the effect is changed on the condition that the waiting time of Ta seconds has elapsed from the time when the player operated the first operation means, so the effect is not changed until the waiting time elapses. I don't know. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 110(B), at the time point t1, the production α in which the song 810 having the song name “may be there...” is continued. At time t1, the player has pressed the chance button 136 of the first operation means, but has not pressed any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means, so the second operation means No effect selection is made by the operating means. On the effect display device 915 of the third effect means, effect X (Yoshimune mode) is continued.

FIG. 110(c) shows the effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t2 shown in FIG. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at the time point t2 during the standby time of Ta seconds in the speaker 120 of the second effect means, at the time point t2 in the selection effect display area 800 of the first effect means. Then, the effect B that displays the character string "M2: Space of Kiseki" ends, and the effect C that displays the character string "M3: Your Piece" starts. The character string “M3: Kimi no Kakera” in the effect C indicates the song name of the song played from the speaker 120. On the other hand, the time T1 (eg, T1=0.5 seconds) from the time point t1 to the time point t2 is shorter than the waiting time Ta (eg, Ta=1 second), and therefore, as shown in FIG. At time t2, the effect is not changed on the speaker 120, and the effect α in which the music 810 with the music title “may be there...” is played is continued. Also, at the time point t2, the player has pressed the chance button 136 of the first operation means, but none of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation section 139 of the second operation means have been pressed, so the second operation means No effect selection is made by the operating means. On the effect display device 915 of the third effect means, effect X (Yoshimune mode) is continued.

Further, by pressing the chance button 136 at the time point t2, the measurement of the waiting time started by the previous pressing of the chance button 136 is reset, and the waiting time Ta (=1 second) is newly set from the time point t2. ..

FIG. 111(a) shows the effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t3 shown in FIG. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at the time t3 during the standby time of Ta seconds in the speaker 120 of the second effect means, the time point t3 in the selected effect display area 800 of the first effect means. Then, the effect C for displaying the character string "M3: Kimi no Kakera" ends, and the effect D for displaying the character string "M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!" is started. The character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” in the effect D indicates the title of the music played from the speaker 120. On the other hand, the time T2 (for example, T2=0.8 seconds) from the time t2 to the time t3 is shorter than the waiting time Ta (for example, Ta=1 second), and thus, as illustrated in FIG. At time t3, the effect α is continued without changing the effect on the speaker 120. At time t3, the player has pressed the chance button 136 of the first operation means, but has not pressed any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation section 139 of the second operation means, so the second operation means No effect selection is made by the operating means. On the effect display device 915 of the third effect means, effect X (Yoshimune mode) is continued.

Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed at the time point t3, the measurement of the waiting time started by the previous pressing of the chance button 136 is reset, and the waiting time Ta (=1 second) is newly set from the time point t3. ..

FIG. 111(b) shows the effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t4 shown in FIG. At a time point t4 when a certain time has elapsed from the time point t3, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. When the player presses any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at time t4, the value of the selection effect counter provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 is incremented by 1. However, with the third effect means, effect X (Yoshimune mode) continues. At time t4, the player has pressed any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means, but has not pressed the chance button 136 of the first operation means, so the first operation means No effect selection is made by the operating means. Therefore, in the selected effect display area 800, the effect D that displays the character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” continues at time t4. In addition, as shown in FIG. 111(B), the effect α of the music piece 810 having the music title “May be there...” is continued from the speaker 120.

FIG. 111(c) shows the effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t5 shown in FIG. 109. At a time point t5 when a certain time has elapsed from the time point t4, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. At the time point t5 when the waiting time Ta seconds has elapsed from the time point t3, since the chance button 136 of the first operating means is not pressed within the period from the time point t3 to the time point t5, the second effect means ends the effect α. Production δ is started. As shown in FIG. 111(C), an effect δ in which a song 810 having a song name “Mega!Giga!Summer!” is played from the speaker 120 is started. On the other hand, the effect D is continued in the first effect means. Further, the effect X (Yoshimune mode) continues in the third effect means.

FIG. 112(a) shows the effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t6 shown in FIG. 109. At time t6, the variable display of the decorative symbols continues in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. When the player presses any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at time t6, the value of the selection effect counter provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 is incremented by 1. However, with the third effect means, effect X (Yoshimune mode) continues. At time t6, the player has pressed any one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation section 139 of the second operation means, but has not pressed the chance button 136 of the first operation means, so the first operation means No effect selection is made by the operating means. Therefore, in the selected effect display area 800, the effect D for displaying the character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” continues at time t6. Further, as shown in FIG. 112(A), the effect δ in which the song 810 with the song title “Mega!Giga!Summer!” flows from the speaker 120 is continued.

FIG. 112(b) shows the effect produced by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time t7 shown in FIG. Time point t7 is a time point when the special figure variation game for Tb seconds started at the time point t0 ends and the next special figure variation game starts. At time t7, the special figure variation game ends and the decoration 1-decoration 6-decoration 7 is stopped in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 of the first effect means. It is displayed, and the next special figure variation game is started immediately after this. The number of times the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means is pressed during the game of the special figure variation game started at time t0 is stored in the selection effect counter. The first sub-control unit 400 determines an effect to be executed by the third effect means, based on the number of times the button is pressed. In this example, since the number of presses is two, the second effect Z (princess mode) is selected from the effects X using the effect list arranged in the order of effects X, Y, Z,.... Therefore, from the time point t7, the effect Z that notifies (displays) that the background mode being executed is the “princess mode” is executed from the effect display device 915. In this example, the effect Z (“princess mode”) is displayed at the same time when the fluctuation starts. The effect Z may be started before the fluctuation starts. Further, the effect Z may be started at the same time when the fluctuation starts. Note that the effect Z does not have to be started before the change starts. At time point t7, the chance button 136 of the first operating means is not pressed, so that the effect selection by the first operating means is not performed. Therefore, the effect D continues on the decorative symbol display device 208, and as shown in FIG. 112(B), the effect δ in which the song 810 with the song title “Mega!Giga!Summer!” flows on the speaker 120 continues.

FIG. 112(c) shows an effect produced by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time t8 shown in FIG. 109. At time t8, the special figure variation game started at time t0 continues. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at time t8, the character string "M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!" is displayed at time t8 in the selection effect display area 800 of the first effect means. The effect D to be performed is finished and the effect E to display the character string "M5: hot spring hormone" is started. The character string “M5: hot spring hormone” in the effect E indicates the song name of the song played from the speaker 120. On the other hand, in the speaker 120, the effect is changed on the condition that the waiting time of Ta seconds has elapsed from the time when the player operated the first operation means, so the effect is not changed until the waiting time elapses. I don't know. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 112(C), at time t8, the effect δ in which the song 810 with the song title “Mega!Giga!Summer!” flows is continued. At time t8, the player has pressed the chance button 136 of the first operation means, but has not pressed any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation section 139 of the second operation means, so the second operation means No effect selection is made by the operating means. On the effect display device 915 of the third effect means, effect Z (princess mode) is continued.

FIG. 113(a) shows the effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time t9 shown in FIG. Time point t9 is a time point when the special figure variation game for Tb seconds started at the time point t7 ends and the next special figure variation game starts. At time t9, the special figure variation game ends, and in the center of the display area of the decorative design display device 208 of the first effect means, the decoration 3 decoration 9-decoration 8 is stopped in the left middle right decorative design display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. It is displayed, and the next special figure variation game is started immediately after this. At time point t9, the chance button 136 of the first operating means is not pressed, so that the effect selection by the first operating means is not performed. Therefore, the effect E is continued on the decorative symbol display device 208. From time t7 to time t9, since the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means is not pressed and the value of the selection effect counter is zero, the effect display device 915 continues to effect Z (princess mode) from time t9. To do. Further, as shown in FIG. 113(A), the effect δ in which the song 810 with the song title “Mega!Giga!Summer!” flows on the speaker 120 continues.

FIG. 113(b) shows the effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t10 shown in FIG. At a time t10 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t9, the variable display of the decorative symbols continues in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c. At the time point t10 when the waiting time Ta seconds has elapsed from the time point t8, since the chance button 136 of the first operating means is not pressed within the period from the time point t8 to the time point t10, the effect δ is finished in the second effecting means. Production ε is started. As shown in FIG. 113(B), an effect ε in which a music piece 810 having a music title “hot spring hormone” is played from the speaker 120 is started. On the other hand, the effect E is continued in the first effect means. Moreover, the effect Z (princess mode) continues in the third effect means.

FIG. 114 shows a temporal operation of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 8 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis of FIG. 114 shows a time series, and time passes from left to right. 114, t0 to t7 in the upper part of FIG. 114 indicate various operations or time points such as the start and end of effects. The middle part of FIG. 114 shows execution states of various effects by the first effect means and the second effect means in order from the top. The first effect means of this example includes a decorative pattern display device 208, and the second effect means includes a speaker 120. The first operation means is used for effect selection by the first and second effect means. The first operation means of this example includes a chance button 136 of the operation means 700, for example. The lower part of FIG. 114 shows execution states of various effects by the third effecting means and the fourth effecting means. The third rendering means of this example includes a rendering display device 915, and the fourth rendering means includes a lamp 940. The second operation means is used for effect selection by the third and fourth effect means. The second operation means of this example includes the setting operation section 139 of the operation means 700, for example. By pressing any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139, the effect selection by the second operation means is performed.

First, time t0 is the start time of the special figure variation game. At the time point t0, the first effect means is executing the effect A or starts the effect A from the time point t0, and at the time point t0, the second effect means is executing the effect α or the effect a from the time point t0. Shall be started. In addition, at the time point t0, the first operation means is during a selectable period during which the player can select an effect by pressing the chance button 136 or at the start point of the period. The selectable period of the first operating means continues at least until time t7. It is assumed that the third effect means is executing the effect X at time t0 or has started the effect X from time t0. It is assumed that the fourth effect means is executing the effect χ at time t0 or has started the effect χ from time t0. Further, at the time point t0, the second operation means is during a selectable period during which the player can select an effect by pressing any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 or at the start time point of the period. To do. The selectable period of the second operation means continues at least until time t7.

When the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at a time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t0, the effect A is finished and the effect B is started in the first effect means. In the second effect means, effect α is finished and effect β is started. At time t1, the player has pressed the chance button 136 of the first operation means, but has not pressed any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation section 139 of the second operation means, so the second button No effect selection is made by the operating means. The effect X is continued by the third effect means, and the effect χ is continued by the fourth effect means.

When the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at a time point t2 when a certain time has elapsed from the time point t1, the effect B is finished and the effect C is started in the first effect means. In the second effect means, effect β is finished and effect γ is started.

When the player presses any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at a time t3 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t2, the selection provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400. Although the value of the effect counter increases by 1, the effect X continues in the third effect means. On the other hand, the fourth rendering means finishes the rendering χ and starts the rendering ψ. At time t3, the player has pressed any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means, but has not pressed the chance button 136 of the first operation means, so the first operation means No effect selection is made by the operating means. Therefore, the effect C is continued by the first effect means, and the effect γ is continued by the second effect means.

When a player presses any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at a time t4 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t3, the selection provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400. Although the value of the effect counter increases by 1, the effect X continues in the third effect means. On the other hand, in the fourth effect means, effect ψ ends and effect ω starts. At time t4, the player has pressed any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means, but has not pressed the chance button 136 of the first operation means, so the first operation means No effect selection is made by the operating means. Therefore, the effect C is continued by the first effect means, and the effect γ is continued by the second effect means.

Time point t5 is the time point when the special figure variation game for T seconds started at time point t0 ends and the next special figure variation game is started. The number of times the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means is pressed during the game of the special figure variation game started at time t0 is stored in the selection effect counter. The first sub-control unit 400 determines an effect to be executed by the third effect means, based on the number of times the button is pressed. In this example, since the number of presses is two, the second effect Z is selected from the effects X using the effect list arranged in the order of effects X, Y, Z,.... Therefore, the effect Z is executed from the third effect means from the time point t5. On the other hand, the effect ω is finished and the effect ω′ is started in the fourth effect means. At time point t5, the chance button 136 of the first operating means is not pressed, so that the effect selection by the first operating means is not performed. Therefore, the effect C is continued by the first effect means, and the effect γ is continued by the second effect means.

When the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at a time t6 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t5, the effect C is finished and the effect D is started in the first effect means. In the second effect means, effect γ ends and effect δ starts. At time t6, the chance button 136 of the first operating means is pressed, but none of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operating portion 139 of the second operating means is pressed, so the second operating means is used. No effect selection is made. Therefore, the effect Z is continued by the third effect means, and the effect ω'is continued by the fourth effect means.

Time point t7 is a time point at which the special figure variation game for T seconds started at time point t5 ends and the next special figure variation game is started. From the time point t5 to the time point t7, since the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means is not pressed and the value of the selection effect counter is zero, the effect Z is continued in the third effect means from the time point t7. The production ω′ is continued by the production means of No. 4.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the selection result is reflected periodically (every T seconds) by the third effect means corresponding to the second operation means. If there is a selection operation within T seconds, it is reflected at the next production start possible timing. In the fourth effect means corresponding to the second operation means, the operation result is immediately reflected.

115 to 117 show selection effects executed by the first to fourth effect means of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment. 115, FIG. 116 (a) to (c) and FIG. 117 (a), (b) show the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first effect means in the lower stage, and the third. The display area of the effect display device 915 included in the effect means is shown in the upper row. 115, 116(A) to (C) and FIGS. 117(A), (B) schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second effect means and the lamp 940 included in the fourth effect means. Is shown in. In each figure, (a) and (A), (b) and (B), (c) and (C) respectively show effects at the same time.

FIG. 115(a) shows the effect produced by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t0 shown in FIG. At time t0, the special figure variation game ends and at the center of the display area of the decorative design display device 208 of the first effect means, the decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 0 is stopped in the left middle right decorative pattern display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. It is displayed, and the next special figure variation game is started immediately after this. At the lower right of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, a selection effect display area 800 is provided in the shape of a horizontally long rectangle, for example. In the selection effect display area 800, an effect A is displayed in which a character string "M1: may be there..." is displayed. In the selection effect A in this example, the song name of the song played from the speaker 120 is displayed in characters. On the effect display device 915 of the third effect means, the effect X for notifying (displaying) that the background mode being executed is the “Yoshimune mode” is executed. As shown in FIG. 115(A), at time point t0, an effect α is performed in which a music piece 810 having a music name “may be there...” flows from the speaker 120 of the second effect means. Further, in the lamp 940 of the fourth effect means, an effect χ in which the LED of the color corresponding to the effect X (Yoshimune mode) emits light and the character “Yatsushiro” is visually recognized is executed.

FIG. 115(b) shows the effect produced by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t1 shown in FIG. At a time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from time t0, in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decoration 0 to the decoration 9 are sequentially moved from top to bottom in each of the left middle right decorative pattern display areas 208a, 208b and 208c. (Indicated by a downward arrow in the figure), the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at the time point t1, the characters "M1: may be there..." at the time point t1 in the selected effect display area 800 of the first effect means. The effect A for displaying the row is finished, and the effect B for displaying the character string "M2: Space of Kiseki" is started. The character string “M2: Space of Kiseki” in the effect B indicates the title of the music played from the speaker 120. Further, at time t1, the production α in which the song 810 "May be there..." is played on the speaker 120 of the second production means, and the song title is changed as shown in FIG. 115(B). The production β in which the song 810 of “Space of Kiseki” flows is started. At time t1, the player has pressed the chance button 136 of the first operation means, but has not pressed any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation section 139 of the second operation means, so the second button No effect selection is made by the operating means. Therefore, the effect X is continued on the effect display device 915 of the third effect means. As shown in FIG. 115(B), the effect χ is continued in the fourth effect means.

FIG. 115(c) shows the effect produced by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t2 shown in FIG. At a time point t2 when a certain time has elapsed from the time point t1, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at time t2, the production B displaying the character string "M2: Space of Kiseki" at the time t2 in the selected production display area 800 of the first production means. Ends and production C for displaying the character string "M3: Your Piece" is started. The character string “M3: Kimi no Kakera” in the effect C indicates the song name of the song played from the speaker 120. Also, at time t2, the production β in which the song 810 of “M2: Space of Kiseki” is played on the speaker 120 of the second production means is finished, and as shown in FIG. The performance β in which the song 810 of “” is played is started. At time t2, the player has pressed the chance button 136 of the first operation means, but has not pressed any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation section 139 of the second operation means, so the second operation means No effect selection is made by the operating means. The effect X is continued on the effect display device 915 of the third effect means. Further, as shown in FIG. 115(C), the effect χ is continued in the fourth effect means.

FIG. 116(a) shows the effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t3 shown in FIG. 114. At a time point t3 when a certain time has elapsed from the time point t2, the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. When the player presses any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at time t3, the value of the selection effect counter provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 is incremented by 1. However, with the third effect means, effect X (Yoshimune mode) continues. In addition, the effect display device 915 displays the character image of “grandpa” together with the display of “from next change to grandpa mode”. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 116(A), in the lamp 940 of the fourth effect means, the operation in the setting operation unit 139 is immediately reflected, the effect χ is ended and the effect ψ is started. At time t3, the player has pressed any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means, but has not pressed the chance button 136 of the first operation means, so the first operation means No effect selection is made by the operating means. Therefore, in the selected effect display area 800, the effect C that displays the character string "M3: Your Piece" at time t3 continues. As shown in FIG. 116(A), the speaker 120 continues to play the song 810 with the song name “Kimi no Kakera”.

FIG.116(b) has shown the production|presentation performed with the decorative design display device 208 and the production display device 915 at the time t4 shown in FIG. At a time point t4 when a certain time has elapsed from the time point t3, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. When the player presses any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at time t4, the value of the selection effect counter provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 is incremented by 1. However, with the third effect means, effect X (Yoshimune mode) continues. In addition, the effect display device 915 displays the character image of “princess” together with the display of “from next change to princess mode”. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 116(B), in the lamp 940 of the fourth effect means, the operation on the setting operation unit 139 is immediately reflected, the effect ψ is ended and the effect ω is started. At time t4, the player has pressed any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means, but has not pressed the chance button 136 of the first operation means, so the first operation means No effect selection is made by the operating means. Therefore, in the selected effect display area 800, the effect C that displays the character string “M3: Your Piece” at time t4 continues. Further, as shown in FIG. 116(B), in the speaker 120, the effect γ in which the song 810 with the song name “Kimi no Kakera” flows is continued.

FIG.116(c) has shown the production|presentation performed with the decorative design display device 208 and the production|presentation display device 915 at the time t5 shown in FIG. Time point t5 is a time point when the special figure variation game for T seconds started at time point t0 ends and the next special figure variation game starts. At time t5, the special figure variation game ends and the decoration 1-decoration 6-decoration 7 is stopped in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 of the first effect means. It is displayed, and the next special figure variation game is started immediately after this. The number of times the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means is pressed during the game of the special figure variation game started at time t0 is stored in the selection effect counter. The first sub-control unit 400 determines an effect to be executed by the third effect means, based on the number of times the button is pressed. In this example, since the number of presses is two, the second effect Z (princess mode) is selected from the effects X using the effect list arranged in the order of effects X, Y, Z,.... Therefore, from the time point t5, the effect Z that notifies (displays) that the background mode being executed is the “princess mode” is executed from the effect display device 915. Further, as shown in FIG. 116(C), the effect ω ends and the effect ω′ starts at the lamp 940 of the fourth effect means. In the effect ω', the LED of the color corresponding to the effect Z of "Princess mode" emits light and the character "Yatsushiro" is visually recognized. In this example, the image of the effect Z (“princess mode”) is completely displayed after the LED of the color corresponding to the effect Z of the lamp 940 emits light (after the LED is in a state of emitting light with a predetermined brightness). .. At time point t5, the chance button 136 of the first operating means is not pressed, so that the effect selection by the first operating means is not performed. Therefore, the effect C is continued on the decorative symbol display device 208, and, as shown in FIG. 116C, the effect γ in which the song 810 with the song name “Kimi no Kakera” is played on the speaker 120 is continued. It should be noted that the light emission of the lamp 940 and the display of the effect Z may be started at the same time, the display of the effect Z may be started after the light emission of the lamp 940 is started, and the lamp of the lamp after the display of the effect Z is started. The emission of 940 may be started. Further, the image of the effect Z (“princess mode”) may be completed at the same time when the LED of the color corresponding to the effect Z is emitted from the lamp 940, and the image of effect Z (“princess mode”) is completed. After that, the LED of the color corresponding to the effect Z may be emitted from the lamp 940.

FIG. 117(a) shows the effect produced by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time t6 shown in FIG. At time t6 when a certain time has elapsed from time t5, in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image in which decoration 0 to decoration 9 sequentially move from top to bottom in each of the left middle right decorative pattern display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c (Indicated by a downward arrow in the figure), the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed. When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at time t6, in the selected effect display area 800 of the first effect means, effect C that displays the character string "M3: your piece" at time t6. Ends and production D for displaying the character string "M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!" is started. The character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” in the effect D indicates the title of the music played from the speaker 120. At time t6, the production γ in which the song 810 of "Kimi no Kakera" is played on the speaker 120 of the second production means ends, and the song title is "Mega! Giga! Summer" as shown in FIG. 117(A). The production δ in which the song 810 of “!” flows is started. At the time point t6, the player has pressed the chance button 136 of the first operation means, but has not pressed any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation section 139 of the second operation means, so the second operation means No effect selection is made by the operating means. On the effect display device 915 of the third effect means, the effect Z of "princess mode" is continued. Further, as shown in FIG. 117(A), the effect ω'is continued on the lamp 940 of the fourth effect means.

FIG. 117(b) shows the effect produced by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time t7 shown in FIG. At time t7, the special figure variation game is finished, and in the center of the display area of the decorative design display device 208 of the first effect means, the decoration 3-decoration 9-decoration 8 is provided in the left middle right decorative pattern display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. It is stopped and displayed, and the next special figure variation game starts immediately after this. In the selection effect display area 800 of the first effect means, the effect C displaying the character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” continues at the time point t7. From time t5 to time t7, since the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means is not pressed and the value of the selection effect counter is zero, effect Z continues on the effect display device 915 from time t7. Further, as shown in FIG. 117(B), in the speaker 120 of the third effect means, the effect δ in which the song 810 with the song name “Mega!Giga!Summer!” flows is continued, and the lamp 940 of the fourth effect means. Then the production ω'is continued. Note that the lamp 940 of the fourth effect means may also be one in which the selected effect is executed when the next special figure variation game starts, similarly to the effect display device 915.

FIG. 118 shows a temporal operation of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 9 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis of FIG. 118 indicates a time series, and time elapses from left to right. 118, t0 to t9 in the upper part of FIG. 118 indicate various operations, or the time points at which the effect starts or ends. The middle part of FIG. 118 shows execution states of various effects by the first effect means and the second effect means in order from the top. The first effect means of this example includes a decorative pattern display device 208, and the second effect means includes a speaker 120. The first operation means is used for effect selection by the first and second effect means. The first operation means of this example includes, for example, the setting operation section 139 of the operation means 700. By pressing any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139, the effect selection is performed by the first operation means. The lower part of FIG. 118 shows execution states of various effects by the first effect means based on the second operation means. The second operation means of this example includes the chance button 136 of the operation means 700, for example. In this way, in this example, the first effect means executes the selected effect by the first operation means and the second operation means, and two kinds of effects simultaneously proceed.

First, time t0 is the start time of the special figure variation game. At the time point t0, the first effect means is executing the effect A or starts the effect A from the time point t0, and at the time point t0, the second effect means is executing the effect α or the effect a from the time point t0. Shall be started. Further, at the time point t0, the first operation means is during the selectable period during which the player can select an effect by pressing any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 or at the start point of the period. To do. The selectable period of the first operating means continues at least until time t9. Also, the first effect means is executing the effect X at time t0 or starts the effect X from time t0. In addition, at the time point t0, the second operation means is during the selectable period during which the player can select the effect by pressing the chance button 136 or at the start point of the period. The selectable period of the second operation means continues at least until time t9 and thereafter.

When the player presses any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the first operation means at a time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t0, the effect A is finished and effected by the first effect means. B is started. On the other hand, in the second effect means, the effect is changed on condition that the waiting time of Ta seconds has elapsed from the time when the player operated the operation means, and the effect is changed until the waiting time elapses. Is not changed. Therefore, the second effect means continues the effect α at time t1. At time t1, any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the first operating means is pressed, but the chance button 136 of the second operating means is not pressed, so the second operating means is pressed. The effect selection by is not performed. Therefore, the effect B is started and the effect X is continued in the first effect means.

When the player presses any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the first operation means at the time t2 during the waiting time of Ta seconds in the second effect means, the first effect means The effect B ends and the effect C starts. On the other hand, the time T1 from the time point t1 to the time point t2 is shorter than the waiting time Ta, so at the time point t2, the effect α is continued without changing the effect by the second effect means. At a time point t2 when a certain time has elapsed from the time point t1, the chance button 136 of the second operation means is not pressed, so that the effect selection by the second operation means is not performed. Therefore, the effect C is started and the effect X is continued in the first effect means.

Further, at the time point t2, by pressing any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139, measurement of the standby time started by the first sub-control unit 400 by pressing any of the previous buttons 139a to 139e. Is reset and a new waiting time is set from time t2.

Further, when the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at the time point t3 during the standby time of T seconds in the second effect means, effect C is ended and effect D is started in the first effect means. On the other hand, the time T2 from the time point t2 to the time point t3 is shorter than the waiting time Ta, so at the time point t3, the effect α is continued without changing the effect by the second effect means. At a time point t3 when a certain time has elapsed from the time point t2, the chance button 136 of the second operation means is not pressed, so that the effect selection by the second operation means is not performed. Therefore, with the first effect means, effect D is started and effect X is continued.

Further, by pressing any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 at time t3, the measurement of the standby time started by pressing any of the previous buttons 139a to 139e is reset, and is newly updated from time t3. The waiting time is set to.

When the player presses the chance button 136 of the second operation means at a time t4 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t3, the effect X is finished and the effect X′ is started in the first effect means. At time t4, the player has pressed the chance button 136 of the second operation means, but has not pressed any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation section 139 of the first operation means, so the first button No effect selection is made by the operating means. Therefore, the first effect means continues effect D with the start of effect X', and the second effect means continues effect α.

At the time point t5 when the waiting time Ta seconds has elapsed from the time point t3, none of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation section 139 has been pressed within the period from the time point t3 to the time point t5, and the setting operation section 139 starts from the time point t3. Since any one of the buttons 139a to 139e is pressed at time t7 when the time T3 (>Ta) has elapsed, the second effect means finishes the effect α and starts the effect δ. On the other hand, in the first effect means, effect D and effect X'are continued.

Time point t6 is a time point when the special figure variation game for Tb seconds started at the time point t0 ends and the next special figure variation game is started. In addition, the effect in the first effect means related to the second operation means, the effect is changed with the start of the special figure variation game with a predetermined probability. In the first effect means, effect X′ ends and effect Y starts at time t6. Therefore, the effect D is continued with the start of the effect Y in the first effect means, and the effect δ is continued in the second effect means.

Further, when the player presses any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the first operation means at time t7 after the standby time of T seconds in the second effect means, the first effect means Then, the effect D ends and the effect E starts. On the other hand, in the second effect means, the effect is changed on condition that the waiting time of Ta seconds has elapsed from the time when the player operated the operation means, so the effect is changed until the waiting time elapses. I don't know. Therefore, the effect δ continues at the time t7. At time point t7, the chance button 136 of the second operating means is not pressed, so that the effect selection by the second operating means is not performed. With the first effect means, effect Y is continued as effect E is started.

Time point t8 is a time point when the special figure variation game for Tb seconds started at time point t6 is finished and the next special figure variation game is started. The effect in the first effect means related to the second operation means is changed with the start of the special figure variation game with a predetermined probability, but in this example, the time point t8 in the first effect means. The production Y continues without being changed. Therefore, the effect E is continued with the effect Y in the first effect means, and the effect δ is continued in the second effect means.

At the time point t9 when the waiting time Ta seconds has elapsed from the time point t7, none of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation section 139 is pressed within the period from the time point t7 to the time point t9, and the next setting operation section 139 starts from the time point t7. Since the time T4 (>Ta) elapses until any of the buttons 139a to 139e is pressed, the effect δ ends and the effect ε is started in the second effect means. On the other hand, the first effect means continues the effects E and Y. Thus, in this embodiment, the case where the third effect means in the seventh embodiment is changed to the first effect means is shown, and an example in which a plurality of selected effects are displayed on the first effect means is shown. There is. The timing at which the effect is switched may be at the start of fluctuation. In addition, the timing at which the effect is switched is such as when the symbol is stopped (when the decorative symbol is stopped and there is fluctuation, or when the symbol on the special map display device is stopped), or when the big hit starts (a big hit is displayed in the display area. When the big hit ends (when the big hit end effect is displayed in the display area, when the round lamp goes off, etc.), a predetermined time after the effect X starts ( It may be when 10 seconds have passed.

FIG. 119 shows a selection effect executed by the first and second effect means of the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment. 119 (a), (b) has shown the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first effect means. 119(A) and (B) of FIG. 119 schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second effect means. 119 (a) and (A), (b) and (B) of FIG. 119 respectively show effects at the same time.

FIG. 119(a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 between the time point t3 and the time point t4 shown in FIG. 118. FIG. 119(A) shows the effect produced by the speaker 120 between the time points t3 and t4 shown in FIG. 118. In the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variable game by the special symbol variable game is executed. The decorative symbols are variably displayed (indicated by arrows in the figure) in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. A selection effect display area 800 is provided on the lower right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the selection effect display area 800, an effect of displaying the music code and the music name of the music that can be output from the speaker 120 is performed. Between the time points t3 and t4, the effect D in which the character string "M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!" is displayed in the selected effect display area 800 is executed. A character string 955 "Change BGM with direction key" is displayed below the selected effect display area 800 to inform that the effect D can be changed to another effect. The direction key is one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the first operation means. An effect display area 950 is provided on the lower left side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the effect display area 950, the effect X in which the character “Yoshimune mode” and the character image of “lord” are displayed below the character is executed. A character string "mode change with chance button" is displayed below the effect display area 950 to notify that the effect X can be changed to another effect. FIG. 119(A) shows that the speaker 120 is executing an effect α in which a song 810 having a song name “may be there... ”is played.

119(b) has shown the production|presentation performed with the decorative symbol display device 208 between the time t4 shown in FIG. 118, and the time t5. FIG. 119(B) shows an effect performed by the speaker 120 between the time points t4 and t5 shown in FIG. In the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variable game by the special symbol variable game is executed. The decorative symbols are variably displayed (indicated by arrows in the figure) in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. Between the time points t4 and t5, the effect D in which the character string "M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!" is displayed in the selected effect display area 800 is executed. A character string 955 "Change BGM with direction key" is displayed below the selected effect display area 800 to inform that the effect D can be changed to another effect. In the effect display area 950, an effect X'in which a character "Yoshimune mode next change to grand mode" and a character image of "grandpa" are displayed below the character is executed. In this example, the characters of “Yoshimune mode next change to grand mode” and the character image of “grandpa” are displayed at the same time. It should be noted that the character image of "grandpa" may be displayed after the characters of "Yoshimune mode next variation to grandpa mode" are displayed, and vice versa. Below the effect display area 950, a character string "mode change with chance button" is displayed to inform that the effect X'can be changed to another effect. FIG. 119(B) shows that the speaker 120 is executing an effect α in which a song 810 having a song title “may be there... ”is played.

FIG. 120 shows a temporal operation of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 10 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis of FIG. 120 shows a time series, and time passes from left to right. In the upper part of FIG. 120, t0 to t4 indicate various operations, or the time points at which the effect starts and ends. The middle part of FIG. 120 shows execution states of various effects by the effect means. The production means of this example includes a decorative pattern display device 208, and the operation means includes, for example, a chance button 136.

First, at the time point t0, the effect means is executing one effect (first effect) A or has started the effect A at time point t0, and the effect means further effects the other effect (second effect) α. It is assumed that the performance α is started from the time t0 during execution. Further, at the time point t0, the operation means is during a selectable period during which the player can select an effect by pressing the chance button 136 or at the start point of the period. In the present embodiment, effect selection is always possible during a predetermined period (t0 to t4). When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operating means at a time point t1 when a certain time has elapsed from the time point t0, the effect means ends one effect A and the effect B is started at the time point t1. In the other effect, the effect is changed on condition that the waiting time of T seconds has elapsed from the time when the player operated the operating means, and the effect is changed until the waiting time elapses. I don't know. Therefore, at the time point t1, the effect B is started and the effect α is continued.

Further, when the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at the time t2 during the standby time of T seconds, one effect B is ended and effect C is started. Since the time T1 from the time point t1 to the time point t2 is shorter than the waiting time T, at the time point t2, the effect α is continued without changing the other effect by the effect means.

Further, by pressing the chance button 136 at time t2, the measurement of the waiting time started by the first sub-control unit 400 by pressing the previous opportunity button 136 is reset, and the waiting time is newly set from time t2. It

At the time point t3 when the waiting time T seconds has elapsed from the time point t2, one effect C is continued in the effecting means, and the other effect α is finished and the effect γ is started.

The present embodiment is characterized in that one effect means performs a plurality of selection effects in contrast to the selection effects described in the fourth embodiment. Also in this embodiment, the selected effect is immediately reflected in one effect, and the other effect is not started until the waiting time elapses after the selection. In other words, when the predetermined period T seconds have not elapsed after the selection, the selected effect is not started in the other effect, so that it is possible to prevent the annoyance caused by starting the effect that is changed immediately. There is.

Time point t4 indicates the end time point of the selectable period during which the effect can be selected by the operating means. For example, the special figure fluctuation game from the time point t0 to the time point t4 includes a selectable period, but the special figure fluctuation game from the time point t4 has a non-selectable period. Hereinafter, a case where the time point t4 is the start time point of the special figure variation game and is a non-selectable period during the special figure variation game will be described. When the time T2 from the time point t2 when the player last presses the chance button 136 to the time point t4 is longer than the standby time T from the time point t2, the other effect γ is executed from the time point t3 to the time point t4 by the effect means. Further, the special figure variation game from the time point t4 is also executed. From time t4, a new effect C'is started for one effect. If the time T2 from the time t2 when the player finally presses the chance button 136 to the start time t4 of the next special figure variation game is shorter than the waiting time T from the time t2, the other effect is not changed.

121 shows the selection effect executed by the effect means of the pachinko machine 100 according to the tenth embodiment. 121(a) to 121(d) show the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the rendering means. 121(a) to (d), the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 0 in the left-middle-right decoration symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c as a result of the special figure variation game. Has been done. In this example, at least the selection effect can be executed while the symbol is changing and the symbol is stopped. The selection effect may be executable only while the symbol is changing, and the selection effect may be executable only while the symbol is stopped.

FIG. 121(a) shows an effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 from the time point t0 to the time point t1 shown in FIG. The effect A is executed as one effect. In the effect A, the character image 965 of “lord” is displayed using the entire background of the display area. Moreover, the effect α is executed as the other effect. In the effect α, a horizontally long rectangular mode display area 960 is defined in the upper right corner of the display area, and a character string of “Yoshimune mode” is displayed in the mode display area 960.

FIG. 121(b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 from the time point t1 to the time point t2 shown in FIG. 120. The effect B is being executed as one effect. In effect B, the character image 965 of “grandpa” is displayed using the entire background of the display area. As the other effect, the effect α continues, and the character string “Yoshimune mode” is displayed in the mode display area 960.

FIG. 121(c) shows an effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 from time t2 to time t3 shown in FIG. 120. The effect C is executed as one effect. In effect C, the character image 965 of “princess” is displayed using the entire background of the display area. As the other effect, the effect α continues, and the character string “Yoshimune mode” is displayed in the mode display area 960.

FIG. 121(d) shows an effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 from the time t3 to the time t4 shown in FIG. 120. As one effect, the effect C continues and the character image 965 of "princess" is displayed using the entire background of the display area. As the other effect, the effect α is finished and the effect γ is executed. In the effect γ, the character string of “princess mode” is displayed in the mode display area 960.

FIG. 122 shows a temporal operation of the pachinko machine 100 in the first modification of the fourth example according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis of FIG. 122 indicates a time series, and time elapses from left to right. 122, t0 to t5 and tv to ty in the upper part of FIG. 122 indicate various operations or time points at which the effect starts or ends. The middle part of FIG. 122 shows execution states of various effects by the effect means. The first effect means of this example includes a decorative pattern display device 208, and the second effect means includes a speaker 120. The lower part shows the operating means. The operation means of this example includes a chance button 136, for example.

First, at the time point t0, the first effect means is executing the effect A or starts the effect A from the time point t0, and at the time point t0, the second effect means is executing the effect α or from the time point t0. It is assumed that the effect α is started. Further, at the time point t0, the operation means is during a selectable period during which the player can select an effect by pressing the chance button 136 or at the start point of the period. Performance selection is always possible during a predetermined period. In this example, production selection is always possible in all periods, but for example, production selection can be made only during the big hit game, for example, only in the first round, or production selection can be made only during a predetermined special figure variation game. You may When the player presses the chance button 136 of the operating means at a time point t1 when a certain time has elapsed from the time point t0, the effect A is finished and the effect B is started in the first effect means from the time point t1. On the other hand, in the second effect means, the effect is changed on condition that the waiting time of T seconds has elapsed from the time when the player operated the operating means, and the effect is changed until the waiting time elapses. Is not changed. Therefore, the effect α is continued at the time point t1.

Further, when the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at the time t2 during the standby time of T seconds in the second effect means, effect B is ended and effect C is started in the first effect means. On the other hand, since the time T1 from the time point t1 to the time point t2 is shorter than the standby time T, the effect α is continued without changing the effect at the time point t2 by the second effect means.

Further, by pressing the chance button 136 at time t2, the measurement of the waiting time started by the first sub-control unit 400 by pressing the previous opportunity button 136 is reset, and the waiting time is newly set from time t2. It

Further, when the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at the time point t3 during the standby time of T seconds in the second effect means, effect C is ended and effect D is started in the first effect means. On the other hand, the time T2 from the time point t2 to the time point t3 is shorter than the waiting time T, so at the time point t3, the effect α is continued without changing the effect by the second effect means.

Further, by pressing the chance button 136 at the time point t3, the measurement of the waiting time started by the previous pressing of the chance button 136 is reset, and the waiting time is newly set from the time point t3.

At time t4 when the waiting time T seconds has elapsed from time t3, the effect α is finished and the effect δ is started in the second effect means. On the other hand, the effect D is continued in the first effect means.

In the present embodiment, the first effect means reflects the selected effect immediately, and the second effect means does not reflect the wait time after the selection. That is, if the predetermined period of time T seconds has not elapsed after the selection, the selected effect is not started by the second effect means, so that it is possible to prevent the annoyance caused by starting the effect that is changed immediately. Sometimes you can.

Time point tv is the time point when the decorative symbol in the special figure variation game is stopped and displayed. Time point t5 is a time point when a predetermined Ta second has elapsed from the time point tv. When the time T3 from the time point t3 when the player last presses the chance button 136 to the time point t5 is longer than the waiting time T from the time point t3, the effect δ is executed from the time point t4 to the time point t5 by the second effect means. To be done. In the second effect means, the effect is stopped for a certain period from time t5. When the second effect means is the speaker 120, it is in a silent state. For control purposes, a command for producing a sound may be output from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control 400. When the time T3 from the time point t3 to the time point t5 when the player last presses the chance button 136 is shorter than the waiting time T from the time point t3, the effect α in the second effect means is not changed.

The time point tw is a time point when Tb (>Ta) seconds have elapsed from the time point tv. From time tw, the effect D is finished and the effect D′ is started in the first effect means. The effect D'is, for example, a demonstration screen (demo screen). When the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time point tx after a certain time has elapsed from the time point tw, the effect D′ is finished and the effect E is started in the first effect means. On the other hand, the second effect means continues the effect stop state.

The time point ty when a certain time has elapsed from the time point tx is the start time point of the special figure variation game. When the period Tc from time tx to time ty is Tc≧T, the effect ε is started by the second effect means from time ty. When the period Tc is Tc<T, the effect δ is started from the time point ty by the second effect means.

123 to 125 show selection effects executed by the first effect means and the second effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in the first modification. 123, 124 (a) to (d) and FIGS. 125 (a) to (c) show the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first effect means. 123, 124(A) to (D) and FIGS. 125(A) to (C) schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second effect means. In each figure, (a) and (A), (b) and (B), (c) and (C), and (d) and (D) show the effects of the same period.

FIG. 123(a) shows an effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 before the time point t0 shown in FIG. The special figure variation game is executed before time t0, the decoration 2 is swayingly displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 208a in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decoration 5 is displayed in the middle decorative symbol display area 208b. Is displayed in a swinging manner, and decoration 0 is displayed in a swinging manner in the right decorative pattern display area 208c. At the lower right of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, a selection effect display area 800 is provided in the shape of a horizontally long rectangle, for example. In the selection effect display area 800, an effect A is displayed in which a character string "M1: may be there..." is displayed. In the selection effect in this example, the song name of the song played from the speaker 120 is displayed in characters. As shown in FIG. 123(A), at time point t0, an effect α is performed in which a music piece 810 having a music title “May be there...” is played from the speaker 120.

FIG. 123(b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t0 shown in FIG. 122. At the time t0, the special figure variation game is in progress, the decoration 2 is displayed in a stopped state in the left decorative pattern display area 208a, the decoration 5 is displayed in a stopped state in the middle decorative pattern display area 208b, and the right decorative pattern is displayed. The decoration 0 is displayed in a stopped state in the display area 208c. The effect A is continued in the selected effect display area 800. As shown in FIG. 123(B), the effect α is continued from the speaker 120 at the time point t0.

FIG. 123(c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t1 shown in FIG. At time point t1, the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the decorative symbol in a stopped state. When the player presses the chance button 136 at time t1, the effect A ends in the selected effect display area 800 of the decorative design display device 208 of the first effect means, and the effect is called "M2: Space of Kiseki". The effect B for displaying a character string is started. On the other hand, in the second effect means, the effect is changed on condition that the waiting time of T seconds has elapsed from the time when the player operated the operating means, and the effect is changed until the waiting time elapses. Is not changed. Therefore, at the time point t1, the effect α is continued from the speaker 120, as shown in FIG. 123(C).

FIG. 123(d) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t2 shown in FIG. 122. At time t2, the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the decorative symbol in a stopped state. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at time t2 during the standby time of T seconds in the speaker 120 of the second effect means, effect B is displayed in the selected effect display area 800 of the decorative symbol display device 208 at time t2. When finished, the effect C that displays the character string "M3: Your Piece" is started. On the other hand, since the time T1 (eg, T1=0.5 seconds) from the time point t1 to the time point t2 is shorter than the waiting time T (eg, T=1 second), as illustrated in FIG. At time t2, the effect α is continued without changing the effect on the speaker 120.

Further, by pressing the chance button 136 at the time point t2, the measurement of the waiting time started by the previous pressing of the chance button 136 is reset, and the waiting time T (=1 second) is newly set from the time point t2. ..

FIG. 124(a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t3 shown in FIG. At time t3, the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the decorative symbol in a stopped state. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the operating means at time t3 during the waiting time of T seconds in the speaker 120, at the time t3, "M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!" is displayed on the selection screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. The effect D for displaying the character string is executed. On the other hand, since the time T2 from the time point t2 to the time point t3 (for example, T2=0.5 seconds) is shorter than the waiting time T, as shown in FIG. 124(A), the speaker 120 changes the effect at the time point t3. Production α is continued without being performed.

Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed at the time point t3, the measurement of the waiting time started by the previous pressing of the chance button 136 is reset, and the waiting time T (=1 second) is newly set from the time point t3. ..

FIG.124(b) has shown the production|presentation performed with the decorative design display device 208 at the time t4 shown in FIG. At the time t0, the special figure variation game is in progress, the decoration 2 is displayed in a stopped state in the left decorative pattern display area 208a, the decoration 5 is displayed in a stopped state in the middle decorative pattern display area 208b, and the right decorative pattern is displayed. The decoration 0 is displayed in a stopped state in the display area 208c. At the time point t4 when the waiting time T seconds has elapsed from the time point t3, the speaker 120 finishes the effect α in which the music piece 810 whose music title is “may be there...” ends, and as shown in FIG. 124(B). Then, the production δ in which the song 810 with the song name “Mega! Giga! Summer!” is played is started. On the other hand, the effect D is continued on the decorative pattern display device 208.

The time point tv shown in FIG. 122 is the time point when the decorative symbol in the special figure variation game is stopped and displayed. Time point t5 is a time point when a predetermined Ta second has elapsed from the time point tv. FIG.124(c) has shown the production|presentation performed with the decorative pattern display device 208 at the time t5 shown in FIG. The effect D is continued on the decorative pattern display device 208. Further, as shown in FIG. 124(C), the effect is stopped in the speaker 120 from the time point t5, and the speaker 120 is put into a silent state. It should be noted that when Ta seconds have passed since the stop of the fluctuation of the special map, not only the speaker 12 may be put into the silent state, but also another BGM may be played. Also, in the case of silence, the volume may be gradually decreased, or the volume may be decreased at once.

FIG.124(d) has shown the effect|action produced with the decorative pattern display device 208 at the time tw shown in FIG. The time point tw is a time point when Tb (>Ta) seconds have elapsed from the time point tv. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect D ends and the effect D'starts from the time point tw. The effect D'includes the effect on the demo screen including the characters "Yoshimune". Further, as shown in FIG. 124(D), the speaker 120 maintains the silent state at the time point tw.

FIG. 125(a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time tx shown in FIG. At time tx, after the time tw, the effect on the speaker 120 is in a silent state. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means during the demo screen display at this time tx, the demo screen disappears, the decoration 2 is stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 208a in the special figure variation game, and the middle decoration The decoration 5 is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and the image in which the decoration 0 is stopped and displayed is displayed in the right decoration symbol display area 208c. Also, the selection effect display area 800 is re-displayed, and the effect E that displays the character string "M5: Hot spring hormone" is started. On the other hand, in the speaker 120 of the second effect means, since the effect is changed on condition that the waiting time of T seconds has elapsed from the time when the player operated the operation means, the effect of the effect is maintained until the waiting time elapses. No changes are made. Therefore, at the time point tx, the speaker 120 maintains the silent state, as shown in FIG. 125(A). As described above, in this example, if the selection operation is performed during the demo screen is displayed, the demo display is canceled and the symbol display screen is displayed. However, after the demo screen is displayed for a certain period of time, the symbol display screen is displayed. You may do so. Further, the selection operation may be disabled while the demo screen is displayed.

FIG. 125(b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point ty shown in FIG. 122. Time point ty is a time point when the special figure variation game is started after a lapse of time Tc seconds from time point tx. In the selection effect display area 800, the effect E for displaying the character string "M5: hot spring hormone" is continued. On the other hand, in the speaker 120, when the period Tc from the time point tx to the time point ty is Tc≧T with respect to the waiting time T, as shown in FIG. The production ε in which the song 810 with the song name “Onsen Hormone” flows is started.

FIG. 125C also shows the effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point ty shown in FIG. 122. In the selection effect display area 800, the effect E for displaying the character string "M5: hot spring hormone" is continued. On the other hand, in the speaker 120, when the period Tc from the time point tx to the time point ty is Tc<T with respect to the standby time T, as shown in FIG. The production δ in which the song 810 with the song title “Mega! Giga! Summer!” is played is started.

FIG. 126 shows a temporal operation of the pachinko machine 100 in the second modification of the fourth example according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis of FIG. 126 shows a time series, and time passes from left to right. In the upper part of FIG. 126, t0 to t5 indicate various operations or time points such as start and end of effects. The middle part of FIG. 126 shows execution states of various effects by the effect means. The first effect means of this example includes a decorative pattern display device 208, and the second effect means includes a speaker 120. The lower part shows the operating means. The operation means of this example includes a chance button 136, for example.

The present modification is characterized in that, in addition to the operation shown in the fourth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 100 is in an error state, the first and second rendering means display an error. For this reason, among the temporal operations shown in FIG. 126, except for the error display, they are the same as the temporal operations shown in FIG. 95 of the fourth embodiment, and therefore the description of the same operations is omitted. As shown in FIG. 126, when an error state occurs in the pachinko machine 100 at a certain time point between the time point t0 and the time point t1, the first display means displays an error together with the selected display. The error display is continued until time t5 after the error state disappears. Further, as shown in FIG. 126, in synchronization with the error display being performed by the first rendering means, the second rendering means outputs an error sound together with the selected rendering.

In the example shown in FIG. 126, the error display and the output of the error sound are started at the same time, but the error image may be displayed first and the error sound may be output after the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). , And vice versa. In addition, an error image is displayed first for an error output pattern that always outputs an error display and an error sound, and when the error state is not resolved even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds from error detection), the error sound is output. May be output, and vice versa. That is, an error output pattern may be used that cancels the output that is delayed when the error state is resolved. Further, the error sound may be made to continuously flow until the error state is released, or the output of the error sound may be terminated after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the error state was entered.

FIG. 127 shows a selection effect executed by the first and second effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in the second modification. 127(a) to (d) show the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first effect means. 127(A) to (D) schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second effect means. In each figure, (a) and (A), (b) and (B), (c) and (C), and (d) and (D) show the effects of the same period.

127(a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t0 shown in FIG. 126. At time t0, the special figure variation game ends, and in the center of the display area of the decorative design display device 208 of the first effect means, decorations 0 to 9 are applied to the left middle right decorative design display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c from the top. The decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner by the images that sequentially move downward (indicated by the downward arrows in the figure). At the lower right of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, a selection effect display area 800 is provided in the shape of a horizontally long rectangle, for example. In the selection effect display area 800, an effect A is displayed in which a character string "M1: may be there..." is displayed. In the selection effect in this example, the song name of the song played from the speaker 120 is displayed in characters. As shown in FIG. 127(A), at time point t0, the effect α of the music piece 810 having the music title “May be there...” is executed from the speaker 120.

127(b) shows an effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 from the time point t1 to the time point t2 shown in FIG. 126. Time point t1 is a time point when the player presses the chance button 136. At time t1, the special figure variation game is continuing. In the selection effect display area 800 of the first effect means, the effect A that displays the character string "M1: may be there..." is terminated at time t1 and the character "M2: Space of Kiseki" is displayed. The effect B for displaying a row is started. The character string “M2: Space of Kiseki” in the effect B indicates the title of the music played from the speaker 120. On the other hand, in the speaker 120, the effect is changed on the condition that the waiting time of Ta seconds has elapsed from the time when the player operated the first operation means, so the effect is not changed until the waiting time elapses. I don't know. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 127(B), at the time point t1, the production α in which the music piece 810 having the music title "may be there..." is continued. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 is in an error state from a certain time point between the time point t0 and the time point t1, and as shown in FIG. 127(b), in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, at the time point t1, a special figure is produced along with the special effect A. An error display is displayed in which the character string “error!!” is displayed in a large size with a higher contrast than the effect related to the variable game. Further, as shown in FIG. 127(B), at the time point t1, the speaker 120 outputs not only the effect α but also an error sound 830 that is a sound louder than the effect α and indicates “error !!”. In this example, the display of "error!!" on the decorative pattern display device and the output of the error sound from the speaker are started simultaneously. It should be noted that an error sound may be output from the speaker after "error !!" is displayed on the decorative pattern display device, and after the error sound is output from the speaker, "error !!" is displayed on the decorative pattern display device. May be displayed. While the pachinko machine 100 is in the error state, the speaker 120 outputs the error sound 830 together with the output of the music piece 810 of the effect α as described above, but the output of the music piece 810 is eliminated and only the error sound 830 is output. You may not hear it. Furthermore, the output method of the song 810 and the error sound 830 may be changed depending on the content of the error state. For example, in the case of “ball full error of lower plate 128” mainly for notifying the player, the player can end the error notification by moving the ball from the lower plate to the box. Both the song 810 and the error sound 830 may be output with the volume being lower than or the same as the error sound 830, or "door opening error" that needs to be notified to at least the game shop staff as well as the player. In the case of “payout error”, “magnet detection error”, or the like, only an error sound may be output because it is a serious error that requires confirmation by a store clerk.

FIG. 127(c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 from time t2 to time t3 shown in FIG. 126. At time t2, the special figure variation game continues. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at the time point t2 during the standby time of Ta seconds in the speaker 120 of the second effect means, at the time point t2 in the selection effect display area 800 of the first effect means. Then, the effect B that displays the character string "M2: Space of Kiseki" ends, and the effect C that displays the character string "M3: Your Piece" starts. The character string “M3: Kimi no Kakera” in the effect C indicates the song name of the song played from the speaker 120. On the other hand, the time T1 (for example, T1=0.5 seconds) from the time point t1 to the time point t2 is shorter than the waiting time Ta (for example, Ta=1 second), and as illustrated in FIG. At time t2, the effect is not changed on the speaker 120, and the effect α of the music 810 with the music title “may be there...” is continued. In addition, the error state of the pachinko machine 100 continues, and as shown in FIG. 127(c), in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, at the time t2, the contrast is higher than that of the effect related to the special figure variation game together with the effect A. The error display is displayed with a large character string "Error!!". Further, as shown in FIG. 127C, at the time point t2, the speaker 120 outputs not only the effect α but also an error sound 830 that is a sound louder than the effect α and indicates “error !!”.

FIG. 127(d) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 from time t4 to time t5 shown in FIG. 126. At a time point t4 when a certain time has elapsed from the time point t3, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. In the selected effect display area 800, an effect D is displayed which displays the character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” at time t4. Further, as shown in FIG. 127(D), an effect δ in which a music piece 810 having a music title “Mega! Giga! Summer!” is played from the speaker 120. Further, the error state of the pachinko machine 100 continues, and as shown in FIG. 127(d), in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, at the time point t4, the contrast is higher than that of the effect related to the special figure variation game together with the effect A. The error display is displayed with a large character string "Error!!". Further, as shown in FIG. 127(D), at the time point t2, the speaker 120 outputs not only the effect δ but also an error sound 830 that is a sound louder than the effect δ and indicates “error !!”. Thus, the selective effect can be performed even in the error state, but the selective effect may not be performed in the error state. Further, there may or may not be a selection effect for each error content, the selection effect display area 800 may not be displayed during an error, and at least a part or all of the selection effect may be displayed due to an error display. May not be visible (or may not be visible).

FIG. 128 shows another example of the selection effect executed by the first and second effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in the second modification. 128(a) to (d) show the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first effect means. 128A to 128D schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second effect production means. In each figure, (a) and (A), (b) and (B), (c) and (C), and (d) and (D) show the effects of the same period.

128(a) and 128(A) show the effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t0 shown in FIG. 126, and the same effect operation as in FIGS. 127(a) and 127(A) is performed. There is.

128(b), (B) to FIG. 128(d), and (D) the time points of the productions correspond to FIG. 127(b), (B) to FIG. 127(d), (D), respectively. .. 127(b) to 127(d), the selection effect display area 800 is displayed even during the error state so that the selection effect can be performed. On the other hand, in the present example, as shown in FIGS. 128(b) to 128(d), an error display image indicating that an error has occurred in the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed, During the error state, the selection effect cannot be performed. It should be noted that the selection effect may be performed even when the selection effect display area is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the display of the error display image on the decorative pattern display device and the output of the error sound from the speaker are started simultaneously. Note that the error sound may be output from the speaker after the error display image is displayed on the decorative design display device, or the error display image may be displayed on the decoration design display device after the error sound is output from the speaker. You may do it.

Next, Examples 11 to 19 will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 146. First, a configuration that is used in almost common among the configurations illustrated in the drawings used in the subsequent embodiments will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 129(a) and 129(g). In FIG. 129(a), a decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure 1 display device 212, a special figure 2 display device 214, and a general figure display device that form a part of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 210, the special figure 1 reservation lamp 218, the special figure 2 reservation lamp 220, and the general figure reservation lamp 216 are shown typically. The special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure display device 210, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, and the general figure holding lamp 216 are shown below the decorative pattern display device 208. The special figure 2 display device 214 is shown on the right side of the special figure 1 display device 212, and the universal figure display device 210 is shown on the right side of the special figure 2 display device 214. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is shown on the upper side of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 is shown on the upper side of the special figure 2 display device 214, and the universal figure holding lamp 216 is on the general figure display device 210. Shown at the top. Further, the unlit portions of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure display device 210, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, and the general figure holding lamp 216 are shown in white. , The illuminated part is shown in black. In addition, since a maximum of four general-purpose reservations can be stored in the present embodiment, four LEDs of the general-purpose storage lamp 216 are provided.

In FIG. 129(a), symbol display areas 208a to 208c for performing variable display and stop display of the decorative symbol are assigned to the central portion of the image display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the effect display area 208d is enlarged and a predetermined effect is executed, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed in areas other than the central portion of the image display area, for example, in the lower right corner, as necessary. In some cases.

A fourth symbol display area is provided on the upper right side in the effect display area 208d. The upper side in the fourth symbol display area is the fourth symbol display area t3 for general figure, the middle side is the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1, and the lower side is the fourth symbol display area t2 for special figure 2. Is. While the special figure 1 variation game is not operating, an image representing "○" as the special figure 1 fourth symbol is displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area t1. While the special figure 2 variation game is not operating, an image representing "△" as the special figure 2 fourth symbol is displayed in the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display area t2. While the universal figure variation game is not operating, an image representing "◇" is displayed in the universal figure fourth symbol display area t3 as the universal figure fourth symbol. Further, during execution of the special figure variation game or during execution of the general figure variation game, a white background image is displayed in each of the fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3 as the fourth symbol.

An area surrounded by a square frame in the lower center of the effect display area 208d is a variable icon display area C in which a variable icon can be displayed. The variation icon is an icon displayed in the variation icon display area C when the holding is exhausted and the special figure variation game is started. By changing the display mode of the variable icon in the variable icon display area C, it is possible to notify (advance the relevant variation) of the success or failure of the special figure variation game with a predetermined reliability. The frame-shaped image on the outer periphery of the variable icon display area C may be displayed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area C). , May be always displayed, or may not be always displayed. Further, the variable icon may not be displayed, and only the hold icon may be displayed.

A special figure 1 hold icon display area A having a horizontally long rectangular shape is provided adjacent to the variable icon display area C on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area A, the number of special figure 1 hold icons a1, a2, etc. corresponding to the number of holds is displayed. In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon allows notification (prefetching notice) of the result of the special figure 1 variable game related to the hold with a predetermined reliability. In this example, a white circular hold icon is displayed as the display mode having the lowest reliability. In this embodiment, a maximum of four special figure 1 hold icons can be displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area A. The plurality of special figure 1 hold icons are arranged and displayed in order from the right to the left in the special figure 1 hold icon display area as the holding order becomes lower. In this example, only the special figure 1 reserved icon display area is displayed, but of course the special figure 2 reserved icon display area may be displayed together. In that case, for example, a special figure 2 hold icon display area B having a vertically long rectangular shape is provided adjacent to the right side surface of the effect display area 208d. The special figure 2 hold icon display area B is not displayed when there is no special figure 2 hold, but is displayed only when the special figure 2 hold is accumulated, but it may be always displayed. Good. During the probability substation support, the game ball easily enters the special map 2 starting port 232, so that the player can easily visually recognize the special map 2 hold icon displayed in the special map 2 hold icon display area B. As described above, the display position of the special figure 1 hold icon display area A and the display position of the special figure 2 hold icon display area B are switched.

In addition, the state where all the segments are shown in white on the special figure 1 display device 212 indicates that the special figure 1 variable display is being performed (see FIG. 129(b)). The same applies to the special figure 2 display device 214 and the universal figure display device 210. Further, the variable display of each decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c during execution of the special figure variation game is represented by a downward arrow (see FIG. 129(f)).

FIG. 129(g) shows a state in which the button effect is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the display means. The display of the button effect includes a display regarding the chance button 136 as the first type of display. There is a button display as the first display among the displays regarding the chance button 136. The button display may include an operation request image (hereinafter, may be referred to as “button image”) in a display mode imitating the chance button 136, and a button operation reception valid period (hereinafter, may be referred to as “operation valid period”). At least one of a valid period image showing the rest of (Yes) and a display prompting other button operation is included. In addition, the display of the button effect can include an effect display such as a notice of notice that is executed in association with the button display as the second display. The button effect is displayed by either one of a still image display and an animation display or a combination thereof. Note that the valid period image in the present embodiment is an image (for example, a meter (gauge) image) in which the display mode is changed from the start position to the end position according to the passage of time. It may be a countdown display.

The special figure variation game and the big hit game shown in each of the following embodiments are executed by the same control operation as that described in the above embodiments. In the following embodiments, the effects performed in the special figure variation game and the big hit game will be specifically described, and the control operation will also be referred to only when particularly necessary.

(Example 11) A special figure variation game and a big hit game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 11 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 133. First, an example of the flow of a series of effects when the result of the special figure variation game is a big hit will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130. 129(a) to 130(h) show the special figure variation game in time series in this order. In the figures showing the special figure variation game in time series, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures.

FIG. 129(a) shows a state in which the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not operating, and the universal figure variation game is also not operating. The special figure 1 display device 212 is displaying the special symbol "Special figure F" in a stopped state. The special figure 2 display device 214 is stopping and displaying the special symbol "special figure d". The public figure display device 210 stops and displays the off-design “Public figure B”. Each of the fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3 of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displaying the fourth symbol indicating that the game is inactive. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols, and it is informed that the hit/miss determination result of the previous special figure variation game is out of order. There is.

The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 informs that there are two special figure 1 holds. The special figure 2 hold lamp 220 notifies that there is no special figure 2 hold. The universal figure hold lamp 216 informs that there is no ordinary figure hold.

In the special figure 1 hold icon display area A, two special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 are displayed in a white circular display mode.

129(b) to 129(f) show the state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started. The start order of the special figure 1 variation game is, in this embodiment, one LED of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned off and the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the variable display, and further the fourth symbol display for special figure 1 The fourth symbol of the area t1 starts the variable display (see FIG. 129(b)), then the display of the decrease animation of the special figure 1 hold icon is executed (see FIG. 129(c) to (e)), and then The variable display of the decorative pattern is started (see FIG. 129(f)). The order of the start points of these operations may be changed.

In the display of the decrease animation of the special figure 1 hold icon, the displayed special figure 1 hold icons start to move to the right all at once (see FIG. 129(c)), and the special order 1 having the first hold order is placed. The hold icon a1 goes over the special icon 1 hold icon display area A and enters the variable icon display area C, and the remaining hold icons are moved to the position one right from the original position to raise the hold order by one. To stop (see FIGS. 129(c) to (e)). The icon image that has entered the variable icon display area C is referred to as a variable icon.

FIG. 129(g) shows a state where the display of the button effect is started in the effect display area 208d. A horizontally long rectangular button effect area is secured in the center of the effect display area 208d, the character image is displayed in the left quarter of the button effect area, and the button image is displayed in the remaining three quarters. The button display for displaying the valid period image and is displayed. The valid period image is displayed below the button image. The display priority of the button effect area is set higher than the display priority of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Therefore, due to the image of the button effect area, the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c on the rear side of the button effect area is hidden and invisible. The player knows that the button effect has started by looking at the image shown in FIG. 129(g), but at this stage, the button operation cannot be accepted because the countdown of the operation valid period has not started, so the chance button Even if 136 is pressed, the pressing operation cannot be accepted.

FIG. 129(h) shows a button operation acceptance permission state in which a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the button display shown in FIG. 129(g) was started. Although the display in the button effect area has not changed, since the countdown of the operation valid period is started at this stage, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is accepted.

FIG. 129(i) shows a state in which the valid period for accepting a button operation has passed, and the bar-shaped portion of the valid period image display is somewhat shortened to the right.

FIG. 129(j) exemplifies the display of the button effect that is performed when the player presses the chance button 136 and the press is accepted. The button image and the effective period image are erased, and the image of the character string "Chance is!!" is displayed in the right three-quarters area in the button effect area. The display of the character string image may be a notice of the result of the special figure variation game. Further, it may be a notice of the possibility of developing into SP (super) reach production. In this example, the display of the button effect is ended by displaying the character string image.

FIG. 129(k) shows a state in which the button effect area disappears and the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c becomes visible.

In FIG. 129(l), "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped in a fluctuation state in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is continued in the middle symbol display area 208b. The state where the reach production is started is shown.

FIG. 129(m) shows a state in which the image display of the reach effect gradually changes to a white display due to the fade-out process. The symbol display areas 208a to 208c are moved to the lower right corner of the image display area, and the decorative symbol fluctuation is reduced and displayed. The special figure 1 hold icon display area A, the special figure 1 hold icon, the variable icon display area C, and the change icon are not displayed during the SP reach production shown in FIGS. 129(m) to 130(h).

FIG. 129(n) to FIG. 130(a) show a state in which the SP reach effect with a scene where two samurai fight is performed. FIGS. 130(b) to (d) are continuation of the SP reach effect, in which the effect that one samurai has won is made, and there is a high possibility that the judgment result of the fluctuation is likely to win. doing. Further, FIG. 130(d) shows a state in which the combination of decorative symbols is temporarily stopped at "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" in the reduced-size symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 130E shows a state in which the image display of the SP reach effect is gradually changed to a white display due to the fade-out process. The fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3 are displayed, but the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are not displayed.

In FIG. 130(f), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged to their original positions in the center of the image display area, and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is temporarily displayed as a combination of decorative symbols. Shows the state.

FIG. 130(g) shows a state in which the "special drawing A" of the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special drawing 1 display device 212. In the special symbol 1 for the fourth symbol display region t1 of the image display region, the fourth symbol indicating that the special symbol 1 variation game is inactive is stopped and displayed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" indicating a hit as a combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 130(h) is a jackpot start display, and shows a state in which a character string image of “probably strange jackpot” is displayed on almost the entire image display area to notify that the 15R special jackpot is won. In the present embodiment, the hit determination result is the special figure A, and when the decorative pattern is the combination for the probability variation big hit, the big hit start display is displayed as "probability variation big hit", and the hit determination result is the special figure A or the feature. In the case of FIG. B, the big hit start display is displayed as "big hit" when the decorative pattern is a combination for big hit.

130(f') to (h') are the same state as FIG. 129(l) when the reach effect of "decoration 6" is started in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In place of the effects of FIGS. 130(f) to 130(h), the effects when the 15R jackpot is won are illustrated. 130(f') continues from FIG. 130(e). In FIG. 130(f'), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged to their original positions in the center of the image display area, and "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" is temporarily stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative patterns. It shows the state.

FIG. 130(g′) shows a state in which the special-feature 1 display device 212 stops displaying the “special feature B” of the big hit symbol. In the image display area, the fourth symbol indicating that the special figure 1 variation game is not in operation is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" indicating a hit as a combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 130(h') shows a state in which a character string image of "big hit" is displayed on almost the entire image display area to notify that the 15R big hit is won.

FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b) exemplify the continuation of another SP reach effect continued from FIG. 130(a), in which an effect lost by one samurai has been made, and whether or not the fluctuation has occurred is judged. It gives advance notice that there is a high possibility that the results will be lost. The special figure 1 hold icon display area A and the special figure 1 hold icon are not displayed during the SP reach effect shown in FIGS. 131(a) to 131(c). Further, FIG. 131(b) shows a state in which the combination of decorative symbols is temporarily stopped at "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" in the reduced-size symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 131C shows a state in which the image display of the SP reach effect is gradually changed to a white display due to the fade-out process. The fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3 are displayed, but the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are not displayed.

In FIG. 131(d), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged to their original positions in the center of the image display area, and "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is temporarily displayed as a combination of decorative symbols. Shows the state. In this state, the display of the special figure 1 hold icon display area A, the special figure 1 hold icon, the variable icon display area C, and the change icon is restarted, and is displayed until the end of the special figure 1 change game shown in FIG. 131(h). It

FIG. 131(e) shows a state where the special symbol 1 display device 212 stops displaying the special symbol “Special symbol F”. In the image display area, the fourth symbol indicating that the special figure 1 variation game is not in operation is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" indicating a deviation as a combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

131(f) to 131(h) show the display of the erasing animation of the variable icon. In this example, after the special figure variation game is finished, the variation icon erasing animation is displayed while the decorative design is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the display of the change icon deletion animation may be performed at another timing. FIG. 131(f) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon starts moving downward from the fluctuation icon display area C, and the lower third of the circular outline of the fluctuation icon disappears outside the image display area. There is. FIG. 131(g) shows a state in which the variation icon has moved further downward, and the variation icon has disappeared outside the image display area to the extent that the upper portion of the circular contour can be visually recognized slightly. FIG. 131(h) shows a state in which the variable icon completely disappears from the variable icon display area C and the display of the variable icon deletion animation ends. It should be noted that the animation of erasing the variable icon may be performed during the pattern change, for example, the timing before one decorative pattern (for example, the left decorative pattern) is temporarily stopped and displayed, and one decorative pattern may be displayed. It may be the timing after the design (for example, the left decorative design) is temporarily stopped and displayed, or may be the timing before or after the plurality of decorative designs are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the decorative design is shaken and fluctuated. The timing may be before or after being displayed.

Next, an example of the flow of effects (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “big hit effects”) when the result of the special figure variation game is a big hit and the big hit game is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 132. 132(a) to 132(g) show the big hit effect in time series in this order. A speaker 120 is displayed on the right side of the decorative pattern display device 208 in each drawing of FIG. 132. In addition, in the figures showing the big hit production in time series, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures. FIG. 132(a) shows the same state as FIG. 130(h) following FIG. 130(g). Almost the entire image display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 becomes the effect display area 208d, and the character string image of "probably strange big hit" is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d to notify that the 15R special big hit has been won. ing. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 informs that there is one special figure 1 hold.

While the character string image of "probable variation big hit" is displayed in the effect display area 208d, as a general rule, the sound does not flow from the speaker 120, but BGM or SE (sound effect: sound effect) for notifying the 15R special big hit, etc. May be output, BGM or SE that is output during the 15R special jackpot round may be output, or an effect that has been executed before being notified that the 15R special jackpot has been won, such as SP reach. The BGM that is output in the medium jackpot final effect may be continuously output.

FIG. 132(b) shows a state in which the big hit effect (effect including the second effect and the fourth effect described later) in the 15R special big hit game is started in the first round. On almost the entire effect display area 208d, a second effect (effect H') in which the movie in which the princess character appears is displayed from the beginning (effect) is executed. From the speaker 120, the song of the fourth effect (effect O') corresponding to the second effect is played from the beginning of the song. In addition, a character string image "may be there" is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d. The character string image shows the movie name of the displayed movie and the song name of the playing song. In addition, the number of rounds in which the big hit effect is being executed is displayed in the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d. In this example, a character string image of "1R" is displayed to notify that the number of rounds is "1". In the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d, "decoration 7" is displayed, and it is confirmed that the big hit was stopped and displayed in the symbol combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". Further, in this embodiment, the character string image of "1R" and the symbol combination of "decoration 7" constitute a part of the big hit performance. The same applies to the following examples.

FIG. 132(c) shows a state in which the 15R special jackpot jackpot effect continues, the second to tenth rounds have already ended, and the jackpot effect in the 11th round is being executed. The last scene of the movie is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the ending of the song is flowing from the speaker 120. In addition, a character string image of "11R" is displayed in the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d to notify that the number of rounds is "11". Also, by the time the big hit game of the 11th round is started, 3 balls have been won in the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 holds 1 to 4 special figure 1 holds. It has been reported that the number has increased. After that, the first lap of the big hit production with movies and songs ends.

FIG. 132(d) shows a state in which the first lap of the big hit production is finished and the second lap of the big hit production by the movie and music is started during the eleventh round. In the effect display area 208d, the movie in which the princess character appears is displayed from the beginning, and the music is played from the speaker 120 from the beginning.

The effects such as movies and songs may be repeatedly executed. Further, when the production is repeatedly executed, control may be performed such that a loop is set in the production data to return from the end time of the production to the start time of the production, or control to return to the middle part of the production from the end time of the production You may Moreover, you may make it the data in which an effect is repeated run.

FIG. 132(e) shows a state in which the big hit effect is continuously executed in the fifteenth round, which is the final round. Even after the final round ends and the attacker 234 is closed, the big hit production is executed for a certain period of time. A character string image of "15R" is displayed in the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d to notify that the number of rounds is "15". Also, by the time the fourteenth round jackpot game is started, four game balls have passed through the universal figure starting port 228, so that the universal figure hold lamp 216 changes the number of universal figure holds from four to four. It is reported that the number has increased.

In the interval from the end of the final round and closing of the attacker 234 to the start of the jackpot end effect shown in FIG. 132(f) described later, the jackpot effect executed during the jackpot round is executed for a certain period. Good. In this case, the big hit effect may be continuously executed only in the speaker 120, or the big hit effect may be continuously executed only in the effect display area 208d. Here, the fixed period may be a period shorter than the interval, a period having the same length as the interval, or a period longer than the interval. Further, the big hit effect may be executed halfway through the big hit end effect, or may be executed until the end of the big hit end effect. Further, the jackpot effect may be stopped, erased, interrupted, ended, or stopped at the interval.

FIG. 132(f) shows a state in which a big hit end effect for informing that the big hit game has ended is started. A character string image of "probability variation plunge" is displayed in the two-thirds area on the left side of the effect display area 208d, a character image of a samurai is displayed in the remaining one-third area, and the jackpot ends from the speaker 120. The production BGM flows, and it is notified that the state will shift to the probability variation state.

The effect display area 208d and the speaker 120 of the decorative symbol display device 208 may continuously execute the same effect as the big hit effect executed during the big hit round during the big hit end effect, or may be executed during the big hit round. You may make it perform the effect different from the big hit effect. Further, only one of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120 may continuously execute the same effect as the big hit effect executed during the big hit round.

FIG. 132(g) shows a state during a variable display start waiting time of a special figure described later. During a period before a predetermined time (for example, 4 ms) has passed after the condition device operation signal described later is turned off, the "decoration 7" displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c before the jackpot game is started. -Decorative 7-The combination of decorative patterns of "Decorative 7" is displayed again. In the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of "probably changing" is displayed. Moreover, the fourth symbol indicating that the game is not operating is stopped and displayed in each of the fourth symbol display regions t1 to t3 in the upper right corner of the effect display region 208d. Since the probability change is in progress, the display positions of the special figure 1 reserved icon display area A and the special figure 2 reserved icon display area B are switched. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area A, four special figure 1 hold icons are displayed in a white circular display mode. No special figure 2 hold icon is displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area B. Also, the next special figure variation game has not started.

Definitely change big hit big hit production (when the game state after the big hit is special figure high accuracy normal figure high accuracy production) and other big hit big hit performance (the game state after the big hit is special figure low accuracy normal figure high accuracy Alternatively, the effect in the case of the special figure high-accuracy general figure high-accuracy) may be different, or the same effect may be performed. In addition, even if the game state after the big hit is the special figure high accuracy general figure high accuracy state, the game state after the big hit is the special figure low accuracy general figure high accuracy It may be the same. In addition, the effect may be continuously executed during the interval.

Next, in order to determine the execution of the big hit effect including the second effect and the fourth effect shown by using FIGS. 132(b) to 132(e), in FIGS. 132(a) and 132(b), The jackpot production performed during the period will be described with reference to FIG. 133. The big hit effect shown in FIGS. 133(a) to (h) is, in this order, selecting the first effect and the third effect, and selecting the second effect and the fourth effect to be executed in the big hit game (hereinafter, , "May be referred to as "effect selection effect") in chronological order. Further, FIG. 133(i) shows a state in which the big hit production including the second production and the fourth production selected in the production selection production is started. In these figures, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures.

A speaker 120 is displayed on the right side of the decorative pattern display device 208 in each of the drawings in FIG. 133. In the subsequent FIGS. 134 to 136, 138 to 144, and 146, the speaker 120 is displayed on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the present embodiment and the following embodiments, the decorative design display device 208 which is the display means may be used as an example of the first effect means, and the speaker 120 which is the sound output means may be used as an example of the second effect means. is there.

FIG. 133(a) shows a state continued from FIG. 132(a), and shows a state in which the effect selection effect is started. Almost the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a production display area 208d, and a horizontally long rectangular frame image is displayed in the center of the production display area 208d. Almost the entire area within the frame image is a display area for movie playback. Further, a character string image indicating the title of the effect is displayed below the display area. The title of the effect indicates the movie name of the movie that can be selected as the first effect executed by the decorative pattern display device 208, and the song name of the song that can be selected as the third effect that is executed by the speaker 120. As will be described later, the third effect corresponds to the first effect. In the effect selection effect in this embodiment, the first effect is selected and executed during the period of the first period. Also, the third effect is selected and executed during the period of the third period. In both the first period and the third period in this embodiment, the chance button 136 is pressed as described later from the time when the effect selection effect shown in FIG. It is the period until the fade-out processing shown is completed and the effect selection effect is ended.

In the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of "Please select effect" is displayed in order to encourage the player to select a big hit effect to be executed in the big hit game. Further, a direction key image imitating the direction key 139 is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d, and a button image imitating the chance button 136 is displayed on the right side thereof. A character string image of “selection” is displayed below the direction key image, and notifies that the effect executed as the selectable effect can be changed to another effect by operating the direction key 139. .. Further, a character string image of “OK” is displayed below the button image, and by pressing the chance button 136, a second period executed in the second period started after the end of the first period. It is informed that the effect and the fourth effect executed in the fourth period started after the end of the third period can be determined. In the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d, the number of rounds in which the effect selection effect is executed is shown. In this example, a character string image of "1R" is displayed to notify that the number of rounds is "1". In the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d, "decoration 7" is displayed, and it is confirmed that the big hit was stopped and displayed in the symbol combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7".

In the frame image, as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period, a movie in which a princess character whose movie name is “may be there” appears is displayed. The effect H is being executed. At the beginning of the effect H, the first (first) image of the movie is displayed in a paused state (still image state). At this time, no music is playing from the speaker 120 and the speaker 120 is silent. This state is the default production mode of the production selection production according to the present embodiment. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), the pause of the image is released, and the movie effect by the moving image is started in the frame image. In synchronization with the start of the movie effect, from the speaker 120, as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the period of the third period, the song with the song name “may be there” is at the top. Execution of the effect O flowing from is started. In this example, thereafter, the player operates the first (first) direction key 139 while the effect selection effect by the effects H and O is being executed. In this example, the operation of the direction key 139 is performed after the movie effect by the moving image is started, but the operation of the direction key 139 may be performed before the movie effect by the moving image is started. In this example, the start of the movie effect by the moving image and the start of the song are synchronized, but they may not be synchronized. Also, the movie production by the moving image and the song may be started at the same time.

FIG. 133(b) shows a state after the production selection production is executed and the player operates the direction key 139 for the first time during the production selection production by the productions H and O. ing. When the direction key 139 is operated, the fade-out process is started. By the fade-out process, the display of the effect H becomes invisible because the frame image gradually changes to white, and in synchronization with this, the music flowing from the speaker 120 gradually decreases and becomes silent, and the performance of the effect O is performed. It becomes inaudible. It should be noted that instead of the fade-out processing, a switching effect may be executed, and the effect next to the effect H (for example, effect I) may be executed immediately. The same applies to the embodiment of the effect in which the fade-out process is executed thereafter, and the effect executed next to the effect being executed may be immediately executed without executing the fade-out process. ..

In this embodiment, the movie effect by the moving image and the song end in synchronization with each other, but the movie effect may be erased first and the song may be erased thereafter, and vice versa. Good. Also, the movie production by the moving image and the song may be started at the same time. The same may be applied to the following embodiments.

In the present embodiment, the display (or the display between the effects) by the fade-out process of FIG. 133(b) is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). Here, when the direction key 139 is further operated (for example, 0.02 seconds after the start of the display) during the display by the fade-out process of FIG. 133B (during the display between the effects), After the display by the fade-out process of FIG. 133(b) is finished (that is, after 0.1 second elapses), the effect selection effect of FIG. 133(g) described later may be executed, and the fade-out of FIG. 133(b) is performed. The display by the processing is terminated halfway (for example, the display by the fade-out processing of FIG. 133(b) is finished by 0.02 seconds), and the display by the fade-out processing of FIG. 133(f) is displayed for the remaining time of the predetermined period (for example, (For 0.08 seconds), the display by the fade-out process of FIG. 133(b) is terminated halfway (for example, the display by the fade-out process of FIG. 133(b) is finished in 0.02 seconds). The display by the fade-out process of FIG. 133(f) may be performed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). The same may be applied to the following embodiments.

FIG. 133(c) shows a state in which the effect selection effect after the fade-out process is executed. Execution of the effect I is started in the frame image, and execution of the effect P is started in the speaker 120. As a result of the operation of the direction key 139, the effect is switched from the effect H to the effect I and from the effect O to the effect P in this manner. In the lower part of the display area for movie playback in the frame image, a character string image indicating the title of the effect is displayed.

In the frame image, as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period, an effect I is displayed to display a movie in which a grandfather character whose movie name is "Space of Kiseki" appears. Is started. At the beginning of the effect I, the first (first) image of the movie is displayed in a paused state (still image state). At this time, no music is playing from the speaker 120 and the speaker 120 is silent. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), the pause of the image is released, and the movie effect by the moving image is started in the frame image. In synchronization with the start of the movie effect, the speaker 120 plays a song with the song name “Universe of Kiseki” from the beginning as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the third period. The effect P is started. The movie starts from the beginning of the effect I (start timing of the first period), and the effect P is started from the speaker 120 after a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) from the start of the effect I. Alternatively, on the contrary, the output of the music by the speaker 120 is started from the beginning of the effect P, and the effect I is started after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the effect P (for example, 0.5 seconds later). Alternatively, the effect I and the effect P may be started in synchronization with the start timing of the first period.

It should be noted that in the present embodiment, the production of the movie effect by the moving image is started, and the song is started after the lapse of a predetermined period from the start of the movie effect, but it may be reversed. Further, the movie effect by the moving image and the song may be started in synchronization, or the movie effect by the moving image and the song may be started at the same time. The same may be applied to the following embodiments.

133(d) to (e) show a state in which the effect selection effect by the effect I and effect P is being executed subsequent to FIG. 133(c). In this example, thereafter, the player operates the directional key 139 for the second time during the execution of the effect selection effect by the effect I and the effect P.

FIG. 133(f) shows a state after the production selection production is executed and the player operates the directional key 139 for the second time during the production selection production by the production I and the production P. ing. When the direction key 139 is operated, the fade-out process is started. Due to the fade-out processing, the frame image gradually changes to white and the display of the effect I becomes invisible, and in synchronization with this, the music flowing from the speaker 120 gradually decreases and becomes silent, and the performance of the effect P is performed. It becomes inaudible. Instead of the fade-out process, a switching effect may be executed.

FIG. 133(g) shows a state in which the effect selection effect after the fade-out process is executed. Execution of the effect H is started in the frame image, and execution of the effect O is started in the speaker 120. As a result of the operation of the direction key 139, the effect is switched from the effect I to the effect H and from the effect P to the effect O in this way. In the lower part of the display area for movie playback in the frame image, a character string image indicating the title of the effect is displayed.

In the frame image, as one of the multiple effects displayed during the first period, the effect of displaying the movie in which the princess character whose movie name is "may be" appears. H is running. At the beginning of the effect H, the first (first) image of the movie is displayed in a paused state (still image state). At this time, no music is playing from the speaker 120 and the speaker 120 is silent. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), the pause of the image is released, and the movie effect by the moving image is started in the frame image. In synchronization with the start of the movie effect, from the speaker 120, as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the period of the third period, the song with the song name “may be there” is at the top. Execution of the effect O flowing from is started.

In this example, thereafter, the player depresses the chance button 136 while the effect selection effect by the effect H and the effect O is being executed. By pressing the chance button 136, the effect H started in FIG. 133(g) is determined as the first effect, and the effect O started in FIG. 133(g) is determined as the third effect. The song name of the third effect is the same as the movie name of the first effect, and the third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect. Further, by pressing the chance button 136, the second effect executed in the second period starting from FIG. 133(i) is determined, and executed in the fourth period starting from FIG. 133(i). The fourth production is decided. In addition, when the effect is determined, the effect being executed may be stopped, the still image displayed first may be displayed as the movie, and the determination BGM or the determination sound may be output. And/or the movie being executed may be executed as it is. The timing at which the effect is stopped may be the timing at which the effect is determined (for example, FIG. 133(g)), but the timing during which the display by the fade-out process is being executed (for example, FIG. 133(h)). Alternatively, the timing may be the timing at which the display by the fade-out process ends. The same may be applied to the following embodiments.

FIG. 133(h) shows a state in which the effect selection effect has ended due to the chance button 136 being pressed during execution of the effect selection effect by the effect H and effect O. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the fade-out process is started. By the fade-out processing, the effect display area 208d gradually changes to white, the display of the effect H becomes invisible, and the display is stopped. In synchronization with this, the music played from the speaker 120 gradually becomes smaller and becomes silent (stopped), making it impossible to hear the performance O. The fade-out process is completed, and the effect selection effect ends. Further, the fade-out process is completed and the first effect and the third effect, and the first period and the third period are also ended.

When the production selection is completed, the movie image is displayed, the character string image of “Please select the production”, the direction key image, and the button image are hidden, but the character string image of “1R” and “decoration 7” are displayed. The jackpot production by the display of "" continues to be executed.

FIG. 133(i) shows a state in which the big hit effect including the second effect and the fourth effect selected in the effect selection effect has been started, and FIG. 132(b) following FIG. 132(c). The same state is shown. In the second period starting from FIG. 133(i), a movie in which the princess character whose movie name is “may be there” appears is displayed from the top (first) on almost the entire effect display area 208d. The second effect (effect H') is performed. In this way, the effect H is the same movie as the effect H', so the first effect is an effect included in a part of the second effect. Further, in the fourth period started from FIG. 133(i), the fourth production in which the song having the song name “may be there” corresponding to the second production flows from the beginning from the speaker 120. (Production O') is being executed. In this way, the effect O is the same song as the effect O', so the third effect is an effect included as a part of the fourth effect. In addition, a character string image "may be there" is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d. The character string image shows the movie name of the displayed movie and the song name of the playing song.

In addition, the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is described as follows in a controllable manner. The decorative symbol display device 208 executes, for example, a plurality of effects H and I in the first period (the period shown in (a) to (h) of FIG. 133) in which the effect selection effect is executed. One of the effects H and I is the first effect. The first sub-control unit 400 determines an effect to be executed in the second period (the period starting from FIG. 133(i)) when the chance button 136 is pressed in the first period. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 ends the first effect in the first case (when the chance button 136 is pressed during the first period in which the first effect is being executed), and the second effect In the period of, the effect to be executed in the second period is executed from the beginning.

According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the second effect (effect H′) executed in the second period is determined when the chance button 136 is pressed, and the determined effect H′ is the head. Since the game is restarted from the above, it is possible to realize a game stand having a feature in the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, since the effect H'starts from the beginning, it may be easier for the player to recognize that the second period has started. Furthermore, since the first effect (effect H) being executed is stopped when the chance button 136 is pressed, it may be easier for the player to confirm that the opportunity button 136 has been pressed. ..

According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the fourth effect (effect O′) executed in the fourth period is determined when the chance button 136 is pressed, and the determined effect O′ is the head. Since the process is restarted from, it is possible to realize a gaming machine having the characteristics of the speaker 120. Further, since the effect O′ is started from the beginning, it may be easier for the player to recognize that the fourth period is started. Furthermore, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the third effect (effect O) that is being executed is stopped, so that it may be easier for the player to confirm that the opportunity button 136 has been pressed. ..

Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the player visually recognizes that the second period has started by starting the second effect (effect H′) by the effect display area 208d from the beginning. In some cases, it may be easier to recognize visually. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the first effect (effect H) being executed is stopped, so that the player can easily visually confirm that the pressing of the chance button 136 is accepted. May be.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the player audibly recognizes that the fourth period has started by starting the effect O′ executed in the fourth period from the beginning. It may be easier to do. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the third effect (effect O) that is being executed is stopped, so that it is easy for the player to auditorily confirm that the pressing of the chance button 136 has been accepted. May be.

According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the second effect executed in the second period and the fourth effect executed in the fourth period are determined at the same time, but the first period and the In the period until the chance button 136 is pressed in the third period, at least a part of the first effect (effect H) by the effect display area 208d is executed, and the third effect (effect O) by the speaker 120. It may be possible to entertain the player by executing at least a part of the above. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the effect being executed on both the speaker 120 and the effect display area 208d is stopped midway, so the player is more likely to accept that the opportunity button 136 has been pressed. It may be easier to recognize.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the third effect can be determined from a plurality of effects such as the effect O and the effect P, which may entertain the player.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, there are cases where the player can be entertained with the effects produced by a plurality of effect means of the speaker 120 and the decorative pattern display device 208 (effect display area 208d).

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect selection effect is executed in the first round (1R) in the big hit, but may be executed in other rounds (2R, 3R,..., Final round). In addition, also in the subsequent examples, the effect selection effect may be executed in another round.

In this embodiment, one effect selection effect is executed in one big hit effect, but one effect selection effect may be executed in one big hit effect. It should be noted that, also in the subsequent examples, the effect selection effect may be executed a plurality of times in one big hit effect.

In the present embodiment, the effect once determined cannot be changed again, but the effect once determined may be changed again. In addition, also in the subsequent embodiments, the effect once determined may be changed again.

In the present embodiment, after the still image is displayed for a certain time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after the movie effect is selected, the moving image display of the selected effect is executed. The display may be performed, or may be performed after (or immediately after) the effect is selected. It should be noted that the movie effects may be displayed as described above also in the subsequent embodiments.

In the present embodiment, the selected effect is executed when a certain time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the effect that the music played was selected, but it may be executed simultaneously with the selection of the effect. Alternatively, it may be executed after (or immediately after) the production is selected. It should be noted that in the subsequent examples as well, the effect in which the music is played may be displayed as described above.

In this embodiment, even if the chance button 136 is not pressed, the effect (the second effect or the fourth effect) is determined when the specific round (1R in the case of the present embodiment) is completed. I am trying to do it. If the chance button 136 is not pressed, the effect selection period (first period or third period) may not be finished until the big hit ends. That is, when the chance button 136 is not pressed, the effect selection screen (effect selection effect) may be always displayed until the big hit ends.

The jackpot effect selected in this embodiment may be continuously executed from the first round to the fifteenth round, or the above-described effect selection effect is executed for each round, and the jackpot is executed for each round. You may select an effect.

The data of the effect such as the song or movie executed in the effect selection effect may be the same as the data of the effect executed as the selected jackpot effect, or may be different data. .. When the same data is used, the part executed during the effect selection effect may be designated.

As in this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed before the end of the first round and before the end of the first round, the effect selection effect may be ended even before the end of the first round. Further, as described later with reference to FIG. 136, the effect selection effect may be continuously executed during the period from the start of the first round to the end thereof.

In addition, when the productions that can be selected in the production selection production are one production (for example, the movie A and the song A corresponding to the movie α), when the selection operation is performed by the direction key, the display by the fade-out process is performed. After the execution, the one effect (for example, the movie A and the song A corresponding to the movie α) may be started again from the beginning, and the subsequent effect before the display by the fade-out process is executed. It may be done.

If the selectable effect in the effect selection effect is one effect (for example, the movie α and the song A corresponding to the movie α), the selection operation by the direction key may not be performed. In that case, the direction key image and the character string image of “select” displayed in the effect display area 208d are displayed differently from the state in which the selection operation can be performed (for example, the color or the transparency different from that when the character of “select” can be selected). The arrow key image is displayed in a different color and transparency than when it is selectable, or one of the arrow key image and the "Select" character string image is deleted and the other is displayed. ) May be displayed, and the directional key image and the character string image of “select” may not be displayed.

In addition, when the production that can be selected in the production selection production is one production (hereinafter referred to as production X. For example, movie α and song A corresponding to movie α), production that can be selected in the future (hereafter production Y) ) Is displayed (for example, a frame image area), and the cursor is moved from the effect X to the area where effect Y is displayed by operating the direction keys, and only the determination operation is restricted. You may do so. Here, in the area where the effect Y is displayed, the display related to the effect Y (for example, the display of a still image such as a song title or a movie) is different from the case where the effect Y is selectable (for example, a frame image). The background may be displayed in gray and the still image may be displayed in black and white. However, the effect Y is displayed in the same manner as when the effect Y is selectable. Good. In addition, a display (for example, a display in which "???????" is described in the frame image) is displayed so as not to know that the production Y can be selected in the area where the production Y is displayed. Good.

The first period may be ended when the chance button 136 is operated, and the display by the fade-out process in FIG. 133(h) may be executed in the second period. In addition, the first period ends after (immediately after) the display by the fade-out processing ends or at the same time as the end, and after the first round of FIG. 133(i) starts (immediately) or at the same time, the second period starts. You may

Next, a modified example 1 of the big hit game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This modification has a feature in the effect selection effect in the big hit effect. The big hit effects shown in FIGS. 134(a) to (h) show, in this order, an effect selection effect in which the first effect is selected and the second effect to be executed in the big hit game is selected. Also, FIG. 134(i) shows a state in which the big hit effect including the second effect selected in the effect selection effect has been started. In these figures, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures. Further, the effect display mode in the effect display area 208d in the effect selection effect of this modified example is the same as the effect display mode of the eleventh embodiment, and therefore its explanation is omitted.

Fig.134 (a) has shown the state which continued from FIG.132 (a), and has shown the state where the production selection production was started. The effect H is executed in the frame image, and the title of the effect "may be there" is displayed below the effect H. The title of the effect indicates the movie name of the movie that can be selected as the first effect executed by the decorative pattern display device 208.

At the beginning of the effect H, the first (first) image of the movie is displayed in a paused state (still image state). At this time, BGM for effect selection is flowing from the speaker 120. This state is the default production mode of the production selection production according to this modification. The BGM for effect selection may start from the prelude. In addition, also in the subsequent embodiments, the BGM for effect selection may or may not be started from the prelude.

FIG. 134(b) shows a state in which the effect H has shifted from the still image display to the moving image display after a lapse of a predetermined time. BGM for effect selection continues to flow from the speaker 120.

FIG. 134C shows a state in which the effect selection effect is being executed, the movie effect by the moving image is continuously executed in the frame image, and the BGM for effect selection is continuously flowing from the speaker 120.

FIG. 134D shows a state in which the fade-out processing has been performed within the frame image after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the effect H was started. In this modified example, if the player does not operate the direction keys 139 before the predetermined time elapses, a fade-out process for interrupting the movie effect by the moving image is executed. When the fade-out process is started, the inside of the frame image gradually changes to white, and the display of the effect H becomes invisible during the movie effect. On the other hand, BGM for effect selection continues to flow from the speaker 120.

FIG. 134(e) shows a state in which the effect selection effect after the fade-out process is being executed. The inside of the frame image is a default effect mode in which the leading image of the movie of the effect H is displayed as a still image. Further, BGM for effect selection continues to flow from the speaker 120.

FIG. 134(f) shows a state in which the effect H has shifted from the still image display to the moving image display after a lapse of a predetermined time. BGM for effect selection continues to flow from the speaker 120. In this example, thereafter, the player presses the chance button 136 during execution of the effect selection effect. By pressing the chance button 136, the effect H started from FIG. 134(e) is determined as the first effect. Further, by pressing the chance button 136, the second effect executed in the second period started from FIG. 134(i) is determined.

FIG. 134(g) shows the state of the effect selection effect after the chance button 136 is pressed. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the movie effect by the moving image is interrupted, and the first image of the movie is displayed as a still image. Further, the width of the frame portion of the frame image is displayed thick so that the player's attention is directed to the movie display in the frame image. As a result, the fact that the effect H has been determined as the first effect is notified. Further, BGM for effect selection continues to flow from the speaker 120. The effect H may be displayed as a still image or may be moved to a moving image display.

FIG. 134(h) shows a state in which the fade-out process is executed following the notification that the effect H has been determined as the first effect by pressing the chance button 136. By the fade-out processing, the effect display area 208d gradually changes to white, the display of the effect H becomes invisible, and the display is stopped. In synchronism with this, the BGM flowing from the speaker 120 is gradually reduced to a silent state (stopped state), making it impossible to hear the performance O. The fade-out process is completed, and the effect selection effect ends. Further, the fade-out processing is completed, and the first effect and the first period are ended.

FIG. 134(i) shows a state in which the big hit production including the second production selected in the production selection production is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 132(b) following FIG. 132(c). ing. In the second period started from FIG. 134(i), the second effect (effect H') is executed on almost the entire effect display area 208d. In this way, the effect H is the same movie as the effect H', so the first effect is an effect included in a part of the second effect. Also, from the speaker 120, a song corresponding to the second effect (the song title "may be there") is playing from the beginning.

According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the effect H′ executed in the second period is determined when the chance button 136 is pressed, and the determined effect is restarted from the beginning. It is possible to realize a game table having the features of the symbol display device 208. Further, since the effect H'starts from the beginning, it may be easier for the player to recognize that the second period has started. Furthermore, since the first effect (effect H) being executed is stopped when the chance button 136 is pressed, it may be easier for the player to confirm that the opportunity button 136 has been pressed. ..

Next, a modified example 2 of the big hit game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 135. This modification has a feature in the effect selection effect in the big hit effect. The jackpot productions shown in FIGS. 135(a) to (h) show, in this order, a production selection production in which the first production is selected and the second production to be executed in the jackpot game is selected. Further, FIG. 135(i) shows a state in which the big hit effect including the second effect selected in the effect selection effect has been started. In these figures, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures. Further, the description of the effect display mode in the effect display area 208d in the effect selection effect of this modified example which is the same as that of the example 11 will be omitted.

Fig.135 (a) has shown the state which continued from FIG.132 (a), and has shown the state where the production selection production was started. In the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of "please select music" is displayed in order to encourage the player to select a big hit effect to be executed in the big hit game. In addition, a horizontally long rectangular music selectable area is displayed in the lower right of the character string image, and the center part of the music selectable area can be selected as the first effect executed by the speaker 120 as an effect means. A character string image of "may be there", which is the song name of a different song, is displayed. In the lower right of the music selectable area, a horizontally long rectangular music display area is displayed, and in the center of the music display area, the song title of the music that can be displayed in the music selectable area The character string image is displayed.

In this modification, the outer circumference of the music selectable area is displayed with a thick line and the character string image of “may be there” is displayed in a large size so that the player can easily recognize the music name of the selectable music ing. On the other hand, the outer periphery of the music display area is displayed with a thin line so that it is not more conspicuous than the music selectable area, and the character string image of “Kiseki no Universe” is displayed smaller. Also, no music is playing from the speaker 120 and the speaker 120 is in a silent state. This state is the default production mode of the production selection production according to this modification.

Further, a direction key image imitating the direction key 139 is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d, and a button image imitating the chance button 136 is displayed on the right side thereof. Below the direction key image, the character string image of “select” is displayed. The character string image of “select” informs that the selectable song can be changed by operating the direction key 139. In this example, every time the player operates the direction keys 139, the song title displayed in the song selection display area is moved to the song display area and displayed, and the song title displayed in the song display area is selected and displayed. By moving to the area and displaying it, the selectable music can be changed. Further, a character string image of “OK” is displayed below the button image. The character string image of “determination” informs that the music can be determined as the second effect executed in the second period started from FIG. 135(i) described later by pressing the chance button 136. ing.

As described above, in the present example, the player can change the selectable songs by operating the direction keys 139, but regardless of whether the player operates the direction keys 139, a certain period (for example, 5 The song title displayed in the song selection display area and the song title displayed in the song display area may be automatically replaced every time (seconds). It should be noted that, also in the subsequent examples, the song titles may be automatically replaced every a certain period of time.

Further, in the present modification, the selectable musical composition is changed by operating the direction key 139, and the musical composition executed in the jackpot production can be determined by pressing the chance button 136 thereafter, but instead of these, for example, , By holding down the chance button 136 or scrolling a touch panel (not shown) to change the selectable music, and then pressing the chance button 136 once or tapping the touch panel, The music to be executed in the period may be determined. It should be noted that the above-described operation may be performed also in the subsequent embodiments.

In FIG. 135(b), a song having a song name "may be there" is output from the speaker 120 as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period after a predetermined time has elapsed. It shows a state in which execution of the effect O flowing from the beginning is started. In this example, thereafter, the player operates the direction key 139 for the first time during execution of the effect selection effect. The selectable song is changed by the operation.

FIG. 135(c) shows a state immediately after the production selection production is executed and the player operates the direction key 139 for the first time. The song title "May be there" displayed in the song selection display area is moved to the song display area and displayed, and the song title "Kiseki no Universe" displayed in the song display area is displayed in the song selection display area. It has been moved to and displayed. Until a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses immediately after the selection, no music is played from the speaker 120 and the speaker 120 is in a silent state.

In FIG. 135(d), a predetermined time elapses, and one of a plurality of effects displayed during the period of the first period, the music having the music title “Universe of Kiseki” is output from the beginning from the speaker 120. It shows a state in which execution of the flowing effect P has been started. In this example, thereafter, the second operation of the direction key 139 by the player is executed during execution of the effect selection effect.

FIG. 135(e) shows a state after the effect selection effect is executed and the player operates the direction key 139 for the second time. A character string image of "may be there" is displayed in the music selectable area, and a character string image of "space of miracle" is displayed in the music display area. No music is played from the speaker 120 and the speaker 120 is silent.

FIG. 135(f) shows a song whose title is "may be there" from the speaker 120 as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period after a predetermined time has passed. Shows the state in which execution of the effect O flowing from the beginning is started. In this example, thereafter, the player depresses the chance button 136 during execution of the effect selection effect. By pressing the chance button 136, the effect O started in FIG. 135(f) is determined as the first effect. Further, by pressing the chance button 136, the second effect executed in the second period starting from FIG. 135(i) is determined.

FIG. 135(g) shows a state in which the effect selection effect is being executed immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed. When the chance button 136 is pressed, execution of the effect O is terminated (stopped) in the speaker 120, and a determination sound is played to notify the player that the second effect has been determined. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the inside of the music selectable area is changed to black, and the character string image of “may be there” is changed to a white display, so that the player is given a second indication. Notify that the effect O'has been determined as the effect.

FIG. 135(h) shows a state in which the fade-out process is executed following the notification that the effect O has been determined as the first effect and the effect O′ has been determined as the second effect by pressing the chance button 136. ing. By the fade-out processing, the effect display area 208d gradually changes to white, and the display of the music selectable area and the music display area becomes invisible. The fade-out process is completed, and the effect selection effect ends. Also, the fade-out process is completed and the first period ends.

At the end of the production selection, the character string image of "Please select a song", direction key image, and button image are hidden, but a big hit by displaying the character string image of "1R" and "decoration 7" The production continues to be executed.

FIG. 135(i) shows a state in which the big hit production including the second production selected in the production selection production is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 132(b) following FIG. 132(c). ing. In the second period started from FIG. 135(i), the second effect (effect O′) is executed from the beginning of the song on the speaker 120. In this way, the effect O is the same song as the effect O', so the first effect is an effect included in a part of the second effect. Also, a movie effect (movie name "may be there") corresponding to the second effect is displayed from the beginning on almost the entire effect display area 208d.

According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the effect O′ executed in the second period is determined when the chance button 136 is pressed, and the determined effect is restarted from the beginning. It is possible to realize a game stand having the features of 120. Further, since the effect O'starts from the beginning, it may be easier for the player to recognize that the second period has started. Furthermore, since the first effect (effect H) being executed is stopped when the chance button 136 is pressed, it may be easier for the player to confirm that the opportunity button 136 has been pressed. ..

Further, the player operates the direction key 139 for the first time to select the effect P while the effect O is being executed, and immediately thereafter, the player again operates the direction key 139 for the second time to effect the effect O. When selected, the song of the selected effect O may be started from the continuation of the song of the effect O that was executed immediately before, or may be started from the beginning. In this case, the musical piece of the effect P selected by the first operation may or may not flow.

(Example 12) FIG. 129 to FIG. 132 regarding the special figure variation game and the big hit game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 12 of the present embodiment (however, FIG. 132(b) is assumed to be the second round). , FIG. 136 will be described. Since FIGS. 129 to 132 have been described in the eleventh embodiment, description thereof will be omitted here.

With reference to FIG. 136, the jackpot effect performed in the period between FIG. 132(a) and FIG. 132(b) in order to determine the execution of the jackpot effect including the second effect and the fourth effect will be described. .. 136(a) to (i), the big hit productions select, in this order, the first production and the third production, and select the second production and the fourth production to be executed in the big hit game. Are shown in chronological order. In addition, FIG. 136(j) shows a state in which the big hit effect including the second effect and the fourth effect selected in the effect selection effect has been started. In these figures, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures.

FIG. 136(a) shows the state continued from FIG. 132(a), and shows the state in which the effect selection effect has been started. As an example of the first effect means, almost the entire image display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, which is the display means, is the effect display area 208d, and a horizontally long rectangular frame image is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d. ing. Almost the entire area within the frame image is a display area for movie playback. Further, a character string image indicating the title of the effect is displayed below the display area. The title of the effect is the movie name of the movie that can be selected as the first effect executed by the decorative pattern display device 208, and the third name that is executed by the speaker 120 that is the sound output means as an example of the second effect means. The song titles of the songs that can be selected as effects are shown. As will be described later, the third effect corresponds to the first effect. In the effect selection effect in this embodiment, the first effect is selected and executed during the period of the first period. Also, the third effect is selected and executed during the period of the third period. In both the first period and the third period in this embodiment, the fade-out process is completed as shown in FIG. 136(i) from the time when the effect selection effect shown in FIG. 136(a) is started (effect display area). 208d is completely changed to white) and the time until the effect selection effect ends.

In the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of "Please select effect" is displayed in order to encourage the player to select a big hit effect to be executed in the big hit game. Further, a direction key image imitating the direction key 139 is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d, and a button image imitating the chance button 136 is displayed on the right side thereof. A character string image of “selection” is displayed below the direction key image, and notifies that the effect executed as the selectable effect can be changed to another effect by operating the direction key 139. .. Further, a character string image of “OK” is displayed below the button image, and by pressing the chance button 136, a second period executed in the second period started after the end of the first period. It is informed that the effect and the fourth effect executed in the fourth period started after the end of the third period can be determined. In the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d, the number of rounds in which the effect selection effect is executed is shown. In this example, a character string image of "1R" is displayed to notify that the number of rounds is "1". In the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d, "decoration 7" is displayed, and it is confirmed that the big hit was stopped and displayed in the symbol combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7".

In the frame image, as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period, a movie in which a princess character whose movie name is “may be there” appears is displayed. The effect H is being executed. At the beginning of the effect H, the first (first) image of the movie is displayed in a paused state (still image state). At this time, no music is playing from the speaker 120 and the speaker 120 is silent. This state is the default production mode of the production selection production according to the present embodiment. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), the pause of the image is released, and the movie effect by the moving image is started in the frame image. In synchronization with the start of the movie effect, from the speaker 120, as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the period of the third period, the song with the song name “may be there” is at the top. Execution of the effect O flowing from is started. In this example, thereafter, the player operates the first (first) direction key 139 while the effect selection effect by the effects H and O is being executed. In this example, the operation of the direction key 139 is performed after the movie effect by the moving image is started, but the operation of the direction key 139 may be performed before the movie effect by the moving image is started. In this example, the start of the movie effect by the moving image and the start of the song are synchronized, but they may not be synchronized.

FIG. 136B shows a state in which the effect selection effect is being executed, and during the execution of the effect selection effect by the effects H and O, the player operates the direction key 139 for the first time. ing. When the direction key 139 is operated, the fade-out process is started. By the fade-out process, the display of the effect H becomes invisible because the frame image gradually changes to white, and in synchronization with this, the music flowing from the speaker 120 gradually decreases and becomes silent, and the performance of the effect O is performed. It becomes inaudible. Instead of the fade-out process, a switching effect may be executed.

FIG. 136(c) shows a state in which the effect selection effect after the fade-out process is executed. Execution of the effect I is started in the frame image, and execution of the effect P is started in the speaker 120. As a result of the operation of the direction key 139, the effect is switched from the effect H to the effect I and from the effect O to the effect P in this manner. In the lower part of the display area for movie playback in the frame image, a character string image indicating the title of the effect is displayed.

In the frame image, as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period, an effect I is displayed to display a movie in which a grandfather character whose movie name is "Space of Kiseki" appears. Is started. At the beginning of the effect I, the first (first) image of the movie is displayed in a paused state (still image state). At this time, no music is playing from the speaker 120 and the speaker 120 is silent. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), the pause of the image is released, and the movie effect by the moving image is started in the frame image. In synchronization with the start of the movie effect, the speaker 120 plays a song with the song name “Universe of Kiseki” from the beginning as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the third period. The effect P is started.

136(d) to (e) show a state in which the effect selection effect by the effect I and effect P is being executed subsequent to FIG. 136(c). In this example, thereafter, the player operates the directional key 139 for the second time during the execution of the effect selection effect by the effect I and the effect P.

FIG. 136(f) shows a state after the production selection production is executed and the player operates the directional key 139 for the second time during execution of the production selection production by the production I and the production P. ing. When the direction key 139 is operated, the fade-out process is started. Due to the fade-out processing, the frame image gradually changes to white and the display of the effect I becomes invisible, and in synchronization with this, the music flowing from the speaker 120 gradually decreases and becomes silent and the performance of the effect P is performed. It becomes inaudible. Instead of the fade-out process, a switching effect may be executed.

FIG. 136(g) shows a state where the effect selection effect after the fade-out process is being executed. Execution of the effect H is started in the frame image, and execution of the effect O is started in the speaker 120. As a result of the operation of the direction key 139, the effect is switched from the effect I to the effect H and from the effect P to the effect O in this way. In the lower part of the display area for movie playback in the frame image, a character string image indicating the title of the effect is displayed.

In the frame image, as one of the multiple effects displayed during the first period, the effect of displaying the movie in which the princess character whose movie name is "may be" appears. H is running. At the beginning of the effect H, the first (first) image of the movie is displayed in a paused state (still image state). At this time, no music is playing from the speaker 120 and the speaker 120 is silent. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), the pause of the image is released, and the movie effect by the moving image is started in the frame image. In synchronization with the start of the movie effect, from the speaker 120, as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the period of the third period, the song with the song name “may be there” is at the top. Execution of the effect O flowing from is started.

In the present example, thereafter, the first round ends without the chance button 136 being pressed during execution of the effect selection effect by the effects H and O. When the chance button 136 is not pressed, the effect H started in FIG. 136(g) is determined as the first effect by the end of the first round, and the effect O started in FIG. 136(g) is the third effect. It is decided as a production. As described above, the song name of the third effect is the same as the movie name of the first effect, and the third effect is the effect corresponding to the first effect. In addition, by the end of the first round, the second effect executed in the second period starting from FIG. 136(j) is determined and executed in the fourth period starting from FIG. 136(j). The fourth production is decided.

FIG. 136(h) shows the state of the effect selection effect immediately after the attacker 234 is closed and the first round is finished. The period from FIG. 136(h) to the next FIG. 136(i) is called an inter-round interval. The character string image of "1R" notifying that the number of rounds is "1" is erased in the inter-round interval. Here, the inter-round interval will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137(a) is a time chart showing the start timing and the end timing of the big hit game. In this FIG. 137(a), in order from the top, the special symbol changing signal, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special electric accessory opening signal, the special electric accessory operating signal, the attacker 234, The attacker solenoid signal is shown.

Special symbol changing signal, condition device operating signal, accessory continuous operating device operating signal, special electric auditors product open signal, special electric auditors product operating signal is the signal seen from the game rules, the special symbol changing signal If it is on, the special symbol display device is operating, and if it is off, it is not operating (stopping). If the condition device activation signal is ON, the attacker 234 is in operation (during opening operation, maintaining open state, closing operation, maintaining closed state), and if it is off, inactive (closing). .. If the accessory continuous operation device activation signal is ON, it means that the special electric accessory is operating multiple times. The special electric accessory release signal is a signal for maintaining the opened state of the special electric accessory. If the special electric accessory operating signal is ON, the attacker 234 is in the opening operation, is maintained in the open state, or is in the closing operation, and if it is OFF, the attacker 234 is in the closed state. The special symbol changing signal, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special electric auditors opening signal, the special electric auditors operating signal is a signal output to an external device (for example, a hall computer). Is.

The “open” of the attacker 234 shown in FIG. 137(a) corresponds to the opening operation or the maintenance of the open state, and the “closing” of the attacker 234 corresponds to the closing operation or the maintenance of the closed state. The attacker solenoid signal shown in FIG. 137(a) is a signal that is transmitted to the solenoid that opens and closes the attacker 234 and that maintains the open state. The arrow A in FIG. 137(a) corresponds to the fixed display time of the stop symbol of the special figure. Arrow B corresponds to the big hit game start effect time (big hit start display time). The arrow C corresponds to the closing operation time of the attacker 234. Arrow D corresponds to the big hit game end effect time (big hit end display time). The arrow E corresponds to the variable display start waiting time of the special figure, and when the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is held, the symbol variation of the special figure starts after the passage of the variable display start waiting time (while the special symbol is changing) See the dotted line of the signal).

The start timing of the big hit game may be the timing when the special figure changing signal is turned off, the condition device operating signal may be turned on, or the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is It may be the timing when it is turned on, the timing when the special electric accessory release signal is first turned on, or the timing when the special electric auditors active signal is turned on first. The timing may be the timing when the attacker 234 starts the first opening, or the timing when the attacker solenoid signal is first turned on.

On the other hand, the end timing of the big hit game may be the timing when the condition device operation signal is turned off, the timing when the accessory continuous operation device operation signal is turned off, or the condition device operation signal. And/or when the accessory continuous operation device operation signal is ON, it may be the timing at which the special electric auditors product opening signal is finally changed from ON to OFF, or the condition device operation signal and/or the accessory continuation signal. When the actuator operation signal is ON, it may be the last time the special electric auditors product operating signal is turned from ON to OFF, or the condition device operation signal and/or the accessory continuous operation device operation signal is When it is on, it may be the timing when the attacker 234 finally changed from “open” to “closed”, or when the condition device operation signal and/or the accessory continuous operation device operation signal is on, The timing may be the timing at which the attacker solenoid signal last turned from on to off, or the timing at which the variable waiting time has elapsed since the condition device operation signal and/or the accessory continuous operation device operation signal turned off. May be.

FIG. 137(b) is an enlarged view of the portion surrounded by the ellipse indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 137(a). Even if the special electric auditors product release signal is turned off, the special electric auditors product operating signal remains in the on state for a while (here, the period of arrow a). During the period indicated by the arrow a, the attacker 234 performs the closing operation, and the opening end effect (for example, display effect) of the attacker 234 is executed. The period indicated by the arrow a may be only the period in which the attacker 234 performs the closing operation. The period indicated by the arrow b elapses from when the special electric auditors product operating signal is turned off to when it is turned on. The inter-round interval corresponding to a round may be the period of arrow b shown in FIG. 137(b) or the period of arrow a and arrow b shown in FIG. 137(b). May be.

The open period (open state maintaining period) of the attacker 234 shown in FIG. 137 corresponds to a period (long period) during which the game balls can easily enter, and hereinafter, the open of the attacker 234 during this period is referred to as a packer. is there. On the other hand, the opening period of the attacker 234 may be a period (short period) during which it is difficult for the game ball to enter, and hereinafter, the opening of the attacker 234 during this period may be referred to as a paca.

The start timing of one round may be when the special electric auditors product opening signal is turned on or when the special electric auditors product operating signal is turned on, and the attacker 234 is opened. It may be a cigarette or the case where the attacker solenoid signal is turned on.

The end timing of one round may be when the special electric auditors product release signal is turned off or when the special electric auditors product operating signal is turned off, and the attacker 234 is closed. The attacker solenoid signal may be turned off.

Returning to FIG. 136(h), the round display such as “1R” is erased on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the inter-round interval. The round display of the "Ended round" may be displayed continuously during the interval between rounds, and the round display of the "Next round" may be displayed when the next round is started. In this case, the round display of "finished round" may be deleted and the next round display may be displayed during the inter-round interval. It should be noted that in the embodiments before and after this, the round display at the inter-round interval may be displayed in the same manner as above.

Although the timing for determining the effect in the present embodiment is after the attacker 234 is closed, it may be at the same time as the timing when the attacker 234 is closed, until the attacker 234 is closed and then opened again. May be determined during the period of time, and may be the same as the timing when the attacker 234 is opened again.

In this embodiment, the production selected in the specific round (1R) is started after the next round (2R) of the specific round is started, but the production selected at the same time when the specific round is finished. May be started, may be started after (or immediately after) the end of a particular round, or may be started during an inter-round interval.

When the effect is selected just before the end of the effect selection period (the period from the start of 1R to the end), the effect may not be executed, or the effect may be executed. For example, it may be 0.4 seconds before the end of the round.

In the present embodiment, if it is detected that a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) have entered the attacker 234, or if a certain time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the attacker 234 was opened, the round is performed. Is ended (the attacker 234 is closed). In this case, the production means may terminate the execution of the selected production before a certain period of time has passed since the attacker 234 was opened (for example, 28 seconds have passed since the attacker 234 was opened).

As shown in FIG. 136(h), when the attacker 234 closes and the first round ends, the movie effect by the moving image is interrupted and stopped, and the first image of the movie is displayed as a still image. Further, the width of the frame portion of the frame image is displayed thick so that the player's attention is directed to the movie display in the frame image. As a result, the fact that the effect H has been determined as the first effect is notified. No music is played from the speaker 120, and the speaker 120 is in a silent state (stopped state). The effect H may be displayed as a still image or may be moved to a moving image display. When the effect H is switched to the moving image display, execution of the effect O in which the music having the music title “may be there” flows from the beginning may be started from the speaker 120.

In this example, after the first round is finished, the effect H is determined as the first effect and the effect O is determined as the third effect. As described above, the song name of the third effect is the same as the movie name of the first effect, and the third effect is the effect corresponding to the first effect. In addition, by the end of the first round, the second effect executed in the second period starting from FIG. 136(j) is determined, and in the fourth period starting from FIG. 136(j). The fourth effect to be executed is determined.

FIG. 136(i) shows a state in which the first round ends and the second round starts, and the effect selection effect by the effects H and O ends. In the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of the round number "2R" of the round in which the big hit effect is executed is displayed. When the first round ends, the fade-out process is started. By the fade-out processing, the effect display area 208d gradually changes to white, and the display of the effect H becomes invisible. The fade-out process is completed, and the effect selection effect ends. Further, the fade-out process is completed and the first period and the third period are ended.

When the production selection is completed, the movie image is displayed, the character string image of "Please select an effect", the direction key image, and the button image are hidden, but the character string image of "2R" and "Decoration 7" are displayed. The jackpot production by the display of "" continues to be executed.

FIG. 136(j) shows a state in which the jackpot effect including the second effect and the fourth effect selected in the effect selection effect is started after the attacker 234 is opened in the second round, and FIG. It shows the same state as in FIG. 132(b) following FIG. In the second period starting from FIG. 136(j), a movie in which the princess character whose movie name is “may be there” appears appears on almost the entire effect display area 208d from the beginning (first). The second effect (effect H') is performed. In this way, the effect H is the same movie as the effect H', so the first effect is an effect included in a part of the second effect. Also, in the fourth period starting from FIG. 136(j), the fourth production in which the song having the song name “may be there” corresponding to the second production flows from the beginning from the speaker 120. (Production O') is being executed. In this way, the effect O is the same song as the effect O', so the third effect is an effect included as a part of the fourth effect. In addition, a character string image "may be there" is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d. The character string image shows the movie name of the displayed movie and the song name of the playing song.

In addition, the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is described as follows in a controllable manner. The decorative symbol display device 208 executes a plurality of effects such as effect H and effect I. One of the effects H and I is the first effect. The first effect is an effect executed during the period of the big hit (the period shown in FIGS. 136(a) to (i)). The jackpot is made up of a plurality of rounds, for example, the first round to the fifteenth round, and one of the plurality of rounds is the first round. The first sub-control unit 400 performs in the first period (the period shown in FIGS. 136(a) to (i)) in the second period (for example, the period started from FIG. 136(j)). Is a means of determining. The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends. The 1st sub control part 400 determines the production performed in the 2nd period, when the 1st round is completed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 ends the first effect in the first case (when the first round ends during the first period in which the first effect is being executed), and the second period. In, the effect to be executed in the second period is executed from the beginning.

According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the effect H'executed in the second period is determined when the first round is finished, and the determined effect is restarted from the beginning, so the decorative design It is possible to realize a gaming table having the characteristics of the display device 208. Further, since the effect H'starts from the beginning, it may be easier for the player to recognize that the second period has started. Furthermore, since the first effect (effect H) being executed is stopped when the first round is finished, it may be easier for the player to confirm that the first round is finished.

According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the effect O′ executed in the fourth period is determined when the first round ends, and the determined effect restarts from the beginning, so the speaker 120 is used. It is possible to realize a gaming machine with unique features. Further, since the effect O′ is started from the beginning, it may be easier for the player to recognize that the fourth period is started. Furthermore, since the third effect (effect O) being executed is stopped when the first round is finished, it may be easier for the player to confirm that the first round is finished.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the player visually recognizes that the second period has started by starting the second effect (effect H′) by the effect display area 208d from the beginning. In some cases, it may be easier to recognize visually. Further, when the first round ends, the first effect (effect H) that is being executed is stopped, and thus it may be easier for the player to visually confirm that the first round has ended.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the player audibly recognizes that the fourth period has started by starting the effect O′ executed in the fourth period from the beginning. It may be easier to do. Further, since the third effect (effect O) being executed is stopped when the first round ends, it may be easier for the player to auditorily confirm that the first round has ended.

According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the second effect executed in the second period and the fourth effect executed in the fourth period are determined at the same time, but the first period and the At least a part of the first effect (effect H) by the effect display area 208d is executed and the third effect (effect O) by the speaker 120 is performed until the first round ends in the third period. It may be possible to entertain the player more by executing at least a part thereof. In addition, when the first round ends, the effect being executed in both the speaker 120 and the effect display area 208d stops halfway, so that it is easier for the player to recognize that the first round has ended. There is.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the third effect can be determined from a plurality of effects such as the effect O and the effect P, which may entertain the player.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, there are cases where the player can be entertained with the effects produced by a plurality of effect means of the speaker 120 and the decorative pattern display device 208 (effect display area 208d).

In this embodiment, even if the chance button 136 is not pressed, the effect (the second effect or the fourth effect) is determined when the specific round (1R in the case of the present embodiment) is completed. I am trying to do it. If the chance button 136 is not pressed, the effect selection period (first period or third period) may not be finished until the big hit ends. That is, when the chance button 136 is not pressed, the effect selection screen (effect selection effect) may be always displayed until the big hit ends.

In this embodiment, the effect is determined when the chance button 136 is pressed or a specific round is finished, but the effect may be determined only when the chance button 136 is pressed. Further, the effect may be determined only when the specific round is completed.

The jackpot effect selected in this embodiment may be continuously executed from the first round to the fifteenth round, or the above-described effect selection effect is executed for each round, and the jackpot is executed for each round. You may select an effect.

The data of the effect such as the song or movie executed in the effect selection effect may be the same as the data of the effect executed as the selected jackpot effect, or may be different data. .. When the same data is used, the part executed during the effect selection effect may be designated.

As described with reference to FIG. 133, when the chance button 136 is pressed before the end of the first round and before the end of the first round, the effect selection effect is ended even before the end of the first round. Good. If the chance button 136 is not pressed during the period from the start to the end of the first round as in this example, the effect selection effect is continuously executed until the end of the first round. May be. The effect selection effect may be ended only in one of the above cases.

Next, a modified example of the big hit game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 138. This modification has a feature in the effect selection effect in the big hit effect. The big hit effects shown in FIGS. 138(a) to (i) show, in this order, an effect selection effect in which the first effect is selected and the second effect to be executed in the big hit game is selected. Further, FIG. 138(j) shows a state in which the big hit effect including the second effect selected in the effect selection effect has been started. In these figures, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures. Further, the description of the effect display mode in the effect display area 208d in the effect selection effect of this modified example which is the same as that of the twelfth embodiment will be omitted.

FIG. 138(a) shows the state continued from FIG. 132(a), and shows the state in which the effect selection effect has been started. In the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of "please select music" is displayed in order to encourage the player to select a big hit effect to be executed in the big hit game. In addition, a horizontally long rectangular music selectable area is displayed in the lower right of the character string image, and the center part of the music selectable area can be selected as the first effect executed by the speaker 120 as an effect means. A character string image of "may be there", which is the song name of a different song, is displayed. In the lower right of the music selectable area, a horizontally long rectangular music display area is displayed, and in the center of the music display area, the song title of the music that can be displayed in the music selectable area The character string image is displayed.

In this modification, the outer circumference of the music selectable area is displayed with a thick line and the character string image of “may be there” is displayed in a large size so that the player can easily recognize the music name of the selectable music ing. On the other hand, the outer periphery of the music display area is displayed with a thin line so that it is not more conspicuous than the music selectable area, and the character string image of “Kiseki no Universe” is displayed smaller. Also, no music is playing from the speaker 120 and the speaker 120 is in a silent state. This state is the default production mode of the production selection production according to this modification.

Further, a direction key image imitating the direction key 139 is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d, and a button image imitating the chance button 136 is displayed on the right side thereof. Below the direction key image, the character string image of “select” is displayed. The character string image of “select” informs that the selectable song can be changed by operating the direction key 139. In this example, every time the player operates the direction keys 139, the song title displayed in the song selection display area is moved to the song display area and displayed, and the song title displayed in the song display area is selected and displayed. By moving to the area and displaying it, the selectable music can be changed. Further, a character string image of “OK” is displayed below the button image. The character string image of “decision” informs that the music can be determined as the second effect executed in the second period started from FIG. 138(j) described later by pressing the chance button 136. ing.

Further, in the present modification, the music to be executed in the big hit performance is determined by the end of the first round, but instead of this, for example, by pressing the chance button 136, the music to be executed in the big hit performance is determined. May be. In addition, the selectable song is changed by long-pressing the chance button 136 or scrolling a touch panel (not shown), and then pressing the chance button 136 once or tapping the touch panel, The music to be executed in the period may be determined. It should be noted that the above-described operation may be performed also in the subsequent embodiments.

In FIG. 138(b), a song whose title is “may be there” is output from the speaker 120 as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period after a predetermined time has elapsed. It shows a state in which execution of the effect O flowing from the beginning is started. In this example, thereafter, the player operates the direction key 139 for the first time during execution of the effect selection effect. The selectable song is changed by the operation.

FIG. 138(c) shows a state immediately after the production selection production is executed and the player operates the direction key 139 for the first time. The song title "May be there" displayed in the song selection display area is moved to the song display area and displayed, and the song title "Kiseki no Universe" displayed in the song display area is displayed in the song selection display area. It has been moved to and displayed. Until a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses immediately after the selection, no music is played from the speaker 120 and the speaker 120 is in a silent state.

In FIG. 138(d), a predetermined time elapses, and one of a plurality of effects displayed during the period of the first period, the music having the music title “Universe of Kiseki” is output from the beginning from the speaker 120. It shows a state in which execution of the flowing effect P has been started. In this example, thereafter, the second operation of the direction key 139 by the player is executed during execution of the effect selection effect.

FIG. 138(e) shows a state after the effect selection effect is executed and the player operates the direction key 139 for the second time. A character string image of "may be there" is displayed in the music selectable area, and a character string image of "space of miracle" is displayed in the music display area. No music is played from the speaker 120 and the speaker 120 is silent.

FIG. 138(f) shows that the music title “may be there” is output from the speaker 120 as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period after a predetermined time has elapsed. The figure shows a state in which execution of the effect O in which a song flows from the beginning is started.

FIG. 138(g) shows a state in which the effect selection effect by effect O is being executed. In this example, thereafter, the first round ends without pressing the chance button 136 during the execution of the effect selection effect by the effect O. If the chance button 136 is not pressed, the effect O is stopped by the end of the first round, and the effect O started in FIG. 138(f) and ended in FIG. 138(g) is determined as the first effect. .. In addition, the end of the first round determines the second effect executed in the second period starting from FIG. 138(j).

FIG. 138(h) shows the state of the effect selection effect immediately after the attacker 234 is closed and the first round is finished. The period between FIG. 138(h) and the next FIG. 138(i) is called an inter-round interval. As described with reference to FIGS. 136 and 137, the character string image of “1R” that notifies that the number of rounds is “1” is erased in the inter-round interval. When the first round ends, the execution of the effect O ends (stops) in the speaker 120, and a determination sound for notifying the player that the second effect has been decided is played. Further, the inside of the music selectable area is changed to black, and the character string image of "may be there" is changed to a white display, so that the effect O'is determined as the second effect for the player. Notify that.

FIG. 138(i) shows a state in which the first round ends, the second round starts, and the effect selection effect ends. In the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of the round number "2R" of the round in which the big hit effect is executed is displayed. When the first round ends, the fade-out process is started. By the fade-out processing, the effect display area 208d gradually changes to white, and the display of the music selectable area and the music display area becomes invisible. The fade-out process is completed, and the effect selection effect ends. Also, the fade-out process is completed and the first period ends.

When the production selection is completed, the character string image of "Please select a song", direction key image, and button image are hidden, but a big hit by the display of "2R" character string image and "decoration 7" The production continues to be executed.

FIG. 138(j) shows a state in which the big-hit effect including the second effect selected in the effect selection effect has been started, and FIG. 132(b) following FIG. 132(c) (however, FIG. 132(j) b) shows the same state as the second round). In the second period starting from FIG. 138(j), the second effect (effect O′) is executed from the beginning of the song on the speaker 120. In this way, the effect O is the same song as the effect O', so the first effect is an effect included in a part of the second effect. Also, a movie effect (movie name "may be there") corresponding to the second effect is displayed from the beginning on almost the entire effect display area 208d.

According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the effect O′ executed in the second period is determined when the first round is finished, and the determined effect is restarted from the beginning, so the decorative pattern It is possible to realize a gaming table having the characteristics of the display device 208. Further, since the effect O'starts from the beginning, it may be easier for the player to recognize that the second period has started. Furthermore, since the first effect (effect O) that is being executed is stopped when the first round ends, it may be easier for the player to confirm that the first round has ended.

Further, the player operates the direction key 139 for the first time to select the effect P while the effect O is being executed, and immediately thereafter, the player again operates the direction key 139 for the second time to effect the effect O. When selected, the song of the selected effect O may be started from the continuation of the song of the effect O that was executed immediately before, or may be started from the beginning. In this case, the musical piece of the effect P selected by the first operation may or may not flow.

(Example 13) About special figure fluctuation game and big hit game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 13 of the present embodiment, FIG. 129 to FIG. 132 (however, FIG. 132(b) is assumed to be the second round). , FIG. 139. Since FIGS. 129 to 132 have been described in the eleventh embodiment, description thereof will be omitted here.

With reference to FIG. 139, the jackpot effect performed in the period between FIG. 132(a) and FIG. 132(b) in order to determine the execution of the jackpot effect including the second effect and the fourth effect will be described. .. The jackpot production shown in FIGS. 139(a) to (h) is a production selection production in which, in this order, the first production and the third production are selected, and the second production and the fourth production to be executed in the jackpot game are selected. Are shown in chronological order. In addition, FIG. 139(i) shows a state in which the big hit effect including the second effect and the fourth effect selected in the effect selection effect has been started. In these figures, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures.

FIG. 139(a) shows the state continued from FIG. 132(a), and shows the state in which the effect selection effect has been started. As an example of the first effect means, almost the entire image display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, which is the display means, is the effect display area 208d, and a horizontally long rectangular frame image is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d. ing. Almost the entire area within the frame image is a display area for movie playback. Further, a character string image indicating the title of the effect is displayed below the display area. The title of the effect is the movie name of the movie that can be selected as the first effect executed by the decorative pattern display device 208, and the third name that is executed by the speaker 120 that is the sound output means as an example of the second effect means. The song titles of the songs that can be selected as effects are shown. As will be described later, the third effect corresponds to the first effect. In the effect selection effect, the first effect is selected and executed during the first period. Also, the third effect is selected and executed during the period of the third period. In both the first period and the third period in the present embodiment, the fade-out processing is completed as shown in FIG. 139(h) from the time when the effect selection production shown in FIG. 139(a) is started (production display area 208d is completely changed to white) and the time until the effect selection effect ends.

In the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of "Please select effect" is displayed in order to encourage the player to select a big hit effect to be executed in the big hit game. Further, a direction key image imitating the direction key 139 is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d, and a button image imitating the chance button 136 is displayed on the right side thereof. A character string image of “selection” is displayed below the direction key image, and notifies that the effect executed as the selectable effect can be changed to another effect by operating the direction key 139. .. Further, a character string image of “OK” is displayed below the button image, and by pressing the chance button 136, a second period executed in the second period started after the end of the first period. It is informed that the effect and the fourth effect executed in the fourth period started after the end of the third period can be determined. In the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d, the number of rounds in which the effect selection effect is executed is shown. In this example, a character string image of "1R" is displayed to notify that the number of rounds is "1". In the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d, "decoration 7" is displayed, and it is confirmed that the big hit was stopped and displayed in the symbol combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7".

In the frame image, as one of multiple effects displayed during the first period, a movie in which a princess character whose movie name is "may be there" appears The effect H for displaying a still image is being executed. The effect H in this example is a still image for effect selection effect, and is an image that is not displayed in the movie. At this time, no music is playing from the speaker 120 and the speaker 120 is silent. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), the pause of the image is released, and the movie effect by the moving image is started in the frame image. In synchronization with the start of the movie effect, the speaker 120 plays a song whose title is “may be there” as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the third period. Although the execution of the effect O is started, the effect O of this example is an effect mode in which the portion of the chorus in the middle of the song is played from the beginning. In this example, thereafter, the player operates the first (first) direction key 139 while the effect selection effect by the effects H and O is being executed. In this example, the operation of the direction key 139 is performed after the movie effect by the moving image is started, but the operation of the direction key 139 may be performed before the movie effect by the moving image is started. In this example, the start of the movie effect by the moving image and the start of the song are synchronized, but they may not be synchronized. Note that the effect H and/or the effect I may be displayed with an image in the middle of the movie being paused. Further, one of the song and the movie may be started halfway and the other may be started from the beginning.

FIG. 139(b) shows a state after the production selection production is executed and the player operates the direction key 139 for the first time during the production selection production by the productions H and O. ing. When the direction key 139 is operated, the fade-out process is started. By the fade-out process, the display of the effect H becomes invisible because the frame image gradually changes to white, and in synchronization with this, the music flowing from the speaker 120 gradually decreases and becomes silent, and the performance of the effect O is performed. It becomes inaudible. Instead of the fade-out process, a switching effect may be executed.

FIG. 139(c) shows a state in which the effect selection effect after the fade-out process is executed. Execution of the effect I is started in the frame image, and execution of the effect P is started in the speaker 120. As a result of the operation of the direction key 139, the effect is switched from the effect H to the effect I and from the effect O to the effect P in this manner. In the lower part of the display area for movie playback in the frame image, a character string image indicating the title of the effect is displayed.

In the frame image, as one of the multiple effects displayed during the first period, a still image corresponding to the movie in which the grandfather character with the movie name "Space of Kiseki" appears Execution of the effect I is started. The effect I in this example is a still image for effect selection effect, and is an image that is not displayed in the movie. At this time, no music is playing from the speaker 120 and the speaker 120 is silent. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), the pause of the image is released, and the movie effect by the moving image is started in the frame image. In synchronism with the start of the movie effect, an effect P in which a song having a song name of "Kiseki no Universe" flows from the speaker 120 as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the period of the third period. However, in this example, it is executed from the chorus part in the middle of the song.

139(d) shows a state in which the effect selection effect by the effect I and effect P is being executed subsequent to FIG. 139(c). The chorus portion continues to flow from the speaker 120, and the effect corresponding to the song is displayed in the frame image. In this example, thereafter, the player operates the directional key 139 for the second time during the execution of the effect selection effect by the effect I and the effect P.

FIG. 139(e) shows a state after the production selection production is executed and the player operates the directional key 139 for the second time while the production selection production by the production I and the production P is being executed. ing. When the direction key 139 is operated, the fade-out process is started. Due to the fade-out processing, the frame image gradually changes to white and the display of the effect I becomes invisible, and in synchronization with this, the music flowing from the speaker 120 gradually decreases and becomes silent and the performance of the effect P is performed. It becomes inaudible. Instead of the fade-out process, a switching effect may be executed.

FIG. 139(f) shows a state in which the effect selection effect after the fade-out process is being executed. Execution of the effect H is started in the frame image, and execution of the effect O is started in the speaker 120. As a result of the operation of the direction key 139, the effect is switched from the effect I to the effect H and from the effect P to the effect O in this way. In the lower part of the display area for movie playback in the frame image, a character string image indicating the title of the effect is displayed.

In the frame image, as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period, a movie in which a princess character whose movie name is “may be there” appears is displayed. The effect H is being executed. In the effect H in this example, an image in the middle of the movie is displayed in a paused state. At this time, no music is playing from the speaker 120 and the speaker 120 is silent. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), the pause of the image is released, and the movie effect by the moving image is started in the frame image. In synchronization with the start of the movie effect, from the speaker 120, as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the period of the third period, in the middle of the song whose title is “may be there”. Is being run from the rusty part. In this example, the start of the movie effect by the moving image and the start of the song are synchronized, but they may not be synchronized. In this example, thereafter, the first round ends while the production selection production by the productions H and O is being executed.

FIG. 139(g) shows the state of the effect selection effect immediately after the attacker 234 is closed and the first round is finished. The period from FIG. 139(g) to the next FIG. 139(h) is called an inter-round interval. As described with reference to FIGS. 136 and 137, the character string image of “1R” that notifies that the number of rounds is “1” is erased in the inter-round interval.

As shown in FIG. 139(g), when the attacker 234 closes without pressing the chance button 136 and the first round ends, the movie production by the moving image is interrupted and stopped, and an image in the middle of the movie is displayed. Displayed as a still image. Further, the music played from the speaker 120 is also interrupted and put in a stopped state. When the chance button 136 is not pressed, the effect H started in FIG. 139(f) is determined as the first effect by the end of the first round, and the effect O started in FIG. 139(f) is the third effect. Is determined as The song name of the third effect is the same as the movie name of the first effect, and the third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect. In addition, by the end of the first round, the second effect executed in the second period starting from FIG. 139(i) is determined and executed in the fourth period starting from FIG. 139(i). The fourth production is decided. Further, the width of the frame portion of the frame image is displayed thick so that the player's attention is directed to the movie display in the frame image. As a result, the fact that the effect H has been determined as the first effect is notified. Note that the effect H may be displayed as a still image (stopped state) or may be changed to moving image display again. Further, when the effect H shifts to the moving image display, the speaker 120 may start executing the effect O flowing from the hook portion in the middle of the song having the song name “may be there”.

FIG. 139(h) shows a state in which the first round ends and the second round starts, and the effect selection effect by the effects H and O ends. In the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of the round number "2R" of the round in which the big hit effect is executed is displayed. When the first round ends, the fade-out process is started. By the fade-out processing, the effect display area 208d gradually changes to white, and the display of the effect H becomes invisible. The fade-out process is completed, and the effect selection effect ends. Further, the fade-out process is completed and the first period and the third period are ended.

At the end of the production selection production, the movie image display, the character string image of "Please select the production", the direction key image, and the button image are hidden, but the character string image of "2R" and "decoration 7" The jackpot production by the display of "" continues to be executed.

FIG. 139(i) shows a state in which the jackpot effect including the second effect and the fourth effect selected in the effect selection effect is started after the attacker 234 is opened in the second round, and FIG. It shows the same state as in FIG. 132(b) following FIG. In the second period starting from FIG. 139(i), a movie in which a princess character whose movie name is “may be there” appears appears on almost the entire effect display area 208d from the beginning (first). The second effect (effect H') is performed. Also, in the fourth period starting from FIG. 139(i), the fourth production in which the song with the song name “may be there” corresponding to the second production flows from the beginning from the speaker 120. (Production O') is executed. In addition, a character string image "may be there" is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d. The character string image shows the movie name of the displayed movie and the song name of the playing song.

In addition, the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is described as follows in a controllable manner. The speaker 120 executes a plurality of effects such as effect O and effect P. One of the effects O and the effects P is the first effect. The first sub-control unit 400 executes in the second period (for example, the period started from FIG. 139(i)) in the first period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 139(a) to (h)). It is a means that can determine the effect to be performed. The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 is means for determining an effect to be executed in the second period when the first condition is satisfied. The case where the first condition is satisfied is the case where the first round is completed. The speaker 120 is means for executing only a part of the first effect during the period of the first period, and in the first case (during the period of the first period, the first sub-control unit 400 controls When one effect is executed and the first round is finished), the first effect is ended, and the effect to be executed in the second period in the second period can be executed from the beginning.

According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, part of the effect O is executed in the first period, so that it is possible to realize a gaming table having the characteristics of the speaker 120. Further, since the effect O′ is started from the beginning, it may be possible for the player to easily recognize that the second period is started. Further, in the first period, only part of the effect O is executed, so that it may be possible to prevent the player from getting tired even when the effect O′ is executed from the beginning in the second period. ..

Next, a modified example of the big hit game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 140. This modification has a feature in the effect selection effect in the big hit effect. The big hit effects shown in FIGS. 140(a) to (e) show, in this order, the effect selection effects in which the first effect is selected and the second effect to be executed in the big hit game is selected. Further, FIG. 140(f) shows a state in which the big hit effect including the second effect selected in the effect selection effect has been started. In these figures, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures. Further, the description of the effect display mode in the effect display area 208d in the effect selection effect of this modified example which is the same as that of the example 13 will be omitted.

Fig.140 (a) has shown the state which continued from FIG.132 (a), and has shown the state where the production selection production was started. In the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of "please select music" is displayed in order to encourage the player to select a big hit effect to be executed in the big hit game. In addition, a horizontally long rectangular music selectable area is displayed in the lower right of the character string image, and the center part of the music selectable area can be selected as the first effect executed by the speaker 120 as an effect means. A character string image of "may be there", which is the song name of a different song (effect O), is displayed. Further, a horizontally long rectangular music display area is displayed at the lower right of the music selectable area, and the title of the music (effect P) that can be displayed in the music selectable area is "Kiseki" in the center of the music display area. The character string image of "universe" is displayed. In the effect selection effect, the first effect is selected and executed during the first period. In the first period in this example, the fade-out process is completed as shown in FIG. 140(e) from the time when the effect selection effect shown in FIG. 140(a) is started (the effect display area 208d is completely changed to white). It is a period until the time when the effect selection effect is finished.

In this modification, the outer circumference of the music selectable area is displayed with a thick line and the character string image of “may be there” is displayed in a large size so that the player can easily recognize the music name of the selectable music ing. On the other hand, the outer periphery of the music display area is displayed with a thin line so that it is not more conspicuous than the music selectable area, and the character string image of “Kiseki no Universe” is displayed smaller. Also, no music is playing from the speaker 120 and the speaker 120 is in a silent state. This state is the default production mode of the production selection production according to this modification.

Further, a direction key image imitating the direction key 139 is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d, and a button image imitating the chance button 136 is displayed on the right side thereof. Below the direction key image, the character string image of “select” is displayed. The character string image of “select” informs that the selectable song can be changed by operating the direction key 139. In this example, every time the player operates the direction keys 139, the song title displayed in the song selection display area is moved to the song display area and displayed, and the song title displayed in the song display area is selected and displayed. By moving to the area and displaying it, the selectable music can be changed. Further, a character string image of “OK” is displayed below the button image. The character string image of “decision” informs that the music can be determined as the second effect executed in the second period started from FIG. 140(f) described later by pressing the chance button 136. ing.

FIG. 140( b) is an effect in which the song name is “may be there” from the speaker 120 as one effect of a plurality of effects displayed during the period of the first period after the predetermined time has elapsed. It shows a state in which the effect of starting the chorus part in the middle of the song O is started from the beginning.

FIG. 140(c) shows a state in which the effect of flowing the chorus portion continues. After that, the fade-out process is executed, and as the process goes to the end of the chorus, the music played from the speaker 120 becomes gradually smaller and becomes silent, so that the performance O cannot be heard. Instead of the fade-out process, a switching effect may be executed.

In FIG. 140(d), the fade-in process is executed after the fade-out process is executed, and the chorus part of the effect O is set as one effect among the plurality of effects displayed again during the first period. It shows a state in which the effect of flowing from is started. In this example, the player then presses the chance button 136. By pressing the chance button 136, the effect O started in FIG. 140(d) is determined as the first effect. Note that, in FIGS. 140(b) and 140(d), the same effect is made from the speaker 120 in which the portion of the chorus in the middle of the song of the effect O whose song name is “may be there” is played from the beginning. However, they are separate productions.

FIG. 140(e) shows a state in which the production selection production is ended by pressing the chance button 136 during execution of the production selection production. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the fade-out process is started. By the fade-out processing, the effect display area 208d gradually changes to white, and the display of the music selectable area and the music display area becomes invisible. In addition, the music played from the speaker 120 gradually becomes smaller and becomes silent (stopped), making it impossible to hear the performance O. The fade-out process is completed, and the effect selection effect ends. Further, the fade-out process is completed and the first effect and the first period are ended.

At the end of the production selection, the character string image of "Please select a song", direction key image, and button image are hidden, but a big hit by displaying the character string image of "1R" and "decoration 7" The production continues to be executed.

FIG.140(f) has shown the state where the big hit production including the 2nd production selected by the production selection production was started, and shows the same state as FIG.132(b) following FIG.132(c). ing. In the second period starting from FIG. 140(f), the speaker 120 executes the second effect (effect O') in which the music having the music title "may be there" flows from the beginning. Also, a movie effect (movie name "may be there") corresponding to the second effect is displayed from the beginning on almost the entire effect display area 208d.

During the production selection production, in the case of playing BGM instead of the production O executed in FIG. 140(c) and FIG. 140(d), when one of the plurality of songs constituting the BGM is played. The fade-in process may be performed, and the fade-out process may be performed when playing another song. When there is only one music constituting the BGM, the control for setting the output volume of the BGM or the control for designating the effect range to be executed may be executed for the music.

According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, part of the effect O is executed in the first period, so that it is possible to realize a gaming table having the characteristics of the speaker 120. Further, since the effect O′ is started from the beginning, it may be possible for the player to easily recognize that the second period is started. Further, in the first period, only part of the effect O is executed, so that it may be possible to prevent the player from getting tired even when the effect O′ is executed from the beginning in the second period. ..

Example 14 A jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 14 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 141. The present embodiment is characterized in that the effect selection effect is executed over a plurality of rounds unless the chance button 136 is pressed. In this embodiment, the case where the chance button 136 is not pressed in the first round and the chance button 136 is pressed in the second round will be described.

In this example, the outer circumference of the music selectable area is displayed with a thick line so that the player can easily recognize the music titles of the selectable music, which is the music title of the music (effect O) that can be selected as the first effect. It may be there.” The text image is oversized. On the other hand, the outer periphery of the music display area is displayed with a thin line so that it is not more conspicuous than the music selectable area, and the character string image of “Kiseki no Universe” is displayed smaller. From the speaker 120, the middle of the song of the effect O whose song title is “may be there” is playing. In the effect selection effect, the first effect is selected and executed during the first period. In the first period in this embodiment, the effect selection effect ends after the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 141(e) is pressed from the time when the previous effect selection effect shown in FIG. 141(a) is started. It is the period until.

Further, a direction key image imitating the direction key 139 is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d, and a button image imitating the chance button 136 is displayed on the right side thereof. Below the direction key image, the character string image of “select” is displayed. The character string image of “select” informs that the selectable song can be changed by operating the direction key 139. In this example, every time the player operates the direction keys 139, the song title displayed in the song selection display area is moved to the song display area and displayed, and the song title displayed in the song display area is selected and displayed. By moving to the area and displaying it, the selectable music can be changed. Further, a character string image of “OK” is displayed below the button image. The character string image of “determination” informs that the musical piece as the second effect executed in the second period can be determined by pressing the chance button 136.

141(a) and 141(b) show the state in which the effect selection effect by the effect O is being executed. In this example, thereafter, the first round ends without pressing the chance button 136 during the execution of the effect selection effect by the effect O.

FIG. 141(c) shows the state of the effect selection effect immediately after the attacker 234 is closed and the first round is finished. The period from FIG. 141(c) to the next FIG. 141(d) is the inter-round interval. As described with reference to FIGS. 136 and 137, the character string image of “1R” that notifies that the number of rounds is “1” is erased in the inter-round interval. Even after the first round ends, the speaker 120 continues to execute the effect O.

FIG. 141(d) shows a state in which the first round is finished and the second round is started, and the effect selection effect is continued. The production of the effect O is continued on the speaker 120. In the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of the round number "2R" of the round in which the big hit effect is executed is displayed. In this example, thereafter, the player depresses the chance button 136 while the effect selection effect by the effect O is being executed. By depressing the chance button 136, the effect O being executed at the time of FIG. 141(d) is determined as the first effect. Further, by pressing the chance button 136, the second effect (effect O′) that is executed in the second period starting after FIG. 141(e) is determined.

FIG. 141(e) shows a state in which the effect selection effect continues after the second round is started. Pressing the chance button 136 causes the speaker 120 to end the execution of the effect O, and plays a determination sound that notifies the player that the second effect has been determined. In addition, the inside of the music selectable area is changed to black, and the character string image of "may be there" is changed to a white display, thereby informing the player that the second effect has been decided. ..

In this example, the chance button 136 was pressed in the middle of the second round, but if the chance button 136 was not pressed, at the end of the round (in this example, The effect O may be determined as the first effect and the effect O′ may be determined as the second effect at the end of the second round). Further, unless the chance button 136 is pressed, neither the first effect nor the second effect is determined, and the effect selection effect may be continuously executed until the end of the 15th round.

Example 15 A jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 15 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 142. The big hit effects shown in FIGS. 142(a) to (h) show, in this order, an effect selection effect in which the first effect is selected and the second effect to be executed in the big hit game is selected. Further, FIG. 142(i) shows a state in which the big hit effect including the second effect selected in the effect selection effect has been started. In these figures, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures. FIG. 142(a) shows a state in which execution of the effect selection effect has started in the first round. The production selection production is started from the start point of the first round. In the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of "Please select a story" is displayed in order to encourage the player to select a big hit effect to be executed in the big hit game. Below the character string image, two horizontally long rectangular story name display areas are displayed vertically side by side. A character string image indicating the story name is displayed in each of the two upper and lower story name display areas. When a story is selected, a movie corresponding to the story can be selected as the first effect executed by the decorative symbol display device 208. In the upper story name display area, a character string image of "[First episode] Happening in a castle town (hereinafter, abbreviated as "first episode")" is displayed, and in the lower story name display area, "[ Second Episode] A character string image of "Reunion with Echigoya (hereinafter, abbreviated as "second episode")" is displayed. Further, to the right of the story name display area, an area for displaying a still image in which the movie corresponding to the selected story is paused at a predetermined position, and an area for displaying the synopsis corresponding to the selected story, A square synopsis display area with is displayed. In the effect selection effect, the first effect is selected and executed during the first period. In the first period in the present embodiment, the chance button 136 is pressed and the fade-out processing shown in FIG. 142(h) is completed from the time when the effect selection effect shown in FIG. 142(a) is started. It is a period until the end of the effect selection effect.

In this example, the outline of the story name display area in which the selected story name is displayed is displayed with a thick line so that the player can easily recognize the story name of the selected story. The outer circumference of the displayed story name display area is displayed with thin lines. In this example, the outer periphery of the story name display area in which "First Episode" is displayed is displayed with a thick line. On the other hand, the outer periphery of the story name display area in which "Second episode" is displayed is displayed as a thin line. Further, in the synopsis display area, the display of the movie and the synopsis corresponding to the selected story is not started, and the BGM for story selection is flowing from the speaker 120. This state is the default production mode of the production selection production according to this example.

Further, a direction key image imitating the direction key 139 is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d, and a button image imitating the chance button 136 is displayed on the right side thereof. Below the direction key image, the character string image of “select” is displayed. The character string image of “select” informs that the selectable story can be changed by operating the direction key 139. In this example, the outer periphery of the story name display area selected each time the player operates the direction keys 139 is displayed with a thick line. Further, a character string image of “OK” is displayed below the button image. The character string image of “determination” informs that the movie as the second effect executed in the second period can be determined by pressing the chance button 136. In the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d, the number of rounds in which the effect selection effect is executed is shown. In this example, a character string image of "1R" is displayed to notify that the number of rounds is "1". In the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d, "decoration 7" is displayed, and it is confirmed that the big hit was stopped and displayed in the symbol combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7".

In FIG. 142(b), the effect selection effect is executed, the still image of the movie corresponding to the "first episode" is displayed in the synopsis display area, and the synopsis corresponding to the selected story is displayed ( Hereinafter, it may be referred to as “effect J”) is being executed. Further, the still image of the movie may be switched, and the synopsis display may be switched accordingly. In this example, thereafter, the player operates the direction key 139 for the first time during execution of the effect selection effect.

FIG. 142(c) shows a state after the effect selection effect has been executed and the player has operated the direction key 139 for the first time. By operating the direction key 139, the outer circumference of the lower story name display area is displayed with a thick line, and the selected story is changed to “second episode”. Also, when the direction key 139 is operated, the fade-out process is started. Due to the fade-out processing, the inside of the synopsis display area gradually changes to white, and the still image and the synopsis display become invisible. Instead of the fade-out process, a switching effect may be executed.

In FIG. 142(d), the effect selection effect is being executed, the still image of the movie corresponding to the "second episode" is displayed in the synopsis display area, and the synopsis corresponding to the selected story is displayed. Is shown. Further, the still image of the movie may be switched, and the synopsis display may be switched accordingly. In this example, thereafter, the second operation of the direction key 139 by the player is executed during execution of the effect selection effect.

FIG. 142(e) shows a state after the production selection production is executed and the player operates the direction key 139 for the second time. By operating the direction key 139, the outer periphery of the upper story name display area is displayed in a thick line, and the selected story is changed to “first story”. Also, when the direction key 139 is operated, the fade-out process is started. Due to the fade-out processing, the inside of the synopsis display area gradually changes to white, and the still image and the synopsis display become invisible. Instead of the fade-out process, a switching effect may be executed.

FIG. 142(f) shows a state in which the effect selection effect is being executed and the effect J is being executed. Further, the still image of the movie may be switched, and the synopsis display may be switched accordingly. In this example, thereafter, the player presses the chance button 136 during execution of the effect selection effect.

FIG. 142(g) shows a state in which the effect selection effect is being executed immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed. By pressing the chance button 136, the effect J started from FIG. 142(f) is determined as the first effect. Further, by pressing the chance button 136, the second effect executed in the second period started from FIG. 142(i) is determined. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the speaker 120 finishes execution of the BGM effect for story selection, and a determination sound is played to inform the player that the second effect has been determined.

In FIG. 142(h), when the chance button 136 is pressed, the effect J is determined as the first effect, and the effect that is a movie including an image of Yoshimune reading a newspaper is determined as the second effect, and the fade-out process is performed. Shows the state where is executed. By the fade-out processing, the effect display area 208d gradually changes to white, and the effect selection effect display becomes invisible. The fade-out process is completed, and the effect selection effect ends. Further, the fade-out processing is completed, and the first effect and the first period are ended.

When the production selection is completed, the synopsis display area, the story name display area, the character string image of "Please select a story.", the direction key image, and the button image are hidden, but the "1R" The jackpot effect by the display of the character string image and "decoration 7" continues to be executed.

FIG. 142(i) shows a state in which the big hit effect including the second effect selected in the effect selection effect has been started. In the second period starting from FIG. 142(i), the effect J′, which is a movie including an image of Yoshimune reading a newspaper, is executed from the beginning, and the speaker 120 corresponds to the second effect in synchronization with it. The performed BGM is executed from the beginning of the song. In this example, the effect J′ is started from the beginning in the second period, but a still image may be started.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the synopsis of the story is displayed in the synopsis display area, but a part of the story (for example, a part of the sentence) displayed after the story is determined may be displayed. The same applies to the subsequent examples.

In the present embodiment, the still image of the movie displayed after the story is determined is displayed in the synopsis display area, but a part of the movie may be displayed. Alternatively, a still image that is not displayed in the story may be displayed. The same applies to the subsequent examples.

Example 16 A jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 16 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 143. The present embodiment is characterized in that the synopsis corresponding to the selected story displayed in the synopsis display area is animated. 143(a) to 143(i) show the effect selection effects according to the present embodiment in time series. In these figures, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures. Further, the description of the effect display mode in the effect display area 208d in the effect selection effect of the present embodiment which is the same as the effect display mode of the fifteenth embodiment is omitted.

FIG. 143(a) shows a state in which execution of the effect selection effect has started in the first round. The production selection production is started from the start point of the first round. The outer circumference of the story name display area in which "First Episode" is displayed is displayed with a thick line. On the other hand, the outer periphery of the story name display area in which "Second episode" is displayed is displayed as a thin line. Further, in the synopsis display area, the display of the movie and the synopsis corresponding to the selected story is not started, and the BGM for story selection is flowing from the speaker 120. This state is the default production mode of the production selection production according to this example.

FIG. 143( b) shows a state in which the effect selection effect is being executed, and the animation display in which the synopsis corresponding to the selected story “first episode” is gradually displayed in the synopsis display area is started. .. About one-third of the synopsis is animated. Moreover, the still image of the movie corresponding to the "first episode" is not displayed.

75(c) shows a state in which the effect selection effect has been executed, the animation display of the synopsis has ended, and the full text of the synopsis corresponding to the selected story "first episode" is displayed in the synopsis display area. There is.

In FIG. 143(d), the effect selection effect is being executed, the still image of the movie corresponding to the "first episode" is displayed in the synopsis display area, and the entire sentence of the synopsis corresponding to the selected story is displayed. It shows the state. Further, the still image of the movie may be switched, and the synopsis display may be switched accordingly. In this example, thereafter, the player operates the direction key 139 for the first time during execution of the effect selection effect.

FIG. 143(e) shows a state after the effect selection effect is executed and the player operates the direction key 139 for the first time. By operating the direction key 139, the outer circumference of the lower story name display area is displayed with a thick line, and the selected story is changed to “second episode”. Also, when the direction key 139 is operated, the fade-out process is started. Due to the fade-out processing, the inside of the synopsis display area gradually changes to white, and the still image and the synopsis display become invisible. Instead of the fade-out process, a switching effect may be executed.

FIG. 143(f) shows a state in which the effect selection effect is being executed, and the animation display in which the synopsis corresponding to the selected story "second episode" is gradually displayed in the synopsis display area is started. .. About one-third of the synopsis is animated. Moreover, the still image of the movie corresponding to the "second episode" is not displayed.

FIG. 143(g) shows a state in which the effect selection effect has been executed, the animation display of the synopsis has ended, and the entire sentence of the synopsis corresponding to the selected story “second episode” is displayed in the synopsis display area. ing. In this example, thereafter, the second operation of the direction key 139 by the player is executed during execution of the effect selection effect.

FIG. 143(h) shows the state after the production selection production is executed and the player operates the direction key 139 for the second time. By operating the direction key 139, the outer periphery of the upper story name display area is displayed in a thick line, and the selected story is changed to “first story”. Also, when the direction key 139 is operated, the fade-out process is started. Due to the fade-out processing, the inside of the synopsis display area gradually changes to white, and the still image and the synopsis display become invisible. Instead of the fade-out process, a switching effect may be executed.

FIG. 143(i) shows a state in which the effect selection effect is being executed, and the animation display in which the synopsis corresponding to the selected story “first episode” is gradually displayed is started in the synopsis display area. There is. About one-third of the synopsis is animated. Moreover, the still image of the movie corresponding to the "first episode" is not displayed. Thus, even if the synopsis animation is displayed once, it may be executed again from the beginning.

FIG. 143(i′) shows a state in which after the fade-out processing in FIG. 143(h) is performed, the effect selection effect is executed instead of FIG. 143(i). In the synopsis display area, a still image of the movie corresponding to the "first episode" is displayed, and the entire sentence of the synopsis corresponding to the selected story is displayed. As described above, when the still image of the movie that has been displayed once and the synopsis are to be displayed again, the movie may be displayed all at once. In this embodiment, the animation for displaying the same synopsis is executed only for the first time in one effect selection period, and when it is selected again, the animation is canceled and all the animations are displayed. If you change to the next story in the middle of the first animation, and if the story in which the animation is executed halfway again is selected, cancel the animation and display all the synopses. Alternatively, it may be executed in the middle of the animation executed before the change, or may be executed again from the beginning.

Example 17 A jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 17 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 144. In this embodiment, the first effect selected in the first period and the third effect selected in the third period are separately selected, and the second effect executed in the second period. And the fourth effect executed in the fourth period are separately selected (determined). 144(a) to (e), the big hit effects shown in this order select the first effect and the third effect, and select the second effect and the fourth effect to be executed in the big hit game. Are shown in chronological order. Further, FIGS. 144(f) to (g) show a state in which the big hit effect including the second effect and the fourth effect selected in the effect selection effect is started and executed. In these figures, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures. In addition, in the effect display mode in the effect display area 208d in the effect selection effect of the present embodiment, the description of the same effect display mode as that of the example 15 in FIGS. 144(a) and (b) will be omitted, and FIG. Descriptions of (c) to (e) regarding the same effect display mode as that of the fourteenth embodiment will be omitted.

In FIG. 144(a), when the effect J is executed in the effect display area 208d and the BGM for story selection is flowing from the speaker 120, the effect selection effect immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed is executed. Shows the state. By pressing the chance button 136, the effect J shown in FIG. 144(a) is determined as the first effect. Further, by pressing the chance button 136, the second effect executed in the second period started from FIG. 144(f) is determined. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the speaker 120 finishes the execution of the BGM for story selection, and a decision sound is played to inform the player that the effect J′ has been determined as the second effect. The first period in this embodiment is a period from the time when the previous effect selection effect shown in FIG. 144(a) is started to the time when the fade-out process shown in FIG. 144(b) is completed.

FIG. 144( b) shows a state in which the fade-out process is executed following the notification that the effect J is determined as the first effect by pressing the chance button 136 and the effect J′ is determined as the second effect. ing. By the fade-out process, the effect display area 208d gradually changes to white, and the display of effect J becomes invisible. The fade-out process is completed, and the first effect and the first period are ended.

When the production J ends, the synopsis display area, the story name display area, the character string image of "Please select a story.", the direction key image, and the button image are hidden, but the characters of "1R" are displayed. The jackpot effect by the display of the row image and "decoration 7" is continuously executed.

In FIG. 144(c), the effect selection effect is being executed, the third period is started, and a song (effect O) selectable as the third effect is executed in the music selectable area by the speaker 120. It shows a state in which a character string image of "may be there" which is a song title is displayed. Further, in the music display area, a character string image of “Kiseki no Universe”, which is the music title of the music (effect P) that can be displayed in the music selectable area, is displayed. Also, no music is playing from the speaker 120 and the speaker 120 is in a silent state.

FIG. 144(d) shows a state in which the execution of the effect O in which the music having the music title "may be there" flows from the head after the predetermined time has elapsed has been started. In this example, thereafter, the player presses the chance button 136 while the effect O is being executed. By pressing the chance button 136, the effect O started in FIG. 144(c) is determined as the third effect. Further, by pressing the chance button 136, the fourth effect executed in the fourth period started from FIG. 144(f) is determined.

FIG. 144(e) shows a state in which the effect selection effect is being executed immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed. When the chance button 136 is pressed, execution of the effect O (third effect) is ended (stopped) on the speaker 120, and a determination sound is played to notify the player that the fourth effect has been determined. Also, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the inside of the music selectable area is changed to black, and the character string image of “may be there” is changed to a white display, thereby giving the player a fourth indication. Notify that the effect O'has been determined as the effect. In this example, the third period thereafter ends.

FIG. 144(f) shows a state in which the big hit effect including the second effect and the fourth effect selected in the effect selection effect has been started. In the second period started from FIG. 144(f), the second effect (effect J′) is executed from the beginning. In the fourth period started from FIG. 144(f), the speaker 120 executes the fourth effect (effect O'). In addition, a character string image of “may be there” is displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d, and shows the song title of the song playing from the speaker 120.

FIG. 144(g) shows a state in which a big-hit effect including the second effect and the fourth effect selected in the effect selection effect is being executed, and was displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. It shows a state where the display of the character string image "may be there" disappears.

In the present embodiment, the once-selected story and song cannot be changed, but one of the story and song cannot be changed, and the other is the period during which the production can be changed (for example, the timing of FIG. 144(f)). To the end of 15R). Further, both the story and the music may be changeable at any timing in the period in which the effect can be changed (for example, the period from the timing of FIG. 144(f) to the end of 15R).

(Embodiment 18) A special figure variation game and a big hit game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Embodiment 18 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 145. 145(a) shows a state in which the same special figure 1 variation game as in FIG. 129(f) is being executed. FIG. 145(b) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed on the upper right of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and most of the image display area is used for the effect display area 208d. Is shown. FIG. 145(c) shows a state in which the character string image of “Yoshimune Roulette!” is displayed in the effect display area 208d and the pre-reach effect is started.

In FIG. 145(d), a horizontally long rectangular image display area I is defined in the upper left quarter of the effect display area 208d, and a movie a′ that can be selected as the first effect in the image display area I is displayed. The state where the display is started and the effect selection effect is started is shown. Movie a′ suggests an SP reach production in which there are two samurai fighting scenes starting from FIG. In the effect selection effect, the first effect is selected and executed during the first period. In the first period in this embodiment, the fade-out processing is completed as shown in FIG. 145(o) from the time when the effect selection effect shown in FIG. 145(d) is started (the effect display area 208d is completely white). It changes) and the time until the effect selection effect ends.

FIG. 145(e) shows a state in which the display of the movie a′ is being executed in the image display area I. In FIG. 145(f), a horizontally long rectangular image display area II is defined in the upper right quarter of the effect display area 208d when the movie a'is being displayed in the image display area I. , A state in which the display of the movie b'has started in the image display area II. FIG. 145(g) shows a state in which the movie a′ is displayed in the image display area I and the movie b′ is displayed in the image display area II.

FIG. 145(h) shows that the movie a′ is displayed in the image display area I and the movie b′ is displayed in the image display area II, and the lower right quadrant of the effect display area 208d is displayed. The horizontally long rectangular image display area III is defined in the first area, the still image c is displayed in the image display area III, and the horizontally long rectangular image is then displayed in the lower left quarter of the effect display area 208d. The display area IV is defined, and the display of the movie d′ is started in the image display area IV. After that, in the image display area I, the moving image display of the movie a'is completed, and the still image a is displayed.

In FIG. 145(i), the still image a is displayed in the image display area I and the movie b′ is displayed in the image display area II. After that, the movie b′ in the image display area II is displayed. Shows a state in which the moving image display is completed and the still image b is displayed. The still image c is displayed in the image display area III, and the movie d′ is displayed in the image display area IV.

In FIG. 145(j), the still image a is displayed in the image display area I, the still image b is displayed in the image display area II, and the still image c is displayed in the image display area III. The display of the movie d′ is being executed in the area IV. Then, in the image display area IV, the moving image display of the movie d'is completed and the still image d is displayed. Next, in a state where the still images a to d are displayed in all of the image display areas I to IV, the brightness of the image display area I becomes high and the brightness of the other three image display areas II to IV becomes relatively low. Will be performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(k), an effect is performed in which the brightness of the image display area II becomes high and the brightness of the other three image display areas I, III, and IV becomes relatively low.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(l), an effect in which the brightness of the image display area III becomes high and the brightness of the other three image display areas I, II, IV becomes relatively low is executed. Further, the button effect is started, a button image is displayed in the central portion of the effect display area 208d, and an effective period image is displayed below the button image to urge the player to press the chance button 136.

Next, in FIG. 145(m), an effect in which the brightness of the image display area IV is high and the brightness of the other three image display areas I to III is relatively low is executed. In addition, a state is shown in which the valid period for accepting button operations has passed, and the bar-shaped portion of the valid period image display is somewhat shortened to the right. By repeating the states of FIGS. 145(j) to (m) in this order, the order in which one of the image display areas I to IV becomes higher in brightness than the other three becomes the order of I to IV. The brightness area is visually recognized as rotating. As a result, the player can get a feeling that the roulette wheel is spinning in the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 145(n), the states of FIGS. 145(j) to (m) are repeated several times in this order. As a result of the player pressing the chance button 136 in the button operation acceptance permitted state, the image display area I is It shows a state in which the rotation of the high-luminance region is stopped in the high-luminance state. The still image a displayed in the image display area I at this time is determined as the first effect. Moreover, after the chance button 136 is pressed, the effects of the movies a′, b′, and d′ may be executed again in the image display areas I, II, and IV.

FIG. 145(o) is the same as FIG. 129(m) subsequent to FIG. 129(n), and shows a state in which the effect selection effect is completed by pressing the chance button 136. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the fade-out process is started. By the fade-out process, the effect display area 208d gradually changes to white, and the image display areas I to IV and the still images a to d become invisible. The fade-out process is completed, and the effect selection effect ends. Further, the fade-out process is completed and the first effect and the first period are also ended. After that, in the second period starting from FIG. 129(n), the SP reach effect, which is the second effect in which two samurai fight each other, is executed. The effect selection effect may be executed not only during the big hit game but also during the special figure variation game as in this example, or may be executed on the customer waiting screen.

(Example 19) The special figure variation game and the big hit game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 19 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 132 and FIG. 146. Since FIGS. 129 to 132 have been described in the eleventh embodiment, description thereof will be omitted here. FIGS. 146(a) to 146(j) show the big hit effect in time series in this order. In addition, in the figures showing the big hit production in time series, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures. FIG. 146(a) shows the same state as FIG. 130(h) following FIG. 130(g). Almost the entire image display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 becomes the effect display area 208d, and the character string image of "probably strange big hit" is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d to notify that the 15R special big hit has been won. ing. In this example, the first period is then started.

FIG. 146(b) shows a state in which the effect selection effect is being executed. In the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of "please select music" is displayed in order to encourage the player to select a big hit effect to be executed in the big hit game. In addition, a horizontally long rectangular music selectable area is displayed in the lower right of the character string image, and the center part of the music selectable area can be selected as the first effect executed by the speaker 120 as an effect means. A character string image of "may be there", which is the song name of a different song, is displayed. In the lower right of the music selectable area, a horizontally long rectangular music display area is displayed, and in the center of the music display area, the song title of the music that can be displayed in the music selectable area The character string image is displayed. In the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d, the number of rounds in which the effect selection effect is executed is shown. In this example, a character string image of "1R" is displayed to notify that the number of rounds is "1". In the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d, "decoration 7" is displayed, and it is confirmed that the big hit was stopped and displayed in the symbol combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7".

In FIG. 146(b), the outer periphery of the music selectable area is displayed with a thick line so that the player can easily recognize the music name of the selectable music, and the character string image of “may be there” is enlarged. It is displayed. On the other hand, the outer periphery of the music display area is displayed with a thin line so that it is not more conspicuous than the music selectable area, and the character string image of “Kiseki no Universe” is displayed smaller. Also, no music is playing from the speaker 120 and the speaker 120 is in a silent state. This state is the default effect mode of the effect selection effect for the first big hit.

Further, a direction key image imitating the direction key 139 is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d, and a button image imitating the chance button 136 is displayed on the right side thereof. Below the direction key image, the character string image of “select” is displayed. The character string image of “select” informs that the selectable song can be changed by operating the direction key 139. In FIG. 146(b), every time the player operates the direction keys 139, the song title displayed in the song selection display area is moved to the song display area and displayed, and the song title displayed in the song display area is displayed. By moving to the music selection display area and displaying it, the selectable music can be changed. Further, a character string image of “OK” is displayed below the button image. The character string image of “determination” informs that the musical piece as the second effect executed in the second period can be determined by pressing the chance button 136.

Also, although not shown in FIG. 146(b), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the effect selection effect was started, an effect in which a song having a song name "may be there" flows from the beginning from the speaker 120. The execution of O is started. In the effect O, a part of the chorus in the middle of the song may be played from the beginning. In this example, thereafter, the player depresses the chance button 136 during execution of the effect selection effect. By pressing the chance button 136, the effect O started in FIG. 146(b) is determined as the first effect. Further, by pressing the chance button 136, the second effect executed in the second period started from FIG. 146(c) is determined.

Further, since the chance button 136 is pressed during execution of the effect selection effect, the fade-out process is started, and the performance of the effect O becomes inaudible. The fade-out process is completed, and the effect selection effect ends. Further, the fade-out process is completed and the first effect and the first period are ended.

FIG. 146(c) shows a state in which the big hit effect including the second effect selected in the effect selection effect has been started, and shows the same state as FIG. 132(b) following FIG. 132(c). ing. In the second period started from FIG. 146(c), the speaker 120 executes the second effect (effect O') in which the music having the music title "may be there" flows from the beginning. Also, a movie effect (movie name "may be there") corresponding to the second effect is displayed from the beginning on almost the entire effect display area 208d. In the effect O′, the chorus part in the middle of the song may be played from the beginning, and the movie effect may be adapted to this.

FIG. 146(d) shows a state in which the big hit end effect for notifying that the big hit game has ended is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 132(f) following FIG. 132(g). A character string image of "probability variation plunge" is displayed in the two-thirds area on the left side of the effect display area 208d, a character image of a samurai is displayed in the remaining one-third area, and the jackpot ends from the speaker 120. The production BGM flows, and it is notified that the state will shift to the probability variation state.

FIG. 146(e) shows a state in which the effect selection effect is started by winning the second 15R special jackpot in the special figure variation game executed several times in succession from FIG. 132(g). There is. Description of the same effect display mode as the effect display mode shown in FIG. 146(b) in the effect display area 208d in the effect selection effect of FIG. 146(e) will be omitted. A "second time" character string image is displayed below the "1R" character string image in the effect display area 208d, and it is informed that two consecutive holidays are in progress. In the effect display area 208d, a character string image of “may be there” is displayed in the music selectable area, and the music display area below the music selectable area (hereinafter, “music display area 1”). A character string image of "the universe of miracle" is displayed on the screen. Further, a second music display area (hereinafter, referred to as "music display area 2") is displayed below the music display area 1 in the second condominium, and the third music "" is displayed in the music display area 2. The character string image of "Your Piece" is displayed. Also, no music is playing from the speaker 120 and the speaker 120 is in a silent state. This state is the default production mode of the production selection production after the two-story house. In this example, in the default presentation mode, the oldest song name is displayed in the song selectable area, but a newly added song may be displayed. In this example, the number of songs that can be displayed in the song selectable area increases by one each time the number of consecutive holiday rentals increases. In this way, it may be possible to entertain the player by increasing the types of effects executed in the second period that can be confirmed in the first period.

Although not shown in FIG. 146(e), after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the effect selection effect of the second consecutive villa of the big hit game, the title of the song "may be there" is output from the speaker 120. Execution of the effect O in which the song flows from the beginning is started. In the effect O, a part of the chorus in the middle of the song may be played from the beginning.

FIG. 146(f) shows a state after the player operates the right direction key 139 during execution of the effect selection effect of the second consecutive resort of the big hit game. When the right direction key 139 is operated once, the character string image of “may be there” displayed in the music selectable area is moved to the music display area 2 and displayed, and displayed in the music display area 1. The character string image of "Kiseki no Universe" that was displayed is moved to the music selectable area and displayed, and the character string image of "Kimi no Kakera" displayed in music display area 2 is moved to music display area 1. Is displayed. On the contrary, when the left direction key 139 is operated once, the music title displayed in the music selectable area is moved to the music display area 1 and displayed, and the music title displayed in the music display area 1 is displayed in the music display area 2. The music title displayed on the music display area 2 is displayed on the music selectable area. Further, when the player continuously operates the right direction key 139 a plurality of times in succession, for example, the character string image of “may be there” displayed in the music selectable area is displayed in the music display area 2 → Music display area 1 → Music selectable area → Music display area 2 Moves in a rotary manner. The same applies when the left direction key 139 is continuously operated a plurality of times.

Although not shown in FIG. 146(f), after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the effect selection effect, an effect in which the music piece with the song title “Universe of Kiseki” is played from the beginning is started from the speaker 120. Further, in the effect, an effect mode may be adopted in which a rust part in the middle of the music is played from the beginning.

FIG. 146(g) shows a state in which the effect selection effects of the third and fourth consecutive solitaire games of the big hit game are finished and the effect selection effect of the fifth consecutive solitary game is started. A "5th" character string image is displayed below the character string image of "1R" in the effect display area 208d, and it is informed that it is in the 5 consecutive holidays. In the fifth consecutive resort, there are 6 songs that can be displayed in the song selectable area. Although not shown in FIG. 146(g), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the effect selection effect for the fifth consecutive villa, the music piece whose title is “may be there” is output from the beginning from the speaker 120. Execution of flowing effect O is started. In the effect O, a part of the chorus in the middle of the song may be played from the beginning.

FIG. 146(h) shows a state after the player has operated the right direction key 139 once during execution of the effect selection effect of the fifth consecutive game of the big hit game. The character string image of "may be there" displayed in the music selectable area is deleted, and the character string image of "Kiseki no Universe" displayed in music display area 1 moves to the music selectable area The character string image of "Kimi no Kakera" displayed in the song display area 2 is moved to the song display area 1 and displayed, and "Mega! Giga! Summer!" The character string image “” is displayed in the music display area 2. In this way, by operating the button on the right side of the direction key 139, a new song is displayed in the song display area 2.

Although not shown in FIG. 146(h), after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the effect selection effect, an effect in which the song with the song name “Universe of Kiseki” is played from the beginning from the speaker 120 is started. Further, in the effect, an effect mode may be adopted in which a rust part in the middle of the music is played from the beginning.

FIG. 146(i) shows a state after the player further operates the right direction key 139 during execution of the effect selection effect of the fifth consecutive game of the big hit game. The character string image of "Kiseki no Universe" displayed in the song selectable area is deleted, and the character string image of "Kimi no Kakera" displayed in song display area 1 moves to the song selectable area and is displayed. The character string image of "Mega!Giga!Summer!" displayed in the music display area 2 is moved to the music display area 1 and displayed, and the character string of "hot spring hormone" added to the fourth consecutive family. The image is displayed in the music display area 2.

Although not shown in FIG. 146(i), after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the effect selection effect, an effect in which the music piece with the song name “Kimi no Kakera” flows from the head from the speaker 120 is started. Further, in the effect, an effect mode may be adopted in which a rust part in the middle of the music is played from the beginning.

FIG. 146(j) shows a state after the player operates the left direction key 139 once during execution of the effect selection effect of the fifth consecutive resort of the big hit game. The character string image of "Kimi no Kakera" displayed in the music selectable area is moved to the music display area 1 and displayed, and the character string of "Mega! Giga! Summer!" displayed in the music display area 1 The image is moved to the music display area 2 and displayed, and the character string image of "Space of Kiseki" is displayed in the music selectable area. In this manner, the player can operate the left direction key 139 once to return to the effect mode shown immediately before.

Although not shown in FIG. 146(j), after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the effect selection effect, an effect in which the song with the song name “Universe of Kiseki” flows from the head from the speaker 120 is started. Further, in the effect, an effect mode may be adopted in which a rust part in the middle of the music is played from the beginning.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention can also be applied to the slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG.

The gaming table according to the present invention corresponds to "a plurality of reels 1002 provided with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate, a start lever 1004 for instructing rotation of the reels, and each reel. A stop button 1006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, a lottery means (internal winning combination lottery) for determining whether or not the internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is achieved by a lottery, and a lottery result of the lottery means. The reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) for performing stop control related to the stop of the rotation of the reel and the symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means correspond to the winning combination internally. And a determination means (prize determination process) for determining whether or not a predetermined symbol combination is a predetermined symbol combination, and if the symbol stop mode is a predetermined prize mode, a game medium for paying out a game medium corresponding to the predetermined prize mode In addition to the payout control means (medal payout processing 1008) for performing the medium payout processing, a production means 1010 for executing an effect based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided, and this production means places a ball in a predetermined game area 1012. A launching device 1014 for launching, a winning opening 1016 configured to be able to enter a ball emitted from the launching device, a detecting means 1018 for detecting a ball entering the winning opening 1016, and a detecting means 1018 detecting the ball. In the case of doing, a payout means 1020 for paying out the sphere, a variable display device 1022 that variably displays a predetermined symbol (identification information), a shutter 1024 movable to a position that shields the variable display device 1022, and a predetermined operation mode And a movable body 1026 which is provided, and when the game ball enters the winning opening and wins a prize, the variable display device 1022 causes the variable display 1022 to change and stop the display, thereby producing a game. It is also suitable for the slot machine 1000″.

The gaming table according to the present invention, as shown in FIG. 148(a), "inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 2002, executes a lottery based on a bet 2004 and a start 2006 operation, and displays a lottery result on a lottery result display device 2008." However, at the time of winning, the bonus coin number is added to the remaining credit number, and when the cash-out 2009 is selected, the receipt issuing machine 2010 issues a receipt in which a code corresponding to the remaining credit number is issued. May be

Further, as shown in FIG. 2B, a mobile phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and electronic data for realizing the present invention as shown in FIG. May be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the above, and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for implementing the present invention.

More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 shown in FIG. 1B has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring game-related data through a mobile phone line, and acquired game-related data (book). A storage unit that stores electronic data for implementing the invention) and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

The portable game machine 4000 shown in FIG. 7C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data regarding a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and data regarding the acquired game (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The household video game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 6D has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires game-related data from a predetermined storage medium (DVD, etc.), and acquired game-related data ( A storage unit that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. In some cases, electronic data for realizing the present invention may be downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game console 5000 shown in FIG.

The present invention can also be applied to execute a game in a game program that simulates the operation of an actual machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In that case, as a recording medium for recording the game program, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used.

Further, although the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as an example of a game table, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball game machine, a smart ball, or the like.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 148 again.
(A1) The gaming table according to the present embodiment is
Effect means (for example, the decorative pattern display device 208, the speaker 120),

A gaming table (for example, a pachinko machine 100) provided with an operating means (for example, a chance button 136),

In the first period (for example, a period that starts from FIG. 133(a) and ends when the chance button 136 is pressed after FIG. 133(g)), the effect unit produces a first effect ( For example, a means for executing at least a part of the effect H or effect O) shown in FIG. 133(g),

The effect means outputs at least the second effect (for example, effect H′ or effect O′ shown in FIG. 133(i)) in the second period (for example, the period after the chance button 136 is pressed). Is a viable means,

The first effect is at least a part of the second effect (for example, the effect H shown in FIG. 133(g) is included in a part of the effect H′ shown in FIG. 133(i)). And

The production means stops at least the first production (for example, fade-out shown in FIG. 133(h) when the operation means is operated (for example, the chance button 136 is pressed) in the first period. Processing) possible means,

The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends (for example, a period that starts from FIG. 133(i)),

The first period is a period that is at least ended when the operation unit is operated (for example, a period that is ended in FIG. 133(h)),

In the second period, the second effect is started from the beginning (for example, as shown in FIG. 133(i), the effect H'is executed from the beginning of the movie, or the effect O'is of the song. It is executed from the beginning), which is characterized by a gaming table.

According to the gaming table, the effect executed in the second period is determined when the operation means is operated, and the determined effect is restarted from the beginning, so a game characterized by the effect means A platform can be realized. In addition, starting the second effect from the beginning may make it easier for the player to recognize that the second period has started. Further, when the operation means is operated, the first effect being executed is stopped, so that it may be possible for the player to easily confirm that the operation of the operation means has been accepted.

Note that the effect means may be a means for executing only a part of the first effect or a means for executing all of the first effect during the period of the first period. Good. Further, the effect means may be a means for executing one or a plurality of effects different from the first effect during the first period. Further, the effect means may be a means in which only the first effect being executed is stopped when the operation means is operated during the first period, or the first effect being executed is A plurality of effects included may be stopped, or all effects including the first effect being executed may be stopped.

Further, “stoppable” may mean “can be terminated” or may be “terminated”. Further, it may indicate that "it may not be terminated". In addition, "stoppable" may mean "always stopped" or "may not be stopped". Further, the term “stop” means “stop once in the middle of production”, but it may also include “stop at the end of production”. In addition, "stop at the end of the presentation" may not be included. Further, the stop may be “interruption”, “stop”, or “end”.

Further, the first period may be a period that is ended only when the operation means is operated. In addition, the first period may be a period that is ended when a certain period of time has elapsed after the first period was started, even when the operation unit was not operated. Further, when the first period is included in the big hit production period, the first period may be a period that is ended when a specific round is ended, even when the operation means is not operated.

Further, the case where the operation means is operated may be the case where the operation means is operated by the player, and the case where the operation means is operated and detected by the detection means (sensor). It may also be the case where the effect control means receives a command that the operation means is operated.

The second period may be a period that starts immediately after the first period ends or a period that ends at the same time as the first period ends. Further, there may be one or a plurality of periods different from the first period and the second period between the first period and the second period. Further, there may be no other period between the first period and the second period.

Further, the rendering means may be a means for always executing the second rendering during the second period, or may be a means for not executing the second rendering. For example, when the island simultaneous production is started between the start of the first period and the start of the second period, the second production may not be executed. Further, it may be a means for executing a plurality of effects including the second effect, or a means for executing only the second effect.
(A2) The game table described in (A1),

The first effect is a plurality of effects (for example, effect H shown in FIGS. 133(a) and (g), effect I shown in FIGS. 133(c) to (e), or a figure during the first period. 133(a) or (g) is one of the effects determined from the effect O shown in FIG. 133(c) to (e) and the effect P shown in FIGS.

According to the gaming table, it may be possible to entertain the player by determining the first effect from the plurality of effects. The effect means may be an effect determined from two or more effects included in the plurality of effects during the first period. In addition, when there is one effect that can be executed in the second period, only the one effect may be executed in the first period, and the first period is not executed. Only the period may be executed. In addition, for example, when the number of consecutive resorts reaches a predetermined number of times such as two consecutive resorts and three consecutive resorts, or when a mission of the release condition of the performance is achieved while setting the user mode, the production increasing condition When is satisfied, the executable effects may be increased during the second period.

Further, the operation means is the first operation means (chance button 136), is provided with the second operation means (direction key 139), and the effect means is the second operation during the period of the first period. When the operation of the means is performed, the first effect may be determined from a plurality of effects. As described above, the “change of effect” and the “decision of effect” may be executed by the operation of different operation means, and the “change of effect” and the “decision of effect” are performed depending on the operation direction of one operation means. Any of the above may be executed.

The effect executed in the second period may be changed in a constant period during the period of the first period, for example, scrolling in a cycle of 5 seconds. In addition, selection of an effect may indicate that "an effect is determined", and may or may not include "an effect is changed". Further, it may indicate only "the effect is changed".
(A3) The game table according to (A1) or (A2),

The game machine characterized in that the effect means is a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208).

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, the second effect by the display means may be started from the beginning, so that it may be possible for the player to easily visually recognize that the second period is started. In addition, when the first effect being executed is stopped when the operation means is operated, it may be possible for the player to easily visually confirm that the operation of the operation means has been accepted. ..
(A4) The game table according to (A1) or (A2),

The game machine characterized in that the effect means is a sound output means (for example, a speaker 120).

According to the gaming table, the second effect may be started from the beginning, so that it may be possible for the player to easily auditorily recognize that the second period has started. Further, when the operation means is operated, the first effect that is being executed is stopped, so that it may be possible for the player to audibly confirm that the operation of the operation means is accepted. ..
(A5) The game table according to (A1) or (A2),
Equipped with multiple rendering means,

At least one of the plurality of rendering means is a first rendering means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The first rendering means is the rendering means,

At least one of the plurality of rendering means is a second rendering means (for example, a speaker 120).

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, it may be possible to entertain the player with the effects produced by the plurality of effecting means. It should be noted that three or more rendering means may be provided.
(A6) The game table according to (A5),

The second effect means, during a third period (for example, a period which starts from FIG. 133(a) and ends when the chance button 136 is pressed after FIG. 133(g)), Of the effect (for example, effect O shown in FIG. 133(g)),

The second effect means executes at least the fourth effect (for example, effect O′ shown in FIG. 133(i)) during the fourth period (for example, the period after the chance button 136 is pressed). Is a possible means,

The third effect is at least a part of the fourth effect (for example, effect O shown in FIG. 133(g) is included in a part of effect O′ shown in FIG. 133(i)). And

The second effect means stops at least the third effect when the operation means is operated (for example, the chance button 136 is pressed) in the third period (for example, FIG. 133(h)). Fade-out process shown in) is possible means,

The fourth period is a period that starts after the third period ends (for example, a period that starts from FIG. 133(i)),

The third period is at least a period (for example, a period ended in FIG. 133(h)) when the operation unit is operated,

In the fourth period, the fourth effect is started from the beginning (for example, as shown in FIG. 133(i), the effect O′ is executed from the beginning of the song), the game characterized by the above-mentioned. Stand.

According to the gaming table, when the third effect being executed is stopped when the operation means is operated, it is possible for the player to easily confirm that the operation of the operation means is accepted. There is.

The second effect means may be a means for executing only part of the third effect during the period of the third period, or a means for executing all of the third effect. May be. Further, the production means may be a means for executing one or a plurality of productions different from the third production during the third period. Further, the effect means may be a means for stopping only the third effect when the operation means is operated during the third period, and a plurality of effects including the third effect are stopped. Alternatively, all the effects including the third effect may be stopped.

Further, the third period may be a period which is ended only when the operation means is operated. Further, the third period may be a period that is ended when a certain period of time has elapsed after the third period was started, even when the operation means was not operated. In addition, when the third period is included in the big hit production period, the third period may be a period that is ended when a specific round is ended, even when the operation means is not operated.

The third period may be a period that starts before the first period or a period that starts after the first period, and may start at the same time as the first period. It may be a period of time. Further, the third period may be a period ended before the first period or a period ended after the first period, and may end at the same time as the first period. It may be a period of time.

Further, for example, the first effect such as a movie may not be linked with the third effect, or may be linked. The second effect such as a movie may not be linked with the fourth effect, or may be linked.

In addition, the second effect means may be a means in which the fourth effect is always executed during the period of the fourth period, or a means in which the fourth effect may not be executed. .. For example, when the island-simultaneous production is started between the start of the third period and the start of the fourth period, the fourth production may not be executed. Further, it may be a means for executing a plurality of effects including the fourth effect, or a means for executing only the fourth effect.

Moreover, when the second effect is not executed in the period of the second period in the first effect means, the second effect means does not execute the fourth effect in the period of the fourth period. It may be a means or a means for executing the fourth effect.
(A7) The game table according to (A6),
The third period is the first period,
The fourth period is the second period,

The third effect (eg, effect O shown in FIG. 133(g)) is an effect corresponding to the first effect (eg, effect H shown in FIG. 133(g)),

The fourth effect (for example, effect O′ shown in FIG. 133(i)) is an effect corresponding to the second effect (for example, effect H′ shown in FIG. 133(i)). And a gaming table.

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the effects performed by the first effect means and the second effect means are determined at the same time, the first effect is performed during the period until the operation of the operation means is performed. There is a case where the player can be more entertained by executing at least a part of the first effect by the effecting means of (1) and at least a part of the third effect by the second effecting means. is there. In addition, it may be possible to make it easier to recognize that the operation of the operation means is accepted by stopping the production in the middle of both the first production means and the second production means. It should be noted that "the third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect" indicates that the effect is composed of the first effect and the third effect, for example, a movie corresponding to a song is executed. May be.
(A8) The game table according to any one of (A1) to (A7),

A gaming table, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

According to the gaming table, the effect executed in the second period is determined when the operation means is operated, and the determined effect is restarted from the beginning, so a pachinko machine characterized by the effect means Machine or slot machine can be realized.
(A9) Production means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 120),

An effect control means capable of controlling at least the effect means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400),

A gaming table (for example, a pachinko machine 100) provided with an operating means (for example, a chance button 136),

The effect means includes a plurality of effects (for example, effect H shown in FIGS. 133(a) and (g), effect I shown in FIGS. 133(c) to (e), or effect shown in FIGS. Is a means capable of performing at least the effect O shown and the effect P shown in FIGS. 133(c) to 133(e),

At least one of the plurality of effects is a first effect (for example, effect H or effect O shown in FIG. 133(g)),

The effect control means, in the first period (for example, a period that starts from FIG. 133(a) and ends when the chance button 136 is pressed after FIG. 133(g)), in the second period. (For example, a period after the chance button 136 is pressed) It is a means that can determine the effect to be executed,

The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends (for example, a period that starts from FIG. 133(i)),

The effect control means is means for executing control for determining at least an effect to be executed in the second period when the first condition is satisfied,

The requirement that the first condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes at least the operation of the operation unit (for example, pressing the chance button 136),

In the first case, the effect means ends the first effect, and in the second period, it is possible to execute the effect to be executed in the second period from the beginning (for example, in FIG. 133(i)). As shown, the effect H'can be executed from the beginning of the movie, or the effect O'can be executed from the beginning of the song.
The first case is a case of being in the period of the first period,

The first case is a case where the first effect is being executed by the effect control means,

The first case is a case where the first condition is satisfied, the gaming table.

According to the above gaming machine, the player recognizes that the second period has started by executing the control for starting the first effect determined in the first period from the beginning in the second period. Sometimes it can be easier. Further, when the operation means is operated, a control for temporarily ending the first effect being executed is executed, and a control for executing the second effect from the beginning (first) after the second period is started. By executing, it may be possible for the player to easily recognize that the second effect has been determined.

The effect control means may be a means for controlling only one effect means, or may be a means for controlling a plurality of effect means. Further, the effect means may be a means for executing only a plurality of effects, or may be a means for executing a notification other than the plurality of effects (illegal notification, notification of a game state, hitting method, etc.). Good. Further, the effect determination control may be a control for determining only the first effect as an effect to be executed in the second period, and a plurality of effects including the first effect are to be executed in the second period. The control may be determined. Further, the requirements for the first condition to be satisfied are not only that the operation means was operated, but also that (1) the operation means was operated, and (2) a certain period of time passed from the start of the first period. The requirement may include any one, two, or all of (3) the case where the first period is included in the period of the big hit production and the specific round is completed. The effect determination control may be executed only when only one of the requirements (1) to (3) is satisfied, or when two requirements (1) to (3) are satisfied. May be executed when all of the above requirements (1) to (3) are satisfied. Further, it may be another requirement that does not include all of the requirements (1) to (3).
(A10) The game table according to (A9),

At least one of the plurality of effects is a second effect (for example, effect H′ or effect O′ shown in FIG. 133(i)),

The effect control means is means for executing a control (hereinafter, referred to as "effect determination control") for determining at least the second effect as an effect to be executed in the second period, the gaming table. ..
(A11) The game table according to (A9) or (A10),

The effect control means is means for executing control for changing the effect being executed to another effect (hereinafter, referred to as “effect change control”) when the second condition is satisfied,

The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied at least during the period of the first period,

The effect control means is a means capable of executing the effect change control once or a plurality of times during the period of the first period,

One of the other effects to be changed is the first effect, wherein the gaming table is characterized.

According to the gaming table, by determining the first effect from the plurality of effects, there are cases where it is possible to increase the variation of effects that the player can confirm in the second period and entertain the player. .. The requirement that the second condition is satisfied may be a condition that may be satisfied only during the period of the first period, and is satisfied in one or more periods other than the first period. It may be a certain condition. Further, when there is no changeable effect other than the effect being executed (when there is one selectable effect), the effect change control may not be executed even during the first period. Moreover, you may make it perform the effect change control, and perform the control which selects the effect in progress again. Moreover, the number of times that the effect control unit can execute the effect change control during the period of the first period may be finite (for example, 10 times). Further, the effect control means may be able to execute the effect change control any number of times as long as it is within the first period.
(A12) The game table according to (A10) or (A11),

The first period is a period that is at least terminated when the third condition is met,

The game machine characterized in that the requirement that the third condition is satisfied is a requirement that at least the performance determination control is executed.

Note that the first period may be a period that is ended only when the third condition is satisfied. Also, for example, a condition other than the third condition is satisfied in the case of a performance selection effect during a big hit in which the effect is not determined until the operating means is operated, or when the big hit effect is finished (for example, the end of 15R). In some cases, the period may be terminated. Moreover, the requirement for the third condition to be satisfied may be that the effect determination control is executed. Further, the requirement that the third condition is satisfied may be that different control other than the effect determination control (for example, start control of island simultaneous production, end control of big hit production, etc.) is executed.
(B1) The gaming table according to the present embodiment is
Effect means (for example, the decorative pattern display device 208, the speaker 120),

A gaming table (for example, a pachinko machine 100) provided with an operating means (for example, a chance button 136),

When the big hit (for example, the 15R special big hit shown in FIG. 73) is a big hit, it is a means for performing at least a big hit effect (for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 136(a) to (j)).

The jackpot is composed of at least a plurality of rounds (for example, the first round to the fifteenth round),

At least one of the plurality of rounds is a first round (eg, a first round),

At least one of the first effect (for example, effect H or effect O shown in FIG. 136(g)) during the first period (for example, the period shown in FIGS. 136(a) to (i)). Is a means of executing a section,

The effect means executes at least the second effect (for example, effect H′ or effect O′ shown in FIG. 136(j)) in the second period (for example, the period started from FIG. 136(j)). Is a possible means,

The first effect is at least a part of the second effect (for example, the effect H shown in FIG. 136(g) is included in a part of the effect H′ shown in FIG. 136(j)). And

The first period is a part of a period (for example, a period shown in FIGS. 136(a) to 136(j)) in which the big hit effect is executed,

The production means is means capable of at least stopping the first production (for example, production H shown in FIG. 136(h)) when the first round ends in the first period,

The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends (for example, a period that starts from FIG. 136(j)),

The first period is at least a period when the first round ends (for example, a period ended in FIG. 136(i)),

In the second period, the second effect is started from the beginning (for example, as shown in FIG. 136(j), the effect H′ is executed from the beginning of the movie, or the effect O′ is the song. It is executed from the beginning), which is characterized by a gaming table.

According to the gaming table, the effect executed in the second period is determined when a specific round is finished, and the determined effect is restarted from the beginning, so a game characterized by an effect means A platform can be realized. In addition, starting the second effect from the beginning may make it easier for the player to recognize that the second period has started. Further, when the first round is finished, the first effect being executed is stopped, so that the player may easily recognize that the first round is finished.

The effect means may be a means that at least the big hit effect is executed only when it is a big hit, and when it is a small hit, the same effect as a big hit such as hidden probability change may be executed. .. In addition, for example, there may be a big hit without a first period, such as a big hit without a payout such as a hidden probability change or a sudden change, or a big hit in which the gaming state after the big hit is a low probability state of a special figure. The big hit may be composed of two or more rounds, or may be composed of one round.

Further, the production means may be a means for executing only a part of the first production or a means for executing all of the first production during the period of the first period. .. Further, the effect means may be a means for executing one or a plurality of effects different from the first effect during the first period. Further, the first period may be a period shorter than the period in which the big hit effect is executed, may be a longer period, or may be the same period.

Further, the effect means may be a means for stopping only the first effect when the first round ends during the first period, and a plurality of effects including the first effect are stopped. Alternatively, all the effects including the first effect may be stopped.

In addition, “stoppable” may indicate “can be terminated”, may be “terminated”, or “may not be terminated”. In addition, "stoppable" may mean "always stopped" or "may not be stopped". Further, although the term “stop” means “to stop once in the middle of production”, it may also include “to stop at the end of production”, not to “stop at the end of production”. May be. Further, "stop" may mean "interruption", "stop", or "end".

The second period may be a period that starts immediately after the first period ends or a period that ends at the same time as the first period ends. Further, there may be one or a plurality of periods different from the first period and the second period between the first period and the second period. Further, there may be no other period between the first period and the second period. Further, the first period may be a period that is ended after the first round is finished, or may be a period that is ended at the same time when the first round is finished.
(B2) The game table described in (B1),

The first effect is a plurality of effects (for example, effect H shown in FIGS. 136(a) and (g), effect I shown in FIGS. 136(c) to (e), or a figure) during the first period. A gaming table characterized by being one of the effects determined from the effects O shown in 136(a) and (g) and the effects P shown in FIGS. 136(c) to (e).

According to the gaming table, it may be possible to entertain the player by determining the first effect from the plurality of effects. The effect means may be an effect determined from two or more effects included in the plurality of effects during the first period. In addition, when there is one effect that can be executed in the second period, only the one effect may be executed in the first period, and the first period is not executed. Only the period may be executed. In addition, for example, when the number of consecutive holidays reaches a predetermined number of times such as two consecutive holidays and three consecutive holidays, or when a mission of the release condition of the achievement is achieved while setting the user mode, the production increase condition When is satisfied, the executable effects may be increased during the second period.

Further, the operation means is the first operation means (chance button 136), is provided with the second operation means (direction key 139), and the effect means is the second operation during the period of the first period. When the operation of the means is performed, the first effect may be determined from a plurality of effects. As described above, the “change of effect” and the “decision of effect” may be executed by the operation of different operation means, and the “change of effect” and the “decision of effect” are performed depending on the operation direction of one operation means. Any of the above may be executed.

The effect executed in the second period may be changed in a constant period during the period of the first period, for example, scrolling in a cycle of 5 seconds. In addition, selection of an effect may indicate that "an effect is determined", and may or may not include "an effect is changed". Further, it may indicate only "the effect is changed".
(B3) The game table according to (B1) or (B2),

At least one of the plurality of rounds is a second round (eg, a second round starting from FIG. 136(i)),
The second round is a round started after the first round,

The game machine characterized in that the second period is at least a period when the second round is started (for example, a period started from FIG. 136(j)).

According to the above gaming machine, when the first round is finished, the first effect being executed is stopped, and when the next second round is started, the second effect is started from the beginning. In some cases, it may be possible for the player to easily recognize that the second round has started. In addition, the first period may be a period ended between the end of the first round and the start of the second round, and a period ended after the second round is started. May be Moreover, the second period may be a period that is started only when the second round is started, or may be started in a round other than the second round. Further, the second round may be started at a timing other than the start.
(B4) The game table according to any one of (B1) to (B3),

The game machine characterized in that the effect means is a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208).

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, the second effect by the display means may be started from the beginning, so that it may be possible for the player to easily visually recognize that the second period is started.

Further, when the first round is finished, the first effect being executed is stopped, so that it may be easy for the player to visually recognize that the first round is finished.
(B5) The game table according to any one of (B1) to (B3),

The game machine characterized in that the effect means is a sound output means (for example, a speaker 120).

According to the gaming table, the second effect may be started from the beginning, so that it may be possible for the player to easily auditorily recognize that the second period has started. Further, when the first round is finished, the first effect being executed is stopped, so that the player may easily recognize that the first round is finished auditorily.
(B6) The game table according to any one of (B1) to (B3),
Equipped with multiple rendering means,

At least one of the plurality of rendering means is a first rendering means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The first rendering means is the rendering means,

At least one of the plurality of rendering means is a second rendering means (for example, a speaker 120).

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, it may be possible to entertain the player with the effects produced by the plurality of effecting means. It should be noted that three or more rendering means may be provided.
(B7) The game table according to (B6),

The second effect means includes at least one of the third effects (for example, effect O shown in FIG. 136(g)) in the third period (for example, the period shown in FIGS. 136(a) to (i)). Is a means of executing a section,

The second effect means can execute at least a fourth effect (for example, effect O′ shown in FIG. 136(j)) during a fourth period (for example, a period started from FIG. 136(j)). Is a means

The third effect is an effect that is at least a part of the fourth effect (for example, effect O shown in FIG. 136(g) is included in a part of effect O′ shown in FIG. 136(j)). And

One of the plurality of rounds is a third round (eg, the first round),

The fourth period is a period that starts after the third period ends (for example, a period that starts from FIG. 136(j)),

The third period is at least a period that is terminated when the third round (for example, the round that starts in FIG. 136(a) and ends in FIG. 136(g)) ends.

In the fourth period, the fourth effect is started from the beginning (for example, as shown in FIG. 136(j), effect O'is executed from the beginning of the music), the game characterized by the above-mentioned. Stand.

According to the gaming table, the player may easily recognize that the third round has ended by stopping the third effect that is being executed when the third round has ended. In addition, the production means may be a means for stopping only the third production when the third round is finished during the third period, and a plurality of productions including the third production are stopped. Alternatively, all the effects including the third effect may be stopped.

The third period may be a period that starts before the first period or a period that starts after the first period, and may start at the same time as the first period. It may be a period of time. Further, the third period may be a period ended before the first period or a period ended after the first period, and may end at the same time as the first period. It may be a period of time.

Further, the first effect does not have to be linked with the third effect. Also, for example, the first effect such as a movie may be linked with the third effect. Further, the third round may be a round before the first round, and a rear round. May be Further, the second effect does not have to be linked with the fourth effect. Further, for example, the second effect such as a movie may be linked with the fourth effect.

In addition, the second effect means may be a means in which the fourth effect is always executed during the period of the fourth period, or a means in which the fourth effect may not be executed. .. For example, when the island-simultaneous production is started between the start of the third period and the start of the fourth period, the fourth production may not be executed. It may be a means for executing a plurality of effects including the fourth effect, or a means for executing only the fourth effect.

Moreover, when the second effect is not executed in the period of the second period in the first effect means, the second effect means does not execute the fourth effect in the period of the fourth period. It may be a means or a means for executing the fourth effect.
(B8) The game table according to (B7),
The third period is the first period,
The fourth period is the second period,
The third round is the first round,

The third effect (for example, effect O shown in FIG. 136(g)) is an effect corresponding to the first effect (for example, effect H shown in FIG. 136(g)),

The fourth effect (eg, effect O′ shown in FIG. 136(j)) is an effect corresponding to the second effect (eg, effect H′ shown in FIG. 136(j)). And a gaming table.

According to the gaming table, since the effects performed by the first effect means and the second effect means are determined at the same time, during the period until the first round in the first period ends, In the case where at least a part of the first effect is performed by the one effecting means and at least a part of the third effect is performed by the second effecting means, so that the player can be more entertained. There is. It should be noted that "the third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect" indicates that the effect is composed of the first effect and the third effect, for example, a movie corresponding to a song is executed. May be.
(B9) The gaming table according to any one of (B1) to (B8),

A gaming table, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

According to the gaming table, the effect executed in the second period is determined when the operation means is operated, and the determined effect is restarted from the beginning, so a pachinko machine characterized by the effect means Machine or slot machine can be realized.
(B10) Rendering means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 120),

An effect control means capable of controlling at least the effect means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400),

A gaming table (for example, a pachinko machine 100) provided with an operating means (for example, a chance button 136),

The effect means includes a plurality of effects (for example, effect H shown in FIGS. 136(a) and (g), effect I shown in FIGS. 136(c) to (e), or effect shown in FIGS. 136(a) and (g). The effect O shown and the effect P shown in FIGS. 136(c) to 136(e) are at least means capable of executing,

At least one of the plurality of effects is a first effect (for example, effect H shown in FIG. 136(g) or effect O shown in FIG. 136(g)),

The first effect is an effect that is executed at least during a big hit period (for example, a period shown in FIGS. 136(a) to (j)),

The jackpot is composed of at least a plurality of rounds (for example, the first round to the fifteenth round),

At least one of the plurality of rounds is a first round (eg, a first round),

The effect control means executes in a first period (for example, a period shown in FIGS. 136(a) to (i)) in a second period (for example, a period started from FIG. 136(j)). Is a means by which

The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends (for example, a period that starts from FIG. 136(j)),

The effect control means is means for determining at least an effect executed in the second period when the first condition is satisfied,

The requirement that the first condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes at least the end of the first round,

In the first case, the production means ends the first production, and in the second period, is a means capable of executing the production to be executed in the second period from the beginning,
The first case is a case of being in the period of the first period,

The first case is a case where the first effect is being executed by the effect control means,

The first case is a case where the first condition is satisfied, the gaming table.

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, by executing the control to start the first effect determined in the first period from the beginning (first) in the second period, it is possible to confirm that the second period has started. In some cases, it may be easier for the person to recognize. Further, when the operation means is operated, a control for temporarily ending the first effect being executed is executed, and a control for executing the second effect from the beginning (first) after the second period is started. By executing, it may be possible for the player to easily recognize that the second effect has been determined.

The effect control means may be a means for controlling only one effect means, or may be a means for controlling a plurality of effect means. Further, the effect means may be a means for executing only a plurality of effects, or may be a means for executing a notification other than the plurality of effects (illegal notification, notification of a game state, hitting method, etc.). Good. Further, the effect determination control may be a control for determining only the first effect as an effect to be executed in the second period, and a plurality of effects including the first effect are to be executed in the second period. The control may be determined. Further, the requirements for the first condition to be satisfied are not only that the operation means was operated, but also that (1) the operation means was operated, and (2) a certain period of time passed from the start of the first period. The requirement may include any one, two, or all of (3) the case where the first period is included in the period of the big hit production and the specific round is completed. The effect determination control may be executed only when only one of the requirements (1) to (3) is satisfied, or when two requirements (1) to (3) are satisfied. May be executed when all of the above requirements (1) to (3) are satisfied. Further, it may be another requirement that does not include all of the requirements (1) to (3).
(B11) The game table described in (B10),

At least one of the plurality of effects is a second effect (for example, effect H′ or effect O′ shown in FIG. 136(j)),

The effect control means is means for executing at least control for determining the second effect as an effect to be executed in the second period (hereinafter, referred to as "effect determination control"), ..
(B12) The game table according to (B10) or (B11),

The effect control means is means for executing control for changing the effect being executed to another effect (hereinafter, referred to as “effect change control”) when the second condition is satisfied,

The requirement that the second condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes at least the period of the first period,

The effect control means is a means capable of executing the effect change control once or a plurality of times during the period of the first period,

One of the other effects to be changed is the first effect, wherein the gaming table is characterized.

According to the gaming table, by determining the first effect from the plurality of effects, there are cases where it is possible to increase the variation of effects that the player can confirm in the second period and entertain the player. ..
(B13) The game table according to (B11) or (B12),

The first period is a period that is at least terminated when the third condition is met,

The game machine characterized in that the requirement that the third condition is satisfied is a requirement that at least the performance determination control is executed.
(C1) The gaming table according to the present embodiment is
Effect means (for example, the decorative pattern display device 208, the speaker 120),

A gaming table (for example, a pachinko machine 100) provided with an operating means (for example, a chance button 136),

The effect means is a part of the first effect (for example, effect H or effect O illustrated in FIG. 139(g)) in the first period (for example, the period illustrated in FIG. 139(a) to (h)). Is a means of performing only

The effect means executes at least the second effect (for example, effect H′ or effect O′ shown in FIG. 139(i)) in the second period (for example, the period started from FIG. 139(i)). Is a possible means,

The effect means is a means capable of at least stopping the first effect (for example, effect H shown in FIG. 139(g)) when the first period ends.

The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends (for example, a period that starts from FIG. 139(i)),

In the second period, the second effect starts from the beginning (for example, as shown in FIG. 139(i), the effect H′ is executed from the beginning of the movie, or the effect O′ is the song. It is executed from the beginning), which is characterized by a gaming table.

According to the above gaming machine, the first effect is executed only partially in the first period, so that a gaming machine having a characteristic of the effect means can be realized. In addition, starting the second effect from the beginning may make it easier for the player to recognize that the second period has started. Furthermore, by executing only a part of the first effect in the first period, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired even when the second effect is executed from the beginning in the second period. There are cases.

In addition, the production means may be means for stopping only the first production when the first period ends, or a plurality of productions including the first production may be stopped. You may make it stop all the productions including the production of. Further, “stoppable” may mean “can be terminated” or may be “terminated”. Further, it may indicate that "it may not be terminated". In addition, "stoppable" may mean "always stopped" or "may not be stopped".

Further, the term “stop” means “stop once in the middle of production”, but it may also include “stop at the end of production”. In addition, "stop at the end of the presentation" may not be included. Further, "stop" may mean "interruption", "stop", or "end".

The second period may be a period that starts immediately after the first period ends or a period that ends at the same time as the first period ends. Further, there may be one or a plurality of periods different from the first period and the second period between the first period and the second period. Further, there may be no other period between the first period and the second period.

Further, the rendering means may be a means for always executing the second rendering during the second period, or may be a means for not executing the second rendering. For example, when the island simultaneous production is started between the start of the first period and the start of the second period, the second production may not be executed. Further, it may be a means for executing a plurality of effects including the second effect, or a means for executing only the second effect.
(C2) The game table described in (C1),

The effect means executes the first effect from the middle during the first period (for example, as shown in FIG. 139(g), the effect H is executed from the middle of the movie or the effect O is executed). A game table characterized by being a means (executed from the middle of a song).

According to the gaming table, the first effect executed during the first period is started in the middle of the effect, so that the first effect is completely unknown until the second period is started, Sometimes it can entertain the player. The production means may be a means for executing the first production halfway only during the first period, and the first production may be executed halfway during the period other than the first period. It may be a means that may be executed.
(C3) The game table according to (C1) or (C2),

The effect means executes the first effect halfway in the first period (for example, as shown in FIG. 139(f), effect H is executed halfway in the movie, or effect O is executed). A game table characterized in that it is a means that is executed halfway through a song.

According to the gaming table, the first effect executed during the first period ends in the middle of the effect, so that the first effect is completely unknown until the second period starts, and the game is played. It may be possible to entertain the person. In addition, the production means may be a means in which the first production is executed halfway only during the period of the first period, and the first production is performed halfway in the period other than the first period. It may be a means that may be executed.

Further, the effect means is a means for executing only a part of the first effect during the first period, and "only a part of the first effect" means "the effect of the first effect". It may be a "production that is started midway and is ended during the first production", and may be "production that is started during the first production and is executed until the end of the first production". It may be that, or "the effect that is started from the beginning of the first effect and is executed until the middle of the first effect".
(C4) The gaming table according to any one of (C1) to (C3),

The first effect is a plurality of effects (for example, effect H shown in FIGS. 139(a) and (f), effect I shown in FIGS. 139(c) to (d)), or a figure in the first period. A game table characterized by being one of the effects determined from the effects O shown in 139(a) and (f) and the effects P shown in FIGS. 139(c) to (139).

According to the gaming table, by determining the first effect from the plurality of effects, there are cases where it is possible to increase the variation of effects that the player can confirm in the second period and entertain the player. ..

The effect means may be an effect determined from two or more effects included in the plurality of effects during the first period. In addition, when there is one effect that can be executed in the second period, only the one effect may be executed in the first period, and the first period is not executed. Only the period may be executed. In addition, for example, when the number of consecutive holidays reaches a predetermined number of times such as two consecutive holidays and three consecutive holidays, or when a mission of the release condition of the achievement is achieved while setting the user mode, the production increase condition When is satisfied, the executable effects may be increased during the second period.

Further, the operation means is the first operation means (chance button 136), is provided with the second operation means (direction key 139), and the effect means is the second operation during the period of the first period. When the operation of the means is performed, the first effect may be determined from a plurality of effects. As described above, the “change of effect” and the “decision of effect” may be executed by the operation of different operation means, and the “change of effect” and the “decision of effect” are performed depending on the operation direction of one operation means. Any of the above may be executed.

The effect executed in the second period may be changed in a constant period during the period of the first period, for example, scrolling in a cycle of 5 seconds. In addition, selection of an effect may indicate that "an effect is determined", and may or may not include "an effect is changed". Further, it may indicate only "the effect is changed".
(C5) The gaming table according to any one of (C1) to (C4),
Equipped with multiple rendering means,

At least one of the plurality of rendering means is a first rendering means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The first rendering means is the rendering means,

At least one of the plurality of rendering means is a second rendering means (for example, a speaker 120).

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, it may be possible to entertain the player with the effects produced by the plurality of effecting means. It should be noted that three or more rendering means may be provided.
(C6) The game table according to (C5),

The second effect means includes at least one of the third effects (for example, effect O shown in FIG. 139(f)) during the third period (for example, the period shown in FIGS. 139(a) to (g)). Is a means of executing a section,

The second effect means can execute at least the fourth effect (for example, effect O′ shown in FIG. 139(h)) during the fourth period (for example, the period started from FIG. 139(h)). Is a means

The second effect means is a means capable of at least stopping the third effect (for example, a fade-out process shown in FIG. 139(g)) when the third period ends,

The fourth period is a period that starts after the third period ends (for example, a period that starts from FIG. 139(h)),

In the fourth period, the fourth effect is started from the beginning (for example, as shown in FIG. 139 (h), effect O'is executed from the beginning of the song), the game characterized by the above-mentioned. Stand.

According to the above gaming machine, only a part of the third effect is executed in the third period, so that the player does not get bored even when the fourth effect is executed from the beginning in the fourth period. In some cases. The second effect means may be a means for executing only part of the third effect during the period of the third period, or a means for executing all of the third effect. May be. Further, the production means may be a means for executing one or a plurality of productions different from the third production during the third period. Further, the second effect means may be a means for stopping only the third effect being executed when the third period ends, and a plurality of effects including the third effect are stopped. Alternatively, all the effects including the third effect may be stopped.

The third period may be a period that starts before the first period or a period that starts after the first period, and may start at the same time as the first period. It may be a period of time. Further, the third period may be a period ended before the first period or a period ended after the first period, and may end at the same time as the first period. It may be a period of time. Further, for example, the first effect such as a movie may not be linked with the third effect, or may be linked with the third effect. Further, for example, the second effect such as a movie may not be linked with the fourth effect, or may be linked with the fourth effect.

In addition, the second effect means may be a means in which the fourth effect is always executed during the period of the fourth period, or a means in which the fourth effect may not be executed. .. For example, when the island-simultaneous production is started between the start of the third period and the start of the fourth period, the fourth production may not be executed. Further, it may be a means for executing a plurality of effects including the fourth effect, or a means for executing only the fourth effect. Moreover, when the second effect is not executed in the period of the second period in the first effect means, the second effect means does not execute the fourth effect in the period of the fourth period. It may be a means or a means for executing the fourth effect.
(C7) The gaming table according to (C6),

The second effect means is means for executing the third effect from the middle during the third period (for example, the effect O is executed from the middle of the song as shown in FIG. 139(f)). A gaming table characterized in that.

According to the gaming table, the third effect executed during the third period is started in the middle of the effect, so that the third effect is not completely understood until the fourth period starts, Sometimes it can entertain the player. The second effect means may be a means in which the third effect is executed halfway only during the period of the third period, and the third effect may be performed in a period other than the third period. May be executed from the middle.

Further, in the first effect means, when the first effect is being executed halfway, the second effect means may be a means in which the third effect is being executed halfway. The effect may be started from the beginning.
(C8) The game table according to (C6) or (C7),

The second effect means executes the third effect halfway during the third period (for example, effect O is executed halfway through the song as shown in FIG. 139(f)). A gaming table characterized in that.

According to the gaming table, the third effect executed during the third period ends in the middle of the effect, so that the third effect cannot be completely understood until the fourth period starts, and the game is played. It may be possible to entertain the person. Note that the second effect means may be a means in which the third effect is executed halfway only during the period of the third period, and the third effect is also performed in a period other than the third period. May be executed halfway.

Further, in the first effect means, when the first effect is executed halfway, the second effect means may be a means in which the third effect is executed halfway. It may be a means that is executed until the end of the production.

Further, the production means is a means for executing only a part of the third production during the period of the third period, and "only a part of the third production" means "of the third production. It may be "an effect that is started halfway and is ended in the middle of the third effect", and "an effect that is started in the middle of the third effect and is executed until the end of the third effect". It may be that, or "the effect that is started from the beginning of the third effect and is executed until the middle of the third effect".
(C9) The gaming table according to any one of (C6) to (C8),
The third period is the first period,
The fourth period is the second period,

The third effect (eg, effect O shown in FIG. 139(f)) is an effect corresponding to the first effect (eg, effect H shown in FIG. 139(f)). Game table.

According to the gaming table, since the effects performed by the first effect means and the second effect means are determined at the same time, during the period until the first round in the first period ends, In the case where at least a part of the first effect is performed by the one effecting means and at least a part of the third effect is performed by the second effecting means, so that the player can be more entertained. There is. It should be noted that "the third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect" indicates that the effect is composed of the first effect and the third effect, for example, a movie corresponding to a song is executed. May be.
(C10) The gaming table according to any one of (C1) to (C9),

A gaming table, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

According to the gaming table, the effect executed in the second period is determined when the operation means is operated, and the determined effect is restarted from the beginning, so a pachinko machine characterized by the effect means Machine or slot machine can be realized.
(C11) Rendering means (for example, decorative pattern display device 208, speaker 120),

A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100) including at least a production control unit (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) capable of controlling the production unit,

The effect means includes a plurality of effects (for example, effect H shown in FIGS. 139(a) and (f), effect I shown in FIGS. 139(c) to (d), or effect 139(a) or (f)). The effect O shown and the effect P shown in FIGS. 139(c) to 139(d) are at least means capable of executing,

At least one of the plurality of effects is a first effect (for example, effect H or effect O shown in FIG. 139(f)),

The effect control means executes in the first period (for example, the period shown in FIGS. 139(a) to (g)) in the second period (for example, the period started from FIG. 139(h)). Is a means by which

The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends,

The effect control means, when the first condition is satisfied (for example, when the chance button 136 is pressed or when the first round is finished), an effect to be executed in the second period. At least a means of determining,

The production means is means for executing only a part of the first production when the first period is in effect,

In the first case, the production means ends the first production, and in the second period, is a means capable of executing the production to be executed in the second period from the beginning,
The first case is a case of being in the period of the first period,

The first case is a case where the first effect is being executed by the effect control means,

The first case is a case where the first condition is satisfied, the gaming table.

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, by executing the control to start the first effect determined in the first period from the beginning (first) in the second period, it is possible to confirm that the second period has started. In some cases, it may be easier for the person to recognize. Further, when the operation means is operated, a control for temporarily ending the first effect being executed is executed, and a control for executing the second effect from the beginning (first) after the second period is started. By executing, it may be possible for the player to easily recognize that the second effect has been determined.

The effect control means may be a means for controlling only one effect means, or may be a means for controlling a plurality of effect means. Further, the effect means may be a means for executing only a plurality of effects, or may be a means for executing a notification other than the plurality of effects (illegal notification, notification of a game state, hitting method, etc.). Good. Further, the effect determination control may be a control for determining only the first effect as an effect to be executed in the second period, and a plurality of effects including the first effect are to be executed in the second period. The control may be determined. Further, the requirements for the first condition to be satisfied are not only that the operation means was operated, but also that (1) the operation means was operated, and (2) a certain period of time passed from the start of the first period. The requirement may include any one, two, or all of (3) the case where the first period is included in the period of the big hit production and the specific round is completed. The effect determination control may be executed only when only one of the requirements (1) to (3) is satisfied, or when two requirements (1) to (3) are satisfied. May be executed when all of the above requirements (1) to (3) are satisfied. Further, it may be another requirement that does not include all of the requirements (1) to (3).
(C12) The game table described in (C11),

At least one of the plurality of effects is a second effect (for example, effect H′ or effect O′ shown in FIG. 139(h)),

The effect control means is means for executing at least control for determining the second effect as an effect to be executed in the second period (hereinafter, referred to as "effect determination control"), ..
(C13) The game table according to (C11) or (C12),

The effect control means is means for executing control for changing the effect being executed to another effect (hereinafter, referred to as “effect change control”) when the second condition is satisfied,

The requirement that the second condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes at least the period of the first period,

The effect control means is a means capable of executing the effect change control once or a plurality of times during the period of the first period,

One of the other effects to be changed is the first effect, wherein the gaming table is characterized.

According to the gaming table, by determining the first effect from the plurality of effects, there are cases where it is possible to increase the variation of effects that the player can confirm in the second period and entertain the player. ..
(C14) The game table according to (C12) or (C13),

The first period is a period that is at least terminated when the third condition is met,

The game machine characterized in that the requirement that the third condition is satisfied is a requirement that at least the performance determination control is executed.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is

Rendering means (for example, second rendering means (speaker 120), see FIGS. 95 to 97 (same below)),

A gaming table (for example, a pachinko machine 100) provided with an operating means (for example, a chance button 136),

The production means is means capable of at least executing one production of a plurality of productions (hereinafter, referred to as “first production” (for example, production α)),

In the first case (for example, when the waiting time of T seconds elapses from the time t3 when the chance button 136 is pressed in the selectable period (time t4)), the effect means outputs the plurality of effects from the first effect. Means for changing to another one of the effects (hereinafter, referred to as “second effect” (for example, effect δ)),

The first case is a case of a first period (for example, a selectable period (time t0 to t5)),

The first case means that a first time (for example, T seconds) has elapsed after the operation of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136 is pressed (time t3)) (for example, time t4). Is

In the second case (for example, when the selectable period ends (time t5)), the rendering unit is executed by the rendering unit in the second period (for example, a period after the end of the first period). Is a means for determining at least an effect (hereinafter, referred to as “third effect” (for example, effect δ)),

The second case is a case where the effect determination condition (for example, the end of the selectable period (time t5)) is satisfied,

The second period is a period started after the end of the first period,

The production means is means for starting the third production from the beginning in the third case (for example, when the second period is started (time t5)),

The third case is a case where the second period is started. (2) In the pachinko machine 100,

The first period is at least a period that is terminated when an end condition (for example, the end of the selectable period) is satisfied,

The requirement that the ending condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes at least the elapse of a second time (for example, time t0 to t5) from the start of the first period (for example, time t0). Characterize. (3) In the pachinko machine 100,
The first period is a production change period (for example, selectable period),

With the effect change period, the change from the first effect to the second effect can be executed one or more times (for example, time (T3-T) in FIG. 95 = time t4 to t5 is time T). If it is longer, it is a period during which it can be changed a plurality of times by pressing the chance button 136 during the period from time t4 to t5). (4) In the pachinko machine 100,

The first period is a period in which at least a big hit is executed (see, for example, FIG. 95 ). (5) In the pachinko machine 100,
The jackpot at least consists of multiple rounds,

The game machine characterized in that the first period is at least a period executed during one round of the plurality of rounds (see, for example, FIG. 95 ).
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is
Display means (for example, first effect means (decorative pattern display device 208)),
Sound output means (for example, second effect means (speaker 120)),
Production control means capable of controlling at least production (for example, first sub-control unit 400),

A gaming table (for example, a pachinko machine 100) provided with an operating means (for example, a chance button 136) provided at a position at least operable by a player,

The sound output unit is a unit capable of outputting at least the first music piece (for example, the effect α (see FIG. 95; hereinafter the same)),

The sound output means is a means capable of outputting at least a second song (for example, the production δ),

The display means is a means capable of at least executing a title display (for example, effect A) of the first song,

The display unit is a unit capable of at least executing the title display (for example, the effect D) of the second song,

The effect control unit is a unit that can execute at least the first control (for example, title display change control) when a first condition (for example, detection of pressing of the chance button 136) is satisfied. ,

The effect control means is a means capable of executing second control (for example, music change control) when the first condition is satisfied,

The effect control means can start at least the second control after a second condition (for example, start of a changeable period of effect (start of selectable period (paragraph “0242”)) is satisfied. Is a means

The effect control means is means for ending at least the second control before establishment of a third condition (for example, end of changeable period of effect (end of selectable period (paragraph “0249”))). And

The effect control means is a means capable of executing a third control (for example, music determination control) when the third condition is satisfied,

The requirement for the first condition to be satisfied is a requirement that includes at least the detection of the operation of the operation unit (for example, the pressing of the chance button 136),

The first control is a control capable of at least changing from the title display of the first song to the title display of the second song,

The second control is a control capable of at least changing from the first song to the second song,
The second control is a control executed at least after the first control,

The second control is a control that is executed after a lapse of a first time (for example, T seconds) from the satisfaction of the first condition,

The third control is control for determining at least a song output by the sound output unit after the third condition is satisfied.

In the first case (for example, when a waiting time of T seconds elapses), the effect control means can change at least the first music piece to the second music piece by the second control. And

In the second case (for example, when the waiting time of T seconds does not elapse), the effect control means is a means that does not at least change the first music to the second music by the second control. Yes,

The first case is a case where the first time has elapsed since the first condition was finally satisfied,

The second case is a case where the first condition is satisfied again before the first time has elapsed after the first condition is satisfied,

The sound output means is a means capable of outputting at least a piece of music changed by the effect control means (hereinafter, referred to as “third piece” (for example, effect δ)) in the first case,

The effect control means is means for performing control for ending the output of the third music when the third condition is satisfied,

The effect control means is means for performing a fourth control (for example, control starting from the beginning of a song) when the third condition is satisfied.

The fourth control is a control for starting the music piece determined by the third control from the beginning. (2) In the pachinko machine 100,

The effect control means is a means capable of executing the first control one or more times during an effect change period (for example, a selectable period),

The effect control means is a means capable of executing the second control one or more times during the effect change period,
The production change period is a period in which the production can be changed at least,

The effect change period is a period in which at least a second time is performed. (3) In the pachinko machine 100,

The production change period is a period in which at least a big hit is executed. (4) In the pachinko machine 100,
The jackpot at least consists of multiple rounds,

The production change period is a period at least executed during one round of the plurality of rounds. (5) In the pachinko machine 100,

The operation unit is a unit provided with a first operation unit (for example, a chance button 136),

The operation unit is a unit provided with a second operation unit (for example, a direction key of the setting operation unit 139),

The requirement for the first condition to be satisfied is a requirement including at least that the operation of one of the first operation unit and the second operation unit is detected. It is characterized by (6) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is

Rendering means (for example, second rendering means (speaker 120), see FIGS. 95 to 97 (same below),

A gaming machine provided with a production control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) capable of controlling at least the production means,
The rendering means is a means capable of at least executing a plurality of renderings,

At least one of the plurality of effects is a first effect (for example, effect α),

The effect control unit is a unit that can determine an effect to be executed in a first period (for example, a selectable period (time t0 to t5) and a second period (for example, a period after the end of the first period)). And

The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends,

When the first effect is determined by the effect control means as the effect to be executed in the second period while the first effect is being performed by the effect control means, the effect control means It is also possible to provide a gaming machine characterized in that it is means that can be executed from the beginning in the second period after the first effect has been finished.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is

A production means capable of executing at least production (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or a speaker 120),

A gaming machine provided with an effect changing unit capable of changing the effect at least (for example, effect control processing (step S409) and sound control processing (step S415) by the first sub control unit 400),

The rendering means is capable of performing at least a first rendering (for example, rendering A), and the rendering means is capable of performing at least a second rendering (for example, rendering α). The means can execute at least the third effect (for example, effect B), and the effect means can execute at least the fourth effect (for example, effect β),

When the first condition is satisfied (for example, the operation by the operation unit), the effect changing unit performs first change control (for example, step S1107 of the selected effect control process shown in FIG. 85 is Yes and step S1111). Which is at least capable of executing the effect selected in

When the second condition is satisfied (for example, the operation by the operation unit), the effect changing unit performs the second change control (for example, step S1107 of the selected effect control process illustrated in FIG. 85 is Yes and step S1111). Which is at least capable of executing the effect selected in

The first change control is at least changeable from the first effect to the third effect,

The second change control is at least changeable from the second effect to the fourth effect,

The first change control is control executed after a lapse of a first time (for example, T seconds) after the establishment of the first condition,

The second change control is a control that is executed after a second time has elapsed (for example, T seconds) after the second condition is satisfied.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the first effect is changed to the third effect after the first time has elapsed, and the second effect is the fourth effect after the second time has elapsed. Since it is changed to the above production, various productions can be performed, which may improve the interest of the player.

More specifically, it is possible to give the player a feeling of strangeness by reflecting the result of the change after some time has passed, and to keep the player's attention until the changed effect is started. There are cases. If the changed result is immediately reflected in the effect, the effect becomes monotonous, but by performing the effect using the time lag as described above, it is possible to give variations to the effect, and the player Sometimes you can get tired of it.
(2) In the pachinko machine 100,

The time when the first condition is satisfied at least coincides with the time when the second condition is satisfied.

According to the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, since the timings when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied overlap each other, it may be possible to draw more attention to the effect. In addition, it may be possible to increase the variation of production. In addition, there may be a case in which variations can be given to the execution timing of the effects, even though the changing conditions of the effects are satisfied at substantially the same timing.
(3) In the pachinko machine 100,
The first time is different from the second time.

According to the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the first time and the second time are different, so it may be possible to draw more attention to the effect. In addition, it may be possible to increase the variation of production. Further, it may be possible to give variations to the performance execution timing.
(4) In the pachinko machine 100,

The production means is capable of at least executing a plurality of selection productions in which the player can select a production,

A first selection effect of the plurality of selection effects is at least capable of executing the first effect,
The first selection effect is capable of at least executing the third effect,

A second selection effect of the plurality of selection effects is at least capable of executing the second effect,

The second selection effect is capable of at least executing the fourth effect.

According to the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, since the production means can execute the selection production in which the production can be selected by the player, it gives a strange feeling to the player, and even if the player makes a selection, the production means is not immediately reflected, so it has been changed. In some cases, the production can be made more noticeable. In some cases, it may be possible to firmly inform the player what the selected effect is from the plurality of effects included in the selected effects.
(5) In the pachinko machine 100,
The production means is a plurality of production means,

The first effect means (for example, the decorative pattern display device 208) of the plurality of effect means is capable of at least executing the first effect,
The first effect means is capable of at least executing the third effect,

The second effect means (for example, the speaker 120) of the plurality of effect means can execute at least the second effect,

The second effect means is capable of at least executing the fourth effect.

According to the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the first effect means can execute the first effect and the second effect means can execute the second effect, respectively, which gives the player a feeling of strangeness and pays more attention to the changed effect. It may be possible to
(6) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is

A production means capable of executing at least production (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or a speaker 120),

Production change means capable of changing the production at least (for example, production control processing (step S409) and sound control processing (step S415) by the first sub-control unit 400);

A game table provided with an operation means (for example, a chance button 136) that can be operated by a player,

The production means is capable of at least executing a first production (for example, production A),

The production means is capable of at least executing a second production (for example, production B),

The effect changing means performs change control (for example, the effect selected in step S1111 when step S1107 of the selected effect control process shown in FIG. 85 is Yes) when the change condition is satisfied,

The change control is at least changeable from the first effect to the second effect,

The change condition is at least satisfied by a player operating the operation means during execution of the first effect,

It is characterized in that the effect changing means does not accept the operation of the operating means by the player for a predetermined period after the change condition is satisfied.

According to the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, since the effect selection is not accepted (invalidated) by the operating means for a predetermined period after the selected effect is started, the player cannot select the effect. As a result, the player must be allowed to view the selected effect for a certain period of time, and thus it may be possible to prevent an unintended change in the effect due to an erroneous operation.
(7) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is

A production means capable of executing at least production (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or a speaker 120),

Production change means capable of changing the production at least (for example, production control processing (step S409) or sound control processing (step S415) by the first sub-control unit 400);

A game table provided with an operation means (for example, a chance button 136) that can be operated by a player,

The rendering means is capable of at least executing a first rendering (for example, rendering α),

The rendering means is capable of at least executing a second rendering (for example, rendering δ),

The effect changing means is capable of at least executing change control (for example, the effect selected in step S1111 when step S1107 of the selected effect control process shown in FIG. 85 is Yes) when the change condition is satisfied. Yes,

The change control is at least changeable from the first effect to the second effect,

The change condition is satisfied at least when a player operates the operation means during execution of the first effect, and a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation was performed. Characterize.

According to the above pachinko machine 100, the first effect means is immediately reflected on the selected effect, and the second effect means is not reflected until T seconds have elapsed after selection. In other words, if the predetermined effect does not elapse after the selection, the selected effect is not started in the second effect means, so that it is possible to prevent the annoyance caused by starting the effect that is changed immediately. There is.
The present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment, and various modifications can be made.

For example, in the configuration described in the above embodiment, the configuration described as “at least... Possible” can be interpreted by replacing the relevant portion with “... only possible”. For example, the display means described as "at least the first effect can be stopped" can be interpreted by replacing it with the effect means "only the first effect can be stopped". The configuration described as "means for executing at least a part of the first effect" may be "only a part of the first effect may be executed," or It is also possible to interpret it by replacing it with "means for executing all the effects".

Further, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the configuration described as “...possible” is interpreted by replacing the relevant part with “may not be... You can also do it. For example, the configuration described as "means capable of performing at least the second effect" is replaced with "means that may not execute the second effect, or means that also includes a configuration that always executes". Can also be interpreted.

Further, for example, the first condition may be satisfied at a timing different from that of the second condition. As a specific example, for example, an operation effect of the chance button 136 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player operates the chance button 136 (establishment of the first condition). Then, one minute later, the speaker 120 instructs the player to press the chance button!, and the player operates the chance button 136 again (the second condition is satisfied). The chance button 136 need not be the same. It is also possible to combine the chance button 136 with other operating means (direction key, trigger, first chance button, second chance button). By doing so, it may be possible to increase the variation of the effect.

Further, for example, the first condition may be the same condition as the second condition. As a specific example, for example, one operation means performs a predetermined operation (predetermined number of times (one or more times) (long stroke), long press, slide, predetermined key operation (e.g. The condition (condition (1)) may be defined as a condition (conditionally pressed). Further, the condition (condition (2)) may be a case where the number of games (or the number of changes in special figure) that has been consumed from a certain point exceeds a predetermined number. In the case of a pachinko machine, for example, at the time of sudden change, at the start of time saving, at the start of a specific production mode (mode for sudden change or small hits, or mode in which only the production changes without changing the game state) , The start time of the change from the electric support to the non-electric support state. In the case of a slot machine, this corresponds to the start of ART, RT, or AT. In addition, it is common to both pachinko machine slot machines when power is turned on. Further, a condition (condition (3)) may be set when the number of game media (game balls, medals, etc.) acquired at the time of winning exceeds a predetermined number. By doing so, although the change can be made under the same condition, the reflected time of the changed effect is different, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

Further, for example, the first condition may be different from the second condition. As a specific example, the first condition may be when the first operating device is operated, and the second condition may be when the second operating device is operated. That is, the condition of the operation means may be different. Alternatively, the first condition is when the operating means is operated a first number of times (eg, once), and the second condition is when the operating means is operated a second number of times (eg, 5 times). Good. That is, the difference in operation may be used as a condition. Alternatively, a condition such as a long press, a slide, a predetermined key operation, or the like may be used as a condition. Furthermore, the first condition may be when the operating means is operated, and the second condition may be the above condition (2). The first condition may be when the operating means is operated, and the second condition may be the above condition (3). Further, the first condition and the second condition may have different patterns when the above condition (2) is present. Further, the pattern may be such that the predetermined number of the condition (3) is different between the first condition and the second condition. The first condition may be the above condition (2) and the second condition may be the above condition (3). In the above description, the first condition and the second condition can be applied in reverse. By doing so, since the start time of the effect differs depending on the condition, it may be possible to increase the variation of the effect.

Further, for example, the above first time and second time may be the same. By doing so, it may be possible to reduce a sense of discomfort caused by delaying the reflection of the selected effect.

Further, for example, one effect may be a selection effect and the other effect may be another change effect. The first rendering means (second rendering means) can execute the selection rendering, and the second rendering means (first rendering means) may not perform at least the selection rendering. As a specific example, the effect performed by the second effect means (first effect means) is an effect which is changed by the operation of the operation means under any of the above conditions (1), (2), or (3). It may be. By doing so, it may be possible to increase the variation of the effect.

Further, for example, the effect may be changed by a method other than the operation means. It is needless to say that the effect is not changed by the operation of the operation means, but the effect may be changed controllably when a certain condition is satisfied. For example, a predetermined effect or a randomly selected effect may be performed when the condition is satisfied. By doing so, it may be possible to increase the variation of the effect.

Also, for example, the operation means may be a single operation means. At least the first effect means and the second effect means may be selectable by one operation means. For example, the output of the music on the speaker 120 and the selection of the music title on the decorative pattern display device 208 may be selectable by one operation means. By doing so, it may be possible to focus attention on the reflection of the selection result.

Further, for example, the first operating means may correspond to the first effecting means, and the second operating means may correspond to the second effecting means. Therefore, a plurality of operating means are provided. The operation of the first operation means corresponds to the first effect means, and the operation of the second operation means corresponds to the second effect means. For example, the chance button 136 may correspond to the decorative symbol display device 208, and the direction key 139 may correspond to the effect display device 915. By doing so, it may be possible to focus attention on the reflection of the selection result.

Further, for example, a plurality of selection effects may be performed by the first effect device (or the second effect device). For example, as shown in the above embodiment, the first effect may be made to be executable by the first effect means. By doing so, it may be possible to give variations to the game method of the player and improve the interest of the game.

Further, for example, a plurality of selection effects may be performed by the first effecting device (or the second effecting device), a plurality of operating devices may be used, and the same operating device may be used by the same operating device. For example, the first selection effect of the first effect means corresponds to the first operation means, and the second selection effect of the second effect means corresponds to the second operation means. Moreover, the third selection effect of the first (second) effect means corresponds to the first (second) operation means. By doing so, it may be possible to give variations to the game method of the player and improve the interest of the game.

Further, for example, a plurality of selection effects may be performed by the first effecting device (or the second effecting device), and a plurality of operating devices may be used so that the same effecting device serves as different operating devices. .. For example, the first selection effect of the first effect means corresponds to the first operation means, and the second selection effect of the second effect means corresponds to the second operation means. Moreover, the third selection effect of the first (second) effect means corresponds to the second (first) operation means. During execution of the third selection effect, at least the fourth effect can be selected. By doing so, it may be possible to give variations to the game method of the player and improve the interest of the game.

Further, for example, the first time and the second time may be limited as follows. (A) After selecting the effect, the operation of the operation means is not accepted for the first effect means for the first time and for the second effect means for the second time. (B) Execution of the effect of the first effect means is delayed by the first time and execution of the effect of the second effect means is delayed by the second time after the effect is selected. (C) The execution of the first effect means (second effect means) is delayed for the first time (second time) after the effect is selected. The effect of the second effect means (first effect means) is delayed by a second time (first time) shorter than the first time (second time). Note that the shorter time may not be delayed (that is, reflected immediately). (D) Execution of the first effect means (second effect means) is not executed until the first time (second time) has elapsed since the effect was selected. With respect to the second effect means (first effect means), it is possible to apply a modification such as delaying the second time (first time) or not accepting an operation, or immediately reflecting without delay. is there.
By doing so, the following effects are achieved.

In the case of (a), it may be possible to prevent unintended selection of effects due to erroneous operation.

In the cases (b) and (c) above, when there is a delay by the time from the operation to the end of the fluctuation, it may be possible to prevent the other effects from being disturbed and to reflect the selection result without discomfort.

In the case of the specific time delay in the above (b) and (c), it is possible to give a sense of discomfort and make the player pay attention.

In the above (d), it may be possible to prevent the player from performing an undesired effect. It may be possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

Further, for example, the effect may be changed by operating the operation means. Even if it is possible to change the first effect to the third effect by providing an operation means that can be operated by the player and operating the operation means during execution of the first effect (establishment of the first condition). Good. Further, the second effect may be changed to the third effect by operating the operation means (establishing the second condition) during execution of the second effect. It should be noted that “by operating the operating means” is “accurately by detecting that the operating means is operated”. Even if operated by the player, the effect cannot be changed unless detected by the sensor.

Further, for example, the third rendering means and one operation means may be combined. The three effect means may correspond to one operation means. The third rendering means may be capable of executing the fourth selection rendering. Further, at least the fifth effect may be selectable during execution of the fourth effect. By doing so, even if a plurality of effects are selected by one operation means, there is a deviation in the effect reflected by the operation means, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness and allow the selection result to be focused on until the effect. is there.

Further, for example, the third rendering means and a plurality of operating means may be combined. The first rendering means and the second rendering means may correspond to the first operating means, and the third rendering means may correspond to the second operating means. By doing so, it may be possible to give variations to the game method of the player and improve the interest of the game.

The first condition is satisfied when a selection operation by the player is detected during the valid period, and the second condition is when the selection operation by the player is detected during the valid period. It may be the one that holds.

The first condition may be satisfied when the execution requirement is satisfied, and the second condition may be satisfied when the execution requirement is satisfied. Further, the execution requirement may be satisfied when a selection operation by the player is detected during the valid period. Further, the first condition is satisfied when any one of the plurality of first requirements is satisfied, and one of the plurality of first requirements is the execution It may be a requirement. Further, the second condition is satisfied when any of the plurality of second requirements is satisfied, and one of the plurality of second requirements is It may be the execution requirement.

Further, in the above embodiment, for example, when the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at time t1, for example, the effect A is ended and the effect B is started, for example, but the invention is not limited to this. The effect A may be gradually ended and the effect B may be gradually started over a predetermined time from the time point t1. In this case, when the effects A and B include images, the effect A image fades out and the effect B image fades in. When the performances A and B include music, voice, etc., the volume of the performance A gradually decreases and the volume of the performance B gradually increases.

Further, the second game state of the plurality of game states may be a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state of the plurality of game states.
Further, the second gaming state may be a big hit.

In addition, the first gaming state is one that wins a big hit with a first probability with a lottery (for example, a special figure low-probability normal figure low-probability state), and the second game state is a lottery by the lottery. It is the one that wins the jackpot with the second probability (for example, the special map high-probability general map high-probability state, the special map low-probability general map high-probability (electric support) state), and the first probability is the second It may be lower than the probability. The probability indicates the probability that a special map or a general map will be a big hit.

Further, the first gaming state may be a small hit, and the second gaming state may be a big hit.

Further, the first game state is a first big hit (for example, special figure B, special figure c of FIG. 73(a)), and the second game state is a second big hit (for example, FIG. 73( The special map A of a), the special map a, and the special map b) may be used.

Further, the first game state is a first big hit (for example, special figure C, special figure D, special figure b, special figure c of FIG. 73(a)), and the second game state is Two big hits (for example, special figure A, special figure B, and special figure a in FIG. 73(a)) may be used.

Further, the first gaming state is a first jackpot (for example, special figure C, special figure D of FIG. 73(a)), and the second gaming state is a second big jackpot (for example, FIG. 73( It may be special drawing A, special drawing B, special drawing a, special drawing b, special drawing c) of a).

Further, the selection effect may have different display modes (shape, image, character string, color, size, transparency, sound, etc.) depending on the game state.

Further, the selection effect may have different display modes in the first game state and the second game state.

Further, for example, the size of the selection effect in the second game state (area of the display region, image, etc.) is larger than the size of the selection effect in the first game state (area of the display region, image, etc., volume, etc.). , Volume, etc.) may be higher. The reverse is also possible. Further, the transparency of the selection effect (display mode) in the second game state may be higher than the transparency of the selection effect (display mode) in the first game state. The reverse is also possible. Further, the color of the selection effect in the first gaming state (for example, the color of the character string, the image, the background of the display area) may be different from the color of the selection effect in the second gaming state.

Further, the selection effect may not be displayed depending on the game state.

Further, the selection effect may not be executed in the first gaming state, but may be executed only in the second gaming state.

Further, the selection effect may be at least executed in the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

Further, the selection effect may be executed only in the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
Further, the selection effect may be executable in any game state.

It should be noted that during the sudden and sudden big hit performance, at least the selection performance may not be performed.
Note that at least the selection effect may not be performed during the big hit performance of the latent probability change.
Note that at least the selection effect may not be performed during the small hit effect.
The effects during the latent probability change and the small hit may be the same.
In addition, at least sudden selection may be performed at least by selective election.
It should be noted that at least the selection effect may be performed during the sudden change jackpot effect.
It should be noted that at least the selection effect may be performed during the big hit effect of the latent probability change.
It should be noted that at least the selection effect may be performed during the small hit effect.

It should be noted that what has been called a lamp so far is an example of a light emitting means, and the lamp can be replaced as long as it emits light such as an LED or a cold cathode tube.

In the above embodiment, the first period is a period in which the operation of the chance button 136 can be accepted. Here, the chance button lamp 138 is turned on in the first period, and the chance button lamp 138 is turned off when the chance button 136 is operated or after the first period ends (immediately after) or at the same time. Although the first period and the period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 may match, the first period may include the chance button acceptance period, and vice versa. The “when the chance button 136 is operated” may be “when the chance button 136 is pressed” or “when the chance button 136 is pressed and then released”. Here, “when the chance button 136 is pressed” means that a command is issued when the sensor for detecting the operation of the chance button 136 is changed from OFF (non-operation state (OFF)) to ON (operation state (ON)). It may indicate that it is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Further, “when the chance button 136 is pressed and then released” means that the command is the first sub-control when the sensor for detecting the operation of the chance button 136 is turned from ON (operation state) to OFF (non-operation state). It may be transmitted to the section 400. In the first period, the chance button lamp 138 may be turned off regardless of the operable state or the inoperable state, or conversely may be always turned on.

In the above embodiment, the direction key (setting operation unit) 139 is not provided with a lamp, but the direction key 139 may be provided with a lamp (hereinafter, referred to as “direction key lamp”). Here, when the direction key lamp is provided, the description regarding the chance button lamp 138 may be replaced with the direction key lamp. The directional key lamp may be configured to light up the entire directional key 139, but may be provided for each of the operable directional keys (buttons) 139b to 139e, for example, the up key 139b and the down key 139b. When the key 139c is operable, the lamp of the up key 139b and the lamp of the down key 139c may be turned on. Note that, in the first period, the directional key lamp is turned on even when being operated, but it may be turned off during the operation, or may be turned on again when it is in a non-operating state. May be.

Further, the above-described embodiments and the embodiments described below can be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses the game balls enclosed in the game machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses balls and circulates the enclosed balls in the pachinko machine for use.This enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed balls as a launch ball, The payout of the balls may be performed by an electronic display.

It is possible to combine the matters described in the detailed description above and thereafter, particularly the matters described in the embodiments and the modified examples.
The gaming table of the above embodiment is expressed as follows, for example.
(Supplementary Note a1) A rendering means,
A gaming machine provided with an operating means,

The production means is means for executing at least a part of the first production in the first period,
The production means is a means capable of at least executing the second production in the second period,
The first effect is an effect that is at least a part of the second effect,

The production means is a means capable of at least stopping the first production when the operation means is operated in the first period,
The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends,

The first period is a period that is at least ended when the operation unit is operated,

In the second period, the second effect is started from the beginning, the gaming table.
(Supplementary note a2) The gaming table according to supplementary note a1,

The game machine, wherein the first effect is one of the effects determined from a plurality of effects in the first period.
(Supplementary Note a3) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note a1 or a2,
A game machine characterized in that the effect means is a display means.
(Supplementary Note a4) The gaming table according to supplementary note a1 or a2,
The game machine, wherein the effect producing means is a sound outputting means.
(Supplementary note a5) The gaming table according to supplementary note a1 or a2,
Equipped with multiple rendering means,
At least one of the plurality of rendering means is a first rendering means,
The first rendering means is the rendering means,

At least one of the plurality of rendering means is a second rendering means.
(Supplementary Note a6) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note a5,

The second effect means is a means for executing at least a part of the third effect in the third period,

The second effect means is a means capable of at least executing the fourth effect in the fourth period,
The third effect is an effect that is at least a part of the fourth effect,

The second effect means is a means capable of at least stopping the third effect when the operation means is operated in the third period,
The fourth period is a period that starts after the third period ends,

The third period is at least a period when the operation means is operated,

In the fourth period, the fourth effect is started from the beginning, the gaming table.
(Supplementary Note a7) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note a6,
The third period is the first period,
The fourth period is the second period,
The third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect,

The game table, wherein the fourth effect is an effect corresponding to the second effect.
(Supplementary Note a8) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes a1 to a7,

A gaming table, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.
(Supplementary Note a9) A rendering means,
Production control means capable of controlling at least the production means,
A gaming machine provided with an operating means,
The rendering means is a means capable of at least executing a plurality of renderings,
At least one of the plurality of effects is a first effect,

The effect control means is a means capable of determining an effect to be executed in the second period in the first period,

The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends,

The effect control means is means for executing control for determining at least an effect to be executed in the second period when the first condition is satisfied,

The requirement that the first condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes at least the operation of the operation unit,

In the first case, the production means ends the first production, and in the second period, is a means capable of executing the production to be executed in the second period from the beginning,
The first case is a case of being in the period of the first period,

The first case is a case where the first effect is being executed by the effect control means,

The first case is a case where the first condition is satisfied, the gaming table.
(Supplementary note b1) A rendering means,
A gaming machine provided with an operating means,

The production means is means for executing at least a big hit production in the case of a big hit,
The jackpot is at least composed of a plurality of rounds,
At least one of the plurality of rounds is a first round,

The production means is means for executing at least a part of the first production in the first period,
The production means is a means capable of at least executing the second production in the second period,
The first effect is an effect that is at least a part of the second effect,

The first period is a part of the period in which the jackpot production is executed,

The effect means is a means capable of at least stopping the first effect when the first round ends in the first period,
The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends,

The first period is a period that is at least ended when the first round is ended,

In the second period, the second effect is started from the beginning, the gaming table.
(Supplementary Note b2) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note b1,

The game machine, wherein the first effect is one of the effects determined from a plurality of effects in the first period.
(Supplementary note b3) The gaming table according to supplementary note b1 or b2,
At least one of the plurality of rounds is a second round,
The second round is a round started after the first round,

The game machine characterized in that the second period is at least a period that is started when the second round is started.
(Supplementary Note b4) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes b1 to b3,
A game machine characterized in that the effect means is a display means.
(Supplementary Note b5) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes b1 to b3,
The game machine, wherein the effect producing means is a sound outputting means.
(Supplementary note b6) The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes b1 to b3,
Equipped with multiple rendering means,
At least one of the plurality of rendering means is a first rendering means,
The first rendering means is the rendering means,

At least one of the plurality of rendering means is a second rendering means.
(Supplementary Note b7) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note b6,

The second effect means is a means for executing at least a part of the third effect in the third period,

The second effect means is a means capable of at least executing the fourth effect in the fourth period,
The third effect is an effect that is at least a part of the fourth effect,
One of the plurality of rounds is a third round,
The fourth period is a period that starts after the third period ends,

The third period is a period that is at least ended when the third round is ended,

In the fourth period, the fourth effect is started from the beginning, the gaming table.
(Supplementary Note b8) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note b7,
The third period is the first period,
The fourth period is the second period,
The third round is the first round,
The third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect,

The game table, wherein the fourth effect is an effect corresponding to the second effect.
(Supplementary Note b9) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes b1 to b8,

A gaming table, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.
(Supplementary Note b10) A rendering means,
Production control means capable of controlling at least the production means,
A gaming machine provided with an operating means,
The rendering means is a means capable of at least executing a plurality of renderings,
At least one of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
The first effect is an effect that is executed at least during the period of a big hit,
The jackpot is at least composed of a plurality of rounds,
At least one of the plurality of rounds is a first round,

The effect control means is a means capable of determining an effect to be executed in the second period in the first period,

The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends,

The effect control means is means for determining at least an effect executed in the second period when the first condition is satisfied,

The requirement that the first condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes at least the end of the first round,

In the first case, the production means ends the first production, and in the second period, is a means capable of executing the production to be executed in the second period from the beginning,
The first case is a case of being in the period of the first period,

The first case is a case where the first effect is being executed by the effect control means,

The first case is a case where the first condition is satisfied, the gaming table.
(Supplementary note c1) A rendering means,
A gaming machine provided with an operating means,
The production means is means for executing only a part of the first production in the first period,
The production means is a means capable of at least executing the second production in the second period,

The effect means is a means capable of at least stopping the first effect when the first period ends,
The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends,

In the second period, the second effect is started from the beginning, the gaming table.
(Supplementary Note c2) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note c1,

The game machine, wherein the effect means is means for executing the first effect from the middle during the first period.
(Supplementary note c3) The gaming table according to supplementary note c1 or c2,

The game machine, wherein the effect means is means for executing the first effect halfway in the first period.
(Supplementary Note c4) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes c1 to c3,

The game machine, wherein the first effect is one of the effects determined from a plurality of effects in the first period.
(Supplementary Note c5) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes c1 to c4,
Equipped with multiple rendering means,
At least one of the plurality of rendering means is a first rendering means,
The first rendering means is the rendering means,

At least one of the plurality of rendering means is a second rendering means.
(Supplementary Note c6) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note c5,

The second effect means is a means for executing at least a part of the third effect in the third period,

The second effect means is a means capable of at least executing the fourth effect in the fourth period,

The second effect means is a means capable of at least stopping the third effect when the third period ends.
The fourth period is a period that starts after the third period ends,

In the fourth period, the fourth effect is started from the beginning, the gaming table.
(Supplementary Note c7) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note c6,

The game machine characterized in that the second effect means is means for executing the third effect from the middle during the third period.
(Supplementary Note c8) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note c6 or c7,

The game machine characterized in that the second effect means is means for executing the third effect halfway during the third period.
(Supplementary Note c9) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes c6 to c8,
The third period is the first period,
The fourth period is the second period,

The game machine characterized in that the third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect.
(Supplementary Note c10) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes c1 to c9,

A gaming table, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.
(Supplementary Note c11) A rendering means,
A game console comprising a production control means capable of controlling at least the production means,
The rendering means is a means capable of at least executing a plurality of renderings,
At least one of the plurality of effects is a first effect,

The effect control means is a means capable of determining an effect to be executed in the second period in the first period,

The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends,

The effect control means is means for determining at least an effect executed in the second period when the first condition is satisfied,

The production means is means for executing only a part of the first production when the first period is in effect,

In the first case, the production means ends the first production, and in the second period, is a means capable of executing the production to be executed in the second period from the beginning,
The first case is a case of being in the period of the first period,

The first case is a case where the first effect is being executed by the effect control means,

The first case is a case where the first condition is satisfied, the gaming table.

100 Pachinko machine 208 Decorative symbol display device 226 General winning opening 228 Universal drawing starting opening 230 Special drawing 1 starting opening 232 Special drawing 2 starting opening 234 Variable winning opening 300 Main control unit 400 First sub control unit 500 Second sub control unit 208X First symbol display area 208Y Second symbol display area 2081 First image display apparatus 2082 Second image display apparatus 2083 Third image display apparatus A Hold icon display area B Music selection display area C Lyrics display area

Claims (1)

A first operation means provided at a position operable by a player,
Display means,
Sound output means,
Second operation means provided at a position where the player can operate,
A gaming machine equipped with
The display means can display a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first display is an animation display related to the first operation means,
The second display is one of the displays simulating the appearance of the first operation means,
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started,
The sound output means is a means capable of outputting a performance sound according to a set volume,
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the multiple types of effects is the first effect,
The first effect is one of the notice effects,
The first effect is an effect including a first effect sound,
In the state where the first display is displayed, the operation of the first operation means is not accepted,
In the state where the second display is displayed, the operation of the first operation means is accepted,
When the first operation means is operated in the state where the first display is displayed, there is no case where the first effect is executed,
When the first operation means is operated in the state where the second display is displayed, it is possible to execute the first effect according to the operation,
When the second operation means is operated while the first display is displayed, the volume can be changed according to the operation,
When the second operation means is operated in the state where the second display is displayed, it is possible to change the volume according to the operation,
When the second operation means is operated in the state where the second display is displayed, it is possible to execute the first effect according to the operation,
It is configured to be able to set the auto button mode,
When the first operation means is operated in a state where the first display is displayed, it is turned off when the auto button mode is on,
When the first operation means is operated in a state where the second display is displayed, it is turned off when the auto button mode is on,
When the second operation means is operated in the state where the first display is displayed, it does not turn off even when the auto button mode is on,
When the second operation means is operated in the state where the second display is displayed, it does not turn off even when the auto button mode is on,
A game table characterized by that.